Building Automation Controls Catalog 2006

Building Automation Controls Catalog 2006
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Model Number Index
Pages A2-A6
TEMPERATURE
HVAC CONTROLS
Pages 1-74
Pages 415-468
Thermistors, RTDs, Transmitters, Infrared, Accessories
Thermostats, Electronic Controls, Pneumatic Controls,
Set Point Controllers
HUMIDITY
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
Pages 75-108
Pages 469-510
RH, Dew Point, Wet Bulb, Enthalpy, Room, Duct, OSA,
Calibrators
Dampers, Direct Coupled Actuators, Foot-Mount Motors,
Pneumatic Damper Actuators
POWER MONITORING
CONTROL VALVES
Pages 109-142
Pages 511-576
Current & Potential Transformers, Current Switches,
Current, Voltage, Phase Loss, Power Factor, Frequency
Transducers, Power Monitors
Ball, Butterfly, Solenoid, Globe, Zone, Rotary
PRESSURE
ENCLOSURES
Pages 577-598
Pages 143-200
PSI
Transmitters, Display Transmitters, Switches, Gauges,
Room Pressure Monitor, Bypass Valve Assembly,
Snubbers
General Purpose, NEMA 1, 3R, 12, 4, & 4X, Perforated
& Solid Panels
FLOW
POWER SUPPLIES
Pages 201-232
Pages 599-618
Transmitters, Sensors, Switches, BTU Meters
Control Transformers, Linear, Switching, DIN Rail,
DC Power Supplies
SPECIALTY SENSORS
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
Pages 233-292
Pages 619-656
Carbon Dioxide, Carbon Monoxide, Conductivity, pH,
Refrigerant, Toxic & Combustible Gas, IAQ, Damper
Position, Weather Instruments
Plug-In, Power, Multi-Voltage, Time Delay, Alternating &
Contactors
TEST EQUIPMENT/INDICATION
PANEL & INSTALLATION
Pages 293-308
Pages 657-696
Digital Displays, Alarm Stations, Signal Generators,
Temperature Meters, Humidity Meters, Carbon Dioxide
Meters, Multimeters, Data Loggers, Calibration Devices
Fuses, Switches, Terminal Blocks, Pilot Lights, Strobes,
Horns, Pneumatic Fittings, Tubing, Wire, Wire Duct, Wire
Ties, Bridle Rings, J-Hooks, Beam Clamps
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
Pages 309-358
Pages 697-728
Isolation, Multiplexers, Pneumatic, Resistance,
Sequencers, Voltage & Current Conversion, Set Point
Controllers, Square Root Extractors
Wireless Sensors, Transmitters, Receivers, Repeaters &
Gateways, LON Sensors, Actuators & Controls, N2
Sensors
LIGHTING CONTROLS
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
Pages 359-390
Pages 729-772
Lighting Control Panels, Occupancy Sensors, Light
Level Transmitters & Switches, Contactors, Relays
Controls, Explosionproof Enclosures, Intrinsic Safety
Barriers, Intrinsically Safe & Explosionproof Sensors,
Transmitters, Switches, Strobes
MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS
TECHNICAL REFERENCE
Pages 391-414
Pages 773-802
Firestats, Freezestats, Smoke Detectors, Surge Protectors,
Thermostat Guards, Time Clocks, Time Switches
Product Selection Guides, Conversion Tables, Technical
Articles, Quick Tips, Calculations, Rating System
70°
MODEL / SERIES NUMBER INDEX
Model / Series No.
Page
1
105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .765
189 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
100 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663
104ST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674
106EXP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .765
116EXMST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .765
13F142 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
140T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .749, 750
140T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279, 280
14121-000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
1500 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
1550 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . .215, 216
160 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
1900-5-MR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
190XSUM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
1910 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
1950G SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .738
2
21F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .681
22/07-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
23F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .681
24-013 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189, 190
24-014 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189, 190
25 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
200 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
200-IS SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .754
201A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129, 131
209 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .175, 176
209PF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
220B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
220SS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
225B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
226B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
226SS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
228B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
228C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
228PV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
228SS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
250B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
251 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .666
258 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
260 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .153, 154
269 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
2000 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . .195, 196
21121 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
2200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459, 460
2200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223, 224
2200 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
20307 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630
3
3PT3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
3W15US.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525, 526
Model / Series No.
Page
30-3003D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .761, 762
33 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606
35A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
310 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
340 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .217, 218
355 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
356 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461, 462
357 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461, 462
360-3VLV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
392-SVSR2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
3000 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
3100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223, 224
4
4BRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .684
4CMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123, 124
4CTV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121, 122
4GS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249, 250
41F SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .681
460 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
468 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
47B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
47S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
438USA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651, 652
438USA-INT . . . . . . . . . . . . .651, 652
475-FM Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
490 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
4000 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
5
500T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
501T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
550 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277, 278
550-X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .747, 748
5530M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .765
51012218 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
6
6H38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .660
6M30 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665
6W30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661
600T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
601T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
603 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
603D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
691 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599
691-U100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
694 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
626600A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227, 228
7
70-781D-1
70-782D-1
70-783D-1
70-784D-1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
A2
Model / Series No.
Page
747B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
747S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
781 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627, 628
782 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627, 628
783 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627, 628
784 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .627, 628
7001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
711271 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239, 240
8
89STR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674
860D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
868 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674
868STR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674
869 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674
869STR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674
878EX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .765
879EX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .765
880D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
885D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
8001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247, 248
8002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247, 248
8003 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . .247, 248
8205 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273, 274
8210 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . .529, 530
821TD10H . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655, 656
8238 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . .531, 532
8225 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275, 276
9
9002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105, 106
93000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
93000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
A
A SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .680
A11 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
A15 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .525, 526
A19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447, 448
A19AUC-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .757
A21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
A-300 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
A319 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447, 448
A350 . . . . . . . . . . .449, 450, 451, 452
A419 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . .447, 448
A70 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
A70 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .281, 282
ABB SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669
ABW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683
AC1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .768
AC1A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .768
ACI SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33, 34
ACI/RH SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . .93, 94
ACK6F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .768
AF SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499, 500
MODEL / SERIES NUMBER INDEX
Model / Series No.
Page
AFS-222 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183, 184
AFS-262 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183, 184
AFS-460 . . . . . . . . . . . .183, 184, 185
AIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
AL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
ALD-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497, 498
AM-401 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .760
AMP SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
AOW SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683
APB-28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
APW SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679
AQS00660 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
AQS00661 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
ASG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
ASW SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .682
AT-1100 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
AT140A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
AT150A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
AT150F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
AT175F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
AT87A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
AVS-200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
B
B SERIES FITTINGS . . . . . .689, 690
B120E-P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371, 372
B2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539, 540
B230E-P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371, 372
B277E-P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371, 372
B3 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539, 540
B347D-P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371, 372
BA PROBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37, 38
BA ROOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35, 36
BA/HSERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95, 96
BAM-1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
BKA/1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .662
BKT-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
BKT-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
BLV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
BVA-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
C
C SERIES FITTINGS . .691, 692, 693
C500 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .675
C7232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243, 244
CAT SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .684
CBL SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670
CD-420 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
CD50 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
CD-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241, 242
CI-200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367, 368
CI-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
CLC-100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
CN SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .647, 648
Model / Series No.
Page
CONCEPT SERIES . . . . . . .592, 593
CS1150A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115, 116
CS1A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115, 116
CTW3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
CW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377, 378
CX-100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367, 368
CXJ SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .766
D
D-3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
D-4000 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
DCP-1.5-W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
DCP-250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
DCP-524 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
DCPA-1.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
DDN SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
DH100 SERIES . . . . . . . . . .395, 396
DIGI-42 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
DIN-3F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
DN SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
DP3A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103, 104
DPA SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . .143, 144
DPW-3VLV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
DPW-692 SERIES . . . . . . . .165, 166
DRS SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
DS-2B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283, 284
DT13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339, 340
DTFXL Series . . . . . . . . . . .221, 222
DTK SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
DURADRIVE SERIES . . . . .557, 558
E
E100E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
E150E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
E300E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
E500E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
EASYCAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
EHRH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
EJB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .763, 764
E-LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
ELP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .751, 752
EM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
EN3A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103, 104
EP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
EPETD8S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .758
ES-1051 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
ET SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
EVSI SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . .533, 534
EYM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .767
F
F01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .768
F01A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .768
F-1000 SERIES . . . . . .690, 694, 695
F2B-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
A3
Model / Series No.
Page
F2N-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
F2S-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
F61 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .231, 232
F7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
FAS-TEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
FC/FCS SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
FILN05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
FLM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .666
FLQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .666
FS1-6 229, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
G
G2R SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . .623, 624
G7L SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643
GBB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489, 490
GCA SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . .491, 492
GDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489, 490
GEB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489, 490
GF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .666
GIB SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .489, 490
GLB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489, 490
GM SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .497, 498
GMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491, 492
GMD20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245, 246
GMT SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . .253, 254
GMT XP SERIES . . . . . . . . . .745, 746
GMT200 SERIES . . . . . . . . .245, 246
GMW21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245, 246
GRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .767
GUBB SERIES . . . . . . . . . . .763, 764
H
H_10K SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
H_1K SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
H_30K SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
H_31K SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . .83, 84
H08 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
H3B SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .737
HC SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
HC-101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
HC-201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
HCT-859-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
HCT-881 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .733
HD1K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
HD20K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87, 88
HD30K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
HF20K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85, 86
HGM300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261, 262
HGM-SZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
HHT2-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
HHT2-O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
HHT2-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
HL600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .742
HM_ 60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
HM_ 70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
MODEL / SERIES NUMBER INDEX
Model / Series No.
Page
HM34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
HMW 60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
HMW 70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
HO20K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87, 88
HRK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .666
HSP-121BT1RU . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
HT2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
HT2O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
HT2S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
HT829 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101, 102
HT839 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101, 102
HT880 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .735, 736
HTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .733
HW10K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
HW20K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85, 86
HW-76B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670
HZLIM SERIES . . . . . . . . . .755, 756
I
ISPL-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
ISPR2 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . .743, 744
IXLdp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .739, 740
J
JMP SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
K
K1 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .741
K235 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .666
K-332 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
K-337 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
K-339 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
K-383 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
K-384 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
K-387 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
KA-175 SERIES . . . . . . . . . .475, 476
KA-35 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . .473, 474
KAS-175 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
KAS-44 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
KAS-88 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
KBV SERIES 571, 572, 573, 574, 575,
576
KCO SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . .233, 234
KE375 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645, 646
KE900 SERIES . . . . . . . . . .645, 646
KEL71/120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
KEL72/120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
KHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77, 78
KHO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77, 78
KHR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77, 78
KIP SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
KLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .666
KMS SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
KT-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Model / Series No.
Page
KT600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423, 424
KTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29, 30
KTEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425, 426
KTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29, 30
KTR* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27, 28
KTW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29, 30
KV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
KVA-24-NO/NC . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
KVC SERIES . . . . . . . .513, 517, 518
KVS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
KZ SERIES . . . . . . . . .511, 512, †514
L
L4000 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678
L4-CN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .753
LD1-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
LF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499, 500
L-KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
LM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497, 498
LP-2800 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
LP-3500 SERIES . . . . . . . . . .359, 360
LPI-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
LPI-1C-A, -G, -R . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
LPI-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
LPI-3C-A, -G, -R . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
LPI-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
LPI-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
LPI-5R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
LP-KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
LP-PK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
LS45M91B11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
LU SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285, 286
LVM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133, 134
LY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623, 624
M
M SERIES FITINGS . . . . . . .694, 695
M10/16SFL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658
M100 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . .503, 504
M230 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . .167, 168
M230-3VLV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
M-2500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
M264 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145, 146
M267MR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157, 158
M30/40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149, 150
M4/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657
M4/6SNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658
M4/8SF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658
M4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501, 502
M6/8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657
M6000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501, 502
M7000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501, 502
M8000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501, 502
M9000 SERIES . . . . . . . . . .501, 502
M9000-200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
A4
Model / Series No.
Page
M9100 SERIES . . . . . . . . . .479, 480
M9200 SERIES . . . . . . . . . .481, 482
MA6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .760
MK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623, 624
MK-3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
MK-7100 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . .506
MK7-B SERIES . . . . . . . . . .373, 374
ML SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
ML SERIES DCA . . . . . . . . .483, 484
MOB-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409, 410
MOB-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409, 410
MP6 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .760
MP8000 SERIES . . . . . . . . .563, 564
MPA-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
MPM SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
MR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159, 160
MR SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .641, 642
MR-604/T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409, 410
MR-608/T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409, 410
MRH SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91, 92
MS SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
MTL5000 SERIES 769, 770, 771, 772
MTL7000 . . . . . . .769, 770, 771, 772
MX40-6 SERIES . . . . . . . . . .493, 494
MX40-7 SERIES . . . . . . . . . .495, 496
MX8001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
N
N SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
NEMA 1 LARGE . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
NEMA 1 MEDIUM . . . . . . . . . . . .585
NEMA 1 SMALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
NEMA 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
NEMA 3R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
NEMA 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
NEMA 4X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
NF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499, 500
NG2DW1500B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
NM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497, 498
NVF SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . .547, 548
NVS ERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .549, 550
O
OS-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251, 252
OSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61, 62
OSA* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
P
P SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
P10 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
P2RF SERIES . . . . . . . . . . .625, 626
P32 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
P352 . . . . . . . . . . .449, 450, 451, 452
P51 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .173, 174
P74 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
MODEL / SERIES NUMBER INDEX
Model / Series No.
Page
PAM-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
PAM-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
PC642C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
PCM SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . .163, 164
PDK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
PERF PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
PF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625, 626
PG SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
PIL-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387, 388
PIL-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632
PLG50 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .767
PN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377, 378
PN-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
PN-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
PN-46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
PQ-1001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271, 272
PRK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
PS SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
PS5R SERIES . . . . . . . . . . .615, 616
PSM SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618
PSR-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375, 376
PSR-1-T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375, 376
PSS2 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . .177, 178
PT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
PT-9000 SERIES .137, 138, 139, 140
PTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625, 626
PT-NT4-M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
PT-NT4-N2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
PT-NTL-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
PTX1 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . .179, 180
PV600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
PVI-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171, 172
PVI-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171, 172
PVM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133, 134
PW2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
PWA SERIES . . . .331, 332, 333, 334
PXZ4 . . . . . . . . . . .343, 344, 455, 456
Q
Q674 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427, 428
QZ SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .672
R
R353 SERIES . . . .449, 450, 451, 452
R-3710 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .690
R-3710 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .690
RAD-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
RCB-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385, 386
RCD40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
RDI-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .707, 708
RDM800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
RDO-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .711, 712
RES-1 . . . . . . . . . .327, 328, 329, 330
RET SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Model / Series No.
Page
RFS-4001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
RH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619, 620
RH2LB SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
RH-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181, 182
RH-3-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181, 182
RI-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .709, 710
RI-4-K4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .717, 718
RIB . . . . . . . . . . . .633, 634, 635, 636
RIB M SERIES . . . . . . . . . . .637, 638
RIB TR SERIES . . . . . . . . . .607, 608
RIB01BDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
RIB01SBDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
RIB02BDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
RIB02SBDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
RIB21CDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
RIBT PILOT SERIES . . . . . .633, 634
RIBT POWER SERIES . . . . .635, 636
RIBX SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . .117, 118
RIBXG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
RIBXK SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
RIBX-V SERIES . . . . . . . . . .119, 120
RJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
RL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
RLD-134A . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267, 268
RLD-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265, 266
RO-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .713, 714
RPM-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161, 162
RPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
RPT-K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .721, 722
RR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .715, 716
RR SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .619, 620
RR-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383, 384
RR-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383, 384
RSSDN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649, 650
RST-K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .719, 720
RTC-2P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441, 442
RTE SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . .653, 654
RT-R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .701, 702
RT-R-K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .717, 718
RT-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .705, 706
RT-U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .703, 704
RT-U-K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .717
RUT-G . . . . . . . . . .723, 724, 725, 726
S
S SERIES ACTUATORS . . .487, 488
S SERIES FITTINGS . . . . . . . . . .696
S101144 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
S-120/277/347E-P . . . . . . . .371, 372
S15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525, 526
S241HC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
S469 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
S60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525, 526
SAK4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659
SAK6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659
A5
Model / Series No.
Page
SC SERIES ENCLOSURES . . . . .583
SC SERIES HORNS . . . . . . . . . . .672
SCS1.5A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115, 116
SCS1150A . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115, 116
SCT SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
SD-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
SD-1300 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
SD-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
SDI SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
SENTRY 100 SERIES . . . . . . . . .125
SENTRY 200 SERIES . . . . . . . . .126
SENTRY 200-A SERIES . . . . . . .127
SH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621, 622
SH17 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
SLS SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
SM-501 SERIES . . . . . . . . . .391, 392
SR SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .621, 622
SS SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379, 380
SSPL-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
SSS-1000 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . .205
ST120 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676
ST20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
ST-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
ST-A* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
ST-AV81H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
ST-AV81R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41, 42
ST-AV85H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
ST-AV85R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41, 42
ST-AV91H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
ST-AV91R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41, 42
STB, STB-H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .675
ST-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
ST-D* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
ST-FZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17, 18
ST-O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21, 22
ST-R* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
ST-R*S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
ST-R*SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
ST-R9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
ST-R9R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
ST-R9S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
ST-R9SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
ST-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
ST-S* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
ST-S*E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3, 4
ST-S*EW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2, 3, 4
ST-S*K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5, 6
ST-S*P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7, 8
ST-S9E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
ST-T90EW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51, 52
ST-T90K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51, 52
ST-T91E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53, 54
ST-T91K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53, 54
ST-U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
ST-W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19, 20
MODEL / SERIES NUMBER INDEX
Model / Series No.
Page
ST-X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .730
T
T1 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
T-100 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . .687, 688
T-1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
T-141 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687, 688
T155 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437, 438
T158 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
T167 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437, 438
T168 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
T168 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
T170 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435, 436
T25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433, 434
T26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433, 434
T30/40 SERIES . . . . . . . . . .149, 150
T4000 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . .457, 458
T46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433, 434
T5U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
T6051B1006 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .758
T63U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
T6570 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
T6575 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
T6984 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443, 444
T7300F2010 . . . . . . . . . . . . .419, 420
T7984 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445, 446
T81U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
T8570 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
T8575 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
T85U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
T874 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427, 428
T90U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51, 52
T91H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55, 56
T91L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55, 56
T91U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55, 56
TB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377, 378
TB8220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421, 422
TC-100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
TC-105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
TC-1100 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
TCC-111 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
TCC-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
TDRSOXP . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655, 656
TDRSRXP . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655, 656
TE-6300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
TE-63xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
TF142 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399, 400
TG500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
TH8000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421, 422
THERA SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
TK-1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459, 460
TK-5000 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
TL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377, 378
TM99A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
TP1-M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235, 236
Model / Series No.
Page
T-PB SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
TR SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389, 390
TR10K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
TRANSZORB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
TS SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664
TS-200 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
TS-200 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
TS-470 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
TSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399, 400
TT111H-0800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
TT211 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .731, 732
TT-801 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63, 64
TT-807 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63, 64
TT-809 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65, 66
TT859 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
TT881 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .733, 734
TWS SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .673
TY7321A1009 . . . . . . . . . . . . .71, 72
U
U3889 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
UAT-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335, 336
UAT-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335, 336
UCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
UCM-420A . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453, 454
UCM-420A . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345, 346
UCO-44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319, 320
UCO-44T OPTION . . . . . . . .319, 320
UCP-242 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311, 312
UCP-322 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313, 314
UCP-422 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315, 316
UCP-522 . . . . . . . .321, 322, 323, 324
UCP-622 . . . . . . . .321, 322, 323, 324
UCS-121 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347, 348
UCS-221 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349, 350
UCS-421 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351, 352
UCS-621 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353, 354
UFT-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219, 220
UMM-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341, 342
UMM-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341, 342
UMX-4 . . . . . . . . . .355, 356, 357, 358
UMX-8 . . . . . . . . . .355, 356, 357, 358
US* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
US9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Model / Series No.
Page
VA-7000 SERIES . . . . . . . . .561, 562
VASQN8X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
VB SERIES .551, 552, 553, 554, 555,
556
VB2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535, 536
VB3 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . .535, 536
V-BAR 700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
VD-1300 SERIES . . . . . . . . .507, 508
VERSA-CAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
VG1000 SERIES . . . . . . . . .537, 538
VG7000 SERIES . . . . . . . . .559, 560
VGF SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .543, 544
VM SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .521, 522
VPI SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
VT SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519, 520
VTI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337, 338
W
W30 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . .169, 170
W30-3VLV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
W351 . . . . . . . . . .449, 450, 451, 452
W92S SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644
W9AS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644
WB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
WB3A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
WB3A SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
WCO-1B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237, 238
WD-1B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
WD-2-T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
WEL-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
WEL-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
WMB-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
WMB-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
WPS SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677
WS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
WS SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .369, 370
X
XLdp SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . .147, 148
Y
Y63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
Y65 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
Y66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
V
Z
V SERIES 565, 566, 567, 568, 569, 570
V11 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .465, 466
V200, V300 . . . . . .513, 514, 515, 516
V-3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563, 564
V5011 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541, 542
V5013 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . .541, 542
V5860 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . .523, 524
VA301C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259, 260
VA301EM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257, 258
ZGR01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
ZPS SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . .155, 156
ZS-260 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .759
A6
TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
MODEL/SERIES
PAGE
Sensor Selection Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
PRODUCTS
Check out the NEW
ACI Series BAS/HVAC
10
22
,00
0
52
Temperature Sensor on
page 33!
tive
Execu
Space
unt
ce-Mo
Surfa
Space
teel
less S
Stain
Flush
E
ST-S3
S85E
1E
ST-S2
1E
ST-S9
P
ST-S3
S85P
1
ST-S2
1
ST-S9
ST-S3
1
ST-S9
ST-S2
ST-
SERVICES
See our helpful Sensor
Resistance Chart on
page 1!
THERMISTORS AND RTD SENSORS
ACI Series — Room, Duct, OSA, Immersion Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
AS — Platinum RTD Temerparture Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
BAPI Series — Room, Duct, OSA, Immersion Sensors and Transmitters . . . . . . . . . .35, 37
KTR* — Low Cost Decorator Room Thermistor and RTD Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
KTD*, KTO*, KTW* — Low Cost Duct, Immersion, OSA Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
S101144, S469 — Thermal Ribbon RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
S241HC — High Temperature Smoke Stack and Boiler RTD Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
ST-A* — All-Purpose Thermistor and RTD Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
ST-AV*H — Flexible RTD Duct Averaging Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39, 40
ST-AV*R — Rigid RTD Duct Averaging Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
ST-D* — Duct Thermistor and RTD Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15, 44
ST-FZ* — Averaging Thermistor Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
ST-O* — Outdoor Air Thermistor and RTD Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21,44
ST-R*/ST-R*R — Encapsulated Thermistor and RTD Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
ST-R*S/ST-R*SC — Encapsulated Thermistor and RTD Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
ST-S* — Stainless Steel Flush Mount Thermistor and RTD Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
ST-S*E — Executive Decorator Zone Thermistor and RTD Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2,43
ST-S*K — New Elegant Decorator Zone Thermistor and RTD Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
ST-S*P — Room Thermistor and RTD Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
ST-U* — Universal Mount Thermistor and RTD Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11, 44
ST-W* — Immersion Thermistor and RTD Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19, 44
TE-6300 — Nickel Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
US* — Universal Mount Thermistor and RTD Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
RTD TRANSMITTERS
OSA* — Outside Air Thermistor and RTD Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
ST-T90E — Fixed Range Room Temperature Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
ST-T91E — Room Sensor/Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
T5U, T63U, T85U — 10001 Rangeable Transmitters Balco, Nickel, Platinum . . . . . . . . . .58
T81U — Rangeable Transmitter for 1001 385 Curve RTDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
T90U — Fixed Range Duct, Immmersion, OSA Temperature Transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
T91 — Rangeable Transmitter for 10001 375 Curve RTDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
TT111 — High Temperature RTD Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
TT-801/TT-807 — Transmitters for Platinum RTDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
TT-809 — Transmitter for 10001 RTDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
TT859 — Space Temperature Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
INFRARED TRANSMITTERS
TY-7321A1009 — Infrared Radiant Room Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47-50
Sensor Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45-47
Wells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73, 74
SOLUTIONS
We offer the variety of
temperature products you
need to meet most temperature sensing applications.
Indicates New Products
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR SELECTION CHART
PLATINUM RTDs
THERMISTORS
in
um
in
um
00
Ω
Pl
at
Pl
at
00
Ω
Pl
at
0Ω
37
38
5
38
e
Ty
p
,0
0
0Ω
0Ω
0,
00
in
um
IV
II
e
Ty
p
e
Ty
p
0Ω
ST-S24K
ST-S27K
ST-S42K
ST-S81K
ST-S85K
ST-S91K
Executive
space
ST-S3E
ST-S21E
ST-S22E
ST-S24E
ST-S27E
ST-S42E
ST-S81E
ST-S85E
ST-S91E
Surface-mount
space
ST-S3P
ST-S21P
ST-S22P
ST-S24P
ST-S27P
ST-S42P
ST-S81P
ST-S85P
ST-S91P
Stainless steel
flush
ST-S3
ST-S21
ST-S22
ST-S24
ST-S27
ST-S42
ST-S81
ST-S85
ST-S91
Universal mount
and accessories
ST-U3
ST-U21
ST-U22
ST-U24
ST-U27
ST-U42
ST-U81
ST-U85
ST-U91
All-purpose
mount
ST-A3
ST-A21
ST-A22
ST-A24
ST-A27
ST-A42
ST-A81
ST-A85
ST-A91
ST-D3
ST-D21
ST-D22
ST-D24
ST-D27
ST-D42
ST-D81
ST-D85
ST-D91
Averaging flex
averaging rigid
ST-FZ3
ST-FZ21
ST-FZ22
ST-FZ24
ST-FZ27
ST-FZ42
ST-AV81H
ST-AV81R
ST-AV85H
ST-AV85R
ST-AV91H
ST-AV91R
Immersion
(with well)
ST-W3
ST-W21
ST-W22
ST-W24
ST-W27
ST-W42
ST-W81
ST-W85
ST-W91
ST-O3
ST-O21
ST-O22
ST-O24
ST-O27
ST-O42
ST-O81
ST-O85
ST-O91
Stainless
sheath
ST-R3S
ST-R21S
ST-R22S
ST-R24S
ST-R27S
ST-R42S
ST-R81S
ST-R85S
ST-R91S
Encapsulated
sensor
ST-R3
ST-R21
ST-R22
ST-R24
ST-R27
ST-R42
ST-R81
ST-R85
ST-R91
Low-cost
room sensor
KT-R3R
KT-R21R
KT-R22R
KT-R24R
KT-R27R
KT-R42R
KT-R81R
KT-R85R
KT-R91R
Low-cost
universal mount
US-3
US-21
US-22
US-24
US-27
US-42
US-81
US-85
US-91
Low-cost plastic
outside air
OSA-3
OSA-21
OSA-22
OSA-24
OSA-27
OSA-42
OSA-81
OSA-85
OSA-91
Low-cost
metal duct
KTD3
KTD21
KTD22
KTD24
KTD27
KTD42
KTD81
KTD85
KTD91
Low-cost
metal immersion
KTW3
KTW21
KTW22
KTW24
KTW27
KTW42
KTW81
KTW85
KTW91
Low-cost
metal OSA
KTO3
KTO21
KTO22
KTO24
KTO27
KTO42
KTO81
KTO85
KTO91
10
10
10
ST-S22K
10
ST-S21K
20
ST-S3K
10
Decorative
space
30
22
,0
0
00
Ω
52
Ω
Ty
p
Ty
p
e
e
II
II
II
III
e
Ty
p
0Ω
10
,0
0
5
5
INSTALLATION
APPLICATION
TEMPERATURE
Duct mount
Outside air
SENSOR TYPE TEMPERATURE SENSOR DESCRIPTION
3
10,000Ω thermistor @ 77˚F, Type III material
21
22
24
27
42
81
85
91
5
2252Ω thermistor @77˚F, Type II material
3000Ω thermistor @77˚F, Type II material
10,000Ω thermistor @77˚F, Type II material
100,000Ω thermistor @77˚F, Type II material
20,000Ω thermistor @77˚F, Type IV material
100Ω platinum RTD @ 32˚F, 385 curve
1000Ω platinum RTD @ 32˚F, 385 curve
1000Ω platinum RTD @ 32˚F, 375 curve
1000Ω Balco RTD @ 70˚F
TYPICAL SENSOR USER
AET, American Automatrix, Andover, Carrier, Delta, Invensys,
(Siebe), Teletrol, York
Anderson Cornelius, JCI (A319)
Alerton, ASI, ATS, Snyder General
Alerton, Automated Logic, T.A.C. (CSI), Triangle Microsystems, Trane
Siemens (Landis and Staefa)
Honeywell (XL)
Transmitter available for any user
JCI, Siemens, Trane (transmitter available for any user)
JCI, Siemens (transmitter available for any user)
Invensys (Siebe) (transmitter available for any user)
1
TEMPERATURE
EXECUTIVE ROOM THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ST-S*E, ST-S*EW SERIES
TM
DESCRIPTION
A Division of Kele, Inc.
The Precon ST-S*E and ST-S*EW Series Executive
Room Sensors provide precision room temperature
sensing for building automation systems. The active
sensing element is made of a highly stable, precision
thermistor material or platinum RTD.
FEATURES
TEMPERATURE
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Lifetime warranty
±0.36°F (±0.2°C) thermistor accuracy
±1°F (±0.53°C) RTD accuracy
Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves
Vented housing for quick temperature response
Adaptable with many options
Traditional beige or white covers
Durable plastic housing and base plate
Easy to mount to wall or back box
ST-S*E-XA-XME-XPL-XTD
APPLICATION
OPTIONS
The executive enclosure is designed to be wall-mounted indoors where appearance is important. The separate base plate may be mounted directly to the drywall
or on a standard electrical outlet box without adapters.
The cover is secured with tamper-resistant hex screws.
Where moisture is a concern, the moistureproof XB
option is required.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
ST-S*EW
Custom logos
Setpoint adjustment (4001, 3 k1, 20 k1)
Moistureproof with 8' (2.44m) lead
Gray decorator faceplate
External communication jack
Internal RJ11 communication jack
Membrane momentary switch
Analog temperature display (ST-S3E)
Digital temperature display (ST-S3E)
NIST traceable
LED status lamp
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensing element
Accuracy
Thermistor
RTD
Sensor types available
Thermistor
RTD
Temp range
Temp response
Thermistor
RTD
Sensitivity
2
Thermistor (thermal resistor)
RTD (resistance temperature device)
±0.36°F (0.2°C)
±1°F (0.53°C)
2.252 k, 3 k, 10 k, 20 k, 100 k1
Platinum 1001, 385 curve
Platinum 10001, 385 curve
Platinum 10001, 375 curve
35° to 140°F (2° to 60°C)
Negative temperature coefficient
Positive temperature coefficient
See Sensor Resistance Charts
in the “Technical Reference”
section
Stability
Thermistor
RTD
Heat dissipation
constant
Connection
Mounting
Color
ST-S*E
ST-S*EW
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
<0.09°F (0.05°C) over five years
2.7 mW/°C (power needed to
raise the temperature by 1°C)
Terminals (pigtails for the
XB option)
Directly to wall or customersupplied back box, no adapters
needed for standard boxes
Beige plastic with
tan metal faceplate
White plastic with
white metal faceplate
TEMPERATURE
EXECUTIVE ROOM THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ST-S*E, ST-S*EW SERIES
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
1.43
(3.63)
0.63
(1.58)
4.50
(11.43)
4.50
(11.43)
Cover Hooks
0.88
(2.22)
0.75
(1.90)
2.37
(6.02)
Wire-Way
Hole
Mounting Holes
typical
1.87
(4.76) 3.31
(8.40)
3.23
(8.20)
2.75 (6.99)
Front View
Front View
Board Hooks
1.20
(3.05)
1.20
(3.05)
3.23
(8.20)
Bottom View
TEMPERATURE
Cover Securing Screws
2.75 (6.99)
Bottom View
ST-S*E
ST-S*EW
WIRING/OPTIONS
Make electrical connections to the sensor using the terminal block provided in accordance with the installation wiring
diagram for the job and with national and local electrical codes. Though the sensor itself does not require shielded cable,
some controllers and microprocessors do; check with the controller supplier.
XJ1 External Jack
Communication
Bus Terminal
For XJ
Option
OUT
POT
IN
SENSOR
LED
XJ2 Internal
RJ11 Jack
+
-
P S
Setpoint Adjust
Sensor Terminals
LED Terminals 24 VAC/VDC
Jumper Pins for momentary
pushbutton option allow
locating the N.O. contacts
across the (S) sensor or
the setpoint (P) pot
Internal
Option
Wiring
COMP EXT
SENS SENS
XA Setpoint Adjust
Potentiometer
Sensor
Mounted to
Cover
Controller Temp
Sensor (standard)
Option Board Terminations
(multiple options shown)
Sensor
Mounted to Cover
Standard
Terminations
ST-S*E
Option XB (8'/2.4m lead) – do not terminate inside the enclosure.
Note: The above drawing shows all options. The actual configuration will vary depending on the options selected.
See Sensor Options in this section for option wiring pin-out connections.
3
TEMPERATURE
EXECUTIVE ROOM THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ST-S*E, ST-S*EW SERIES
TYPICAL MOUNTING
TYPICAL COVER WITH MULTIPLE OPTIONS
Toggle bolts or other direct wall-mount screws can be used where conduit is
not required. Adapters are not required when mounting directly to electrical
outlet boxes.
Basic model comes with screw terminal block, white decorator faceplate, two
#6-32 screws for handibox mounting, and two #6 x 1" screws for direct wall
mounting. Cover screws are #6-32 with a 1/16 allen key head.
Optional CustomerSupplied Handibox
Wire Access
Hole
XJ1
External Communication
Jack for use with handheld
terminals, requires adapter
cable. CC-RJ11AD
XJ2
Internal
Communication Jack
under the
cover
F
XTA (ST-S*E only)
90
80
70
60
50
Analog Temperature Display
50° to 90°F
XTD (ST-S*E only)
(not shown)
Liquid Crystal Temperature
Indication 60° to 90°F (15° to 32°C) ±1°F
Plate
Mounting
Screws
XM
Exposed Momentary Push
Button (cannot be used with
XA, XJ1, or XJ2 options)
DEC
INC
XME
Concealed Membrane
Momentary Push Button
TEMPERATURE
White
Faceplate
(standard)
XK
Custom Logo
(your company logo)
Cover
Mounting
1/16 Allen Screws
The sensor should be mounted approximately 5' (12.7 cm) above the floor,
on an interior wall, away from any heating or cooling generating devices.
XPL
Red LED Indicator Lamp
XA
Setpoint Adjust to provide a
10 kΩ to 30 kΩ resistance
input
(1-3 kΩ and 1-1.4 kΩ available)
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
ST-S3
ST-S21
ST-S22
ST-S24
ST-S27
ST-S42
ST-S81
ST-S85
ST-S91
ST-S3
DESCRIPTION
10,000Ω executive thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III material (gray leads)
2252Ω executive thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (green leads)
3000Ω executive thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (blue leads)
10,000Ω executive thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (yellow leads)
100,000Ω executive thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (gray leads)
20,000Ω executive thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV material (green leads)
100Ω executive RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads)
1000Ω executive RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads)
1000Ω executive RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 375 platinum curve (green leads)
E
Executive beige enclosure with wide back plate
EW Executive white enclosure with narrow back plate
OPTIONS (See page 37 for option details)
XA*
Setpoint adjustment with 10 kΩ to 30 kΩ, resistance input
XA10K* Setpoint adjustment with 1 kΩ to 3 kΩ, resistance input
XA2K*
Setpoint adjustment with 1kΩ to 1.4 kΩ, resistance input
XB
Moistureproof with 8' (2.44m) lead, no terminal block provided
XGR
Gray decorator faceplate (tan faceplate standard)
XJ1*
External communication jack (related adapter CC-RJ11AD)
XJ2* †
Internal RJ11 communication jack
XK
Custom logo
XM**
Momentary switch wired N.O. to terminal block (N.C. available)
XME
Membrane momentary switch wired only N.O. to terminal block, tan faceplate only
XPL*
Red LED lamp externally powered 24 VAC/VDC
XN1
NIST certificate, one reference point, 32°F (0°C)
XN2
NIST certificate, two reference points, 32°/158°F (0°/70°C)
XTA
Analog temperature display, 50° to 90°F ±1°F
XTC
Digital temperature display, 15° to 32°C ±1°C, battery powered (one year nominal)
XTD
Digital temperature display, 60° to 90°F ±1°F, battery powered (one year nominal)
XZ
Three-wire RTD connections (Type 81 only)
E
XB
XGR Example: ST-S3-E-XB-XGR 10,000Ω Type III moistureproof executive sensor zone with
gray faceplate and an executive beige enclosure with wide back plate
* Circuit board option
** Cannot be mounted in conjunction with *options
† XJ2 option may not be combined with the XTD or XTC option
CC-RJ11AD
79-1
KT1
10-531
4
RELATED PRODUCTS
Adapter cable for XJ1 option with female RJ11 8-pin connector
Replacement battery for XTD and XTC option
Mounting screwdriver 1/16" Allen key
Wall adaptor plate 7" x 5.25" (for ST-S*EW)
TEMPERATURE
DECORATOR ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSOR, THERMISTOR AND RTD
ST-S*K SERIES
TM
A Division of Kele, Inc.
DESCRIPTION
The ST-S*K Series Room Temperature Sensor is a
cost-effective room temperature sensor. The thermistor
is made of a very stable, pre-aged material that offers
the reliability needed in control systems. The platinum
RTD comes in 1001 and 10001 and is compatible with
most HVAC systems.
OPTIONS
• Setpoint slide adjust
• Momentary override switch
• RJ11 communication jack
• NIST certificate
• 24V LED lamp
• OEM models available
• Custom logos
APPLICATION
The ST-S*K Series is designed to be wall mounted
indoors where appearance and accuracy are important.
The sensor may be mounted directly to the drywall or
on standard electrical boxes. It comes in all common
thermistors or RTDs. Options may be mixed and
matched for each application.
ST-S*K
DIMENSIONS
XM option
.5
(1.27)
3.31
(8.40)
4.5
(11.43)
1.31
(2.54)
Typical logo
location
Wire Way
Back Plate
0.33 Adjust
(.85) Tab
2.75 (6.98)
1.5
(3.8)
0.18
(.47)
Front
in
(cm)
0.94
(2.38)
Side
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensing elements
Accuracy
Sensor types
Thermistor @ 77°F
RTD @ 32°F
Temp range
Temp response
Sensitivity
Stability
Thermistor
RTD
Heat dissipation
Thermistor (thermal resistor)
RTD (resistance temperature device)
±0.5°F (0.28°C)
Connection
Mounting
2.252k, 3k, 10k, 20k, 100 k1
Platinum 1001, 385 curve
Platinum 10001, 385 curve
Platinum 10001, 375 curve
35° to 140°F (2° to 60°C)
NTC - Thermistors, PTC - RTDs
See Sensor Resistance Charts in
the “Technical Reference” section
Color
Options
Override button
Set point adjust
Comm. jack
NIST
Lamp indicator
Custom logo
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
<0.09°F (0.05°C) over five years
2.7 mW/°C
Locking cover
Weight
Terminals
Directly to wall or customer-supplied
back box, no adapters needed for
standard outlet boxes
White plastic
N.O. form A contact
4001, 3 k1, or 20 k1 span
RJ11, four-conductor connection
One- or two-point accuracy certificate
24 VAC/VDC LED (externally powered)
Custom printing; one-, two-,
or three-color
1/16" Allen key head
0.2 lb (0.09 kg)
5
TEMPERATURE
FEATURES
• Lifetime warranty
• Attractive new design
• ±0.36°F (0.2°C) thermistor accuracy
• ±1.0°F (0.53°C) RTD accuracy
• Durable housing
• White color
• Thermistor or RTD
• Locking cover screws
TEMPERATURE
DECORATOR ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSOR, THERMISTOR AND RTD
ST-S*K SERIES
MOUNTING AND SENSOR ONLY WIRING
WIRING
Toggle bolts or other direct wall-mount screws can be used where
back box is not required. Adapters are not required when mounting
directly to electrical outlet boxes.
Basic model comes with screw terminal block, white decorator faceplate, two #6-32 screws for handibox-mounting, and two #6 x 1" screws
for direct wall-mounting. Locking cover screws are #6-32 with a 1/16"
Allen key head, installed as needed.
Communication
Bus Terminal
Out
Pot
In
Sensor
Wire Access
Hole
Mounting Back Plate
Mounting
Screws
LED
Option Board Clip
XJ2 Internal
RJ11 Jack
To BAS
Controller
TEMPERATURE
Self-Latching
Cover
Comp Ext
Sens Sens
Controller Temp
Sensor (standard)
Optional Board Terminations
(multiple options shown)
Note: Adjust option requires option board removal to mount back plate.
ORDERING INFORMATION
ST-S3K
DESCRIPTION
10,000Ω decorator thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III material (gray leads)
2252Ω decorator thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (green leads)
3000Ω decorator thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (blue leads)
10,000Ω decorator thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (yellow leads)
100,000Ω decorator thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (gray leads)
20,000Ω decorator thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV material (green leads)
100Ω decorator RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads)
1000Ω decorator RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads)
1000Ω decorator RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 375 platinum curve (green leads)
OPTIONS (See page 37 for option details)
XA*
Setpoint adjustment (10 kΩ to 30 kΩ, resistance input, tan faceplate only)
XA10K*
Setpoint adjustment (1 kΩ to 3 kΩ, resistance input, tan faceplate only)
XA2K*
Setpoint adjustment (1 kΩ to 1.4 kΩ, resistance input, tan faceplate only)
XB
Moistureproof with 8' (2.44m) lead (no terminal block provided)
XJ2*
Internal RJ11 communication jack
XK
Custom logo
XM
Momentary switch wired normally open to terminal block (N.C. available)
XPL*
Red LED lamp (externally powered 24 VAC/VDC)
XN1
NIST traceable for one-point certification 32°F (0°C)
XN2
NIST traceable for two-point certification 32°/158°F (0°/70°C)
XZ
Three-wire RTD connections (Type 81 only)
XN1
Example: ST-S3K-XN1 10,000Ω Type III decorator sensor with NIST certificate
* Circuit board option
KT1
10-531
6
LED Terminals
24 VAC/VDC
Sensor Mounted
to Cover
Cover
Locking
1/16" Allen Screws
Installed as needed
The sensor should be mounted approximately 5' (1.5m) above the floor,
on an interior wall, out of the sun, and away from any heating or cooling
generating devices.
MODEL
ST-S3K
ST-S21K
ST-S22K
ST-S24K
ST-S27K
ST-S42K
ST-S81K
ST-S85K
ST-S91K
Sensor Terminals
Jumper Pins for
Momentary Pushbutton
Option allow locating
the N.O. contacts
across the sensor
(S) or the setpoint (P)
P S
XA Setpoint
Adjust
Potentiometer
Setpoint Adjust
RELATED PRODUCTS
Mounting screwdriver 1/16" Allen key
Sensor adaptor plate 7" x 5.25"
TEMPERATURE
SURFACE-MOUNT ROOM THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ST-S*P SERIES
DESCRIPTION
TM
A Division of Kele, Inc.
The Precon ST-S * P Series Surface-Mount Room
Sensors provide precision room temperature sensing
for building automation systems. The active sensing
element is made of a highly stable, precision thermistor material or platinum RTD.
FEATURES
Lifetime warranty
±0.36°F (±0.2°C) thermistor accuracy
±1°F (±0.53°C) RTD accuracy
Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves
Vented housing for quick temperature response
Adaptable with many options
Traditional tan cover with aluminum faceplate
Durable plastic housing and base plate
Easy to mount to wall or back box
APPLICATION
OPTIONS
The wall-mounted enclosure is designed to be mounted
indoors vertically or horizontally. The separate base
plate may be mounted directly to the drywall or a standard electrical outlet box with adapters. The cover is
secured with tamper-resistant hex screws. Where
moisture is a concern, the moistureproofing XB option
is required.
•
•
•
•
•
TEMPERATURE
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Custom logos
Setpoint adjustment
Moistureproof with 8' (2.44m) lead
Momentary switch override
NIST traceable
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensing element
Accuracy
Thermistor
RTD
Thermistor (thermal resistor)
RTD (resistance temperature device)
Stability
Thermistor
RTD
±0.36°F (0.2°C)
±1°F (0.53°C)
Heat dissipation
constant
Sensor types available
Thermistor
2.252k, 3k, 10k, 20k, 100 k1
RTD
Platinum 1001, 385 curve
Platinum 10001, 385 curve
Platinum 10001, 375 curve
Temp range
35° to 140°F (2° to 60°C)
Temp response
Thermistor
RTD
Negative temperature coefficient
Positive temperature coefficient
Sensitivity
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
<0.09°F (0.05°C) over five years
2.7 mW/°C (power needed to
raise the temperature by 1°C)
Connection
18" (45.7 cm) of 24 AWG
pigtails prestripped
Mounting
Directly to wall or customersupplied back box with adapters
See mounting accessories
Color
Beige plastic with aluminum plate
See Sensor Resistance Charts
in the “Technical Reference”
section
7
TEMPERATURE
SURFACE-MOUNT ROOM THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ST-S*P SERIES
MOUNTING
TYPICAL COVER WITH MULTIPLE OPTIONS
Toggle bolts or other direct wall-mount screws can be used where conduit
is not required. Adapters are required when mounting directly to electrical
outlet boxes.
XA
1
Basic model comes with base plate, cover, brushed aluminum faceplate,
18" (45.7 cm) of 24 AWG wire, and two #6 x 1 screws for direct wall
mounting. Cover screws are #6-32 with a 1/16" allen key head.
XM
2
3
0
Momentary
Switch
-1
-2
Setpoint Adjust
provides a 0Ω to 10 kΩ
resistance input
-3
Terminate with butt splices or soldering. Wire nuts are not recommended.
Optional CustomerSupplied Handibox
Accessory Mounting
Bracket BKT-1
Adapter plate
ISPL-1 or SSPL-1
DIMENSIONS
TEMPERATURE
Cover
Mounting
1/16 Allen Screws
in
(cm)
1.75
(4.45)
3.13
(7.94)
2.13
(5.4)
Base Plate
The sensor should be mounted approximately five feet above the floor,
on an interior wall, away from any heating or cooling generating devices.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
ST-S3P
ST-S21P
ST-S22P
ST-S24P
ST-S27P
ST-S42P
ST-S81P
ST-S85P
ST-S91P
ST-S27P
DESCRIPTION
10,000Ω surface-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III material (gray leads)
2252Ω surface-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (green leads)
3000Ω surface-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (blue leads)
10,000Ω surface-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (yellow leads)
100,000Ω surface-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (gray leads)
20,000Ω surface-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV material (green leads)
100Ω surface-mount RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads)
1000Ω surface-mount RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads)
1000Ω surface-mount RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 375 platinum curve (green leads)
OPTIONS (see page 37 for option details)
XA
Setpoint adjustment (0 kΩ to 10 kΩ standard, 0Ω to 1500Ω optional XA-1500)
XB
Moistureproof with 8' (2.4m) lead
XK
Custom logo
XM
Momentary switch, wired normally open, 18" (45.7 cm) leads
XN1
NIST certificate, one reference point 32°F (0°C)
XN2
NIST certificate, two reference points 32°/158°F (0°/70°C)
XZ
Three-wire RTD connections (Type 81 only)
XB
Example: ST-S27P-XB 100,000Ω Type II surface-mount zone sensor
thermistor with moisture-proofing
UR
BKT-1
ISPL-1
SSPL-1
KT1
8
RELATED PRODUCTS
Moisture resistant three-wire butt splice
Handibox mounting bracket for wall sensor
Plastic ivory switch plate cover for handibox mounting
Stainless steel switch plate cover for handibox mounting
Mounting screwdriver 1/16" allen key
TEMPERATURE
STAINLESS STEEL FLUSH-MOUNT THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ST-S* SERIES
DESCRIPTION
TM
A Division of Kele, Inc.
The Precon ST-S * Series Stainless Steel FlushMount Sensors provide precision room temperature
sensing for building automation systems. The active
sensing element is made of a highly stable, precision
thermistor material or platinum RTD. This design provides moisture/vapor resistance and is bonded to a 304
stainless steel plate. The back is insulated to reduce
interior wall temperature influence. This sensor is
intended for interior use only.
FEATURES
Lifetime warranty
±0.36°F (±0.2°C) thermistor accuracy
±1°F (±0.53°C) RTD accuracy
Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves
Insulated backing for room temperature response
Vandal-resistant flush mounting
Adaptable with many options
304 stainless steel finish
Easy to mount to wall or back box
Standard size plate to cover mounting holes
APPLICATION
OPTIONS
The ST-S* Series sensors are designed to be mounted
on indoor walls. They are ideal for use in schools or
cold storage lockers, where vandalism or fork lifts can
damage ordinary wall sensors. The sensors have an
insulated back that reduces the conductive influences
of wall temperatures, yet allows significant convective
influences to be sensed. Security screws (XS option)
are available where tamper proofing is required.
•
•
•
•
•
TEMPERATURE
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Custom logos
Setpoint adjustment
Momentary switch override
Security screws
NIST traceable
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensing element
Accuracy
Thermistor
RTD
Sensor types available
Thermistor
RTD
Temp range
Temp response
Thermistor
RTD
Sensitivity
Thermistor (thermal resistor)
RTD (resistance temperature device)
±0.36°F (0.2°C)
±1°F (0.53°C)
2.252k, 3k, 10k, 20k, 100 k1
Platinum 1001, 385 curve
Platinum 10001, 385 curve
Platinum 10001, 375 curve
-30° to 100°F (-34° to 38°C)
Stability
Thermistor
RTD
Heat dissipation
constant
Connection
Mounting
Color
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
<0.09°F (0.05°C) over five years
2.7 mW/°C (power needed to
raise the temperature by 1°C)
8' (2.4m) of 24 AWG pigtails
prestripped ends
Directly to wall or customersupplied back box, no adapters
needed for standard boxes
Brushed stainless steel
Negative temperature coefficient
Positive temperature coefficient
See Sensor Resistance Charts
in the “Technical Reference”
section
9
TEMPERATURE
STAINLESS STEEL FLUSH-MOUNT THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ST-S* SERIES
MOUNTING
TYPICAL COVER WITH MULTIPLE OPTIONS
XS
Security Screws
Toggle bolts or other direct wall-mount screws can be used where conduit
is not required. Adapters are not required when mounting directly to electrical
outlet boxes. Tighten mounting screws, crushing foam gasketing until plate
edges lightly touch the wall. Insulate or seal all interior holes to prevent drafts
from affecting the temperature readings. Terminate with butt splices or
soldering. Wire nuts are not recommended.
XM
Momentary
Push Button
OVERRIDE
DN
UP
0
-1
Basic model comes with screws for stainless steel faceplate, two #6-32
screws for handibox mounting, and 8' (2.4m) of 24 AWG wire. Security
screws (XS Option) are #6-32 with a spanner head.
XA
Setpoint Adjust provides a
0Ω to 10 kΩ ± 3% resistance input
1
2
-2
-3
3
Optional CustomerSupplied Handibox
DIMENSIONS
TEMPERATURE
in
(cm)
2.75
(6.99)
4.5
(11.43)
3.25
(8.25)
The sensor should be mounted approximately five feet above the floor,
on an interior wall, away from any heating or cooling generating devices.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
ST-S3
ST-S21
ST-S22
ST-S24
ST-S27
ST-S42
ST-S81
ST-S85
ST-S91
ST-S27
DESCRIPTION
10,000Ω flush-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III material (gray leads)
2252Ω flush-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (green leads)
3000Ω flush-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (blue leads)
10,000Ω flush-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (yellow leads)
100,000Ω flush-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (gray leads)
20,000Ω flush-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV material (green leads)
100Ω flush-mount RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads)
1000Ω flush-mount RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads)
1000Ω flush-mount RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 375 platinum curve (green leads)
OPTIONS
XA Setpoint adjustment (±3° range, 0 kΩ to 10 kΩ standard, 0Ω to 1500Ω optional XA-1500)
XK Custom logo
XM Momentary switch wired normally open, 18" (45.7 cm) leads
XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32°F (0°C)
XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32°/158°F (0°/70°C)
XS
Security screws (SD-6 spanner screwdriver required)
XZ
Three-wire RTD connections (Type 81 only)
XM
Example: ST-S27-XM 100,000Ω Type II stainless steel flush-mount sensor
with momentary switch
UR
KT1
SD-6
10
RELATED PRODUCTS
Moisture resistant three-wire butt splice
Mounting screwdriver 1/16" allen key
Security spanner screwdriver (required for XS option)
TEMPERATURE
UNIVERSAL-MOUNT THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ST-U* SERIES
TM
A Division of Kele, Inc.
DESCRIPTION
The Precon ST-U* Series Universal-Mount Sensors provide
precision remote temperature sensing in multiple applications
such as duct, OSA, and immersion installations for building
automation systems. The active sensing element is a highly
stable precision thermistor material or platinum RTD.
The sensing element is sealed with a thermally conductive
compound in a 4-7/8" (12.38 cm) long stainless steel probe
and is attached to a 2.5" (6.35 cm) square enclosure. The tabs
on the enclosure provide mounting ears for direct duct mounting and are easily removable if they are not needed. This multipurpose enclosure minimizes the number of stock parts
required to handle multiple applications.
ST-U*
WEL-B
FEATURES
Lifetime warranty
±0.36°F (±0.2°C) thermistor accuracy
±1°F (±0.53°C) RTD accuracy
Flame retardant, Plenum rated
Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves
Adaptable with many mounting options
304 stainless steel probes
Easy to mount to duct, well, or wall
Waterproof probe
Paintable plastic
NEMA 3R, IP11
OPTIONS
•
•
•
•
•
•
Probe lengths up to 36" (91.44 cm)
Matched sensor pairs
Dual sensor probes
Weather-resistant gasket
25' (7.62m) cable
NIST traceable certificate
OSAB
WEL-S
PROBE APPLICATIONS
• The Duct Temperature application is designed for direct
mounting on sheet metal duct systems. The sensor is point
sensitive and comes standard with a 4-7/8" (12.38 cm) insertion depth. The XL option is available for custom lengths up to
36" (91.44 cm).
• The Immersion Temperature application is designed to be
threaded directly into a 1/8" NPT well. The wells are available
in brass or 304 stainless steel and are designed for pipe insertion using a 1/2" threaded saddle (Thredolet®).
• The Outside Air Temperature application uses a wall bracket with a vented weather shield to minimize the effect of rain,
snow, or other weather-related influences. This rugged enclosure and bracket will ensure long life even in severe weather
conditions.
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensing element
Accuracy
Thermistor
RTD
Sensor types available
Thermistor @ 77°F
RTD @ 32F
Temp range
Thermistor
RTD
Temp response
Thermistor
RTD
Probe sheath
Thermistor (thermal resistor)
RTD (resistance temperature device)
Sensitivity
±0.36°F (0.2°C)
±1°F (0.53°C)
Stability
Thermistor
RTD
Heat dissipation
constant
2.252k, 3k, 10k, 20k, 100 k1
Platinum 1001, 385 curve
Platinum 10001, 385 curve
Platinum 10001, 375 curve
Connection
-30° to 230°F (-34° to 110°C)
-67° to 240°F (-55° to 115°C)
Mounting
Negative temperature coefficient
Positive temperature coefficient
304 stainless steel
Enclosure
See Sensor Resistance Chart
in the “Technical Reference”
section
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
<0.09°F (0.05°C) over five years
2.7 mW/°C (power needed to
raise the temperature by 1°C)
8' (2.44m) of 24 AWG
pigtails prestripped
Directly to duct, immersion
well, or OSA wall mount with
appropriate bracket
UL94V-0, plenum-rated plastic
NEMA 3R, IP11
UV protected with snap-off cover
11
TEMPERATURE
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
TEMPERATURE
UNIVERSAL-MOUNT THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ST-U* SERIES
DIMENSIONS
3.25 (8.26)
in
(cm)
2.5 (6.35)
2.3
(5.83)
2.5 (6.35)
0.75 (1.91)
0.75
(1.91)
0.88 (2.24)
8.38
(21.28)
4.75
(12.07)
1/2"
Conduit Hole
1/8 NPT
5.5
(13.97)
Mounting
Tabs
4.87
(12.38)
5.13
(13.03)
1/2" NPT
0.25
(0.63)
Gasket
Correct position for mounting outdoor air sensor
ST-U*O
Sensor for OSA
3.25
(8.26)
Well
ST-U*
Duct/Multipurpose Sensor
ST-U*B and ST-U*S
Well Sensor
TEMPERATURE
MOUNTING
Duct: Drill a 9/16" (1.43 cm) hole for insertion into the duct. Attach
probe snug to the duct with self tapping screws.
Well Insertion: Install the well into the customer-supplied 1/2" saddle
(Thredolet®), then thread the sensor into the well. For better heat
transfer you may apply thermal compound to the tip of the sensor before
insertion. Mounting tabs may be removed.
OSA: Insert the shield into the bracket and thread the ST-U* through
the gasket to the shield. Secure the assembly to the wall using the
appropriate hardware for the wall surface. The ideal orientation of the
sensor is horizontal with the knockout facing down and located on an
outside wall with a shaded exposure. Mounting tabs may be removed.
The sensor and shield may be painted to the architect’s specifications.
Shaded
Exposure
When choosing location for any outdoor air temperature sensors:
1. Do not mount above building openings (windows, doors)
2. Keep sensor out of direct sunlight
Do not mount sensor
in vertical position with the
weather shield pointing up.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
ST-U3
ST-U21
ST-U22
ST-U24
ST-U27
ST-U42
ST-U81
ST-U85
ST-U91
ST-U3
DESCRIPTION
10,000Ω universal-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III material (gray leads)
2252Ω universal-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (green leads)
3000Ω universal-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (blue leads)
10,000Ω universal-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (yellow leads)
100,000Ω universal-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (gray leads)
20,000Ω universal-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV material (green leads)
100Ω universal-mount RTD @32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads)
1000Ω universal-mount RTD @32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads)
1000Ω universal-mount RTD @32°F (0°C), 375 platinum curve (green leads)
OPTIONS
B
Kit with WEL-B brass well for immersion mounting
S
Kit with WEL-S 304 SS well for immersion mounting
O
Kit with OSAB weather shield, gasket, and bracket for wall mount
XD
Dual sensor in one probe
XL
Custom length 2" to 60" (5 to 152 cm), specify length
XN1
NIST certificate, one reference point 32°F (0°C)
XN2
NIST certificate, two reference points 32°/158°F (0°/70°C)
XP
Matched sensor pairs matched to ±0.1°F, 0.055°C (must order two sensors)
X25
25' (7.62m) 24 AWG twin lead
XC25
25' (7.62m) jacketed cable
XZ
Three-wire RTD connections (Type 81 only)
B
Example: ST-U3B 10 kΩ Type III immersion sensor with brass well
UNIVERSAL-MOUNT SENSOR ACCESSORIES
WEL-B
Brass well
OSAB
OSA weather shield, gasket, and bracket
WEL-S
304 stainless steel well
TCC-111 Thermal conductive compound 111 ml tub
F-1000-331 Nylon bushing for open wiring
12
TEMPERATURE
ALL-PURPOSE THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ST-A* SERIES
DESCRIPTION
TM
A Division of Kele, Inc.
The Precon ST-A* Series All-Purpose Sensors provide precision remote temperature sensing for building
automation systems and mechanical equipment room
instrumentation. The active sensing element is made
of a highly stable precision thermistor material or platinum RTDs.
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Lifetime warranty
±0.36°F (±0.2°C) thermistor accuracy
±1°F (±0.53°C) RTD accuracy
Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves
Tip sensitive for precise temperature response
Adaptable with many options
All metal construction with 304 stainless steel
probes
• Easy to mount to duct, wall, or back box
• Waterproof probe
OPTIONS
•
•
•
•
Custom lengths up to 9' (2.74m)
Matched sensor pairs
Dual sensor probe
NIST traceable
APPLICATION
The ST-A* Series sensors are waterproof and can be
used where it is possible for the sensed temperature to
fall below the ambient dew point, causing condensation
to occur on the sensor. However, it is important that the
field connection be made as far as possible from the
sensed media. The sensing element is sealed with a
thermally conductive compound in a versatile 9" long
stainless steel tube with a brass electrical fitting. The
all-purpose probe is suitable for plenum mounting, duct
mounting, immersion wells, or outside air.
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensing element
Accuracy
Thermistor
RTD
Thermistor (thermal resistor)
RTD (resistance temperature device)
±0.36°F (0.2°C)
±1°F (0.53°C)
Sensitivity
Stability
Thermistor
RTD
See Sensor Resistance Charts
in the “Technical Reference” section
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
<0.09°F (0.05°C) over five years
Sensor types available
Thermistor @ 77°F 2.252k, 3k, 10k, 20k, 100 k1
RTD @ 32°F
Platinum 1001, 385 curve
Platinum 10001, 385 curve
Platinum 10001, 375curve
Heat dissipation
2.7 mW/°C (power needed to raise
the temperature by 1°C)
Connection
8' (2.4m) of 24 AWG pigtails with
prestripped ends
Temp range
Thermistor
RTD
Mounting
-30° to 230°F (-34° to 110°C)
-67° to 240°F (-55° to 115°C)
Directly to duct, wall, or customersupplied back box, no adapters
needed for standard boxes
Temp response
Thermistor
RTD
Negative temperature coefficient
Positive temperature coefficient
13
TEMPERATURE
The ST-A* Series sensors are rugged, point-sensitive
waterproof sensors featuring a 9" (22.8 cm) 304 stainless steel probe and brass fitting. The brass fitting has
a 1/2" NPT male thread. The sensors are supplied with
two 1/2" locknuts for easy installation in handiboxes (or
other enclosures with 1/2" knockouts).
TEMPERATURE
ALL-PURPOSE THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ST-A* SERIES
MOUNTING
DIMENSIONS
Locknuts provide direct mounting and can be used where conduit
is not required. Mount directly to electrical outlet boxes as shown below.
in
(cm)
Typical Insertion
9.25
(23.51)
Basic model comes with two locknuts for mounting to a variety of
box options.
All-Purpose Sensor with
Customer-Supplied Handibox
1.5
(3.81)
1.0
(2.54)
Hole
1-1/16"(2.7 cm)
1.0
(2.54)
8.25
(20.96)
0.83
(2.06)
0.25
(0.64)
1/2" NPT Thread
Secure sensor to handibox with locknuts.
Secure handibox to duct with screws.
Use the full 8' (2.4m) lead length provided to avoid
moisture migration at the field connection.
TEMPERATURE
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
ST-A3
ST-A21
ST-A22
ST-A24
ST-A27
ST-A42
ST-A81
ST-A85
ST-A91
ST-A24
DESCRIPTION
10,000Ω all-purpose thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III material (gray leads)
2252Ω all-purpose thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (green leads)
3000Ω all-purpose thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (blue leads)
10,000Ω all-purpose thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (yellow leads)
100,000Ω all-purpose thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (gray leads)
20,000Ω all-purpose thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV material (green leads)
100Ω all-purpose RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads)
1000Ω all-purpose RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads)
1000Ω all-purpose RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 375 platinum curve (green leads)
OPTIONS (see Sensor Options page for option details)
XCO 1/2" LB conduit fitting
XD
Dual sensors in one probe
XH
Handibox housing (factory installed)
XHP Non-metallic handibox housing (factory installed)
XL
Custom probe length, available 2" to 9' (5.08 cm to 2.74m) in 1" (2.5 cm) increments
XL2
Custom length insertion probe, 4-7/8" (12.38 cm)
XN1
NIST certificate, one reference point 32°F (0°C)
XN2
NIST certificate, two reference points 32°/158°F (0°/70°C)
XP
Matched sensor pair (shipped in pairs, matched to ±0.1°F/0.06°C, must order two sensors)
XW
Weatherproof housing (factory installed)
X25
25' (7.62m) lead length
XZ
Three-wire RTD connections (Type 81 only)
XP
Example: ST-A24-XP 10,000Ω Type II all-purpose temperature sensor with matched sensor
UR
14
RELATED PRODUCTS
Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice
TEMPERATURE
DUCT THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ST-D* SERIES
TM
A Division of Kele, Inc.
DESCRIPTION
The Precon ST-D* Series Duct Sensors provide precision remote temperature sensing for building automation systems and mechanical equipment room instrumentation. The active sensing element is highly stable
precision thermistor material or platinum RTD.
The sensing element is sealed with a thermally conductive compound in a 9" (22.8 cm) long 304 stainless steel
tube attached to a 4" (10 cm) electrical strap. The slots
in the mounting bracket form mounting ears for direct
duct mounting and standard electrical boxes. The grommet on the tube fitting seals a 9/16" (1.43 cm) insertion
hole.
ST-D3
FEATURES
Lifetime warranty
±0.36°F (0.2°C) thermistor accuracy
±1°F (0.53°C) RTD accuracy
Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves
Tip sensitive for precise temperature response
Adaptable with many options
304 stainless steel probe
Easy to mount to duct or back box
Waterproof probe
OPTIONS
• Custom lengths up to 9' (2.74m)
• Matched sensor pair
• Many mounting options: handibox, greenfield
fitting, non-metallic box, weatherproof box
• Dual sensor probes
• NIST traceable
ST-D91-XH
APPLICATION
The ST-D * Series sensors are designed for direct
mounting on sheet metal duct systems. Where conduit
is required, the duct sensors have a universal nylon
mounting connector that adapts to a 1/2" knockout in a
standard handibox. The nylon fitting has a 1/2" NPT
female conduit fitting.
The duct temperature sensors are waterproof and
can be used in high humidity and condensing air. The
sensors are point-sensitive and come standard with 9"
(22.8 cm) insertion depth. The XL option provides custom lengths.
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensing element
Accuracy
Thermistor
RTD
Thermistor (thermal resistor)
RTD (resistance temperature device)
Sensitivity
±0.36°F (0.2°C)
±1°F (0.53°C)
Stability
Thermistor
RTD
Sensor types available
Thermistor @ 77˚F 2.252k, 3k, 10k, 20k, 100 k1
RTD @ 32˚F
Platinum 1001, 385 curve
Platinum 10001, 385 curve
Platinum 10001, 375 curve
Temp range
Thermistor
RTD
-30° to 160°F (-34° to 71°C)
-67° to 240°F (-55° to 115°C)
Temp response
Thermistor
RTD
Negative temperature coefficient
Positive temperature coefficient
Heat dissipation
constant
See Sensor Resistance Charts
in the “Technical Reference” section
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
<0.09°F (0.05°C) over five years
2.7 mW/°C (power needed to
raise the temperature by 1°C)
Connection
8' (2.4m) of 24 AWG pigtails
prestripped ends
Mounting
Directly to duct, wall, or customersupplied back box, no adapters
needed for standard boxes
15
TEMPERATURE
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
TEMPERATURE
DUCT THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ST-D* SERIES
MOUNTING
Direct duct-mount screws can be used where conduit is not required. Adapters
are not required when mounting directly to outlet boxes. Install grommet in the
9/16" (1.43 cm) insertion hole. Use full 8' (2.4m) lead length provided to avoid
moisture migration at the field connection.
Insertion Hole is 9/16" (1.43 cm)
Vinyl Grommet
Basic model comes with 8' (2.4m) of 24 AWG, 9" (22.86 cm) probe with T-bar,
grommet, and #6 x 1 screws for direct duct mounting.
1/2" NPT
(XH) Handibox Option
Basic Installation
Greenfield Fitting
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
1/2" NPT
Vinyl Grommet
3.88
(9.89)
Duct Temperature Sensor installed
with handibox option (XH)
9.0
(22.86)
Standard
Duct temperature sensor with
Greenfield fitting option (XG)
TEMPERATURE
0.25
(0.64)
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
ST-D3
ST-D21
ST-D22
ST-D24
ST-D27
ST-D42
ST-D81
ST-D85
ST-D91
DESCRIPTION
10,000Ω duct thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III material (gray leads)
2252Ω duct thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (green leads)
3000Ω duct thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (blue leads)
10,000Ω duct thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (yellow leads)
100,000Ω duct thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (gray leads)
20,000Ω duct thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV material (green leads)
100Ω duct RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads)
1000Ω duct RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads)
1000Ω duct RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 375 platinum curve (green leads)
OPTIONS (see Sensor Options page for option details)
XCO 1/2" LB conduit fitting
XD
Dual sensors in one probe
XG
Greenfield fitting (factory installed)
XH
Handibox housing (factory installed)
XHP
Non-metallic handibox housing (factory installed)
XL
Custom length insertion probe, available 2" to 9' (5.08 cm to 2.74m)
XL2
Custom length insertion probe, 4-7/8" (12.38 cm)
XNP 1/2" MNPT plastic male close nipple
XNB 1/2" MNPT brass male close nipple
XN1
NIST certificate, one reference point 32°F (0°C)
XN2
NIST certificate, two reference points 32°F/158°F (0°/70°C)
XP
Matched sensor pair matched to ±0.1°F/0.055°C (must order two sensors)
XW
Weatherproof housing (factory installed)
X25
25' (7.62m) lead length
XZ
Three-wire RTD connections (Type 81 only)
ST-D3
XG
Example: ST-D3-XG 10,000Ω Type III duct temperature sensor
with Greenfield fitting
UR
KT1
16
RELATED PRODUCTS
Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice
Mounting screwdriver 1/16" allen key
TEMPERATURE
AVERAGING THERMISTOR SENSOR
ST-FZ* SERIES
TM
A Division of Kele, Inc.
DESCRIPTION
The Precon ST-FZ * Series Averaging Thermistor
Sensor provides precision remote temperature sensing
for building automation systems and mechanical equipment room instrumentation. The active sensing elements are constructed of highly stable precision thermistor materials accurate to within ±0.36°F (0.2°C).
The sensing elements are sealed in a 3/16" (0.48 cm)
soft-drawn copper-coiled tube attached to a standard
handibox with mounting bracket attached.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Lifetime warranty
±0.36°F (±0.2°C) accuracy
Wide selection of thermistor curves
Adaptable to most duct sizes
Easy to mount to duct wall
3/16" (0.48 cm) soft copper sensor
Copper facilitates quick average temperature
response
APPLICATION
OPTIONS
•
•
•
•
8' (2.4m) long element for very small ducts
12.5' (3.8m) long element for small ducts
25' (7.6m) long element for larger ducts
Weatherproof handibox
The ST-FZ* Series is designed for direct mounting to
sheet metal for average duct temperature sensing. The
sensor is multipoint sensitive through the length of the
temperature conductive tubing.
The 8' (2.4m) and 12.5' (3.8m) models contain four
sensing elements, and the 25' (7.6m) model has nine
sensing elements. The thermistors are configured in a
series/parallel method, which creates an end result of
total average resistance, equal to the same span as a
standard thermistor, with a temperature range of
32° to 160°F (0° to 71°C).
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensing element
Thermistor (thermal resistor)
Stability
Accuracy
±0.36°F (0.2°C)
Heat dissipation
constant
Sensor types available
Thermistor @ 77°F 2.252k, 3k, 10k, 20k, 100 k1
Temp range
32° to 160°F (0° to 71°C)
Temp response
Negative temperature coefficient
Sensitivity
See Sensor Resistance Charts
in the “Technical Reference”
section
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
2.7 mW/°C (power needed to
raise the temperature by 1°C)
Connection
8' (2.4m) of 24 AWG,
pigtails prestripped
Mounting
Directly to duct with back box,
clips available for serpentine
mounting
17
TEMPERATURE
FEATURES
TEMPERATURE
AVERAGING THERMISTOR SENSOR
ST-FZ* SERIES
MOUNTING / WIRING
DIMENSIONS
Mounting
Drill a 5/8" (1.6 cm) hole for probe insertion and serpentine
the sensor across the duct, turning at each end using the
Model M-648 end clip and Model M-633 mid-duct support.
Avoid kinking the tube as this could cause a short circuit.
Using the provided #6 screws, secure the box to the duct
either with the mounting ears or through the box holes.
in
(cm)
8, 12.5, or 25'
(2.44, 3.81, or 7.62m)
2.25
(5.72)
5/8" (1.6 cm) hole
4.25
(10.80)
TEMPERATURE
3/16" (0.47) Tubing
CC-IG
Capillary
Supports
Front View
Side View
Wiring
Terminate with butt splices or soldering. (Wire nuts
are not recommended.) Use the full 8' (2.4m) lead length
provided to avoid moisture migration from the field connection.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
ST-FZ3
ST-FZ21
ST-FZ22
ST-FZ24
ST-FZ27
ST-FZ42
ST-FZ3
DESCRIPTION
10,000Ω averaging thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III material (gray leads)
2252Ω averaging thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (green leads)
3000Ω averaging thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (blue leads)
10,000Ω averaging thermistor @ 77°F (25°C) Type II material (yellow leads)
100,000Ω averaging thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (gray leads)
20,000Ω averaging thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV material (green leads)
SENSING ELEMENT
8
8' (2.44m) probe length, four elements total
12
12.5' (3.81m) probe length, four elements total
25
25' (7.62m) probe length, nine elements total
XW
Weatherproof housing option
25
UR
M-648
M-633
CC-IG
18
Example: ST-FZ3-25 10 kΩ Type III averaging thermistor sensor
with 25' (7.62m) probe and nine sensing elements
RELATED PRODUCTS
Moisture resistant three-wire butt splice
Copper-plated capillary mounting end clip
Copper-plated capillary mounting mid-duct support
Plastic capillary mounting clip
TEMPERATURE
IMMERSION THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ST-W* SERIES
TM
A Division of Kele, Inc.
DESCRIPTION
The Precon ST-W* Series Immersion Sensors provide
precision remote temperature sensing for building
automation systems and mechanical equipment room
instrumentation. The active sensing element is a highly
stable precision thermistor material or platinum RTD.
FEATURES
• Lifetime warranty
• ±0.36°F (±0.2°C) thermistor accuracy
• ±1°F (±0.53°C) RTD accuracy
• Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves
• Brass thermowell for quick temperature response
• Adaptable with many options
• Easy to mount and remove from thermowell
• Waterproof stainless steel probe
APPLICATION
The ST-W* Series sensors are waterproof and feature a
304 stainless steel probe and brass fitting. The fitting has
1/2" NPSM female threads to accept the standard
Greenfield fitting. It also has 1/8" NPSM male threads for
installing into a furnished Model WEL-B thermowell.
WEL-B
ST-W24
The thermowells are designed with close tolerances,
eliminating the need for thermal grease under normal
conditions. Each well is designed so that the sensor
assembly can be easily removed after installation. The
well screws into a 1/2" FNPT saddle (or Thredolet® fitting) furnished by the installing contractor.
OPTIONS
• 304 stainless steel well
max temp 900°F (482°C)
max pressure 3000 psig (20,685 kPa)
• Handibox enclosure
• Custom lengths (wells available)
• 1/2" LB conduit fitting
• Liquid-tight fitting
• Weatherproof box
• Matched pairs used for BTU measurement
• NIST traceable
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensing element
Accuracy
Thermistor
RTD
Thermistor (thermal resistor)
RTD (resistance temperature device)
±0.36°F (0.2°C)
±1°F (0.53°C)
Sensor types available
Thermistor @ 77˚F 2.252k, 3k, 10k, 20k, 100 k1
RTD @ 32˚F
Platinum 1001, 385 curve
Platinum 10001, 385 curve
Platinum 10001, 375 curve
Temp range
Thermistor
RTD
10° to 230°F (-12° to 110°C)
-67° to 240°F (-55° to 115°C)
Temp response
Thermistor
RTD
Negative temperature coefficient
Positive temperature coefficient
Sensitivity
Stability
Thermistor
RTD
Heat dissipation
constant
See Sensor Resistance Charts in the
“Technical Reference” section
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
<0.09°F (0.05°C) over five years
2.7 mW/°C (power needed to
raise the temperature by 1°C)
Supplied well
(WEL-B)
Brass well-max temp 450°F (232°C)
max pressure 1000 psig, (6895 kPa)
1/2" MNPT
Connection
8' (2.4m) of 24 AWG pigtails
prestripped
Mounting
Directly to pipe in supplied brass
well, no adapters needed for
standard boxes, customer-supplied
1/2" Thredolet® required in pipe
19
TEMPERATURE
The sensing element is sealed with a temperature conductive compound in a 4-7/8" (12.4 cm) stainless steel
tube and brass fitting. A brass thermowell is the standard
well provided with each sensor. A Greenfield connector
is factory installed for flexible connection. The sensor
probe assembly is removable from the thermowell for
replacement without draining the system.
TEMPERATURE
IMMERSION THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ST-W* SERIES
MOUNTING/WIRING
DIMENSIONS
Mounting
Install well into customer-supplied 1/2" FNPTsaddle (or
Thredolet®). Screw sensor into the well via the 1/8" NPSM
brass fitting.
Wiring
Terminate with butt splice or soldering. Wire nuts are not
recommended. Use full 8' (2.44m) lead length provided to
avoid moisture migration up the wire.
in
(cm)
Greenfield
Fitting
1.37
(3.49)
1/2" NPT
1/8" NPSM
4.87
(12.38)
5.13
(13.03)
Install the wells as shown to obtain
optimum well strength.
Flow
3.25
(8.26)
Flow
0.25
(0.63)
Angle must not allow end of well
to contact the other side of pipe.
Sensor
Sensor in Well
TEMPERATURE
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
ST-W3
ST-W21
ST-W22
ST-W24
ST-W27
ST-W42
ST-W81
ST-W85
ST-W91
ST-W3
DESCRIPTION
10,000Ω immersion thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III material (gray leads)
2252Ω immersion thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (green leads)
3000Ω immersion thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (blue leads)
10,000Ω immersion thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (yellow leads)
100,000Ω immersion thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (gray leads)
20,000Ω immersion thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV material (green leads)
100Ω immersion RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads)
1000Ω immersion RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads)
1000Ω immersion RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 375 platinum curve (green leads)
WELL DESIGNATION
–
Sensor with standard brass well
E
Sensor without well
S
Sensor with stainless steel well 900°F (482°C) max temp, 3000 psig (20.7 kPa) max pressure
OPTIONS (see Sensor Options page for option details)
X25
25' (7.6m) lead length
XCO 1/2" LB conduit fitting
XD
Dual sensors in one probe
NG
No Greenfield fitting (1/2" NPSM threads)
XH
Handibox housing (factory installed)
XHP Non-metallic handibox housing (factory installed)
XL
Custom length insertion probe, available 2" to 60" (specify E without well)
XLT
Liquid-tight fitting
XN1
NIST certificate, one reference point 32°F (0°C)
XN2
NIST certificate, two reference points 32°F/158°F (0°/70°C)
XNP 1/2" MNPT plastic close nipple
XNB 1/2" MNPT brass close nipple
XP
Matched sensor pair, matched to ±0.1°F, 0.05°C (must order two sensors)
XW
Weatherproof housing
XZ
Three-wire RTD connections (Type 81 only)
S
XP
Example: ST-W3-S-XP 10 kΩ Type III immersion sensor with a matched
10,000Ω Type III immersion sensor and stainless steel well
UR
TCC-12
TCC-111
20
RELATED PRODUCTS
Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice
Single application thermal compound
Thermal conductive compound 111 ml tub
TEMPERATURE
OUTDOOR AIR THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ST-O* SERIES
DESCRIPTION
TM
A Division of Kele, Inc.
The Precon ST-O * Series Outdoor Air Thermistor
Sensors provide precision remote temperature sensing
for building automation systems and mechanical equipment room instrumentation. The active sensing element
is a highly stable precision thermistor material or platinum RTD.
FEATURES
APPLICATION
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The outdoor air temperature assembly should be located
in the shade, away from all devices (such as an exhaust
fan) that would disturb the normal outdoor environment.
A preferred location would be below the eaves, one foot
down from the top of a wall, in a permanently shaded
spot.
Lifetime warranty
±0.36°F (±0.2°C) thermistor accuracy
±1°F (±0.53°C) RTD accuracy
Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves
Vented weather shield for quick response
2" x 4" (5.08 x 10.16 cm) weatherproof box
Easy to mount to outside wall
Moistureproof with 8' (2.4m) lead
OPTIONS
•
•
•
•
Moistureproof with 25' (7.62m) cable
Dual-mounted sensors
25' (7.62m) leads
NIST traceable certificate
The sensor should be mounted horizontally with the element to the right or left of the handibox. The weather
shield assembly features a tapered fitting which allows
the shield to be rotated by hand. Air vents on the shield
should face downward. Internal mounting knockouts provide for direct wall mounting using screws or toggle bolts.
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensing element
Thermistor (thermal resistor)
RTD (resistance temperature
device)
Accuracy
Thermistor
±0.36°F (0.2°C)
RTD
±1°F (0.53°C)
Sensor types available
Thermistor @ 77˚F 2.252k, 3k, 10k, 20k, 100 k1
RTD @ 32˚F
Platinum 1001, 385 curve
Platinum 10001, 385 curve
Platinum 10001, 375 curve
Temp range
Thermistor
-30° to 140°F (-34° to 60°C)
RTD
-67° to 140°F (-55° to 60°C)
Temp response
Thermistor
Negative temperature coefficient
RTD
Positive temperature coefficient
Sensitivity
Stability
Thermistor
RTD
Heat dissipation
constant
Connection
Mounting
See Sensor Resistance Charts
in the “Technical Reference”
section
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
<0.09°F (0.05°C) over five years
2.7 mW/°C (power needed to
raise the temperature by 1°C)
8' (2.44m) of 24 AWG pigtails
prestripped; XTB option for
terminals
Directly to wall with screws or
toggle bolts
21
TEMPERATURE
The temperature-sensitive element is sheathed in a stainless steel tube and mounted inside a ventilated, treated,
white PVC shield to minimize radiant energy and weather
related effects. The weather shield is mounted on a
weatherproof outlet box for easy installation on an outdoor surface. This rugged enclosure will assure a long
life, even under extreme weather conditions.
TEMPERATURE
OUTDOOR AIR THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ST-O* SERIES
MOUNTING/WIRING
DIMENSIONS
Mounting
Toggle bolts or other direct wall mount screws can be used for
outside mounting. For conduit connections, 3/4" NPT threads
are available in the back and side.
Wiring
Terminate using the full 8' (2.44m) lead length provided to
avoid moisture migration from the field connection. Solder the
leads where possible or use crimp-type butt splice. Wire nuts
are not recommended.
in
(cm)
Correct Position for
Mounting Outdoor
Air Sensor.
2.88
(7.30)
2.0
(5.08)
TEMPERATURE
5.5
(13.97)
4.63
(11.75)
3/4" NPT
Side & Rear
(Use AD-2
for 1/2"
application)
1.5
(3.81)
Foam Gasket
Shaded side of building
Do Not mount sensor
in vertical position with the
sun shield pointing up.
Preferred Mounting Location
for Outdoor Air Sensor
For best results do not mount above doors, windows, air
intakes, or exhausts.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
ST-O3
ST-O21
ST-O22
ST-O24
ST-O27
ST-O42
ST-O81
ST-O85
ST-O91
DESCRIPTION
10,000Ω outdoor air thermistor @ 77°F (25°C) Type III material (gray leads)
2252Ω outdoor air thermistor @ 77°F (25°C) Type II material (green leads)
3000Ω outdoor air thermistor @ 77°F (25°C) Type II material (blue leads)
10,000Ω outdoor air thermistor @ 77°F (25°C) Type II material (yellow leads)
100,000Ω outdoor air thermistor @ 77°F (25°C) Type II material (gray leads)
20,000Ω outdoor air thermistor @ 77°F (25°C) Type IV material (green leads)
100Ω outdoor RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads)
1000Ω outdoor RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads)
1000Ω outdoor RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 375 platinum curve (green leads)
OPTIONS
XC25
25' (7.62m) 22 AWG cable
XD
Dual sensors in one probe (not available with XC25 option)
XMT
Mounting tabs
XN1
NIST certificate, one reference point 32°F (0°C)
XN2
NIST certificate, two reference points 32°/158°F (0°/70°C)
XTB
Terminal block
X25
25' (7.62m) leads
XZ
Three-wire RTD connection (Type 81 only)
ST-O24
XC25
UR
AD-2
22
Example: ST-O24-XC25 10 kΩ Type II outdoor air sensor
with 25' (7.62m) cable
RELATED PRODUCTS
Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice
3/4" to 1/2" adapter for 1/2" pipe
Stainless
Sheathed
Sensor
TEMPERATURE
STAINLESS STEEL SHEATH THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ST-R*S, ST-R*SC SERIES
TM
DESCRIPTION
A Division of Kele, Inc.
ST-R*SC
The Precon Stainless Steel Sheath Sensors provide
precision remote temperature sensing for building
automation systems and mechanical equipment room
instrumentation. The active sensing element is a highly
stable precision thermistor material or platinum RTD.
ST-R*S
The sensing element is rugged and sealed with a thermally conductive compound in a versatile 3" (7.6 cm)long stainless steel tube. The probe is waterproof, and
the sensor is ideal for use in refrigeration cases or as a
strap-on sensor for pipes.
ST-R*SC
The ST-R*SC Stainless Steel Sheath Sensors come
with a rugged, 25' (7.6m) cable that allows for termination away from areas of condensation. It is an ideal
choice for freezer case applications.
APPLICATION
Strap-on Applications: Where it is not practical to install
immersion wells, the Stainless Steel Sheath Sensors
may be strapped to the pipe. The -C option provides a 25'
(7.6m) rugged cable that may be strapped on the outside
of the pipe insulation. Pipe strap accessory (APB-28) provides a bracket under the insulation to hold the sensor
securely in place.
OPTIONS
•
•
•
•
Matched sensor pairs
25' (7.6m) PVC-covered cable
NIST traceable certificate
Custom length probe
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Lifetime warranty
±0.36°F (±0.2°C) thermistor accuracy
±1°F (±0.53°C) RTD accuracy
Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves
Tip sensitive for precise temperature response
Durable 304 stainless steel casing
Easy to mount to wall, box, or pipe
Waterproof probe
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensing element
Accuracy
Thermistor
RTD
Sensor types available
Thermistor @ 77˚F
RTD @ 32˚F
Temp range
Thermistor
RTD
Thermistor (thermal resistor)
RTD (resistance temperature device)
±0.36°F (0.2°C)
±1°F (0.53°C)
2.252k, 3k, 10k, 20k, 100 k1
Platinum 1001, 385 curve
Platinum 10001, 385 curve
Platinum 10001, 375 curve
-30° to 230°F (-34° to 110°C)
-68° to 240°F (-55° to 60°C)
Temp response
Thermistor
RTD
Sensitivity
Stability
Thermistor
RTD
Heat dissipation
constant
Connection
Mounting
Negative temperature coefficient
Positive temperature coefficient
See Sensor Resistance Charts
in the “Technical Reference”
section
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
<0.09°F (0.05°C) over five years
2.7 mW/°C (power needed to
raise the temperature by 1°C)
8' (2.44m), 24 AWG zipcord
using crimp or solder connection
Directly to wall or pipe using
standard clips and brackets
23
TEMPERATURE
ST-R*S
The ST-R*S Stainless Steel Sheath Sensors are suitable for direct application to pipe surfaces for chilled or
hot water measurement. They are also used for freezer
cases where moisture protection is important. These
rugged strap-on sensors come with 8' (2.4m), 24-gauge
zipcord leads.
TEMPERATURE
STAINLESS STEEL SHEATH THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ST-R*S, ST-R*SC SERIES
MOUNTING/WIRING
DIMENSIONS
Mounting
Secure to wall or pipe using cable ties, clips, or brackets.
Wiring
Terminate with butt splices or solder connections. Wire
nuts are not recommended. Use the full length cable to
avoid moisture migration from the field connection.
in
(cm)
Polyolefin Sheath
0.25
(0.64)
Tie Rap or
Adjustable
Pipe Bracket
3.0
(7.62)
Stainless Tube
TEMPERATURE
When used as a strap-on sensor, best results are obtained when
conductive compound (TCC-12) is applied between the sensor and the pipe.
In addition, the sensor should be inserted under insulation with at least
2' (0.61m) on each side of the sensor. Adjustable pipe bracket APB-28
is available for use with this sensor.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
ST-R3S
ST-R21S
ST-R22S
ST-R24S
ST-R27S
ST-R42S
ST-R81S
ST-R85S
ST-R91S
ST-R3S
DESCRIPTION
10,000Ω stainless steel thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III material (gray leads)
2252Ω stainless steel thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (green leads)
3000Ω stainless steel thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (blue leads)
10,000Ω stainless steel thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (yellow leads)
100,000Ω stainless steel thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (gray leads)
20,000Ω stainless steel thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV material (green leads)
100Ω stainless steel RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads)
1000Ω stainless steel RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads)
1000Ω stainless steel RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 375 platinum curve (green leads)
OPTIONS
C
25' (7.6m) 22 AWG cable
XD Dual sensors in one probe (not available with -C option)
XP Matched sensor pair, matched to ±0.1°F, 0.55°C (must order two sensors)
XL Custom length probe, available 2" to 60" (5 to 152 cm)
XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32°F (0°C)
XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32°/158°F (0°/70°F)
XZ Three-wire RTD connections (Type 81 only)
C
XP
Example: ST-R3SC-XP 10,000Ω stainless steel sheath thermistor
with 25' (7.6m) cable shipped in a matched pair
UR
APB-28
TCC-12
TCC-111
PN-46
#20
24
RELATED PRODUCTS
Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice
Adjustable pipe bracket 2" to 8" (5.1 to 20.3 cm)
Single application thermal conductive compound
Thermal conductive compound 111 ml tub
Aluminum mounting clip
Strap-on sensor self-vulcanizing stretch tape, 6' (1.83m) roll, 1" (2.54cm) wide
TEMPERATURE
ENCAPSULATED THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ST-R*, ST-R*R SERIES
DESCRIPTION
TM
A Division of Kele, Inc.
Precon Encapsulated Sensors provide precision remote
temperature sensing for building automation systems and
mechanical equipment room instrumentation. The active
sensing element is a highly stable precision thermistor
material or platinum RTD.
ST-R*
The sensor is encapsulated with a low mass, high-conductivity compound for good heat transfer characteristics.
It is enclosed in a tough, miniature cylinder, 0.17" (0.43
cm) in diameter, which is small enough to be installed in
most HVAC thermostat enclosures.
ST-R*R
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Lifetime warranty
±0.36°F (±0.2°C) thermistor accuracy
±1°F (±0.53°C) RTD accuracy
Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves
Adaptable miniature sensor
High heat dissipation constant
Easy to mount with clips
Pre-aged, highly stable thermistor material
OPTIONS
•
•
•
•
•
•
25' (7.6m) of 24 AWG zipcord
Matched sensor pairs
Dual sensor probe
Rugged sensor coating
Wide temperature range -30° to 230°F (-34° to 110°C)
NIST traceable
APPLICATION
ST-R*
The ST-R * Series Encapsulated Sensor (white) is
intended for indoor use only, in areas not subject to
moisture or condensation. The sensor may be installed
under the cover of an existing pneumatic thermostat.
Caution should be exercised when applying the sensor
to existing electric thermostats. Heat is often generated
by anticipators or other electronics that will affect the
sensor reading. The sensor operating range is 35° to
140°F (2° to 60°C). Do not use in conditions below 35°F
(2°C) or where condensation could occur.
ST-R*R
The ST-R * R Series Ruggedized Encapsulated
Sensor (red) is suitable for temperature extremes and
is immune to the effects of moisture and condensation.
Precon uses a three-stage, rugged coating process to
moistureproof any sensor which is to be used below
ambient dewpoint. The sensor operating range is -30°
to 230°F (-34° to 110°C).
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensing element
Accuracy
Thermistor
RTD
Sensor types available
Thermistor
RTD
Thermistor (thermal resistor)
RTD (resistance temperature device)
±0.36°F (0.2°C)
±0.1°F (0.53°C)
2.252 k1, 3 k1, 10 k1, 20 k1, 100 k1
Platinum 1001, 385-degree curve
Platinum 10001, 385-degree curve
Platinum 10001, 375-degree curve
Temp range
35° to 140°F (2° to 60°C)
R option (Thermistor) -30° to 230°F (-34° to 110°C)
R option (RTD)
-68° to 240°F (-55° to 60°C)
Temp response
Thermistor
Negative temperature coefficient
RTD
Positive temperature coefficient
Sensitivity
Stability
Thermistor
RTD
Heat dissipation
constant
Wire
Connection
Mounting
See Sensor Resistance Charts
in the “Technical Reference” section
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
<0.09°F (0.05°C) over five years
2.7 mW/°C (power needed to
raise the temperature by 1°C)
24 AWG, UL low voltage to 105°C
8' (2.4m) of 24 AWG prestripped pigtails
Directly to wall or customersupplied enclosure using
customer-supplied clips
25
TEMPERATURE
FEATURES
TEMPERATURE
ENCAPSULATED THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ST-R*, ST-R*R SERIES
MOUNTING
Mounting
Secure to enclosure or wall using cable ties, clips, or brackets. To obtain
optimum performance, the sensor enclosure/assembly must be highly
conductive. Any sensor element surrounded by insulating media will not Vents
perform properly at all temperatures or with the proper temperature
response times. An accurate room sensor must have good ventilation and a
high thermal-conducting metal which is in direct contact with the sensor.
The enclosure must be insulated from the building mounting surface to limit
wall temperature influence on the sensor.
Wiring
Terminate using butt splices or solder connections (wire nuts are not
recommended). Use the full length wire lead to avoid condensation or
moisture migration from the field connection.
Customer-Supplied
Enclosure
Aluminum Mounting
Clip Accessory PN-46
Rear View
DIMENSIONS
TEMPERATURE
in
(cm)
24 AWG, 8' (2.4m) zipcord lead wire
24 AWG, 8' (2.4m) zipcord lead wire
0.18
(0.46)
0.17
(0.43)
0.5
(1.27)
0.5
(1.27)
ST-R*
3.5
(8.89)
R Option Rugged Coating
ST-R*R
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
ST-R3
ST-R21
ST-R22
ST-R24
ST-R27
ST-R42
ST-R81
ST-R85
ST-R91
ST-R3
DESCRIPTION
10,000Ω encapsulated thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III material (gray leads)
2252Ω encapsulated thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (green leads)
3000Ω encapsulated thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (blue leads)
10,000Ω encapsulated thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (yellow leads)
100,000Ω encapsulated thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (gray leads)
20,000Ω encapsulated thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV material (green leads)
100Ω encapsulated RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads)
1000Ω encapsulated RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads)
1000Ω encapsulated RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 375 platinum curve (green leads)
OPTIONS
R
Rugged (3.5" moistureproof coating; adding a # following the R extends the coating in feet)
X25 25' (7.6m) lead length
XP
Matched sensor pair, matched to ±0.1°F, 0.55°C (must order two sensors)
XD
Dual sensors in one probe
XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32°F (0°C)
XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32°F/158°F (0°/70°C)
R
X25
Example: ST-R3R-X25 10,000Ω Type III thermistor with 3.5" rugged coating
and 25' (7.6m) cable length
UR
WMB-1
WMB-2
PN-46
26
RELATED PRODUCTS
Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice
Vented wall enclosure
Vented executive wall enclosure
Aluminum mounting clip
TEMPERATURE
KELE ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSOR, THERMISTOR AND RTD
KTR* SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The KTR* Room Temperature Sensor is a cost-effective room temperature sensor with an accuracy of
±0.5°F (0.28°C). The thermistor is made of a very stable, pre-aged material that offers the reliability needed
in control systems. The platinum RTD comes in 1001
and 10001 and is compatible with most HVAC systems. All sensors come with a three-year warranty.
OPTIONS
• Setpoint slide adjust
• Momentary override switch
• RJ11 communication jack
• NIST certificate
• 24V LED lamp
• OEM models available
• Custom logos
APPLICATION
The KTR * Series is designed to be wall mounted
indoors where appearance and accuracy are important.
The sensor may be mounted directly to the drywall or
on standard electrical boxes. It comes in all the most
common thermistors or RTDs. Options may be mixed
and matched for each application.
KTR*
KTR*-A10K-J1-LED-MD
DIMENSIONS
.5
(1.27)
3.31
(8.40)
2.64
(6.7)
4.5
(11.43)
1.31
(2.54)
LED
MB
1.25
(3.2)
Wire Way
Back Plate
0.33 Adjust
(.85) Tab
Typical logo
location
2.75 (6.98)
1.5
(3.8)
0.18
(.47)
Front
in
(cm)
0.94
(2.38)
Side
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensing elements
Accuracy
Sensor types
Thermistor @ 77°F
RTD @ 32°F
Temp range
Temp response
Sensitivity
Stability
Thermistor
RTD
Thermistor (thermal resistor)
RTD (platinum)
±0.5°F (0.28°C)
Connection
Mounting
2.252 k1, 3 k1, 10 k1, 20 k1,
100 k1
Platinum 1001, 385 curve
Platinum 10001, 385 curve
Platinum 10001 375 curve
35° to 140°F (2° to 60°C)
NTC - Thermistors, PTC - RTDs
See Sensor Resistance Charts in
the “Technical Reference” section
Color
Options
Override button
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
100% (no drift platinum)
Locking cover
Weight
Setpoint adjust
Comm. jack
NIST
Lamp indicator
Custom logo
Terminals
Directly to wall or customer-supplied
back box, no adapters needed for
standard outlet boxes
White plastic
N.O. form A contact in parallel with
pot or sensor with jumper
4001, 10 k1, 20 k1, or 100 k1 slide pot
RJ11, four-conductor connection
One- or two-point accuracy certificate
24 VAC/VDC LED (externally powered)
Custom printing; one-, two-,
or three-color
1/16" Allen key head
0.2 lb (0.09 kg)
27
TEMPERATURE
FEATURES
• Economical
• Attractive new design
• Three-year warranty
• ±0.5°F (0.28°C) accuracy
• Durable housing
• White color
• Thermistor or RTD
• Locking cover screws
TEMPERATURE
KELE ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSOR, THERMISTOR AND RTD
KTR* SERIES
MOUNTING AND SENSOR ONLY WIRING
WIRING TYPICAL COVER OPTIONS
Toggle bolts or other direct wall-mount screws can be used where
back box is not required. Adapters are not required when mounting
directly to electrical outlet boxes.
Basic model comes with screw terminal block, white decorator faceplate, two #6-32 screws for handibox-mounting, and two #6 x 1" screws
for direct wall-mounting. Locking cover screws are #6-32 with a 1/16"
Allen key head, installed as needed.
2
8
1
7
JP1
MB
Button
1-2
3-4
5-6
7-8
Jumper
Pot
Pot
Sensor
Sensor
RJ11 plug with cover off;
for J2 option
Push button will short out the
pot or sensor momentarily
2
1
Wire Access
Hole
Mounting Back Plate
Option Board Clip
1
J2
JP1
-
Communication Wiring
J1 or J2
-
J7
SW2
OUT
R4
R5
J3
Customer Contact
C
R3
-
LED
24V (AC/DC)
+
SENSOR
Sensor to BAS Controller
A
K
POT
Axxx Pot to BAS Controller
TB4 for MB only
MB
Button
J4
The sensor should be mounted approximately 5' (1.5m) above the floor,
on an interior wall, out of the sun, and away from any heating or cooling
generating devices.
Note: Adjust option requires option board removal to mount back plate.
K
R6
JP2
Pot Action
LED
D2
A
JP2
Cover
Locking
1/16" Allen Screws
Installed as needed
R2
+
LED
TEMPERATURE
6
8
7
1
IN
To BAS
Controller
Self-Latching
Cover
8
7
J1
+
Mounting
Screws
COVER ON
CCRJ11AD accessory;
required for J1 option
RJ11 plug
SW3
SW1
SW4
D3
RT2
Axxx
Sensor
SETPOINT ADJUST
RT1
DA RA
Shipped DA
Left to right
Low to high resistance
DA
RA
Low to high resistance
High to low resistance
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
KTR
Kele room sensor housing
SENSOR SELECTION
3
10,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III material
21
2252Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material
22
3000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material
24
10,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material
27
100,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material
42
20,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material
81
100Ω RTD, 385 platinum curve
85
1000Ω RTD, 385 platinum curve
91
1000Ω RTD, 375 platinum curve
ROOM SENSOR OPTIONS (Options to be listed alphabetically with dashes)
A400
Setpoint adjust with 400Ω span (R5 for offset), Patone 431C
A10K
Setpoint adjust with 10,000Ω span (R5 for offset), Patone 431C
A20K
Setpoint adjust with 20,000Ω span (R5 for offset), Patone 431C
A100K
Setpoint adjust with 100,000Ω span (R5 for offset), Patone 431C
CL1
Custom logo option one color, (CL2 = two color, CL3 = three color)
J1
RJ11 externally-accessible communication jack (CCRJ11AD)
J2
RJ11 internal communication jack
LED
LED lamp indicator, standard 24 VAC/VDC voltage
MB
Momentary pushbutton switch, jumpered across sensor or pot (JP1)
N1
NIST certificate, one reference point 32°F (0°C)
N2
NIST certificate, two reference points 32°/158°F (0°/70°C)
TB4
Separate termination for MB option
10-531
28
Sample Order
KTR3
Kele room sensor
with 10K Type III thermistor
KTR85-A400-MB Kele room sensor
with 1000Ω 385 RTD
with 400Ω adjust pot
and momentary switch
KTR24-N1-LED
Kele room sensor
with 10K Type II thermistor
with NIST and LED lamp
Accessories
CCRJ11AD
J1 option adaptor
KT-1
Cover mouting screwdriver
1/16" Allen/standard/philips
Logo Color Chart
Pantone 485
Pantone 356
Pantone 492C
Pantone 124C
Pantone 300
Pantone 431C
Pantone 299
Pantone 6C
Other Pantone colors available upon request.
RELATED PRODUCTS
Wall adapter plate 7" x 5.25"
TEMPERATURE
KELE DUCT, IMMERSION, AND OSA TEMPERATURE SENSORS
KTD, KTW, KTO SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele KTD* Duct, KTW* Immersion, and KTO*
OSA sensors are designed to be cost-effective with
accuracies of ±0.5˚F (0.28˚C). Each uses metal enclosures and is constructed for easy installation with any
building automation system (BAS). The thermistor is
made of very stable, pre-aged material that offers longlife reliability for HVAC control. The platinum RTD
comes in 1001 and 10001 versions. All sensors come
with a three-year warranty.
KTD3
KTDNB3
FEATURES
• Economical
• Metal enclosures with SS probes
• Three-year warranty
• ±0.5˚F (±0.28˚C) accuracy
• Thermistor or RTD sensor selections
• Simple traditional mounting
KTW3
KTWNB3
KTWNB3-LT
KTW3-W
KTD3-W
KTO3
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensing elements
Enclosure
Thermistor (thermal resistor)
RTD (platinum)
±0.5°F (0.28°C)
Metal NEMA 1,
weatherproof for OSA standard
Seamless 304 stainless steel tube,
1/4" OD
1.2 lb (0.54 kg)
Probe
Accuracy
Sensor types available
Thermistor @ 77°F
2.252k, 3k, 10k, 20k, 100 k1
RTD @ 32°F
Platinum 1001, 10001 385 curve
Platinum 10001 375 curve
Temp range
-30˚ to 230˚F (-34˚ to 110˚C)
Temp response
NTC - Thermistors, PTC - RTDs
Stability
Thermistor
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
RTD
100% (no drift platinum)
Connections
8', 22 AWG wire leads
Mounting
Tabs with 1/2" conduit fittings
Weight
Options
D
GF
LT
NB
Nx
W
Dual sensors in one probe
Greenfield fitting
Liquid-tight fitting
No back box with 1/2" MNPT
NIST for 1 or 2 reference points
Weatherproof enclosure
(duct, immersion)
Three years
Warranty
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
4.0
(10.2)
3.88
(9.89)
Mounting T-Bar
4.63
(11.75)
1.70
(4.3)
WEL-B
2.88
(7.30)
Vinyl Grommet
0.25
(0.64)
4.0
(10.2)
1.70
(4.3)
1.5
(3.81)
1/2" NPT
4.87
(12.38)
4.87
(12.38)
KTD*
6.13
(15.56)
0.25
(0.63)
5.13
(13.03)
KTW*
3.25
(8.26)
2.0
(5.08)
Foam Gasket
Stainless
Sheathed
Sensor
KTO*
29
TEMPERATURE
KTD3-GF
OPTIONS
• NIST certification
• Weatherproof enclosures
• Liquid tight
• Greenfield fittings
• Dual sensors in one probe
TEMPERATURE
KELE DUCT, IMMERSION, AND OSA TEMPERATURE SENSORS
KTD, KTW, KTO SERIES
MOUNTING/WIRING
Wiring
Terminate with butt splices or soldering. Wire nuts are not recommended.
Mounting KTD*
Drill a 5/8" (1.6 cm) hole for probe insertion.
Using the provided #6 screws, secure the
box to the duct either with the T-bar mounting ears or through the box holes.
Mounting KTW*
Install the well into customer-supplied
1/2" NPT saddle (or Thredolet®). Screw
the sensor into the well via the 1/8" NPT
brass fitting.
Install the wells as shown to
obtain optimum well strength
Flow
5/8" (1/6 cm) hole
Flow
Mounting KTO*
Toggle bolts or other direct wall mount
screws can be used for outside mounting.
For conduit connections, 3/4" NPT threads
are available in the back and side.
3/4" NPT
Side and rear
Use AD-2
adaptor
for 1/2" NPT
applications
Correct position for mounting
outdoor air sensor
Angle must not allow end of well
to contact the other side of pipe.
Do Not mount
sensor in vertical
position with
the weather
shield pointing up.
Mounting T-bar
Order wells separately
Shaded side of building
TEMPERATURE
Preferred mounting location
for outdoor air sensor
For best results, do not mount above doors, windows,
air intakes, or exhausts.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
KTD
KTW
KTO
KTDNB
KTWNB
KTD
DESCRIPTION
Duct temperature sensor
Well immersion temperature sensor (order wells separately)
OSA temperature sensor (weatherproof standard)
Duct temperature sensor with no box
Well immersion temperature sensor with no box (order wells separately)
SENSOR SELECTION
3
10,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III
21
2252Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II
22
3000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II
24
10,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II
27
100,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II
42
20,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV
81
100Ω RTD, 385 platinum
85
1000Ω RTD, 385 platinum
91
1000Ω RTD, 375 platinum
OPTIONS
D
Dual sensors in one probe
GF Greenfield fitting
LT Liquid-tight fitting
N1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32°F (0°C)
N2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32°/160°F (0°/77°C)
W Weatherproof housing
3
N1
Example: KTD-3-N1 Duct sensor with 10,000Ω thermistor and NIST certificate
UR
TCC-12
TCC-111
AD-2
WEL-B
WEL-S
30
RELATED PRODUCTS
Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice
Single application thermal compound tube
Thermal conductive compound 111 ml tub
3/4" to 1/2" NPT adaptor
Brass well for 1/4" probe, 1/2" Thredolet®
Stainless steel well for 1/4" probe, 1/2" Thredolet®
TEMPERATURE
DUCT, IMMERSION, AND OSA THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
US*, OSA* SERIES
DESCRIPTION
US * /OSA * Series Duct, Immersion, and OSA
Temperature Sensors are very economical and, with
accuracies of ±0.5°F (0.28°C), are specifically designed
for HVAC applications. The mounting styles are based
on proven techniques for installation efficiency and use
stainless steel probes for durability. The sensor comes
with a three-year warranty and is made with the highestquality material that offers the reliability needed in
HVAC systems.
US*
FEATURES
Economical
Proven mounting designs
Three-year warranty
±0.5°F (±0.28°C) thermistor accuracy
±1°F (±0.53°C) RTD accuracy
NEMA 3R enclosure
OSA*
PROBE TYPES
The US* Series Sensors use a proven universal style
enclosure for duct and immersion applications. The
direct-mount design incorporates a 2.5" x 2.5" (6.4 x 6.4
cm) termination box with a 4.87" (12.4 cm) stainless
steel probe. The probe may be inserted into a duct with
0.4" (1 cm) hole or immersion using a Model WEL-B or a
WEL-S.
The OSA* Series Sensors are used for outside air temperature sensing. The design allows for two-point
mounting. The weather shield protects the encapsulated sensor probe from the effects of rain, sleet, and
snow.
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensing element
Accuracy
Thermistor (thermal resistor)
RTD (resistance temperature device)
Temp range
Temp response
Thermistor
RTD
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
<0.09°F (0.05°C) over five years
Connection
18" (46cm) 24 AWG pigtails
Mounting
Directly to well, duct, or wall
Probe
304 stainless steel (US*)
Encapsulated (OSA*)
Sensitivity
See Sensor Resistance Charts
in the “Technical Reference” section
Enclosure
White plastic (for FR, plenum rating
use the ST-U*)
±0.5°F (0.28°C)
Sensor types available
Thermistor
2.252k, 3k, 10k, 20k, 100 k1
RTD
Platinum 1001, 385 curve
Platinum 10001, 385 curve
Platinum 10001, 375 curve
Thermistor
RTD
Stability
Thermistor
RTD
-30° to 230°F (-34° to 110°C)
-68° to 240°F (-55° to 60°C)
Negative temperature coefficient
Positive temperature coefficient
31
TEMPERATURE
•
•
•
•
•
•
TEMPERATURE
DUCT, IMMERSION, OSA, THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
US*, OSA* SERIES
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
3.25 (8.26)
3.20 (8.12)
Removeable
Sensor Cover
2.5 (6.35)
2.50
(6.35)
1.30 (3.30)
2.3
(5.84)
0.88 (2.24)
1/2" Conduit Hole*
(face down)
1/8" NPT
4.87
(12.38)
Mounting
Tabs
Mounting Box
3.30
(8.38)
0.25
(0.63)
US*
Multipurpose
Duct and Immersion Sensor
TEMPERATURE
Mounting Tabs (2)
4.10 (10.4)
2.50 (6.35)
1/2" Conduit Hole*
(face down)
*Must face down
to maintain watertight integrity
OSA*
Outside Air Sensor
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
US
OSA
US
DESCRIPTION
Universal-mount sensor, duct and immersion (order wells separately)
OSA sensor
THERMISTOR SENSOR TYPE
3
10,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III material
21
2,252Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material
22
3,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material
24
10,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material
27
100,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material
42
20,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV material
81
100Ω [email protected] 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads)
85
1,000Ω RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads)
91
1,000Ω RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 375 platinum curve (green leads)
3
Example: US-3 10,000Ω Type III universal mount thermistor sensor
WEL-B
WEL-S
TCC-12
TCC-111
32
RELATED PRODUCTS
Brass well for US sensors
Stainless steel well for US sensors
Single application thermal compound
Thermal compound 111 ml tub
TEMPERATURE
BAS/HVAC TEMPERATURE SENSORS
ACI SERIES
DESCRIPTION
ACI Series sensors are designed specifically for HVAC system
temperature control. The room, duct, immersion, and OSA sensors come in thermistor and RTD sensor curves compatible with
most BAS systems available today.
Room sensors are vented for indoor use with options that
include set point adjust, push-button override, communication
jacks and custom logos. Duct sensors come with a foam-backed
handy box and 8" probe. Averaging sensors come with a foambacked handy box and in 12' (3.7m) or 24' (7.3) lengths.
Immersion sensors come with a handy box and are 4" (10.1 cm)
long. The 1/4" probes fit tightly into the separately ordered stainless steel or brass well (WELB-H or WELS-H). Strap-on sensors
come with a handy box and stainless steel strap for 5" (12.7 cm)
pipes. The 1.5" (3.8 cm) copper plate with foam-backed pad
offers excellent continuous pipe contact. OSA sensors mount in
a NEMA 4 box with weather shield and easy-mount tabs.
ACI/AN-I4
ACI/AN-D
ACI/AN-O
ACI/AN-AV
FEATURES
±0.36°F (0.2°C) accuracy
Three-year warranty
Wide selection of thermistor or RTD curves
Stainless steel probes
Special lengths available
Delta-style room enclosure
Custom logos
ACI/AN-BP
ACI/AN-R
ACI/AN-S
PROBE APPLICATIONS
The ACI/*R Room Sensor should be mounted approximately
5' (12.7 cm) above the floor. It can be mounted to a standard
back box or directly to the wall using appropriate anchors for
the wall covering.
The ACI/*D Duct Sensor should be mounted close to the
center of the duct and penetrate through any duct insulation at
least 1" (2.5 cm) into the airflow. The probes are sensitive
within 1" of the tip and insert through a 3/8" (1 cm) hole. Use
standard metal screws to secure to the duct.
The ACI/*A Averaging Duct Sensor should be mounted
across a duct in a serpentine fashion with bends in a smooth
ark using an M-648 clip. The RTD probe is sensitive for the
entire length, while the thermistor is sensitive at nine evenly
spaced sensor locations. Use standard metal screws to
secure to the duct.
The ACI/*O OSA Sensor should be located on an outside
wall facing north in the northern hemisphere. Using the tabs
on the box, mount to the exterior wall using screws appropriate for the wall construction.
The ACI/*I Immersion Sensor threads into a separately purchased 1/2" (1.27 cm) well (WELB-H or WELS-H), which is
secured into the pipe to a customer-supplied 1/2" saddle or
Thredolet®. The probe is tight fitting for accurate readings.
Faster response can be achieved by using TCC-12 thermal
conductive compound at the bottom of the well.
The ACI/*S Strap-On Sensor mounts directly to a 2" to 5"
(5.1 to 12.7 cm) pipe. Be sure to clean off any insulation or
rust to promote solid contact of the copper plate to the pipe.
Wrap and tighten the strap around the pipe and compress the
foam fully for a firm mount. Faster response can be achieved
by using TCC-12 thermal conductive compound.
The ACI/*BP Stainless Steel Sensor is for under-insulation
mounting and direct contact to the pipe. Be sure to clean off
any insulation or rust to promote solid contact, and secure
with tie raps so the probe is parallel to the pipe.
All field wiring is terminated to a terminal block or UR moisture-resistant butt slice connectors or soldering.
* Sensor type
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensing element
Thermistor (TH), NTC,
RTD, PTC, 385 1/1/°C
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.36°F (0.2°C),
RTD ±0.28°F (0.15°C) ±0.06%,
RTD averaging ±0.5°F (0.4°C)
Sensor types available
Thermistor 2252 2,2521 @ 77°F (25°C)
3K
3,0001 @ 77°F (25°C)
5K
5 k1 @ 77°F (25°C)
20K
20 k1 @ 77°F (25°C)
CP
10 k1 @ 77°F (25°C)
AN
10 k1 @ 77°F (25°C)
100K 100K @ 77°F (25°C)
RTD
100-2 1001 @ 32°F (0°C) 385 platinum curve
1000-2 1 k1 @ 32°F (0°C) 385 platinum curve
Stability
Thermistor
RTD
Temp range
Room
Probe
Averaging
Ambient RH
Dissipation constant
Sensitivity
Wiring
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
<±0.1°C drift
0° to 150°F (-17° to 65°C)
-40° to 302°F (-40° to 150°C)
-40° to 275°F (-40° to 135°C)
10% to 90% RH noncondensing
Thermistor, 3 mW/°C
See Sensor Resistance Charts in
the “Technical Reference” section of
the Trane catalog
10" of 22 AWG wire or terminal strip
33
TEMPERATURE
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
TEMPERATURE
BAS/HVAC TEMPERATURE SENSORS
ACI SERIES
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
2.25
(5.7)
1/2 NPT
Top & Back
2.77
(7.0)
1.15
(2.9)
0.89
(2.3)
D
8" (20.3 cm)
A12 12' (3.6 m)
A24 24' (7.3 m)
5.5
(14.0)
4.5
(11.53)
0.125 (0.3)
Foam
Insulation
3.84
(9.8)
1/2" Male
NPT Threads
1.70
(4.3)
4.51
(10.4)
0.25 (0.64)
1.70
(4.3)
2.15
(5.5)
1.6
(3.0)
0.90
(2.3)
4.81
(12.2)
4.0
0.76 (1.9) (10.2)
4.0
(10.2)
1/2" Conduit
Knockouts
1/2" Male NPT
Nylon Fitting
0.60
(1.5)
2.75
(7.0)
0.92
(2.3)
ACI/*R
Room
Worm
Gear
ACI/*-D/AV
Duct/Averaging
5.0
(12.7)
ACI/*-O
Outside Air
24" Leads
ACI/*I4
Immersion
0.125 (0.3)
Foam
Insulation
Pad
4.50
(11.4)
1.5 x 1.5
(3.8 x 3.8)
Foam Pad
TEMPERATURE
1.7 (4.3)
ACI/*-S
Strap-On
* Sensor Type
1" Long x
0.250" O.D.
Bullet Probe
ACI/*-BP
Stainless Steel Probe
2.75
(7.0)
ACI/*-SP
Stainless Plate
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
ACI/AN
ACI/CP
ACI/20K
ACI/100K
ACI/100-2
ACI/1000-2
ACI/AN
DESCRIPTION (choose one)
Thermistor 10 kΩ @ 77°F (25°C) (ACI/10AN) 3
Thermistor 10 kΩ @ 77°F (25°C) (ACI/10CP) 2
Thermistor 20 kΩ @ 77°F (25°C) (ACI/20K)
Thermistor 100 kΩ @ 77°F (25°C) (ACI/100K)
RTD 100Ω, two-wire 385 curve, @ 32°F (0°C)
RTD 1000Ω, two-wire 385 curve, @ 32°F (0°C)
MOUNTING CONFIGURATION (choose one)
R
Room mounted
RS
Room with set point (choose pot and indication below)
RO
Room with override button
RSO Room with set point and override button (choose pot and indication below)
SP
Room stainless steel flush mount
D8
Duct mount with 8" (20.3 cm) insertion
A12 Averaging with 12' (3.6m) length
A24 Averaging with 24' (7.3m) length
I4
Immersion with 4" (10.1 cm) pipe insertion
S
Strap on with 5" (12.7 cm) diameter stainless steel strap
O
Outside air mounting
BP
Stainless steel bullet probe
OPTION LIST (multiple selection)
RJ4 Four-pin RJ11 (R type sensors only)
RJ6 Six-pin RJ11 (R type sensors only)
400 Adjust pot 0-400Ω (RS and RSO type sensors only) [direct acting]
1K
Adjust pot 0-1 kΩ (RS and RSO type sensors only) [reverse acting]
10K Adjust pot 0-10 kΩ (RS and RSO type sensors only) [reverse acting]
CW Adjust indication warm/cool (RS and RSO type sensors only)
F
Adjust indication 55° to 85°F (RS and RSO type sensors only)
Adjust indication 10° to 30°C (RS and RSO type sensors only)
C
XK
Custom logo (customer supplied artwork GIF, TIF, EPS, PSD, or JPEG)
XK1 Custom logo (>100 sensors, with customer supplied art work)
RS
Choose only 1.
Choose only 1 for RS or RSO.
Choose one for RS or RSO.
Choose only 1.
RJ4-10K-F Example: ACI/AN-RS-RJ4-10K-F ACI room 10 kΩ thermistor sensor with four-pin RJ11
and 10 kΩ set point and 55° to 85°F adjust indication
RELATED PRODUCTS
UR
Moisture resistant three-wire butt splice
TCC-12 Thermal conductive compound tube, 12 ml
WELB-H Brass immersion well
TCC-111 Thermal conductive compound tub, 11 ml
WELS-H Stainless steel immersion well
34
TEMPERATURE
BAPI BAS ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSORS AND TRANSMITTERS
BA ROOM SERIES
FEATURES
• ±0.36°F (±0.2°C) thermistor accuracy
• ±0.216°F (±0.12°C) RTD accuracy
• ±2.7°F (±1.5°C) semiconductor accuracy
• 4-20 mA transmitter with icepoint option
• Lifetime limited sensor warranty
• Wide selection of thermistor, RTD, and semiconductor curves
• Wide selection of enclosure designs
OPTIONS
• Setpoint (multiple legends available)
• Standard or flush override buttons
• RJ11, RJ12, RJ46, and phone
communication jacks
• Bimetal and digital display
• Customer or contractor logos
BA/*-B
BA/*-B-84LG-N
BA/*-RSZ
BA/*-RSZBM5090
BA/*-R
BA/*-R-84LGN-BM5090
BA/*-SP
BA/*-SPC40-02-N
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensor
Accuracy
Thermistor
RTD
RTD avg
Semiconductor (SC)
Sensor types available
Thermistor @ 77°F
(25°C)
RTD @ 32°F (O°C)
SC, AD592 @ -25°C
SC, LM334 @ 25°C
Thermistor, NTC
RTD, PTC, 385 or 375 1/1/°C
Semiconductor 0.556 mA/°F (1 µA°C)
±0.36°F (0.2°C)
±0.216°F (0.12°C), ±0.12%
±0.93°F (0.52°C)
±2.7°F (1.5°C)
Stability
Thermistor
RTD
Semiconductor
Temp range
Dissipation constant
Wiring
Enclosure material
1.8 k1, 3 k1, 3.3 k1, 10 k1 Type 2,
10 k1 Type 3, 20 k1,
50 k1, 100 k1
1001 385, 1 k1 385, 1 k1 375
247 µA
398 µA
Agency
<1.8°F (0.1°C) over five years
<±0.1°C drift
±0.1°C
32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Thermistor, 2.7 mW/°C
Enclosures use terminals
Flush plates use 22 AWG leads
ABS plastic, UL94V-0,
SP=stainless steel
CE, RoHS
TRANSMITTER SPECIFICATIONS
Sensor
Supply voltage
Output
Load impedance
Accuracy
1 k1 385 platinum RTD
7-40 VDC
4-20 mA
8501 @ 24 VDC
±0.1% of span
Ambient RH
Ambient Temperature
Range
0% to 95% noncondensing
-20° to 158°F (-29° to 70°C)
Zero: -100° to 900°F (-73° to 482°C)
Span: 30° to 800°F (17° to 444°C)
35
TEMPERATURE
DESCRIPTION
The BA Series room sensors and transmitters are
designed specifically for HVAC systems. The room
sensors come in a variety of enclosure styles, including
Delta, Precon, SS plate, and BAPIstat II. They are
available in eight thermistor, three RTD, and two semiconductor sensors, which makes the BA sensors compatible with every BAS system in use today. The transmitters come in 4-20 mA with optional icepoint calibration.
TEMPERATURE
BAPI BAS ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSORS AND TRANSMITTERS
BA ROOM SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
TEMPERATURE
MODEL
BA/
BA/
DESCRIPTION
Room temperature sensor surface mount
REQUIRED SENSOR TYPE (differential inputs available upon request)
1.8K
Thermistor 1.8 kΩ @ 77°F (25°C)
3K
Thermistor 3000Ω @ 77°F (25°C)
3.3K
Thermistor 3.3 kΩ @ 77°F (25°C)
10K2
Thermistor 10,000Ω @ 77°F (25°C), Type 2
10K3
Thermistor 10,000Ω @ 77°F (25°C), Type 3
20K
Thermistor 20,000Ω @ 77°F (25°C)
50K
Thermistor 50,000Ω @ 77°F (25°C)
100K
Thermistor 100,000Ω @ 77°F (25°C)
100
RTD 100Ω @32°F (0°C), 385 curve
1K8
RTD 1000Ω @32°F (0°C), 385 curve
1K7
RTD 1000Ω @32°F (0°C), 375 curve
334
LM334 semiconductor
592
AD592 semiconductor (each unit provided with error and offset data)
T1K (0/100°F)
4-20 mA transmitter (0/100°F) with 1000Ω RTD, 385 curve or custom range
T1KM (0/100°F) 4-20 mA transmitter (0/100°F) with 1000Ω RTD, 385 curve matched @0°C or custom range
REQUIRED ROOM ENCLOSURE
R
Delta style enclosure
B
BAPIstat II style enclosure
RSZ Precon executive style enclosure
SP
Stainless steel plate style enclosure
SETPOINT OPTION LIST (other Ω values and legends available)
40L2
Adjust 0Ω-1000Ω, 55° to 85°F legend (R and B only)
40L6
Adjust 0Ω-1000Ω, cool/warm legend (R and B only)
25L2
Adjust 800Ω-1200Ω, 55° to 85°F legend (R and B only)
25L6
Adjust 800Ω-1200Ω, cool/warm legend (R and B only)
84L2
Adjust 10,000Ω-30,000Ω, 55° to 85°F legend (R and B only)
84L6
Adjust 10,000Ω-30,000Ω, cool/warm legend (R and B only)
+
Adjust 10,000Ω-30,000Ω, cool/warm legend, sensor override button, RJ11 jack (RSZ only)
C40
Adjust 0-1000Ω, 50° to 90°F legend (SP only)
Z40
Adjust 0-1000Ω, +/- legend (SP only)
C84
Adjust 10,000Ω-30,000Ω, 50° to 90°F legend (SP only)
Z84
Adjust 10,000Ω-30,000Ω, +/- legend (SP only)
OVERRIDE SWITCH (not available in RSZ enclosure)
J
Override as a separate input termination (R and B only, not for T1K transmitters)
N
Override parallel with sensor (R and B only)
P
Override parallel with setpoint adjust POT (R and B only)
O-N
Standard override push button, parallel with sensor (SP only)
O2-N
Low profile override push button, parallel with sensor (SP only, not for T1K)
K-N
Key switch override, momentary N.O., parallel with sensor (SP only)
COMMUNICATION JACK (not available on RSZ enclosure)
C35 3.5 mm phone jack (not available for T1K transmitters)
C11 RJ11 (4 pin) jack (R and B only, not available for T1K transmitters)
C12 RJ12 (6 pin) jack (R and B only, not available for T1K transmitters)
C45 RJ45 (8 pin) jack (R and B only, not available for T1K transmitters)
TEMPERATURE INDICATOR SECURITY OPTIONS
BM5090 Bimetal thermometer 50° to 90°F (R and RSZ only)
BM1030 Bimetal thermometer 10° to 30°C (R and RSZ only)
SEC1
Security screws (SP only)
10K3
R
40L2
N
C11
BM5090 Example: BA/10K3-R-40L2-N-C11-BM5090 Delta room 10 kΩ thermistor
sensor with 1000Ω, adjust POT 55° to 85°F legend, button, jack,
and temperature indication
BAPI STAT II WITH DIGITAL DISPLAY (Special order, call Trane)
RELATED PRODUCTS
BA/ADP-525-7-WMW
BA/ADP-525-7-OFW
BA/ADP-525-7-CPW
36
Warm white 7" x 5.25" adaptor plate
Off white 7" x 5.25" adaptor plate
Copla white 7" x 5.25" adaptor plate
BA/Foamback
White foam back insulator
BA/Foamback-Gray Gray foam back insulator
UR
Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice
TEMPERATURE
BAPI BAS IMMERSION AND OSA TEMPERATURE SENSORS AND
TRANSMITTERS
BA PROBE SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The BA Probe Series duct, immersion, and OSA
probe sensors and transmitters are designed specifically for HVAC systems. The probes are available in a
variety of easy-to-mount installation types, and they
come in eight thermistor, three RTD, and two semiconductor sensors. The BA probe sensors are compatible
with every BAS system in use today. The transmitters
come in 4-20 mA and optional icepoint calibration.
BA/*-D8-WP
OPTIONS
• Weatherproof enclosures
• UV-rated plastic enclosures
• Variable lengths
• Flexible and rigid averaging probes
• Strap-on sensor designs
BA/*-I4-WP
BA/*-STP-JB
BA/*-A8-EU
BA/*-S-JB
BA/*-RA12-JB
BA/*-O-EUO
BA/*-RPP-NB
BA/*-PP18-NB
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensor
Accuracy
Thermistor
RTD
RTD avg
Semiconductor (SC)
Sensor types available
Thermistor @ 77°F
(25°C)
Thermistor, NTC,
RTD, PTC, 385 or 375 1/1/°C
Semiconductor 0.556 mA/°F (1 µA°C)
±0.36°F (0.2°C)
±0.216°F (0.12°C), ±0.12%
±0.93°F (0.52°C)
±2.7°F (1.5°C)
1.8 k1, 3 k1, 3.3 k1, 10 k1 Type 2,
10 k1 Type 3, 20 k1, 50 k1,
100 k1
RTD @ 32°F (0°C)
1001 385, 1 k1 385, 1 k1 375
SC, AD592 @-13°F (-25°C) 248 µA
SC, LM334 @ 77°F (25°C) 398 µA
Stability
Thermistor
RTD
Semiconductor
Temp range
Thermistor, RTD
Semiconductor
Dissipation constant
Wiring
Agency
<1.8°F (0.1°C) over five years
<±0.1°C drift
±0.1°C
40° to 185°F (-40° to 85°C)
-13° to 221°F (-25° to 105°C)
Thermistor, 2.7 mW/°C
22 AWG wire-etched Teflon leads
CE, RoHS
TRANSMITTER SPECIFICATIONS
Sensor
Supply voltage
Output
Load impedance
Accuracy
1 k1 385 platinum RTD
7-40 VDC
4-20 mA
8501 @ 24 VDC
±0.1% of span
Ambient RH
Ambient Temperature
Range
0% to 95% noncondensing
-20° to 158°F (-29° to 70°C)
Zero: -100° to 900°F (-73° to 482°C)
Span: 30° to 800°F (17° to 444°C)
37
TEMPERATURE
FEATURES
• ±0.36°F (±0.2°C) thermistor accuracy
• ±0.216°F (±0.12°C) RTD accuracy
• ±2.7°F (±1.5°C) semiconductor accuracy
• 4-20 mA transmitter with icepoint accuracy
• Lifetime limited sensor warranty
• Wide selection of thermistor, RTD, and semiconductor curves
• Wide selection of mounting styles
TEMPERATURE
BAPI BAS IMMERSION AND OSA TEMPERATURE SENSORS AND
TRANSMITTERS
BA PROBE SERIES
DIMENSIONS
4, 8, 12, or 18
(101.6, 203.2, 304.8, or 457.2)
or averaging 12" to 24'
2.31
(58.7)
in
(mm)
3.51, 5.76, or 8.76
(89.2, 146.3, or 222.5)
2.16
(54.9)
1.99
(50.5)
1/2" NPT
Typical
2.16
(54.9)
1/2" NPT
3.875
(98.6)
4.19
(106.4)
4.50
(114.3)
4.19
(106.4)
4.10
(104.4)
3.80
(96.5)
0.25
(6.4)
0.25
(6.4)
Medical-grade
Closed Cell Foam
Insulating Pad
4, 8, 12, or 18
(101.6, 203.2, 304.8, or 457.2)
or averaging 12" to 24'
(JB) Duct Probe
2.13
(54.1)
0.25
(6.4)
Medical-grade
Closed Cell Foam
Insulating Pad
Weathertight Enclosure (EU/EUO)
Duct Probe
0.25
(6.4)
Medical-grade
Closed Cell
Foam
Insulating Pad
0.25
(6.4)
1.99
(50.5)
0.25
(6.4)
Medical-grade
Closed Cell Foam
Insulating Pad
(JB) Immersion Probe
2.75
(69.9)
Vented
Sensor
Guard
5.0
(127.0)
(WP) OSA Probe
TEMPERATURE
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
BA/
BA/
DESCRIPTION
Probe temperature sensor
REQUIRED SENSOR TYPE (differential inputs available upon request)
1.8K
Thermistor 1.8 kΩ @ 77°F (25°C)
3K
Thermistor 3000Ω @ 77°F (25°C)
3.3K
Thermistor 3.3 kΩ @ 77°F (25°C)
10K2
Thermistor 10,000Ω @ 77°F (25°C), Type 2
10K3
Thermistor 10,000Ω @ 77°F (25°C), Type 3
20K
Thermistor 20,000Ω @ 77°F (25°C)
50K
Thermistor 50,000Ω @ 77°F (25°C)
100K
Thermistor 100,000Ω @ 77°F (25°C)
100
RTD 100Ω @32°F (0°C), 385 curve
1K8
RTD 1000Ω @32°F (0°C), 385 curve
1K7
RTD 1000Ω @32°F (0°C), 375 curve
334
LM334 semiconductor
592
AD592 semiconductor (each unit provided with error and offset data; not available in averaging sensor)
T1K (0/100°F)
4-20 mA transmitter (0/100°F) with 1000Ω RTD, 385 curve or custom range
T1KM (0/100°F) 4-20 mA transmitter (0/100°F) with 1000Ω RTD, 385 curve matched @0°C or custom range
REQUIRED PROBE TYPE AND LENGTH
D8
Duct mount with 8" probe (other lengths available 4", 12", 18")
A8
Flexible averaging probe 8' long (AD592 sensor not available)
A12
Flexible averaging probe 12' long (AD592 sensor not available)
A24
Flexible averaging probe 24' long (AD592 sensor not available)
RA12
Rigid averaging probe 12" long (AD592 sensor not available)
RA2
Rigid averaging probe 24" long (AD592 sensor not available)
RA4
Rigid averaging probe 48" long (AD592 sensor not available)
I2
Immersion probe 2" long, 1/2" well thread
I4
Immersion probe 4" long, 1/2" well thread (other lengths available as specified)
S
SS clamp-on sensor for 2" to 4.5" diameter pipe and 1.25" copper plate pad
STP
Spring extended strap-on sensor for 5" to 14.5" diameter pipe and 1.25" extended copper plate pad
O
OSA probe 5" long
PP-18" Encapsulated sensor probe plenum-rated with 18" leads (other lengths available as specified)
RPP-18" Stainless steel remote probe plenum-rated sensor with 18" leads (other lengths available as specified)
REQUIRED MOUNTING ENCLOSURE (JB is standard for D, A, RA, I, S, and STP sensors)
JB
2" x 4" J-box with 1/2" knockouts (D, A, RA, I, S, and STP sensors only)
NB
No box with 18" leads (D, PP, A, RA, and RPP sensors only)
WP
NEMA 3R weatherproof enclosure (D, A, RA, I, O, PP, and RPP sensors only)
EU
Weathertight IP66 ABS plastic enclosure (D, A, RA, I, PP, and RPP sensors only)
EUO Weathertight IP66 UV-rated enclosure (D, A, RA, I, O, PP, and RPP sensors only)
10K3
D8
JB
Example: BA/10K3-D8-JB BAPI 8" duct 10,000Ω thermistor sensor with JB box
RELATED PRODUCTS
UR
Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice
WS2.5 304 SS immersion well for an I2 sensor
38
WS4
WS9
304 SS immersion well for an I4 sensor
304 SS immersion well for an I8 sensor
TEMPERATURE
1000 OHM 375 PLATINUM AVERAGING SENSORS
ST-AV91H SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The continuous resistance element ST-AV91H Series
10001 375 Platinum Averaging Sensors provide accurate sensing of duct temperatures when a large area
must be covered. Temperatures are averaged over the
entire length and terminate in a weatherproof housing.
The ST-AV91H Series uses an element that closely
matches platinum resistance/temperature characteristics
over the specified range.
The sensors have a copper case bendable to a radius of
4" (10.2 cm), and they can crisscross a duct or plenum to
average out temperature stratification.
SPECIFICATIONS
Temp range
Approx sensitivity
Element length
Element casing
Housing
TYPICAL APPLICATION
10001 ±0.25% @ 32°F (0°C)
TCR 0.00375 1/1/°C platinum
curve
-40° to 240°F (-40° to 115°C)
2.11/°F @ 32°F (0°C)
24' (7.3m) or 12' (3.7m)
50' (15.2m)
Copper 0.187" dia (0.475 cm)
Weatherproof
CC-IG
Capillary
Mounting Clip
TEMPERATURE
Sensing element
ST-AV91H
Transmitter can be mounted
in the electrical box.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
ST-AV91H
ST-AV91H12
ST-AV91H50
T91U
TT-807
CC-IG
DESCRIPTION
Platinum averaging duct sensor 24' (7.3m)
Platinum averaging duct sensor 12' (3.7m)
Platinum averaging duct sensor 50' (15.2m)
RELATED PRODUCTS
4-20 mA temperature transmitter for 10001 platinum sensors
4-20 mA temperature transmitter for 10001 platinum sensors
Plastic capillary mounting clip
39
TEMPERATURE
100 AND 1000 OHM 385 PLATINUM AVERAGING SENSORS
ST-AV81H, ST-AV85H SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The continuous-resistance element 1001 and 10001
Platinum Averaging Sensors provide accurate sensing of duct temperatures when a large area must be
covered. They average temperatures over their entire
length and terminate in a weatherproof housing. The
averaging sensors use elements that closely match platinum resistance/temperature characteristics over the
specified range. The sensors have copper cases that
are bendable to a radius of 4" (10.2 cm), and they can
crisscross a duct or plenum to average out temperature
stratification.
ST-AV85H
TEMPERATURE
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensing element
Type 81
Type 85
Sensor range
Approx sensitivity
Type 81
Type 85
Lead wires
Element length
Element casing
Housing
TYPICAL APPLICATION
TCR 0.00385 1/1/°C
1001 ±0.25% @ 32°F (0°C)
10001 ±0.25% @ 32°F (0°C)
-40° to 240°F (-40° to 115°C)
0.2171/°F @ 32°F (0°C)
2.171/°F @ 32°F (0°C)
22 AWG, teflon insulated
12' (3.7m)
24' (7.3m)
50' (15.24m)
Copper 0.19" dia (0.48 cm)
Weatherproof
CC-IG
Capillary
Mounting Clip
Transmitter can be mounted
in the electrical box.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
ST-AV81H
ST-AV81H12
ST-AV81H50
ST-AV85H
ST-AV85H12
ST-AV85H50
ST-AV81H
T81U
T85U
TT-801
CC-IG
40
DESCRIPTION
100Ω averaging duct sensor 24' (7.3m), 385 platinum curve
100Ω averaging duct sensor 12' (3.7m), 385 platinum curve
100Ω averaging duct sensor 50' (15.2m), 385 platinum curve
1000Ω averaging sensor 24' (7.3m), 385 platinum curve
1000Ω averaging sensor 12' (3.7m), 385 platinum curve
1000Ω averaging sensor 50' (15.2m), 385 platinum curve
XZ
Three-wire option (use TT-801), (100Ω sensor only)
Example: ST-AV81H 100Ω 385 Platinum averaging duct
sensor with 24' (7.3m) element
RELATED PRODUCTS
4-20 mA rangeable temperature transmitter for type 81 sensors
4-20 mA rangeable temperature transmitter for type 85 sensors
4-20 mA temperature transmitter for two- or three-wire application for Type 81 sensors
Plastic capillary mounting clip
TEMPERATURE
PLATINUM CURVE RIGID AVERAGING SENSORS
ST-AV81R, ST-AV85R, ST-AV91R SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Continuous resistance element Platinum Curve Rigid
Averaging Sensors provide accurate sensing of duct
temperatures when a small, inaccessible area must be
covered. They average temperatures over their entire
length and terminate in a weather-resistant housing.
They are available in 12", 18", 24", and 36" (30.5, 45.7,
61, and 91.4 cm) lengths. The sensor uses an element
that closely matches platinum resistance/temperature
characteristics over the specified range. It is available in
1001 and 10001 385 curve and 10001 375 curve. The
sensors have a brass case that is rigid for easy singlepoint mounting.
356-090K
ST-AV91R-18
FEATURES
APPLICATION
•
•
•
•
•
Small ducts without access
Mixed air chambers
Hot/Cold deck discharge
Face/Bypass discharge
Unit vents
TEMPERATURE
• Continuous averaging
• Rigid sensor
• 12", 18", 24", 36" (30.5, 45.7, 61, and 91.4 cm)
lengths
• 1001 and 10001 385 curve
• 10001 375 curve
• Weather-resistant box
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensing element
TCR
Temp range
Approx sensitivity
1001
10001
Lead wires
10001 ±0.25% @ 32°F (0°C);
1001 ±0.25% @ 32°F (0°C)
375 or 385
-50° to 275°F (-45° to 135°C)
0.211/°F @ 32°F (0°C)
2.11/°F @ 32°F (0°C)
22 AWG teflon insulated,
white/black
Element
Length
Casing
Diameter
Housing
12" (30 cm) or 18" (45 cm);
24" (61 cm) or 36" (91 cm)
Brass
0.188" (4.8 mm)
Weather resistant
MOUNTING / DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
4.5
(11.43)
2.0
(5.08)
1/2"
NPT
0.25
(0.64)
4.5
(11.43)
1.38
(3.49)
0.188
(4.8 mm)
12 (30.5)
18 (45.7)
24 (61.0)
36 (91.4)
2.75
(6.99)
Swivel Flange
Accessory
(356-090K)
)
(91
36 ximum
ma
0.25
(0.635)
2.0
(5.08)
Brass Averaging
Probe
41
TEMPERATURE
PLATINUM CURVE RIGID AVERAGING SENSORS
ST-AV81R, ST-AV85R, ST-AV91R SERIES
TYPICAL MOUNTING
WIRING
356-090K
Swivel Flange Bracket
for angle mounting
as needed
(white)
(black)
TEMPERATURE
Supports typically
not required
Transmitter can be mounted
in the electrical box.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
ST-AV81R
ST-AV85R
ST-AV91R
T91U
TT-807
CC-IG
T81U
T85U
TT801
356-090K
42
DESCRIPTION
100Ω 385 rigid averaging duct probe
1000Ω 385 rigid averaging duct probe
1000Ω 375 rigid averaging duct probe
INSERTION LENGTH
12
12" length
18*
18" length
24*
24" length
36
36" length
* Normally stocked items
RELATED PRODUCTS
4-20 mA temperature transmitter for 10001 platinum sensors
4-20 mA temperature transmitter for 10001 platinum sensors
Plastic capillary mounting clip
4-20 mA temperature transmitter for 1001 platinum sensors
4-20 mA temperature transmitter for 10001 platinum sensors
4-20 mA temperature transmitter for 1001 platinum sensors
Swivel flange bracket with compression adapter
TEMPERATURE
NICKEL-IRON BALCO RTD ROOM SENSORS
TYPE 5, 77, 78 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Wirewound Nickel-Iron RTD Balco Room Sensors are
used to provide reliable, accurate temperature readings
in surface-mount room environments. The room sensors
feature a stainless steel insulated plate, a standard plastic ventilated enclosure, or a deluxe executive enclosure
design. The stainless steel plate is ideal for areas of
vandalism or where the sensor can be easily knocked
off the wall. The sensors are designed for interior use
only in the temperature range of -30° to 140°F (-34° to
60°C).
SPECIFICATIONS
ST-S5E
Type 77
Approx sensitivity
Type 78
Approx sensitivity
10001 ±0.12% @ 70°F (21°C)
2.21/°F @ 70°F (21°C)
two black wires
10001 ±0.12% @ 70°F (21°C)
2.481/°F @ 70°F (21°C)
two red wires
20001 ±0.12% @ 70°F (21°C)
4.961/°F @ 70°F (21°C)
two gray wires
ST-S5K
TEMPERATURE
Balco sensing element
Type 5
Approx sensitivity
ST-S5
ST-S5P
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
ST-S
ST-S
KT1
UR
T5U
DESCRIPTION
Surface-mount room sensor
RTD SENSOR TYPE
5
1000Ω nickel-iron, Balco sensor
77
1000Ω nickel-iron, Balco sensor
78
2000Ω nickel-iron, Balco sensor
ENCLOSURE
P
Plastic ventilated room enclosure
E
Executive-style room enclosure with tan faceplate
–
Stainless steel plate
K
Decorator-style room enclosure
5
E
Example: ST-S5E Executive style 1000Ω nickel-iron room
sensor with tan faceplate
RELATED PRODUCTS
Mounting screwdriver 1/16 allen key
Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice
4-20 mA nickel-iron transmitter for Type 5 sensors
43
TEMPERATURE
NICKEL-IRON BALCO RTD IMMERSION, DUCT AND OUTDOOR SENSORS
TYPE 5, 77, 78 SERIES
TEMPERATURE
DESCRIPTION
Wirewound Nickel-Iron Balco RTD Sensors are
installed in rugged housings to measure the most important HVAC applications. The Duct and Immersion
Sensors all have 304 stainless steel probes for use in
almost any area.
• The Immersion Probe comes with a standard brass
or an optional stainless steel thermowell.
• The Duct Sensor has mounting tabs for direct
mounting on a duct or installation in a handibox.
• The Outdoor Sensor, rated for outdoor temperatures, is equipped with a sun shield and weatherproof box for mounting under the eaves or another
sheltered area.
• The Type 78 and 77 Raw Sensors are mounted in a
2" (5 cm) long aluminum case with teflon-insulated
lead wires. This sensor can be used for strap-on applications. The Type 5 raw sensor is mounted in a
2.5" (6.35 cm) PVC case.
• The Universal Sensor may be used for duct, immersion, and OSA temperature sensing.
ST-O5
ST-R5
(77, 78)
ST-U5
ST-W5
WEL-B
ST-D5
SPECIFICATIONS
Temp range (all probes)
Balco sensing element
Type 5
Approx sensitivity
-30° to 240°F (34° to 115°C)
10001 ±0.12% @ 70°F (21°C)
2.21/°F @ 70°F (21°C)
two black wires
Type 77
Approx sensitivity
Type 78
Approx sensitivity
10001 ±0.12% @ 70°F (21°C)
2.481/°F @ 70°F (21°C)
two red wires
20001 ±0.12% @ 70°F (21°C)
4.961/°F @ 70°F (21°C)
two gray wires
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
ST-R
ST-U
ST-D
ST-W
ST-O
ST-D
DESCRIPTION
Raw sensor
Universal duct, immersion, or OSA sensor
Duct sensor
Immersion sensor with brass well
Outdoor air sensor
RTD SENSOR TYPE
5
1000Ω nickel-iron, Balco sensor
77
1000Ω nickel-iron, Balco sensor
78
2000Ω nickel-iron, Balco sensor
OPTIONS
XW
Weatherproof housing (factory installed ST-D and ST-W only)
XH
Handibox (factory installed ST-D and ST-W only)
E
Immersion sensor without well (ST-W only)
S
Stainless steel thermowell (ST-W and ST-U only)
O
Kit with OSAB weather shield (ST-U only)
B
WEL-B brass well (ST-U only)
5
XW
Example: ST-D5-XW 1000Ω Balco duct sensor
with a weatherproof housing
UNIVERSAL-MOUNT SENSOR ACCESSORIES
WEL-B
Brass well
OSAB
OSA weather shield, gasket, and bracket
WEL-S
304 stainless steel well
TCC-111 Thermal conductive compound 111 ml tub
F-1000-331 Nylon bushing for open wiring
44
TEMPERATURE
OPTIONS
SENSOR OPTIONS
SETPOINT OPTION FOR FLUSH SENSOR
Two-wire with resistance from 01 to 10 k1 (01 to 15001
optional XA1500), flush enclosure with pigtails for the
connection
GREENFIELD FITTING (factory installed)
Option available with ST-D sensor
XG
ST-S*-XA
HANDIBOX HOUSING (factory installed)
Equipped with eleven 1/2" knockouts, option available
with ST-A, ST-D, and ST-W sensors
TEMPERATURE
SETPOINT OPTION FOR EXECUTIVE SENSOR
Two-wire with resistance from 10 k1 to 30 k1, (1 k1 to
3 k1, opt. XA10K),(1 k1 to 1.4 k1, opt. XA2K)
4"
2.13
ST-S*EW
1.88
XH
ST-S*E-XA
SETPOINT OPTION FOR SPACE SENSOR
Two-wire with resistance from 01 to 10 k1 (01 to 15001
optional XA1500), space enclosure with pigtails for the
connection
PLASTIC EUROPEAN-TYPE HANDIBOX
Complete with four 3/4" cutouts, two open cable cutouts
and snap-on cover, option available on all ST-A, ST-W,
and ST-D sensors
in
(cm)
2.95
(7.5)
2.95
(7.5)
1.65
(4.2)
ST-S*P-XA
1/2" STANDARD SERVICE CONDUIT (LB) FITTING
Available for the ST-A all-purpose and ST-W immersion
sensors
in
(cm)
XHP
1/2" SEALTITE STRAIGHT FITTING
Used for liquid-tight connection, available for the ST-W
immersion sensors
4.625
(11.75)
1/2" NPT
2.0
(5.08)
1/2"
NPT
1/2" Sealtite Fitting
4.0
(10.2)
1/2" NPT
XCO
XLT
45
TEMPERATURE
OPTIONS
SENSOR OPTIONS
CUSTOM LOGO
Any logo or wording added to the space or executive
enclosure, minimum order and customer artwork
required
SECURITY SCREWS
For use with ST-S* sensors, see SD-6 spanner screwdriver on page 51
in
(cm)
1.0
(2.5)
0.25
(0.63)
XS
XK
MOMENTARY PUSH BUTTON
Wired N.O. with pigtails, N.C. available upon request for
flush and executive enclosures
ANALOG BIMETAL THERMOMETER
Measures 50° to 90°F for ST-S*E sensors XTA
Measures 13° to 29°C for ST-S*E sensors XTAC
TEMPERATURE
XTA
Executive
XM
Decorator
Space
MOMENTARY MEMBRANE PUSH BUTTON
Wired N.O. with pigtails or to terminals when used with
options requiring circuit cards, available with executive
room enclosures only
XTA/XTAC
DIGITAL THERMOMETER OPTION
3-1/2 digit display readout from 60° to 80°F ±1°F or 15°
to 32°C with one-year battery, 3/8" high, display updates
every 10 seconds
XTD / XTC
XME
XTD/XTC
XME
RED LED INDICATOR LAMP
Powered externally with 24 VAC/VDC and connected
via a terminal block
CLM-20
Limits the output of any 4-20 mA transmitter to a factory
set 20 mA, wired in series, and adds 1251 of effective
load to the transmitter
Adjust Pot
(18-22 mA)
Red Indicator
Lamp
XPL
46
in
(cm)
(red)
5.0
(12.70)
–
+
1.75
(4.44)
CLM-20
(black)
5.0
(12.70)
0.5
(1.27)
TEMPERATURE
OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
SENSOR OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
EXTERNAL COMMUNICATIONS JACK
MODEL XJ1
For use with handheld terminals, requires adapter
cable CCRJ11AD
INTERNAL COMMUNICATIONS JACK
MODEL XJ2
For use with handheld terminals
XJ1
XJ1 External Jack
(see pinout below)
POT
IN
Top View
Pin Numbers
1
2
3
4
5
6
SENSOR
1 2 3 4
X6 7 8
OUT
Top Down
Pin Numbers
OUT
P S
POT
IN
SENSOR
XJ2 Internal
RJ11 Jack
XJ2
(under cover)
P S
COMP EXT
SENS SENS
COMP EXT
SENS SENS
CABLE ACCESSORY FOR XJ1
MODEL CC-RJ11AD
The CC-RJ11AD is used to interface to the XJ1 option on the ST-S*E sensor. The CC-RJ11AD is 6" (15.24 cm) long
with an 8-pin (4 pins used) connector for the XJ1 side and a female RJ11 connector on the other.
Inter-Sensor
Communications
XJ1 Pinout
XJ2 Pinout
8-Pin Connector
Termination
RJ11 Connector
4 . . . . . . . . . . . . .OUT + . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
1 . . . . . . . . . . . . .OUT – . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .IN – . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
6 . . . . . . . . . . . . .IN + . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Handheld
Terminal
CC-RJ11AD
(customersupplied)
XJ1
External
Jack
OUT
POT
Pinout
CC-RJ11AD
1 W - not used
2Y
3 BK
4G
5R
6 BL - not used
Female
RJ11
IN
8
not used
plug
Y
7 BL G
6 R W
5
BK
CustomerSupplied
Telephone
Extension
4
SENSOR
P S
3
COMP EXT
SENS SENS
XJ2
Internal Jack
2
1
PLATE PAL ROOM TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
11,000, 12,000 SERIES
The Plate Pal is a room temperature indicator, built into a switch plate, for either °F or °C and % RH. Replaceable
battery life is approximately one year. Colors are available in white or dark ivory.
MODEL
11100
11101
11200
DESCRIPTION
Single gang white paddle, °F/°C
Single gang white paddle, °F/°C and % RH
Single gang ivory paddle, °F/°C
12100
12101
12200
12201
Single gang white toggle, °F/°C
Single gang white toggle, °F/°C and % RH
Single gang ivory toggle, °F/°C
Single gang ivory toggle, °F/°C and % RH
21100
21101
Dual white paddle, °F/°C
Dual white paddle, °F/°C and % RH
22100
22101
22200
22201
Dual gang white toggle, °F/°C
Dual gang white toggle, °F/°C and % RH
Dual gang ivory toggle, °F/°C
Dual gang ivory toggle, °F/°C and % RH
GPA76
Battery included
Two-digit, 0.5" LCD display
75°F
Standard
toggle switch
5.44
(13.8)
3.81
(9.7)
2.4
(6.1)
Standard
paddle switch
11101
12100
1.31 (3.3)
3.125
(7.9)
47
TEMPERATURE
TERMINAL COMMUNICATIONS PINOUT/CONNECTIONS
TEMPERATURE
ACCESSORIES
MODELS APB-28, BKT-1, BKT-2, ISPL-1, SSPL-1, KT-1
ADJUSTABLE PIPE BRACKET
MODEL APB-28
The Model APB-28 is used with Model ST-R*SC or STR*S sensors. The bracket can be used on pipe sizes
from 2" to 8" (5.08 to 20.32 cm) outside diameter.
Precon TCC-12 thermal conducting compound should
be used with the bracket to improve heat transfer
between the pipe and the temperature sensor. Insulate
approximately 2' (61m) on each side of the probe for
best results.
Adjustable for
2" to 8" pipe
(5-20 cm)
APB-28
in
(cm)
ADAPTER BRACKET
MODEL BKT-1
4.25
(10.80)
The Model BKT-1 can be used with Models WMB-1 or
ST-S*P to mount directly on a standard electrical box.
Mounting screws are provided.
BKT-1
2.5
(6.35)
TEMPERATURE
in
(cm)
DRYWALL ADAPTER BRACKET
MODEL BKT-2
The Model BKT-2 is used to mount wall sensors directly
to drywall quickly and securely. Simply cut a hole and
bend the ears over the back of the drywall. Then, secure
with supplied dry wall screws.
ADAPTER PLATE
MODEL ISPL-1, SSPL-1
4.25
(8.25)
BKT-2
in
(cm)
2.75
(6.99)
The ISPL-1 ivory model and the SSPL-1 stainless steel
model are standard light switch plates that can be used
with the Model BKT-1 as attractive mounting plates for
installing a Model WMB-1 or ST-S*P on a standard electrical box. Mounting screws are provided.
4.25
(10.80)
SSPL-1
ISPL-1
7"
SENSOR ADAPTER PLATE
MODEL 10-531
The Model 10-531 plate is ideal for cover mounting
holes from old sensors. For the KTR*, ST-S*EW, STT90EW.
5.25"
Rear View (not actual size)
SENSOR COVER REMOVER TOOL 1/16"
MODEL KT-1
The Model KT-1 tool fits Kele and most Invensys,
Johnson Controls, and Siemens covers. The tool has a
1/16" hex top and a reversible blade (flat and Phillips).
48
in
(cm) 2.25
(5.72)
1.0
(2.54)
Exposed
Insert
10-531
2.65
(6.73)
TM
KT-1
0.37
(0.95)
TEMPERATURE
ACCESSORIES
MODELS PN-10, PN-26, PN-46, SD-6, TCC-12, TCC-111
BRUSHED ALUMINUM FACEPLATE
MODEL PN-10
in
(cm)
The PN-10 is a blank Brushed Aluminum Faceplate
for use with the WMB-1 enclosure. Customized logos
are available.
Shown with
custom logo
1.63
(4.13)
2.63
(6.67)
PN-10
DECORATIVE FACEPLATE
MODELS PN-26, PN-32
in
(cm)
The gray PN-26 or tan PN-32 Decorative Faceplates
are available for use with the WMB-2 enclosure.
Customized logos are available.
Shown with
custom logo
1.38
(3.49)
1.75
(4.45)
RAW SENSOR CLIP
MODEL PN-46
in
(cm)
0.31
(0.8)
The PN-46 is used where an aluminum clip is desired to
mount a raw sensor into an existing enclosure. The PN46 includes adhesive backing for easy installation.
SPANNER DRIVER
MODEL SD-6
The SD-6 Spanner Driver is used to install the security
screws (XS option) for the ST-S* sensor.
TEMPERATURE
PN-26
0.63
(1.59)
PN-46
in
(cm)
3.88
(9.84)
XS Option Screw Head
THERMAL CONDUCTING COMPOUND
MODEL TCC-12
The TCC-12 Thermal Conducting Compound is a
metal oxide-filled, dielectric, silicone-based compound
that facilitates heat transfer by filling voids and gaps
between mating surfaces. The operating temperature
range is -65° to 400°F (-54° to 204°C). The compound is
packaged in convenient, single application, 0.13 fl oz
(12 gram) tubes.
SD-6
TCC-12
THERMAL CONDUCTING COMPOUND
MODEL TCC-111
The TCC-111 Thermal Conducting Compound consists of an aluminum powder in a barium grease-based
compound. It facilitates heat transfer by filling voids and
gaps between mating surfaces. The operating temperature limit is 300°F (148°C). The compound is packaged
in a convenient 3.75 fl oz (111 mL) tub.
TCC-111
49
TEMPERATURE
ACCESSORIES
MODELS M-2500, 13F142, ZGR01, TR10K, WMB-1, WMB-2, ES-1051
SOLAR COMPENSATOR
MODEL M-2500
1.75
(4.45)
in
(cm)
The Model M-2500 Solar Compensator is a non-directional device used to compensate for the solar effects
on buildings. Mount outside in sunlight to measure the
solar gain experienced by the building envelope. Any
1/4" probe may be inserted into the solar chamber. This
device is ideal for tuning perimeter hot water reset to
each building’s requirements.
4.31
(10.95)
4.25
(10.8)
5.86
(14.88)
7.13
(18.11)
PRECISION RESISTORS
MODEL 13F142, ZGR01, TR10K
M-2500
Probe
Insert
0.31
(0.79)
1/2 EMT
Conduit Nut
3.75 (9.53)
TEMPERATURE
The Model 13F142 is a 2501, 3 watt, 1% resistor packaged with instructions to convert a 4-20 mA signal to a 1-5V
signal.
The Model ZGR01 is a 5001, 1/2 watt, 1.2% resistor.
The Model TR10K is a 10 k1, 1/4 watt, 0.1% resistor
with alligator clips for static testing of Type 3 or 24 thermistors at 77°F.
TEMPERATURE BUTTON ENCLOSURE
MODEL TB
The Model TB-B brass, TB-S stainless steel, and TB-A
aluminum sensor enclosures are ideal for discretely
placed sensors on decorative walls. The Model TB can
be fitted with any Precon thermistor or RTD sensor. It
inserts into a 5/8'' hole and is glued in place.
TR10K
13F142
in
(cm)
0.9
(2.3)
wall
0.625
(1.6)
0.50
(1.3)
0.32
(0.8)
0.80 0.875
(2.0) (2.2)
TB-S TB-B TB-A
Insulating
Wall Housing
Sensor
Housing
U.S. Patent No. 5, 022, 766
WALL SENSOR ENCLOSURE
MODEL WMB
The Model WMB is a vented, plastic wall enclosure. A
raw sensor can be snapped directly in contact with the
aluminum faceplate. The Model WMB can be mounted
directly to sheet rock, block walls using the screws provided.
WMB-1
WMB-2
NON-CFC FREEZE SPRAY
MODEL ES-1051
The Model ES-1051 is ideal for quick point-to-point sensor wiring verification and freezestat operability. Freeze
each sensor in order, check the trend printout, and
rework the terminations as needed. Each contains 8 fl
oz (235 mL).
ES-1051
50
TEMPERATURE
1000 OHM 375 PLATINUM RTD FIXED TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS
T90U, ST-T90EW, ST-T90K SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The T90U is a fixed-range, two-wire 4-20 mA RTD
transmitter used with Type 91 10001 platinum RTD sensors. The transmitter is available in six standard ranges
for temperature control and building automation.
The ST-T90EW or ST-T90K are fixed-range, 10001,
375 platinum room temperature transmitters that provide
stable, accurate room sensing for temperature control
and building automation systems. The attractive white
vented housing mounts easily and is constructed of a
durable plenum-rated plastic with a white enameled aluminum faceplate.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Low cost
High accuracy
No-drift platinum RTD sensors
Panel mount, duct, immersion, OSA, and room
UL 94V-0 plenum-rated housing
18-month warranty
Used with Type 91 sensors
RANGE SELECTION
• 40° to 90°F (4.4° to 32.2°C)
• -20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C)
• 0° to 100°F (-18° to 38° C)
• 20° to 120°F (-6° to 49°C)
• 30° to 240°F (-1° to 116°C)
•
•
•
•
-30° to 45°C (-22° to 113°F)
0° to 100°C (32° to 212°F)
0° to 50°C (32° to 122°F)
0° to 35°C (32° to 95°F)
ST-T90EW
T90U
APPLICATIONS
• The Room Temperature application uses a vented room
enclosure designed to minimize self-heating for accurate
room measurement.
• The Duct Temperature application is designed for direct
mounting on sheet metal duct systems. The sensor is
point sensitive and comes standard with a 4-7/8" (12.38
cm) insertion depth. Averaging probes come in 24' (7.3m)
lengths and mount in a weather-resistant metal box.
• The Immersion Temperature application is designed to
be threaded directly into a 1/8" NPT well with a 3-1/4" (8.2
cm) insertion. The wells are available in brass or 304
stainless steel and are designed for pipe insertion using a
1/2" threaded saddle (Thredolet®).
• The Outside Air Temperature application uses a wall
bracket with a vented weather shield to minimize the
effect of rain or snow. This rugged enclosure and bracket
will ensure long life even in severe weather conditions.
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensor input
Configuration
Rangeability limits
Agency
Output
Output limit
Supply voltage
Max impedance
Transmitter accuracy
Probe accuracy
10001 platinum (Type 91)
TCR 0.00375 1/1/°C
Two-wire, loop-powered
Fixed per model
UL 94V-0 plastic
4-20 mA
25 mA (sensor leads open)
10.5-45 VDC (one power supply
may power multiple units)
6751 @ 24 VDC
0.1°F or 0.2% of span
Type 91 ±0.2% of 1000 @ 0°C
Ambient temp
Ambient humidity
Dimensions
T90U
ST-T90EW, ST-T90K
Weight
Enclosure
Duct/Immersion
Room
0° to 140°F (-18° to 60°C)
0% to 95% noncondensing
1"H x 1.8"W x 2.25"L
(2.5 x 4.6 x 5.7 cm)
1.2"D x 2.75"W x 4.5"L
(3.05 x 6.99 x 11.43 cm)
<0.2 lb (91g)
NEMA 3R, UV protected
White executive style
51
TEMPERATURE
ST-T90K
FEATURES
TEMPERATURE
1000 OHM 375 PLATINUM RTD FIXED TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS
T90U, ST-T90EW, ST-T90K SERIES
DIMENSIONS / MOUNTING
0.75
(1.9)
in
(cm)
3.25
(8.26)
2.5
(6.35)
4.75
(12)
1/2"
Conduit Hole
Pointing Down
2.5
6.35
Gasket
2.28
(5.8)
8.38
(21.2)
5.5
(14)
Do Not mount
sensor in vertical
position with
the weather
shield pointing up.
Correct position for mounting outdoor air sensor.
0.88
(2.2)
ST-U91
OSA Sensor
1/8" NPT
4.87 Mounting
Tabs
(12.7)
Optional Customer- Supplied Handibox
Wire Access
Hole
Plate
Mounting
Screws
4.81
(13)
.5
(1.27)
3.25
(8.26)
1/2" NPT
3.31
(8.40)
4.5
(11.43)
1.31
(2.54)
0.25
(0.63)
Wire Way
Typical logo
location
ST-U91
Sensor in Well
ST-U91
Duct/Multipurpose Sensor
Back Plate
White
Faceplate
(standard)
0.33
(.85)
1.5
(3.8)
2.75 (6.98)
Front
Cover
Mounting
1/16 Allen Screws
ST-T90E
Room Sensor
in
(cm)
0.94
(2.38)
Side
ST-T90K
Room Sensor
TEMPERATURE
WIRING
Snap
Track
1.8
(4.57)
MODEL ST-T90E
MODEL T90U
4-20 MA
Signal
4-20 mA
Signal
2.25
(5.72)
LOOP
Power Supply
10.5-45 VDC
LOOP
TEMP
SENSOR
TEMP
SENSOR
Height
1.0
(2.54)
Type 91
1000Ω 375 Platinum
RTD Sensor
(sold separately)
T90 Universal Transmitter
JP1
Power Supply
10.5-45 VDC
SENSOR
ST-T90 Room Transmitter
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
ST-T90K
ST-T90EW
T90U
DESCRIPTION
Decorator room temperature transmitter
White executive room temperature transmitter
4-20 mA RTD Transmitter
RANGE
0
40° to 90°F (4.4° to 32.2°C) room transmitter only
1
20° to 120°F (-6.7° to 48.8°C) all mounting types
2
-20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C) OSA, duct, or immersion
3
0° to 100°F (-18° to 38°C) all mounting types
4
30° to 240°F (-1° to 116°C) OSA, duct, or immersion
11
12
13
14
T90U
2
0° to 35°C (32° to 97°F) all mounting types
-30° to 45°C (-22° to 113°F) OSA, duct, or immersion
0° to 100°C (32° to 212°F) OSA, duct, or immersion
0° to 50°C (32° to 122°F) all mounting types
SENSOR TYPE
—
Transmitter only snap track mounting or ST-T90E or ST-T90K
D
ST-U91 duct or immersion sensor (includes sensor mounted and wired)
W
ST-U91-B immersion sensor with brass well (includes sensor mounted and wired)
WS
ST-U91-S immersion sensor with stainless steel well (includes sensor mounted and wired)
O
ST-U91-O outside air sensor (includes sensor mounted and wired)
AV
ST-AV91H averaging sensor 24' (7.3m) (includes sensor mounted and wired)
D
Example: T90U-2-D Transmitter with range of -20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C) mounted and
wired in duct sensor enclosure
ST-_91
10-531
52
RELATED PRODUCTS
All 10001 375 platinum RTDs (for use with T90U)
Decorator wall adapter plate 7" x 5.25" (for use with ST-T90K)
TEMPERATURE
RANGEABLE PLATINUM ROOM TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER
ST-T91E, ST-T91K SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The ST-T91 Rangeable Platinum Room Temperature
Transmitter Series provides stable, accurate room
sensing for temperature control and building automation
systems, and it is CE approved for level-one applications. The attractive vented housing mounts easily and
is constructed of a durable plastic with a tan enameled
aluminum faceplate.
The ST-T91 Series has a loop-powered 4-20 mA output
with a standard temperature range of 40° to 90°F (4° to
32°C), although other ranges can be field calibrated
between -30° to 250°F (-34° to 121°C). To adjust the
ST-T91 Series, set the DIP switches to match the
desired range, and use the zero and span pots to fine
tune. A high accuracy digital ohmmeter and decade box
are required.
DIMENSIONS
FEATURES
in
(cm)
High accuracy
No-drift platinum
Loop calibration test signal
Low cost
Decorative enclosure
Loop-powered LED indication
CE approved (commercial and industrial)
18-month warranty
Conformal coated
TEMPERATURE
The ST-T91 Series has a special 20 mA loop calibration
test signal to provide easy system verification. Simply
move the bottle plug jumper from norm to 20, and the
transmitter will output a constant 20 mA. The loop up
LED provides power indication for the 4-20 mA output.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
ST-T91K
ST-T91E
4.50
(11.43)
4.5
(11.43)
1.5
(3.8)
3.23
(8.20)
2.75 (6.98)
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensing element
Configuration
Standard range
Rangeability limits
Agency
Optional
10001 thin film platinum
TCR 0.003751/1/°C
Two-wire, loop-powered
40° to 90°F (4° to 32°C)
Max 0° to 140°F (-18° to 60°C)
-30° to 250°F (34° to 121°C)
Min span of 40°F (22°C)
CE (EN50081-1, EN50082-1)
CE (EN50081-2, EN50082-2)
Industrial RF/EM hardened
Output
Output limit
Loop calibration output
Supply voltage
Max impedance
Ambient temp
Humidity
Transmitter accuracy
Sensor accuracy
Approximate sensitivity
4-20 mA
25 mA (sensor leads open)
20 mA ±0.2%
10.5-45 VDC
6751 @ 24 VDC
0° to 140°F (-18° to 60°C)
0% to 95% noncondensing
0.1°F or 0.2% of span
±0.2% of 10001 at 0°C
2.11/°F @ 32°F
53
TEMPERATURE
RANGEABLE PLATINUM ROOM TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER
ST-T91E, ST-T91K SERIES
MOUNTING
WIRING
The sensor should be mounted approximately 5' (1.5m)
above the floor, on an interior wall, and away from any
heating or cooling generating devices.
Toggle bolts or other direct wall-mount screws can be
used where back box is not required. Adapters are not
required when mounting directly to electrical outlet boxes.
The sensor should be mounted approximately 5' (1.5m)
above the floor, on an interior wall, out of the sun, and
away from any heating or cooling generating devices.
Wire Access
Hole
Optional CustomerSupplied Handibox
MODEL ST-T91E,K
NORM 20
Mounting Back Plate
Mounting
Screws
Wire Access
Hole
Loop Power LED
5 4 3 2 1
O
N
SPAN
1 2 3 4 5
Toggle bolts or other direct wall-mount screws can
be used where conduit is not required. Adapters are
not required when mounting directly to electrical outlet
boxes.
4-20 mA
Signal
Option Board Clip
Plate
Mounting
Screws
ZERO
JP1
Power Supply
10.5-45 VDC
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
Tan
Faceplate
Standard
Self-Latching
Cover
Cover
Mounting
1/16 Allen Screws
Basic model comes with screw terminal block, tan
decorator faceplate, two #6-32 screws for handibox
mounting, and two #6 x 1 screws for direct wall mounting. Cover screws are #6-32 with a 1/16 allen key head.
ST-T91E
Cover
Locking
1/16" Allen Screws
Installed as needed
Norm = Normal operation
20 = Forced 20 mA output
Loop LED indicates proper loop
and power connections
Basic model comes with screw terminal block, two #6-32
screws for handibox-mounting, and two #6 x 1" screws for
direct wall-mounting. Locking cover screws are #6-32 with
a 1/16"Allen key head, installed as needed.
ST-T91K
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
ST-T91K
ST-T91E
DESCRIPTION
Designer room temperature transmitter, 4-20 mA = 40° to 90°F (4.4° to 32.2°C)
Executive room temperature transmitter, 4-20 mA = 40° to 90°F (4.4° to 32.2°C)
CE CERTIFICATION
–
Commercial CE (EN50081-1 and EN50082-1)
EMC
Industrial CE, RF/EM hardened (EN50081-2 and EN50082-2)
OPTIONS
XGR Gray decorator faceplate (ST-T91E only)
XK
Customization (logo or special feature), consult Kele
XME Membrane override switch (tan faceplate only) (ST-T91E only)
XR
Custom range (specific range)
XR1
Range option = 20° to 120°F (-6.7° to 48.8°C)
XR2
Range option = 0° to 100°F (-17.7° to 37.8°C)
XR3
Range option = 30° to 100°F (-1.1° to 37.8°C)
XR11 Range option = 32° to 97°F (0° to 35°C)
XR14 Range option = 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
ST-T91E
XR1
KT1
54
Example: ST-T91E-XR1 Rangeable platinum room temperature transmitter
with calibration 20° to 120°F
RELATED PRODUCTS
Mounting screwdriver 1/16" Allen key
TEMPERATURE
1000 OHM 375 PLATINUM RTD RANGEABLE TRANSMITTER
T91U, T91H, T91L SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The T91U is a field-rangeable, two-wire 4-20 mA RTD
transmitter used with Type 91 10001 platinum RTD sensors. The transmitter is available in six standard ranges,
or it can be set for any range between -30° to 250°F (34° to 121°C) with a minimum span of 40°F (22°C).
To adjust the T91U, set the DIP switches to match the
desired range, and use the zero and span pots to fine
tune. A high accuracy digital ohmmeter and decade box
are required.
The T91U has a special 20 mA loop calibration test signal to provide easy system verification. Simply move the
bottle plug jumper from norm to 20, and the transmitter
will output a constant 20 mA. The loop-up LED provides
power indication for the 4-20 mA output.
1.8
(4.57)
in
(cm)
FEATURES
MODEL T91U
DIP switch rangeable
Loop calibration test signal
Low cost
Snap-track mounting
Loop-powered LED indication
Fits into card slot of ST-U91 housing
Very high-range and low-range models
18-month warranty
CE approved (commercial and industrial)
NORMAL 20
LOOP UP
LOOP
ZERO
2.25
(5.72)
O1 2 3 4 5
N
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
TEMPERATURE
DIMENSIONS
SPAN
The T91H and T91L are specialty units for very high
temperature and very low temperatures respectively.
Both units are rangeable within their specialty limits.
T91U-13-W-XTD
T91U
LOOP
TEMP
SENSOR
TEMP
SENSOR
Height: 1.0
(2.54)
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensor input
Configuration
Rangeability limits
T91U
Zero
Span
T91H
Zero
Span
T91L
Zero
Span
Agency
Optional
10001 platinum
TCR 0.00375 1/1/°C
Two-wire, loop-powered
-30° to 250°F (-34° to 121°C)
40° to 280°F (22° to 156°C)
200° to 960°F (93° to 515°C)
40° to 500°F (22° to 278°C)
-300° to -8°F (-184° to -22°C)
40° to 332°F (22° to 184°C)
CE (EN50081-1, EN50082-1)
CE (EN50081-2, EN50082-2)
Industrial RF/EM Hardened
Output
Output limit
Loop calibration output
Supply voltage
Max impedance
play
Ambient temp
Humidity
Accuracy
Dimensions
Display option (XTD)
4-20 mA
25 mA (sensor leads open)
20 mA ±0.2%
10.5-45 VDC (one power supply
may power multiple units)
6751 @ 24 VDC/3751 with dis0° to 140°F (-18° to 60°C)
0% to 95% noncondensing
0.1°F or 0.2% of span
1"H x 1.8"W x 2.25"L
(2.5 x 4.6 x 5.7 cm)
3-1/2 digit LCD, NEMA 4 (IP65)
55
TEMPERATURE
1000 OHM 375 PLATINUM RTD RANGEABLE TRANSMITTER
T91U, T91H, T91L SERIES
WIRING
Loop Power
LED
MODEL T91U
SPAN
O1 2 3 4 5
N
NORMAL 20
LOOP UP
4-20 mA
Signal
ZERO
LOOP
LOOP
Power Supply
10.5-45 VDC
TEMP
SENSOR
TEMP
SENSOR
1000Ω 375 Platinum
RTD Sensor
TEMPERATURE
(sold separately)
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
T91U
T91H
T91L
T91U
DESCRIPTION
4-20 mA rangeable RTD transmitter standard rangeability
4-20 mA rangeable RTD transmitter high temperature rangeability(XR range only)
4-20 mA rangeable RTD transmitter low temperature rangeability(XR range only)
CE CERTIFICATION
–
Commercial CE (EN50081-1 and EN50082-1)
EMC Industrial CE, RF/EM hardened (EN50081-2 and EN50082-2)
RANGE
2
-20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C) (T91U only)
3
0° to 100°F (-18° to 38°C) (T91U only)
4
30° to 240°F (-1° to 116°C) (T91U only)
12
-22° to 113°F (-30° to 45°C) (T91U only)
13
32° to 212°F (0° to 100°C) (T91U only)
14
32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C) (T91U only)
XR† Special Range (See previous page for rangeability limits)
SENSOR TYPE
—
Transmitter only
D
ST-D91-XW duct sensor*
O
ST-O91 outside air sensor*
W
ST-W91-XW immersion sensor* with brass well
WE
ST-W91-E-XW immersion sensor* without well
WS
ST-W91-S-XW immersion sensor* with stainless steel well
AV
ST-AV91H averaging sensor*
XTD
Digital display option for (D) duct or (W) immersion sensors
XWM Single gang weather resistant box (Mounted without sensor)
2
D
Example: T91U-2-D Transmitter with range of -20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C)
mounted and wired in duct sensor enclosure
†Indicate at time of order
*Includes sensor mounted and wired. Check temperature limits in the catalog for each probe.
S241HC
AS2PW055P000XX1
56
RELATED PRODUCTS
High temperature probe, limited to 932°F (500°C)
Low temperature probe, limited to -300°F (-184°C)
TEMPERATURE
100 OHM PLATINUM RTD RANGEABLE TRANSMITTER
MODEL T81U
DESCRIPTION
The Model T81U Platinum RTD Rangeable
Transmitter is a two-wire, 4-20 mA transmitter designed
for use with Type 81 1001 platinum RTD sensors. The
transmitter is available in three standard ranges, or it
can be set for any range between -30° to 250°F (-34° to
121°C) with a minimum span of 40°F (22°C).
To adjust the Model T81U, set the DIP switches to
match the desired range and use the zero and span
pots to fine tune. A high accuracy digital ohmmeter and
decade box are required.
The Model T81U has a special 20 mA loop calibration
test signal to provide easy system verification. Simply
move the bottle plug jumper from NORM to 20, and the
transmitter will output a constant 20 mA. The Loop Up
LED provides power indication for the 4-20 mA output.
DIMENSIONS
1.8
(4.58)
Dip switch rangeable
Loop calibration test signal
Snap-track mounting
Loop-powered LED indication
18-month warranty
2.25
(5.72)
4-20 mA
Signal
LOOP
Power Supply
10.5-45 VDC
LOOP
TEMP
SENSOR
1001
RTD Sensor
(sold separately)
TEMP
SENSOR
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensor input
Output
Rangeability limits
Span min
Accuracy
Loop calibration output
1001 platinum
TCR 0.00385 1/1/°C
4-20 mA, loop-powered
-30° to 250°F (-34° to 121°C)
40°F (22°C)
0.1°F or 0.2% of span
20 mA ±0.2%
Supply voltage
Max impedance
Ambient temp
Humidity
Dimensions
Approvals
10.5-45 VDC
6751 @ 24 VDC
0° to 140°F (-18° to 60°C)
0% to 95% noncondensing
1.8"W x 2.25"L x 1"H
(4.6 x 5.7 x 2.5 cm)
CE
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
T81U
T81U
DESCRIPTION
4-20 mA rangeable RTD transmitter
RANGE
2
-20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C)
3
0° to 100°F (-18° to 38°C)
4
30° to 240°F (-1° to 116°C)
XR†
Special Range
SENSOR TYPE
—
Transmitter only
D
ST-D81-XW duct sensor*
O
ST-O81 outside air sensor*
W
ST-W81-XW immersion sensor* with well
AV
ST-AV81H averaging sensor*
XWM Single gang weather resistant box (mounted without sensor)
2
D
Example: T81U-2-D Transmitter with range of -20° to 140°F
(-29° to 60°C) mounted and wired in duct sensor enclosure
†
Indicate at time of order
*Includes sensor mounted and wired
57
TEMPERATURE
•
•
•
•
•
NORM
FEATURES
Height: 1.0
(2.54)
20
in
(cm)
TEMPERATURE
1000 OHM RTD RANGEABLE TRANSMITTER
MODELS T5U, T63U, T85U
DESCRIPTION
The Models T5U, T63U, and T85U Rangeable
Transmitters are field rangeable, two-wire, 4-20 mA
RTD transmitters designed for use with Type 5 nickeliron sensors, Type TE63xx nickel sensors, and Type 85
platinum sensors.
To adjust the temperature transmitter, set the DIP
switches to match the desired range, and use the zero
and span pots to fine tune. A high accuracy digital ohmmeter and decade box are required.
FEATURES
Dip switch rangeable
Loop calibration test signal
Low cost
Snap-track mounting
Loop-powered LED indication
18-month warranty
DIMENSIONS
1.8
(4.58)
APPLICATION
• Transmitter for Invensys 10001 Nickel-Iron RTD’s
• Transmitter for Johnson Controls 10001
Nickel RTD’s
• Transmitter for 10001 Platinum 385 RTD’s
2.25
(5.72)
Height: 1.0
(2.54)
20
in
(cm)
NORM
TEMPERATURE
•
•
•
•
•
•
T85U
4-20 mA
Signal
LOOP
Power Supply
10.5-45 VDC
LOOP
TEMP
SENSOR
1001
RTD Sensor
(sold separately)
TEMP
SENSOR
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensor
Output
Rangeability limits
Supply voltage
Max impedance
10001 RTD
4-20 mA, loop-powered
-30° to 250°F (-34° to121°C)
Minimum span 40°F (22°C)
10.5-45 VDC
6751 @ 24 VDC
Accuracy
Ambient temp
RTD current
Dimensions
Approvals
0.2°F or 0.4% of span
0° to 140°F (-18° to 60°C)
650 µA
1.8"W x 2.25"L x 1"H
(4.6 x 5.7 x 2.54 cm)
CE (T85U)
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
T5U
T63U
T85U
T63U
DESCRIPTION
4-20 mA rangeable 1000Ω nickel-iron RTD transmitter
4-20 mA rangeable 1000Ω nickel RTD transmitter
4-20 mA rangeable 1000Ω 385 platinum RTD transmitter
RANGE
2
-20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C)
3
0° to 100°F (-18° to 38°C)
4
30° to 240°F (-1° to 116°C)
XR† Special range (see specifications for rangeability limits)
2
Example: T63U-2 Transmiter for 1000Ω nickel RTD with range of
-20° to 140°F
† Indicate at time of order
58
TEMPERATURE
PLATINUM RANGEABLE SPACE TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER
MODEL TT859
DESCRIPTION
The Model TT859 Platinum 10001 Space
Temperature Transmitter is DIP switch rangeable.
Non-interacting multiturn pots provide a constant finetune adjustment. Gold-plated DIP switches ensure stable, overlapping, incremental selections between
-10° to 60°F (-23° to 15°C) for zero and 35° to 150°F
(2° to 66°C) for span.
The well-ventilated housing allows quick and accurate
temperature sensing and effective heat dissipation from
the circuit.
Repeatability is excellent because the Model TT859
uses a platinum RTD as the sensing element.
Calibrated system accuracy of the Model TT859 is typically 0.25°F (.14°C) with optional sensor matching.
TT859PW
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
Substitute for discontinued Hy-Cal transmitters
4-20 mA signal
Optimum flow-through ventilation
Easy zero and span ranging (non-interacting)
On-line calibration
Nonpolar connections
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensing element
System accuracy
Rangeability limits
Zero
Span
Output
Transmitter linearity
Sensor stability
Installation
Transmitter housing
10001 platinum RTD, 375 curve or
10001 platinum RTD, 385 curve
±0.5°F (0.3°C) @ room temp or
±0.8% of span operating @ 24 VDC
Ambient temp
Storage temp
-40° to 185°F (-40° to 85°C)
-67° to 212°F (-55° to 100°C)
Supply voltage
Max load
9.4-35 VDC
(Supply voltage - 9.4 VDC) / 0.02A
-10° to 60°F (-23° to 15°C)
35° to 150°F (2° to 66°C)
4-20 mA, two-wire
±0.1% of span (negligible)
Better than 0.09°F (0.05°C) per year
Impedance
2501 ±0.1% @ 11.4 VDC nominal
5001 ±0.1% @ 19.4 VDC nominal
7301 ±0.1% @ 24.0 VDC nominal
Connections
Screw terminals, nonpolar, connect
either way
Plastic housing w/aluminum faceplate
4.5"H x 2.75"W x 1.58"D
(11.43 x 6.98 x 4.01 cm)
Serviceability
Zero and span adjust
Resolution
Noninteracting
Constant and independent of DIP switch
range selection, adjust zero only for
on-site trim calibration
59
TEMPERATURE
Once installed, the Model TT859 can be field calibrated
or re-ranged through coarse switch adjustments and
fine tune multiturn zero and span pots. The two-wire termination points are insensitive to power supply polarity.
This prevents reversed hook-ups and simplifies installation.
TEMPERATURE
PLATINUM RANGEABLE SPACE TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER
MODEL TT859
DIMENSIONS
WIRING
in
(cm)
Transmitter mounted in cover
24 VDC
2
3
4.50
(11.43)
+
–
1
1
2
3
4
SPAN
ADJ.
4
5
6
7 8
–
+
2.75
(6.98)
ZERO
ADJ.
1.58
(4.01)
Housing Top View
TEMPERATURE
1 2
ON
3
4
4-20mA
Signal
Housing Side View
RTD
TT859
Decorative Wall-Mount
Temperature Transmitter
TT859
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
* TT859 Assembly probe for two-wire RTDs
PF 1000Ω 0.00385 Ω/Ω/°C platinum curve
* PW 1000Ω 0.00375 Ω/Ω/°C platinum curve
1
4-20mA DC output
Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0°/100°F) (-18°/38°C)
* S
Range codes per Minco letter ranges (40°/90°F) (4°/32°C)
* H
-Fill in range code per Minco catalog range letters
SX Special range on next item line, -xxx/-yyy, i.e., -10°F min zero, 150°F max span
* 1 No calibration data, Sensor or Transmitter
* 2 Sensor/Transmitter matched at 0°C with NIST
3 Sensor/Transmitter matched at 0°, 100°, and 260°C with NIST
TT859
PW
1
*Normally-stocked items
60
S
1
Example: TT859PW1S1 Room transmitter, 375 curve platinum RTD,
ranged for 0°/100°F
TEMPERATURE
PLATINUM TEMPERATURE SENSORS
MODELS AS ROOM, DUCT, OSA, & IMMERSION
DESCRIPTION
Minco Room, Duct, Outside Air, and Immersion
Temperature Sensors have thin film platinum elements
for fast, accurate point measurement. They are
designed for energy and environmental control applications.
The Model AS_ _ _ S industrial room-mount housing
provides an accurate, professional appearance. This
housing can either direct mount or mount to a standard
handibox or wire mold.
AS2PW080D
The Model AS_ _ _ O outside air sensor features a nonheat conductive, solar-reflecting noncorrosive shield.
This configuration is completely sealed against moisture
in weather conditions. The slotted shield allows air to
flow freely to the stainless steel probe to provide accurate measurement. Installation is easy with 1/2" female
threads.
The Model AS_ _ _ Q immersion probes are designed
with a 1/2" tapered thread for easy installation in
thermowells and a handibox with 1/2" knockouts. The
Model AS_ _ _ P uses a weather-resistant box.
AS2PW000S
AS2PW040O
FEATURES
• Replacement for discontinued Hy-Cal
transmitters with sensors
• Low cost, easy installation
• Rugged design
• Platinum RTDs
• Interchangeable sensors
• NIST certification available
SPECIFICATIONS
Temp range
Room "S"
Duct "D" or "E"
Outside air "O" or "W"
Immersion "P" or "Q"
Sensing element
Ice point
resistance (Ro)
Interchangeability
-58° to 150°F (-50° to 65°C)
-58° to 500°F (-50° to 260°C)
-58° to 175°F (-50° to 80°C)
-320° to 500°F (-200° to
260°C)
10001 platinum two-wire
0.00375 or 0.00385 1/1/°C,
1001 platinum three-wire
0.00385 1/1/°C
10001 ±2.01 (±0.2%),
1001 ±0.21 (±0.2%)
±0.5°C or ±0.2% Ro trim
Stability
Probe material
Room
Duct
OSA
Immersion
Probe limits
Housing material
Room
Duct, immersion
OSA
Lead wire material
Better than 0.05°C per year
0.187" diameter aluminum
0.25" diameter stainless steel
0.187" diameter stainless steel
0.25" diameter stainless steel
2" to 48" long
Plastic with aluminum faceplate
Electro zinc-plated box
with 1/2" knockout
White polyvinyl with weatherresistant box
22 AWG silver-plated stranded
copper, Teflon® insulated
61
TEMPERATURE
AS2PW055Q
The Model AS_ _ _ D duct-mount sensor features a
rugged, stainless steel probe mounted in a standard
handibox, making installation quick and easy with selftapping screws. The Model AS_ _ _ E uses a weatherresistant box.
TEMPERATURE
PLATINUM TEMPERATURE SENSORS
MODELS AS ROOM, DUCT, OSA, & IMMERSION
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
1/2" Knockouts
Foam Gasket
1/2" Knockouts
1/2" NPT Typical
both sides
2.75
(6.98)
0.25
(0.64)
dia
4.0
(10.16)
0.25
(0.64)
dia
Stainless Steel
Probe
4.0
(10.16)
Housing Bottom View
Stainless Steel
Probe
LLL
8.0
(20.32)
1.88
(4.76)
4.50
(11.43)
AS___080D Duct-Mount Sensor
1.88
(4.76)
1.0
(2.54)
LLL
5.5
(13.97)
1.58
(4.01)
4.63
(11.75)
1/2" FNPT
Housing Top View
AS_ _ _ 055Q Immersion Probe
Mounted in Handibox
5.5
(13.97)
2.88
(7.30)
AS___000S
Room-Mount Sensor
1.5
(3.81)
2.0
(5.08)
TEMPERATURE
AS___040O Outside Air Sensor
ORDERING INFORMATION
*
‡
MODEL DESCRIPTION
AS2
Assembly probe for two-wire RTDs
AS3
Assembly probe for three-wire RTDs (PD sensors only)
‡ PD
100Ω 0.00385 Ω/Ω/°C platinum curve, 6" leads
PF 1KΩ 0.00385 Ω/Ω/°C platinum curve, 6" leads
* PW 1KΩ 0.00375 Ω/Ω/°C platinum curve, 6" leads
LLL Length LLL in .1" increments 040 = 4.0", 120 = 12.0", .000 for all space sensors “S”
‡*
D
Duct mount, handibox 1/2" knockouts, LLL typically = 8.0"
E
Duct mount, weatherproof box, LLL typically = 8.0"
‡*
O
Outside air, weatherproof box with weather shield, LLL = 4.0"
‡*
Q
Immersion, handibox 1/2" knockouts, LLL typically = 5.5" for 6" well insertion
P
Immersion, weatherproof box, LLL typically = 5.5" for 6" well insertion
‡*
S
Space, indoor room, wall-mount housing, LLL = 000
W
Wall mount, outside, weatherproof box, LLL typically 4.0"
‡ * 000
No transmitter
801 TT-801, 2- or 3-wire fixed range, 100Ω, 385 curve, PD sensor only
807 TT-807, 2-wire fixed range, 1000Ω, 375 curve, PW or PF sensor only
111 TT-111, 2-wire fixed range, for PD, PF, or PW RTD sensors
216 TT-216, 2- or 3-wire rangeable, 385 curve, PD, PF, or PW sensors only
XX No transmitter
EN Range codes per Minco letter ranges (-20°/140°F) or (-29°/60°C)
S
Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0°/100°F) or (-18°/38°C)
A
Range codes per Minco letter ranges (20°/120°F) or (-7°/49°C)
BI
Range codes per Minco letter ranges (30°/130°F) or (-1°/54°C)
KK Range codes per Minco letter ranges (30°/180°F) or (-1°/82°C)
BN Range codes per Minco letter ranges (30°/240°F) or (-1°/116°C)
N
Range codes per Minco letter ranges (32°/122°F) or (0°/50°C)
H
Range codes per Minco letter ranges (40°/90°F) or (4°/32°C)
M
Range codes per Minco letter ranges (-50°/50°C)
C
Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0°/100°C)
BW Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0°/250°C)
JW Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0°/500°C)
-Fill in range code per Minco catalog range letters for 111 or 216
-Fill in range code per Minco catalog range letters for 801 or 807
SX Special range on next item line, -xxx/-yyyE, i.e., -100°/-50°F
‡* 1
* Normally-stocked items
No calibration data, sensor or transmitter
‡ Normally-stocked for “PD”
2
Sensor/Transmitter matched at 0°C with NIST
3
Sensor/Transmitter matched at 0°, 100°, and 260°C with NIST
100Ω RTDs
Sample order:
AS3PD080D000XX1
8" Duct probe
with three-wire 100Ω,
385 curve platinum RTD
AS2PW055Q000XX1 5.5" Immersion probe
with two-wire 1000Ω,
375 curve RTD
RELATED PRODUCTS
WB-6
WS-6
62
Brass well for AS_ _ _ (P, Q), for 5.5" probes
Stainless steel well for AS_ _ _ (P, Q), for 5.5" probes
TCC-12
TCC-111
Single application thermal compound
Thermal conductive compound 111 ml
TEMPERATURE
PLATINUM RTD TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER
MODELS TT801, TT807
DESCRIPTION
Model TT801 and TT807 two-wire, 4-20 mA temperature transmitters connect to platinum 1001 and 10001
RTDs. Model TT-800’s are custom calibrated for those
tough high and low temperature application ranges.
These compact transmitters are extremely rugged and
have excellent performance specifications.
The Model TT801 accepts a two-wire or three-wire
1001 RTD input, and the Model TT807 accepts a twowire 10001 input. The 4-20 mA signal is factory calibrated over the full range of the user-specified temperature
span to provide excellent performance for either thin film
or wire-wound platinum RTDs.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
4-20 mA signal transmitter
1000/1001 RTD input
Wide high and low calibration ranges
Standard handibox mounting
Two and three-wire RTD wiring optional
Factory calibrated
Functional equivalent to HCT-801 and HCT-807
100% substitute for discontinued Hy-Cal transmitters
TABLE 1.
RECOMMENDED TWO-WIRE SENSOR CABLE LENGTHS
-1°F OFFSET FOR CABLE LENGTHS BELOW
WIRE GAUGE
10001
1001
(AWG)
ft (m)
ft (m)
12
1200 (365)
120 (36)
14
800 (244)
80 (24)
16
500 (152)
50 (15)
18
310 (94)
31 (9.4)
20
200 (60)
20 (6)
22
124 (38)
12 (3.8)
Values provided are for two-wire stranded copper and are for
reference only. Terminations may also affect the offset.
SPECIFICATIONS
Output
4-20 mA, (7501 @ 24 VDC)
Transmitter/Sensor type
TT801
Three-wire, 1001
385 platinum RTD
(accepts two-wire input also)
TT807
Two-wire, 10001
375 or 385 platinum RTD
RTD current
1 mA nominal, TT801
0.2 mA nominal, TT807
Linearity
±0.1% of span
Accuracy
±0.1% of span
Calibration range
Min span
35°F (19°C)
Max span
1112°F (600°C)
Zero
Limited by the sensor used
Power requirement
Max load
Impedance
Zero adjust
Span adjust
Polarity protection
Mounting
Ambient temp
Weight
8.5-35 VDC
(Supply voltage - 8.5) / 0.02A
2501 max @ 14 VDC
7501 max @ 24 VDC
±5% typical, factory-set,
noninteracting
±5% typical, factory-set,
noninteracting
Diode protected
Handibox
-40° to 185°F (-40° to 85°C)
0.3 lb (0.14 kg)
63
TEMPERATURE
TT801
FEATURES
TEMPERATURE
PLATINUM RTD TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER
MODELS TT801, TT807
DIMENSIONS / WIRING
in
(cm)
Power Supply
(red)
3.75
(9.52)
1/4" dia, two places
(for #8 mtg screw)
MI
NC
O
1000
Platinum
RTD Sensor
3.28
(8.33)
TT807
(black)
4-20 mA
Signal
(black)
1.75
(4.45)
2.5
(6.35)
Power Supply
0.7
(1.78)
(red)
Optional Field Wiring
Optional CustomerSupplied Handibox
and Cover
TEMPERATURE
(white)
(white)
100
Platinum
RTD Sensor
TT801
(black)
4-20 mA
Signal
(white)
(black)
Note: Three-wire transmitters have two white wires and one black wire. Connect the white wires to the two common sensor
leads and black to the other lead. If the sensor has only two leads, short the two transmitter white wires together and
connect to one side of the sensor. Connect the black to the other side. See Table 1 on previous page.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
* TT801 Transmitter for two- or three-wire PT100 RTDs (must use a PD sensor curve)
* TT807 Transmitter for two-wire PT1000 RTDs (must use a PW, PF sensor curve)
* PD 100Ω 0.00385 Ω/Ω/°C platinum curve, 6" leads
PF 1000Ω 0.00385 Ω/Ω/°C platinum curve, 6" leads
* PW 1000Ω 0.00375 Ω/Ω/°C platinum curve, 6" leads
1
4-20 mA DC Output
* EN Range codes per Minco letter ranges (-20°/140°F) or (-29°/60°C), Former B2 code
S
Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0°/100°F) or (-18°/38°C)
A
Range codes per Minco letter ranges (20°/120°F) or (-7°/49°C)
BI Range codes per Minco letter ranges (30°/130°F) or (-1°/54°C)
KK Range codes per Minco letter ranges (30°/180°F) or (-1°/82°C)
* BN Range codes per Minco letter ranges (30°/240°F) or (-1°/116°C), Former B1 code
Range codes per Minco letter ranges (32°/122°F) or (0°/50°C), Former B3 code
* N
H
Range codes per Minco letter ranges (40°/90°F) or (4°/32°C)
M Range codes per Minco letter ranges (-50°/50°C)
C
Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0°/100°C)
BW Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0°/250°C)
JW Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0°/500°C)
-Range codes per Minco letter ranges
SX Special range on next item line, -xxx/-yyyE, i.e. -100°/50°F)
TT807
PW
1
*Normally-stocked items
64
A
Example: TT807PW1A PT1000 transmitter for 1000Ω, 375 curve platinum RTD,
ranged for 20°/120°F
TEMPERATURE
1000 OHM PLATINUM RTD RANGEABLE TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER
MODEL TT809
DESCRIPTION
OSA
(O)
TT-809-A
Transmitter only
(W)
The gasketed cast-metal housing provides excellent
weather resistance. The screw terminal connections on
the transmitter circuit, 1/2" NPT threaded connection,
and adjustable mounting brackets simplify installation.
Several varieties of precision 10001 platinum RTD
probes are easily mated with the transmitter housing.
Duct
(G)
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Switch-set rangeable with zero and span
One-point field calibration
Nonpolar loop connections
Weatherproof sensor interface housing
Noninteracting zero/span adjustment
Functional equivalent to Hy-Cal HCT-809
Substitute for discontinued Hy-Cal transmitters
Immersion
(P)
Averaging
(V)
Mated Probe Selection
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensing element
Sensor coefficient
Calibrated accuracy
Rangeability
Zero
Span
Output
Input voltage
Transmitter linearity
RTD current
10001 platinum RTD, two-wire
0.00375 1/1/°C TCR
0.00385 1/1/°C TCR
±0.1% of span
-50° to 212°F (-45° to 100°C)
30° to 320°F (17° to 180°C)
4-20 mA, two-wire
9.4-35 VDC
±0.1% of span
0.5 mA low value virtually
eliminates sensor self-heating
Max load
(Supply voltage - 9.4) / 0.02A
Impedance
2501 ±0.1% @ 14.4 VDC min
7301 ±0.1% @ 24 VDC min
Operating environment -40° to 185°F (-40° to 85°C)
Connections
Screw terminals; nonpolar, for
connections either way
Housing
4.5"L x 2.75"W x 2.25"D
(11.43 x 6.99 x 5.72 cm)
Construction
Sensors
RTD
TCR
Accuracy
Probe
Immersion
Averaging
Wiring
Range Ambient
Duct
Immersion
OSA
Averaging
Cast aluminum moisture-resistant
1/2" FNPT and gasketed cover,
suitable for outdoor use, UL #459L
10001 @32°F (0°C) platinum
375 or 385 curve
±0.12%
Stainless steel, 1/4" (6.35 mm),
2" to 48" long
Copper, 3/16" (4.76 mm),
12', 24', and 50' only
4" (10 cm) 22 AWG leads
Probe only
-58° to 500°F (-50° to 260°C)
-320° to 500°F (-200° to 260°C)
-58° to 175°F (-50° to 80°C)
-40° to 240°F (-40° to 115°C)
65
TEMPERATURE
The Model TT809 is a 10001 Platinum RTD
Rangeable Temperature Transmitter. Zero setting can
range anywhere from -50° to 212°F (-45° to 100°C) and
span from 30° to 320°F (17° to 180°C). The Model
TT809 comes factory calibrated, and once installed, it
can be field calibrated with a high precision DVM and
decade box. The Model TT809 is easily calibrated by
adjusting the zero pot to match the calibration reference.
TEMPERATURE
1000 OHM RTD RANGEABLE TRANSMITTER
MODEL TT809
DIMENSIONS
WIRING
in
(cm)
4.5
(11.43)
1/2"
NPT
Power Connection Sensor Correction
2.0
(5.08)
2.75
(6.99)
TT809PW000W Enclosure Only
4.5
(11.43)
5.5
(13.97)
Span and Zero
Adjustments
0.25
(0.64)
6.5
(16.5)
2.0
(5.08)
TT809PW055P Immersion
4-20 mA
Signal
+
Foam Gasket
TEMPERATURE
2.75
(6.99)
2.0
(5.08)
8.5 -35V
Power
Supply
0.25
(0.635)
8.0 (20.32) (E)
or
24' (7.31m)
Coiled Copper (V)
Span Pot
1 2 3 4
TT809PW080E Duct
TT809PW288V Averaging
4.63
(11.75)
5.5
(13.97)
1/2" FNPT
2.88
(7.30)
2.0
(5.08)
1.5
(3.81)
1000 RTD
375 Platinum
or
385 Platinum
+
Zero Pot
The Model TT809 has range switch adjustments and noninteracting zero and span pots. The weatherproof box is standard and provides easy accessibility for installation and service.
TT809
Temperature Transmitter
TT809PW040O Outdoor
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
* TT809 Assembly probe for two-wire RTDs
PF 1000Ω 0.0385 Ω/Ω/°C platinum curve, 6" leads
* PW 1000Ω 0.0375 Ω/Ω/°C platinum curve, 6" leads
LLL Length LLL in .1" increments 040 = 4.0", 120 = 12.0", .000 for “W” without sensors
Duct mount, weather resistant box, LLL typically = 8.0"
* E
Duct averaging, weather resistant box, LLL must be = 144", 288", or 600"
* V
* O Outside air, weather resistant box with weather shield, LLL = 4.0"
Immersion, weather resistant box, LLL typically = 5.5" for 6" well insertion
* P
W Wall mount, weather resistant box, LLL typically 4.0" or 000 for no probe"
* 1 4-20 mA DC Output
Range codes per Minco letter ranges (30°/130°F)
* BI
-Range codes per Minco letter ranges in the catalog
SX
Special Range on next item line, -xxx/-yyy, i.e., -50°/270°F
No calibration data, Sensor or Transmitter
* 1
2
Sensor/Transmitter matched at 0°C with NIST
3
Sensor/Transmitter matched at 0°, 100°, and 260°C with NIST
*Normally-stocked item
WB-6
WS-6
ST-AV91H
66
Brass well
Stainless steel well
10001 averaging probe
Sample order:
TT809PW080E1S1
Transmitter with 8" Duct probe,
375 curve platinum RTD,
ranged for 0°/100°F
TT809PW055P1BI2
Transmitter with 5.5" Immersion
probe, 375 curve RTD, with NIST
at 0°C, ranged for 30°/130°F
TT809PW000W1N1
Transmitter only for two-wire
1000Ω, 375 curve RTD, ranged
for 32°/122°F
Common range codes:
BI
S
H
N
EN
RELATED PRODUCTS
AS2PA080E000XX1
AS2PA050P000XX1
AS2PA040O000XX1
30°/130°F (-1°/54°C)
0°/100°F (-18°/38°C)
40°/90°F (4°/32°C)
32°/122°F (0°/50°C)
-20°/140°F (-29°/60°C)
10001 duct probe
10001 immersion probe
10001 OSA probe
TEMPERATURE
1000 OHM NICKEL-RTD, ROOM, DUCT, OSA
TE-6300 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Johnson Controls Room, Duct, and OSA 10001 Nickel
RTDs are specifically designed for HVAC and BAS systems. The active element is a nickel-based sensor that
has been proven to be very stable and robust with many
years of service life. The sensors come complete and
ready to install for their specific applications.
TE-6312
TE-6311
FEATURES
• Easy to mount
Proven long performance
Many mounting styles
Single assembly ordering
PVC enclosure
Stainless steel insertion probe
TE-6316
TE-6313
TE-6300
TE-6314
COMMON SPECIFICATIONS
Element
Sensitivity
Accuracy
Temp range
Enclosure ambient temp
10001 nickel @ 70°F (21°C)
Approx 31/°F (5.4 1/°C)
± 0.34°F (± 0.18°C)
±3°F averaging probe
-50° to 220°F (-46° to 82°C)
-50° to 122°F (-46° to 50°C)
Wire
Probe
Enclosure
6" (15.24 cm) of 22 AWG
0.25" (0.64 cm) stainless steel (duct, OSA,
strap-on), 0.093" (0.24 cm) copper (averaging),
thin film on circuit board with coating (wall)
PVC conduit box
INDIVIDUAL SPECIFICATIONS
MODEL
Type
Probe length
Accessories
TE-6300
Strap-on
3" (7.62 cm)
APB-28
PN-46
TE-6311
Duct
8" (20.32 cm)
N/A
TE-6312
Immersion
8" (20.32 cm)
WB-6
TCC-111
TE-6313
OSA
4" (10.16 cm)
N/A
TE-6314
Wall
Thin film
N/A
TE-6316
Averaging
17' (5.18m)
M-648
PERFORMANCE CHARTS
°F
-50
-40
-30
-20
-10
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
TEMPERATURE
°C
-46
-40
-34
-29
-23
-18
-12
-7
-1
4
10
16
21
27
32
38
TE-63xx
RESISTANCE Ω
674
699
725
751
777
803
830
858
885
914
942
971
1000
1030
1060
1090
TEMPERATURE
°F
°C
110
43
120
49
130
54
140
60
150
66
160
71
170
77
180
82
190
88
200
93
210
99
220
104
230
110
240
116
250
121
TE-63xx
RESISTANCE Ω
1121
1152
1184
1216
1248
1281
1314
1348
1382
1417
1452
1487
1524
1560
1597
67
TEMPERATURE
•
•
•
•
•
TEMPERATURE
1000 OHM NICKEL-RTD, ROOM, DUCT, OSA
TE-6300 SERIES
DIMENSIONS
2.75
(6.99)
3.47
(8.81)
4.46
(11.33)
in
(cm)
4.47
(11.35)
0.67
(1.70)
6.0 max
(15.24)
1.72
(4.37)
TE-6313 Outdoor Air Sensor
TE-6316 Duct Averaging Sensor
7.5 max
(19.05)
4.47
(11.35)
2.75
(6.99)
7.5 max
(19.05)
0.25 (0.63)
4.47
(11.35)
Mounting Plate
TEMPERATURE
Mounting Plate
45˚
2.75
(6.99)
0.09
(0.24)
1/2" NPT
1.72
(4.37)
0.25 (0.63)
4.5 (11.43)
1.72
(4.37)
TE-6311 Duct Probe Sensor
WB-6 or WS-6
TE-6312 Well Insertion Sensor
3.13
(7.95)
1.81
(4.60)
2.13
(5.41)
0.25
(0.63)
3 (7.62)
TE-6314 Wall-Mount Sensor
TE-6300 Strap-On Sensor
CROSS REFERENCES
May be used to replace 1 k1 (ni) RTDs (TE-1100, TE-1300, TE-1700, TE-1800, TE-6000)
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
TE-6300-603
TE-6311P-1
TE-6312P-1
DESCRIPTION
Strap-on 10001 nickel RTD
Duct-mount 10001 nickel RTD
Immersion 10001 nickel RTD
MODEL
TE-6313P-1
TE-6314P-1
TE-6316P-1
DESCRIPTION
OSA-mount 10001 nickel RTD
Wall-mount 10001 nickel RTD
Duct averaging 10001 nickel RTD
RELATED PRODUCTS
APB-28 Adjustable pipe bracket 2" to 8" (5.08 to 20.32 cm) M-648
WB-6
6" (15.24 cm) brass well with 1/2" NPT
T63U
TCC-111 Thermal conductive compound
68
Copper-plated mounting end clip
4-20 mA nickel probe transmitter
TEMPERATURE
HIGH TEMPERATURE SMOKE STACK SENSOR AND TRANSMITTER
MODELS S241HC, TT111H-0800
DESCRIPTION
The Model S241HC High Temperature Sensor is directly
inserted to monitor the temperature of boiler stacks, steam
lines, and other applications where the temperature may rise
above the operating range of standard sensors. When used
with the Model TT111H-0800 Transmitter, a 4-20 mA output
is provided that is linear from 0° to 800°F (-18° to 427°C).
TT111
FEATURES
All stainless steel probe
24" high temperature leads
Small transmitter size
Well available (WS-6)
High temperature span (0° to 800°F)
S241HC
SPECIFICATIONS
S241HC Sensor
Resistance
Temp coefficient
Range
Leads
Working pressure
Probe material
Well
Approx sensitivity
10001 ±0.1% @ 32°F (0°C)
0.00375 1/1/°C
-58° to 932°F (-50° to 500°C)
Two-wire nickel coated stranded
copper, 24" long 22 AWG fiberglass
insulated
3000 psig (20.7 mPa) max
304 stainless steel
WS-6 304 stainless steel
2.11/°F @ 32°F (0°C)
TT111H-0800 Fixed Transmitter
Input
10001 platinum 0.00375 1/1/°C
Output range
4-20 mA, 0° to 800°F (-18° to 427°C)
Operating temp
-58° to 160°F (-50° to 70°C)
Supply voltage
8.5-30 VDC unregulated
Calibration accuracy ±0.05% of span
Impedance
7501 ± 0.1% @ 24 VDC min
T91H Rangeable Transmitter
Rangeable
200° to 1000°F (93.3° to 537.7°C)
Specifications
See T91H catalog page in the
“Temperature” section
WIRING
DIMENSIONS
1/2" Pipe Thread (typical both sides)
in
(cm)
+
GFF-50
Accessory
0.25
(0.64)
5.5
(13.97)
24.0
(60.94)
2.0
(5.10)
–
+
S241HC Probe
Mounting Hole
0.141" dia (0.36)
1 2
3 4
1.1
(2.79)
zer
1.53
(3.89)
0.51
(1.30)
o
4-20 mA
– Signal
S241HC
Sensor
span
4 3 2 1
24 VDC
Power
Supply
0.91
(2.31)
TT111H-0800
Transmitter
0.14
(0.36)
TT111H-0800 Transmitter
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
S241HC
TT111H-0800
GFF-50
WS-6
T91H
DESCRIPTION
Direct insertion high temperature sensor
High temperature transmitter 0° to 800°F
1/2" galvanized floor flange
RELATED PRODUCTS
304 stainless steel well 5.5" element length
High temperature rangeable transmitter
69
TEMPERATURE
•
•
•
•
•
GFF-50
TEMPERATURE
THERMAL RIBBON RTD
MODELS S101144, S469
DESCRIPTION
Model S101144 and S469 self-adhesive, flexible ribbons feature imbedded RTDs to sense temperature. The platinum
10001 RTD sensor is inserted and used with a transmitter or
directly into a BAS system. The self-adhesive backing makes
installation easy, and it adheres to all types of surfaces. The
flexible thin ribbon maximizes contact to the measured surface
which makes response time very fast. The accuracy is the
same as immersion sensors
S469PW
S101144PW
Close-up of
sensor tip
APPLICATION
The Model S469 precision sensor measures surface temperature and is ideal for strapping on water pipes.
#20
TEMPERATURE
The Model S101144 is very small and unobtrusive and is used in
stealthy locations, such as windows and museum displays.
FEATURES
APPLICATIONS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Small, flexible, and thin
Platinum accuracy
Fast response
Easy mounting
Self-adhesive backing
Pliable
Metal pipe
Metal tanks
Windows
Glass displays
Condensation control
with dew point sensor
AC766
INSTALLATION / MOUNTING
Pipe Insulation
Conduit
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensor
TCR
Accuracy
Time constant
Temp range
Stability
AC766 strap
Construction
Leads
Mounting
10001 platinum RTD
0.00375 1/1/°C (385 available)
±0.12% @ 0°C
1 sec
-4° to 350°F (-20° to 177°C)
<0.1°C/year
5' (1.5 m) nylon, 230°F (110°C)
Polyimide film
with elastomer cover (S101144),
silicone rubber (S469)
26 AWG stranded copper
Adhesive backing (flat surface)
AC766 pipe-mount kit with tape
(conduit) #20 stretch tape (round surface)
Utility Box
AC766
Field Wires
Strap
Wire Nuts
Buckle
T91U
Transmitter
ThermalRibbon™
S469PW
Fill in with
Insulation
#20 Stretch Tape
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
40 (101.6)
0.47
(1.10)
1.5 (3.81)
0.20
(0.51)
S101144PW
Thickness
0.08 (0.20) max
36 (91.44)
0.38
(0.95)
Thickness
0.05 (0.12) max
S469PW
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
S101144PW
S469PW
AC766
#20
T91U
70
DESCRIPTION
10001, 375 thermal tab RTD with adhesive backing
10001, 375 rubber strip RTD with adhesive backing
Pipe mount kit with #20 stretch tape and 5' (1.5m) nylon strap
Self-vulcanizing stretch tape, 6' (1.83m) roll, 1" (2.54 cm) wide
10001 375 platinum transmitter
TEMPERATURE
RADIANT ROOM TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER
MODEL TY7321A1009
DESCRIPTION
The Model TY-7321A1009 is a noncontact infrared (IR)
radiant room temperature transmitter. IR energy is one
of the main components of the perceived temperature in
a space. The Model TY-7321A1009 has a wide 52°
fixed viewing angle that averages the heat energy of the
office environment and offers a 1-5 VDC signal for temperature. It mounts conveniently to any ceiling or wall
via back box or directly to ceiling tiles or plaster. The
lens coverage is adjustable and points horizontally up to
344° and vertically up to 65°.
APPLICATION
SPECIFICATIONS
WIRING
24 VAC/DC ±15% (50/60 Hz),
0.3 VA
1-5 VDC, 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
±2°C
10 sec
0.95
+
Ð 24 VAC/DC
1
2 1
+
Unlimited (without obstructions)
52°, distance to sensing = 1:1
Adjustable
(344° horizontal/65° vertical)
59° to 95°F (15° to 35°C)
10% to 90% RH noncondensing
Fire-resistant plastic (white)
Equivalent to UL V-0
0.5 lb (0.23 kg)
5 4
Ambient temp
Ambient RH
Housing
Agency
Weight
Noncontact with 52° view angle
1-5V, 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
10-second response
344° swivel coverage
Ceiling or wall mount
Attractive white base and cover
6
Signal
Accuracy
Response
Emissivity
Sensing
distance
View angle
Sensor pivot
•
•
•
•
•
•
2
3
Power
FEATURES
TEMPERATURE
The Model TY-7321A1009 is used when mounting a
physical sensor is not possible in room applications. The
thermopile senses the background heat radiation over
an open-air environment and averages the energy into a
1-5V temperature signal. It is ideal in open office environments when the cubical walls prevent sensor mounting. Museums or marble entrance halls also are useful
ceiling applications. When directed at a sun-drenched
outdoor window, the unit measures the effects from the
sun so the supply air can be increased to compensate
for thermal loading.
4
3
1-5 VDC
Signal
Terminate to Base
71
TEMPERATURE
RADIANT ROOM TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER
MODEL TY7321A1009
DIMENSIONS
Base Mounting Screw
in
(cm)
2.2 (5.59)
Terminal Cover
Spring Mounting
Bracket
5.5 (13.97)
2.9
(7.37)
Sensing
Window
0.35
(0.90)
3.5 1.8
(8.89)(4.57)
2.6
(6.60)
3.4 (8.64)
Washer
9.0
(2.39)
Mounting Base
to Back Box
Boxless Type
Box Type
TEMPERATURE
MOUNTING
Spring
Mounting Bracket
Turn the Base
Mounting Screw two
or three times to
attach loosely.
Base
Mounting Screw
Terminal Cover
Wiring
Mounting
Base
Square Hole
Base Assembly
2.25
(5.72)
Mounting
Base
Align the small slot on
the Sensor with the
triangle on the Mounting
Base. Turn the Sensor
until it clicks.
Push the Mounting Base
into hole. Turn the Base
Mounting Screw until spring
brackets are firmly engaged
above ceiling.
Base Installation
Sensor
Sensor Installation
VIEW
65¡
Adjustable
Vertical
344¡
Adjustable
Horizontal
52¡ Fixed Optics
D:S = 1:1
1' Out = 1' Object
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
TY7321A1009
72
DESCRIPTION
Infrared room temperature transmitter, ceiling mount
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR THERMOWELLS AND WELL ADAPTERS
MODELS WEL-B, WEL-S, F2N-B, F2B-D, F2S-D
DESCRIPTION
F2S-D
Models WEL-B and WEL-S Sensor Wells are used with standard length Precon thermistors, Precon RTDs, and Model
T102 solid-state sensors. These wells may also be used with
5.5" (13.97 cm) Minco immersion sensors by using the H
option adapter. The well is designed to be installed into a standard 1/2" saddle or Thredolet®.
F2B-D
F2N-D
WEL-B
The WEL-B Brass Thermowell is the standard thermowell for
inserting into noncorrosive liquid lines. It will withstand a maximum temperature of 400°F (204°C) and a maximum static
pressure of 1000 psig (6.9 MPa).
The F2S-D Stainless Steel, F2N-D Nylon, or the F2B-D Brass
Well Adapter allows a 1/4" (0.64 cm) diameter sensor probe with
a 1/2" national pipe straight machined (NPSM) fitting to be used
with a standard WEL-B or WEL-S Thermowell.
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
1/2" NPSM Female Thread
0.69
0.63
(1.75) (1.58)
1/8-27 NPSM Internal Thread
1/2" NPT
3.25
(8.26)
4.94
(12.54)
0.5
(1.27)
1.31
(3.33)
1/2" NPSM Female Thread
F2B-D Brass
F2S-D Stainless Steel
5.13
(13.03)
WEL-B Brass Well or
WEL-S Stainless Steel Well
1/8" NPSM
Male Fitting
1/8" NPSM
Male Fitting
F2N-D Nylon
(insertion length add 0.31" (0.97))
Well Adapters
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
WEL
WEL
DESCRIPTION
Bulb wells
B
Brass bulb well
S
304 Stainless steel bulb well
OPTIONAL ADAPTER
F2B-D* Brass adapter for use with WEL-B
H
F2S-D* Stainless steel adapter for use with WEL-S
B
H
Example: WEL-B Brass bulb well with F2B-D brass adapter
* For use with Minco sensor probe length LLL=5.5"
F2S-D
F2B-D
F2N-D
TCC-12/TCC-111
RELATED PRODUCTS
Stainless steel adapter 1/8" NPS x 1/2" NPSM
Brass adapter 1/8" NPSM x 1/2" NPSM
Nylon adapter 1/8" NPSM x 1/2" NPSM
Thermal conducting compound single application, 3.75 fl oz (111 mL) tub
73
TEMPERATURE
The WEL-S 304 Stainless Steel Thermowell is inserted into
corrosive liquid pipe lines. It will withstand a maximum temperature of 1000°F (538°C) and a maximum static pressure of
4500 psig (31 MPa).
WEL-S
TEMPERATURE
BULB WELLS
MODELS WB, WS
DESCRIPTION
FB-3 ADAPTER
Models WB and WS Bulb Wells are used with standard or custom length Precon thermistors and Type 81 and 91 RTD sensors FS-3
by using the Model FB-3 adapter. These wells are also used
directly with Minco immersion sensors and are designed to install
into a standard 1/2" saddle or Thredolet®.
Model WB Brass Wells are inserted into noncorrosive liquid
lines. They will withstand a maximum temperature of 400°F
(204°C) at a static pressure of 1000 psi (6.9 MPa).
The Model WS 304 Stainless Steel Wells are inserted into
corrosive or noncorrosive liquid lines. These will withstand a
maximum temperature of 1000°F (538°C) at a static pressure
of 4500 psi (31 MPa).
WS-4
WB-6
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
D
0.75
(1.91)
B
TEMPERATURE
0.5
(1.27)
1.13
(2.86)
C
External Dimensions
1/2" NPT
1.75*
(4.44)
1/2" NPT
C
1/8" NPSM
0.88
(2.22)
0.26
(0.66)
B A
D
0.5
(1.27)
A
Internal Dimensions
FB-3
FS-3
MODEL
ELEMENT
LENGTH A
INSERTION
LENGTH B
SHANK DIA
LENGTH C
OVERALL
LENGTH D
WB-2.5
WS-2.5
WB-4
WS-4
WB-6
WS-6
WB-9
WS-9
FB-3
2.5 (6.35)
2.5 (6.35)
4.0 (10.16)
4.0 (10.16)
6.0 (15.24)
6.0 (15.24)
9.0 (22.86)
9.0 (22.86)
0.44 (1.12)
1.4 (3.56)
1.4 (3.56)
2.5 (6.35)
2.5 (6.35)
4.5 (11.43)
4.5 (11.43)
7.5 (19.05)
7.5 (19.05)
0.31 (0.79)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
0.625 (1.59)
0.625 (1.59)
0.625 (1.59)
0.625 (1.59)
0.5 (1.27)
2.75 (6.99)
2.75 (6.99)
4.3 (10.92)
4.3 (10.92)
6.3 (16.00)
6.3 (16.00)
9.3 (23.62)
9.3 (23.62)
0.75 (1.91)
*For WB-2.5 and WS-2.5 the head dimension is 1.5" long
NOTE: Inside threads are 1/2" NPSM; outside threads are 1/2" NPT.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
WB
WBF
WS
WSF
FB-3
FS-3
DESCRIPTION
Brass well
Brass well with FB-3 1/2" to 1/8" well adapter
304 stainless steel well
304 stainless steel well with FS-3 1/2" to 1/8" well adapter
1/2" to 1/8" brass well adapter for use with Precon and T102 sensors
1/2" to 1/8" stainless steel well adapter for use with Precon and T102 sensors
LENGTH DESIGNATION (well only)
2.5
4
6
9
XX
WBF
F2B-D
TCC-12
TCC-111
74
–
9
2.5" element length
4.0" element length
6.0" element element length
9.0" Element length
Specify custom length (12", 15", 18", or 24")
Precon
XL-probe length
Minco
probe length
in (cm)
in (cm)
2.5 (6.35)
4 (10.16)
6 (15.24)
9 (22.86)
12-24
2 (5.08)
3.5 (8.89)
5.5 (13.97)
8.5 (20.40)
0.5
Example: WBF-9 Brass well with 9" element length and FB-3 adapter
RELATED PRODUCTS
Brass adapter 1/2" NPT to 1/8" NPS adapter
Thermal conducting compound single application
Thermal conducting compound 111 mL tub
HC-101
HC-201
HW10K
HW30K
HW31K
ACI-3-R
MRH-3-S
HD10K
HD30K
HD31K
ACI-3-D
5
Invensys
3%
le
e
K
3%
le
e
K
3%
le
Ke
3%
Kele
3%
GE
3%
Kele
3%
Kele
3%
Kele
3%
Kele
3%
GE
3%
HUMIDITY
HUMIDITY
MODEL/SERIES
PAGE
Humidity Selection Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
DEWPOINT
9002 — VaporStat Infrared Dew Point and Grains Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
A21 — Aspirated Enclosure for Air Sampling with Space Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
DP3A — Dew Point Enthalpy and Wet Bulb Transmitter for Wall/Duct/OSA . . . . . . . . . . .103
EN3A — Enthalpy Transmitter for Wall/Duct/OSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
WB3A — Wet Bulb Transmitter for Wall/Duct/OSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
PRODUCTS
See the NEW ACI Series
BAS/HVAC Humidity
Sensor on page 93!
HC-101
HC-201
HW10K
HW30K
HW31K
ACI-3-R
MRH-3-S
HD10K
HD30K
HD31K
ACI-3-D
Invensys
Kele
Kele
Kele
Kele
GE
Kele
Kele
Kele
Kele
GE
5
SERVICES
Check out our handy
Humidity Selection
Chart on page 75!
3%
3%
3%
3%
3%
3%
3%
3%
3%
3%
3%
RH
ACI/RH Series — BAS/HVAC RH Transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
BA/H Series — BAPI RH Transmitters for Wall/Duct/OSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
EASYCAL — General Eastern Calibrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
EHRH — Waterproof/Wash Down Humidity Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
HC-101, HC-201 — Humidistat for Wall or Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
HD1K — 1% Accuracy, 4-20 mA Transmitter for Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
HD10K — 3% Accuracy, 4-20 mA Transmitter for Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
HD20K — 2% Accuracy, 4-20 mA Transmitter for Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
HD30K — 3% Accuracy, 4-20 mA Transmitter for Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
HD31K — 3 % Accuracy, 4-20 mA for Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
HF20K — Flush mount 2% Humidity for Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
HMD60U — 2% Accuracy, 4-20 mA Transmitter for Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
HMD70U — 2% Accuracy, 0-5V or 0-10V Transmitter for Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
HMK41K — Vaisala Calibrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
HMW60U — 2% Accuracy, 4-20 mA Transmitter for Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
HMW70U — 2% Accuracy, 0-5V or 0-10V Transmitter for Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
HO1K — 1% Accuracy, 4-20 mA Transmitter for OSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
HO20K — 2% Accuracy, 4-20 mA Transmitter for OSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
HO30K — 3% Accuracy, 4-20 mA Transmitter for OSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
HO31K — 3 % Accuracy, 4-20 mA Transmitter for OSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
HT2 — Minco 2% Accuracy Transmitters for Wall/Duct/OSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
HT829, HT839 — Minco1% & 2% Accuracy Transmitters for Wall/Duct/OSA . . . . . . . . . .101
HW1K — 1% Accuracy, 4-20 mA Transmitter for Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
HW10K — 3% Accuracy, 4-20 mA Transmitter for Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
HW20K — 2% Accuracy, 4-20 mA Transmitter for Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
HW30K — 3% Accuracy, 4-20 mA Transmitter for Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
HW31K — 3 % Accuracy, 4-20 mA Transmitter for Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
KH — Kele 2% & 3% Accuracy Transmitters for Wall/Duct/OSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
MRH — 2% & 3% Accuracy Transmitters for Wall/Duct/OSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
W43 — Humidistat for Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
SOLUTIONS
You’ll find a product at
Meet Any
Humidity Measurement.
Trane to
Indicates New Products
HUMIDITY
PRODUCT
W43A-14
HC-101
HC-201
GEH5S
GEH5D
GEH5O
KHR3
HW10K
HW30K
HW31K
ACI-3-R
MRH-3-S
BA/H300-B
KHD3
HD10K
HD30K
HD31K
ACI-3-D
MRH-3-D
BA/H300-D
KHO3
HD10K+WMK20
HO30K
HO31K
ACI-3-O
MRH-3O
BA/H300-O
HT-880
KHR2
HW20K
ACI-2-R
MRH-2-S
GEH2S
EHRH
HT2-S
HT829-S, HT839-S
HMW-60U
HMW-70U
BA/H200-B
KHD2
HD20K
ACI-2-D
MRH-2-D
GEH2D
HT2D
HT829-D, HT839-D
HMD-60U
HMD-70U
BA/H200-D
KHO2
HO20K
ACI-2-O
MRH-2O
GEH2O
HT2O
HT829-O, HT839-O
BA/H200-O
HW1K
HT829-S1N1
HD1K
HT829-D1N1
HO1K
HT829-O1N1
9002
RH
DB
WB
DP
EN
MNFR
JCI
Invensys
Invensys
GE
GE
GE
Kele
Kele
Kele
Kele
ACI
GE
BAPI
Kele
Kele
Kele
Kele
ACI
GE
BAPI
Kele
Kele
Kele
Kele
ACI
GE
BAPI
Minco
Kele
Kele
ACI
GE
GE
GE
Minco
Minco
Vaisala
Vaisala
BAPI
Kele
Kele
ACI
GE
GE
Minco
Minco
Vaisala
Vaisala
BAPI
Kele
Kele
ACI
GE
GE
Minco
Minco
BAPI
Kele
Minco
Kele
Minco
Kele
Minco
Telair
ACCURACY
4% diff.
5% diff.
5% diff.
5%
5%
5%
3%
3%
3%
3%
3%
3%
3%
3%
3%
3%
3%
3%
3%
3%
3%
3%
3%
3%
3%
3%
3%
2.50%
2%
2%
2%
2%
2%
2%
2%
2%
2%
2%
2%
2%
2%
2%
2%
2%
2%
2%
2%
2%
2%
2%
2%
2%
2%
2%
2%
2%
2%
1%
1%
1%
1%
1%
1%
1.8F
MOUNTING
Wall
Wall
Duct
Wall
Duct
OSA
Wall
Wall
Wall
Wall
Wall
Wall
Wall
Duct
Duct
Duct
Duct
Duct
Duct
Duct
OSA
OSA
OSA
OSA
OSA
OSA
OSA
Wall/Duct
Wall
Wall
Wall
Wall
Wall
Wall
Wall
Wall
Wall
Wall
Wall
Duct
Duct
Duct
Duct
Duct
Duct
Duct
Duct
Duct
Duct
OSA
OSA
OSA
OSA
OSA
OSA
OSA
OSA
Wall
Wall
Duct
Duct
OSA
OSA
Wall/Duct
SIGNAL
SPDT
SPDT
SPDT
4-20/0-10
4-20/0-10
4-20/0-10
4-20 mA
4-20 mA
4-20 mA
4-20 mA
4-20/0-10
4-20/0-10
4-20/0-5
4-20 mA
4-20 mA
4-20 mA
4-20 mA
4-20/0-10
4-20/0-10
4-20/0-5
4-20 mA
4-20 mA
4-20 mA
4-20 mA
4-20/0-10
0-10VDC
4-20/0-5
4-20 mA
4-20 mA
4-20 mA
4-20/0-10
4-20/0-10
4-20/0-10
4-20 mA
4-20 mA
4-20 mA
4-20 mA
0-5 VDC
4-20/0-5
4-20 mA
4-20 mA
4-20/0-10
4-20/0-10
4-20/0-10
4-20 mA
4-20 mA
4-20 mA
0-5 VDC
4-20/0-5
4-20 mA
4-20 mA
4-20/0-10
4-20/0-10
4-20/0-10
4-20 mA
4-20 mA
4-20/0-5
4-20 mA
4-20 mA
4-20 mA
4-20 mA
4-20 mA
4-20 mA
4-20 mA
MOISTURE
RH
RH
RH
RH/T optional
RH/T optional
RH/T optional
RH/T optional
RH/T optional
RH/T optional
RH/T optional
RH/T optional
RH/T optional
RH/T optional
RH/T optional
RH
RH/T optional
RH/T optional
RH/T optional
RH/T optional
RH/T optional
RH/T optional
RH
RH/T optional
RH/T optional
RH/T optional
RH/T optional
RH/T optional
RH
RH/T optional
RH/T optional
RH/T optional
RH/T optional
RH/T optional
RH/T optional
RH/T optional
RH, RH/T
RH/T optional
RH/T optional
RH/T optional
RH/T optional
RH/T optional
RH/T optional
RH/T optional
RH/T optional
RH/T optional
RH, RH/T
RH/T optional
RH/T optional
RH/T optional
RH/T optional
RH/T optional
RH/T optional
RH/T optional
RH/T optional
RH/T optional
RH, RH/T
RH/T optional
RH/T optional
RH
RH/T optional
RH
RH/T optional
RH
DP/T
ATTRIBUTES
Accuracy
Aesthetics
Duct
Replaceable sensor
Replaceable sensor
Replaceable sensor
Replaceable sensor
Replaceable sensor
Executive housing
White executive housing
Delta housing
GE housing
BAPI housing
Replaceable sensor
Replaceable sensor
Metal enclosure
Universal enclosure
4-20 mA and 0-10V
4-20 mA and 0-10V
4-20 mA and 0-5V
Replaceable sensor
Replaceable sensor
Metal enclosure
Universal enclosure
4-20 mA and 0-10V
4-20 mA and 0-10V
4-20 mA and 0-5V
Explosionproof
Replaceable sensor
Executive housing
Delta housing
GE housing
Replaceable sensor
Wash-down housing
Minco housing
One-point calibration
Vaisala housing
Voltage output
BAPI housing
Replaceable sensor
Metal enclosure
4-20 mA and 0-10V
4-20 mA and 0-10V
Replaceable sensor
Metal enclosure
One-point calibration
Metal enclosure
Metal enclosure
4-20 mA and 0-5V
Replaceable sensor
Metal enclosure
4-20 mA and 0-10V
4-20 mA and 0-10V
Replaceable sensor
Metal enclosure
One-point calibration
4-20 mA and 0-5V
Executive housing
Minco housing
Metal enclosure
One-point calibration
Metal enclosure
One-point calibration
IR measurement
APPLICATION
Limit control
Limit control
Limit control
Monitoring
Monitoring
Monitoring
Monitoring
Monitoring
Monitoring
Monitoring
Monitoring
Monitoring
Monitoring
Monitoring
Monitoring
Monitoring
Monitoring
Monitoring
Monitoring
Monitoring
Monitoring
Monitoring
Monitoring
Monitoring
Monitoring
Monitoring
Monitoring
RH control
RH control
RH control
RH control
RH control
RH control
RH control, pool
RH control
RH control
RH control
RH control
RH control
RH control
RH control
RH control
RH control
RH control
RH control
RH control
RH control
RH control
RH control
RH control
RH control
RH control
RH control
RH control
RH control
RH control
RH control
Clean room control
Clean room control
Clean room control
Clean room control
Calculation input
Calculation input
Condensation control
Relative Humidity is the ratio of actual water vapor in the air vs. the water vapor that the air can hold at saturation.
Dry bulb temperature is the temperature of the air using a dry sensor without any effect from evaporative cooling.
Wet bulb temperature is the temperature of the air using a wet sensor, which measures the cooling effect from evaporation.
Dew Point temperature is the temperature at which water vapor begins to condense into water liquid, which is at 100% RH.
Enthalpy is the measure of the heat energy in the air.
75
HUMIDITY
HUMIDITY SELECTION CHART
HUMIDITY
HUMIDISTATS
MODELS HC-101, HC-201
DESCRIPTION
Models HC-101 and HC-201 Humidistats are used for low or
line voltage on/off single-stage control of humidifiers, dehumidifiers, valves, solenoids, compressors, relays, and other electrical equipment.
HC-101
MAXIMUM ELECTRICAL RATINGS
HC-201
WIRING
(brown) N.O.
VAC
FLA LRA RESISTIVE PILOT DUTY
MODEL 50/60 Hz
AMPS
VA
HC-101
24
—
—
8
60
HC-201
120
7.2 43.2
8
345
(red) N.C.
Drop in RH
(orange)
Common
Brown makes on drop in humidity.
All units provided with green
grounding lead (
).
SPECIFICATIONS / ORDERING INFORMATION
HUMIDITY
AMBIENT LIMITS °F (°C)
MODEL DESCRIPTION
HC-101
Room
HC-201
Duct
SCALE
RANGE
DIFF
Operating
10% to 90% RH 5% 40 to 125
(4 to 52)
15% to 95% RH 5% 40 to 125
(4 to 52)
Shipping &
Storage
-40 to 140
(-40 to 60)
-40 to 140
(-40 to 60)
CONNECTION
WEIGHT COVER
Beige
1.0 lb
6" (15.0 cm)
Color-coded leads (0.45 kg) plastic
Metal
1.5 lb
Coded screw
(0.68 kg)
terminals
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
4.38 x 2.88 x 1.63
(11.13 x 7.32 x 4.14)
4.38 x 6.50 x 2.25
(11.13 x 16.51 x 5.72)
HUMIDISTATS
MODEL W43A-14
WIRING
DESCRIPTION
The SPDT contact action of the Model W43A-14 Humidistat
provides control of humidifying or dehumidifying equipment. A
flush-mounting bracket that fits a standard outlet box is supplied. The Model W43A-14 features field-adjustable high and
low stops. Stops can be set for locked setting.
H
L
ACCESSORIES
The Model W43A-14 includes a faceplate for horizontal mounting. The plate is for on-the-job installation over a vertical plate.
It can be field-converted to concealed adjustment. Specify plate
kit PLT333-12R (vertical) or PLT333-9R (horizontal).
C
Action on increase
of humidity
MAXIMUM ELECTRICAL RATINGS
MOTOR RATINGS
VAC
120 208 240
AC full load amp
6.0 3.5 3.0
AC locked rotor amp 36.0 21.0 18.0
Pilot Duty - 125 VA, 24-277 VAC
76
W43A
SHIP
lb (kg)
0.6 (0.3 kg)
0.9 (0.4 kg)
SPECIFICATIONS / ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL SWITCH
RANGE
DIFF % RH VOLTAGE
ACTION
Approx
W43A-14 SPDT 0% to 70% RH 4% RH Low or line
HUMIDITY
2% AND 3% HUMIDITY TRANSMITTER & OPTIONAL TEMPERATURE SENSORS
MODELS KHR, KHD, KHO
DESCRIPTION
Model KHR, KHD, and KHO Humidity Transmitters are specifically
designed for use in HVAC/BAS applications. These instruments measure relative humidity from 0% to 100%. The standard two-wire, 4-20
mA output provides low-cost humidity monitoring for building control.
The RH transmitters are available with thermistor or RTD temperature
sensors. They come in room (KHR), duct (KHD), and OSA (KHO)
mounting styles.
KHR
OPERATION
The transmitter converts the relative humidity into a 4-20 mA signal with
the latest microprocessor capacitive design. Multi-point factory-automated calibration improves accuracy and repeatability. The optional
temperature sensors, thermistor or RTD, offer direct connections to
most automation systems.
KHO
KHD
FEATURES
• Calibration-free interchangeable sensors
• Twelve-point computerized calibration
• ±2% or ±3% accuracy (5% to 95% RH)
• Replaceable sensor probe (no re-calibration)
• No need to remove box to replace sensor probe
• Attractive room enclosure design
• Two-wire, 4-20 mA output, 0% to 100% RH
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensing element
Accuracy
Temp effect
Long-term stability
Output humidity
Supply voltage
Ambient temp
Max load impedance
Enclosure
Room
Duct
OSA
Precon HS-2000 capacitive sensor
±2% or ±3% RH from 0° to 70°C, 5% to
95% RH noncondensing
Temperature compensated with
<0.008% RH per °C
<±0.5% drift per year
4-20 mA = 0% to 100% RH, two-wire,
oop-powered
8.5-28 VDC
-22° to 185°F (-30° to 85°C)
(Supply voltage - 8.5 VDC) /0.02,
7751 @ 24 VDC
Probe
Sensing
Room
OSA
Duct
Options
Optional temp
Thermistor
RTD (Platinum)
Connections
Weight
Room/OSA
Duct
White plastic, UL94HB
Metal handy box
(weatherproof box optional)
NEMA 3R plastic box
Interchangeable; no need to re-calibrate or
remove mounting box
HSR, plug-in module under cover
HSO, 1/2" aluminum tube, plug-in wiring harness, 40 micron stainless steel sintered filter
HSD, 1/2" aluminum tube with wiring plug and
expanded Teflon® filter
N.O. button, RJ11 comm jack, LED-24V
Type 3, 21, 22, 24, 27,42
Type 81, 85, 91
Screw terminals
0.2 lb (.084 kg)
1 lb (0.45 kg)
DIMENSIONS
2.06
(5.23)
Plug-in Replaceable Sensor
Replaceable Probe
(no need to remove box)
Mounting Plate
Gasket
3.31
(8.40)
.875
(2.22)
1/2"
Knockouts
PC Board Clips
2.75
(6.98)
0.94
(2.38)
Back Plate
Front
Side
2.19 (5.56)
Removeable
Sensor Cover
3.20 (8.12)
2.50
(6.35)
1.30 (3.30)
0.75
(1.9)
6.0
(15.2 )
Flow-through slots are 0.125" (0.32) wide
4.5
(11.43)
KHR
in
(cm)
Attached
Mounting
Plate
1/2" Conduit Hole*
(face down)
Mounting Tabs (2)
4.10 (10.4)
2.50 (6.35)
Mounting Box
4.0
(10.16)
3.75
(9.53)
KHD
* Must face down
to maintain watertight integrity
3.30
(8.38)
1/2" Conduit Hole*
(face down)
KHO
77
HUMIDITY
OPTIONS
• Temperature thermistor / RTD • Occupied button
• Custom logo
• Communication jack
• Weatherproof duct box
• LED
HUMIDITY
2% AND 3% HUMIDITY TRANSMITTER & OPTIONAL TEMPERATURE SENSORS
MODELS KHR, KHD, KHO
WIRING — KHD and KHO
WIRING — KHR
2
8
1
7
JP1
MB
Button
1-2
3-4
5-6
7-8
Jumper
Pot
Pot
Sensor
Sensor
COVER ON
CCRJ11AD accessory;
required for J1 option
RJ11
plug
24 VDC
Power
Supply
RJ11 plug with cover off;
for J2 option
8
7
1
+
1
J2
JP1
IN
Communication
Wiring
J1 or J2
4-20mA
RH Signal
6
8
7
-
24 VDC
Power
Supply
-
LED
24 VAC/VDC
+
C
R4
R5
J3
R3
Optional
Temperature
Sensor to
Controller
-
LED
LED
POT
1
A
D2
J4
JP2
Passive
Temperature
Sensor Plug
A
K
MB
Button
J4
4-20mA
RH
Signal
1
SENSOR
Pot not available
at this time
12-28
VDC
RH
LOOP
J3
Txx Sensor to
BAS Controller
J5
+V
J5
+
R2
OUT
Customer
Contact
12-28
VDC
PRECON BASE BOARD 4
130-0174-00
J1
V+ RH TT THRM THRM
2
1
J1
Push button will short out the
pot or sensor momentarily
SW1
K
J2
6
D3
1
3
R6
Replaceable
RH Sensor
Plug
SW3
4
6
4
Sensor
HUMIDITY
RT1
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
KHR
KHD
KHO
DESCRIPTION
Room relative humidity transmitter
Duct relative humidity transmitter
OSA relative humidity transmitter
RELATIVE HUMIDITY ACCURACY
2
2% accuracy
3
3% accuracy
TEMPERATURE SENSOR and TRANSMITTER OPTIONS
-No temperature sensor
CL1
KHR custom logo, 1 color (CL2 = 2 color, CL3 = 3 color)
J1
RJ11 externally accessible communication jack (CCRJ11AD)
J2
RJ11 internal communication jack
LED
LED lamp indicator, standard 24V (AC/DC) voltage
MB
Momentary push button switch, jumpered across sensor/pot (JP1)
T3
10,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III
T21
2252Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II
T22
3000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II
T24
10,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II
T27
100,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II
T42
20,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV
T81
100Ω RTD, 385 platinum curve
T85
1000Ω RTD, 385 platinum curve
T91
1000Ω RTD, 375 platinum curve
WP
KHD duct in weatherproof metal box
HSR
HSO*
Room replacement sensor
OSA replacement sensor
Sample orders:
KHD2
2% RH duct transmitter
KHR3T3
3% RH room transmitter
with 10kΩ Type III thermistor
Custom Logo Color Chart
Pantone 485
Pantone 356
Pantone 492C
Pantone 124C
Pantone 300
Pantone 431C
Pantone 299
Pantone 6C
Other Pantone colors available on request.
ACCESSORIES
HSD*
Duct replacement sensor
HSD-WP* Duct replacement sensor for WP (metal box)
Note: All replacement sensors are 2% accuracy.
*If a temperature sensor is included with an HS sensor, the temperature suffix must be added (T3, T21, T22, T24, T27, T42, T81, T85, or T91).
78
HUMIDITY
3% WALL AND DUCT MOUNT HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
H_10K SERIES
DESCRIPTION
H_10K Series Humidity Transmitters are used in
HVAC/BAS applications. These units measure humidity
from 0% to 100% RH and temperature (optional) from
32° to 158°F (0° to 70°C). H_10K Series utilizes the
completely interchangeable INTERCAP sensing element
for fast response and long-term stability. The interchangeable feature means field service is accomplished
quickly and simply with no calibration ever required.
HD10K
HW10K
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
0% to 100% RH measurement
±3% accuracy (0% to 90% RH)
Completely interchangeable RH sensors
Two-wire, 4-20 mA output
•
•
•
•
Excellent long-term stability
Room, duct, and OSA mounting
Optional thermistor temperature sensor
Beige room enclosure
Input voltage
Output signal
Output range
Connections
Sensor
Sensor protection
Accuracy @ 20°C
Stability
Temp coefficient
24 VDC ± 20%
4-20 mA (5001 max load)
0% to 100% RH
Screw terminals (20-16 AWG)
Capacitive INTERCAP,
plug-in sensor (no calibration
required)
0.5 micron membrane filter
±3% @ 0% to 90% RH
±4% @ 90% to 100% RH
±1% RH/year
±0.04% RH/°C
(temperature compensated)
Response time
Measuring range
90% in 5 sec
0% to 100% RH
(noncondensing)
Temp range, room
24° to 132°F (-5° to 55°C)
Temp range, duct
-4° to 140°F (-20° to 60°C)
Optional room temp sensor
Range
32° to 158°F (0° to 70°C)
Accuracy
±0.36°F (±0.2°C)
Stability
±0.24°F (±0.13°C) over
5 years
Weight
Room
0.18 lb (0.08 kg)
Duct
2.1 lb (0.95 kg)
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
2.36
(6.00)
7.00
(17.78)
0.59
(1.50)
4.50
(11.43)
Outside Wall
(northern exposure)
9.17
(23.29)
2.17
(5.52)
0.47
(1.19)
3/4" Conduit Hole
0.56
(1.43)
Diameter
0.42
(1.04)
Mounting
Bracket
3.94
(10.0)
4.50
(11.43)
2.50
(6.35)
End View into Sensor
Cover Screw
Typical
3.23
(8.2)
Duct-Mount
Screw Typical
HW10K
3.50
(8.89)
3.94
(10.0)
Weather Shield
Side View
HD10K
1.75
(4.45)
10.0
(25.40)
HD10K with WMK-20
79
HUMIDITY
SPECIFICATIONS
HUMIDITY
3% WALL AND DUCT MOUNT HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
H_10K SERIES
MOUNTING
The HW10K is designed to be wall mounted in rooms where appearance is important. It may be mounted directly on
dry wall or on any single-gang electrical outlet box with no adapters required. Toggle bolts or other direct wall-mount
screws can be used where conduit is not required. The HW10K includes a detachable mounting plate and is secured
with tamper-resistant hex screws. The HD10K is designed for duct or OSA mounting. Use the through holes in the
corners of the box to secure to the duct or WMK-20 wall bracket.
WIRING
Power Supply
24 VDC
Power Supply
24 VDC
+
4-20 mA
Signal
+
HUMIDITY
+
Thermistor Temperature
Sensor Controller Input
(optional feature)
TH
HD10K
Optional Thermistor
Solder Connector Pads
HW10K
Model EL3K Replaceable Element
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
HW10K
HD10K
DESCRIPTION
3% Wall-mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output
3% Duct humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output
OPTIONS FOR HW10K ROOM TRANSMITTER
-No temperature sensor
T3
10,000Ω Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type III
T21
2252Ω Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type II
T22
3000Ω Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type II
T24
10,000Ω Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type II
T27
100,000Ω Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type II
T42
20,000Ω Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type IV
T81
100Ω 385 Platinum RTD
T85
1000Ω 385 Platinum RTD
T91
1000Ω 375 Platinum RTD
80
Example: HW10K-T3 Wall-mount humidity transmitter
with 10,000Ω, type III temperature sensor
HW10K
T3
EL3K
WMK-20
RELATED PRODUCT
Replaceable humidity element
OSA weather shield and will kit for HD10K
4-20 mA
Signal
HUMIDITY
3% ROOM / DUCT / OSA HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
H_30K SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Models HW30K Room, HD30K Duct, and HO30K
Outside Air Humidity Transmitters have been specifically designed for use in HVAC/BAS applications. These
instruments measure relative humidity from 0% to 100%.
The standard two-wire, 4-20 mA output provides low-cost
duct and outside air monitoring for building control. Both
duct and OSA RH transmitters are available with thermistor or RTD temperature sensors or a 4-20 mA rangeable
temperature transmitter.
HW30K
HO30K
HD30K
OPERATION
FEATURES
The transmitter converts the relative humidity into a 4-20
mA signal with 3% accuracy. The optional temperature
sensors, thermistor or RTD, offer direct connections to
most automation systems. The optional, rangeable temperature transmitter offers a 4-20 mA signal and is rangeable from -20° to 250°F (-29° to 121°C).
•
•
•
•
•
•
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensing element
Accuracy
Temp effect
Long term stability
Output humidity
Opt. Output temp
(Duct and OSA)
Range limits
Supply voltage
Capacitive sensor
±3% RH @ 77°F (25°C),
5% to 95% RH
Temperature compensated with
less than 0.005% RH per °F
(0.01% per °C)
Less than ±1% drift per year, typical
Two-wire, loop powered,
4-20 mA = 0% to 100% RH linear
Operating range
Operating temp
Storage temp
Max load impedance
Two-wire, loop powered, 4-20 mA
-30° to 250°F (-34° to 121°C),
min span of 40°F (22°C)
18-35 VDC
Weight
Optional temp
Thermistor
RTD
Transmitter
(Duct and OSA)
Connections
Enclosure
0% to100% RH, 4-20 mA
-20° to 140°F (-28° to 60°C)
-58° to 185°F (-50° to 85°C)
(Supply voltage - 10 VDC) / 0.02 i.e.,
7001 @ 24 VDC
Screw terminals for loop
termination
Single-gang, pressure-cast
aluminum, weatherproof
box with gasketed cover; room is
beige plastic
1.2 lb (0.55 kg)
Type 3, 21, 22, 24, 27,42
Type 81, 85, 91
4-20 mA, 6751 @ 24V
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
2.25
(5.72)
4.625
(11.75)
2.75
(6.99)
0.375
(0.95)
4.50
(11.43)
4.5
(11.43)
9.0
(22.86)
6.0
(15.24)
2.88
(7.31)
1.5
(3.81)
2.0
(5.08)
Foam Gasket
3.23
(8.20)
HW30K
HD30K
HO30K
81
HUMIDITY
0% to 100% RH measurement
±3% accuracy (5% to 95% RH)
Two-wire, 4-20 mA output RH
Optional temperature thermistor
Optional temperature RTD
Optional temperature 4-20 mA
HUMIDITY
3% ROOM / DUCT / OSA HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
H_30K SERIES
MOUNTING DUCT SENSOR
MOUNTING OSA SENSOR
The transmitter should be mounted so that the 9" (22.86 cm)
probe is in the center of the duct. The transmitter should be
mounted away from fans, corners, heating and cooling coils,
and other equipment that will affect the measurement of relative humidity. It should be mounted in a location that will
receive adequate air flow for proper operation. The unit may be
mounted horizontally or vertically.
The transmitter should be mounted in a sheltered area, preferably on the north side of a building under the eave. This location will prevent the RH at the sensor from being affected by
sun-heated air rising up the side of the building. The transmitter should be mounted horizontally with the sensor slots pointing down so that water does not collect in the sensor cavity.
Mounting Position
Incorrect
Correct
North
WIRING FOR RH ONLY AND “T”TEMPERATURE OPTION
WIRING FOR RH AND “TT”TEMPERATURE OPTION
Power Supply
24 VDC
HUMIDITY
Power Supply
24 VDC
H
Humidity
4-20 mA
Signal
LOOP
H
T
Optional
Temperature
Sensor
T3 through T91
SEN
T
Humidity
4-20 mA
Signal
H
H
HD30K
HO30K
T
HD30K
HO30K
HW30K
HD30K
HO30K
Temperature
4-20 mA
Signal
T
(Duct and OSA only)
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
HW30K
HD30K
HO30K
HD30K
82
DESCRIPTION
3% Room humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output
3% Duct-mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output
3 % OSA-mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output
OPTIONS (Temperature Sensors or Transmitters)
-No temperature sensor
T3
10,000Ω Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type III
T21
2252Ω Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type II
T22
3000Ω Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type II
T24
10,000Ω Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type II
T27
100,000Ω Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type II
T42
20,000Ω Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type IV
T81
100Ω 385 Platinum RTD
T85
1000Ω 385 Platinum RTD
T91
1000Ω 375 Platinum RTD
TT-XR Rangeable temperature transmitter (specify range) (duct and OSA only)
TT-2
-20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C) Transmitter, 4-20 mA (duct and OSA only)
TT-3
0° to 100°F (-18° to 38°C) Transmitter, 4-20 mA (duct and OSA only)
XMH
Membrane momentary switch (HW30K only) wired N.O. to T3 and T4
T3
Example: HD30K-T3 Duct-mount humidity sensor with 10 kΩ type III
temperature sensor
HUMIDITY
3% HUMIDITY TRANSMITTER AND OPTIONAL TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS
H_31K SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Models HW31K, HD31K, and HO31K 3% Humidity
Transmitters are specifically designed for use in
HVAC/BAS applications. These instruments measure relative humidity from 0% to 100%. The standard two-wire,
4-20 mA output provides low cost humidity monitoring for
building control. The RH transmitters are available with
thermistor or RTD temperature sensors or a 4-20 mA
rangeable temperature transmitter. They are available in
room, duct, and OSA mounting styles.
HW31K
The transmitter converts the relative humidity into a 4-20
mA signal with 3% accuracy. The optional temperature
sensors, thermistor or RTD, offer direct connections to
most automation systems. The optional rangeable temperature transmitter offers a 4-20 mA signal and is rangeable from -20° to 250°F (-29° to 121°C).
HO31K
FEATURES
OPTIONS
•
•
•
•
• Temperature thermistor
• Temperature RTD
• Temperature 4-20 mA for duct and OSA
0% to 100% RH measurement
±3% accuracy (5% to 95% RH)
Two-wire, 4-20 mA output
White plastic design
HUMIDITY
OPERATION
HD31K
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensing element
Accuracy
Capacitive sensor
±3% RH @ 77°F (25°C),
5% to 95% RH
Temp effect
Temperature compensated with
<0.005% RH per °F
(0.01% per °C)
Long-term stability
<±1% drift per year, typical
Output humidity
Two-wire, loop-powered,
4-20 mA = 0% to 100% RH linear
Supply voltage
18-35 VDC
Ambient temp
-20° to 140°F (-28° to 60°C)
Storage temp
-58° to 185°F (-50° to 85°C)
Max load impedance (Supply voltage - 12 VDC) / 0.02
i.e., 600 @ 24 VDC
Optional temp
Thermistor
RTD
Transmitter
Connections
Enclosure
Weight
Type 3, 21, 22, 24, 27,42
Type 81, 85, 91
4-20 mA, 6751 @ 24V
(HD31K and HO31K only)
Output temp
Two-wire, looppowered, 4-20 mA Temp range limits
-30° to 250°F (-34° to
121°C),
min span of 40°F (22°C)
Screw terminals for loop
termination
White plastic
1.2 lb (0.55 kg)
83
HUMIDITY
3% HUMIDITY TRANSMITTER AND OPTIONAL TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS
H_31K SERIES
DIMENSIONS
3.25 (8.26)
in
(cm)
2.5 (6.35)
0.75 (1.91)
2.3
(5.84)
4.50
(11.43)
8.38
(21.29)
0.88 (2.24)
4.75
(12.07)
1/2"
Conduit Hole
1/8" NPT
5.5
(13.98)
Mounting
Tabs
4.87
(12.38)
2.75
(7.0)
Front View
0.25
(0.63)
Side View
HD31K
HW31K
MOUNTING
HUMIDITY
WIRING FOR RH AND “TT” OPTION
Power Supply
24 VDC
Power Supply
24 VDC
Wire-Way
Hole
Humidity
4-20 mA
Signal
H
Optional
Temperature
Sensor
T3 through T91
T
H
H
Cover Securing Screws
and Back Plate
Board
Hooks
HO31K
WIRING FOR RH AND “T” OPTION
Cover Hooks
0.75
(1.90)
Gasket
Correct position for mounting outdoor air sensor
1.20
(3.05)
H31K
T
T
Humidity
4-20 mA
Signal
H
H31K
Temperature
4-20 mA
Signal
T
HW31K, HD31K, HO31K
HD31K, HO31K
Duct and OSA Only
ORDERING INFORMATION
84
MODEL
HW31K
HD31K
HO31K
DESCRIPTION
3% Room-mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output
3% Duct-mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output
3% OSA-mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output
OPTIONS (temperature sensor or transmitter)
-No temperature sensor
T3
10,000Ω Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type III
T21
2252Ω Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type II
T22
3000Ω Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type II
T24
10,000Ω Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type II
T27
100,000Ω Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type II
T42
20,000Ω Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type IV
T81
100Ω 385 Platinum RTD
T85
1000Ω 385 Platinum RTD
T91
1000Ω 375 Platinum RTD
TT-XR Rangeable temperature transmitter (specify range) (duct and OSA only)
TT-2
-20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C) Transmitter, 4-20 mA (duct and OSA only)
TT-3
0° to 100°F (-18° to 38°C) Transmitter, 4-20 mA (duct and OSA only)
HD31K
T3
Example: HD31K-T3 Duct-mount humidity transmitter with
10 kΩ type III temperature sensor
HUMIDITY
2% WALL-MOUNT HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
MODELS HW20K, HF20K
DESCRIPTION
Model HW20K and HF20K Wall-Mount Humidity
Transmitters are used in HVAC/BAS applications. These
units measure humidity from 0% to 100% RH and temperature (optional) from 32° to 158°F (0° to 70°C). The
sensor exhibits fast response and long-term stability.
When an accuracy adjustment is necessary, calibration
of the transmitter can be done with a simple-to-use handheld calibration tool that plugs into the top of the transmitter.
Model HF20K has a unique low-profile design. It is perfect for museums and institutions or other architecturally
challenging locations where low profile is a must. The
button may be removed from the plate for the most discreet placement.
HF20K
HW20K
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
0% to 100% RH measurement
±2% accuracy (20% to 95% RH)
State-of-the-art RH sensor technology
One-point calibration with calibrator
Two-wire, 4-20 mA output
Excellent long-term stability
Continuous measurement
Executive decorator-style enclosure with tan
faceplate
Optional temperature sensor
Optional momentary switch
Temperature compensated
Surface or flush styles
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
2.75
(6.99)
2.75
(6.99)
4.50
(11.43)
4.50
(11.43)
3.23
(8.20)
0.44
(1.18)
0.62
(1.57)
1
(2.5)
Removable Plate
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensing element
Resistance change of bulk polymer
sensor
Accuracy
±2% RH @ 77°F (25°C),
20% to 95% RH including
hysteresis, linearity, and
repeatability
Output range
0% to 100% RH
Temp effect
Temperature compensated with
less than 0.06% per °F
(0.11% per °C)
Sensitivity
0.4% RH
Repeatability
0.5%
Hysteresis
Less than 1%
Long-term stability Less than 1% drift per year, typical
Output
Two-wire, loop-powered, 4-20 mA,
0% to 100% linear
Supply voltage
18-36 VDC
Adjustments
Operating range
Operating temp
Storage temp
Max load
Connections
Weight
Optional temp
Thermistor
RTD
Transmitter
One point with calibrator
0% to 100% RH, 4-20 mA
-40° to 130°F (-40° to 54°C)
-85° to 158°F (-65° to 70°C)
(Supply voltage - 10 VDC) / 0.02
i.e., 7001 @ 24 VDC
Screw terminals for loop termination
marked “+” and “-”, screw
terminals for optional temperature
sensor and momentary membrane
switch, connector for single-point
calibration tool
0.18 lb (0.08 kg)
Type 3, 21, 22, 24, 27, 42
Type 81, 85, 91
4-20 mA, 6751 @ 24V
85
HUMIDITY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
HUMIDITY
2% WALL-MOUNT HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
MODELS HW20K, HF20K
INSTALLATION
The HW20K is designed to be wall mounted in rooms where appearance is important. It may be mounted directly on
dry wall or on any single-gang electrical outlet box with no adapters required. Toggle bolts or other direct wall-mount
screws can be used where conduit is not required. The HW20K includes a detachable mounting plate, and is secured
with tamper-resistant hex screws. The HF sensor button may be removed from the wall plate and inserted directly into
the drywall through a 5/8" hole. The sensor should be mounted approximately 5' (1.5m) above the floor, on an interior wall, away from any heating or cooling generating devices. Plug the wireway hole to prevent false readings by air
drafts within the wall.
WIRING
Calibration Tool
Connector (CC-RJ11AD)
(order separately)
Connect to Device Under Test (DUT)
Power
Supply
24 VDC
VR2 VR1
+
HUMIDITY
Terminals for
Thermistor/RTD
and/or Membrane
Switch Option
(N.O. only)
VIN
% RH
TH
INC
Switch Pins for
Membrane
Switch Option
Optional
Thermistor/RTD
Soldering
Connector Pins
–
Power
Supply
24 VDC
4-20 mA
RH Signal
DUT 52.2
REF 50.0
DEC
8'
Opt. temp.
sensor
S
4-20 mA
Signal
Temperature
Sensor
(optional)
Calibration Pot
for single point
calibration
(unit is factory-calibrated)
6"
Humidity Sensing Element
T
Humidity Sensing
Element
EASYCAL
HW20K
HF20K
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
HW20K
HF20K
DESCRIPTION
2% Wall-mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output
2% Flush-mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output
OPTIONS
-No temperature sensor
T3
10,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type III
T21
2252Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type II
T22
3000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type II
T24
10,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type II
T27
100,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type II
T42
20,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type IV
T81
100Ω 385 platinum RTD
T85
1000Ω 385 platinum RTD
T91
1000Ω 375 platinum RTD
XMH
Membrane momentary switch for HW20K
(wired N.O. to terminal block)
HW20K
T3
EASYCAL
CC-RJ11AD
86
XMH
Example: HW20K-T3-XMH 2% Wall-mount humidity
transmitter with type III 10 kΩ temperature
sensor and membrane switch
RELATED PRODUCTS
Handheld calibrator for HW20K and HF20K transmitters
Required interface cable for EASYCAL and HW20K
HUMIDITY
2% DUCT / OSA HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
MODELS HD20K, HO20K
DESCRIPTION
Models HD20K Duct and HO20K Outside Air 2%
Humidity Transmitters have been specifically designed
for use in HVAC/BAS applications. These instruments
measure relative humidity from 0% to 100%. The standard two-wire, 4-20 mA output provides low-cost duct
and outside air monitoring for building control. When
accuracy adjustment is necessary, the transmitter can be
calibrated with a simple-to-use, handheld calibration tool
that plugs into the transmitter board. Both duct and OSA
RH transmitters are available with thermistor or RTD
temperature sensors.
HD20K
HO20K
OPERATION
•
•
•
•
•
•
0% to 100% RH measurement
±2% accuracy (20% to 95% RH)
One-point calibration with calibration meter
Two-wire, 4-20 mA output
Temperature compensated
Optional thermistor or RTD sensor
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensing element
Accuracy
Temp effect
Sensitivity
Repeatability
Hysteresis
Long-term stability
Output
Output range
Resistive bulk polymer sensor
±2% RH @ 77°F (25°C),
20% to 95% RH
Temperature compensated with
less than 0.06% per °F
(0.11% per °C)
0.4% RH
0.5%
Less than 1%
Less than 1% drift per year
Two-wire, 4-20 mA
0% to 100% RH
Supply voltage
Adjustments
Operating range
Operating temp
Load impedance
Connections
Enclosure
Weight
Optional temp
Thermistor
RTD
18-36 VDC
One point with calibrator
0% to 100% RH, 4-20 mA
-20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C)
7001 @ 24 VDC
Screw terminals
Aluminum single gang
with gasketed cover
1.4 lb (0.63 kg)
Type 3, 21, 22, 24, 27, 42
Type 81, 85, 91
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
2.75
(6.99)
2.25
(5.72)
9.0
(22.86)
0.8
(2.04)
4.5
(11.43)
4.63
(11.75)
2.88
(7.30)
2.0
(5.08)
HD20K
4.35
(11.05)
1.25
(3.18)
Foam Gasket
HO20K
87
HUMIDITY
FEATURES
The transmitter converts the relative humidity into a 4-20
mA signal. The unit has a microprocessor that is based
on 10-point calibration from the factory. The microprocessor maintains both high accuracy and low cost with a
wide humidity and operational temperature span.
HUMIDITY
2% DUCT / OSA HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
MODELS HD20K, HO20K
MOUNTING DUCT SENSOR
MOUNTING OSA SENSOR
The transmitter should be mounted so that the 9" (22.86 cm)
probe is in the center of the duct. The transmitter should be
mounted away from fans, corners, heating and cooling coils,
and other equipment that will affect the measurement of relative humidity. It should be mounted in a location that will
receive adequate air flow for proper operation. The unit may be
mounted horizontally or vertically.
The transmitter should be mounted in a sheltered area, preferably on the north side of a building under the eave. This location
will prevent RH at the sensor from being affected by sun-heated
air rising up the side of the building. The transmitter should be
mounted horizontally with the sensor slots pointing down so that
water does not collect in the sensor cavity.
Mounting Position
Incorrect
Correct
North
WIRING
Calibration tool connector (CC-RJ11AD)
(order separately)
HUMIDITY
Connect to Device
Under Test (DUT)
INC
Power Supply
24 VDC
4-20 mA
RH Signal
% RH
DUT 52.2
REF 50.0
DEC
HO20K or
HD20K
T
T
EASYCAL
Optional
Temperature
Sensor
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
HD20K
HO20K
HD20K
DESCRIPTION
2% Duct-mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output
2% OSA-mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output
OPTIONS
-No temperature sensor
T3
10,000Ω Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type III
T21 2252Ω Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type II
T22 3000Ω Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type II
T24 10,000Ω Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type II
T27 100,000Ω Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type II
T42 20,000Ω Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type IV
T81 100Ω 385 Platinum RTD
T85 1000Ω 385 Platinum RTD
T91 1000Ω 375 Platinum RTD
T3
Example: HD20K-T3 Duct-mount humidity transmitter with
10,000Ω type III temperature sensor
EASYCAL
CC-RJ11AD
88
RELATED PRODUCTS
Handheld calibrator loop powered
Required interface cable for EASYCAL
HUMIDITY
1% ROOM / DUCT / OSA HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
H_1K SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Models HW1K Room, HD1K Duct, and HO1K Outside
Air Humidity Transmitters have been specifically
designed for use in HVAC/BAS applications where high
accuracy is required. These instruments measure relative humidity from 0% to 100%. The two-wire, 4-20 mA
output provides low-cost duct and outside air monitoring
for building control. When accuracy adjustment is necessary, the transmitter can be calibrated with a simple-touse, handheld calibration tool that plugs into the transmitter board.
HW1K
FEATURES
±1% accuracy (10% to 80% RH)
State-of-the-art RH sensor technology
One-point calibration with EASYCAL calibrator
Two-wire, 4-20 mA output
10-point calibration
Humidity NIST certificate included
Optional temperature sensor
Optional momentary switch (HW1K)
HD1K
OPERATION
The transmitter converts the relative humidity into a
4-20 mA signal. The unit has a microprocessor that maintains 10-point calibration from the factory. The microprocessor maintains both high accuracy and low cost
with wide humidity and operational temperature.
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensing element
Accuracy
Temp effect
Long-term stability
Output
Supply voltage
Capacitive
±1% RH @ 77°F (25°C),
10% to 80% RH including
hysteresis, linearity, and
repeatability; 10-point factory
calibration
Temperature compensated with
less than ±0.06% per °F
(±0.11% per °C)
Less than ±1% drift per year
Two-wire, loop powered
4-20 mA, 0% to 100% RH
18-36 VDC
Adjustments
Operating range
Operating temp
Load impedance
Connections
Enclosure
Duct / OSA
Room
Weight
Optional temp
sensor
One point with calibrator
0% to 100% RH, 4-20 mA
-13° to 122°F (-25°to 50°C)
(Supply voltage - 10 VDC) / 0.02
i.e., 7001 @ 24 VDC
Screw terminals
Aluminum single gang
with gasketed cover
Executive beige plastic enclosure
1.4 lb (0.63 kg)
Thermistor type 3, 21, 22, 24, 27, 42
RTD type 81, 85, 91
-30° to 140°F (-34° to 60°C)
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
2.75
(6.99)
2.25
(5.72)
4.63
(11.75)
4.50
(11.43)
4.5
1.0
(2.54) (11.43)
3.25
(8.26)
1.0
(2.54)
2.88
(7.30)
6.0
(15.24)
2.0
(5.08)
Gasket
3.23
(8.20)
HW1K
HD1K
HO1K
89
HUMIDITY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
HO1K
HUMIDITY
1% ROOM / DUCT / OSA HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
H_1K SERIES
MOUNTING DUCT TRANSMITTER
MOUNTING OSA TRANSMITTER
The transmitter should be mounted so that the 6" (15.24 cm)
probe is in the center of the duct. The transmitter should be
mounted away from fans, corners, heating and cooling coils,
and other equipment that will affect the measurement of relative humidity. It should be mounted in a location that will
receive adequate air flow for proper operation. The unit may be
mounted horizontally or vertically.
The transmitter should be mounted in a sheltered area, preferably on the north side of a building under the eave. This location will prevent RH at the sensor from being affected by sunheated air rising up the side of the building. The transmitter
should be mounted vertically with the sensor pointing down so
that water does not collect in the sensor cavity.
Mounting Position
Incorrect
Correct
North
HUMIDITY
MOUNTING ROOM TRANSMITTER
WIRING
Basic model comes with screw terminal block, tan decorator
faceplate, two #6-32 screws for handibox-mounting, and two
#6 x 1" screws for direct
Optional Customer-Supplied Handibox
Wire Access
wall-mounting. Cover
Hole
Plate
screws are #6-32
Mounting
Screws
with a 1/16" allen key
head.
Calibration Tool
Connector (CC-RJ11AD)
(order separately)
Connect to Device
Under Test (DUT)
% RH
INC
DEC
4-20 mA
Signal
DUT 52.2
REF 50.0
EASYCAL
T
T
HO1K or HD1K
Tan Faceplate
(standard)
Cover Mounting 1/16" Allen Screws
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
HW1K
HD1K
HO1K
HD1K
EASYCAL
CC-RJ11AD
90
DESCRIPTION
1% Room humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output
1% Duct humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output
1% OSA humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output
OPTIONS
-No temperature sensor
T3
10,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type III
T21 2252Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type II
T22 3000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type II
T24 10,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type II
T27 100,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type II
T42 20,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type IV
T81 100Ω 385 platinum RTD
T85 1000Ω 385 platinum RTD
T91 1000Ω 375 platinum RTD
XMH Membrane momentary switch (HW1K only)
(wired to terminal block)
T3
Power Supply
24 VDC
Example: HD1K-T3 1% RH duct-mount transmitter with a
type III 10 kΩ temperature sensor
RELATED PRODUCTS
Handheld calibrator (2% accuracy only)
Required interface cable for EASYCAL
Optional
Temperature
Sensor
HUMIDITY
2% AND 3% RH ROOM / DUCT / OSA TRANSMITTERS
MRH SERIES, EASYCAL
DESCRIPTION
The Microline MRH Series humidity transmitters have
been designed for room, duct, and OSA applications. A
microprocessor maintains ten points of calibration for
superior accuracy through the range of operation. The
transmitter can be easily field calibrated with a handheld, single-point calibration tool (EASYCAL). The
transmitter uses a proven bulk polymer resistive sensor
for excellent sensing range and is not affected by surface contamination in dirty environments.
MRH-2-S
FEATURES
2% and 3% accuracy available
Multi-output 0-5V, 0-10V, 4-20 mA
Space, duct, or OSA mounting
Microprocessor-controlled
Easy field calibration
Ten-point factory calibration accuracy
Temperature compensated
Two-year warranty on electronics
Available with optional temperature transmitter
EASYCAL
MRH-2-O
MRH-2-D
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensing element
Accuracy
Bulk polymer resistive
2% & 3% RH @ 77°F (25°C),
20% to 95%
0% to 100% RH
Terminal screws
2.5% calibration accuracy
18-36 VDC
4-20 mA, 0-10 VDC, 0-5 VDC
7001 @ 24 VDC (4-20 mA)
Zero with calibrator
Output range
Connections
EASYCAL
Power
RH output
Impedance
Adjustments
Ambient temp
Enclosure
Probe
Optional temp
Transmitter
range
Max load
Weight
-20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C)
ABS plastic flame retardant
Duct stainless steel, OSA aluminum
4-20 mA only
-20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C)
(special ranges available)
7001 @ 24 VDC
1 lb (0.45 kg), space 0.2 lb (0.9 kg)
DIMENSIONS
2.1
(5.33)
in
(cm)
Cover
Base
1/2" (1.27)
Conduit
Knockout
2.95
(7.49)
4.5 (11.43)
0.5
Probe (1.27)
3.5 (8.89)
3.3 (8.38)
Mounting
Holes on
Center Line
4.9
(12.45)
1/2" (1.27)
Conduit
Knockout
(2 places)
Cover
3.5
4.0
(8.89) (10.16)
Wiring
Access
3.1 (7.87)
1.7
(4.32)
1.0
(2.54)
Base
4.5 (11.43)
3.5
(8.89)
Terminal
Block
0.5
(1.27)
2.25 (5.72)
3.5 (8.89)
Base
Room
Outside Air
7.2 (18.29)
Insertion
1/2" (1.27)
Conduit
Knockout
(3 places)
2.0
(5.08)
4.0
(10.16)
Duct
91
HUMIDITY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
HUMIDITY
2% AND 3% RH ROOM / DUCT / OSA TRANSMITTERS
MRH SERIES, EASYCAL
CALIBRATION
To calibrate the MRH:
1. Insert the calibration tool connector into the RJ11 jack on
the transmitter board.
2. Insert the probe into the air stream that the transmitter is
monitoring.
3. Adjust the arrow buttons on the side of the tool until the
two displays match.
4. Remove the jack and probe.
MRH-2 Transmitter
DUT
(Device Under Test)
GENERALEASTERN
INC
% RH
DUT 52.2
REF 50.0
DEC
Note: There is no need to remove the cover on
duct or room models. OSA sensors have
a protected internal jack.
HUMIDITY
EASYCAL
WIRING
Power Supply
Terminal Block
Terminal Block
VIN 18-36 VDC
5
Humidity
4-20 mA
4
3
2
Power Supply
N/C
VIN 18-36 VDC
5
4
N/C
3
VIN 18-36 VDC
Temperature
4-20 mA
1
Signal common
0-10V Signal
0-5V Signal
2
1
Optional (temperature transmitter wiring ---)
Power
Supply
Voltage Output
(RH output units only)
Current Output
Note: When wiring for the transmitter, use a twisted, shielded pair of 16-22 AWG. Use only copper conductors. Do not run
transmitter wires and AC power wires together in the same conduit or wire bundle.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
MRH-2
MRH-3
MRH-2
EASYCAL
92
DESCRIPTION
2% RH multi-output transmitter
3% RH multi-output transmitter
S
Wall-mounted housing for indoor use
O
Wall-mounted housing for outdoor use
D
Duct-mounted housing with stainless steel probe
T
Temperature transmitter -20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C)
(current output only)
S
T
Example:
MRH-2-S-T Indoor wall-mounted 2% relative humidity
transmitter with optional temperature transmittter
Related Product
Handheld 2% calibrator and cable for MRH transmitters with NIST
HUMIDITY
BAS/HVAC RH TRANSMITTERS
ACI/RH SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Model ACI/RH relative humidity transmitters provide
accurate RH reading in 2%, 3%, and 5% accuracies
using a ceramic resistive sensor offering a 20% to 95%
operating range. The transmitters come in wall, duct, and
OSA mounting styles. They have multiple field-selectable
outputs, including 4-20 mA, 0-10V, and 0-5V signals. The
supply power is also selectable in 24 VDC or 24 VAC. The
duct and OSA mounts are housed in NEMA 4 rated
boxes with twist-off caps (no cover screws).
FEATURES
ACI/RH-2-O
Popular room housing
Accuracies of 2%, 3%, or 5%
Three-year warranty
Duct and OSA twist-off NEMA 4 housing
24 VDC or 24 VAC power (field-selectable)
4-20 mA, 0-10V, or 0-5V signal (field-selectable)
Field-calibratable
Optional temperature sensor
Optional digital display
ACI/RH-2-LCDR
ACI/RH-2-D
HUMIDITY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensor
Accuracy
Outputs
Resistive with ceramic substrate
2%, 3%, or 5% @ 77°F (25°C)
RH 0% to 100%, field-selectable
4-20 mA 2-wire; 4-20 mA 3-wire;
0-5 VDC 3-wire; 0-10 VDC 3-wire
Optional temp
Thermistor
RTD
10K, 20K, 100K1 @ 77°F
1001/10001 385
Supply voltage
Load impedance
Ambient temp
RH
Temp effect
Connections
Enclosure
Wall
Duct/OSA
18-36 VDC selectable, 24 VAC
4-20 mA-2501 @ 24V
-10° to 160°F (23° to 71°C)
0% to 99% noncondensing
<0.005% per °F (<0.01 per °C)
Terminal screws (16-22 AWG)
Plastic Delta-style
Plastic NEMA 4
DIMENSIONS
0.65 (1.7)
0.75 (1.9)
in
(cm)
2.25
(5.7)
0.89
(2.3)
0.79
(2.0)
3.84
(9.8)
4.24 (10.8)
3.60 (9.1)
2.69
(6.8)
80 Micron Sintered
Stainless Steel Filter
3.84
(9.8)
1.07
(2.7)
6.10
(15.5)
7.15
(18.2)
4.51
(11.5)
0.60
(1.5)
0.92
(2.3)
2.75
(7.0)
Room
0.46
(1.2)
2.25
(5.7)
0.75 (1.9)
Stainless
Plate
Duct
0.75
(1.9)
2.25
(5.7)
0.86
(2.2)
1.00
(2.5)
(4) PG11/0.5" (1.27) NPT
Knockouts
0.58
(1.5)
0.18
(0.5)
O.D. Ref
4.68 (11.9)
3.95 (10.0)
2.75 (7.0)
1.40
(3.6)
Plastic
Washer
80 Micron
Stainless
Steel
Sintered
FIlter
0.75
(1.9)
1.00
(2.5)
4.5
(1.4)
2.70
(6.9)
3.00
(7.6)
1.40 (3.6)
PG11 Watertight Fitting
(Cable Dia. 0.12 to 0.28"/
0.3 to 0.7 cm))
Outside Air
Plastic Cover for
Stainless Steel Filter to
Protect Sensor during
Wash Down
Surface Plate
93
HUMIDITY
BAS/HVAC RH TRANSMITTERS
ACI/RH SERIES
WIRING
0-5 or 0-10 VDC
RH Output to
DDC Controller
Ground or Signal
Common (for AC 4-20 mA
and Voltage Output
Transmitters only)
(+) +18-35 VDC
or 24 VAC
Supply Voltage
(–) 4-20 mA Current
Loop Output to
DDC Controller
Ground or Signal
Common (for AC 4-20 mA
and voltage output
transmitters only)
Mounting Hole
Output Selection Switches (SW3)
AC Power
4-20 mA Out
SW3
4321
AC/DC Power
0-5 VDC Out
4321
IO Vin Gnd VO
4321
On
On
On
DC Power
4-20 mA Out
Wire
Access
Hole
AC/DC Power
0-10 VDC Out
4321
4321
On
SW2
Test & Calibration Switches Settings (SW2)
654321
Relative
Humidity
Sensor
On
On
0% RH Output
Normal Operating
Condition
654321
654321
On
Mounting Hole
(–) 4-20 mA
Current Loop
Output to
DDC Controller
Relative
Humidity
Sensor
(Polarized Male
Connector)
SW3
Span Adjust
Potentiometer
4-20 VAC Gnd 0-5
mA or
or
VDC
0-10
4321
On
SW2
654321
On
Increment RH Output
654321
HUMIDITY
(+) +18 to 35 VDC
or 24 VAC Supply Voltage
On
50% RH Output
• = Designates all connections to be made
to the RH Transmitter
0-5 or 0-10 VDC
RH Output to
DDC Controller
654321
On
On
100% RH Output Decrement RH Output
654321
654321
On
On
Reset to Original Calibration
654321
Room
Duct/OSA
On
ORDERING INFORMATION
94
MODEL
ACI/RH
DESCRIPTION
ACI relative humidity transmitter
ACCURACY (choose one)
2 2% (20% to 95% RH)
3 3% (20% to 95% RH)
5 5% (20% to 95% RH)
MOUNTING TYPE (choose one)
R
Room surface-mount RH transmitter 4-20 mA/0-10V/0-5V output
SP Surface wall plate-mount RH transmitter 4-20 mA/0-10V/0-5V output
Duct-mount RH transmitter 4-20 mA/0-10V/0-5V output
D
O
OSA-mount RH transmitter 4-20 mA/0-10V/0-5V output
OPTION (as needed)
AN
10 kΩ thermistor, 3
CP
10 kΩ thermistor, 2
100K
100 kΩ thermistor
20K
20 kΩ thermistor
100-2
100Ω 385 platinum RTD
1000-2 1 kΩ 385 platinum RTD
LCDR
3.5-digit RH display, 24 VDC required (Room only)
ACI/RH
2
R
AN
Example: ACI/RH-2-R-AN ACI 2% room humidity transmitter
with 10 kΩ thermistor
Zero
Adjust
Potentiometer
HUMIDITY
BAPI 2% AND 3% ROOM, DUCT, AND OSA HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
BA/H SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The BA/H Series 2% and 3% accuracy humidity transmitters are designed specifically for HVAC systems. The
room transmitters use Delta and BAPI-Stat II enclosures
with optional displays and communication jacks. All duct
and OSA units come in weatherproof enclosures selectable for NEMA 3R or IP66 applications. All the BA/H
transmitters have optional temperature sensors or transmitters. Transmitter outputs include 4-20 mA, 0-5V and
0-10V with replaceable sensors.
Delta-Style
Enclosure
BAPI-Stat II
Enclosure
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
±2% or 3% accuracies
4-20 mA / 0-5V / 0-10V models
Optional digital room RH display
Two-year warranty
Optional selection of thermistor, RTD, and
semiconductor curves
Two room enclosure designs
Three duct and OSA enclosure designs
Custom logos
Replaceable RH sensors
Weather
Tight (EU)
Duct Unit
Weatherproof
(WP)
Duct Unit
Weather Tight
(EUO) Outside Air Unit
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensor
Resistive with ceramic substrate
Accuracy
2% or 3%, from 20% to 95% RH
Optional Temperature Sensors available
(DC power recommended)
Thermistor
1.8 k1 @ 77°F (25°C)
3 k1 @ 77°F (25°C)
3.3 k1 @ 77°F (25°C)
10 k1 Type 2 @ 77°F (25°C)
10 k1 Type 3 @ 77°F (25°C)
20 k1 @ 77°F (25°C)
50 k1 @ 77°F (25°C)
100 k1 @ 77°F (25°C)
RTD
1001 385 @ 32°F (0°C)
1 k1 385 @ 32°F (0°C)
1 k1 375 @ 32°F (0°C)
SC AD592
247 µA @ -13°F (-25°C)
SC LM334
298 µA @ 77°F (25°C)
Wiring
Four wire, 16 to 22 AWG terminals
Optional display
2.5 digit LCD; adjustable between
RH and temperature
Enclosure Material
Room
ABS Plastic, UL94V-0
Duct/OSA
WP
NEMA 3R, Cast aluminum
EU
IP66, ABS plastic, UL94V-0
EUO
IP66, UV resistant plastic
Supply voltage 15-26 VAC/VDC
Output
0-100% = 4-20mA / 0-5V, DC power
0-100% = 0-10V, AC/DC power
Load Impedance
4-20 mA
7001 maximum @24 VDC
0-5/0-10V
10 k1 minimum
Ambient RH
Room
0-100%, non-condensing
Duct/OSA
0-100%
Ambient Temp.
Room
32° to 122°F (0° to -50°C)
Duct/OSA
-22° to 158°F (-30° to 70°C)
Filter
Room
Gore-Tex®
Duct/OSA
100 micron sintered stainless steel
Agency
CE
95
HUMIDITY
FEATURES
HUMIDITY
BAPI 2% AND 3% ROOM, DUCT, AND OSA HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
BA/H SERIES
WIRING
J6
TEMP +
TEMP
V OUT
V+
GND
J1
POT 1
POT 2
RH ZERO
–
Display Cycle
in Seconds
% RH ADJUST
J2
3
J7
10
T
20
H
F/C
1 2
ON DEG F
OFF DEG C
RTH1
RTH2
Room Humidity Circuit Board
4 TO 20 mA TERMINATION
Terminal Legend Function
GND ........... 4 to 20 mA signal
(to analog input of controller)
V+ ............. +15 to +26 VDC
TEMP.......... Optional temperature sensor
TEMP.......... Optional temperature sensor
0 TO 5 VDC TERMINATION
Terminal Legend Function
GND ........... To controller ground
t(GND or common)
V+ ............. +15 to +26 VAC/VDC
V OUT.......... 0 to 5 VDC or 0 to 10V signal
(to analog input of controller)
TEMP.......... Optional temperature sensor
TEMP.......... Optional temperature sensor
Humidity Transmitter
Module
YELLOW
YELLOW
BLUE
BLUE
WHITE or GREEN
BLACK
RED
Duct and OSA
Blue wire (3%);
Blue with Black stripe (2%)
Sintered
Sensor Tip
Optional Temperature
Sensor Wires
Voltage Output: 0-5V (white) or
0 to 10V (green)
Ground: 4-20 mA output (two-wire loop)
to controller or voltage output
ground
Power: 15 to 26 VDC
ORDERING INFORMATION
HUMIDITY
MODEL
BA/
BA/
DESCRIPTION
Humidity transmitter
OPTIONAL SENSOR TYPE
No temperature needed
1.8K Thermistor 1.8 kΩ @77°F (25°C)
3K
Thermistor 3 kΩ @77°F (25°C)
3.3K Thermistor 3.3 kΩ @77°F (25°C)
10K2 Thermistor 10 kΩ @77°F (25°C), Type 2
10K3 Thermistor 10 kΩ @77°F (25°C), Type 3
20K
Thermistor 20 kΩ @77°F (25°C)
50K
Thermistor 50 kΩ @77°F (25°C)
100K Thermistor 100 kΩ @77°F (25°C)
100
RTD 100Ω @32°F (0°C), 385 curve
1K8
RTD 1000Ω @32°F (0°C), 385 curve
1K7
RTD 1000Ω @32°F (0°C), 375 curve
334
LM334 semiconductor
592
AD592 semiconductor (comes with error and offset values)
REQUIRED HUMIDITY TRANSMITTER (T10K(range) temperature range follows the RH selection)
H200 ±2% Humidity transmitter, four-wire, 4-20 mA or 0-5V output
H210 ±2% Humidity transmitter, four-wire, 4-20 mA or 0-10V output
H300 ±3% Humidity transmitter, four-wire, 4-20 mA or 0-5V output
H310 ±3% Humidity transmitter, four-wire, 0-10V output
REQUIRED RH MOUNTING ENCLOSURE
R
Room type, Delta style enclosure
B
Room type, BAPI-Stat II style enclosure
D-WP Duct type, NEMA 3R, weatherproof metal enclosure
D-EU Duct type, Weather tight IP66 ABS plastic enclosure
D-EUO Duct type, Weather tight IP66, UV resistant enclosure
O-WP OSA type, NEMA 3R, Weatherproof metal enclosure
O-EUO OSA type, Weather tight IP66, UV resistant enclosure
DIGITAL DISPLAY
D LCD RH Digital Display (R-Delta style only)
10K3 - H200 -
R -
D
Example: BA/10K3-H200-R-D BAPI 4-20 mA room 2% RH and 10KΩ thermistor
sensor with LCD indication
RELATED PRODUCTS
BA/ADP-525-7-WMW
BA/ADP-525-7-OFW
BA/ADP-525-7-CPW
BA/Foamback
BA/Foamback-Gray
UR
96
Warm white 7" x 5.25" adaptor plate
Off white 7" x 5.25" adaptor plate
Copla white 7" x 5.25" adaptor plate
White foam back insulator
Gray foam back insulator
Moisture resistant 3 wire butt splice
BA/H2S
2% Room replacement sensor
BA/H3S
3% Room replacement sensor
BA/* H2P-S-D
2% Duct probe replacement
BA/* H3P-S-D
3% Duct probe replacement
BA/* H2P-S-O
2% OSA probe replacement
BA/* H3P-S-O
3% OSA probe replacement
*Temperature sensor as needed
HUMIDITY
2% WALL- AND DUCT-MOUNT RELATIVE HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
HM_ 60, HM_ 70 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Vaisala’s Models HM_ 60 and 70 Wall/Duct-Mount
Relative Humidity Transmitters have been specifically
designed for use in HVAC/BAS and pharmaceutical
applications. These instruments measure relative humidity from 0% to 100% RH. They are easily installed and
meet the European CE standards.
HMW 60
or
HMW 70
Five-minute field calibration is possible using the
Model HMK 41K Humidity Calibrator. When accuracy
adjustment or sensor replacement is necessary, the
transmitter can be calibrated in seconds with a single
potentiometer without disturbing operation. This saves
hours of maintenance time and assures high accuracy.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Comes with NIST certificate
Full 0% to 100% RH measurement
State-of-the-art replaceable sensor technology
±2% RH accuracy
Electronic, on-site one-point calibration
Two-wire, 4-20 mA output (HMW 60)
Voltage output (HMW 70)
Easy installation with wall mounting
Temperature compensated
Optional built-in temperature transmitter
OSA mounting brackets available
HUMIDITY
FEATURES
HMD 60
or
HMD 70
SPECIFICATIONS
HM_ 60, HM_ 70
Input voltage (60)
Input voltage (70)
Output signal
HM_ 60
HM_ 70
Electrical connections
Wall-mounted box
Duct housing
Output range
Transmitter temp range
Ambient tip temp range
Accuracy @ 68°F (20°C)
RH sensor
Weight
Room
Duct
Certification
10-35 VDC (signal dependent)
14-24 VAC/VDC
4-20 mA, 7001 @ 24 VDC
0-1, 0-5, 0-10V, 30001 min
Screw terminals (20-16 AWG)
ABS plastic
Cast aluminum NEMA 4 (IP55)
0% to 100% RH
23° to 131°F (-5° to 55°C)
4° to 176°F (-20° to 80°C)
±2% RH (0% to 90% RH)
±3% RH (90% to 100% RH)
Capacitive and replaceable
Humicap® 180
HMK 41
Operation
Operating temp
Measuring range
Reference probe
accuracy
Storage temp
Temp coefficient
Battery
RH sensor
Weight
Certification
Handheld, onsite calibrator
-40° to 140°F (-40° to 60°C)
0% to 100% RH, -40° to 140°F
(-22° to 78°C)
±1% RH (0% to 90% RH)
±2% RH (90% to 100% RH)
-4° to 140°F (-20° to 60°C)
+0.04% RH/°C typical
Four AA (LR6)(not included)
Capacitive and replaceable
2.1 lb (0.95 kg)
CE, NIST certificate
0.32 lb (0.14 kg)
1.68 lb (0.76 kg)
CE, NIST certificate
97
HUMIDITY
2% WALL- AND DUCT-MOUNT RELATIVE HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
HM_ 60, HM_ 70 SERIES
DIMENSIONS
Outside Wall
Northern Exposure
3.94 (10.01)
3.23 (8.20)
in
(cm)
End View
into Sensor
3.23 3.94
(8.20) (10.01)
Mounting Bracket
2.50
(6.35)
4.33
(11.00)
0.47
(1.19)
1.3
(3.30)
4.50
(11.43)
1.75
(4.45)
3.50 (8.89)
Sun/Rain Shield
3.35
(8.51)
2.44 (6.20)
Side View
9.85 (25.01)
HMD 60/70 Duct RH
HMW 60/HMW 70
10.0 (25.40)
WMK-20 Outside Air Bracket
WIRING
24 VDC
Power Supply
+
HUMIDITY
Y Option
4-20 mA
Temp Signal
-T
+T
-RH
+RH
4-20 mA
RH Signal
24 VDC
Power Supply
Wall Current Output
RH
gain
T
gain
(dry)
(wet)
RH
offset
RH
gain
RH est
UP
X3
Voltage
RH Signal
HMW 60U or HMW 60Y
RH
gain
RH
offset
T
gain
T
offset
GND
T out
RH out
Us
(dry)
(wet)
RH
offset
RH
gain
+RH -RH
T gain
T offset
HMW 70U or HMW 70Y
1 2 3 4 5
T
offset
+T
-T
Y Option
4-20 mA
Temp Signal
4-20 mA
RH Signal
Output Selections
T
0-1V
RH
T
0-5V
RH
T
0-10V
RH
Power
Supply
Us RH
out
T GND
out
Duct Voltage Output
ORDERING INFORMATION
98
UP
HMD 70U or HMD 70Y
HMD 60U or HMD 60Y
Duct Current Output
0-1V
T
RH
Wall Voltage Output
1 2 3 4 5
Power
Supply
5
4
3
2
1
Ouput Jumper
T
T
RH
RH
0-5V
0-10V
T
Test
RH
offset
-
Y Option
Voltage
Temp Signal
MODEL
HMW 60U
HMW 70U
HMW 60Y
HMW 70Y
HMD 60U
HMD 70U
HMD 60Y
HMD 70Y
DESCRIPTION
Wall mount, 4-20 mA output
Wall mount, 0-1 VDC, 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC outputs
Wall mount, humidity with 4-20 mA output, temperature with 4-20 mA output
Wall mount, humidity, and temperature, 0-1 VDC, 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC outputs
Duct RH transmitter, 4-20 mA output
Duct RH transmitter 0-1V, 0-5V, 0-10V output
Duct RH and temperature transmitter, 4-20 mA output
Duct RH and temperature transmitter, 0-1V, 0-5V, 0-10V output
HMK 41K
16663HM
19165ZZ
WMK-20
RELATED PRODUCTS
1% electronic calibrator with calibration cable
Replaceable humidity sensor (replaces 0062HM)
Calibration cable for use with HMK41K for old HM_-(20/30U) transmitters
OSA/Wall-mount bracket
Y Option
Voltage
Temp Signal
Voltage
RH Signal
HUMIDITY
2% HUMIDITY AND OPTIONAL TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS
MODELS HT2S, HT2O, HT2D
DESCRIPTION
Model HT relative humidity transmitters are full-range,
high-accuracy building automation transmitters. Model
HT covers 0% to 100% RH over a wide temperature. The
standard two-wire, 4-20 mA output provides low cost
space, duct, and outdoor monitoring for building control.
HT2D
OPERATION
The transmitter converts the relative humidity into a 4-20
mA signal. The HT transmitters have a microprocessor
that performs the temperature compensation calculations from an onboard RTD. The microprocessor maintains both high accuracy and low cost with a wide humidity and operational temperature span.
HT2S
An added optional temperature output is available in the
same enclosure. It comes with a 4-20 mA signal and a
large selection of temperature ranges.
FEATURES
• Honeywell Hy-Cal sensors
• 100% replacement for discontinued Hy-Cal
transmitters
• Advanced wall-mount design
• Weatherproof housing for duct and OSA use
• Dual output option (humidity and temperature)
SPECIFICATIONS
Humidity Transmitter
Humidity output
Calibration
Temperature Transmitter Option
Two-wire, 4-20 mA = 0% to 100% RH
Factory calibrated with no
field setting required
Hy-Cal capacitive monolithic IC
±2% from 5% to 90% RH
Sensing element
Accuracy
Transmitter ambient
Room
-10° to 150°F (-23° to 65°C)
Duct/OSA
-10° to 185°F (-23° to 85°C)
Time constant
50 sec in slow moving air
Power requirement 9.4-35 VDC (24V nominal)
Max load impedance (Power supply – 9.4V) / 0.02 = load
i.e., (24V – 9.4V) / 0.02 = 7301
Terminations
Non polar terminals
(22-14 AWG wire)
Weight
Duct and OSA
1.2 lb (0.55 kg)
Room
.2 lb (0.1 kg)
Output
Transmitter range
EN range
S range
A range
BI range
KK range
N range
4-20 mA over calibrated range
Factory preset ranges
-20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C)
0° to 100°F (-18° to 38°C)
20° to 120°F (-7° to 49°C)
30° to 130°F (-1° to 54°C)
30° to 180°F (-1° to 82°C)
32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
H range
40° to 90°F (4° to 32°C)
(other ranges available)
Sensor
Platinum 10001 RTD 385 curve
Accuracy
±0.5°F (0.27°C)
Power requirement 9.4-35 VDC (24V Nominal)
Load impedance
(Power supply 9.4V) / 0.02 = load
i.e., (24V – 9.4V) / 0.02 = 7301
Terminations
Non polar terminals
(22-14 AWG wire)
99
HUMIDITY
The housing for the duct and OSA mount configurations
are suitable for outdoor use. The aluminum cast box is
gasketed to maintain a rain-tight environment for the
transmitter.
HT2O
HUMIDITY
2% HUMIDITY AND OPTIONAL TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS
MODELS HT2S, HT2O, HT2D
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
2.75
(6.99)
2.75
(6.98)
4.0
(10.16)
4.63
(11.75)
Housing Bottom View
2.88
(7.30)
4.50
(11.43)
1.58
(4.01)
4.5
(11.43)
1.25
(3.18)
2.0
(5.08)
2.25
(5.72)
Foam Gasket
0.38
(0.953)
8.0
(20.32)
Housing Top View
HT2D
HT2O
HT2S
WIRING
HUMIDITY
24 VDC
Power Supply
Hum*
Hum
Temp*
Temp
4-20 mA
Humidity
Signal
4-20 mA
Optional
Temperature
Signal**
HT2S
* Non-polar connection
** Needs humidity connection
to output temperature
signal properly
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
2% Relative humidity transmitter
* HT2
Duct mount, weather resistant box, 8" probe
* D
Outside air mounting, weather resistant box with weather shield
* O
Space room/office mounting
* S
W Wall mount, weather resistant box, 4" probe
1
4-20 mA DC output
* NT No temperature transmitter
* EN Range codes per Minco letter ranges (-20°/140°F) or (-29°/60°C)
Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0°/100°F) or (-18°/38°C)
* S
A
Range codes per Minco letter ranges (20°/120°F) or (-7°/49°C)
BI Range codes per Minco letter ranges (30°/130°F) or (-1°/54°C)
KK Range codes per Minco letter ranges (30°/180°F) or (-1°/82°C)
N
Range codes per Minco letter ranges (32°/122°F) or (0°/50°C)
Range codes per Minco letter ranges (40°/90°F) or (4°/32°C)
* H
SX Special range on next item line, -xxx/-yyyE, i.e., -20°/185°F
HT2
D
1
* Normally-stocked Items
100
NT
Example: HT2D1NT 2% RH Duct Transmitter with 8" probe,
no temperature output
HUMIDITY
1% & 2% RELATIVE HUMIDITY AND TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS
MODEL HT829, HT839
DESCRIPTION
Advanced technology provides the Model HT829
Relative Humidity Transmitter with unmatched accuracy specifications. The Model HT829 measures 0% to
100% RH over a range of -10° to 185°F (-23° to 85°C).
The standard two-wire, 4-20 mA output provides low cost
space, duct, and outdoor monitoring for process and
industrial building control. A temperature sensor built into
the integrated circuit provides temperature compensation
over the full temperature range.
Room
Housing
(S)
Duct
Housing
(D)
The HT839 Transmitter is designed with all the attributes
of the HT829 Humidity Transmitter and High-Accuracy
Temperature Transmitter. Both the HT829 and HT839
are field-rangeable for field recalibration.
OSA / Wall
Housing
(O)
FEATURES
HT829 RH only, 4-20mA
HT839 RH and temperature, 4-20mA
Temperature-compensated IC sensor
One-point field calibration, RH or temperature
Advanced wall-mount design
Weatherproof housing for OSA and duct
•
•
•
•
•
•
Honeywell Hy-Cal sensors
Rangeable temperature output (HT839)
Wall/Duct/OSA mount
1% RH accuracy with NIST certificate
2% RH accuracy standard
Sintered filter
HUMIDITY
•
•
•
•
•
•
SPECIFICATIONS
HT829 – RH only
Transmitter output
Calibration
Sensing element
Accuracy @ 25°C
HT829 (Standard)
HT829 (N1)
Time constant
Washable sensor
Two-wire, 4-20 mA over
0% to 100% RH
One-point adjustment
Hy-Cal Capacitive Monolithic IC
±2% from 0% to 90% RH
±1% from 10% to 80% RH
50 sec in slow-moving air
Wash with water and a stiff nylon
brush
Zero and span adjust Noninteracting, adjust zero only for
field calibration
Power requirement
9.4 VDC min to 35 VDC max
Termination Terminals
(22-14 Awg wire)
Nonpolar, connect either way
Operating temp
-10° to 185°F (-23° to 85°C)
150°F (66°C) max for room
Max load
7301 @ 24 VDC
(Power supply - 9.4) / 0.02 A = 1
Weight
Room
.19 lb (0.084 kg)
Duct/OSA
1.2 lb (0.55 kg)
HT839 – RH & Temperature
Transmitter output
Two-wire, nonpolar, 4-20 mA
(per specified range)
Calibration
One-point adjustment
Rangeability limits (non-interconnecting)
Zero
-20° to 60°F (-28° to 15°C)
Span
50° to 160°F (10° to 71°C)
Accuracy @ 25°C
±0.5°F (0.27°C) or ±.8% of span
Operating temp
Room
-10° to 150°F (-23° to 65°C)
Duct/OSA
-10° to 185°F (-23° to 85°C)
Power requirement
9.4 VDC min to 35 VDC max
Max load
7301 @ 24 VDC
(Power supply - 9.4) / 0.02 A = 1
Weight
Room
.19 lb (0.084 kg)
Duct/OSA
1.2 lb (0.55 kg)
Enclosure
Room
Plastic/aluminum
Duct/OSA
Weather-resistant aluminum
Filter
60 micron sintered stainless steel
101
HUMIDITY
1% & 2% RELATIVE HUMIDITY AND TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS
MODEL HT829, HT839
DIMENSIONS
1.58
(4.01)
in
(cm)
2.75
(6.98)
2.75
(6.99)
1/2" FNPT
2.25 (5.72)
Foam Gasket
1.25
(3.18)
4.5
(11.43)
2.25
(5.72)
2.88
(7.30)
4.50
(11.43)
Sintered filter
4.63
(11.75)
0.38
(0.95)
4.0
(10.16)
8.0
(20.32)
Note: mount in a shaded area
Housing
Top View
Housing
Bottom View
1/2" FNPT
HT829S and HT839S
HT829O and HT839O
HUMIDITY
WIRING – HT829, RH ONLY
HT829D and HT839D
WIRING – HT839, RH AND TEMPERATURE
24VDC
24VDC
+ -
+ -
Z S
H
Hum*
Hum
RH +
4-20mA
Signal –
T
Z S Z S
RH Signal
4-20mA
**Temp Signal
4-20mA
*Non-polar connections
–
+
–
+
Hum*
Hum
Temp*
Temp
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
* HT829 Relative humidity transmitter only
* HT839 Relative humidity transmitter and temperature transmitter
Duct mount, weather resistant box, 8" probe
* D
Outside air mounting, weather resistant box with weather shield
* O
Space room/office mounting
* S
W Wall mount, weather resistant box, 4" probe
1
4-20 mA DC output
* N1 1% RH from 10/80% @ 25°C, temperature matched at 0°C with NIST certificate
N2 2% accuracy from 0/90% @ 25°C, temperature matched at 0°C with NIST certificate
* S2 2% accuracy from 0/90% @ 25°C, no calibration data
* EN Range codes per Minco letter ranges (-20°/140°F) or (-29°/60°C) (HT839 only)
Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0°/100°F) or (-18°/38°C) (HT839 only)
* S
A
Range codes per Minco letter ranges (20°/120°F) or (-7°/49°C) (HT839 only)
BI
Range codes per Minco letter ranges (30°/130°F) or (-1°/54°C) (HT839 only)
N
Range codes per Minco letter ranges (32°/122°F) or (0°/50°C) (HT839 only)
Range codes per Minco letter ranges (40°/90°F) or (4°/32°C) (HT839 only)
* H
-Range codes per Minco letter ranges in the catalog (HT839 only)
SX Special range on next item line, -xxx/-yyyE, i.e., -20°/120°F (HT839 only)
HT839
D
1
* Normally-stocked items
102
S2
A
Example: HT839D1S2A 2% RH & T Duct Transmitter with 8" probe,
temperature ranged for 20°/120°F
* Non-polar connections
** Need humidity connection
to output temperature
signal properly
HUMIDITY
DEW POINT, ENTHALPY, AND WET BULB TRANSMITTERS
DP3A, EN3A, AND WB3A SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Models DP3 Dew Point, WB3 Wet Bulb, and EN3 Enthalpy
Transmitters are rugged, compact, and ideally suited for monitoring
dew point, wet bulb, or enthalpy in building automation and process
applications. Using a capacitive RH sensor and an RTD temperature
sensor, the unit’s microprocessor computes the dew point, wet bulb, or
enthalpy. Two linear outputs provide a 4-20 mA signal for dew point, wet
bulb, or enthalpy and a 4-20 mA signal for dry bulb temperature.
DP3A-S
EN3A-S
WB3A-S
DP3A-O
EN3A-O
WB3A-O
FEATURES
Dew point accuracy of ±1.8°F (±1°C) over the normal range
Enthalpy accuracy of ±2 BTU/lb over normal range
Wet bulb accuracy of ±3°F over the normal range
Two 4-20 mA output signals
Microprocessor-based signal processing
Weather resistant duct/OSA mounting
One-point RH calibration with EASYCAL
Temperature compensated
EASYCAL
DP3A-D
EN3A-D
WB3A-D
APPLICATIONS
• WB3 evaporative cooling decision potential
• DP3 supply air setpoint (condensation prevention)
• EN3 economizer efficiency
SPECIFICATIONS
Duct/OSA range
Dew point
Enthalpy
Wet bulb
Dry bulb
Room range
Dew point
Enthalpy
Wet bulb
Dry bulb
Dual signals
-20° to 120°F (-28.8° to 49°C)
0-50 BTU/lb
0° to 100°F (-17.8° to 37.8°C)
-20° to 120°F (-28.8° to 49°C)
40° to 90°F (4.4° to 32.2°C)
0-50 BTU/lb
40° to 90°F (4.4° to 32.2°C)
40° to 90°F (4.4° to 32.2°C)
4-20 mA (7001 max load)
Humidity and dry bulb temp
Supply voltage
Dimensions
Room
Duct/OSA
Duct probe
OSA probe/shield
Weight
Sensor
HUMIDITY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
18-36 VDC
4.9"H x 3.1"W x 1"D
(12.4 x 7.9 x 2.5 cm)
4.5"H x 4"W x 2.1"D
(11.4 x 10.2 x 5.3 cm)
9.0"L (22.86 cm)
0.50"D (1.27 cm)
1.70"L (4.3 cm)
1.25"D (3.17 cm)
1.0 lb (0.45 kg)
Capacitive (G-CAP®)
DIMENSIONS
2.1
(5.33)
in
(cm)
Cover
Base
2.95
(7.49)
4.5 (11.43)
3.5 (8.89)
3.3 (8.38)
Mounting
Holes on
Center Line
4.9
(12.45)
Cover
3.5
4.0
(8.89) (10.16)
Base
3.5
(8.89)
1/2" (1.27)
Conduit
Knockout
(3 places)
1.0
(2.54)
2.0
(5.08)
3.25
(8.26)
1.0
(2.54)
Outside Air
6.0 (15.2)
Insertion
4.5 (11.43)
Terminal
Block
1.0
(2.54)
Room
1.0
(2.54)
Probe
1/2" (1.27)
Conduit
Knockout
(2 places)
Wiring
Access
3.1 (7.87)
1/2" (1.27)
Conduit
Knockout
2.25 (5.72)
3.5 (8.89) Base
4.0 (10.16)
Duct
103
HUMIDITY
DEW POINT, ENTHALPY, AND WET BULB TRANSMITTERS
DP3A, EN3A, AND WB3A SERIES
CALIBRATION
To calibrate the RH sensor in the DP3A, EN3A, and WB3A :
1. Insert the calibration tool connector into the RJ11 jack on
the transmitter board.
2. Insert the probe into the air stream that the transmitter is
DP3A-S Transmitter
monitoring.
DUT
(Device Under Test)
3. Adjust the arrow buttons on the side of the tool until the
two displays match.
GENERAL EASTERN
INC
4. Remove the jack and probe.
DEC
Note: There is no need to remove the cover on
duct or room models. OSA sensors have
a protected internal jack.
HUMIDITY
% RH
DUT 52.2
REF 50.0
EASYCAL
WIRING
Terminal
Block
Typical
Transmitter
Power Supply
Humidity (DP, EN, WB)
4-20 mA
5
4
3
2
1
Dry Bulb
Temperature
Note: Humidity signal must be wired (4, 5).
ORDERING INFORMATION
104
MODEL
DP3A-S
DP3A-D
DP3A-O
DESCRIPTION
Room dew point and dry bulb transmitter
Duct dew point and dry bulb transmitter
OSA/Wall dew point and dry bulb transmitter
EN3A-S
EN3A-D
EN3A-O
Room enthalpy and dry bulb transmitter
Duct enthalpy and dry bulb transmitter
OSA enthalpy and dry bulb transmitter
WB3A-S
WB3A-D
WB3A-O
EASYCAL
Room wet bulb and dry bulb transmitter
Duct wet bulb and dry bulb transmitter
OSA wet bulb and dry bulb transmitter
2% calibrator with NIST certificate
HUMIDITY
VAPORSTAT™ INFRARED DEW POINT AND GRAINS TRANSMITTER
MODEL 9002
DESCRIPTION
The VaporStat Model 9002 is a digital display and
absolute humidity transmitter that measures grains of
moisture per pound of dry air in an infrared chamber. The
moisture level is then calculated as dew point and transmitted simultaneously as 0-10 VDC and 4-20 mA. A display and keyboard are incorporated for local indication
and parameter adjustment. A contact closure is also
incorporated with keyboard entries for set point and differential. The Model 9002 is wall mounted and available with
accessories for duct and OSA applications.
9002
APPLICATION
9002 and
1508 Enclosure
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
HUMIDITY
The Model 9002 sampling chamber measures the
infrared light absorbed by the moisture in the air and
processes it as dew point or grains of moisture per pound
of dry air. The 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA output ranges are
selected at the keyboard and displayed on the LCD readout. A control contact energizes at the set point entered
on the keyboard. The Model 9002 is ideally suited for
local alarm and signaling for clean room controls, desiccant system controls, paper mill controls, and textile
process controls, as well as condensation prevention.
Dew point accuracy ±1.8°F (±1°C)
Grains of moisture measured directly
0-10V and 4-20 mA output
Digital display or blank cover
±5 grains accuracy
±1.8°F of (1.0°C) dew point accuracy
Patented infrared absorption platform
Gold-plated element for durability
Built-in keyboard for range adjust
Elevation correction via keyboard
Tamper-resistant keyboard cover
10-minute field calibration with gas
NIST field calibration gas
SPECIFICATIONS
Power
Accuracy
Sensing method
(dual channel)
Altitude
Ambient temp
Ambient RH
Sensor life
Calibration
24 VAC, ±25%, 2.75 VA
DP = ±1.8°F (1.0°C)
plus 1% of reading
±5 grains per lb @ 68°F dry air
Nondispersive infrared
Corrected to 5,000' (1524m)
32° to 120°F (0° to 50°C)
0% to 98%
15 years
In field with nitrogen gas
Output
(simultaneous)
Output range adjust
Control
Set point
Differential
Display
Keyboard
0-10V @ 10001 min
4-20 mA @ 5001 max
Within 0° to 100°F (-17 to 37°C),
0-350 grains/lb of dry air
SPDT, 2A @ 24 VAC
Adjustable, full range
Adjustable, full range
Two line, 1/2" (1.27 cm) LCD
Four-key menu control
105
HUMIDITY
VAPORSTAT™ INFRARED DEW POINT AND GRAINS TRANSMITTER
MODEL 9002
DIMENSIONS
MOUNTING
3.25
(8.26)
in
(cm)
1.37
(3.48)
5.63
(14.30)
Tamper Set Screw
CONTROLS
WIRING
N L1
Use either or both
outputs below
0-10V Out
Signal Common
4-20 mA Out
HUMIDITY
24 VAC
2 1
+
Input
AC
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
NC
clear
NO
set
enter
COM
Clear Mode Arrow Enter
Button Button Button Button
Mounting Bracket
SETUP
CHANGING SETTINGS
FACTORY OUTPUT SETTINGS
Dew point, 0° to 80°F (-22° to 25°C) @ sea level
Moisture = 0-140 grains per lb of dry air @ sea level
Relay on @ 50°F (10°C), off @ 59°F (15°C)
1. Press mode + clear at the same time for five sec to
enter the adjust mode.
2. Press mode key to display item to change:
elevation, dew point, grains, relay.
3. Use arrow keys to select ranges.
4. Press enter to confirm selection.
5. Press clear to finish and return to normal display.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
9002
DESCRIPTION
Dew point and grains 0-10 VDC/4-20 mA transmitter and contact
RELATED PRODUCTS
1508
Duct-mount accessory enclosure
1551
UCK-1 Universal calibration kit
GAS-N2-N
(order gas separately)
2090
Graphing software with cable RJ45, nine-pin serial
106
OSA-mount accessory enclosure
Zero moisture calibration gas
HUMIDITY
WATERPROOF / WASHDOWN HUMIDITY TRANSMITTER
MODEL EHRH
DESCRIPTION
The Model EHRH is a humidity transmitter specifically
made for washdown areas and condensing atmospheres. The Model EHRH measures relative humidity
with a 2% resistive sensor. It is made to be surface
mounted to a single-gang outlet box or mounted directly
to the wall, and it has a rugged stainless steel cover. The
Model EHRH is furnished with a waterproof case, connector, and stainless steel cover for termination inside
the wall.
FEATURES
Washdown waterproof design
4-20 mA output
Easy one-point field calibration
Rugged metal cover
Type 3 thermistor
APPLICATION
•
•
•
•
•
Swimming pools
Gymnasium
Green houses
Hospital suites
Food processing
SPECIFICATIONS
Relative humidity
Sensor RH
Accuracy RH
Sensitivity
Zero adjust
Power
Output
0% to 100%
Bulk polymer resistive
2% (30% to 95%)
0.1% RH
±20%
24 VDC ±20%
4-20 mA = 0% to 100% RH
-4° to 129°F (-20° to 54°C)
Epoxy-hardened waterproof case
Stainless steel
Flying leads
7001 @ 24 VDC
0.75 lb (0.34 kg)
Type 3, 10 k1 @ 77°F (25°C)
WIRING
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
Operating range
Enclosure
Cover
Connections
Load impedance
Weight
Thermistor
2.75
(6.98)
1.25
(3.17)
1.12
(2.86)
Shown with customersupplied back box
Power Supply
4-20 mA
Signal
5.37
(13.64)
(green/yellow)
2.75
(6.98)
3.30
(8.25)
Type 3
Thermistor
Front view
Side View
(red/white)
O
F
F G
S A
E I
T N
Z S
(white/brown)
(white/brown)
Top View
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
EHRH
DESCRIPTION
Waterproof/Washdown 2% RH Transmitter
107
HUMIDITY
•
•
•
•
•
HUMIDITY
OUTDOOR ASPIRATED HUMIDITY / TEMPERATURE HOUSING
MODEL A21
DESCRIPTION
The Model A21 Outdoor Aspirated Humidity/
Temperature Housing provides powered aspiration for
outdoor monitoring of humidity and temperature. The
NEMA 3R enclosure is painted white to reduce the effect
of radiation, and the enclosure has a lockable latch for
security.
OPERATION
The fan pulls air in from the lower vent intake and
exhausts the air out the upper opposing vent of the enclosure. The 24 VDC power is supplied for both the fan and
transmitters. The transmitter power is internally filtered
from any fan motor noise that might affect the transmitter
signal.
SPECIFICATIONS
Impedance
Weight
Air filter
WIRING
-40° to 120°F (-40° to 49°C)
(see Related Products below for
added temperature requirements)
NEMA 3R with white enamel paint
and latch for padlock
Piano-type, left-hand side
Enclosure
Hinge
DIMENSIONS
Dry Bulb Temperature
To Controller *
Input
-
+
D
E
0.20
(0.50)
Air Exhaust
9.0
(22.86)
Not used
Air Intake
- 4-20 mA to
+ Controller Input
+
–
Installed
Transmitter
* Temperature
sensors are directly
wired to the controller.
They do not wire to
the terminal strip.
A21
1.0 (2.54)
A B CD E F
3.65
(9.27)
1.0
(2.54)
5.25
(13.34)
Front View
Do not use
or terminate
0.5
(1.27)
5.0
(12.7)
1.75
(4.44)
Terminal Strip
(projected
forward
3.5 (8.89) for
easy wiring)
10.0
(25.40)
F
– +
0.5
(1.27)
4.7
(12.06)
Left Side
Supply
B C
in
(cm)
24VDC
+ Power
A
Temp range
24 VDC @ 110 mA
(add power requirements for the
humidity/temperature transmitters)
471 added to the 4-20 mA transmitter
6 lb (2.72 kg)
Washable pocket foam filter
Fan
HUMIDITY
Supply voltage
Lower Back Plate*
4.25"W x 4.25"H x 3"D
Right Side
3.0 (7.62)
0.5 (1.27)
0.37
(0.95)
7.0 (17.78)
6.32 (16.05)
0.25
(0.64)
0.5" and 0.75"
knockouts on
centerline and
height shown
Conduit Entry
1/2" & 3/4" Knockouts
Bottom View
*Estimated usable dimensions
1.64
(4.15)
3.0
(7.62)
Mounting
Interior
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
A21
HW30K
HW20K
HW1K
PN46
4TK2-48
108
6.5
(16.51)
DESCRIPTION
Outdoor aspirated humidity/temperature housing
RELATED PRODUCTS
3% Wall-mount humidity sensor
2% Wall-mount humidity sensor
1% Wall-mount humidity sensor
Mounting clip for temperature sensor
Snap track for the HW30K and HW20K
ST-R9R
ST-R81
ST-R91
ST-R85
A21-FAN
Precon thermistor
1001 Platinum 385
10001 Platinum 375
10001 Platinum 385
Replacement fan assembly
POWER MONITORING
POWER MONITORING
MODEL/SERIES
PAGE
CURRENT OPERATED SWITCHES
CS1A, SCS1.5A, CS1150A, SCS1150A — Current-Operated Switches . . . . . .115
RIBX Series — Current-Operated Switch & Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
RIBXK, RIBXG, RIBXK420 Series — Current-Operated Switches
and Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
PRODUCTS
RIBXK
Current-Operated
Switch & Transducer
See the NEW
on page 120!
CURRENT, VOLTAGE, & POWER MONITORING TRANSDUCERS
201A — MotorSaver Three-Phase Voltage Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
250A — MotorSaver Three-Phase Voltage Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
258 Series — Three-Phase Voltage Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
269 Series — Three-Phase Voltage Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
355 Series — MotorSaver Three-Phase Voltage Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
460 Series — MotorSaver Three-Phase Voltage Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
4CMA — Current Transducer - Current Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
4CTV — Current Transducer - Voltage Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
MPA-2 — Meter Pulse-to-Analog Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
PT-9000 — PowerTrak Power Monitoring Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
PT-NT4-M — Modbus Communication Module for PT-9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
PT-NT4-N2 — Metasys Communication Module for PT-9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
PT-NTL-10 — LonWorks Communication Module for PT-9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
PVM , LVM — Three-Phase Voltage Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
RIBX-V Series — Current Transducers & Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
RIBXK, RIBXG, RIBXK420 Series —Current-Operated Switches
and Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Sentry 100 Series — Current Transducers - Voltage Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Sentry 200 Series — Current Transducers - Current Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Sentry 200-A Series — High Current Transducer - Current Output . . . . . . . . . .127
U3889 / 209PF — Voltage Disconnect / CT Shorting Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
POTENTIAL & CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
189 — Isolation Current Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
190XSUM — Summing Current Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
3PT3 — 5 KV Potential Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
468 — Potential Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
500T, 501T — Split-Core Current Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
600T, 601T— Split-Core Current Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
603, 603D — Split-Core Current Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
AL, RL — Solid-Core Current Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
CTW3 — 5 KV Current Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
SCT Series — Current Transformers - Voltage Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Indicates New Products
POWER MONITORING
SOLID-CORE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
MODELS AL, RL
DESCRIPTION
Models AL and RL Solid-Core Current Transformers
provide a low-amperage current output proportional to
line current and are for use in building automation and
metering applications. These low-cost current transformers are ideal for use as inputs to power monitors, such
as the Model PT-9500, and current transducers, such as
Models 4CTV and 4CMA.
AL
FEATURES
RL
CAUTION: Proper safety precautions must be followed by
a trained electrician during installation. It is recommended
that the incoming power be de-energized before installation.
The current transformer must have its secondary terminals
short-circuited or the burden (load) connected before energizing the primary circuit. For indoor use only. Use on insulated
conductor only.
SPECIFICATIONS
Secondary
Insulation class
Frequency
Casing
Wire Leads
Weight
2AL
5RL
7RL
8RL
Approvals
0-5A
600V, 10 kV BIL
50-400 Hz
Plastic, UL94V1
24" (61 cm), 16 AWG
0.5 lb (0.23 kg)
1.0 lb (0.45 kg)
1.5 lb (0.63 kg)
2.5 lb (1.2 kg)
UL-recognized component,
File #E93779; CSA certified,
File #LR89403
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODELS
MODEL 2AL
MODEL 5RL
CURRENT
Outer dia 2.74" (6.9 cm)
Outer dia 3.56'' (9.0 cm)
RATIO
CURRENT
Window dia 1.05" (2.67 cm) Window dia 1.56'' (3.9 cm)
CODE
RATIO
Accuracy %
Accuracy %
VA
VA
500
±3
50:5
2.0
1.0
±2
750
±2
75:5
2.0
1.5
±2
101
±1
100:5
2.0
2.0
±2
151
±1
150:5
4.0
5.0
±1
201
±1
200:5
4.0
5.0
±1
251
±1
250:5
6.0
10.0
±1
301
±1
300:5
8.0
12.5
±1
401
-400:5
-12.5
±1
501
-500:5
-20.0
±1
601
-600:5
-25.0
±1
751
-750:5
-25.0
±1
801
-800:5
-25.0
±1
102
-1000:5
-25.0
±1
122
-1200:5
---152
-1500:5
---162
-1600:5
---202
-2000:5
---252
-2500:5
---302
-3000:5
---402
-4000:5
--
5RL
201
Model
Current
Ratio Code
MODEL 7RL
Outer dia 4.58" (11.6 cm)
Window dia 2.50" (6.4 cm)
Accuracy %
--±2
±1
±1
±1
±1
±1
±1
±1
±1
±1
±1
±1
±1
±1
-----
VA
--2.5
5.0
5.0
5.0
12.5
15.0
25.0
30.0
30.0
35.0
35.0
35.0
40.0
45.0
-----
MODEL 8RL
Outer dia 5.73'' (14.6 cm)
Window dia 3.25'' (8.3 cm)
Accuracy %
----±1
±1
±1
±1
±1
±1
±1
±1
±1
±1
±1
±1
±1
±1
±1
±1
VA
----5.0
7.5
15.0
25.0
35.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
75.0
75.0
90.0
100.0
120.0
50.0
60.0
80.0
Example: 5RL201 Model RL current transformer with
1.56" (3.9 cm) window diameter and a 200:5
current ratio
Important! Shaded items in Ordering Information are available by special order and are not returnable for credit.
109
POWER MONITORING
• 5A secondary
• Flexible leads are UL 1015 105°C, CSA approved,
#16 AWG, 24"L (61 cm)
• UL recognized component, CSA certified
POWER MONITORING
SPLIT-CORE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
MODELS 603, 603D
DESCRIPTION
Models 603 and 603D Split-Core Current
Transformers provide a low-amperage current output
proportional to line current. They are for use in building
automation and metering applications. These low-cost
transformers are ideal for use as inputs to power monitors like the Model PT-9100 and current transducers like
Models 4CTV and 4CMA.
603
These transformers are designed for assembly to an
existing electrical installation without the need for dismantling the primary bus or cables. The transformers
can also be disassembled and then reassembled
around the conductors that require current monitoring.
DIMENSIONS
CAUTION: Proper safety precautions must be followed
by a trained electrician during installation. It is recommended that the incoming power be de-energized
before installation. The current transformer must have
its secondary terminals short-circuited or the burden
(load) connected before energizing the primary circuit.
For indoor use only. Use on insulated conductor only.
X1
4.56
(11.58)
0.66
(1.68)
1.04
(2.64)
0.42
(1.07)
603
0.85
(2.16)
10 oz (0.28 kg)
12 oz (0.34 kg)
UL-recognized component,
File #E93779; CSA certified,
File #LR89403
MODEL
603
603D
603
1.98
(5.03)
0.42
(1.07)
603D
DESCRIPTION
Split-core CT, 1" x 2" (2.5 x 5.1 cm) window, 1A secondary
Split-core CT, 2" x 2" (5.1 x 5.1 cm) window, 1A secondary
CURRENT RATIO
101-1
100:1
201-1
200:1
301-1
300:1
401-1
400:1 (Model 603D only)
501-1
500:1 (Model 603D only)
601-1
600:1 (Model 603D only)
101-1
H1
H2
3.40
(8.64)
2.08
(5.28)
X2
0-1A
600V, 10 kV BIL
50-400 Hz
Plastic, UL94V1
24" (61 cm), 22 AWG
X1
4.56
(11.58)
ORDERING INFORMATION
110
4.05
(10.29)
2.31
(5.87)
1.98
(5.03)
SPECIFICATIONS
Secondary
Insulation class
Frequency
Casing
Wire leads
Approx weight
603
603D
Approvals
0.85
(2.16)
in
(cm)
H1
H2
• 1A secondary
• Split-core construction for easy installation
• Flexible leads, UL 1015 105°C, CSA approved,
#22 AWG, 24"L (61 cm)
X2
FEATURES
POWER MONITORING
603D
Example: 603-101-1 Split-core current transformer with a
current ratio of 100:1 and a window size of 1" x 2"
4.05
(10.29)
POWER MONITORING
SPLIT-CORE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
MODELS 600T, 601T
DESCRIPTION
Models 600T and 601T Split-Core Current
Transformers provide a low-amperage current output
proportional to line current. They are for use in energy
management control and metering applications and are
ideal as inputs to power monitors like the Model PT9500 and current transducers like Models 4CTV and
4CMA.
FEATURES
• 5A secondary
• Split-core construction for easy installation
• Brass stud terminals #8-32 with one flat washer,
lockwasher, and regular nut
SPECIFICATIONS
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
B
A
B
C
D
DIMENSIONS
MODEL
601
600
7.75 (19.69) 6.75 (17.15)
5.50 (13.97) 4.50 (11.43)
2.00 (5.08) 4.50 (11.43)
4.25 (10.80) 6.75 (17.15)
C
H1
0-5A
600V, 10 kV BIL
50-400 Hz
1.33 @ 30°C (86°F) ambient
1.0 @ 55°C (131°F) ambient
1.5 lb (0.68 kg)
2.0" x 5.5" (5.08 x 13.97 cm)
4.5" x 4.5" (11.43 x 11.43 cm)
Plastic, UL94V1
Brass stud terminals with nut, flat
washer, lockwasher
UL-recognized component,
File #E93779;
CSA certified, File #LR89403
1.13
(2.87)
D
This End
Removable
A
Secondary
Insulation class
Frequency
Continuous thermal
current rating factor
Approx weight
Window sizes
600T
601T
Casing
Termination
Approvals
601T
(shown with end removed)
X1
LABEL
0.44
(1.12)
Two Mounting Holes
0.19 (0.48) dia
CAUTION: Proper safety precautions must be followed
by a trained electrician during installation. It is recommended that the incoming power be de-energized
before installation. The current transformer must have
its secondary terminals short-circuited or the burden
(load) connected before energizing the primary circuit.
For indoor use only. Use on insulated conductor only.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL 600T - 2.0" x 5.5" (5.1 x 14 cm) Window
MODEL 601T - 4.5" x 4.5" (11.4 x 11.4 cm) Window
ANSI METER CLASS @ 60 Hz
ANSI METER CLASS @ 60 Hz
MODEL
CURRENT
RATIO
B0.1
2.5 VA
B0.2
5 VA
600T-401 400:5
4.8
2.4
600T-501 500:5
4.8
2.4
600T-601 600:5
2.4
2.4
600T-801 800:5
1.2
1.2
600T-102 1000:5
1.2
1.2
600T-122 1200:5
1.2
0.6
600T-152 1500:5
0.6
0.6
600T-162 1600:5
0.6
0.6
600T-202 2000:5
0.6
0.6
MULTI RATIO
CURRENT RATIO
600T-122-801
1200/800:5
B0.5
ACCURACY CLASS
12.5 VA WITH UNITY POWER FACTOR
---2.4
2.4
1.2
1.2
1.2
0.6
± 1% @ 1.5 VA
± 1% @ 2.0 VA
± 1% @ 2.5 VA
± 1% @ 5.0 VA
± 1% @ 7.5 VA
± 1% @ 15.0 VA
± 1% @ 20.0 VA
± 1% @ 20.0 VA
± 1% @ 30.0 VA
MODEL
CURRENT
RATIO
B0.1
2.5 VA
B0.2
5 VA
B0.5
ACCURACY CLASS
12.5 VA WITH UNITY POWER FACTOR
--601T-301 300:5
-4.8
-601T-401 400:5
-4.8 4.8
-601T-501 500:5
2.4 4.8
-601T-601 600:5
1.2 2.4
4.8
601T-801 800:5
1.2 1.2
4.8
601T-102 1000:5
1.2 1.2
2.4
601T-122 1200:5
1.2 1.2
1.2
601T-152 1500:5
1.2 1.2
1.2
601T-162 1600:5
0.6 0.6
1.2
601T-202 2000:5
MULTI RATIO
CURRENT RATIO
601T-122-MR
1200/800/400:5
601T-122-1-MR
1200/800/400:1
± 1% @ 0.5 VA
± 1% @ 1.0 VA
± 1% @ 1.5 VA
± 1% @ 2.0 VA
± 1% @ 2.5 VA
± 1% @ 5.0 VA
± 1% @ 10.0 VA
± 1% @ 15.0 VA
± 1% @ 15.0 VA
± 1% @ 20.0 VA
Example: 601T-102 Split-core current transformer with a current ratio of 1000:5 and a window size of 4.5" x 4.5" (11.4 X 11.4 cm)
111
POWER MONITORING
These transformers are designed to be assembled
around an existing insulated conductor without the need
for dismantling the primary bus or cables. The portion of
the transformers marked “This End Removable” can be
disassembled as shown and then reassembled around
conductors that require current monitoring.
POWER MONITORING
SPLIT-CORE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
MODELS 500T, 501T
DESCRIPTION
Models 500T and 501T Split-Core Current Transformers
provide a low-amperage current output proportional to line current and are for use in energy management control and metering applications. These transformers are ideal for use as
inputs to power monitors, such as the Model PT-9500, and
current transducers, such as Models 4CTV and 4CMA.
These transformers are designed to be assembled around an
existing insulated conductor without the need for dismantling
the primary bus or cables. The portion of the transformers
marked “This End Removable” can be disassembled as shown
and then reassembled around the conductors that require current monitoring.
POWER MONITORING
FEATURES
• 5A secondary
• Split-core construction for easy installation
• Brass stud terminals #8-32 with one flat washer,
lockwasher, and regular nut
CAUTION: Proper safety precautions must be followed
by a trained electrician during installation. It is recommended that the incoming power be de-energized
before installation. The current transformer must have
its secondary terminals short-circuited or the burden
(load) connected before energizing the primary circuit.
For indoor use only. Use on insulated conductor only.
500T
(shown with end removed)
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
0.75 (1.91)
LABEL
0.44
(1.12)
X1
H1
Four
Mounting
Holes
0.31" (0.79)
dia
A1
B2
B1
B3 A1
A2
A3
B1
B2
B3
DIMENSIONS
MODEL
500T
501T
4.1 (10.4) 4.1 (10.4)
6.4 (16.3) 6.4 (16.3)
7.3 (18.5) 7.3 (18.5)
7.1 (18.0) 11.7 (29.7)
10.0 (25.4) 14.5 (36.8)
10.9 (27.7) 15.4 (39.1)
THIS END REMOVABLE
A2
A3
1.63
(4.14)
SPECIFICATIONS
Secondary
Insulation class
Frequency
Weight
Window sizes
500T
501T
Casing
0-5A
600V, 10 kV BIL
50-400 Hz
8 lb (3.6 kg)
Continuous thermal
current rating factor
4.1" x 7.1" (10.4 x 18.0 cm)
4.1" x 11.7" (10.4 x 29.7 cm)
Plastic, UL94V1
Approvals
Termination
1.33 @ 30°C ambient (86°F)
1.0 @ 55°C ambient (131°F)
Brass stud terminal with nut, flat
washer, lockwasher
UL recognized component,
File #E93779; CSA certified,
File #LR89403
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL 500T - 4.1" x 7.1" (10.4 x 18.0 cm) Window
MODEL
500T-301
500T-401
500T-501
500T-601
500T-751
500T-801
500T-102
500T-122
500T-152
500T-162
500T-202
500T-252
500T-302
500T-402
112
CURRENT
RATIO
300:5
400:5
500:5
600:5
750:5
800:5
1000:5
1200:5
1500:5
1600:5
2000:5
2500:5
3000:5
4000:5
ANSI METER CLASS @ 60Hz
B0.5
B0.2
B0.1
12.5 VA
5 VA
2.5 VA
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
4.8
–
–
4.8
–
–
2.4
–
4.8
2.4
–
2.4
1.2
2.4
1.2
1.2
2.4
1.2
1.2
2.4
1.2
0.6
1.2
0.6
0.6
1.2
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.3
ACCURACY CLASS
WITH UNITY
POWER FACTOR
±5% @ 1.5 VA
±3% @ 2.5 VA
±2% @ 2.5 VA
±1% @ 4.0 VA
±1% @ 5.0 VA
±1% @ 5.0 VA
±1% @ 7.5 VA
±1% @ 10.0 VA
±1% @ 12.5 VA
±1% @ 12.5 VA
±1% @ 15.0 VA
±1% @ 25.0 VA
±1% @ 25.0 VA
±1% @ 25.0 VA
MODEL 501T - 4.1" x 11.7" (10.4 x 29.7 cm) Window
MODEL
501T-102
501T-122
501T-152
501T-202
501T-252
501T-302
501T-352
501T-402
CURRENT
RATIO
1000:5
1200:5
1500:5
2000:5
2500:5
3000:5
3500:5
4000:5
ANSI METER CLASS @ 60Hz
B0.5
B0.2
B0.1
12.5 VA
5 VA
2.5 VA
–
4.8
2.4
–
2.4
1.2
2.4
1.2
1.2
2.4
1.2
0.6
1.2
0.6
0.6
1.2
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.3
ACCURACY CLASS
WITH UNITY
POWER FACTOR
±1% @ 7.5 VA
±1% @ 10.0 VA
±1% @ 12.5 VA
±1% @ 15.0 VA
±1% @ 25.0 VA
±1% @ 25.0 VA
±1% @ 25.0 VA
±1% @ 25.0 VA
Example: 500T-102 Split-core current transformer
with a current ratio of 1000:5 and a window
size of 4.1" x 7.1" (10.4 x 18.0 cm)
POWER MONITORING
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS WITH VOLTAGE OUTPUT
SCT SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The SCT Series of current transformers provides a lowvoltage (0-0.333V) output proportional to line current
and is used in conjunction with the PowerTrak PT-9300
to monitor electrical power systems. Often referred to as
“Safe CTs,” the mV output of these current transformers
eliminates the need for shorting switches, and their split
core design makes them easy to install.
SCT-0750
FEATURES
• Millivolt output
(0-0.333V)
• Split-core design
• Low cost
• No need for
shorting switches
SCT-2000
SCT-1250
Primary
5-1500A
(see Ordering Information below)
0-0.333 VAC, 0% to 100% rated current
±1%, 10% to 130% rated current
60 Hz
Secondary
Accuracy
Frequency
Insulation
Connections
Weight
Approvals
DIMENSIONS
600V
8' (2.44m) twisted pair leads, 22 AWG
1 lb (0.45 kg) max
UL-recognized component,
File #E96927
WIRING
in
(cm)
SCT
L1 (AØ)
L
E
L2 (BØ)
I
N
SCT side marked
X2
X1
Thi s side toward source” SCT
(black) (white)
should face line side.
SCT
L3 (CØ)
E Neutral (if wye system)
D
C
Window
{
A
B
C
D
E
SCT-0750
2.00 (5.1)
2.10 (5.3)
0.61 (1.5)
0.75 (1.9)
0.75 (1.9)
X2
X1
(white)
A
X1
D
(black) (white)
Neutral
(If Wye
System)
Recommended wiring
is a twisted, shielded
pair for each CT to
avoid noise pick-up.
Ground shield wire
at PT-9300 ground
lug only.
B
A
DIMENSIONS
MODEL
SCT-1250
3.25 (8.25)
3.35 (8.51)
1.00 (2.54)
1.25 (3.18)
1.25 (3.18)
X2
(black)
L
O
CTC
X2 X1
SCT-2000
4.75 (12.07)
5.00 (12.70)
1.20 (3.05)
2.00 (5.08)
2.00 (5.08)
CTB
X2 X1
L3
L2
L1
CTA
X2 X1
CT Inputs
Terminal Block
NEUTRAL L3
L2
L1
System Voltage
Connections
PowerTrak PT-9300 Power Monitor
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
DESCRIPTION
SCT-0750-005
SCT-0750-050
SCT-1250-100
SCT-1250-200
SCT-1250-300
SCT-1250-400
SCT-2000-600
SCT-2000-800
SCT-2000-1000
SCT-2000-1200
SCT-2000-1500
Split-core current transformer, 5A:0.333 V
Split-core current transformer, 50A:0.333 V
Split-core current transformer, 100A:0.333 V
Split-core current transformer, 200A:0.333 V
Split-core current transformer, 300A:0.333 V
Split-core current transformer, 400A:0.333 V
Split-core current transformer, 600A:0.333 V
Split-core current transformer, 800A:0.333 V
Split-core current transformer, 1000A:0.333 V
Split-core current transformer, 1200A:0.333 V
Split-core current transformer, 1500A:0.333 V
PT-9300
RELATED PRODUCTS
Power monitor
113
POWER MONITORING
SPECIFICATIONS
POWER MONITORING
CURRENT-OPERATED SWITCHES AND TRANSDUCERS
RIBXK, RIBXG, RIBXK420 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The RIBXK, RIBXG, and RIBXK420 Series include both current-operated switches and current transducers. Solid-core
and split-core current-operated switch models have a solidstate switch that operates when the current level sensed by
the internal current transformer exceeds a fixed or adjustable
setpoint. Solid-core current transducer models output a 4-20
mA signal proportional to the line current being monitored.
RIBXKF
RIBXKA
FEATURES
• Solid- and split-core switch models have fixed
(Go/No go) or adjustable trip points
• Solid-wire transducer models have a 4-20 mA output
• Low cost
• Ratcheting cam clamp to secure switch to wire
• Removable mounting tab
RIBXK420
POWER MONITORING
SPECIFICATIONS
RIBXK, RIBXG SERIES
Monitored AC current
RIBXKF, RIBXKTF
RIBXKA, RIBXKTA
RIBXGF, RIBXGTF
RIBXGA, RIBXGTA
Switch trip point
RIBXKF, RIBXKTF
RIBXKA, RIBXKTA
RIBXGF, RIBXGTF
RIBXGFL, RIBXGTFL
RIBXGA, RIBXGTA
Switch type
Switch rating
Off-state leakage
On-state voltage drop
RIBXK420 SERIES
Output
Accuracy
Linearity
Power
Max loop resistance
Input range
General
Connections
Temp
Max sense voltage
Weight
Approvals
0.25-150A
0.5-150A
0.35-150A
0.75-150A
0.25A, fixed
0.5-150A, adjustable
0.35A, fixed
0.75A, fixed
0.75-150A, adjustable
Solid state, normally open
30 VAC/VDC, 0.4A max
<30 µA @ 30 VAC/VDC
<0.3 VAC/VDC @ 0.1A,
<1.6 VAC/VDC @ 0.4A
4-20 mA, 30 mA max
±5% F.S.
±1% F.S.
24 VDC
500 @ 24 VDC
20, 50, or 100A
16" (40.6 cm), 18 AWG,
600V wires or terminals for
14-22 AWG
-30° to 140°F (-34.4° to 60°C)
600 VAC
0.3 lb (0.13 kg)
UL listed, UL916, UL864
RIBXGTF
RIBXKTF
RIBXKTA
DIMENSIONS/WIRING
in
(cm)
1.46
(3.7)
Wire Clamp
Optional
Trip
Adjust
0.50
(1.27)
dia.
1.86
(4.73)
Ratcheting
Cam
Clamp
Optional
LEDs
2.00
(5.1)
Load Wire Opening
0.52 x 0.52 (1.3 x 1.3)
2.52 (6.4)
1.008
(2.56)
1.508
(3.83)
Removable
Mounting Tab
24 VDC
Power Supply
+
–
(red)
(black)
RIBXK420
BAS Input
or Other
4-20 mA Load
1.10
(2.8)
Removable
Mounting Tab
Normally open
Wh/Yel
solid-state
switch is
not polarity
sensitive
Load
Load
Wire
Wire
Models with
Screw Terminals
RIBXK, RIBXG
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
RIBXKF
RIBXKTF
RIBXKA
RIBXKTA
RIBXK420-20
RIBXK420-50
RIBXK420-100
RIBXGF
RIBXGTF
RIBXGFL
RIBXGTFL
RIBXGA
RIBXGTA
114
US
LISTED
DESCRIPTION
Solid-core current-operated switch, wire leads, fixed trip
Solid-core current-operated switch, terminals, fixed trip
Solid-core current-operated switch, wire leads, adjustable trip
Solid-core current-operated switch, terminals, adjustable trip
Solid-core current transducer, 0-20A
Solid-core current transducer, 0-50A
Solid-core current transducer, 0-100A
Split-core current-operated switch, fixed 0.35A trip, wire leads
Split-core current-operated switch, fixed 0.35A trip, terminal strip
Split-core current-operated switch, fixed 0.75A trip, wire leads, LEDs
Split-core current-operated switch, fixed 0.75A trip, terminal strip, LEDs
Split-core current-operated switch, adjustable trip, wire leads, LEDs
Split-core current-operated switch, adjustable trip, terminal strip, LEDs
1.75
(4.4)
Wh/Yel
Wh/Yel
Wh/Yel
Models with
Wire Leads
POWER MONITORING
CURRENT-OPERATED SWITCHES
MODELS CS1A, SCS1.5A, CS1150A, SCS1150A
DESCRIPTION
SCS1150A
SCS1.5A
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
Models with fixed or adjustable trip point
Switch AC or DC circuits
Smart LED option
Applicable for VFD applications down to 6 Hz
Powered by monitored line
CS1150A
CS1A
C
R
US
• Available in solid-core models or split-core
models that clamp easily around cables
• Five-year warranty
• UL listed, CE certified
SPECIFICATIONS
Switch rating
Switch type
Off-state leakage
Polarity
Monitored AC current*
CS1A
SCS1.5A
CS1150A
SCS1150A, SC250-NC
Trip point
CS1A
SCS1.5A
CS1150A
SCS1150A, SC250-NC
Monitored frequency
1-135 VAC/VDC, 0.3A
(SC250-NC model 0.2A)
Normally open, solid state
(SC250-NC is normally
closed)
Zero
Not polarity sensitive,
switch AC or DC
Hysteresis
Operating temp
Case
0.75-250A (500A for 6 sec)
1.25-250A (500A for 6 sec)
1-150A (400A for 6 sec)
1.75-150A (400A for 6 sec)
Dimensions
CS1A, CS1150A
Unit
Fixed, 0.75A
Fixed, 1.25A
15-turn pot, adjustable
1-150A
4-turn pot, adjustable
1.75-150A
6-100 Hz
* For loads with higher FLAs and for larger diameter
conductors, use an external current transformer.
Insulation class
Weight
Approvals
5% of setpoint
-58° to 149°F (-50° to 65°C)
ABS (meets UL flammability
rating 94V-0)
600V
0.25 lb (0.11 kg)
UL listed, File #E170092;
CE certified
2.2"H x 2.4"W x 0.9"D
(5.6 x 6.1 x 2.3 cm)
Mounting base
3.5"L (8.9 cm) with 3.0" (7.6 cm)
mounting centers
Through-hole
0.75" (1.9 cm) dia, for up to 250
MCM cable
SCS1.5A, SCS1150A, SC250-NC
Unit
2.5"H x 2.6"W x 1.15"D
(6.4 x 6.6 x 2.9 cm)
Mounting base
3.5"L (8.9 cm) with 3" (7.6 cm)
mounting centers
Through-hole
0.85" (2.2 cm) square aperture,
for up to 350 MCM cable
115
POWER MONITORING
The Kele Models CS1A, SCS1.5A, CS1150A, and
SCS1150A are solid-state switches that operate when
the AC current level sensed by the internal current
transformer exceeds a fixed or adjustable trip point.
Internal circuits are totally powered by induction from
the conductor being monitored. There is zero off-state
leakage current in the solid-state relay output that can
switch AC or DC circuits. The smart LED indication
option eliminates the need for meters when setting the
adjustable trip point of the current switch. Solid-core and
split-core models are available
POWER MONITORING
CURRENT-OPERATED SWITCHES
MODELS CS1A, SCS1.5A, CS1150A, SCS1150A
WIRING
1-135V
VAC/VDC max
0.3A
Digital
Input
Relay, Lamp,
Small Contactor,
or Similar AC
or DC Load
Terminals not
polarity
sensitive
Bldg Automation
System, Energy
Mgmt System,
DDC, SCADA, etc.
Terminals not
polarity
sensitive
Monitored Conductor
Monitored Conductor
INSTALLATION / ADJUSTMENT
POWER MONITORING
Sensors can be mounted in any position or hung directly on wires. For larger mounting screws, drill out mounting holes. Use up
to #14 AWG copper wire to terminals. Tighten to 7 in-lb torque.
Adjustment for CS1150A and SCS1150A
1. With the sensor wired as shown, use a voltmeter across the sensor contacts. A full voltage across the contact confirms the
switch is open. Turn on the motor or other load being monitored.
2. The sensor is shipped with the multiturn adjustment set to the most sensitive position (CW). If the sensor now operates, turn
the adjustment counter-clockwise (CCW) until the operation reverses. The meter will indicate this action.
3. Now, turn the adjustment CW until the sensor just operates its controlled circuit. It is desirable to turn the adjustment slightly
beyond this threshold point to provide a margin for normal current variations.
4. The smart LED eliminates the need for a voltmeter. The LED will switch from rapid to slow flashing when going below the trip
point. (Option –LED).
Smart LED Indicator (Option–LED)
The LED indicates three states:
1. Rapid Flashing : Current has tripped the switch.
2. Slow Flashing: Current is present but is below the trip point.
3. No Flashing: Current is either OFF or below the bottom of the range.
The smart LED indicator has zero off-state leakage.
Application Notes
1. Make sure that switched current (connected to terminals) is limited to 0.3A continuous. Switched voltage should be no higher
than 135 VAC/VDC.
2. Important! Monitoring excessive current and damage the sensor. Make sure monitored currents do not exceed maximum
ratings.
3. For proper operation of the split core model, make certain that the mating surfaces of the magnetic core are clean.
Troubleshooting
Problem
1. Sensor does not switch at all,
regardless of current level.
2. Adjustment has no stops.
Keeps turning.
Probable Causes and Corrections
Adjustment pot is probably backed off completely, which disables the sensor.
See Installation/Adjustment immediately above for instructions.
Verify that mating surfaces of the split core are free of foreign particles.
The multiturn adjustment pot has a slip-clutch that prevents damage at either end of its
rotation. To know where the adjustment is, turn the pot 15 turns CW (4 turns for
SCS1150A); this sets it to the most sensitive position.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
CS1A
SCS1.5A
CS1150A
SCS1150A
CS1150A–LED
SCS1150A–LED
SC250–NC
116
DESCRIPTION
Solid-core current switch, fixed 0.75A trip, normally open
Split-core current switch, fixed 1.25A trip, normally open
Solid-core current switch, adjustable, normally open
Split-core current switch, adjustable, normally open
Solid-core current switch, adjustable, normally open with smart LED
Split-core current switch, adjustable, normally open with smart LED
Split-core current switch, adjustable, normally closed with smart LED
POWER MONITORING
CURRENT SWITCH AND RELAY
RIBX SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Relay in a Box RIBX Series provides a unique
and cost-effective solution to on/off motor control and
current sensing status indication. Combined in a single, convenient junction box with high and low voltage
separation are a control relay and a current sensing
status switch. A three-position closed/open/auto switch
is available to override the output of the relay. This versatile product allows both control and status sensing of
electrical loads by a BAS, all in a self-contained, easyto-install housing.
RIBX Solid-Core
Remote Current
Sensing
RIBX Internal
Current Sensing
• Cost-effective current sensing with a control
relay
• Self-contained housing with high and low
voltage separation
• LED indication of relay and current sensor trip
• Optional relay contact override switch
• Plenum-rated housing
• UL and ULC listed for UL 916 Energy
Management and UL 864 Fire
RIBX Split-Core
Remote Current
Sensing
C
R
US
APPLICATION
Internal Current Sensing (for single-phase loads)
Models with internal current sensing are great for direct
control and current sensing of exhaust fans, pumps, and
other single phase electrical loads up to 20A. The control
relay contacts of these models wire directly in series with
single-phase motors using the wires that exit the housing
through the 1/2" conduit hub. The current of the load is
sensed within the housing. Low-voltage wiring from the
controller for the control relay coil and status switch enter
the separate Class 2 wiring compartment in the housing
through star bushings or conduit and are connected to
screw terminals.
Remote Current Sensing (for loads with motor starters)
Models with remote current sensing are great for control
and status sensing of electrical loads that require a motor
starter. The control relay contacts of these models are
wired in series with the motor starter coil using the two
wires that exit the housing through the 1/2'' conduit hub.
Currents up to 150A are sensed externally with a current
sensing ring connected to the two gray wires that also exit
through the 1/2'' conduit hub. Low-voltage wiring from the
controller for the control relay coil and status switch enter
the separate Class 2 wiring compartment in the housing
through star bushings or conduit and are connected to
screw terminals.
BAS Controller
Status In
Control Out
Class 2
Optional Override Switch
Closed/Open/Auto
Single Phase
Exhaust Fan
On/Off
RIBX
Current Sensor
and Control Relay
with Override Switch
Current is sensed internally.
120-277 VAC
10 or 20A
Internal Current Sensing
Internal Current Sensing
BAS Controller
Status In
Control Out
Class 2
On/Off
Current Sensor
and Control Relay
with Override Switch
Optional Override Switch
Closed/Open/Auto
RIBX
Relay Switches Motor
Starter Coil
Three-Phase
Power
Toroid has no open
circuit voltage eliminating
electrical shock hazard.
Contactor
Motor
Starter
Remote
Current
Sensing
Remote
Current
Sensing
Three-Phase
Motor
117
POWER MONITORING
FEATURES
POWER MONITORING
CURRENT SWITCH AND RELAY
RIBX SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
Enclosure size
POWER MONITORING
Operating temp
Humidity
Life rating (all relays)
Status indication
LED#1 ON
LED#2 ON
Status switch
Status switch
Off-state leakage
On-state voltage drop
4"H x 4"W x 1.8"D with 1/2" NPT
(10.2 x 10.2 x 4.6 cm), NEMA 1
-30° to 140°F (-34° to 60°C)
5% to 95% noncondensing
10 million cycles min mechanical
Relay activated
Current trip point exceeded
30 VAC/VDC @ 0.4A max
<30 micro-amps @ 30 VAC/VDC
<0.3 VAC/VDC @ 0.1A
<1.6 VAC/VDC @ 0.4A
Remote sensor dimensions
Solid-core
1.863'' x 1.460'', 0.5'' inside dia
(4.73 x 3.71 cm, 1.27 cm)
Split-core
outside: 2.52'' x 2.0'' (6.4 x 5.08 cm)
inside: 0.52'' x 0.52'' (1.32 x 1.32 cm)
Relay coil frequency
50/60 Hz
Relay coil pull-in/drop-out
10-30 VAC/VDC
Pull-in
9 VAC, 10 VDC
Drop-out
2.1 VAC, 2.8 VDC
24 VAC/VDC
Pull-in
18 VAC, 22 VDC
Drop-out
3 VAC, 3.8 VDC
Wire length
16" (40.6 cm)
Weight
Approx 1 lb (0.45 kg)
Approvals
UL and ULC listed: UL 916 Energy
Management, UL 864 Fire, UL listed
Canada
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
RIBXLCA
RIBXLCF
RIBXLCJA
RIBXLCJF
RIBXLCRA
RIBXLCRF
RIBXLSA
RIBXLSF
RIBXLSJA
RIBXLSJF
RIBXLSRA
RIBXLSRF
CURRENT CURRENT SENSING OVER
SENSING RANGE/THRESHOLD SW
Internal
Split-core
Solid-core
Internal
Split-core
Solid-core
RIBX24BA
0.5-10A / Adjustable
0.5-10A / Fixed, 0.5A
–
3-150A / Adjustable
3-150A / Fixed, 3A
1.25-150A / Adjustable
–
1.25-150A / Fixed, 1.25A
0.5-10A / Adjustable
0.5-10A / Fixed, 0.5A
3-150A / Adjustable
3-150A / Fixed, 3A
1.25-150A / Adjustable
Yes
1.25-150A / Fixed, 1.25A
0.5-20A / Adjustable
–
Internal
0.5-20A / Fixed, 0.5A
RIBX24BF
0.5-20A / Adjustable
RIBX24SBA
Internal
Yes
10A resistive
480 VA Pilot Duty
480 VA Ballast
600W Tungsten
240W Tungsten
1/3 hp for N.O.
1/6 hp for N.C.
1/4 hp for N.O.
1/8 hp for N.C.
120/240/277 VAC - 28 VDC
240/277 VAC
277 VAC
120 VAC N.O
120 VAC N.C.
120/240 VAC
120/240 VAC
277 VAC
277 VAC
10A resistive
480 VA Pilot Duty
480 VA Ballast
600W Tungsten
240W Tungsten
1/3 hp for N.O.
1/6 hp for N.C.
1/4 hp for N.O.
1/8 hp for N.C.
277 VAC
277 VAC
277 VAC
120 VAC N.O
120 VAC N.C.
120/240 VAC
120/240 VAC
277 VAC
277 VAC
20A resistive
1110 VA Pilot Duty
770 VA Pilot Duty
20A Ballast
10A Ballast
10A Tungsten
240W Tungsten
2 hp
1 hp
277 VAC
277 VAC
120 VAC
277 VAC N.O.
277 VAC N.C.
120 VAC N.O.
120 VAC N.C.
277 VAC
120 VAC
0.5-20A / Fixed, 0.5A
RIBX24SBF
0.5-20A / Adjustable
RIBX243PA
RELAY CONTACT
WIRING
(blue)
NC
(yellow)
COM
(orange)
NO
1- SPST Relay
(orange)
(orange)
Closed
Open
Auto
1
–
0.5-20A / Fixed, 0.5A
20A resistive
20A resistive
15A resistive
1 hp
2 hp
3 hp
5 hp
7.5 hp
20A Ballast
300 VAC
28 VDC
600 VAC
120 VAC, 1 Ph
240-277 VAC, 1 Ph
480-600 VAC, 1 Ph
240 VAC, 3 Ph
480 VAC, 3 Ph
277-480 VAC
Note:
0.5-30A / Fixed, 0.5A
Internal
0.5-30A / Adjustable
Internal
Solid-core 1.25-150A / Fixed, 1.25A
Solid-core 1.25-150A / Adjustable
3-150A / Fixed, 3A
Split-core
3-150A / Adjustable
Split-core
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Current switch only
Current switch only
Current switch only
Current switch only
Current switch only
Current switch only
30 mA @ 10 VAC
32 mA @ 12 VAC
42 mA @ 24 VAC
50 mA @ 30 VAC
12 mA @ 10 VDC
14 mA @ 12 VDC
16 mA @ 24 VDC
18 mA @ 30 VDC
Relay Coil Wiring
10-30 VAC/VDC
Common
}
Current Switch Wiring
Current
Sensor Status
}
Solid- and Split-Core Models
(gray)
Current (gray)
Sensor
1- SPDT Relay
NC
(blue)
(yellow)
(orange)
COM
NO
1- SPST Relay
(orange)
(orange)
Closed
Open
Auto
(blue)
NO
(blue)
(yellow)
(orange)
Relay
Input Current
75 mA @ 24 VAC
32 mA @ 24 VDC
Relay Coil Wiring
24 VAC/VDC
Common
}
Current Switch Output
Current
Sensor Status
}
Relay Input Current
190 mA @ 24 VAC 140 mA @ 30 VDC
Relay Coil Wiring
NO
24 VAC/VDC
Common
NO
Current Switch Output
(yellow)
(orange)
2
RIBXF
RIBXA
RIBXRF
RIBXRA
RIBXJF
RIBXJA
RELAY COIL AND
CURRENT SWITCH
Relay
Input Current
1- SPDT
Relay
1
Internal
RIBX243PF
RELAY CONTACT
RATINGS
Current Sensor Wiring
Internal Models
(purple)
Current
(purple)
Sensor
Solid- and split-core models
(gray)
Current (gray)
Sensor
}
Current
Sensor Status
}
Current Switch Wiring
Current
Sensor Status
}
1 Internal yellow jumper determines if SPST contacts are N.O. or N.C. 2 Can be ordered N.C. by adding -NC after model number.
118
POWER MONITORING
CURRENT TRANSDUCER AND RELAY
RIBX-V SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Relay in a Box RIBX-V Series provides a unique
and cost-effective solution to on/off motor control
and analog current sensing. Combined in a single,
convenient junction box with high- and low-voltage
separation are a control relay and a current sensing
transducer that outputs 0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC. A threeposition closed/open/auto switch is available to override
the output of the relay. This versatile product allows
both control and analog current sensing of electrical
loads by a BAS, all in a self-contained, easy-to-install
housing.
• Cost-effective analog current sensing with a
control relay
• Self-contained housing with high- and lowvoltage separation
• LED indication of relay
• Optional relay contact override switch
• Plenum-rated housing
• UL and ULC listed for UL 916 Energy
Management and UL 864 Fire
RIBX-V
C
R
US
APPLICATION
Internal Current Sensing
The RIBX-V Series with internal current sensing is great for direct control and analog current sensing of exhaust
fans, pumps, and other single-phase electrical loads up to 20A. The control relay contacts of these models wire
directly in series with single-phase motors using the wires that exit the housing through the 1/2" conduit hub. The current of the load is sensed within the housing. Low-voltage wiring from the controller for the control relay coil and analog current signal enter the separate Class 2 wiring compartment in the housing through star bushings or conduit and
are connected to screw terminals.
BAS Contoller
Analog In
0-5 or 0-10 VDC
Class 2
Control Out
Optional Override Switch
Closed/Open/Auto
Single Phase
Exhaust Fan
On/Off
RIBX-V
Current is sensed internally.
120-277 VAC
5, 10, 20, or 30A
Analog Current Sensor
and Control Relay
with Override Switch
Internal Current Sensing
119
POWER MONITORING
FEATURES
POWER MONITORING
CURRENT TRANSDUCER AND RELAY
RIBX-V SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
4"H x 4"W x 1.8"D with 1/2" NPT
(10.2 x 10.2 x 4.6 cm), NEMA 1
Operating temp
-30° to 140°F (-34° to 60°C)
Humidity
5% to 95% noncondensing
Life rating (all relays) 10 million cycles min
mechanical
Analog output
0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC, proportional to current sensing range
Output load
30 kΩ min
Accuracy
±1% FS
Relay coil frequency 50/60 Hz
Status indication
LED on = relay activated
POWER MONITORING
Enclosure size
Relay coil pull-in/drop-out
10-30 VAC/VDC
Pull-in
9 VAC, 10 VDC
Drop-out
2.1 VAC, 2.8 VDC
24 VAC/VDC
Pull-in
18 VAC, 22 VDC
Drop-out
3 VAC, 3.8 VDC
Wire length
16" (40.6 cm)
Weight
Approx 1 lb (0.45 kg)
Approvals
UL listed: UL 916 Energy
Management, UL 864 Fire,
UL and ULC listed Canada
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
CURRENT CURRENT SENSING OVER
SENSING
RANGE (amps)
SW
–
RIBXLCEV
Internal
0-5
RIBXLSEV
Yes
RIBXLCV
–
Internal
0-10
Yes
RIBXLSV
–
RIBX24BV
Internal
0-20
Yes
RIBX24SBV
RELAY CONTACT
RATINGS
5A resistive
345 VA pilot duty
211 VA pilot duty
268 VA pilot duty
175 VA pilot duty
1/3 hp for N.O.
1/6 hp for N.C.
1/4 hp for N.O.
1/8 hp for N.C.
10A resistive
480 VA pilot duty
480 VA ballast
600W tungsten
240W tungsten
1/3 hp for N.O.
1/6 hp for N.C.
1/4 hp for N.O.
1/8 hp for N.C.
RELAY CONTACT
WIRING
277 VAC
120/240 VAC N.O.
120/240 VAC N.C.
277 VAC N.O.
277 VAC N.C.
120/240 VAC
120/240 VAC
277 VAC
277 VAC
RIBXLCEV, RIBXLCV
1- SPDT Relay
(blue)
NC
(yellow)
COM
(orange)
NO
120/240/277 VAC - 28 VDC
240/277 VAC
RIBXLSEV, RIBXLSV
277 VAC
1- SPST Relay
120 VAC N.O
(orange)*
Closed
120 VAC N.C.
(orange)*
Open
120/240 VAC
Auto
120/240 VAC
1
277 VAC
277 VAC
*Gray wire on RIBXLSEV
1- SPDT Relay
20A resistive
1110 VA pilot duty
240W tungsten N.C.
770 VA pilot duty
1 hp
2 hp
20A ballast N.O.
10A ballast N.C.
10A tungsten N.O.
277 VAC
277 VAC
120 VAC
120 VAC
120 VAC
277 VAC
277 VAC
277 VAC
120 VAC
20A resistive
20A resistive
15A resistive
1 hp
2 hp
3 hp
5 hp
7.5 hp
20A ballast
300 VAC
28 VDC
600 VAC
120 VAC, 1 Ph
240-277 VAC, 1 Ph
480-600 VAC, 1 Ph
240 VAC, 3 Ph
480 VAC, 3 Ph
277-480 VAC
(blue)
NC
(yellow)
COM
(orange)
NO
RIBXV
Internal
Internal
0-20
0-30
–
–
1
Current transducer only, 0-30A
(blue)
Closed
Open
Auto
1 Internal yellow jumper determines if SPST contacts are N.O. or N.C.
120
NO
(yellow)
(yellow)
NO
(orange)
(orange)
NO
Current Sensor
Wiring
(purple)
(purple)
12 mA @ 10 VDC
14 mA @ 12 VDC
16 mA @ 24 VDC
18 mA @ 30 VDC
Relay Coil Wiring
10-30 VAC/VDC
Common
}
Analog Out Wiring
0-10 VDC
0-5 VDC
Common
}
Relay Input Current
75 mA @ 24 VAC, 32 mA @ 24 VDC
Relay Coil Wiring
24 VAC/VDC
Common
}
Analog Out Wiring
0-10 VDC
0-5 VDC
Common
}
Relay Input Current
190 mA @ 24 VAC
Relay Coil Wiring
24 VAC/VDC
Common
}
Analog Out Wiring
0-10 VDC
Common
2
Current
Sensor
Note:
Relay Input Current
30 mA @ 10 VAC
32 mA @ 12 VAC
42 mA @ 24 VAC
50 mA @ 30 VAC
1- SPST Relay
(orange)
(orange)
(blue)
RIBX243PV
RELAY COIL AND
ANALOG OUTPUT
}
Analog Out Wiring
0-10 VDC
0-5 VDC
Common
}
2 Order N.C. by adding -NC after model number.
POWER MONITORING
CURRENT TRANSDUCER WITH VOLTAGE OUTPUT
MODEL 4CTV
DESCRIPTION
The Model 4CTV is a unique AC amperage to DC voltage transducer that can be used to directly monitor loads
of up to 20A. For loads of 20-5000A, an external current
transformer can be used with the Model 4CTV.
Developed for building automation and energy management, the Model 4CTV converts an AC current to a DC
voltage that can be monitored by any processor that will
accept analog DC voltages.
FEATURES
4CTV
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
4 Slots
0.25 x 0.31
(0.63 x 0.78)
POWER MONITORING
• No external AC or DC power supply required
• Rugged design to withstand momentary
AC inrushes of 120A (6x rating)
• Easy to install, only two connections
• 50/60 Hz operation
APPLICATIONS
• AC current input to DC voltage output
• Monitoring of AC current of motors, lighting,
heating, industrial processes, etc.
• Monitoring of chiller loads using existing
current transformers
2.00
(5.08)
1.40
(3.56)
2.36
(5.99)
1.69
(4.29)
2.69
(6.83)
2.14
(5.44)
TYPICAL CHARACTERISTICS
#10 - 32 Brass Screws
Output (VDC)
5
4
2.75
(6.98)
3
1.41
(3.58)
2
0.93 dia
(2.36)
1
0.15
(0.38)
0
25
50
75 100
% of Rated Primary Current
Note: The Model 4CTV senses the average value
of current. The output is then calibrated for
the equivalent rms value. Calibration is done
based on a true sine wave. A nonsinusoidal
waveform as a result of harmonic distortion
may affect stated accuracy.
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy
Ripple
Insulation class
Power supply
Input
Output
Min load resistance
Operating temp
Weight
±3%
±2%
600V
None required
0-20A, up to 5000A with a CT
0-5 VDC
30 k1
-22° to 140°F (-30° to 60°C)
8 oz (0.23 kg)
121
POWER MONITORING
CURRENT TRANSDUCER WITH VOLTAGE OUTPUT
MODEL 4CTV
WIRING
APPLICATION #1. Monitoring Loads Under 20A
IL
Formula:
IL (load amps) =
20
x
turns
( V5o )
Vo= VDC from 4CTV
turns= number of times conductor
passes through 4CTV
4CTV
Note: If IL is always below 10A, multiple passes of the
conductor will improve scaling. The sum of these
amperages must remain below 20A.
APPLICATION #2. Monitoring Loads Over 20A with a Current Transformer
IL
Current
Formula:
Transformer
IL (load amps) = CT primary x
rating
0-
POWER MONITORING
Conductor
5
AM
( V5o )
Vo= VDC from 4CTV
PS
Conductor
Note: If the CT is oversized, multiple conductor passes or
more secondary turns through the 4CTV will improve
scaling. The CT output should not exceed 5A or the
CT secondary turns should not total more than 20A.
4CTV
4 turns for CTs with 5A secondaries
20 turns for CTs with 1A secondaries
APPLICATION #3. Monitoring and Summing Multiple Loads
Formula: For loads under 20 amps
Vo
ILT (load amps) = 20 x N x
turns
5xN
Formula: For loads over 20 amps
Vo
ILT (load amps) =CT primary x
5
xN
rating total
(
)
(
Vo= VDC from 4CTVs
turns = number of times conductor passes
through 4CTV
N = number of loads monitored
4CT
V
4CTV
4CTV
LOAD #1
IL1
4CTV
LOAD #2
IL2
LOAD #3
IL3
Note: If the loads are from secondaries of current transformers,
the CT ratios and the turns on the 4CTVs must all be the same.
If CTs are used, the CT primary amps would be the total for
all CTs used.
ORDERING INFORMATION
AL/RL
603/603D
122
)
MODEL
DESCRIPTION
4CTV
Current transducer, 0-5 VDC voltage output
RELATED PRODUCTS
Solid-core CTs
500T/501T
Split-core CTs
600T/601T
Split-core CTs
Split-core CTs
POWER MONITORING
CURRENT TRANSDUCER WITH CURRENT OUTPUT
MODEL 4CMA
DESCRIPTION
The Model 4CMA is a unique AC amperage-to-DC current transducer that can be used to directly monitor
loads of up to 20A. For loads of 20-5000A, an external
current transformer can be used with the Model 4CMA.
Developed for building automation and energy management, the Model 4CMA converts AC amperage to a 4-20
mA current that can be monitored by any processor that
will accept an analog current signal.
FEATURES
APPLICATION
• AC amperage input to mA output
• Monitoring of AC current of motors, lighting,
heating, industrial processes, etc.
• Monitoring chiller loads using existing current
transformers
4CMA
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
POWER MONITORING
• Rugged design to withstand momentary AC
inrushes of 120A (6x rating)
• Reverse polarity protection
• Easy to install, only two connections
• 50/60 Hz operation
4 Slots
0.25 x 0.31
(0.63 x 0.78)
2.00
(5.08)
1.40
(3.56)
2.36
(5.99)
1.69
(4.29)
TYPICAL CHARACTERISTICS
2.69
(6.83)
24
2.14
(5.44)
#10 - 32 Brass Screws
Output (mA DC)
20
16
2.75
(6.98)
12
1.41
(3.58)
8
0.93 dia
(2.36)
4
0
25
50
75
100
125
% of Rated Primary Current
Note: The Model 4CMA senses the average value
of current. The output is then calibrated for
the equivalent rms value. Calibration is done
based on a true sine wave. A nonsinusoidal
waveform as a result of harmonic distortion
may affect stated accuracy.
0.15
(0.38)
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy
Ripple
Insulation class
Power supply
Input
Output
Max output
Max loop resistance
Operating temp
Weight
Approvals
±0.5% (24 VDC @ 25°C)
±1% or less
600V
24 VDC ±10%
0-20A, up to 5000A with a CT
4-20 mA
30 mA
6001
-22° to 140°F (-30° to 60°C)
8 oz (0.23 kg)
UL recognized component,
File #E155343
123
POWER MONITORING
CURRENT TRANSDUCER WITH CURRENT OUTPUT
MODEL 4CMA
WIRING
APPLICATION #1. Monitoring Loads Under 20A
Formula:
Power
Supply
24 VDC ± 10%
IL
IL (load amps) =
Load
600Ω
Max
IO (4-20 mA)
( Io16- 4 )
Io= mA DC from 4CMA
turns= number of times conductor
passes through 4CMA
Note: If IL is always below 10A, multiple passes of the conductor will
improve scaling. The sum of these amperages must remain below 20A.
4CMA
Conductor
20
x
turns
APPLICATION #2. Monitoring Loads Over 20A with a Current Transformer
IL
POWER MONITORING
Current
Transformer
0-
Power
Supply
24 VDC ± 10%
5A
Formula:
Current
Output
600Ω
Max
IO (4-20 mA)
Conductor
( Io16- 4 )
4CMA
Note: If the CT is oversized, multiple conductor passes or more secondary
turns through the 4CMA will improve scaling. The CT output should not
exceed 5A, or the CT secondary turns should not total more than 20A.
4 turns for CTs with 5 amp secondaries
20 turns for CTs with 1 amp secondaries
APPLICATION #3. Monitoring and Summing Multiple Loads
Power
Supply
24 VDC ± 10%
Current
Output
4-20 mA
IO
Universal Math
Module
4CMA
4CMA
Formula:
For loads under 20 amps
ILT (load amps) = 20 x N x
turns
SIG OUT
COM
24 PWR
IN 1
IN 2
IN 3
UMM
4CMA
IL (load amps) = CT primary x
rating
Io= mA DC from 4CMA
Formula:
( Io16- 4 )
For loads over 20 amps
CT Primary
ILT (load amps) = rating total x
( Io16- 4 )
N= number of loads monitored
turns = number of times conductor passes
through 4CMA
LOAD #1
IL1
LOAD #2
IL2
LOAD #3
IL3
ILT = IL1 + IL2 + IL3
Io= mA from UMM
Note: If the loads are from secondaries of current transformers,
the CT ratios and the turns on the 4CMAs must all be the same.
If CTs are used, the CT primary amps would be the total for
all CTs used.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
4CMA
AL/RL
603/603D
UMM
124
DESCRIPTION
Current transducer, 4-20 mA current output
RELATED PRODUCTS
Solid-core CTs
500T/501T
Split-core CTs
600T/601T
Universal math module
Split-core CTs
Split-core CTs
POWER MONITORING
AC CURRENT TRANSDUCERS WITH VOLTAGE OUTPUT
SENTRY 100 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Sentry 100 Series AC Current Transducers with
Voltage Output can be used to directly monitor up to
200A and output a 0-5 or 0-10 VDC signal. The 100
Series is available in a split-core design that allows for
easy installation of the transducer on existing wiring or
in a lower-cost solid-core version.
FEATURES
SPECIFICATIONS
MAX MAX FOR MAX FOR
MODEL
RANGE OUTPUT JUMPER CONT 6 SEC
1 SEC
(amps)
(amps)
100-1L
0-10
None
80
125
250
SC100-1L
0-20
0-5 VDC
Mid
110
150
300
0-50
High
175
215
400
100-2L
SC100-2L
0-100
0-150
0-200
100-3L
SC100-3L
100-4L
SC100-4L
0-5 VDC
None
Mid
High
200
300
400
300
450
500
600
800
1000
0-10
0-20
0-50
0-10 VDC
None
Mid
High
80
110
175
125
150
215
250
300
400
0-100
0-150
0-200
0-10 VDC
None
Mid
High
200
300
400
300
450
500
600
800
1000
Output
Accuracy
Loading
Power supply
Frequency
Isolation
Response time
Operating temp
Case
Weight
Approvals
0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC
±1% FS over 5-100% of range
1 MΩ required for rated accuracy
100 kΩ load add 1.3% error
None required
50-60 Hz
UL listed to 1270 VAC
100 ms, 0-90%
-58° to 149°F (-50° to 65°C)
Thermoplastic (meets UL flammability rating
94V-0)
0.3 lb (0.12 kg)
UL and ULC listed, File #E129625
Note: The Sentry 100 Series is average responding and not suitable for use on
the load side of VFDs. Refer to the Sentry 200 Series to monitor VFDs.
SC100-1L
C
US
R
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
3.53
(8.97)
2.40
(6.10)
3.54
(9.0)
2.4
(6.0)
0.75
2.25 (1.9)
(5.72)
0.85
(2.18)
2.16
(5.5)
1.0
(2.5)
0.95
(2.4)
0.85
(2.18)
0.17
(0.45)
1.20
(3.05)
0.6
(1.5)
1.5
(3.9)
3.04
(7.73)
3.08
(7.8)
Solid-Core
Split-Core
WIRING
0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC
+
–
Load*
+-
Sentry 100
* 1 MΩ required for rated accuracy
100 kΩ load add 1.3% error
Monitored Conductor
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
100-1L
100-2L
100-3L
100-4L
SC100-1L
SC100-2L
SC100-3L
SC100-4L
DESCRIPTION
Solid-core current transducer, 0-50A, 0-5 VDC output
Solid-core current transducer, 0-200A, 0-5 VDC output
Solid-core current transducer, 0-50A, 0-10 VDC output
Solid-core current transducer, 0-200A, 0-10 VDC output
Split-core current transducer, 0-50A, 0-5 VDC output
Split-core current transducer, 0-200A, 0-5 VDC output
Split-core current transducer, 0-50A, 0-10 VDC output
Split-core current transducer, 0-200A, 0-10 VDC output
125
POWER MONITORING
May eliminate the need for a current transformer
Small size
No power supply needed
Easily installed over existing cable with split-core
model
• UL listed, CE certified
100-1L
•
•
•
•
POWER MONITORING
AC CURRENT TRANSDUCERS WITH CURRENT OUTPUT
SENTRY 200 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The 200 Series AC Current Transducers can be used
to directly monitor up to 200 amps and output a 4-20 mA
signal. The 200 Series is available in a split-core design
that allows for easy installation of the transducer on
existing wiring or in a lower cost solid-core version.
FEATURES
200-1
•
•
•
•
May eliminate the need for a current transformer
Small size
Loop powered
Easily installed over existing cable with split-core
design
• UL listed, CE certified
C
RANGE JUMPER MAX CONT MAX FOR MAX FOR
(amps)
6 SEC
1 SEC
(amps)
200-05
0-2
Low
40
60
100
SC200-05
0-5
High
100
124
250
200-1
0-10
None
80
125
250
SC200-1
0-20
Mid
110
150
300
0-50
High
175
215
400
200-2
0-100
None
200
300
600
SC200-2
0-150
Mid
300
450
800
0-200
High
400
500
1000
12-40 VDC
4-20 mA DC
950Ω max @ 24 VDC or
R max = (VSupply - 5)/0.020
Accuracy
±0.5% FS
Response time
300 ms, 0-90%
Overrange limit
Sensor self-limits output to 40 mA
Internal protection Reverse voltage protection
Frequency
20-100 Hz, (V models 10-400 Hz)
Operating temp
-4° to 122°F (-20° to 50°C)
Case
Thermoplastic (meets UL flammability
rating 94V-0)
Weight
0.3 lb (0.12 kg)
Isolation
UL listed to 1270 VAC
Approvals
UL and ULC listed, File #E129625
Note: The standard models are average responding.
Also available are variable frequency integration
models for monitoring the load side of a VFD.
3.54
(9.0)
2.4
(6.0)
2.40
(6.10)
MODEL
2.25
(5.72)
0.85
(2.18)
0.75
(1.9)
2.16
(5.5)
1
(2.5)
0.95
(2.4)
0.85
(2.18)
0.17
(0.45)
0.6
(1.5)
1.20
(3.05)
1.5
(3.9)
3.04
(7.73)
Split-Core
3.08
(7.8)
Solid-Core
WIRING
+
4-20 mA
+Sentry 200
Power
Supply
24 VDC
Typical
–
+
950Ω max
@24 VDC
–
Load
Monitored Conductor
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
DESCRIPTION
200-05
Solid-core current transducer, 0-5A, 4-20 mA output
200-1
Solid-core current transducer, 0-50A, 4-20 mA output
200-2
Solid-core current transducer, 0-200A, 4-20 mA output
SC200-05
Split-core current transducer, 0-5A, 4-20 mA output
SC200-1
Split-core current transducer, 0-50A, 4-20 mA output
SC200-2
Split-core current transducer, 0-200A, 4-20 mA output
Add -V at the end of the model number if monitoring the load side of a VFD.
126
US
DIMENSIONS
3.53
(8.97)
Supply voltage
Output
Output load
R
in
(cm)
SPECIFICATIONS
POWER MONITORING
SC200-1
POWER MONITORING
HIGH AC CURRENT TRANSDUCER WITH CURRENT OUTPUT
SENTRY 200-A SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Sentry 200-A Series High AC Current
Transducers with Current Ouput can be used to directly monitor up to 2000A without requiring an additional
current transformer. The output from these transducers
is a 4-20 mA signal.
FEATURES
• Eliminates the need for a current transformer
• Large aperture to accommodate large conductors
or wire bundles
• Loop-powered 4-20 mA output
• Multirange input eliminates zero and span adjustments
• Easy installation with integral mounting brackets
200-3-A
0-375
0-500
0-750
0-1000
0-1333
0-2000
200-4-A
Output
Supply voltage
Output load
Accuracy
Frequency
Response time
Case
Weight
Approvals
Insulation class
Overrange limit
Termination
R
US
SWITCH MAX CONT MAX FOR MAX FOR
POSITION
6 SEC
1 SEC
(amps)
375
750
1500
3750
500
750
1000
2000
4000
10,000
1333
2000
4-20 mA, loop-powered
24-40 VDC
600Ω max @ 24 VDC
Rmax = (V supply-12)/0.020
1.0% FS
50-60 Hz, (V models 10-400 Hz)
500 ms to 90% of step change
UL 94 flammability rated thermoplastic
1.3 lb (0.6 kg)
UL and ULC listed, File # E129625,
CE certified
600 VAC
Sensor self-limits to 25 mA output
Screw terminals
Note: The standard models are average responding. Also
available are variable frequency integration models
for monitoring the load side of a VFD.
in
(cm)
POWER MONITORING
RANGE
C
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
MODEL
200-3-A
4.5
(11.43)
Aperture
3
(7.63)
4.22
(10.7)
1.9
(4.83)
Depth
WIRING
+
Sentry
200-A
Power
Supply
24 VDC
Typical
–
+
600Ω
max @
24 VDC
–
Load
+-
4-20 mA
Monitored Conductor
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
200-3-A
200-4-A
DESCRIPTION
Solid-core high current transducer, 0-750A, 4-20 mA output
Solid-core high current transducer, 0-2000A, 4-20 mA output
Add -V at the end of the model number if monitoring the load side of a VFD.
127
POWER MONITORING
THREE-PHASE VOLTAGE MONITORS
MODELS 258, 269
DESCRIPTION
Models 258 and 269 continuously monitor three-phase
power lines for phase loss, phase reversal, and low voltage. Model 269 also monitors for high voltage. Models
258 and 269 do not require a neutral connection and
can be used with any Wye or Delta system. When correct voltage and phase rotation are applied, the internal
relay will energize. A fault condition will de-energize the
relay. When the fault is corrected, the monitor will automatically reset.
258
269
SPECIFICATIONS
POWER MONITORING
Nominal AC voltage (VAC phase to phase)
Adjustment range (VAC)
Frequency (Hz)
Power consumption (W)
Response time
Reset time
Mounting
Weight oz (g)
Approvals
Repeat accuracy
Reset type
Deadband
Output contacts
Contact rating
B258B
120
85-120
258B
208/240
160-240
A258B
480
380-480
60
0.75
50ms
50ms
RB08-PC
5 (141.7)
UR, CSA
60
1.5
50ms
50ms
RB08-PC
5 (141.7)
UR, CSA
60
4.5
50ms
50ms
RB08-PC
5 (141.7)
UR*, CSA
±0.1% of setpoint (fixed conditions)
Automatic
Approx 2%
SPDT
10A @ 240 VAC, resistive
A269
120
110-145
80-115
60
1.5
Adj. 1-10 sec
0.25 sec
Surface
9 (255.1)
UL, CSA
Operating temp
Humidity
Dimensions
258
C269
480
400-540
380-460
60
6.0
Adj. 1-10 sec
0.25 sec
Surface
9 (255.1)
UL, CSA
-40° to 131°F (-40° to 55°C)
97% noncondensing
1.95"H x 1.95"W x 3.25"D
(4.96 x 4.96 x 8.25 cm)
2.25"H x 2.0"W x 0.625"D
(5.7 x 5.1 x 1.6 cm)
6.06"H x 3.88"W x 2.82"D
(15.4 x 9.9 x 7.1 cm)
RB08-PC
*Condition of acceptability: A258B must be used with the
RB08-PC socket.
B269
208/240
210-280
170-240
60
3.0
Adj. 1-10 sec
0.25 sec
Surface
9 (255.1)
UL, CSA
269
WIRING
L1
M
L2
M
L3
Control
Voltage
M
L2
L1
Motor
M
M
345
Model
258
M
L3
Motor
M
A B C
Model 269
M
1
2
Stop Start
8
Stop Start
Control
Voltage
M
M
Optional Alarm Indicator
shown de-energized
258
shown de-energized
269
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
A258B
258B
B258B
RB08-PC
A269
B269
C269
128
DESCRIPTION
Three-phase voltage monitor, 480 VAC
Three-phase voltage monitor, 208/240 VAC
Three-phase voltage monitor, 120 VAC (use with Model 3PT3 potential transformer)
600V/10A Socket (required with each 258 voltage monitor)
Three-phase voltage monitor, 120 VAC (use with Model 3PT3 potential transformer)
Three-phase voltage monitor, 208/240 VAC
Three-phase voltage monitor, 480 VAC
POWER MONITORING
MOTORSAVER™ THREE-PHASE VOLTAGE MONITOR
MODEL 201A
DESCRIPTION
The MotorSaver™ Model 201A Three-Phase Voltage
Monitor is an autoranging plug-in voltage monitor
designed to protect three-phase motors regardless of
size. It is used on 190-480 VAC, 50/60 Hz motors to
prevent damage caused by single phasing, low voltage,
phase reversal, or voltage unbalance. To detect harmful
power line conditions, the unique microprocessor-based
voltage and phase sensing circuit constantly monitors
the three-phase voltages. When a harmful condition is
detected, the Model 201A MotorSaver’s output relay is
deactivated after a fixed trip-delay time period. The output relay reactivates after power line conditions return to
an acceptable level for a fixed restart delay time. The
trip delay prevents nuisance tripping due to rapidly fluctuating power line conditions.
C
R
US
OT08
SPECIFICATIONS
• Protection of three-phase motors against single
phasing, low voltage, phase reversal, and voltage
unbalance
• DIN rail- or surface-mounted socket
• UL and ULC listed, CE certified
• Bicolor LED indication of normal and fault conditions
• Single-phase condition detection regardless of
regenerated voltages
WIRING
M
M
M
L1
L2
L3
L1
L2
3
OL
OL
OL
Motor
L3
4
201A
2
5
1
M
8
OL
LED INDICATOR
Run
Green
Restart Delay
Green
Reverse Phase
Red
Unbalance/Single Phase
High/Low Voltage
Red
Red
Start
Hand Stop
M
Off
Control
Voltage
240 VAC max
shown de-energized
Model 201A
Auto Pilot
Line voltage
Three-phase, 190-480 VAC,
adjustable
50* or 60 Hz
Frequency
Low voltage
Trip
90% of setpoint
Reset
93% of setpoint
Voltage unbalance (NEMA)
Trip
6%
Reset
4.5%
Trip delay time
Low voltage
4 sec
Unbalance and
phasing faults
2 sec
Restart delay time
After a fault
2 sec
After a complete
power loss
2 sec
Output contact rating
SPDT, pilot duty
480 VA @ 240 VAC
General-purpose
10A @ 240 VAC
Transient protection
2500V for 10 ms
Power consumption
5W
Dimensions
1.75"H x 2.37"W x 4.25"L
(4.4 x 6.0 x 10.8 cm)
Weight
9 oz (0.25 kg)
Approvals
UL and ULC listed,
File #E68520, CE certified
*50 Hz will increase all delay times by 20%.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
201A
OT08
DESCRIPTION
MotorSaver three-phase voltage monitor
Socket, 600 VAC, DIN rail or surface mount
129
POWER MONITORING
FEATURES
201A
POWER MONITORING
DESCRIPTION
The MotorSaver Model 460 microcontroller-based voltage
and phase sensing circuit constantly monitors the threephase voltages to detect harmful power line conditions.
When a harmful condition is detected, the Model 460 output relay is deactivated after an adjustable trip delay time.
The output relay reactivates after power line conditions
return to an acceptable level for an adjustable restart delay
time. If equipped with the manual reset option, an external
normally open momentary reset switch must be pressed to
reactivate the output relay. The trip and restart delays prevent nuisance tripping due to rapidly fluctuating power line
conditions.
The Model 460 automatically senses whether it is connected to a 190-240V 60 Hz system, a 440-480V 60 Hz system, or a 350-416V 50 Hz system. An adjustment is provided to set the nominal line voltage from 190-240 or 380-480
VAC. Other adjustments include a 1-30 second trip delay, a
1-500 second restart delay, and a 2% to 8% voltage-unbalance trip point adjustment.
R
US
WIRING
L1
Input L2
Power L3
L1
FEATURES
• Protection of three-phase motors from loss of any
phase, low-voltage, phase reversal, voltage unbalance, and high voltage
• Adjustable trip delay and restart delay
• Optional manual reset
• Adjustable voltage-unbalance trip point
• Diagnostic LEDs for indication of trip status
• Single-phase condition detection regardless of
regenerated voltages
• Surface or DIN rail mounting
C
460
External
Normally Open
Momentary Manual
Reset Switch
1
L2
L3
3
2
OL
OL
OL
Magnetic
Contactor
POWER MONITORING
MOTORSAVER™ THREE-PHASE VOLTAGE MONITOR
MODEL 460
Motor
Manual Reset
on 460-MR only.
LED INDICATOR
(customer
supplied)
Model 460
4
5
Run
Green
Restart Delay
Green
Reverse Phase
6
OL
Red
Unbalance/Single Phase
High/Low Voltage
Red
Red
Manual Reset Required*
*460-MR only
Red and Green
M
Control Power
24-240 VAC
Start
Manual Stop
M
Off
shown de-energized
Auto
Pilot Contact
SPECIFICATIONS
Three-phase line voltage
Frequency
Low voltage
Trip
Reset
High voltage
Trip
Reset
Voltage unbalance (NEMA)
Trip
Reset
190-480
50*/60 Hz
90% of setpoint (±1%)
93% of setpoint (±1%)
110% of setpoint (±1%)
107% of setpoint (±1%)
2% to 8%, adjustable
Trip setting minus 1% (5-8%)
Trip setting minus 0.5% (2-4%)
Trip delay time
Low, high, unbalanced
1-30 sec adjustable
Single phasing
1 sec fixed
Restart delay time
After a fault
1-500 sec adjustable
After a complete power loss 1-500 sec adjustable
Output contact rating
SPDT, pilot duty
General-purpose
Transient protection
480 VA @ 240 VAC
10A @ 240 VAC
IEC 1000-4-5, ANSI/IEEE
C62.41, UL508
Power consumption
6W max
Dimensions
3.5"H x 2.1"W x 2.4"D
(8.9 x 5.3 x 6.1 cm)
Operating temp
-4° to 158°F (-20° to 70°C)
Humidity
10% to 95% noncondensing
Enclosure
Polycarbonate
Wire type
Stranded or solid, 12-20 AWG,
one per terminal
Weight
1.0 lb (0.45 kg)
Approvals
UL and ULC listed,
File #E68520, CE
Terminal torque
6 in-lbs (0.7 N-m)
*50 Hz will increase all delay times by 20%.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
460
460-MR
130
DESCRIPTION
Three-phase voltage monitor, 190-480 VAC
Three-phase voltage monitor, 190-480 VAC with manual reset
POWER MONITORING
MOTORSAVER™ THREE-PHASE VOLTAGE MONITOR
MODEL 250A
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES
• Protection of three-phase motors from single
phasing, low-voltage, phase reversal, voltage
unbalance, and high voltage
• Adjustable restart delay
• DPDT contacts
• UL and ULC listed
• Bicolor LED indication of normal and fault conditions
• Detection of single-phase conditions regardless
of regenerated voltages
WIRING
M
M
M
L1
Input
Power L2
L3
LED INDICATOR
Run
Green
Restart Delay
Green
Reverse Phase
Red
Unbalance/Single Phase
High/Low Voltage
Red
Red
Control
Power
L1
L2
250A
OL
OL
OL
L3
Motor
M
OL
Start
Hand Stop
M
Off
250A
shown de-energized
Motor Protection with Local Alarm
Alarm
R
US
SPECIFICATIONS
Three-phase line
voltage
190-480 VAC, adjustable
Frequency
50* or 60 Hz
Low voltage
Trip
90% of setpoint
Reset
93% of setpoint
High voltage
Trip
110% of setpoint
Reset
107% of setpoint
Voltage unbalance (NEMA)
Trip
6%
Reset
4.5%
Trip delay time
Low voltage,
High voltage
4 sec
Unbalance and
phasing faults
2 sec
Restart delay time
After a fault
Manual or 2-300 sec
After a complete
power loss
Manual or 2-300 sec
Output contact rating
DPDT, pilot duty
480 VA @ 240 VAC
General-purpose
10A @ 240 VAC
Transient protection
IEC 1000-4-5
Power consumption
5W max
Dimensions
2.9"H x 5.25"W x 2.92"D
(7.4 x 13.3 x 7.4 cm)
Weight
14 oz (435.6g)
Approvals
UL and ULC listed,
File #E68520
*50 Hz will increase all delay times by 20%.
Auto Pilot
Alarm
Power
C
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
250A
DESCRIPTION
MotorSaver three-phase
voltage monitor
131
POWER MONITORING
The MotorSaver™ Model 250A Three-Phase Voltage
Monitor is an autoranging voltage monitor designed to
protect three-phase motors regardless of size. It is used
on 190-480 VAC, 50/60 Hz motors to prevent damage
caused by single phasing, low voltage, phase reversal,
voltage unbalance, and high voltage. Added features
include DPDT contacts and an adjustable restart timedelay setting. The unique microprocessor-based voltage
and phase sensing-circuit constantly monitors the threephase voltages to detect harmful power line conditions.
When a harmful condition is detected, the Model
250A’s output relays are deactivated after a fixed tripdelay time period. The output relay reactivates after
power line conditions return to an acceptable level for
an adjustable restart delay time. The trip and reset
delays prevent nuisance tripping due to rapidly fluctuating power line conditions.
POWER MONITORING
MOTORSAVER™ THREE-PHASE VOLTAGE MONITOR
355 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
POWER MONITORING
MotorSaver™ 355 Series Three-Phase Voltage
Monitors are designed to protect three-phase motors
regardless of size. The 355-200 model monitors 190-240
VAC input voltages, the 355-400 model monitors 380-480
VAC input voltages, and the 355-600 model monitors 575600 VAC input voltages. The unique microprocessorbased voltage and phase-sensing circuit constantly monitors the three-phase voltages to detect harmful power line
conditions, including single phasing, low voltage, phase
reversal, voltage unbalance, and high voltage. When a
harmful condition is detected, the 355 Series output relays
are deactivated after an adjustable trip-delay time period.
The output relay reactivates after power line conditions
return to an acceptable level for an adjustable restart
delay time. The trip and reset delays prevent nuisance
tripping due to rapidly fluctuating power line conditions.
C
R
US
355-400
WIRING
FEATURES
• Protection of three-phase motors from single
phasing, low voltage, phase reversal, voltage
unbalance, and high voltage
• Adjustable restart delay
• Adjustable trip delay
• Adjustable voltage-unbalance trip point
• Four diagnostic LEDs show overvoltage, undervoltage, voltage unbalance, reverse-phase, and
normal conditions
• UL and ULC listed
• Single-phase condition detection regardless of
regenerated voltages
M
M
M
L1
L2
L3
L1
L2
OL
OL
OL
L3
355 Series
Motor
M
OL
Start
Hand Stop
M
Off
Control
Voltage
shown de-energized
Auto Pilot
SPECIFICATIONS
Three-phase
line voltage
190-240, 380-480, or
575-600 VAC
50*/60 Hz
Frequency
Low voltage
Trip
90% of setpoint (±1%)
Reset
93% of setpoint (±1%)
High voltage
Trip
110% of setpoint (±1%)
Reset
107% of setpoint (±1%)
Voltage unbalance (NEMA)
Trip
2% to 8%, adjustable
Reset
Trip setting minus 1%
Trip delay time
Low and high voltage,
unbalance
2-30 sec, adjustable
Single phasing
0.5 sec
Restart delay time
After a fault
After a complete
power loss
Output contact rating
SPDT, pilot duty
General-purpose
Transient protection
Power consumption
Dimensions
Weight
Approvals
Manual or 2-300 sec
Manual or 2-300 sec
470 VA @ 600 VAC (400 or
600V range)
10A @ 240 VAC (200V range)
2500V for 10 ms
6W max
2.9"H x 5.25"W x 2.9"D
(7.4 x 13.3 x 7.4 cm)
1.0 lb (0.45 kg)
UL and ULC listed, File #E68520
*50 Hz will increase all delay times by 20%.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
355-200
355-400
355-600
132
DESCRIPTION
Three-phase power monitor, 190-240 VAC
Three-phase power monitor, 380-480 VAC
Three-phase power monitor, 575-600 VAC
POWER MONITORING
THREE-PHASE VOLTAGE TRANSDUCERS
MODELS PVM, LVM
DESCRIPTION
Model PVM voltage transducers monitor the line-to-line
voltage of three- and four-wire, three-phase electrical systems. The Model LVM monitors the phase-to-neutral voltage of four-wire electrical systems. Models PMV and LVM
are used to monitor three-phase voltages of 120, 208, 240,
277, and 480V. They provide three separate 4-20 mA
outputs, which are proportional to the three-phase input
voltages. The high accuracy, solid-state circuitry of these
transducers is average responding calibrated to read
RMS.
FEATURES
SPECIFICATIONS
Voltage input range
PVM-480 (line-to-line)
Low range
High range
PVM-120 (line-to-line)
180-300V
360-600V
90-150V (for
3Ø P.T. secondaries)
LVM-120 (phase-to-neutral) 90-150V
(for 208 and 240V
3Ø systems)
LVM-240 (phase-to-neutral) 180-300V
(for 480V 3Ø systems)
Input burden
0.1 VA max
Frequency
50/60 Hz
Continuous overload
600V max
Power supply voltage
24 VDC ±10%
Power supply current
150 mA max
Output
4-20 mA DC
Max loop resistance
6001/output
Accuracy
0.5% of full scale
Output ripple
250 µA
Response time
<1.50 sec (10% to 90%)
Dielectric test (1 min)
1300V min
Operating temp
-22° to 140°F
(-30° to 60°C)
Shipping weight
1.3 lb (0.56 kg)
Approvals
UL-recognized
component,
File #E155343
LVM-240
• Operates on 24 VDC power supply
• Reverse polarity protection on power supply input
• Mounting feet for easy installation
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
Four Open Slots 0.16 (0.41) x 0.31 (0.79)
1.03
(2.62)
2.13
(5.41)
3.44
(8.74)
3.94
(10.01)
4.38
(11.13)
Top View
0.84
(2.14)
1.00
(2.54)
3.19
(8.10)
3.63
(9.22)
4.19
(10.64)
Side View
133
POWER MONITORING
For 120, 208, 240, or 480V three-phase systems
Line-to-line and phase-to-neutral voltage monitoring
Usable on 50 or 60 Hz systems
Three 4-20 mA outputs for monitoring each input
voltage separately
1 7
2 8
3 9
4 10
5 11
6 12
•
•
•
•
POWER MONITORING
THREE-PHASE VOLTAGE TRANSDUCERS
MODELS PVM, LVM
WIRING
Recommended Accessory
APPLICATION
KLK-PAK Fuse Package
• Line-to-line voltage monitoring
(locate near PVM)
• Voltage in (PVM-480 high range)
= 15 x (mA out) + 300
• Voltage in (PVM-480 low range)
= 7.5 x (mA out) + 150
• Voltage in (PVM-120)
= 3.75 x (mA out) + 75
L1-L2
Output
L1-L3
Output
24 VDC
Supply
(±10%)
RL
RL
RL
Notes:
1. Wiring shown is for high range voltage input (360-600V). For low range
voltage (180-300V), wire to terminals 2, 4, and 6, instead of 1, 3, and 5.
2. PVM-120: Wire to terminals 2, 4, and 6.
3. The installation must conform to all national and local codes and regulations.
POWER MONITORING
L2-L3
Output
Typical 4-20 mA inputs to processor.
Max loop resistance is 600Ω/output,
including processor load (RL)
and conductor.
PVM
Wiring for 480V/3Ø/60 Hz
(see Notes above for other voltages)
Neutral
L1-N
Output
Recommended Accessory
KLK-PAK Fuse Package
(locate near LVM)
L2-N Output
L3-N
Output
24 VDC
Supply
(±10%)
APPLICATION
• Phase-to-neutral voltage monitoring
• Voltage in (LVM-120) = 3.75 x (mA out) + 75
• Voltage in (LVM-240) = 7.5 x (mA out) + 150
RL
LVM
RL
RL
Notes:
1. The installation must conform to all national and local codes
and regulations.
2. The LVM is suitable for single-phase (line-to-neutral) voltage
monitoring.
Typical 4-20 mA inputs to processor.
Max loop resistance is 600Ω/output,
including processor load (RL)
and conductor.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
PVM-480
PVM-120
LVM-120
LVM-240
DESCRIPTION
Line-to-line voltage monitor, 180-300/360-600V (208, 240, or 480V systems)
Line-to-line voltage monitor, 90-150V (3Ø potential transformer secondaries)
Phase-to-neutral voltage monitor, 90-150V (208 or 240V systems)
Phase-to-neutral voltage monitor, 180-300V (480V systems)
RELATED PRODUCTS
KLK-PAK
Fuse package
134
POWER MONITORING
VOLTAGE DISCONNECT SWITCH BLOCK, CT SHORTING SWITCHES
MODELS U3889, 209PF
DESCRIPTION
The Model U3889 Voltage Disconnect Switch Block
provides a disconnecting means for power monitoring
equipment. It provides isolation from line voltage and
will short out and disconnect current transformer secondaries, preventing transformer damage that may occur
when the circuit is opened under load. One side of the
switch is connected to the circuits being measured; the
other side of the switch is connected to the power monitoring equipment. The black plastic cover (209PF) is
constructed so that all switches must be in the closed
position before the cover can be sealed.
FEATURES
U3889-E
Cover (209PF)
Optional enclosure
Weight
Approvals
U3889
WIRING
To Power Monitoring
Equipment
SPECIFICATIONS
Voltage rating
Current rating
Dimensions
Switch
209PF
POWER MONITORING
• Provides voltage disconnect and CT shorting/
disconnect for power instrumentation
• Available in convenient metal screw cover
enclosure
• Color coded switch handles
• UL recognized
600V
30A
9.5"L x 3.5"W x 2.75"D
(24.1 x 8.9 x 7 cm)
10.1"L x 4.6"W x 3.1"D
(25.7 x 11.7 x 7.9 cm)
Metal screw cover box, NEMA 1
12"L x 10"W x 4"D
(30.5 x 25.4 x 10.2 cm)
2.9 lb (1.3 kg)
3.5 lb (1.5 kg) with cover
11 lb (5 kg) with enclosure
UL-recognized component,
File #E109317
To Phase
Voltage
To CT
Secondary
Notes:
1. Red switch pulled up disconnects voltage
2. Black switch pair pulled up shorts CT secondary
and disconnects load from CT
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
U3889-E
U3889
209PF
DESCRIPTION
Switch block mounted in a 12" x 10" x 4" metal screw cover box
Switch block
Switch cover (not for use with U3889-E)
135
POWER MONITORING
METER PULSE-TO-ANALOG TRANSDUCER
MODEL MPA-2
DESCRIPTION
The Model MPA-2 Meter Pulse-to-Analog
Transducer accepts kWh totalizer pulses from a utility
meter and calculates kW demand using a 5-, 15-, or
30-minute sliding window averaging scheme. The
average kW demand value is output as a milliamp or
voltage signal, which can be read by a BAS. The average kW demand can also be displayed using panel
meter indicators such as the LPI Series.
MPA-2
POWER MONITORING
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Converts kWh pulses to an analog kW signal
Both milliamp and VDC signals available
5-, 15-, or 30-minute sliding window selection
24 VAC/VDC power
Adjustable zero and span
Snap-track mounted
Furnished with complete instructions
WIRING
Voltage
Signal
mA
Signal
VOLTS OUT
mA OUT
COM
24 V PWR
SIG +
SIG –
24 VAC/VDC
Power
OPERATION
The Model MPA-2 accumulates all the input pulses for
the previous sliding window time period (i.e.,15 min.). It
calculates an average kW value over this time period and
outputs an analog signal representing this kW. The sliding window pulse count is updated on one-second intervals with the input from the oldest interval constantly
being replaced by the input pulses from the most recent
interval.
Meter Pulse
Contacts
MPA-2
Notes:
1. Meter pulse contact can switch either negative or positive signal
connection.
2. Any 24V power supply may be used to power the signal input from
the meter pulse contacts, including the MPA-2 power supply as
shown.
SPECIFICATIONS
Power supply
24 VAC ±10% @ 120 mA max
24 VDC ±10% @ 50 mA max
Input signal
24 VAC/VDC switched through
electronic or mechanical contact closure
Input current 15 mA non-inductive at 24V
Max pulse rate 10 pulses/sec
Output signal
4-20 mA factory set, adjustable 0-20 mA
zero and span; 2-10 VDC factory set,
adjustable 0-18 VDC (both outputs can
be used simultaneously)
Output
impedance
Max output resistance 650Ω for mA output; max current available from voltage
and current outputs combined is 25 mA
User options Sliding window size is DIP switch-selectable
for 5-, 15-, or 30-min. periods; kWh pulses to
produce full-scale output are DIP switchselectable from 10 pulses per period to
18,000 pulses per period
Indicators
Green status LED
Steady green = normal
Slow flashing green = cal mode
Rapid flashing green = kW demand overflow
Red signal LED = contact closure on the
utility meter kWh contacts (LED is off when
contacts open)
Mounting
3.25" (8.3 cm) snap track (supplied with unit)
Dimensions 3.25"H x 4.6"W x 1"D (8.3 x 11.7 x 2.54 cm)
Weight
0.39 lb (0.17 kg)
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
MPA-2
136
DESCRIPTION
Meter pulse-to-analog transducer
POWER MONITORING
POWERTRAK POWER MONITORING INTERFACE
PT-9000 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele PT-9000 Series PowerTrak Power Monitoring
Interface monitors numerous power system parameters for
local display and/or remote connection to a BAS or other
data acquisition equipment. Any three- or single-phase
50/60 Hz electrical system from 120-600V can be monitored
by the PT-9000 Series without the need for potential transformers. Higher voltage systems such as 5 kV or 15 kV services can also be monitored using potential transformers.
The PT-9000 Series is available for use with 1A, 5A, or
0.333V current transformers. Options include a current
transformer shorting assembly, a digital LCD display, and a
NEMA 3R enclosure.
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Auto-corrects for wiring errors
Three-phase (Wye or Delta) or single-phase systems
Voltage selector switch (120-600V)
Accepts 1A, 5A, or 0.333V CTs
Low-voltage alarm contact
Two 4-20 mA outputs
Pulse output for KWH with selectable pulse rate
Optional two-line LCD display
Optional unique CT shorting assembly
Easily installed enclosure with external mounting feet
Optional LonWorks, Modbus, and Metasys communications
PT-9500-D
(shown with optional display)
C
R
US
APPLICATION
Remote (Outputs) and Local (Display) Monitoring
KWH
Total KW
Window KW
Peak window KW
Total KVA
Total power factor (PF)
True RMS voltage
True RMS current
Local (Display) Monitoring - Each Phase
True RMS voltage
True RMS current
KW (Wye systems)
KVA (Wye systems)
Power factor (Wye systems)
All parameters can be monitored over a single pair of wires
with a communications module installed.
SPECIFICATIONS
Inputs
System type
Input voltage
Frequency
Input current
CT burden
CT primary
PT burden
Internal fusing
Outputs
Pulse output
Pulse rate
Max pulse rate
Contact output
Three-phase (Wye or Delta), or
single-phase
120-600 VAC
50/60 Hz
0-5A, 0-1A, or 0-0.333V
0.75 VA max (1A or 5A inputs)
5, 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 400,
500, 600, 750, 800, 1000, 1200, 1500,
1600, 2000, 2500, 3000, 3500, 4000, 5000,
or 6000
4.8 VA max
0.5A, 600V (KLK-0.5)
Pulsed contact closure for KWH solid-state
relay, 50 VAC/VDC max, 100 mA max
Four selectable KWH per pulse rates, 50%
duty cycle
Five pulses per second
Maintained contact closure for low voltage
alarm; 50 VAC/VDC, 100 mA max
Analog outputs Two externally powered 4-20 mA
signals selectable for total KW, window
KW, peak window KW, total power factor,
total KVA, RMS current*, or RMS voltage*
Max load
725Ω each output @ 24 VDC
Power
External 24 VDC @ 60 mA max
Accuracy
0.75% of F.S. (kW, kVA, V, A)
± 0.03 PF (0.4 to 1.0 PF)
Operating temp
32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Humidity
5% to 95% noncondensing
Display option**
LCD, two lines, 16 characters/line
Dimensions
12"H x 10"W x 4"D (30.5 x 25.4 x 10.2 cm)
NEMA 3R
20" H x 16"W x 6"D (50.8 x 40.6 x 15.2 cm)
Weight
12 lb (5.5 kg), NEMA 3R: 43 lb (20 kg)
Approvals
UL and ULC listed, File #E161500
Certified to LonMark Interoperability
Guidelines version 3.1
* Voltage and current outputs are the average of the three-phase true
RMS values.
**When using potential transformers for voltages above 600V, some
displayed values must be multiplied by the PT ratio.
137
POWER MONITORING
Furnished in a NEMA 1 hinged cover enclosure with external mounting feet and conduit knockouts on all sides, the
PT-9000 Series is simple to install. Setup of the PT-9000
Series is easily accomplished with a selector switch and
DIP switches. A truly unique feature of the PT-9000 Series
is its ability to identify and electronically correct wiring problems such as reversed CT polarities or improper phasing of
voltages with CTs.
POWER MONITORING
POWERTRAK POWER MONITORING INTERFACE
PT-9000 SERIES
POWER MONITORING
CONFIGURATION
DIP Switches
Setting the DIP switches according to system requirements is suggested before applying power to the PT-9000 Series.
However, it is not necessary to remove power from the PT-9000 Series in order to make changes to the DIP switch settings.
A1 - A2: Define the power system type. Set these switches to match the type of system that is to be monitored. Select from
three-phase Wye or Delta and single-phase two- or three-wire systems.
A3 - A8: Define the low voltage alarm threshold. Select an appropriate value for the system voltage that is monitored.
For Delta systems, low voltage is measured line-to-line. For Wye and single-phase systems, low voltage is measured
line-to-neutral. Select from alarm threshold values ranging from 51-540V.
B1 - B2: Define the KWH per pulse value. Set these switches to obtain an optimum pulse rate that can be read by the BAS
controller or data acquisition equipment. Select from 10, 1, 0.1, and 0.01 KWH per pulse values.
B3 - B5: Define mA loop #2 signal type. Set these switches for the power parameter to be represented by this
4-20 mA output. Select from seven different parameters: Total KW, Window KW, Peak Window KW, Total KVA,
Total Power Factor, True RMS Voltage*, True RMS Current*.
B6 - B8: Define mA loop #1 signal type. Set these switches for the power parameter to be represented by this
4-20 mA output. Select from seven different parameters: Total KW, Window KW, Peak Window KW, Total KVA,
Total Power Factor, True RMS Voltage*, True RMS Current*.
C1 - C5: Define the current transformer ratio. Set switches to match the primary current rating of the current transformers connected to the PT-9000 Series. Select from CT primaries ranging from 50 to 6000.
* Voltage and current outputs are the average of the three-phase true RMS values.
System Voltage Select Switch
Set the SYSTEM VOLTAGE SELECT switch to the correct line-to-line system voltage (or potential transformer secondary voltage, if used) connected to the PT-9000 Series. If the actual system voltage is greater than the selector switch setting, the over
voltage LED will flash, and the PT-9000 Series will cycle on and off to protect itself from over voltage. If this occurs, turn the
selector switch to the correct system voltage setting.
Auto-Configuration
After all wiring connections are completed, the DIP switches are set correctly, the voltage selector switch is set to the correct system
voltage, and the electrical system is energized, the PT-9000 Series can be auto-configured. To initiate the auto-configuring system,
press the AUTO-CONFIG button. The PT-9000 Series will examine the current and voltage waveforms for correct phasing and CT
polarity. During the auto-configuring process, the Volts/Amps phasing LEDs and CT reverse polarity LEDs will light in sequence.
When the process is completed only one of the Volts/Amps phasing LEDs will be lighted, indicating the actual phasing between the
voltage and current inputs to the PT-9000 Series. A lighted CT polarity LED indicates that the corresponding CT is installed or wired
backwards giving a reverse polarity. A correctly wired PT-9000 Series will be indicated by all CT polarity LEDs extinguished and the
left most Volts/Amps phasing LED lighted. Should any of the other phasing or CT polarity LEDs be lighted, the PT-9000 Series will
electronically fix the wiring errors and provide correct and accurate outputs. No time consuming troubleshooting or wire swapping is
required.
Manual Configuration
If the auto-configuring system is unable to determine the correct wiring configuration, the PT-9000 Series will enter the manual configuration mode and the manual config yellow LED will light. If this occurs, try initiating the auto-configuring system again, otherwise proceed
with manual configuration. The electrical system load should be relatively constant during the manual configuration procedure. To manually configure the PT-9000 Series, set the DIP switches so that one of the 4-20 mA outputs represents Total KW. Connect a meter set to
read DC milliamps to this output, or if the PT-9000 Series has the LCD display option, set one of the display lines to read Total KW. Next,
press the manual config CT polarity button (CT POL) to scan through the different CT polarity combinations. Each time record the reading
of the Total KW display or mA output. Allow the reading to stabilize before recording it. After reviewing all of the CT polarity combinations,
press the manual config V-A MATCH button and repeat the process of scanning through the CT polarity combinations. After trying all
possible combinations of V-A match and CT polarity, the correct configuration is the one producing the highest value of kW on the display
or the highest mA reading on the meter. Manually set the PT-9000 Series to the correct configuration using the CT POL and VA
MATCH push buttons.
138
POWER MONITORING
POWERTRAK POWER MONITORING INTERFACE
PT-9000 SERIES
WIRING - THREE-PHASE POWERTRAK APPLICATION
CT
L1 (AØ)
L
H1
CT H1 should face CT
line side
H1
L2 (BØ)
X2
L
X1
I
N
E
CT
L3 (CØ)
X2
O
X1
H1
X2
A
X1
D
Neutral (if Wye system)
Neutral
(if Wye
system)
CT shorting assembly pins
secured to PT-9000 CT Inputs
Terminal Block
CTC
X2 X1
CTB
X2 X1
1
1
CTA
X2 X1
SHORT
A
NORM
B
NORM
X1
SHORT
LOW
VOLTS
THRESHOLD
DIPSWITCH B
KWH/PULSE
mA OUT 2
SIGNAL
SELECT
mA OUT 1
SIGNAL
SELECT
1 2 3 4 5
DIPSWITCH C
CT shorting jumpers shown
in the normal position
CT RATIO
SELECT
System Voltage
Select Switch
346-415V
440-480V
OVER VOLTS
LED
600V
OFF
PT-9000
SERIES
CLEAR
KWH
COUNT
CLEAR
PEAK
KW
VOLTS 1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
AMPS A B C
A B C
A B C
A B C
A B C
A B C
AUTO
CONFIG
Optional Cover-Mounted
LCD Display Detail*
L1
120-144V
190-277V
Input
Voltage
Fusing
(2) KLK-0.5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Optional CT Shorting
Assembly Detail
PWR SYS
TYPE
L2
System Voltage
Connections
CTA
X2
X1
DIPSWITCH A
SHORT
X2
NEUTRAL L3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
C
X1
NORM
X2
CTB
L1
CTA
X2 X1
CT Inputs
Terminal Block
MAKE CT CONNECTIONS
TO THESE TERMINALS
CTC
CTB
X2 X1
L2
Optional Potential Transformer
For Voltages Above 600V (see PT Wiring Option)
1
CTC
X2 X1
L3
CT
CT
CT
A
B
C
REVERSE REVERSE REVERSE
POLARITY POLARITY POLARITY
MANUAL
CONFIG
Location
of
Optional
Communications
Module
V-A MATCH CT POL
SYS VOLTS OK
KWH PULSE
LOOP 2 UP
LOOP 1 UP
MA OUT 2
MA OUT 1
*Manually scroll individual lines of display using the
cover-mounted push buttons, to select different
power system parameters.
1
When using the SCT Series current
transformers with the PT-9300,
recommended wiring is a twisted
shielded pair for each CT to avoid
noise pick-up. Ground shield wire at
PT-9300 ground lug only.
SYS VOLTS OK
Low Voltage
Alarm Output
(closes on alarm)
KWH PULSE
L
O
A
D
A
B
C
Fuse per N.E.C.
for conductor
size & type.
H-1
H-2
24 VDC
Power
Supply
KWH Pulse
Output
4-20 mA
Output #2
4-20 mA
Output #1
H-3
POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER
L-1
L-2
L-3
X-1
X-2
X-3
PT Wiring Option
(for systems greater than 600V)
Connection option using one open
Delta 3PT3 three-phase potential
transformer with 120 VAC secondary.
139
POWER MONITORING
CAUTION: Lethal voltages
may be present across the
secondary terminals of all
current transformers. Keep
these terminals shorted or
connected to the transducer.
POWER MONITORING
POWERTRAK POWER MONITORING INTERFACE
PT-9000 SERIES
WIRING - SINGLE-PHASE POWERTRAK APPLICATIONS
When using the SCT Series
current transformers with the
PT-9300, recommended wiring
is a twisted shielded pair for
each CT to avoid noise pick-up.
Ground shield wire at
PT-9300 ground lug only.
1
*
L
I
N
E
CT
L
L
O
A
D
H1
CT H1 should face
line side
N
X2
N
No
No
Connection Connection
CTC
X2 X1
Make CT connections
to terminal strip on optional
CT shorting assembly if
present. See Wiring Three-Phase PowerTrak
Application.
L
X1
Jumper
*
CTB
X2 X1
No
Connection
1
CTA
X2 X1
NEUTRAL L3
CT Inputs
L2
L1
System Voltage
Connections
POWER MONITORING
Single-Phase Two-Wire Systems
1
When using the SCT Series
current transformers with the
PT-9300, recommended wiring
is a twisted shielded pair for
each CT to avoid noise pick-up.
Ground shield wire at
PT-9300 ground lug only.
L1
L
I
N
E
CT H1 should face CT
line side
H1
CT
L2
X2
L1
X1
L
O
A
D
H1
X2
N
L2
X1
N
No
Connection
CTC
X2 X1
*
Make CT connections
to terminal strip on optional
CT shorting assembly if
present. See Wiring Three-Phase PowerTrak
Application.
No
Connection
1
* *
CTB
X2 X1
CTA
X2 X1
CT Inputs
NEUTRAL L3
L2
L1
System Voltage
Connections
Single-Phase Three-Wire Systems
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
DESCRIPTION
PT-9500
PT-9300
PT-9100
PowerTrak power monitoring interface, 5A CT input
PowerTrak power monitoring interface, 0.333V CT input
PowerTrak power monitoring interface, 1A CT input
OPTIONS
D
LCD display, cover-mounted for local monitoring
S
CT shorting assembly (not necessary for PT-9300)
3R
PowerTrak mounted in a NEMA 3R enclosure
PT-9500
D
S
PT-NTL-10
PT-NT4-N2
PT-NT4-M
AL12AR
U3889-E
140
Example: PT-9500-D-S PowerTrak with LCD display and
CT shorting assembly
RELATED PRODUCTS
LonWorks communications module
Metasys® communications module
Modbus communications module
Cylinder lock kit
External shorting/disconnect assembly
POWER MONITORING
COMMUNICATION MODULES FOR PT-9000
MODELS PT-NTL-10, PT-NT4-N2, PT-NT4-M
DESCRIPTION
Models PT-NTL-10 (LonWorks), PT-NT4-N2 (Metasys),
and PT-NT4-M (Modbus) are communication modules
for the PowerTrak PT-9000 power monitoring interface.
They read data from the PT-9000’s main processor, format it, and transmit the data to a network. They allow all
of the power system parameters measured by the PT9000 to be monitored over a single pair of wires.
FEATURES
• Monitoring of all PT-9000 parameters over a single
pair of wires
• Remote reset with time stamp of kWh and peak
kW parameters
• Optically isolated RS-485 for elimination of network
grounding concerns on the PT-NT4-M and -N2
• FTT-10 transceiver on the PT-NTL-10
• Standard Network Variable Types (SNVT) are used
to meet LonMark Interoperability Guidelines on
the PT-NTL-10
• Pluggable field-wiring screw terminals
• Status LED indication
• Factory or field installation to any PT-9000
SPECIFICATIONS
Power supply
Network
PT-NTL-10
PT-NT4-N2
PT-NT4-M
Field wiring
Dimensions
C
R
US
WIRING
PT-9000
Series
Ribbon
Cable
PT-9000
Series
Ribbon
Cable
PT-NTL-10
PT-NT4-N2
PT-NT4-M
Service Button
Service LED
FTT-10
CONTROL
MODULE
FT-10 NWK
Status
LED
DIP Switch D
(device address)
DIP Switch E
(comm options)
Not Polarity
Sensitive
To LonWorks
FT-10 Network
Status
LED
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PT-NT4-N2
Communication Module
LonWorks FTT-10 transceiver
Metasys N2 protocol, RS-485, halfduplex, 9600 baud
Modbus protocol, RS-485, halfduplex, 9600 baud
Pluggable screw terminals
4.5''H x 2.6''W x 1.7''D
(11.4 x 6.6 x 4.3 cm)
0.7 lb (0.32 kg)
32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
0% to 95% noncondensing
UL listed, File #E161500
Certified to LonMark Interoperability
Guidelines v 3.1
Complies with Metasys guidelines
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Weight
Operating temp
Humidity
Approvals
PT-NTL-10
None required, powered by PT-9000
4 3 2 1
REF
N2N2+
(NWKB) (NWKA)
For complete installation and operating instructions call Trane.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
PT-NTL-10
PT-NT4-N2
PT-NT4-M
DESCRIPTION
LonWorks communication module for the PT-9000
Metasys communication module for the PT-9000
Modbus communication module for the PT-9000
Note: Module can be factory or field installed. Specify factory installation when ordering the PT-9000.
141
POWER MONITORING
PT-9000
POWER MONITORING
MISCELLANEOUS TRANSFORMERS
MODELS 189, 190XSUM, 3PT3, CTW3, 468
MODEL 189 ISOLATION CURRENT TRANSFORMER
DESCRIPTION
The Model 189-005 is a wound primary current transformer that provides isolation
in a current transformer (CT) circuit. This is useful in systems using a common CT
return wire or when connecting into existing CT circuits.
189
MODEL 190XSUM SUMMING CURRENT TRANSFORMER
DESCRIPTION
POWER MONITORING
The Model 190XSUM is an auxiliary transformer for use in the secondary of
main current transformers to totalize the outputs of two to five current transformers and provide a single 0-5A output.
190XSUM
MODEL 3PT3 POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER
DESCRIPTION
The Model 3PT3 is specifically designed to monitor voltage of three-phase systems up to 5 kV for use in energy management control and metering applications. With the primary wired line-to-line, this transformer will step-down medium
voltage three-phase circuits to 120 VAC for input to power monitors (PT-9500)
and voltage monitors (PVM-120). Three primary fuses are provided.
3PT3
MODEL CTW3 CURRENT TRANSFORMER
DESCRIPTION
The Model CTW3 provides a low-amperage current output (5A) proportional to
line current on applications requiring a current transformer with an insulation
class of 5 kV. The Model CTW3 primary is wired in series with the line being
measured, and the secondary is connected to power monitors (PT-9500) or current monitors (4CTV).
CTW3
MODEL 468 POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER
DESCRIPTION
The Model 468 is designed for power monitoring or metering applications. It is
operated line-to-line but also may be operated line-to-ground or line-to-neutral at
reduced voltage (58% of rated volts). The Model 468 is ideal for use as an input
to the CLE Series of power monitoring transducers.
468
ORDERING INFORMATION
For complete specifications and ordering information on these products,
call a Trane Representative.
142
PRESSURE
PRESSURE
MODEL/SERIES
PRODUCTS
Try the Kele
DPA Series
Differential Pressure
Transmitter on page
143!
SERVICES
We Calibrate and Ship
the same day!
PAGE
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES
1900-5-MR — Manual Reset Air Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
1910 — Air Sensing Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
24-013/24-014 — Differential Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
3000 Series — Photohelic Differential Pressure Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
AFS-222/AFS-262 — Air Sensing Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
AFS-460/AFS-460-DSS — Manual Reset Air Sensing Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
P32 — Air Sensing Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
P74 — Differential Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
RFS-4001 — Differential Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
RH-3/RH-3-2 — Air Sensing Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS
260 Series — Multirange Differential Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
860D,880D,885D — Differential Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
DPA Series — Differential Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
DPW-692 — Differential Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
M230 — Wet/Wet Differential Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
M264 — Differential Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
M267MR — Multirange Differential Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
M30 — NEMA 4 Differential Pressure Transmitter, Loop Powered . . . . . . . . . . .149
M40 — NEMA 4 Differential Pressure Transmitter, AC Powered . . . . . . . . . . . .149
MPM — Modus Microprocessor-Based Panel-Mount Pressure Transmitter . . . .152
MR — Multirange Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
PCM — Pressure Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
RPM-1 — Room Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
T30 — Differential Pressure Transmitter, Loop Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
T40 — Differential Pressure Transmitter, AC Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
W30 — Stainless Steel Wet/Wet Differential Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . .169
XLdp Series — Differential Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
ZPS Series — BAPI Differential Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
PRESSURE SWITCHES
25 — Pressure-Electric Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
P10 — Pressure-Electric Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS
209 — Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
P51 Series — Stainless Steel Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
PSS2 — Stainless Steel Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
PTX1 — Stainless Steel Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
PVI-1/PVI-2 — Pneumatic Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
SOLUTIONS
Our Pressure section offers
choices that meet your
International needs.
GAUGES AND ACCESSORIES
21121 — Air Duct Impact Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
2000 Series — Magnehelic Differential Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
3VLV — Three-Valve Manifold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
47B/47S — Piston Snubber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
747 Series — Porous Snubber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
A-300 Series — Air Pressure Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
BVA-5 — Bypass Valve Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
PG Series — Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
PT — Steam Pigtail Syphon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
RPS — Room Pressure Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
SD-015/SD-030 — Surge Dampener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Indicates New Products
PSI
PRESSURE
KELE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS
DPA SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele DPA Series Differential Pressure
Transmitter is a very cost-effective, low-range differential air pressure transmitter for duct pressure applications
where measurement of pressure differentials up to 10"
W.C. is required. The DPA Series incorporates a
piezoresistive, silicon micromachined sensing element
and integrated temperature compensation for excellent
performance and accuracy.
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
Low cost
4-20 mA output standard or 1-5/2-10 VDC outputs
24 VAC or 24 VDC power
Brass barb fittings for 1/4" tubing
Two-year warranty
DPA-1-20
Output
Up
Ground
4.3
(10.8)
in
(cm)
1.4
(3.4)
Note: The unit should be
mounted on a vertical
surface (see up
arrows). If the surface
is not vertical, see the
installation instructions
for necessary
adjustments.
Up
3.4
(8.5)
HI
LO
Front View
1/4"
Barbed
Fitting
Side View
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply voltage
Power
Operating temp
Compensated
temp range
Full scale shift
Compatible media
Output signal
24 VAC, 24-36 VDC
0.75 VA
-13° to 185°F (-25° to 85°C)
32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
±2% full-scale output, 0° to 50°C
Dry air or inert non-conductive
gases
Two-wire 4-20 mA (5501 max) or
three-wire 1-5 or 2-10 VDC
(100 k1 min)
Input range
Proof pressure
Accuracy
Repeatability
Weight
0-1" W.C. to 0-10" W.C.
100" W.C.
±1% full-scale output, includes
non-linearity, hysteresis, and nonrepeatability
±0.3% full-scale output, nominal
5.1 oz (144g)
143
PRESSURE
DIMENSIONS
PRESSURE
KELE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS
DPA SERIES
WIRING
24 VAC
Transformer
24 VDC
Power Supply
4-20 mA
Output
Ground
Output
Ground
DPA-X-20
2-10 VDC
Two-Wire 4-20 mA
with 24 VDC Power Supply
Three-Wire 2-10 VDC
with 24 VAC Transformer
Note: Same wiring for 1-5 VDC models
24 VAC
Transformer
24 VDC
Power Supply
Output
Ground
DPA-X-10
4-20 mA
Output
Ground
PRESSURE
2-10 VDC
DPA-X-10
Three-Wire 2-10 VDC
with 24 VDC Power Supply
Note: Same wiring for 1-5 VDC models
DPA-X-20
Three-Wire 4-20 mA
with 24 VAC Transformer
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
DPA
Differential pressure transmitter
INPUT RANGE ("W.C.)
1 0-1
2 0-2
3 0-3
5 0-5
10 0-10
OUTPUT SIGNAL
20 4-20 mA
10 2-10 VDC
5 1-5 VDC
DPA
144
10
5
Example: DPA-10-5 Differential pressure transmitter with
input range of 0-10" W.C. and 1-5 VDC output signal
PRESSURE
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
MODEL M264
DESCRIPTION
The Model M264 Differential Pressure Transmitter is
a low-air pressure transmitter able to sense differential
pressure in both negative and positive ranges. The
Model M264 incorporates a tensioned stainless steel
diaphragm to form a variable capacitor that will produce
variation in the output signal. The Model M264’s durable
design will tolerate an overpressure of 10 psig (68.95
kPa) and has an unconditional three-year warranty.
FEATURES
4-20 mA output signal
Voltage output signal optional
10 psig (68.70 kPa) overpressure
Three-year unconditional warranty
1% accuracy
Reverse wiring protected
Stainless steel diaphragm
Ideal for air and non-conducting gases
APPLICATIONS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
HVAC building automation
Variable air volume control
Environmental pollution control
Lab and fume hood control
Filter monitoring
Medical instrumentation
Velocity pressure measurement
PRESSURE
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply voltage
Current models
Min
Max
Voltage models
Power
Accuracy
RSS (at constant temp)
Non-linearity
Non-repeatability
Hysteresis
Thermal effects
Compensated range
Zero/Span shift
Analog output
Voltage (three-wire)
Input impedance
Current (two-wire)
Max load
Overpressure
Based on circuit resistance
9 + (0.02 x circuit
resistance)
32 + (0.004 x circuit
resistance)
9-30 VDC
0.7 VA
±1% FS
±0.96% FS
0.1% FS
0.2% FS
0° to 150°F (-18° to 65°C)
0.033°F (0.018°C)
0-5 VDC
*50001
4-20 mA
8001
±10 psig (68.95 kPa)
Temp ratings
Operating
Storage
Enclosure
Approvals
Connections
Dimensions
Weight
0° to 175°F (-18° to 79°C)
-65° to 250°F (-54° to 121°C)
Fire retardant, glass-filled
polyester
CE certified
3/16" OD barbed brass
3.00"H x 5.51"W x 1.91"D
(14.00 x 7.62 x 4.85 cm)
0.55 lb (0.25 kg)
Position Effect
(Unit is factory calibrated at 0g effect with
diaphragm vertical)
Range (in)
Zero offset (%FS/G)
0-10
0.12
0-5
0.14
0-1.0
0.22
0-0.1
2.10
145
PRESSURE
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
MODEL M264
DIMENSIONS
4.56
(11.59)
in
(cm)
Zero
1.66
(4.22)
Low
High
Span
Model M264
2.75
(6.99)
2.38
(6.03)
5.06
(12.86)
WIRING
Low
COM EXC OUT
Power
Supply
9-30 VDC
Power
Supply
9-30 VDC
High
PRESSURE
4-20 mA
High Low
0-5 VDC
4-20 mA Output
0-5 VDC Output
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
M264
Differential pressure transmitter
XXX
RANGE CODE (see Table 1 below)
C
4-20 mA output (stocked at Kele)
V
0-5 VDC output (call Kele for availability)
M264 -
2R5WB - C
Example: M264-2R5WB-C Differential pressure transmitter
with a 4-20 mA output proportional to a range of
-2.5" to 2.5" W.C. (622 Pa)
TABLE 1. SPECIFYING RANGE
RANGE
CODE
PRESSURE RANGE
"W.C.
Pa
RANGE
CODE
0R1WD
R25WD
0R5WD
001WD
2R5WD
005WD
010WD
025WD
050WD
100WD
0-0.10
0-0.25
0-0.50
0-1.00
0-2.50
0-5.00
0-10.0
0-25.0
0-50.0
0-100.0
0R1WB
R25WB
0R5WB
001WB
2R5WB
005WB
010WB
025WB
0-24.9
0-62.3
0-124
0-249
0-622
0-1245
0-2491
0-6227
0-12455
0-24910
264-A1
146
SPECIFYING PRESSURE RANGE
"W.C.
Pa
±0.1
±0.25
±0.5
±1.0
±2.5
±5.0
±10.0
±25.0
RELATED PRODUCTS
Conduit housing for M264
±24.9
±62.3
±124
±249
±622
±1245
±2491
±6227
PRESSURE
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS
XLdp SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Ashcroft XLdp Series Differential Pressure
Transmitters are an industrial-quality differential air
pressure transmitter family for use with air and other noncorrossive gases. The XLdp models are available in
ranges from 0.1" to 25" W.C and can withstand up to 10
psid overpressure with no damage to the unit. The allstainless steel XLdp models are available in either
±0.25% or ±0.5% accuracy and come standard with
NIST certification. The compact RXLdp models are stainless steel and Lexan construction, with 1% accuracy. The
CXLdp models have the same technology as the XLdp
and RXLdp models but are designed to be lower cost.
They are ABS construction, 0.8% accuracy, and can be
DIN rail mounted.
CXLdp
RXLdp
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Choices in accuracy
Reliable, stable capacitance sensor
Low-range models down to ±0.05" W.C.
Positive or bidirectional ranges available
Reverse polarity protected
High proof pressure
Calibration curve supplied with XLdp models
DIN rail mount CXLdp models
Power LED on CXLdp models
PRESSURE
FEATURES
XLdp
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply voltage
Accuracy
XLdp
RXLdp
CXLdp
Stability
Output
XLdp
RXLdp
CXLdp
Max mA load
Overpressure
Proof
12-36 VDC
0.25% or 0.5%
1%
0.8%
±0.5% FS/yr
4-20 mA, 1-5 VDC
4-20 mA, 1-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC
4-20 mA
5451 @ 24 VDC, up to
10451 @ 36 VDC (10911 for
CXLdp)
Burst
25 psig (172 kPa)
Operating Temp Range
XLdp
-20° to 160°F (-29° to 71°C)
RXLdp, CXLdp
0° to 160°F (-18° to 71°C)
Compensated Temp Range
XLdp
35° to 135°F (2° to 57°C)
RXLdp
40° to 125°F (4° to 52°C)
CXLdp
35° to 130°F (2° to 54°C)
Operating humidity 10% to 95% RH noncondensing
Weight
XLdp
14.0 oz (0.4 kg)
RXLdp
4.5 oz (0.13 kg)
CXLdp
2.5 oz (0.07 kg)
Response time
250 ms
10 psid (69 kPa)
147
PRESSURE
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS
XLdp SERIES
DIMENSIONS
4.8
(12.2)
1.45
(3.7)
in
(cm)
1.9
(4.8)
0.35 (0.89)
1.32
(3.3)
1.7
(4.3)
1.3
(3.3)
0.20
(0.53)
1.1
(2.8)
2.3 (5.8)
0.4
(1.0)
POWER
0.6
(1.5)
HI
3.3
(8.4)
2.2
3.7
(5.6)
(9.4)
LO
+
-
-
+
ZERO
3.33
2.90
(8.5)
(7.4)
4.2
(10.7)
SPAN
0.6
(1.5)
1.7
1.1
(4.3)
(2.8)
2.8 (7.1)
1.89
(4.8)
CXLdp
3.8
(9.7)
0.9 (2.3)
1.6
(4.1)
0.14
(0.4)
RXLdp
XLdp
WIRING
PRESSURE
OUT
–
V–
V+
24 VDC
Power
Supply
+
24 VDC
Power
Supply
24 VDC
Power
Supply
1-5
VDC
24 VDC
Power
Supply
Voltage
Voltage
4-20 mA
24 VDC
Power
Supply
0-10
or
1-5 VDC
4-20 mA
4-20 mA
CXLdp
XLdp
RXLdp
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
XL
RX
CX
XL
DESCRIPTION
XLdp differential pressure transmitter
RXLdp differential pressure transmitter
CXLdp differential pressure transmitter
3 0.25% accuracy (XL only)
5 0.50% accuracy (XL only)
7 1% accuracy (RX only)
8 0.80% accuracy (CX only)
MB2 1/4" barbed stainless steel fittings
F01
1/8" FNPT (CX only)
42 4-20 mA signal output
15 1-5 VDC signal output (XL and RX only)
10 0-10 VDC signal output (RX only)
ST Electrical termination (XL and RX only)
PRESSURE RANGE "W.C.
P1IW
0-0.1
*P05IWL
±0.05
P25IW
0-0.25
P1IWL
±0.1
P5IW
0-0.5
P25IWL
±0.25
1IW
0-1.0
P5IWL
±0.5
2IW
0-2.0
1IWL
±1.0
2P5IW
0-2.5
2IWL
±2.0
3IW
0-3.0
2P5IWL
±2.5
5IW
0-5.0
3IWL
±3.0
10IW
0-10.0
5IWL
±5.0
10IWL
±10.0
3
MB2 42
ST P1IWL Example: XL-3-MB2-42-ST-P1IWL Differential
pressure transmitter with 0.25% accuracy
that measures from -0.1" to 0.1" W.C. with a 4-20 mA output
101A213-01
148
*Not a valid range for CXLdp
RELATED PRODUCTS
1/2" Conduit/Plenum kit for CXLdp transmitter
PSI
PRESSURE
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS
M30/40, T30/40 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Modus M30/40 and T30/40 Series Differential
Pressure Transmitters are reliable, stable, low air pressure transmitters with 4-20 mA outputs. The M30 and
T30 Series are DC-powered, while the M40 and T40
Series are AC-powered. Ranges up to 2" W.C. utilize a
differential capacitance cell for pressure measurement.
Higher ranges utilize piezoresistive sensors. Ranges are
available from 0" to 0.1" W.C. to 0" to 10" W.C.
M30
All models may be furnished in bidirectional ranges,
which will measure both positive and negative pressure
differentials. Models M30 and M40 are for NEMA 4
applications or applications that require CE-approved
products.
T30
FEATURES
APPLICATION
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
General automation
Medical and analytical instruments
Leak detection
HVAC monitoring of the following:
• Filter differential pressures
• Clean room pressures
• Variable air volume systems
• Velocity pressures
PRESSURE
Position insensitive
No moving parts to wear out
Compact size
Fast response time due to low internal volume
Solid-state circuitry for long life
Low-power consumption
NEMA 4 enclosure and CE certified
(Models M30/40)
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply voltage
M30, T30
M40, T40
Power
M30, T30
M40, T40
Accuracy
Thermal effects
Zero
Span
Output
Max load
M30, T30
M40, T40
Max overpressure
Temp ratings
Operating
Storage
NEMA/IP ratings
T40, M40
T30, M30
11-32 VDC (protected against reversal
of polarity)
19-32 VAC (24 VAC nominal); 100-140
VAC (120 VAC nominal)
0.9 VA
1 VA
1% of range (including non-linearity and
hysteresis)
±0.05%/°C
±0.02%/°C
4-20 mA
7001 @ 24 VDC (= 50 x VDC – 500)
7501
See Figure 1 in “Ordering”
32° to 115°F (0° to 45°C)
-20° to 160°F (-30° to 70°C)
Approvals
M30, M40
Connections
Pressure
Electrical
Weight
M30
M40
T30
T40
Case
M30, M40
T30, T40
CE certified
3/16" dia suitable for 1/8" or 5/32"
ID (1/4" OD) Tygon or polyurethane
tubing; integral filters at both ports
3/8" terminals, #6 screws
1.27 lb (0.58 kg)
1.2 lb (0.55 kg)
0.42 lb (0.19 kg)
0.57 lb (0.26 kg)
NEMA 4, aluminum alloy #A380
Flame retardant, glass-reinforced
NORYL
Vibration resistance 5G to 50 Hz
Zero/Span adjustments
Noninteractive adjustments by means
of 20-turn potentiometers for fine
resolution
NEMA 4 (IP65)
None
149
PRESSURE
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS
M30/40, T30/40 SERIES
DIMENSIONS
5.15
(13.08)
4.7
(11.94)
4.25
(10.80)
5.15
(13.08)
4.7
(12.07)
4.25
(10.80)
in
(cm)
Span
Two Holes
0.19 dia (0.5)
4.54
(11.53)
Zero
Pressure
Lo
Hi
IN
120 VAC – +
1.50
(3.81)
3/16" OD Pressure Fittings
3/8" Terminal Strip
with #6 Screws
2.18
(5.54)
1.48
1.13 (3.76)
(2.87)
0.13
(0.33)
Side View
Pressure
Lo
Hi
-+
3/16 OD Pressure Fittings
0.66
(1.68)
Zero
3.00
(7.62)
3.00
(7.62)
1.50
(3.81)
3/8" Terminal Strip
with #6 Screws
Span
Two Holes
0.19 dia (0.5)
3.00
(7.62)
1.48
1.13 (3.76)
(2.87)
0.13
(0.33)
0.66
(1.68)
Side View
Side View
T40
M30/M40
T30
WIRING
PRESSURE
Signal
Out
AC IN
5 4
3
1
J2
MA
OUT
– +
24 VAC or
120 VAC Power
4-20 mA
Signal
}
IN
AC
–
2
Power Supply
24, 120 VAC
4-20 mA
Signal
Enclosure Ground
M40
T40
Power Supply
11-32 VDC
Power Supply
11-32 VDC
Enclosure
Ground
1
+
–
NC 2
3
T30
Transmitter
4
+
-
4-20 mA Signal
+
Wire
-
Wire
4-20 mA Signal
J1
M30
T30
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
T30
T40
M40
M30
T40
DESCRIPTION
Differential pressure transmitter with NEMA 1 case
Differential pressure transmitter with NEMA 1 case
Differential pressure transmitter with NEMA 4 case, CE certified
Differential pressure transmitter with NEMA 4 case, CE certified
XXX
RANGE CODE (see Table 1 to the right)
POWER SUPPLY (T40, M40 only)
C
24 VAC power
D
120 VAC power
OPTIONS (leave blank for standard unit)
B
Bidirectional (12 mA @ zero pressure)
002
C
Example:
B
T40-002-C-B Differential pressure transmitter 4 mA @ -0.2" W.C.,
12 mA @ 0" W.C., and 20 mA @ + 0.2" W.C., 24 VAC power
Note: NIST certification options available, consult Trane
150
TABLE 1. RANGE
GE
PRESSURE RANGE*
RANGE
MODEL "W.C. Overpressure
CODE
01E
001
0-0.1
5" W.C.
02E
002
0-0.2
5" W.C.
03E
003
0-0.3
5" W.C.
04E
005
0-0.5
5" W.C.
05E
010
0-1.0
20" W.C.
06E
020
0-2.0
20" W.C.
07E
030
20" W.C.
0-3.0
08E
050
0-5.0
5 psid
09E
100
0-10.0
5 psid
* Call Trane for higher pressure ranges or metric ranges
PRESSURE
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS
MODELS 860D, 880D, 885D
DESCRIPTION
Models 860D, 880D, 885D Differential Pressure Transmitters
from Auto Tran are cost effective and 1% accurate, which make
these units ideal for a variety of air pressure applications. The
Model 860D comes standard with a three-wire 4-20 mA output
and is also available with 1-5, 1-6, or 1-10 VDC output. The
Model 880D has a two-wire 4-20 mA output. The Model 885D
is the same as the 880D except with display. The plug-in terminal blocks ensure simple and quick wiring.
880D
FEATURES
• Two- or three-wire 4-20 mA models standard
• 1-5, 1-6, or 1-10 VDC models available
• 20 psig (137.9 kPa) overpressure
• Pluggable terminal block
• Two-year warranty
860D
885D
SPECIFICATIONS
880D, 885D
Load
860D
880D, 885D
Accuracy
Three-wire 4-20 mA (std), 1-5, 1-6,
1-10 VDC (optional)
Two-wire 4-20 mA
20001 min (voltage), 5001 max
(current)
(Vs-14) x 501 max (5001 at
24 VDC)
±1% FS
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
1.35
(3.43)
Stability
Zero
Span
Max overpressure
18-24 VAC/VDC, < 10 mA
14-36 VDC
Temp rating
Compensated
Operating
Humidity rating
Tubing connections
Dimensions
Weight
<±1% FS/yr
<±0.150% FS/°C (0" to 0.5" W.C.)
<±0.075% FS/°C (all other ranges)
20 psig (137.9 kPa) or 2 x FS
pressure, whichever is greater
50° to 122°F (10° to 50°C)
-13° to 158°F (-25° to 70°C)
<dewpoint
1/4" OD, 1/8" ID tubing
2.90"H x 2.25"W x 1.85"D
(5.72 x 7.37 x 4.70 cm)
8 oz (227g)
WIRING
2.9
(7.37)
Power Supply
15-24 VDC/VAC
2.8
(6.81)
1.85
(4.70)
s
2.25
(5.72)
Power Supply
14-36 VDC
Offset Adjust
1.35
(3.43)
4-20 mA Signal
Model 880D, 885D
4-20 mA Signal
Model 860D
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
860D
880D
885D
DESCRIPTION
Differential pressure transmitter, three-wire
Differential pressure transmitter, two-wire
Differential pressure transmitter, two-wire, with display
RANGE
00P5* 0" to 0.5" W.C. (124.6 Pa) with a 4-20 mA output (860D only)
01P0
0" to 1.0" W.C. (249.1 Pa) with a 4-20 mA output
02P5
0" to 2.5" W.C. (622.8 Pa) with a 4-20 mA output
05P0
0" to 5.0" W.C. (1.2 kPa) with a 4-20 mA output
10P0
0" to 10.0" W.C. (2.5 kPa) with a 4-20 mA output
Note: Non-standard VDC output signals available; consult Trane.
* The 00P5 unit may require offset adjustment after installation due to the
sensitivity of the sensor element.
151
PRESSURE
Supply voltage
860D
880D, 885D
Output signal
860D
PRESSURE
MODUS PANEL-MOUNT DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
MPM SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The MPM Series is a programmable, microprocessor-based,
panel-mounted air differential pressure transmitter with a 3-1/2"
LCD digital display. The MPM-1 is the base model with display
and push-button zero. The MPM-2 features high/low status
LEDs, an analog output, 2A or 7A relays, or any combination of
one analog output and one relay contact. The MPM Series is
packaged in a compact 1/8" DIN enclosure and features an
easy-to-use menu face to control the setpoints and the zero
adjustments. The MPM Series is available in several ranges up
to ±20" W.C. or ±5 kPa and includes a gasket for NEMA 4
applications.
DIMENSIONS
FEATURES
PRESSURE
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
MPM-2
in
(cm)
Low cost
High/Low LEDs
Large 3-1/2" LCD digital display
Compact 1/8" DIN enclosure
Easy-to-use menu pad
Zero calibration button
Optional analog outputs
Optional relay outputs
Bidirectional
WIRING
3.75
(9.53)
MODUS mpm-2
1.90
(4.83)
High
1.56
(3.96)
Zero
Mode
Signal
Low
Power
Inches H 2 O
3/16" Barbed
Connection
Ports
Power
Supply
(see specs)
(–)
(+)
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply voltage
MPM-1
MPM-2
Power
Accuracy
Zero
Span
Output
MPM-2
Warm-up time
Proof pressure
5-36 VDC
11-32 VDC
30 mA without relays
100 mA with analog output or relays
200 mA with analog outputs and relays
±0.5% of range
±0.05% FS/°C
±0.02% FS/°C
4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC
Dual contacts, SPDT 2A
Dual contacts, SPDT 7A
Three min. to rated accuracy
Three x range
Temp
Operating
Storage
Relative humidity
Connections
Electrical
Pressure
Dimensions
Outside
Cutout (required)
Weight
Enclosure
32° to 131°F (0° to 55°C)
-4° to 158°F (-20° to 70°C)
10% to 90% RH
Power: screw terminal, 14-26 AWG
Output: screw terminal, 16-28 AWG
Two 3/16" barbs for 1/8" ID tubing
1/8" DIN, 1.56"D
1.90"H x 3.75"W x 1.56"D
(4.83 x 9.53 x 6.35 cm)
1.77"H x 3.62"D (4.5 x 9.19 cm)
1.0 lb (0.45 kg)
NEMA 4 (IP65)
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
MPM
Modus panel-mount differential pressure transmitter
1
Base model
2
Enhanced model
06EB
2.0" W.C.
08EB
5.0" W.C
09EB
10.0" W.C.
11EB
20.0" W.C.
09PB
2 kPaD
11PB
5 kPaD
OPTIONS (MPM-2 only)
R2
2 SPDT 2A relays
R7
2 SPDT 7A relays
AO
4-20 mA or 0-5 VDC analog output
R2AO Combination of R2 and AO output options
R7AO Combination of R7 and AO output options
MPM
152
2
06EB
R2 Example: MPM-2-06EB-R2 enhanced modus panel-mount
pressure meter with range of 2.0" W.C. and 2 SPDT 2A relays
PRESSURE
MULTIRANGE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER WITH DISPLAY
260 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The 260 Series Multirange Differential Pressure
Transmitter with Display incorporates many powerful,
attractive and easy to use features as standard in a
multi-configurable package. One model with very low
selectable differential pressure ranges is perfect for
measuring space static pressure and duct airflow velocity pressure. A second model with higher selectable
ranges is used for sensing duct static pressure. Two similar models, with Pascal engineering units instead of
inches of water, are also available. The 260 Series
comes standard with a wide variety of selectable output
signals, 1-5 VDC, 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA, making it compatible with virtually any building automation
controller.
FEATURES
APPLICATIONS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Space Static Pressure
Duct Static Pressure
Duct Airflow
Clean Room Pressure
Air Lock/Isolation Rooms
Air Filter Monitoring
PRESSURE
Standard LCD on all models
Slide-switches for configuration
Selectable analog output
Designed for AC/DC unregulated power supplies
Display feedback of configuration selection
LCD flashes when out of range
Push button zero
Optional integral duct static probe
Models with ranges in Pascal units
11-point NIST certification available
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply voltage
Current models
Voltage models
Output Voltage
(three-wire)
Current (two-wire)
Accuracy
Non-linearity
Non-repeatability
Hysteresis
Thermal effects
Compensated
range
Zero/Span shift
12-30 VDC
24 VAC/VDC, 3.9 mA
0-5, 1-5, and 0-10 VDC,
5001 min output impedance
4-20 mA, 800 ohms max
@ 30 VDC
±1.0% FS at constant temp
±0.96% FS
0.05% FS
0.1% FS
32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
0.02% FS/°F (0.036% FS/°C)
Maximum pressure
Media compatibility
Temp range
Operating
Storage
Approvals
10 psig (69 kPa)
Air or non-conducting gases
Connections
Weight
32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
23° to 131°F (-5° to 55°C)
Meets CE standards,
UL94V-0 flame resistant
enclosure plenum rated
3/16" OD barbed brass
8 oz (227g)
Position Effect*
Range (in)
0 to 1.0
0 to 10.0
Zero offset (% FS/G)
0.17
0.10
*Unit is factory calibrated at 0g effect with diaphragm vertical
153
PRESSURE
MULTIRANGE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER WITH DISPLAY
260 SERIES
DIMENSIONS
4.75
(120.7)
4.25
(108)
in
(mm)
150°
Ø.86
(21.9)
4.15
(105.4)
1.35
(34.3)
LOW
.63
(15.9)
.63
(15.9)
LOW
.63
(15.9)
1.3
(31.83)
Knockout for
1/2" conduit
9.20
(233.7)
.59
(14.9)
Optional Static
Probe Diagram
1.50
(38.1)
1.03
(26.3)
.87
(22)
SELECTABLE RANGES PER MODEL
PRESSURE
Model
MS1
MS2
MS3
MS4
7.61
(193.2)
Unidirectional ranges
0" to 0.1" WC
0" to 0.25" WC
0" to 0.5" WC
0" to 1.0" WC
0" to 1.0" WC
0" to 2.5" WC
0" to 5.0" WC
0" to 10.0" WC
0 to 25 Pa,
0 to 50 Pa,
0 to 100 Pa,
0 to 250 Pa
0 to 250 Pa,
0 to 500 Pa,
0 to 1000 Pa,
0 to 2500 Pa
WIRING
Bi-directional ranges
-0.05" to 0.05" WC
-0.125' to 0.125" WC
-0.25" to 0.25" WC
-0.25" to 0.25" WC
-0.5" to 0.5" WC
-01.25' to 01.25" WC
-2.5" to 2.5" WC
-5.0" to 5.0" WC
-12.5 to 12.5 Pa,
-25 to 25 Pa,
-50 to 50 Pa,
-125 to 125 Pa
-125 to 125 Pa,
-250 to 250 Pa,
-500 to 500 Pa,
-1250 to 1250 Pa
Voltage - 3-Wire, 1-5, 0-5, 0-10 VDC Configuration
24V AC/DC
Nominal Excitation
+
Power Supply
13 - 30V
EXC COM OUT
+
-
+
24V (DC Only)
Nominal Excitation
+
Power Supply
13 - 30V
EXC COM OUT
+
-
X
MODEL DESCRIPTION
2601
Multirange differential pressure transmitter with display
RANGES
MS1 0-0.1" to 0-1.0" WC ranges, wall mount
MS2 0-1.0" to 0-10" WC ranges, wall mount
MS3 0-25 to 0-250 Pa ranges, wall mount
MS4 0-250 to 0-2500 Pa ranges, wall mount
PROBE OPTION
S Static pressure probe
NIST OPTION
NIST 11-point calibration certificate included
MS1
S
Example: 2061MS1S Model 260 transducer 0 to 1.0 WC"
range with optional static pressure probe.
RELATED PRODUCTS
RPS, SPS
Room pressure sensors
A-301, A-302, A-345
Duct static pressure sensors
160-xxxm, SSS-1000
Duct pitot tubes
154
Voltage
Monitor
Current - 2-Wire, 4-20 mA Configuration
ORDERING INFORMATION
2601
+
-
+
-
Current
Monitor
PRESSURE
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER FROM BAPI
ZPS SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The BAPI ZPS Series Differential Pressure
Transmitter is an accurate, rugged, and economical
solution for measuring and reporting duct/building static
pressure, room-to-room differential pressure or air flow
velocities/volumes. The ZPS Series micro-machined silicon piezoresistive pressure sensor is specifically developed for low differential pressure. The sensor’s custom
Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) provides
five-point error correction over the compensated temperature range for excellent accuracy, repeatability, and stability.
FEATURES
Field-selectable ranges and output signals
Five direct and five bidirectional standard ranges
4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC, or 0-10 VDC output signal
Inches of water or Pascal engineering units
Models with large LCD display
Microprocessor controlled auto-zero
Rugged IP66 (NEMA 4) housing
Short-circuit proof and polarity protected
Three-year warranty
DIMENSIONS
in
(mm)
PRESSURE
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2.13
(54.1)
3.80
(96.5)
4.10
(104.4)
SPECIFICATIONS
Power
4-20 mA output
0-5 VDC output
0-10 VDC output
Load resistance
VDC output
mA output
Output signal
8.5 to 45 VDC
8.5 to 45 VDC or 8.5 to 32 VAC
13 to 45 VDC or 13 to 32 VAC
1 k1 minimum
5001 maximum
Two-wire, 4-20 mA or
three-wire, 0-5 or 0-10 VDC
Power consumption 0.53 VA maximum
Operating temp
-13° to 176°F (-25° to 80°C)
Compensated temp
range
32° to 140°F (0° to 60°C)
Stability
±2% full scale per year
Media compatibility Dry air or inert nonconductive
gases
Tubing connections 1/8" ID or 1/4" ID tubing
Input range
0 to 0.1" W.C. to 0 to 5" W.C.
Over pressure
5 psi proof pressure, 10 psi burst
Accuracy
±0.5% (±1% on 0 to 0.1" W.C.
and ±0.1" W.C. range models)
155
PRESSURE
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER FROM BAPI
ZPS SERIES
WIRING
POWER
SUPPLY
4-20 mA Signal
VDC Signal
– +
– +
BLK
–
+
POWER
SUPPLY
OR
TRANSFORMER
RED
X
WHT
L
BLK
RED
WHT
L
H
4-20 mA Wiring
0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC Wiring
(See Specifications for
power supply information)
(See Specifications for
power supply information)
ORDERING INFORMATION
PRESSURE
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ZPS
Differential pressure transmitter
OUTPUT RANGE
20
4-20 mA (8.5 to 45 VDC supply only)
05
0-5 VDC (8.5 to 45 VDC supply or 8.5 to 32 VAC supply)
10
0-10 VDC (13 to 45 VDC supply or 13 to 32 VAC supply)
PRESSURE RANGE
SR Standard pressure ranges - replace range with option # shown below
Option
Range (inches W.C.)
Option
Range (Pascals)
01
0 to 0.10
11
0 to 25
02
0 to 0.25
12
0 to 50
03
0 to 1.00
13
0 to 300
04
0 to 2.50
14
0 to 500
05
0 to 5.00
15
0 to 1000
06
-0.10 to 0.10
16
-25 to 25
07
-0.25 to 0.25
17
-50 to 50
08
-1.00 to 1.00
18
-300 to 300
09
-2.50 to 2.50
19
-500 to 500
10
-5.00 to 5.00
20
-1000 to 1000
Custom Range (W.C.)
Custom Range (Pascals)
CI
[x.xx to y.yy]*
CP
[xxxx to yyyy]*
ACCESSORY OPTIONS
NT No tube or probe included
ST Static pressure measurement probe
PRESSURE PORT FITTING SIZE
125 Port accepts 1/8" ID tubing
250 Port accepts 1/4" ID tubing
LCD DISPLAY (OPTIONAL)
D LCD Display
MOUNTING KITS (OPTIONAL)
FMK Field mounting kit
FM
1/2" conduit adaptor only
PM
Panel mount
Example: ZPS-20-SR01-NT-125-D-FMK Differential
ZPS
20 SR01 NT 125 D FMK pressure transmitter with 4-20 mA output range, standard
0 to 0.10 pressure range, no tube or probe, 1/8" ID tubing,
with LCD display and a field mounting kit.
*Contact Trane for custom range information and related products.
156
H
PSI
PRESSURE
MULTIRANGE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
MODEL M267-MR
DESCRIPTION
The Model M267-MR Multirange Differential Pressure
Transmitter is a multirangeable, low-air differential
pressure transmitter. One Model M267-MR replaces six
single-range pressure transmitters and is ideal for stocking. Each Model M267-MR is factory calibrated for its
highest range but can easily be recalibrated. The rugged
poly-carbonate NEMA 4 case protects the internal electronics from the environment.
FEATURES
APPLICATION
•
•
•
•
•
HVAC building automation
Static duct pressure
Clean room pressure
Environmental pollution control
Filter monitoring
PRESSURE
• Measure six ranges with one unit
(three positive and three bidirectional ranges)
• 1% accuracy in each range
• 10 psig (68.70 kPa) maximum overpressure
• Rugged IP65/NEMA 4 case
• Available in current or voltage outputs
• Available in ranges up to 30'' W.C. (7.473 kPa)
• Easily reranged with dip switches
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply voltage
Current models
Min VDC
Max VDC
Voltage models
Power
Accuracy
Non-linearity
Non-repeatability
Hysteresis
Thermal effects
Compensated range
Zero/Span shift
Output
Voltage (three-wire)
Input impedance
Current (two-wire)
Max load
Overpressure
9 + (0.02 x circuit resistance)
32 + (0.004 x circuit
resistance)
12-30 VAC or 12-40 VDC
0.8 VA
±1.0% FS at constant temp
±0.98% FS
0.1% FS
0.2% FS
Temp
Operating
Storage
Operating humidity
NEMA/IP ratings
Approvals
Connections
Dimensions
Weight
40° to 150°F (5° to 65°C)
0.033 %FS/°F (0.018%FS/°C)
0-5 VDC and 0-10 VDC
*50001
4-20 mA
8001
±10 psig (68.95 kPa)
0° to 150°F (-18° to 65°C)
-65° to 180°F (-54° to 82°C)
35% to 95% noncondensing
NEMA 4 (IP65)
CE certified
3/16" OD barbed brass, for
1/8" ID tubing
2.68"H x 6.20"W x 2.32"D
(15.25 x 6.81 x 5.90 cm)
9 oz (280g)
Position Effect
(Unit is factory calibrated at 0g effect with
diaphragm vertical)
Range (in)
Zero offset (%FS/G)
0-30
0.06
0-5
0.14
0-1.0
0.22
0-0.1
2.10
157
PRESSURE
MULTIRANGE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
MODEL M267-MR
DIMENSIONS
6.20
(15.75)
in
(cm)
1.73
(4.39)
5.60
(14.22)
1.18
(3.0)
0.80
(2.03)
0.18
(0.46)
2.68
(6.81)
0.75
(1.91)
1.34
(3.40)
0.50
(1.27)
High
Low
0.93
(2.36)
7/8
3/16'' OD Pressure Fitting
for 1/4'' Push-On Tubing
WIRING
Power
Supply
4-20 mA Signal
EXC COM SIG
PRESSURE
ON
1 2 3 4
( )
Power
Supply
Voltage Signal
( )
Current
Voltage
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
M267
M267
DESCRIPTION
Multirange differential pressure transmitter
XXX
RANGE CODE (see Table 1 below)
C
4-20 mA output
V
0-5 or 0-10 VDC field selectable output
MR2
C
Example: M267-MR2-C Pressure transmitter with 1'' W.C. multirange
differential pressure transmitter with a 4-20 mA output.
TABLE 1. SPECIFYING RANGE
RANGE
CODE
MR1*
MR2
MR3
MR4
PRESSURE RANGE
"W.C.
0-0.1
0-0.25
0-0.5
0-1.0
0-1.25
0-2.5
0-5.0
0-7.5
0-15
0-30
Pa
24.91
62.03
124.55
249.10
311.38
622.75
1245.50
1868.25
3736.50
7473.00
"W.C.
0.05
0.125
0.25
0.50
0.625
1.25
2.5
3.75
7.5
15.0
Pa
12.46
31.14
62.03
124.55
155.69
311.38
622.75
934.13
1868.25
3736.50
* MR1 is available only with 0-0.1" W.C. and 0.05" W.C.
158
1.29
(3.28)
PRESSURE
PSI
MULTIRANGE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
MODEL MR
DESCRIPTION
The Modus Model MR Multirange Differential Pressure
Transmitter provides the versatility of selectable ranges and
the dependability of a microprocessor-based product. Units are
available in psig or kPa. Each unit features three unidirectional
ranges and three bidirectional ranges. The Model MR is available with current or voltage output and with optional NEMA 4
housing.
FEATURES
1% accuracy
Jumper-selectable ranges
Bidirectional and unidirectional ranges
Optional NEMA 4 rating
Easily accessible zero adjustment
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply voltage
11-32 VDC (0-5 VDC and 4-20 mA
outputs), 14.5-32 VAC non-isolated
(for 0-10 VDC units)
0.33W max (voltage output)
0.64W max (current output)
±1.0%
Power
Accuracy
Thermal effects
Zero
Span
Output
Current
Max load
Voltage
Input impedance
±0.02%/°C
±0.05%/°C
4-20 mA
501 @ 11V, 11001 @ 32V
0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC
20001 @ 11V, 32001 @ 32V
DIMENSIONS
Overpressure
Temp
Operating
Storage
Medium
Enclosure
Approvals
Connections
Pressure
Electrical
Dimensions
Three x range
32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
-22° to 185°F (-30° to 85°C)
Air and inert gases
NEMA 4 (IP65) optional
CE (except 0.1" and 1.0" models)
3/16" brass-barbed fittings
Screw terminal (14-24 AWG)
4.5"H x 4.0"W x 2.375"D
(11.4 x 10.2 x 6.0 cm)
12 oz (373g)
Weight
WIRING
2.1
(5.3)
in
(cm)
2.8 (7.1)
Cover
2.95
(7.5)
0-5 VDC or
0-10 VDC
Power Supply
(see Specifications
above)
Base
4.5
(11.4)
0.20 dia
four places
Knockout
1/2"
Conduit
three places
3.45
(8.8)
0.25 (0.6)
0.50 (1.3)
Knockout
1/2"
Conduit
Vout
V–
V+
3.5
(8.9)
4.0 (10.2)
0-5 or 0-10 VDC
V–
V+
4-20 mA
Power Supply
24 VDC
(see Specifications
above)
4-20 mA
159
PRESSURE
•
•
•
•
•
PRESSURE
MULTIRANGE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
MODEL MR
CONFIGURATION
The Model MR is configured by means of jumpers
installed on the circuit board. Jumpers are installed by
connecting two adjacent pins on the header. Unused
jumpers are stored on a single pin (halfway off the header), as shown in Figure 1.
PRESSURE
Factory Default Jumper Settings
The output range jumpers are shown in their default
positions. The +10 output option and the BIPOLAR
option are disabled, and the HIGH input range is
enabled.
Unipolar Configuration
The default operating mode of all units is unipolar.
Absolute pressure is measured by the HI input port, and
the LO input port is left open. For accurate measurements made with respect to ambient pressure, a return
line should be run from the LO port to the measurement
point rather than simply leaving that port open to the
atmosphere.
Bipolar Configuration
Bipolar mode is selected by installing a jumper in the BI
ENABLE position. Differential pressure can then be
measured using both ports. When the HI port has a positive pressure relative to the LO port, the output indicates
positive pressure. When the HI pressure is lower than
the LO port pressure, the output indicates negative pressure.
Measurement Range
The default measurement range is set to HIGH. To
select a different range, move the jumper to the MID to
LOW position.
FIGURE 1. CONFIGURATION JUMPER PINS
(shown in factory configuration)
+10V enable
BI enable
Hi range
Mid range
Low range
shown
disabled
enabled
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
MR
Modus multirange pressure transmitter
RANGE
01E
0" to 0.1" W.C., 0.05" W.C.
05E
0" to 0.25" W.C., 0.5" W.C., 1.0" W.C.; 0.125" W.C., 0.25" W.C., 0.5" W.C.
08E* 0" to 1.25" W.C., 2.5" W.C., 5.0" W.C.; 0.625" W.C., 1.25" W.C., 2.5" W.C.
09E* 0" to 2.50" W.C., 5.0" W.C., 10.0" W.C.; 1.25" W.C., 2.50" W.C., 5.0" W.C.
12E* 0" to 7.0" W.C., 15.0" W.C., 30.0" W.C.; 3.5" W.C., 7.5" W.C., 15.0" W.C.
01P
25 Pa, 12.5 Pa
05P
0-62.5, 125, 250 Pa; 31.25, 62.5, 125 Pa
08P* 0-312.5, 625, 1250 Pa; 156.25, 312.5, 625.0 Pa
09P* 0-625, 1250, 2500 Pa; 312.5, 625.0, 1250.0 Pa
12P* 0-1.875, 3.750, 7.500 kPa; 0.9375, 1.875, 3.750 kPa
OUTPUT
C
4-20 mA analog output
V
0-5 or 0-10 VDC analog output (jumper selectable)
OPTIONS
N
NEMA 4 enclosure (optional)
MR
01E
* CE approved
160
V
N
Example: MR-01E-V-N Multirange pressure transmitter with 0" to 0.1" W.C.
range and 0-5 analog output in a NEMA 4 enclosure
PSI
PRESSURE
ROOM AIR DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE MONITOR
MODEL RPM-1
DESCRIPTION
The Model RPM-1 Room Air Differential Pressure
Monitor provides a wall-mounted display of room pressure, positive or negative, with a resolution of up to
0.001'' W.C. (or 0.1 Pa). A red LED and green LED alert
personnel of the status of the room pressure, and a
SPDT relay is provided for a remote alarm when the correct pressure is not maintained. Three analog output signals are provided for remote room pressure display or to
interface with a BAS. The optional AN-1 Annunciator
provides a visual and audible warning of an alarm condition at a remote location.
RPM-1
AN-1
FEATURES
APPLICATION
•
•
•
•
A typical application for the Model RPM-1 is monitoring
hospital rooms such as operating rooms and isolation
rooms for housing contagious patients. Other applications requiring differential pressure monitoring include
the following: fume hoods, clean rooms, computer
rooms, asbestos abatement projects, etc. This sensor is
extremely sensitive and performs reliably at very low
room pressures.
•
•
•
•
Positive and negative pressure monitoring
Red and green room status LEDs
SPDT alarm relay
Three analog signals (0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC,
4-20 mA)
Polycarbonate NEMA 13 enclosure
Dependable solid-state design
Cost effective and easy to install
Optional remote annunciator
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply voltage
Power
Accuracy
Reading
Thermal effects
Alarm output
Output
Analog
Max load
Min load
Alarm output
Contact rating
Overpressure
Temp
Operating
Storage
Operating humidity
Medium
NEMA/IP ratings
Body
19.5-30 VAC, 50/60 Hz
95-135 VAC, 50/60 Hz
190-270 VAC, 50/60 Hz
5W
±1% FS
±0.027%/°F (±0.05%/°C)
±1% of setpoint (lights and relay)
0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA
5801 (for mA output)
30001 (for VDC output)
SPDT relay
5A @ 30 VDC, 4A @ 24 VAC,
5A @ 120 VAC
±6.0" W.C. (±1.5 kPa) (momentary)
32° to 120°F (0° to 50°C)
-20° to 160°F (-30° to 70°C)
10% to 90% RH
Air or noncorrosive, nonexplosive gas
NEMA 13 (IP65)
Glass-filled polycarbonate, flammability rating of UL94-V1
Cover
Clear polycarbonate, flammability
rating of UL94-V2
Dimensions
9.50"H x 7.3"W x 4.55"D
(24.1 x 18.5 x 11.6 cm)
Weight
2.56 lb (1.16 kg)
Analog outputs
0-5 VDC, 2.5V @ zero pressure
0-10 VDC, 5V @ zero pressure
4-20 mA sourcing, 12 mA @ zero
pressure
Deadband
Preset @ 5% of range, field
adjustable from 1% to 20%
Panel indicator lights One red and one green LED
Display
LCD, three digits, 0.5" digit height
Electrical connections 3/4" terminal strip with #6 screws
Enclosure
Color
Light gray
Knockouts
0.85" dia (2.2 cm) on lower front
and back of enclosure
Hinges
Removable, allow hinging from
either side, open 180°
Mounting
Three-point mounting
161
PRESSURE
The Model RPM-1 is housed in a tough polycarbonate
NEMA 13 enclosure with rear or bottom knockouts for
electrical and pressure connections. Models are available for 120/240 VAC or 24 VAC.
PRESSURE
ROOM AIR DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE MONITOR
MODEL RPM-1
DIMENSIONS
9.10
(23.11)
in
(cm)
4.45
(11.30)
3.75
(9.53)
8.40
(21.34)
4.93
7.40 (12.52)
(18.80)
Clear
Window
Knockouts for electrical
and pressure connections
are located on the back
and bottom of the housing.
Cover
1.95
(4.95)
WIRING / PIPING
Optional AN-1
J1
PRESSURE
1
Supply 1
COM 2
SIG 3
2
Power
Supply
3
4
NO
5
NC
6
COM
7
8
9
COM +
0-10V
Relay Out
10
+
11
+
12
-
4-20mA
0-5V
Pressure Connections: Connect the air line from the room to be monitored to the fitting labeled
"room pressure" and the air line from the reference area to the fitting labeled "reference." Three
sets of barb fittings accomodate plastic tubing sizes from 1/8" to 7/32" ID (3 to 6 mm). DO NOT
OVER TIGHTEN THE FITTINGS.
RPM-1
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
RPM-1
RPM-1
DESCRIPTION
Room pressure monitor
VOLTAGE
A
120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
B
24 VAC, 50/60 Hz
RANGE CODE
01E -0.1" to 0.1" W.C. (-25 to 25 Pa), resolution 0.001" W.C. (0.1 Pa)
04E -0.5" to 0.5" W.C. (-125 to 125 Pa), resolution 0.001" W.C. (0.1 Pa)
05E -1.0" to 1.0" W.C. (-250 to 250 Pa), resolution 0.01" W.C. (1.0 Pa)
Example: RPM-1-B-O1E Room pressure monitor, 24 VAC
powered with a range of -0.1" to 0.1" W.C.
01E
B
AN-1
162
RELATED PRODUCTS
Remote annunciator
PSI
PRESSURE
PRESSURE CONTROLLER
PCM SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The PCM Series Pressure Controller is a low-air pressure transducer combined with a microprocessor-based
Proportional or Proportional plus Integral (PI) controller.
The compact size and ease of installation and setup
makes this unit ideal for standard HVAC applications.
Ranges are available from 0-2'', 3'', or 5'' W.C. The setpoint adjustment knob is clearly marked with the appropriate scale for ease of use. All setup and tuning is easily
accomplished by DIP switches and bottle plug jumpers.
Mounting is a snap with the convenient mounting tabs or
a DIN rail mount option. Remote setpoint is also possible
with voltage or milliamp signals. The PCM Series can be
configured for direct or reverse acting control.
FEATURES
Proportional or PI control
Easy setup
DIP switch/jumper setup and tuning
Selectable proportional band
Selectable integral reset rate
Direct or reverse acting
Optional DIN rail mounting
Compact size
Position insensitive
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
High Pressure Port
Low Pressure Port
Controlling duct pressures
Isolation rooms
VAV systems
Inlet guide vanes and VFDs
Paint booths
Relief damper control
Pressure bypass damper control
3.4
(8.64)
Mounting Slots
for Optional
DIN Rail
Adapter
APPLICATIONS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
0.7
(1.78)
4.0
(10.16)
2.9
(7.37)
1.5
(3.81)
4.6
(11.68)
4.8
(12.19)
Setpoint Knob
Pressure Ports
2.0
(5.08)
2.75
(6.99)
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply voltage
Accuracy
Output
Output resolution
Output burden
Port connections
24 VDC +15%, -10% @
75 mA max
±2% of range including
non-linearity and hysteresis
4-20 mA sourcing
255 steps
6501 max
3/16'' dia suitable for
1/4'' OD polyethylene tubing
Max overpressure
Temp
Operating
Humidity
Limit
Local setpoint input
Remote setpoint input
Weight
800% of the pressure range
32° to 125°F (0° to 52°C)
0% to 90% noncondensing
Built-in three-wire potentiometer
4-20 mA, 1-5 VDC
1.3 lb (0.61 kg)
163
PRESSURE
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
PRESSURE
PRESSURE CONTROLLER
PCM SERIES
WIRING
PCM DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
1=ON
0=OFF
Local Set Point
0
1
A1
A2
Remote Set Point
1
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Reverse Acting
0
Direct Acting
1
This Unit's
Reset Per Minute Rate
Range Is:
Off
0.5 1.0 2.0
0-2 "W.C.
A4
0
0
1
1
0-3 "W.C.
A5
0
1
0
1
0-5 "W.C.
Proportional Throttling Range Settings
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
PCM JUMPER POSITIONS
All B switches should be in the off position
PRESSURE
ON
B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
10% 20% 35% 50% 65% 80% 90% 100%
A6
A7
A8
A
REMOTE
FEEDBACK LOCAL
SET POINT SET POINT
A3
ON
Local Set Point Jumper Positions 1, 8, 11
For Remote Set Point:
Voltage Input Jumper Positions 2, 8, 11
Current Input Jumper Positions 1, 8, 11
Remote Set Point Input
+
4-20 mA or 1-5V
– Remote Set Point
Common
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
PWM
INPUT
PWM
INPUT
REM SPT
INPUT
LOC SPT
POT +
LOC SPT
INPUT
LOC SPT
POT –
FEEDBK
INPUT
24 PWR
COMMON
MA SIG
OUTPUT
Optional Remote Set Point Wiring
4-20 mA or 1-5 VDC
–
+ 24 VDC Power
– 4-20 mA Sourcing Output Signal to
+ Controlled Device
SETUP FOR LOCAL SETPOINT OPERATION (FACTORY SETTINGS)
1. Switch A1 off and switch A2 on.
7. All systems will require a fine-tuning process. Start the
tuning process by decreasing the proportional band in
2. Set jumper positions to 1, 8, and 11.
increments through switches A6 through A8 until the
system becomes unstable. Then, return to the DIP
3. Set switch A3 in the on position for direct acting conswitch settings before the system started to hunt.
trol and in the off position for reverse acting control.
8. Switches A4 and A5 are used to select the integral
4. Set switches A4 and A5 in the off position.
reset rate. This feature corrects the offset that is inher5. Set switches A6, A7, and A8 in the on position. This
ent with proportional-only controllers. If it is deterwill set the proportional band at 100%.
mined that the integral reset is needed, increase the
rate until this offset is corrected and still maintains sta6. Set all B switches to the off position.
bility.
ORDERING INFORMATION
164
MODEL
PCM
DESCRIPTION
Pressure setpoint controller
PRESSURE RANGE
020
0-2" W.C.
030
0-3" W.C.
050
0-5" W.C.
OPTIONS
47 DIN rail mounting (must be factory installed)
PCM
020
—
—
47
Example: PCM-020-47 Pressure controller for a
0-2" W.C. range with DIN rail mounting
PRESSURE
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
DPW-692 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The DPW-692 Series Differential Pressure
Transmitter is ideal for monitoring pumps and piping
differential pressures in HVAC and process
systems. The DPW-692 Series incorporates proven
ceramic sensor technology, and the stainless steel housing is compatible with a wide variety of liquid or gas
media. The convenient DIN 43650-A wiring connector
makes installation easy and provides NEMA 4 (IP65)
environmental protection.
• Competitively priced
• Very high quality
• Short circuit proof
• Protection from reverse polarity
• Compact heavy duty housing
• True differential pressure sensing
• 1/2" NPT conduit connector
• NEMA 4 (IP65) environmental rating
• Mounting bracket included
DPW-692-100-KIT
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply voltage
11-33 VDC
Output signal
Two-wire, 4-20 mA
Impedance
8001 at 24 VDC
Accuracy
< ±0.5% FS (includes linearity,
hysteresis, and repeatability)
Wiring connections
DIN 43650-A connector
with terminal blocks
Response time
< 5 ms
Temperature effects < 0.1% FS/°C
Max differential
port-to-port
) 0-100 psid ranges, 174 psid
0-200 psid range, 464 psi on HI,
174 psi on LO
Max system pressure 60 psid range and below;
362 psig (2500 kPa)
100 psid range and above;
725 psig (5000 kPa)
Rupture pressure
1.5 x max system pressure
Piping Connections
1/8" FNPT
Ambient and media
temp rating
4° to 176°F (-15° to 80°C)
Wetted parts
303 stainless, FPM (Viton®)
seals
NEMA ratings
NEMA 4 (IP65)
Approvals
CE
Weight
15 oz (430g)
Note: The DPW-692 can be calibrated ±10%; see installation instructions for this procedure. However, due to the
very small recessed calibration screws, field calibration is difficult and not recommended. Trane can provide
factory custom calibration; allow two weeks for delivery.
CAUTION: Not for use with ammonia.
165
PRESSURE
FEATURES
PRESSURE
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
DPW-692 SERIES
DIMENSIONS
WIRING - 4–20 mA
in
(mm)
1/2"
NPT
2
DIN connector
terminal block
with screw
terminals
3
1
Wiring/
Conduit
Connector
5.12
(130)
1/8" NPT
24 VDC
Power
Supply
+
–
+
4–20 mA
–
3.74
(95)
Low
Port
.83
(21)
Ø 1.57
(40)
High
Port
PRESSURE
.59
(15)
Flathead
Screwdriver
1.73 (44)
2
1
1.18
(30)
.20
Ø(5
)
Bracket
.47 (12)
.78 (20)
MODEL
DPW-692-25-KIT
DPW-692-35-KIT
DPW-692-60-KIT
DPW-692-100-KIT
DPW-692-200-KIT
Conduit Connector Assembly
ORDERING INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION
0–25 psid, 4–20 mA, 1/8" FNPT with bracket and conduit connector
0–35 psid, 4–20 mA, 1/8" FNPT with bracket and conduit connector
0–60 psid, 4–20 mA, 1/8" FNPT with bracket and conduit connector
0–100 psid, 4–20 mA, 1/8" FNPT with bracket and conduit connector
0–200 psid, 4–20 mA, 1/8" FNPT with bracket and conduit connector
Notes: To order a DPW-692 pre-assembled in a five-valve bypass enclosure, replace -KIT with -BVA suffix. To order a
DPW-692 pre-assembled with a three-valve manifold, replace -KIT with -3VLV suffix.
To order a DPW-692 with factory custom range, add -C suffix to complete model number.
To order a DPW-692 for use with refrigerants, add -R suffix after -KIT. A neoprene seal is used in place of
Viton®. Not applicable with -BVA or -3VLV assembiles.
101999
G5100-1101000
166
RELATED PRODUCTS
DPW-692 Series replacement mounting bracket w/screws
DIN 43650-A Replacement conduit connector w/gasket
PSI
PRESSURE
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
M230 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The M230 Series Differential Pressure Transmitter is
a highly accurate differential pressure transmitter that
incorporates a capacitive technology to produce a linear
electronic signal proportional to the differential pressure.
It will measure differential pressure in unidirectional
applications as much as 100 psig and bidirectional applications as much as 50 psig. The stainless steel wetted
parts and elastomer seals make this unit ideal for both
liquids and gases. The NEMA 4 (IP65) case keeps the
internal electronics protected from the environment.
FEATURES
0.25% accuracy
NEMA 4 (IP65) protection
Stainless steel wetted parts
Elastomer seals
High proof pressure
Current or voltage outputs
Mounting bracket included
PRESSURE
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply voltage
Current
Min
Max
Voltage
Max line pressure
Max overpressure
PROOF PRESSURE
Range
Proof
psid
kPa
psid
kPa
0-1
6.89
20
137.9
0-2 13.79
40
275.8
0-5 34.47 100 689.5
0-10 68.95 100 689.5
0-25 172.4 250 1723.7
0-50 344.7 250 1723.7
0-100 689.5 250 1723.7
Accuracy
9 VDC + (0.02 X R);
R = circuit resistance
30 VDC + (0.004 X R);
R = circuit resistance
9-30 VDC (0-5 VDC output)
13-30 VDC (0-10 VDC output)
250 psig (1723.8 kPa)
See Table 1 below
Range
psid
kPa
0.5
124.55
1
6.89
2.5
13.79
5
34.47
10
68.95
25
172.4
50
344.7
±0.25% FS
Proof
psid
kPa
20
137.9
40
275.8
100 689.5
100 689.5
200 1379.2
250 1723.7
250 1723.7
Non-linearity
Hysteresis
Nonrepeatability
Thermal effects
Zero/Span shift
Output
Current
Max load
Voltage
Input impedance
Temp
Compensated
Operating
Storage
Wetted parts
NEMA/IP ratings
Approvals
Connections
Weight
±0.20% FS
0.10% FS
0.05% FS
2.0%FS/°F (1.8%FS/°C)
4-20 mA
4-20 mA
10001
0-5 VDC and 0-10 VDC
*50001
30° to 150°F (-1° to 65°C)
0° to 175°F (-18° to 79°C)
-65° to 250°F (-54° to 121°C)
17-4 PH stainless, 300 Series
stainless steel, viton, silicon
rings
NEMA 4 (IP65)
CE
1/4-18 FNPT
14.4 oz (0.41 kg)
167
PRESSURE
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
M230 SERIES
DIMENSIONS
WIRING
in
(cm)
EXC OUT COM
* Wire colors when
mounted in a BVA
Span Zero
2.15
(5.46)
(*red)
(*brown)
Conduit
Opening
3.01
(7.65)
Power
Supply
4-20 mA
Signal
Current
1.94
(4.93)
2.00
(5.08)
3.05
(7.75)
PRESSURE
Bleed
Screws 1.00
(2.54)
1/4-18 NPT
High Pressure
Port
2.44
(6.20)
EXC OUT COM
1.50
(3.81)
0.875 (2.2)
Opening for
1/2" Conduit
(*yellow)
1/4-18 NPT
Low Pressure
Port
(*red)
* Wire colors when
mounted in a BVA
(*brown)
1.00
(2.54)
Voltage
Signal
Power
Supply
Voltage
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
M230
Differential pressure transmitter
PRESSURE RANGE psid (kPa)
0-1.0 (6.90)
001PD
0-2.0 (13.79)
002PD
0-5.0 (34.48)
005PD
0-10.0 (68.95)
010PD
0-25.0 (172.38)
025PD
0-50.0 (344.75)
050PD
0-100.0 (689.50)
100PD
0.5 (3.45)
0R5PB
1.0 (6.90)
001PB
2.5 (17.24)
2R5PB
5.0 (34.48)
005PB
10.0 (68.95)
010PB
25.0 (172.38)
025PB
50.0 (344.75)
050PB
OUTPUT
C 4-20 mA (stocked at Kele)
V5 0-5 VDC
V10 0-10 VDC
OPTIONS
BVA Bypass valve assembly
3VLV Three-valve manifold assembly
M230
010PD
C Example: M230-10PD-C Differential pressure
transmitter ranging from 0-10 psid with a
4-20 mA output
168
PSI
PRESSURE
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS
W30 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
W30 Series Differential Pressure Transmitters measure differential pressure in liquids and gases compatible
with 316 stainless steel. They are an excellent choice for
HVAC and process applications, including measurement
of differential pressure across flow elements, heat
exchangers, pumps, filters, coils, and liquid level monitoring.
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
316 stainless steel wetted parts
4-20 mA two wire output
Operates on nominal 24 VDC
NEMA 4 cast aluminum enclosure
Accuracy of ±0.5%
Ranges to 200 psig (1379 kPa) differential
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
1/8-28 Female NPT
2 Ports
2.18
High
3.56 (5.5) 1.37
(3.48)
(9.04)
2.36 (6.0)
Mounting
Holes
0.60
(1.52)
0.26
(0.65)
1/2'' Conduit Connection
Low
1.35
(3.43)
2 Mounting Holes for
#8 (4 mm) max screw
4.02 (10.2)
Mounting Holes
4.54
(11.53)
Front View
4.92
(12.50)
Bottom View
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy
Output
Effect of static
pressure
Thermal effect
Zero
Span
±0.5% of differential pressure
range, including non-linearity and
hysteresis, or ±1.0% for 0-6 psid
(0-41.4 kPa) range
Humidity
Operating
10% to 90% RH noncondensing
Wetted parts
316 stainless steel
4-20 mA, 6001 max impedance at
24 VDC
Enclosure
material
Less than 0.25% for static pressure
change from 0% to 100%, or 0.60%
for 0-6 psid (0-41.4 kPa) range
Connections
Pressure
Electrical
±0.05% per °C
±0.03% per °C
Weight
Temp
Operating
Storage
Aluminum alloy #A380 with black
epoxy paint finish and stainless
steel cover screws
1/8'' FNPT
14-26 AWG pluggable terminal
block
1.1 lb (0.5 kg)
32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
-20° to 160°F (-30° to 70°C)
169
PRESSURE
W30 Series transmitters are housed in a compact,
heavy-duty cast aluminum case designed to NEMA 4
(IP65) standards. Their rugged design allows them to
withstand high overpressure without damaging the unit
or affecting calibration. They are ±0.5% accurate and
available in eight ranges up to 200 psig differential. The
W30 Series is a 4-20 mA, two wire, loop-powered
device that operates on nominal 24 VDC.
PRESSURE
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS
W30 SERIES
WIRING
+
Loop Resistance (Ohms)*
24 VDC
Power Supply
-
Enclosure
Ground
N/C
4-20 mA
+ Signal
W30
1000
M
U
M
XI
A
M
500
E
C
N
A
ST
I
ES
R
OPERATING
REGION
0
-
+
1500
0
10
20
30
40 VDC
Power Supply Voltage
*Loop resistance = Wire resistance + Receiver resistance
INSTALLATION
PRESSURE
The W30 Series transmitter should be mounted on a stable surface, free of vibration and pipe strain. A Model PT
steam syphon is recommended to protect the transmitter on steam applications. Another device that might be
required to protect the transmitter is the Model 47 pressure snubber to protect from pressure pulses.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
W30
DESCRIPTION
Liquid differential pressure transmitter
RANGE (call Kele for metric ranges)
RANGE
31E
32E
33E
34E
35E
36E
37E
38E
DIFFERENTIAL
PRESSURE RANGE
psid (kPa)
6
10
15
30
60
100
150
200
(41.4)
(69.0)
(103.4)
(206.8)
(413.6)
(689.5)
(1034.4)
(1379.2)
MAX OPERATING
STATIC PRESSURE*
psig (kPa)
100
(690)
* The maximum safe
momentary
over-pressure at any
port is two times the
maximum operating
static pressure.
300
(2069)
OPTIONS (leave blank for standard unit)
B
Bidirectional (12 mA at zero differential pressure)
BVA Bypass valve assembly
3VLV Three-valve manifold assembly
W30
36E
Example: W30-36E Stainless steel liquid differential pressure
transmitter with a range of 0-100 psig (689.5 kPa)
RELATED PRODUCTS
47B, 47S
Snubbers (brass or stainless steel)
Model PT
Steam pigtail syphon
170
PSI
PRESSURE
ADJUSTABLE PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS
MODELS PVI-1, PVI-2
DESCRIPTION
Model PVI-1 and PVI-2 Pressure Transmitters are
designed to provide economical monitoring of control air
pressure in HVAC applications. Model PVI-1 is furnished
in a unique slim-line design housing, which saves panel
space, and can be ordered with an optional DIN rail
mounting adapter. Model PVI-2 is a snap-track mounted
version with identical operation. Both versions are available with an optional pressure indication gauge.
Both units have LED indication for power and for output
overrange when input pressure exceeds maximum calibrated pressure. The output signal is limited to 110% of
normal full scale (20 mA, 5/10/15V).
FEATURES
PVI-1
PRESSURE
• AC or DC power
• 0-20 psig (0-137.9 kPa) input pressure range
• 4-20 mA and voltage outputs available
simultaneously
• Adjustable zero and span
• LED indication of power and output overrange
• Optional pressure indicating gauge
APPLICATION
Models PVI-1 and PVI-2 convert an input pressure to a
4-20 mA current sourcing and a jumper-selectable 1-5,
2-10, or 3-15 VDC output signal that is directly proportional to the input pressure. The zero and span potentiometers allow for adjustment if the output signal
required is different from the standard calibration.
PVI-2 with Optional Gauge
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply voltage
Accuracy
Outputs
Current
24 VAC ±10% @ 80 mA
24 VDC ±10% @ 35 mA
±0.1 psig @ 77°F(25°C)
4-20 mA current sourcing
(max load 6501)
Voltage
(jumper-selectable) 1-5 VDC (12501 min load)
2-10 VDC (25001 min load)
3-15 VDC (37501 min load)
Operating temp
32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Dimensions
PVI-1
4.9"W x 3.4"H* x 2"D
(12.4 x 8.6 x 5.1 cm)
PVI-2
3.25"W x 3.25"H* x 1.75"D
(8.26 x 8.26 x 4.45 cm)
Pressure connection 1/4" barb
Input pressure
0-20 psig (0-137.9 kPa) factory
setting
Zero adjustable
0-17 psig (0-117.2 kPa)
Span adjustable
Weight
PVI-1
PVI-2
3-20 psig (20.7-137.9 kPa)
0.78 lb (0.35 kg)
0.41 lb (0.19 kg)
* Add 0.6"H (1.5 cm) each for mounting tabs and
2.3"H (5.8 cm) for gauge option.
171
PRESSURE
ADJUSTABLE PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS
MODELS PVI-1, PVI-2
CALIBRATION
WIRING
Zero and Span
Zero and Span
Selection Dip
Switches
Voltage Output Jumper
(Shown in 1-5V Position)
Pressure
Zero Range
Span
PVI-1 (enclosed)
PVI-2 (track mount)
Voltage Output
15V
Output
Voltage
Range
Voltage Out
mA Out
PRESSURE
650Ω
max
4-20 mA Output
COM
24V Power
24 VAC or DC
Power Supply
Example: To monitor a 8-13 psig signal, the pressure
zero range is 8, so set SW1 ON and SW2 OFF. The
pressure span range is 5 (13-8 = 5), so set SW3 OFF
and SW4 OFF.
Pressure
Span Range
5V
10V
Voltage output and 4-20 mA
outputs are simultaneously active.
Zero
Models PVI-1 and PVI-2 are factory calibrated for 0-20
psig (0-137.9 kPa). If another pressure range is
required, first select the pressure zero range from Table
1 and set SW1 and SW2 accordingly. Then, select the
pressure span range (high pressure minus low pressure) required from Table 2 and set SW3 and SW4.
Apply the low end pressure and adjust the zero pot for
the desired output. Apply the high end pressure and
adjust the span pot. Repeat as required.
Power
Out
Over
TABLE 1. PRESSURE ZERO RANGE
ZERO
0.00-4.25 psig (0-29.3 kPa)
4.25-8.50 psig (29.3-58.6 kPa)
8.50-12.75 psig (58.6-87.9 kPa)
12.75-17.00 psig (87.9 kPa-117.2 kPa)
SW1
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
SW2
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
TABLE 2. PRESSURE SPAN RANGE
SPAN
3.00-7.25 psig (20.7-50.0 kPa)
7.25-11.50 psig (50.0-79.3 kPa)
11.50-15.75 psig (79.3-108.6 kPa)
15.75-20.00 psig (108.6-137.9 kPa)
SW3
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
SW4
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
PVI-1
DESCRIPTION
Pressure transmitter
OPTIONS (must be factory installed)
Pressure indication gauge
43
DIN rail mounting
47
Special calibration (specify range when ordering)
C
Example: PVI-1-43-47 Enclosed pressure transmitter with
pressure indication gauge and DIN rail mounting
MODEL
PVI-2
DESCRIPTION
Track-mounted pressure transmitter
OPTIONS (must be factory installed)
Pressure indication gauge
G
Special calibration (specify range when ordering)
C
Example: PVI-2-G Track-mounted pressure transmitter with
pressure gauge
172
PRESSURE
STAINLESS STEEL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
P51 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The compact and robust P51 Series Stainless Steel
Pressure Transmitter is designed for use with a wide
variety of liquid or gas media and for industrial, process
or commercial applications. The 304L and 316L stainless steel wetted parts makes the transmitter ideally suited for media such as water, glycol, refrigerants, and
ammonia.
P51
The P51 Series is available in models with a 4-20 mA
output or with 1-5 VDC output and come standard with a
3' cable. It is very competitively priced and can be
ordered in an optional enclosure assembly, or enclosed
with a gauge for local pressure indication.
FEATURES
Robust compact package
Laser welded stainless steel design
Reverse polarity protection
3' cable standard
Optional enclosure and gauge assembly
APPLICATIONS
•
•
•
•
Hot/chilled water
Refrigeration
Hydraulics
Process control
•
•
•
•
Pneumatics
Compressors
Agriculture
Flow
PRESSURE
•
•
•
•
•
P51 with optional
enclosure and gauge
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply voltage
Output signals
Supply current
Output current
Accuracy
Thermal error
8-30 VDC
4-20 mA or 1-5 VDC
< 5 mA (1-5 VDC models)
0.45 mA Max (sink or source,
1-5 VDC models)
< 0.5% full scale includes nonlinearity, repeatability, and hysteresis
(< 1% on models with range
< 50 psig)
< 0.5% full scale (-40°C to 105°C)
(< 1% on models with range
< 50 psig)
Stability
Response time
Pressure ranges
Proof pressure
Burst pressure
Temp rating
Wetted parts
< 0.25% full scale per year typical
< 1ms
0-15 psi to 0-500 psi
3x rated pressure
5x rated pressure
-40°to 221°F (-40°to 105°C)
304L and 316L stainless steel
WIRING
24 VDC
Power
Supply
–
+
Red
White
4-20 mA
– 4-20 mA
+ Signal
24 VDC
Power
Supply
–
+
Red
Black
White
– 1-5 VDC
+ Signal
1-5 VDC
173
PRESSURE
STAINLESS STEEL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
P51 SERIES
DIMENSIONS
2.36
(60.0)
in
(mm)
Ø 0.16
(4.0)
.85 (21.5)
.51 (13)
Cable length
36 (914.4)
0.86
(22.0)
HEX
Ø .86
(22.0)
1/8 - 27 NPT
ORDERING INFORMATION
PRESSURE
MODEL
P51
P51
DESCRIPTION
Pressure transmitter
RANGE psig (kPa)
15
0-15 (0-103)
50
0-50 (0-345)
100
0-100 (0-690)
200
0-200 (0-1379)
300
0-300 (0-2069)
500
0-500 (0-3448)
OUTPUT SIGNAL
20
4-20 mA output
5
1-5 VDC output
OPTIONS
E
Transmitter in watertight enclosure with stainless steel fittings
E-G
Transmitter in enclosure with a pressure gauge, brass fittings
100
20
Model PT
47B, 47S
ZG-R01
174
Example: P51-100-20 0-100 psi transmitter with 4-20 mA output,
no options
RELATED PRODUCTS
Pigtail siphon for steam applications
Snubbers (brass or stainless)
4-20 mA resistor kit (5001) for 2-10 VDC
PSI
PRESSURE
PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
209 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Setra 209 Series Pressure Transmitter is specifically designed for industrial applications with high performance and low cost requirements. It measures gauge
pressure and can be used with gases or liquids compatible with 17-4 PH stainless steel. The 209 Series is packaged in a rugged, stainless steel/velox housing, which is
small and lightweight. The stainless steel capacitance
sensing element and high level output IC-based circuit
assures excellent stability.
FEATURES
Low cost
Highly accurate
Current output
Lightweight
Compatible with most common applications
Stainless steel construction
Conduit adapter standard
Optional voltage output available
in
(cm)
GND
COM
APPLICATIONS
•
•
•
•
•
DIMENSIONS
HVAC/R equipment
Industrial equipment
Compressor control
Hydraulic systems
Process and refrigeration systems
OUT
3.63
(9.2)
EXC
1.62
(4.1)
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply voltage
Voltage output
Current output
Accuracy
Non-linearity
Hysteresis
Non-repeatability
Stability
Thermal effects
Zero
Span
Output
Current
9-30 VDC
Min VDC = 9 + (0.020 x LR*)
Max VDC = 30 + (0.004 x LR*)
*LR = circuit load resistance
±0.25% FS (determined by RSS
at constant temp)
±0.22% FS
0.10% FS
0.05% FS
0.5% FS/year
2.0%FS/100°F (±1.8%FS/°50°C)
1.5%FS/100°F (±1.3%FS/50°C)
Max load
Voltage
Input impedance
Max overpressure
Temp
Operating
Storage
Compensated
Compatible medium
Connections
Pressure
Electrical
Weight
8001
0.5-5.5 VDC
*50001
See Ordering Information
-40° to 260°F (-40° to 127°C)
-40° to 260°F (-40° to 127°C)
-4° to 176°F (-20° to 80°C)
All fluids compatible with 17-4 PH
stainless steel (not recommended for use with hydrogen)
1/4"18 NPT
Screw terminals
2.3 oz (65g)
4-20 mA
175
PRESSURE
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
PRESSURE
PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
209 SERIES
WIRING
GND
GND
COM OUT
4-20
mA
COM OUT
EXC
0.5-5.5
VDC
LR
EXC
LR
24 VDC*
Power Supply
24 VDC*
Power Supply
* See "Specifications" on previous page for power supply requirements.
PRESSURE
4-20 mA
0.5-5.5 VDC
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
209
Pressure transmitter
PROOF
BURST
RANGE psig (kPa)
PRESSURE (psig) PRESSURE (psig)
001P 0-1 (0-7)
2
250
002P 0-2 (0-14)
4
250
005P 0-5 (0-34)
10
250
010P 0-10 (0-69)
20
500
025P 0-25 (0-172)
50
500
050P 0-50 (0-345)
100
750
100P 0-100 (0-690)
200
1000
200P 0-200 (0-1379)
400
2000
250P 0-250 (0-1724)
500
2000
500P 0-500 (0-3448)
1000
3000
10CP 0-1000 (0-6895)
2000
5000
20CP 0-2000 (13790)
3000
6500
OUTPUT
G2M11 4-20 mA analog
G2M24 0.5-5.5 VDC analog
CONNECTION
A1 Threaded conduit connection
209
176
050P
G2M11
A1
Example: 209-050P-G2M11-A1 0-50 psig transmitter with 4-20 mA
output and conduit connection
PSI
PRESSURE
STAINLESS STEEL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
PSS2 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele PSS2 Series Stainless Steel Pressure Transmitter
is highly accurate and compact, which makes it ideal for HVAC,
building automation, and process gauge pressure applications.
A splash-proof Packard-type electrical connector is provided for
ease of installation. Eleven standard ranges are available for a
wide variety of applications.
PSS2
FEATURES
Splash-proof plug-in electrical connector
For steam, water, glycol, refrigerant, etc.
4-20 mA output
304L / 316L stainless steel wetted parts
Wide range of pressures
High overpressure capability
PSS2 with optional
enclosure and gauge
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply voltage
Accuracy
Models > 75 psi
Models < 50 psi
Thermal effects
8-30 VDC
<0.5% of span
<1.0% of span
-40° to 221°F (-40° to 105°C),
<0.5% full scale
<0.25% of span
<1 msec
Stability (one year)
Response time
Output
Signal
Max load
Overpressure
Proof
Burst
Operating temp
Wetted parts
Connections
Pressure
Electrical
-40° to 221°F (-40° to 105°C)
304L / 316L stainless steel
1/8'' MNPT, 316 stainless steel
Splash-proof Packard connector,
16 AWG cable, 36" length
5.11" x 5.11" x 2.95"
(13.0 x 13.0 x 7.5 cm)
4.4 oz (125 g) with 36" cable
Enclosure dimensions
Weight
4-20 mA
8001 @ 24 VDC
3 x range
5 x range
WIRING
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
36 (91)
16 AWG Cable
2.6
3.5 (6.60)
(8.89)
0.29
(6.74)
0.86 dia
(2.2)
in
(cm)
24 VDC
Power
Supply
-
-
+
+
(red)
(white)
4-20 mA
Signal
Black Wire (not shown)
is Case Ground
0.86 HEX
(2.2)
1/8'' NPT
177
PRESSURE
•
•
•
•
•
•
PRESSURE
STAINLESS STEEL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
PSS2 SERIES
INSTALLATION
Mount the PSS2 Series in a manner that protects it from steam or temperatures outside of its operating range. A Model PT
steam pigtail syphon must be installed in all applications where steam is to be monitored. When monitoring the pressure of a
medium that is above or below the temperature operating range of the transmitter, the sensor should be isolated by a length of
tubing. If 6" to 12" (15.2 to 30.5 cm) of brass tubing is used, temperatures up to 400°F (204°C) can be tolerated. See the
Technical Reference section for information on Steam Isolation and Temperature Protection.
If the PSS2 Series is to be subjected to fluid hammer, pressure surges, or pulsations, a Model 47 pressure snubber is recommended.
CAUTION: Not for use with Ammonia. The PSS2 can be used with media that is compatible with 304L and
316L stainless steel.
PRESSURE
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
PSS2
DESCRIPTION
Stainless steel 4-20 mA pressure transmitter
PRESSURE RANGE psig (kPa)
15
0-15 (0-103.4)
30
0-30 (0-206.9)
50
0-50 (0-344.8)
75
0-75 (0-517.1)
100
0-100 (0-689.5)
150
0-150 (0-1034)
200
0-200 (0-1379)
300
0-300 (0-2068)
500
0-500 (0-3497)
750
0-750 (0-5171)
1000 0-1000 (0-6895)
OPTIONS (leave blank for no options)
E
Watertight enclosure (with stainless steel bulkhead fitting)
G*
Enclosed with pressure gauge (watertight with transparent cover, brass fittings)
LCD*
Model LPI-1C LCD display with enclosure (not watertight, brass fittings)
RED*
Model LPI-1CR red digital display with enclosure (not watertight, brass fittings)
PSS2
100
G
Example: PSS2-100-G Stainless steel pressure transmitter with a 4-20 mA
output over the range of 0-100 psig, with pressure gauge, installed
in a watertight enclosure with a transparent cover
* Brass wetted parts option is only for those mediums compatible with brass.
47B, 47S
Model PT
178
RELATED PRODUCTS
Snubbers (brass or stainless steel)
Steam pigtail syphon
PSI
PRESSURE
STAINLESS STEEL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
PTX1 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The PTX1 Series Stainless Steel Pressure
Transmitter utilizes a thin film strain-gauge bridge and
stainless steel diaphragm to provide a highly accurate,
stable means of measuring gauge pressures up to 2000
psig (13.79 MPa). Splash-proof cable connections protect the wiring, allowing the PTX1 Series to be mounted
near the medium being measured. Optional indication is
available as a digital display or as a 2'' (5.1 cm) gauge.
FEATURES
For steam, water, glycol, ammonia, refrigerants, etc.
1% full scale accuracy
200% proof pressure
Wide range of pressures
4-20 mA output
Reverse polarity protected
Plug-in, splash-proof connector with 6' cable
Stainless steel wetted parts
Stainless steel case
Optional watertight polystyrene enclosure
Optional LCD/red digital indication
Optional gauge available for mediums compatible
with brass
PTX1
PRESSURE
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
PTX1-E-G
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply voltage
Accuracy
Thermal effects*
Output
Max load
Overpressure
Proof
Burst
Temp
Compensated
Operating
Response time
Case materials
10-30 VDC @ 25 mA
±1% FS (full scale)
±0.04%FS/°F zero and span
4-20 mA
6501 @ 24 VDC
200%
800%
-20° to 160°F (-29° to 71°C)
-40° to 200°F (-40° to 93°C)
1 ms
304 stainless steel
Connections
Enclosure
Enclosure dimensions
Diaphragm
Zero/Span
Weight
PTX1-xx
PTX1EG-xx
1/8" NPT male 316 stainless steel
1/8" FNPT
7.09" x 4.33" x 3.54"
(18.0 x 11.0 x 9.0 cm)
17-4 PH stainless steel
Factory adjustable ±10%
0.45 lb (0.20 kg)
2.05 lb (0.93 kg)
* Multiply temperature coefficient by 300% on range numbers 01, 03,
and 04 and by 150% on range numbers 02 and 05. See “Ordering
Information” on next page for range numbers.
INSTALLATION
Mount the PTX1 Series in a manner that protects it from steam or temperatures outside of its operating range. A Model PT
steam pigtail syphon must be installed on all applications where steam is to be monitored. When monitoring the pressure of
medium that is above or below the temperature operating range of the transmitter, the sensor should be isolated by a length of
tubing. If 6" to 12" (15.2 to 30.5 cm) of brass tubing is used, temperatures up to 400°F (204°C) can be tolerated. See the
“Technical Reference” section in the Trane catalog for information on “Steam Isolation and Temperature Protection.”
If the PTX1 Series is to be subjected to fluid hammer, pressure surges or pulsations, a Model 47 pressure snubber is recommended.
179
PRESSURE
STAINLESS STEEL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
PTX1 SERIES
in
(cm)
24 VDC
Power Supply
Splash-proof
Hirschman
Connector
(white)
(black)
72.0 Cable
(182.88)
2.73
(6.92)
Loop Resistance (Ω)
WIRING
909
750
Vmin = 10V + [0.022A*(R Loop )]
500
250
0
0
0.63 Hex
(1.59)
1/8" NPT
male
10
20
30
Loop Supply Voltage (VDC)
4-20 mA
Load Limitations 4-20 mA Output
ORDERING INFORMATION
PRESSURE
MODEL
PTX1
PTX1E
PTX1E-G**
PTX1E-LCD**
PTX1E-RED**
PTX1E-LCD
DESCRIPTION
Pressure transmitter with cable
Pressure transmitter in watertight enclosure, SS fittings
Pressure transmitter in watertight enclosure, with gauge, brass fittings
Pressure transmitter enclosed (not watertight), with LCD, brass fittings
Pressure transmitter enclosed (not watertight), with red LCD, brass fittings
PRESSURE RANGE psig (kPa)
01 30" Hg VAC to 0 (-101.6-0)
02 30" Hg VAC to 15 (-101.6-103.4)
03 0-15 (0-130.4)
04 3-15 (20.7-103.4)
05 0-30 (0-206.9)
06 0-60 (0-413.7)
07 0-100 (0-689.5)
08 0-150 (0-1034.3)
09 0-200 (0-1379.0)
10 0-300 (0-2068.5)
11 0-500 (0-3447.5)
12 0-750 (0-5171.3)
13 0-1000 (0-6895.0)
14* 0-2000 (0-13790.0)
15 30'' Hg VAC to 30 (-101.6 VAC to 206.9)
16 30'' Hg VAC to 60 (-101.6 VAC to 413.7)
07 Example: PTX1 Stainless steel pressure transmitter with 100 psig
pressure range in enclosure with LCD indication
* Enclosed models not available in pressure ranges above 1000 psig
** Brass wetted parts; do not use with mediums that are not compatible with brass
Note: NIST certificate available; contact Trane.
47B, 47S
PT
180
RELATED PRODUCTS
Pressure snubbers (brass or stainless steel)
Steam pigtail syphon
PSI
PRESSURE
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH
MODELS RH-3, RH-3-2
DESCRIPTION
Model RH-3 and RH-3-2 Differential Pressure
Switches monitor low-air pressure, vacuum, or differentials of air pressure. These switches are commonly used
to prove blower operation, sense dirty filters, and monitor
pressure drop across coils.
Models RH-3 and RH-3-2 are shipped with 1/4" compression fittings, suitable for use with 1/4" OD copper or
plastic tubing, and a 12" (30.48 cm) length of 1/4" plastic
tubing.
OPERATION
PRESSURE
When pressure is applied to the high side of the air flow
switch or vacuum is applied to the low side, an internal
diaphragm moves against and operates the lever of the
snap-switch. When the air flow switch is at rest (not
operating), the snap-switch N.C. (normally closed) contact is made to the common terminal. When an increase
in differential pressure operates the snap-switch, the
N.O. (normally open) contact is made to the common terminal. The action of the diaphragm on the snap-switch is
the same whether pressure or vacuum is being sensed.
The wiring from the air sensing switch to other devices
depends upon the application.
SPECIFICATIONS
Setpoint range
RH-3
RH-3-2
Switch differential
Contacts
Electrical rating
0.05" to 12.0" W.C.
(12.5 to 2989 Pa)
0.05" to 5.0" W.C.
(12.5 to 1244 Pa)
0.02" (5.0 Pa) W.C. @ min
setting, 0.8" (199 Pa)
W.C. @ max setting
SPDT
300 VA pilot duty @ 125-277 VAC
15A resistive @ 125 VAC
1/4 hp @ 125 VAC
1/2 hp @ 250 VAC
2.4A @ 24 VAC
0.5A @ 24-125 VDC
Overpressure
Operating temp
Mounting position
Pressure connection
Approval
Weight
0.5 psig (3.5 kPa)
-40° to 180°F (-40° to 82°C)
Any vertical plane
1/4" compression, suitable for
use with 1/4" OD copper or
plastic tubing
UL listed, CSA
2.0 lb (0.91 kg)
181
PRESSURE
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH
MODELS RH-3, RH-3-2
INSTALLATION
Mounting
The RH-3 and RH-3-2 may be used to sense pressure, vacuum, or differentials of pressure and vacuum. Using sheet metal
screws, mount the control vertically on the duct or equipment. Avoid areas of high vibration. Connect the 1/4" tubing to the air
flow switch using 1/4" compression fittings. Insert the other end of the tubing into area to be sensed. See Ordering Information for
static pressure tips and duct impact (total pressure) tubes for use with RH-3 and RH-3-2 switches.
Adjustment
The adjusting screw located in the junction box may be used to change the operating point. The operating range is 0.05" to 12.0"
W.C. for the RH-3, and 0.05" to 5.0" W.C. for the RH-3-2. The differential is 0.02" rising to 0.8" at highest setting. The switch will
operate at 0.05" and reset before 0.03" on the low end. It will operate at 12.0" and reset before 11.2" on the high end. Rotate
adjusting screw clockwise to increase setting.
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
0.44
(1.11)
3.88
(9.85)
1.31
(3.33)
1.38
(3.50)
6/32 Terminals
with Screws and
Cup Washers
PRESSURE
1.94
(4.93)
3/16 dia
2 Mounting
Holes
2.81
(7.14)
6.13
(15.7)
3.75
(9.53)
Junction Box
& Cover
C
NO
3.38
(8.58)
NC
2 #6 Sheet Metal,
slotted pan head
(mounting screws
provided)
0.671
(1.70)
Contact
Designations
Scale Plate
Adjustment Screw (turn clockwise
to increase set point)
High Pressure Inlet
1.63
(4.10)
3.25
(8.25)
Low Pressure Inlet
0.78
(1.98)
(Connector with nut and ferrule,
will accept 1/4" O.D. tubing
of copper, aluminum, or plastic
0.71 - both inlets, typical)
(1.80)
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
RH-3
RH-3-C
RH-3-2
RH-3-2-C
RANGE
0.05-12.0" W.C. (12.5-2989 kPa)
Calibrated for your application (specify setpoint)
0.05-5.0" W.C. (12.5-1244 kPa)
Calibrated for your application (specify setpoint)
RELATED PRODUCTS
#21121
Duct impact tube
A-301, A-302
Static pressure tip
182
PSI
PRESSURE
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES
MODELS AFS-222, AFS-262, AFS-460
DESCRIPTION
Model AFS-222, AFS-262, and AFS-460 Differential
Pressure Switches are general-purpose, airflow-proving switches designed for HVAC and building automation
applications. They may be used to sense positive, negative, or differential air pressure. The AFS-460 models
have a manual reset pushbutton; the NC switch will open
upon pressure rise to setpoint but will not close until the
reset button is pushed.
AFS-222
The plated housing contains a diaphragm, calibration
spring, and snap-acting SPDT switch. The sample connections located on each side of the diaphragm accept
1/4'' OD tubing via the integral compression ferrule and
nut. An enclosure cover guards against accidental contact with the live switch terminal screws and the setpoint
adjusting screw. The enclosure will accept a 1/2'' conduit
connection.
AFS-460
FM
FEATURES
APPLICATIONS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Two-year warranty
SPDT contacts
Adjustable setpoint
For static or differential pressure
UL, CSA, FM approved
Manual reset, Model AFS-460
Proving fan status
Monitoring filter for excess pressure drop
Monitoring duct static pressure
Proving air flow
Monitoring damper status
SPECIFICATIONS
Setpoint range
AFS-222
AFS-262
AFS-460
AFS-460-DSS
0.05'' to 12.0'' W.C.
(12.5 to 2989 Pa)
0.05'' to 2.0'' W.C.
(12.5 to 498 Pa)
0.04'' to 12.0'' W.C.
(10.0 to 2989 Pa)
2.0'' to 12.0'' W.C.
(498 to 2989 Pa)
Switch differential,
AFS-222, 202 only Progressive, increasing from
approximately 0.02'' W.C.
(5.0 Pa) @ min setpoint to
approximately 0.8'' W.C.
(199 Pa) @ max setpoint
Contacts
AFS-222, -202
AFS-460
AFS-460
SPDT
SPST NC
2 SPST NC
Electrical rating
AFS-222, -202
AFS-460
300 VA pilot duty @ 115-277 VAC
15A noninductive, 277 VAC, 60 Hz
24 VAC @ 2.4A
15A @ 125-277 VAC
1/4 HP @ 125 VAC
1/2 HP @ 250 VAC
1/2A @ 125 VDC
Overpressure
0.5 psig (3.5 kPa)
Operating temp
-40° to 180°F (-40° to 82°C)
Pressure
connections
Connections
Ferrule and nut compression type
connectors will accept 1/4" OD
tubing
Screw-top terminals with cup
washers
Approval/
Recognition
UL listed, FM, CSA, CE
Weight
2.0 lb (0.91 kg)
Life
AFS-222, -202
AFS-460
100,000 cycles min @ 0.5 psig
(3.5 kPa) max pressure each cycle
and at max electrical load
6,000 cycles
183
PRESSURE
APPROVED
PRESSURE
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES
MODELS AFS-222, AFS-262, AFS-460
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
6.13
(15.57)
2.81
(7.14)
Low Pressure Inlet (B)
3.25
(8.23)
3.88
(9.86)
3.25
(8.23)
C NO NC
0.710
(1.80)
1.38
(3.50)
1.63
(4.14)
1.94
(4.93)
0.44
(1.12)
Two Mounting Holes
3/16 required
High Pressure Inlet (A)
0.78
(1.98)
OPERATION
PRESSURE
Select a mounting location that is free from vibration. The switch
must be mounted with the diaphragm in any vertical plane in order to
obtain the lowest specified operating setpoint. Avoid mounting with
the sample line connections in the up position. Surface mount via
the two 3/16'' diameter holes in the integral mounting bracket.
The Model AFS-460-DSS has a lead switch (A) and a lag switch (B).
The lead switch trips according to the setpoint knob and the lag
switch trips after the lead switch. If dual-switch simultaneous operation is required order (not stock at Trane) AFS-460-136 (120 VAC
power) or AFS-460-137 (24 VAC power).
Locate sampling probe a minimum of 1-1/2 duct diameters downstream from the air source. Install the sampling probe as close to the
center of the airstream as possible.
Refer to the Dimensions drawing to identify the high pressure inlet
(A) and the low pressure inlet (B), and connect the sample lines as
follows:
Positive Pressure Only
Connect the sample line to (A);
(B) remains open to the atmosphere.
Negative Pressure Only
Connect the sample line to (B);
(A) remains open to the atmosphere.
Two Negative Samples
Connect the higher negative sample to (B);
Connect the lower negative sample to (A).
Two Positive Samples
Connect the higher positive sample to (A);
Connect the lower positive sample to (B).
One Positive and One Negative Sample
Connect the positive sample to (A);
Connect the negative sample to (B).
WIRING
NO
C
C
C
NC
NC
Action on a rise in differential pressure
Opens on a rise in differential pressure
AFS-222, -262
AFS-460
Opens on a
rise in
differential
pressure
A
Lead
NC
C
B
Lag
NC
AFS-460-DSS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
AFS-222
AFS-222-C
AFS-262
AFS-262-C
AFS-460
AFS-460-C
AFS-460-DSS
AFS-400-DSS-C
DESCRIPTION
0.05-12" W.C. (12.5-2989 Pa)
Calibrated for your application (specify setpoint)
0.05-2" W.C. (12.5-498 Pa)
Calibrated for your application (specify setpoint)
Manual reset differential pressure switch
Calibrated for your application (specify setpoint)
Manual reset differential pressure switch with two SPST switches
Calibrated for your application (specify setpoint)
RELATED PRODUCTS
#21121
Duct impact tube
A-301, A-302
Static pressure tip
184
PSI
PRESSURE
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES
MODELS RFS-4001
DESCRIPTION
Models RFS-4001-025 and RFS-4001-031 Differential
Pressure Switches are general-purpose, airflow-proving
switches designed for HVAC and building automation applications. They may be used to sense positive, negative, or
differential air pressure.
The plated housing contains a diaphragm, calibration spring
and snap-acting switch. The Model RFS-4001-025 pressure connections located on each side of the diaphragm,
accept copper or flexible 1/4'' OD tubing. The Model RFS4001-031 has tri-barb connectors that accept 1/8", 1/4", and
5/16" ID flexible tubing. An enclosure cover guards against
accidental contact with the live-switch terminal screws and
the setpoint-adjusting screw. The enclosure will accept a
1/2'' conduit connection.
•
•
•
•
•
Two-year warranty
Adjustable setpoint
Knockout for 1/2" conduit
Enclosed terminals
Compression or barb fittings
US
DIMENSIONS
4.625
(117)
SPECIFICATIONS
Setpoint range
Differential
Mounting position
Media compatibility
Contacts
Electrical rating
1.00
(25)
0.15'' to 5.0'' W.C.
(37.3 to 1245 Pa)
Progressive, increasing from
0.05" WC at minimum setpoint to
0.3" WC at maximum setpoint
Diaphragm in any vertical plane,
avoid upward pressure connections
Air or gases that will not degrade
silicone
SPDT
300 VA pilot duty @ 115-277
VAC, 15A non-inductive to 277
VAC
Electrical
connections
Screw teminals with cup washers
Pressure connections
RFS-4001-025
1/4'' compression, suitable for use
with 1/4'' copper or plastic tubing
RFS-4001-031
Tri-barb connectors for 1/8", 1/4"
and 5/16" ID tubing
Max overpressure
0.5 psig (3.5 kPa)
Operating temp
-40° to 180°F
(-40° to 82°C)
Weight
14 oz. (0.4 kg)
Approval
C-UR-US, CSA
Life
100,000 cycles minimum @ max
pressure and at max rated load
4.098 (104)
3.75 (95)
4.125 (105)
1.365 (35)
2.959 (75)
0.798 (20)
1.421 (36)
0.173 (4)
ORDERIN INFORMATION
MODEL
DESCRIPTION
RFS-4001-025 0.15" to 5.0" W.C., comp. fittings
RFS-4001-031 0.15" to 5.0" W.C., tri-barb fittings
Note: Add -C suffix for custom calibration
RELATED PRODUCTS
#21121
Duct impact tube
A-301, A-302
Static pressure tip
185
PRESSURE
FEATURES
PRESSURE
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH
P32 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The P32 Series Differential Pressure Switch is used to
detect differential pressure or low positive gauge pressure by using only the high pressure connection and
leaving the low pressure connector open. It can also
detect vacuum by using only the low pressure connection and leaving the high pressure connector open to
ambient pressure.
The P32 Series is factory set at the bottom of its operating range with the diaphragm in a vertical plane. The setting will change if mounted in other positions.
P32 Switch
with L Bracket
The P32AF has a close differential, and the P32AC has
a standard differential.
APPLICATION
PRESSURE
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
• Air proving with electric duct heaters, humidifiers,
etc.
• Maximum air flow controller for variable volume
systems
• Reheat duct-powered systems
• Clogged filter detection
• Detection of icing of air conditioning coils and
initiation of defrost cycle
Easy-to-read setpoint scale
Versatile mounting options
Durable construction
setpoint switching repeatability
SPECIFICATIONS
P32 Series
Ambient temp
Connector
Overpressure
Mounting
Shipping weight
Electrical ratings
-40°F (-40°C) min, 165°F (75°C) max
High pressure: metal 1/8" FNPT inside x 1/2" NPSM outside; low pressure: molded 1/8" FNPT
1 psig (6.9 kPa)
Direct or with mounting bracket (supplied)
1.0 lb (0.45 kg); 1.1 lb (0.5 kg) with fittings
Type P32AF Close Differential, 1/4 hp
Motor Ratings VAC
AC full load amp
AC locked rotor amp
120
5.8
34.8
208
3.35
20.1
Noninductive or resistive load 10A, 24-277 VAC
Pilot duty - 125 VA, 24 VAC
360 VA, 120-277 VAC
Model
Contact
Action
Range
"W.C. (Pa)
P32AC-1
P32AC-2*
P32AF-1
P32AF-2*
SPDT
SPDT
SPDT
SPDT
0.15-12 (37.4-2990)
0.05-5 (12.5-1246)
0.05-5 (12.5-1246)
0.05-5 (12.5-1246)
Motor Ratings VAC
AC full load amp
AC locked rotor amp
120
9.8
58.8
R
208
5.65
33.9
240
4.9
29.4
Noninductive or Resistive Load 10A, 24-277 VAC
Pilot duty - 125 VA, 24 VAC
360 VA, 120-277 VAC
Differential
"W.C. (Pa)
Min Set Point Max Setpoint
0.07 (17.4)
0.6 (149.5)
0.04 (10.0)
0.20 (49.8)
0.025 (6.2)
0.11 (27.4)
0.025 (6.2)
0.11 (27.4)
Setpoint
Scale
Plate
Bracket
Adjustable
Adjustable
Adjustable
Adjustable
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
L
U
L
U
*Supplied with 1/4" compression fitting, 4" extension tube, 2 mounting screws, gasket, angle barb fitting installed
ORDERING INFORMATION
Specify model number as shown in Specifications above.
Add a -C to the end of the model number to request specific calibration.
186
B
Action on Increase
of Pressure
Type P32AC Standard Differential, 1/2 hp
240
2.9
17.4
Y
PSI
PRESSURE
DIFFERENTIAL AND MANUAL RESET PRESSURE SWITCHES
1910 SERIES, MODEL 1900-5-MR
DESCRIPTION
1910 Series Differential Pressure Switches are
designed to monitor the differential pressure of air in
HVAC applications. These automatic reset switches are
available in ranges from 0.07" to 20" W.C. (17.4-4982.0
Pa) and have SPDT screw-type electrical connections.
The optional Model A-602 air filter kit includes two static
pressure tips and aluminum tubing and fittings, and it
allows the 1910 Series to monitor filter pressure drop.
ORDERING INFORMATION
1910-00
1910-0
1910-1
1910-5
1910-10
1910-20
OPERATING
RANGE
"W.C.
(Pa)
0.07-0.15
(17.4-37.4)
0.15-0.5
(37.4-124.6)
0.4-1.6
(99.6-398.6)
1.4-5.5
(378.7-1370.0)
3.0-11.0
(747.3-2740.1)
4.0-20.0
(996.4-4982.0)
APPROXIMATE
DEADBAND
at Min
at Max
Set Point
Set Point
0.04 (10.0)
0.05 (12.5)
1910-5
0.10 (24.9)
0.15 (37.4)
0.15 (37.4)
0.20 (49.8)
0.3 (74.7)
0.4 (99.6)
0.4 (99.6)
0.5 (124.6)
DIMENSIONS
0.4 (99.6)
0.6 (149.5)
3-1/2" dia x 2-1/2" depth (8.9 x 6.4 cm)
PRESSURE
MODEL
Add a -C at the end of the model number to request
specific calibration
DESCRIPTION
The Model 1900-5-MR Manual Reset Pressure Switch
is designed to monitor duct static and shutdown the
blower when excess pressure occurs. The switch must
be manually reset before the system can start again.
Switch contacts are SPDT with solder-type connections.
The Model 1900-5-MR measures static pressure only,
not differential pressure. Order the Model A-399 duct
pressure kit separately if needed.
DIMENSIONS
3-1/2" dia x 2-1/2" depth (8.9 x 6.4 cm)
1900-5-MR
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
1900-5-MR
DESCRIPTION
Manual reset pressure switch
Add a -C at the end of the model number to request specific calibration.
RELATED PRODUCTS
A-602
Mounting kit for air filter applications
A-399
Duct pressure kit for 1900-5-MR
187
PRESSURE
PHOTOHELIC® DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH / GAUGE
3000 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The 3000 Series Photohelic ® Differential Pressure
Switch/Gauge combines two versatile, precise pressure
switches with a time-proven Magnehelic ® pressure
gauge. The gauge reading is unaffected by switch operation. External knobs are used to adjust the two DPDT
switch setpoints. Switch setpoints (indicated by red
pointers) and system pressure are fully visible at all
times. Ranges are available from 0" to 0.25" W.C. up to
10'' W.C. full scale. The 3000 Series may be ordered
with the switch assembly remote-mounted to facilitate
panel mounting.
PRESSURE
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
A3002
Two DPDT switches, externally adjustable
®
Dependable Magnehelic pressure indication
2% F.S. accuracy
Visible switch setpoints and pressure indication
Easily accessible zero adjustment
4" (10.2 cm) easy-to-read white dial
Optional manual reset
Optional remote mounting of switch assembly
UL/CSA, CE approvals standard
APPLICATION
The 3000 Series may be used for applications requiring
one or two stages of pressure alarm or control, as well
as continuous pressure indication. Both high and low
pressure relays can be wired to latch and remain energized by using an optional auxiliary manual reset switch.
The 3000 Series may also be used to control tri-state
(floating) actuators for inlet vane or damper control of
duct pressure.
SPECIFICATIONS
Power required
Accuracy photohelic
Gauge connections
Electrical rating
of relays
Overpressure
110V, 50/60 Hz
±2% of full scale @ 70°F (21°C)
(3% on -0, 4% on -00 models)
1/8" FNPT
10A @ 120 VAC, 60 Hz resistive
20" Hg to 25 psig (172 kPa) total
pressure on either side of
diaphragm
Ambient temp
Conduit opening
Finish
Cutout required
Depth required
Weight
20° to 120°F (-7° to 49°C)
3/4" conduit
Baked case exterior, dark gray
hammerloid
4.75" (12.06 cm) dia
7.63" (19.37 cm)
4 lb (1.81 kg)
Note: For use with air or compatible gases only
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
A3000-00
A3000-0
A3001
A3002
A3003
RANGE "W.C.
0-0.25
0-0.50
0-1.0
0-2.0
0-3.0
MODEL
A3004
A3005
A3006
A3008
A3010
MINOR DIVISION
0.005
0.01
0.02
0.05
0.10
RANGE "W.C.
0-4.0
0-5.0
0-6.0
0-8.0
0-10
MINOR DIVISION
0.10
0.10
0.20
0.20
0.20
OPTIONS
RMR
TAMP
A-601
Remote mounting gauge and separate relay assembly with 5' (12.7 cm) interconnecting cable
(additional cable available in 5' increments)
Contact Trane for pressure ranges other
Tamper-proof knobs
than those shown (metric ranges, air
Manual reset switch (one required for each circuit)
velocity scales, etc.)
RELATED PRODUCTS
A-301, A-302
Static pressure tips
188
PSI
PRESSURE
NEMA 4 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH
MODELS 24-013, 24-014
DESCRIPTION
Delta-Pro Model 24-013 and 24-014 NEMA 4
Differential Pressure Switches offer a unique blend of
small size, excellent performance, environmental protection, and attractive price. They can be used with liquids
or gases.
The precision snap-acting switch and sensitive opposing
diaphragms combine to provide a narrow deadband and
repeatability of approximately ±1% of span. Mechanical
contact life is 10 million cycles, and actual switch life can
be very long with typical pilot duty loads.
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
SPDT switch with screw terminals
Gasketed zinc-plated steel cover
Strong, corrosion-resistant polyester enclosure
External multiturn adjusting screw for excellent
resolution
7/8" hole for 1/2" NPT conduit connection
Corrosion-resistant brass port
Clearance holes for surface mounting
NEMA 4 enclosure
24-013
APPLICATION
Models 24-013 and 24-014 are used typically to sense
differential pressure across devices such as oil or water
filters, pumps, heat exchangers, chillers, coils, etc. They
normally provide an alarm or shutdown function in applications where there is insufficient flow in a system or
when excessive pressure differential indicates a problem.
They may also be used to indicate pump status.
SPECIFICATIONS
Temp
Storage
Operating
Max media
Wetted parts
Enclosure
Switch life
Approvals
Ratings
Wiring
-20° to 180°F (-29° to 82°C)
30° to 160°F (-1° to 71°C)
200°F (93°C) @ 100 psig (689.5 kPa)
working pressure
Polyurethane diaphragm, ethylene
propylene, polysulphone, brass
Reinforced nylon body, zinc-plated steel
cover with neoprene gasket, NEMA 4
SPDT precision snap-acting design with
mechanical contact life, 10 million cycles
(actual life depends on load and cycle frequency)
UL listed, File #E42272; CSA 22.2
approval
5A resistive and 5A inductive @ 125 VAC
and 250 VAC, 1/4 hp; 5A resistive and 3A
inductive @ 30 VDC; 0.5A resistive and
0.25A inductive @ 125 VDC; gold clad silver
contacts for min loads of 5 mA @ 6 VDC,
2 mA @ 12 VDC, and 1 mA @ 24 VDC
Vibration
Shock
System operating
pressure
Differential proof
pressure
Adjustment
Pressure port
Mounting
Repeatability
Weight
7/8" hole for 1/2" conduit connector
(not provided), three screw terminals
16 AWG max wire size
MIL STD 810C, 2.5G, 5-500 CPS
15G, 10 ms duration
0-150 psig (0-1034.3 kPa) up to 160°F
(71°C) air temp
150 psid (1034.3 kPa) with surges up
to 160°F (71°C) air temp, without loss of
adjustability
Multiturn screw, accessible from outside enclosure
1/4 NPTF brass
Surface mount with two screws through
clearance holes or mount by ports
Typically ±1% of span
6.5 oz (184.3g)
189
PRESSURE
The Delta-Pro NEMA 4 enclosure is small, yet it can still
accommodate a 1/2" NPT conduit connection and terminal block wiring. The Delta-Pro is not only lightweight but
also strong and durable. The adjustment screw is externally accessible for convenience and multiturn for good
setting resolution. The Delta-Pro’s force-balance design
provides excellent vibration resistance.
PRESSURE
NEMA 4 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH
MODELS 24-013, 24-014
DIMENSIONS
Factory adjustment only, do not change
in
(cm)
2.65
(6.75)
0.91
(2.31)
Setting
Adjustment
1.84
(4.68)
3.5
(8.89)
2.375
(6.03)
2.37
(6.03)
0.875
dia
Clear
for #6
Screw
2.0
(5.08)
NC NO COM
Top View
3.13
(7.94)
PRESSURE
INSTALLATION
Mounting
Mount unit in any position. Locate where shock and
vibration are minimal and ambient temperature is below
160°F (71°C).
Surface Mounting
Insert two #6 screws through holes on 2" (5.08 cm) centers (recommended mounting for maximum vibration
resistance).
Suspended Unit Mounting
Mount unit from its two ports. Always hold a wrench on
the pressure port when making pressure connection.
Making Pressure Connection
Connect the high side pressure to the port labeled high.
Use a wrench on the pressure port and hold the unit
steady. Then, thread a 1/4 NPTM fitting into the port.
CAUTION: Never tighten by turning the switch
body into the fitting.
Wiring
Back out the screw terminal just enough to put stripped
wire under this terminal block clamp. Maximum wire size
is 16 AWG.
Setpoint Adjustment
Use a screwdriver to turn the external adjusting screw.
Turn “in” (clockwise) to increase differential pressure
setting. For best setting accuracy, set the switch using
the actual working pressures encountered in the application. The switch will make on a differential pressure rise
to setpoint and break on a fall below setpoint minus the
deadband (subtractive deadband).
PERFORMANCE CHART
MODEL*
24-013
24-014
ADJUSTABLE SETTING RANGE psid (kPa)
On Fall
On Rise
PORT SWITCH DEADBAND
psig (kPa)
Min
Max
Min
Max
1.0 (6.895 kPa) 9.0 (62.1 kPa) 2.0 (13.8 kPa) 10.0 (69.0 kPa) 1/4 NPTF
5A
0.75 (5.2)
4.0 (27.6 kPa) 43.5 (299.9 kPa) 5.5 (37.9 kPa) 45.0 (310.3 kPa) Brass
5A
1.0 (6.9)
* Add the suffix -C to have the unit precalibrated. Please specify the set point.
ORDERING INFORMATION
Specify model number as shown in Performance Chart above.
190
PRESSURE
PSI
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES
P74 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Model P74 Differential Pressure Switch measures
the difference in pressure exerted upon its two sensing
elements and operates an SPDT switch at the differential pressure setpoint. The setpoint may be adjusted
without removing the cover and is visible on a calibrated
scale.
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
Brass bellows
Completely enclosed contact mechanism
Externally adjustable with visual setpoint scale
Universal mounting bracket supplied
Heavy-duty elements withstand high overrun
pressure
• For air, oil, or other liquids
APPLICATIONS
These differential pressure controls are used as operating controls and/or alarm controls. They are available for
applications sensing air, oil, or liquid. Typical applications include proof-of-flow across a chiller or water-cooled condenser, proof-of-flow in a heating system, and lube oil pressure sensing on refrigeration compressors. In the water
chiller application, the control provides low temperature protection. On proof-of-flow applications, the control measures pressure drop across two different points in either a closed water circulating system or a city water supply system. On a proof-of-flow application in a water chiller system, the control activates an alarm or signal light to warn the
operator if a loss of water flow occurs.
SPECIFICATIONS
MODEL*
PRESSURE
DIFFERENTIAL RANGE
psid (kPa)
1/4" Male
Flare
1/4" FNPT
P74FA-1
P74FA-5
P74JA-2
CONNECTOR
SIZE
8-60
(55-414)
P74EA-8
2-30
(14-207)
SWITCH
ACTION
SPDT
Snap-Acting
SPDT
Snap-Acting
1/4" Male
SPDT
Flare
Floating
36" Capillary
SPDT
with 1/4" Flare Snap-Acting
Nut
ELECTRICAL
RATING
6A
120V, 50/60 Hz
6A
120V, 50/60 Hz
1A
24V, 50/60 Hz
16A
120V, 50/60 Hz
SWITCH
DIFFERENTIAL
psig (kPa)
1.5
(10)
MAX OVERRUN
PRESSURE
psig (kPa)
180
(1241)
2.5
(17)
* Add -C to the end of the model number to request specific calibration. Please specify the set point.
ORDERING INFORMATION
Specify model number as shown in Specifications above.
191
PRESSURE
P74FA-1
PSI
PRESSURE
PRESSURE SWITCHES
P10 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
P10 Series Pressure Switches use changes in control
air pressure to open or close an electrical circuit. The
common terminal is red. The red to yellow terminals
close an electrical circuit on a rise in pressure; the red to
blue terminals close a circuit on a drop in pressure.
APPLICATION
Typical applications include pressure-electric switches in
pneumatic systems, control of pumps or small air compressors, and pressure-electric interlock of fluid flow systems.
WIRING
PRESSURE
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
P10BC-7
Easily accessible screw terminals for field wiring
Snap-acting contacts in a dust-tight enclosure
Visible calibration scale
Field adjustment possible with cover on or removed
Gas and oil resistant nylon-reinforced diaphragm
B
Y
R
Action on Increase
of Pressure
SPECIFICATIONS
Electrical Ratings
P10BC, P10FC
120 208 240 277
Motor Ratings VAC
16.0 9.2 8.0 7.0
AC full load amp
96.0 55.2 48.0 42.0
AC locked rotor amp
16.0 9.2 8.0 7.2
Non-inductive amp
Pilot duty - 125 VA @ 24-277 VAC
Max Allowable Pressure: 150 psig (1034 kPa)
Number Contact
Action
of
Stages
SPDT
P10BC-7
1
Model
P10FC-4
2
2-SPDT
P10BG-3
1
SPDT
Range
psig
(kPa)
3-20
(21-138)
2-20
(15-138)
P10BG
Motor Ratings VAC
120 208 240
AC full load amp
6.0 3.4 3.0
AC locked rotor amp
36.0 20.4 18.0
Non-inductive amp
6.0 3.4 3.0
Pilot duty - 125 VA @ 24-277 VAC
Factory Setting
Pressure
Weight
psig
Switch Diff
Connector
lb
(kPa)
psig (kPa)
NPT*
(kg)
12 (83) (R-Y cut-in)
2 (14)
1/8"
1.0 (0.45)
(R-Y cut-out) (R-Y cut-in) Low
High
Low stage
High stage stage
stage
1/8"
1.5 (0.68)
8 (55)
12 (82)
2 (14)
2 (14)
12 (83)
0.2 (1.4)
1/8"
1.0 (0.45)
(R-Y cut-in)
*Includes 1/4" barb fitting installed
ORDERING INFORMATION
Specify model number as shown in Specifications above.
192
277
__
__
2.6
PRESSURE
PRESSURE-ELECTRIC SWITCH
25 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The 25 Series Pressure-Electric Switch uses
changes in operating pressure to open or close an electrical circuit. Features include adjustable setpoint, models with adjustable differential, 20A contacts, high pressure protection, and mounting tabs. The 25 Series is
available in three ranges, up to 475 psig (3275 kPa) for
almost any wet or dry application compatible with
brass. Available ranges, as well as setpoint differential
ranges, are shown below. The 25 Series is UL listed, is
repeatable within 1%, has a burst pressure of 600 psig
(4137 kPa), and comes in a metal NEMA 1 enclosure.
FEATURES
Low cost
All metal enclosure
Adjustable setpoint
Optional adjustable setpoint differential
Easily accessible screw terminals
20A contact rating
UL, ULC, and CE approved
For use with steam, air, and water
25B1E2A
C
R
US
PRESSURE
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
• Wide range of applications
• Pressures up to 475 psig (3275 kPa)
• Convenient mounting tabs
SPECIFICATIONS
Setpoint repeatability
Electrical rating
Operating ambient temp
Max media temp
Storage temp
Diaphragm material
Approvals
Enclosure
Switch output
1% of span
20A @ 480 VAC resistive
0° to 160°F (-17° to 71°C)
200°F (93°C)
-65° to 160°F (-54° to 71°C)
Buna-N
UL and ULC listed, CE
Zinc-plated steel with bright
chromate finish
One SPDT, snap-acting switch
Connection
Pressure
Electrical
1/8" FNPT brass
7/8" hole for 1/2" conduit
connector
NEMA 1
Surface-mount with two #10
screws or by pressure connection
16 oz (454g)
2-1/4"W x 3-3/4"H x 3-3/8"D
(5.7 x 9.4 x 8.6 cm)
Enclosure
Mounting
Weight
Dimensions
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL4
25A1E2A
25B1E2A
25C1E2A
25A1E2F
25B1E2F
25C1E2F
SET POINT RANGE1
Low End of Range High End of Range
on Fall
on Rise
psig
kPa
psig
kPa
3
20.7
30
206.7
20
137.9
200
1379.0
25
172.4
475
3275.1
3
20.7
30
206.7
20
137.9
200
1379.0
25
172.4
475
3275.1
DIFFERENTIAL RANGE2, 3
Min
psig
5
20
35
2
4
10
Max
kPa
34.5
137.9
241.3
13.8
27.6
69.0
psig
11
70
140
5
10
25
kPa
75.9
482.7
965.3
34.5
69.0
172.4
BURST
PRESSURE
psig
600
600
600
600
600
600
kPa
4137
4137
4137
4137
4137
4137
1. Value indicated on the dial is set point on falling pressure.
2. Differential represents the reset point above the dial indicated set point. Dial setting plus set point differential
must not exceed adjustable range.
3. Minimum and maximum set point differential ranges on fixed units indicates the variance between units based on adjusted set point.
4. Model numbers "...A" have adjustable differential; model numbers "...F" have fixed differential.
193
PRESSURE
AIR PRESSURE SENSORS, SURGE DAMPENERS
A-300 SERIES, RPS, 21121, SD-01
DESCRIPTION
Static Pressure Sensors
A-300 Series sensors are used with pressure transmitters
and pressure switches to sense duct pressures. Two sensors are required to monitor pressure across coils, filters,
blowers, etc. A-301 and A-302 have four radial sensing
holes and a 4" (10.2 cm) insertion depth. The A-308 should
be used only where accuracy is not critical. All mount in a
3/8" hole in the duct. If the interior of the duct is not accessible, an optional A-345 flange mounting kit may be used.
A-306
Outdoor Static Pressure Sensor
The A-306 Outdoor Static Pressure Sensor provides an
outdoor pressure signal for reference in building pressurization applications. The A-306 includes the sensor, 50'
(15.24m) of vinyl tubing, mounting bracket, and hardware.
PRESSURE
Room Static Pressure Sensors
Model RPS is a stainless steel room static pressure sensor.
It mounts directly to the wall or to a ceiling using a standard
electrical box. Model RPS-W is the same as the RPS
except with a white plastic wall plate. RPS-I (ivory) is also
available.
A-345
A-302
A-301
21121
A-308
Total Pressure Sensor
Model 21121 sensor is used primarily for proving air flow in
ducts. The opening in the tip of the 4" (10.2 cm) aluminum
tube faces upstream and senses impact (total) pressure.
Surge Dampener
Surge dampeners absorb rapid pressure fluctuations in
order to steady a pressure signal. Each surge dampener
has two independent channels – one for the low pressure
tubing and one for the high pressure tubing. Surge dampeners are typically used with outdoor pressure sensors, which
are subject to wind gusts, isolation rooms, clean rooms, or
operating rooms where opening or closing doors creates
sudden pressure changes.
RPS-W
RPS
ORDERING INFORMATION
194
MODEL
A-301
A-302
A-308
A-345
DUCT STATIC PRESSURE SENSORS
Static pressure tip, 1/4" compression
Static pressure tip, 1/4" barb
Static pressure fitting, 1/4" barb
Flange mounting kit
A-306
OUTDOOR STATIC PRESSURE SENSOR
Outdoor air static pressure kit
21121
B-137
DUCT TOTAL PRESSURE SENSOR
4" aluminum impact tube for 3/8" OD plastic tubing
1/4'' barb adapter for #21121 (standard pack-100)
RPS
RPS-W
ROOM STATIC PRESSURE SENSOR
Stainless steel room pressure sensor, 1/4'' barb
White plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4'' barb
SD-01
SURGE DAMPENERS
Surge dampener
A-605
FILTER KIT
Mounting kit for air filter applications
SD-01
PSI
PRESSURE
MAGNEHELIC® DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE GAUGES
2000 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
2000 Series Magnehelic ® Differential Pressure
Gauges provide an accurate, economical indication of
positive, negative, or differential air pressure. The gauge
includes a 4" (10.2 cm) easy-to-read dial and frictionless
magnetic movement in a cast aluminum housing and is
resistant to shock, vibration, and overpressure. The
2000 Series has both back and side connections so that
it may be either surface- or flush-mounted. Ranges are
available from 0" to 0.25" W.C. up to 10'' W.C.
FEATURES
• 2% FS accuracy
• Easy-to-read 4" (10.16 cm) white dial and
red-tipped pointer
• Flush or surface mounting
• Easily accessible zero adjustment
• Corrosion-resistant cast aluminum housing
• Back and side connections
2001
The 2000 Series is ideal for monitoring fan and blower
pressures, filter resistance, air velocity, and pressure
drop across coils. It may be used to measure positive,
negative, or differential pressures of air or compatible
gases.
PRESSURE
APPLICATIONS
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
0.69
(1.75)
Pressure
.40
.60
.80
.20
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy
Overpressure
Ambient temp
Rated total
pressure
Connections
Housing
Standard
accessories
Weight
1.0
0
+ 2% of full scale (3% on -0 and 4%
on -00 ranges) throughout range @
70°F (21°C)
Relief plug designed to open at
25 psig (172 kPa)
20° to 140°F (-7° to 60°C)
MAGNEHELIC
®
0.5
(1.27)
Zero Set
Suction
-20" Hg to 15 psig (103 kPa)
1/8" NPT female high and low
pressure taps, duplicated-one pair
side and one pair back
Die-cast aluminum, case and
aluminum parts Iridite-dipped to
withstand 168-hour salt spray test,
baked dark gray hammerloid
exterior finish
0.5
(1.27)
1.69
(4.29)
0.5
(1.27)
Pressure
4.75
(12.06)
0.48
(1.11)
Suction
Two 1/8" NPT plugs for duplicate
pressure taps, two 1/8" pipe thread
to rubber tubing adapters, and
three flush mounting adapters
with screws
1.0 lb (2.0 oz)
1.25
(3.17)
4.5 Hole
(11.43)
Note: Dimensions are slightly different on medium
and high pressure models.
195
PRESSURE
MAGNEHELIC® DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE GAUGES
2000 SERIES
INSTALLATION
Mount the Series 2000 Magnehelic® Gauge with the dial in a vertical position in a location free of excessive vibration or pulsating pressures. Sensing lines may be run any distance necessary, but long tubing lengths will increase
response time slightly. If the pointer is not exactly on the zero mark with both the high and low pressure connections
open to the atmosphere, adjust with the external zero adjust screw.
To monitor positive pressure, connect tubing from the source of pressure to either of the two high pressure ports.
Plug the other high pressure port, and vent one or both low pressure ports to atmosphere.
To monitor negative pressure, connect tubing from the source of negative pressure to either of the two low pressure
ports. Plug the other low pressure port, and vent one or both high pressure ports to atmosphere.
PRESSURE
To monitor differential pressure, connect tubing from the source of the higher pressure to either of the two high pressure ports. Connect tubing from the source of the lower pressure to either of the low pressure ports. Plug both
unused ports.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
RANGE
"W.C.
MINOR
DIV.
MODEL
RANGE ZERO
CENTER
"W.C.
MINOR
DIV.
2000-00*
2000-0*
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2008
2010
0-0.25
0-0.50
0-1.0
0-2.0
0-3.0
0-4.0
0-5.0
0-6.0
0-8.0
0-10
0.005
0.01
0.02
0.05
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.20
0.20
0.20
2300-0*
2301
2302
0.25-0-0.25
0.5-0-0.5
1-0-1
0.01
0.02
0.05
*These ranges are calibrated
for vertical scale position
Order by model number from selection chart above. Contact Trane for pressure ranges,
metric ranges, and air velocity scales other than those shown.
A-368
A-301
A-302
A-605
196
RELATED PRODUCTS
Surface mounting plate
Static pressure tip, compression fitting
Static pressure tip, barb fitting
Mounting kit for air filter applications
PRESSURE
PRESSURE GAUGES
PG SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The PG Series Pressure Gauges are durable, costeffective, general-purpose gauges for use in a wide
variety of HVAC controls applications. All gauges are
compatible with air, oil, and water and have a steel
case, bronze bourdon tube, acrylic lens, and dual unit
psi/kPa scale. The PG Series (except model PG-05)
has a screw-on lens and recalibrator screw. A wide
variety of models, options, and accessories are available, including panel-mount models, specialty gauges,
diaphragm seals, etc.
PG-20-0-60-4L
PG-45-0-100-4L
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy
Connection
Window
30" to 0" Hg (760 mm) vacuum
to 0-600 psig
2%-1%-2% ANSI/ASME
Grade A; 3%-2%-3%
ANSI/ASME Grade B
(PG-05 only)
1/8" NPT or 1/4" NPT, depend
ing on model (LM = lower mount,
CBM = center back mount)
Acrylic
Case
Black painted steel (stainless
steel on contractor gauges)
Socket
Brass
Bourdon tube
Phosphor bronze
Movement
Brass (flutterless)
Overpressure limit 25% of full scale valve
Operating temp
-40° to 150°F (-40° to 65°C)
Panel cut-out dimensions
2" gauge
2.11" (5.4 cm)
2-1/2" gauge
2.66" (6.8 cm)
ORDERING INFORMATION
GAUGE TYPE
ECONOMY
DIAL SIZE
1-1/2"
CONNECTION 1/8" CBM
PRESSURE RANGE
30" Hg VAC/kPa
N/A
30" Hg VAC-30psig
N/A
0-15 psig/kPa
N/A
0-30 psig/kPa
PG-05*
0-60 psig/kPa
N/A
0-100 psig/kPa
N/A
0-160 psig/kPa
N/A
0-200 psig/kPa
N/A
0-300 psig/kPa
N/A
0-400 psig/kPa
N/A
0-600 psig/kPa
N/A
1-1/2"
1/8" LM
1-1/2"
1/8" CBM
2"
1/4" CBM
QUALITY
2"
1/4" LM
PG-15-30-0-8L
N/A
PG-15-0-15-8L
PG-15-0-30-8L*
PG-15-0-60-8L*
PG-15-0-100-8L*
PG-15-0-160-8L*
PG-15-0-200-8L*
PG-15-0-300-8L*
PG-15-0-400-8L*
PG-15-0-600-8L*
PG-15-30-0-8C
N/A
PG-15-0-15-8C
PG-15-0-30-8C*
PG-15-0-60-8C*
PG-15-0-100-8C*
PG-15-0-160-8C*
PG-15-0-200-8C*
PG-15-0-300-8C*
PG-15-0-400-8C*
PG-15-0-600-8C*
PG-20-30-0-4C
N/A
PG-20-0-15-4C
PG-20-0-30-4C
PG-20-0-60-4C
PG-20-0-100-4C
PG-20-0-160-4C
PG-20-0-200-4C
PG-20-0-300-4C
PG-20-0-400-4C
PG-20-0-600-4C
PG-20-30-0-4L
N/A
PG-20-0-15-4L
PG-20-0-30-4L*
PG-20-0-60-4L*
PG-20-0-100-4L*
PG-20-0-160-4L*
PG-20-0-200-4L*
PG-20-0-300-4L*
PG-20-0-400-4L*
PG-20-0-600-4L*
2"
1/4" PM
PG-20-30-0-4P
N/A
PG-20-0-15-4P
PG-20-0-30-4P
PG-20-0-60-4P
PG-20-0-100-4P
PG-20-0-160-4P
PG-20-0-200-4P
PG-20-0-300-4P
PG-20-0-400-4P
PG-20-0-600-4P
2-1/2"
1/4" LM
2-1/2"
1/4" PM
CONTRACTOR
4-1/2"
1/4" LM
PG-25-30-0-4L
PG-25-30-30-4L
PG-25-0-15-4L
PG-25-0-30-4L*
PG-25-0-60-4L*
PG-25-0-100-4L*
PG-25-0-160-4L*
PG-25-0-200-4L*
N/A
N/A
N/A
PG-25-30-0-4P
N/A
PG-25-0-15-4P
PG-25-0-30-4P
PG-25-0-60-4P
PG-25-0-100-4P
PG-25-0-160-4P
PG-25-0-200-4P
N/A
N/A
N/A
PG-45-30-0-4L
PG-45-30-30-4L
PG-45-0-15-4L
PG-45-0-30-4L*
PG-45-0-60-4L*
PG-45-0-100-4L*
PG-45-0-160-4L*
PG-45-0-200-4L*
N/A
N/A
N/A
* Indicates models that are normally stocked
Many other range and connection configurations are available.
Related products such as liquid filled gauges, diaphragm seals, snubbers, etc., are also available. Contact Kele.
197
PRESSURE
Pressure ranges
PRESSURE
THREE-VALVE MANIFOLDS
MODELS DPW-3VLV, M230-3VLV, W30-3VLV, 360-3VLV
DESCRIPTION
These Three-Valve Manifolds, machined from brass,
are perfect for differential pressure applications up to
200°F (93°C) and 250 psig (1724 kPa). The manifolds
can be ordered pre-assembled with a Model DPW-692,
M230, 360C, or W30 differential pressure transmitter
(see transmitter catalog page). Each transmitter ordered
with a manifold is assembled before shipping.
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
High temperature tolerance
High pressure tolerance
Brass construction
Easy to install
Easy to operate
DPW-3VLV
(shown with transmitter)
M230-3VLV
(shown with transmitter)
PRESSURE
SPECIFICATIONS
Max pressure
250 psig (1724 kPa)
Max temperature
200°F (93°C)
Pressure connections
1/4" FNPT
Dimensions (including mounted transmitter)
DPW-3VLV
9-3/4" x 7-1/4"
(24.8 x 18.4 cm)
M230-3VLV
7-7/8" x 7-1/4"
(20 x 18.4 cm)
W30-3VLV
11-1/8" x 7-1/4"
(28.3 x 18.4 cm)
360-3VLV
11-1/8" x 7-1/4"
(28.3 x 18.4 cm)
W30-3VLV
(shown with transmitter)
360-3VLV
(shown with transmitter)
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
DPW-3VLV
M230-3VLV
W30-3VLV
360-3VLV
DPW-692
M230
W30
360C
198
DESCRIPTION
Three-valve manifold for Kele DPW-692 (not included)
Three-valve manifold for Setra M230 (not included)
Three-valve manifold for Modus W30 (not included)
Three-valve manifold for Kele 360C (not included)
RELATED PRODUCTS
Kele differential pressure transmitter
Setra differential pressure transmitter
Modus differential pressure transmitter
Kele differential pressure transmitter
PRESSURE
BYPASS VALVE ASSEMBLY
MODEL BVA-5
DESCRIPTION
Differential pressure transmitters are often installed in
systems with pressures much higher than the differential
pressure being monitored. During installation, start-up, or
shutdown, the pressure differential may exceed the
transmitter differential pressure rating, resulting in severe
damage to the transmitter. A Model BVA-5 Bypass
Valve Assembly will minimize this possibility. When it is
purchased with a transmitter, the transmitter is assembled in a NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R enclosure with two isolation valves, an equalizing valve, and two vent valves
mounted and piped. Optional pressure snubbers are also
available mounted on the Model BVA-5.
To Place Transmitter in Service:
1. Open V-3.
2. Open V-4 and V-5.
3. Slowly open V-1 and V-2 to bleed the lines of air.
4. Close V-4 and V-5.
5. Open V-1 and V-2 fully.
6. Close V-3 to read differential pressure.
To Take Transmitter Out of Service:
1. Open V-3. This will equalize the pressure at the
transmitter.
2. Close V-1 and V-2.
3. Open V-4 and V-5 to release pressure.
CAUTION: A BVA-5 Bypass Valve Assembly is for use
on systems with a maximum pressure of 150 psig
(1034.3 kPa) at 150°F (65°C) max.
SCHEMATIC
Weight
W30
Dimensions
Weight
12"H x 10"W x 4"D
(30.5 x 25.4 x 10.2 cm)
10.5 lb (4.8 kg)
18"H x 12"W x 4"D
(46.7 x 30.5 x 10.2 cm)
15.5 lb (7 kg)
Vent
V-5
V-4
SPECIFICATIONS
360C, M230
Dimensions
Transmitter
Vent
NEMA 1
Enclosure
V-3
V-2
V-1
1/8" FNPT Low
Pressure Port
1/8" FNPT High
Pressure Port
BVA-5 for 360C
ORDERING INFORMATION
To order BVA-5: Add the suffix BVA after the differential pressure transmitter model number.
Example: 360C-P210-BVA: 360C Differential pressure transmitter 0-100# with NEMA 1 BVA-5-R
To order 3R enclosure: Add suffix BVA-3R after the differential pressure transmitter model number.
Example: M230-050PD-C-BVA: M230 0-50# Differential Pressure Transmitter with NEMA 3R BVA-5-R
All Model BVA-5 bypass systems include mounting and piping of transmitter in a NEMA 1 or
NEMA 3R enclosure.
199
PRESSURE
OPERATION
PRESSURE
SNUBBERS / PIGTAIL
MODELS 47B, 47S, 747B, 747S, PT
DESCRIPTION
Snubbers will stop shocks and pulsations that damage pressure instruments, thus cutting costs of maintenance, calibration, and repair. They will also assure accuracy of the instruments and the readings, increase life of instruments three to
six times, and prevent false operation of control equipment.
Trane offers two types of pressure snubbers; piston and
porous.
Model 47S
mounted to
PTX1
Model 47 Snubbers
Model 47 incorporates a piston that can move up and down
inside of an internal tube within the snubber. This movement of
the piston, caused by the shocks and pulsations of the fluid,
dampens the effect of these pulsations.
PT
Model 47 comes with three piston sizes: #02, #2, and #3.
Piston #2 is installed in the factory in the snubber. It is used for
most applications, such as water, air, and steam. The #3 piston
is used for a greater snubbing effect, while the #02 piston is
used for relatively thick fluids.
Model
747BE
PRESSURE
Model 747 Snubbers
Model 747 is a porous snubber and a low-cost alternative to
piston snubbers. There are no moving parts in the snubber,
and it uses a porous material to dampen the effect of shocks
and pulsations. The Model 747 is available in stainless steel
and brass and is ordered based on whether the application is
for gases or liquids.
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
0.688
(1.75)
0.688
(1.75)
Instrument
Connection
Instrument
Connection
Model PT
In steam pressure monitoring, the temperature of the steam is
higher than the maximum operating temperature of most pressure transmitters. A Model PT steam pigtail syphon will protect
a pressure transmitter applied to steam systems. See the
“Technical Reference” section in the Trane catalog for more
detailed information.
The Model PT is constructed of steel and is suitable for steam
pressure to 250 psig (1724 kPa) 400°F (121°C). Each is furnished with two 1/4" FPT x 1/8" FPT couplings and one 1/8"
MPT x 1/8" MPT nipple for convenient installation.
1/8" FNPT
1/8" FNPT
1.2
(3.05)
1.5
(3.81)
SPECIFICATIONS
Model PT
Material
Max pressure
Max temp
Size
Length
Weight
1/8" MNPT
Steel
250 psig (1724 kPa)
400°F (204°C)
1/4" NPT (1/8" fittings furnished)
5.5" (14 cm)
9.6 oz (272g)
1/8" MNPT
Pressure
Source
Maximum Pressure
747B - 3000 psig (20,685 kPa)
47B - 3000 psig (20,685 kPa)
747S - 5000 psig (34,475 kPa)
47S - 5000 psig (34,475 kPa)
Model 747
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
47B
47S
747BE
747SE
747BG
747SG
PT
200
Pressure
Source
DESCRIPTION
Brass piston style snubber
Stainless steel piston style snubber
Brass porous style snubber for light oil and water
Stainless steel porous style snubber for light oil and water
Brass porous style snubber for air, steam, and other gases
Stainless steel porous style snubber for air, steam, and other gases
1/4" pigtail syphon with fittings
Model 47
FLOW
FLOW
MODEL/SERIES
PRODUCTS
See the NEW
626600A
Flow Switch on page
227!
SERVICES
Did you know our
Calibration Shop programs
for Flow
PAGE
1500 Series — Flow Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
1550 Series — BTU Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
160 Series — Stainless Steel Pitot Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
2200,3100 Series — Vortex Flow Meter for Liquids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
220B/220SS — Brass and Stainless Steel Flow Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
225B/226B/226SS — Hot Tap Flow Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
228B/228C/228SS — Tee-Mounted Flow Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
228PV — PVC Tee Flow Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
250B — Tee-Mounted Flow Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
310 — Programmable Analog Flow Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
340 Series — BTU Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
4000 Series — Flow Sensors for Small PVC Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
DTFXL — Ultrasonic Flow Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
AMP Series — Air Velocity Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
AVS-200 — Air Velocity Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
626600A — Caleffi Flow Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
F61 Series — Flow Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
FS1-6 — Flow Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
KIP Series — Fan Inlet Airflow Measuring Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
KMS Series — Airflow Measuring Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
KV/KVS — Target Type Flow Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
SDI — Flow Sensor with Integral Flow Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
SSS-1000 Series — Differential Pressure Airflow Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
UFT-1 — Universal Flow Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
V-Bar-700 Series — Vortex Flow Meter for Steam, Gases and Liquids . . . . . . .225
Measurement?
SOLUTIONS
We offer Non-Invasive
Solutions for Flow
mesaurement, such as the
DTFXL.
Indicates New Products
FLOW
AIRFLOW MEASURING STATION
KMS SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The KMS Series Airflow Measuring Station utilizes
multiple averaging sensors for static pressure measurements and a bullet-nose probe for total pressure. The
sensors are distributed across the flow stream to conform to the industry standard rules for equal-area averaging (the standard pitot traverse). The standard unit
includes a 16-gauge galvanized casing with flanged duct
connection, 3/8" hexagon-celled aluminum flow straightening vanes, and internal copper sensors constructed to
ASTM B88. Instrument connections are 1/2" FNPT.
Other configurations are available on request.
KMS Front
APPLICATIONS
FLOW
When used with a differential pressure transmitter, the
KMS Series provides an accurate, repeatable airflow
signal for building automation and HVAC applications. Air
velocity may be determined by the formula: Velocity (fpm)
= 4004 6P, where 6P is differential pressure in "W.C.
Flow rate may then be determined by the formula: CFM
= AV, where A is the area of the flow measuring station in
square feet, and V is the velocity obtained above. The
proper range for a differential pressure transmitter to use
with the KMS Series airflow measuring station may be
determined by the formula: 6P = (Max Velocity/4004)2.
KMS Back
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy
Temp
Pressure
Pressure drop
Flow straightening
vanes
Design flow
Max
Min
±2% to 6000 fpm
(±0.5% @ 2000 fpm)
400°F (240°C) max operating
6" W.C. max operating
<0.13" W.C. @ 2000 fpm with 3/8" cell
3/8" aluminum hexagon cell
Casing
Length
16-gauge galvanized sheet steel
12" (30.48 cm) in overall
Pitot and static
sensors
Internal fittings
Process connections
Rigid copper, hard drawn to ANSI
H23.1 and ASTM B88 standards
Copper, to ANSI B-16.22 standards
1/2" NPT female
6000 fpm
1000 fpm
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
KMS
KMS
DESCRIPTION
Airflow measuring station
SHAPE
811 Round with flanges
911 Rectangular with flanges
DIMENSIONS
W x H Diameter or width x height (inches)
911
48 x 24 Example: KMS-911-48 x 24 Rectangular airflow station with 16-gauge galvanized
casing, 3/8'' straightening vanes, and copper probes 48'' wide x 24'' high
M30/40, T30/40
M264
UMM-1-SQ
KMS-PAK-B
RELATED PRODUCTS
Differential pressure transmitter
Differential pressure transmitter
Universal math module with square root output
KMS fitting reduction pack 1/2 FNPT to 1/4" barbed (one pack per KMS station)
201
FLOW
FAN INLET AIRFLOW MEASURING PROBE
KIP SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The KIP Series Fan Inlet Airflow Measuring Probe
provides a reliable and economical means to measure
airflow at fan inlets. Similar to air flow stations, the probe
measures velocity pressure with multiple averaging pickups for total and static pressure. Rugged, lightweight,
and easy to install, it is used with industry-standard differential pressure transmitters, gauges, or manometers.
KIP Series probes install easily at the fan inlet and do
not require straight duct runs. They are particularly
applicable for jobs where fitting a flow measuring station
is difficult or impossible.
FLOW
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Easy and quick to install
Accurate and repeatable
Economical
Lightweight and rugged
No straight duct runs required
High velocity, high differential
Standard airflow calculations
KIP for Fan Inlet
Depth *3.5"
KIP for Fan Inlet
Depth 0.5" to 3.5"
FIGURE 1. FAN INLET
SPECIFICATIONS
X
Accuracy
Max temp
Min design flow
Max design flow
Pitot/Static sensors
Pressure connections
±2%
400°F (204°C)
400 fpm (122 mpm)
12,000 fpm (3658 mpm)
Aluminum with anodized
finish
1/4" barb
KIP
Probes
Y
Y
Fan
Mounting
Flanges
(attach to fan
inlet with screws)
Front View
Side View
Dimension X is the
fan inlet depth; this
dimension must be
specified when ordering.
Dimension Y is the
smallest fan inlet
diameter. The probes
will be built for proper
spacing using this
dimension, which is
required for ordering.
APPLICATION
The fan inlet diameter dimension (Y), and the fan inlet depth dimension (X), shown in Figure 1 above, must be correctly determined and specified. Each set of probes is made to order and cannot be returned for credit if the dimensions are incorrectly
specified.
If the fan inlet depth specified is 3.5" (8.9 cm) or greater, each KIP Series probe will have both static (low) and total (high) pressure pickup barbs. “Tee” the high pressure pickups together and the low pickups together. If the fan inlet depth is less than 3.5"
(8.9 cm), one KIP Series probe will have a single static (low) pressure pickup barb, and the other probe will have a single total
(high) pressure pickup barb.
Determining the differential (velocity) pressure for a KIP Series probe is the same as for a pitot tube or flow measuring station
(see KMS Series catalog page for formulas). Since the KIP Series probe is mounted at a high velocity location, differential pressures are typically higher and may allow the use of a lower-price, higher-range differential pressure transmitter.
ORDERING INFORMATION
KIP-Y-X
Y = Inlet diameter
range 6.00" to 96.00" (15.24 to 243.84 cm)
X = Inlet depth
minimum 0.5" (1.27 cm)
Note: One KIP includes a pair of pickup probes for measuring airflow at a fan inlet.
For dual inlet fans, two KIPs must be ordered.
202
FLOW
STAINLESS STEEL PITOT TUBES
160 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
160 Series Stainless Steel Pitot Tubes are designed for use
with differential pressure transmitters, manometers, and air
velocity gauges to measure air flow in ducts. See Measuring
Air Flow in the Technical Reference section for complete application information. The 160 Series is designed per ASME and
meets AMCA and ASHRAE standards. Insertion depth is
stamped on the side of the pitot tubes, and the static pressure
port is parallel to the sensing tube to allow easy alignment with
air flow. A Model A-158 split flange mounting kit allows for simple, leak-free mounting of the 160 Series.
160 Series
A-158
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
304 stainless steel construction
ASME design
Accurate even with up to 15° misalignment
Insertion depth markings stamped on tube
•
•
•
Air velocity calculator, flow charts, and
instructions included
1/4" tubing connections
Optional A-158 split flange mounting kit
DIMENSIONS
FLOW
8.0 (20.32), 12.0 (30.48), 18.0 (45.72), 24.0 (60.96), 0.5 (1.27)
36.0 (91.44) or 48.0 (121.92)
in
(cm)
Total Pressure
Connection
0.31
(0.79)
5.0
(12.7)
2.66
(6.75)
0.25 (Fits 3/8'' O.D.
(0.64) Poly Tubing,
Model T-110)
3.63
(9.21)
Static Pressure
8 - 0.040 dia holes
(0.10) equally spaced
Note: See “Measuring Air Flow” in
the “Technical Reference”
section for application of 160
Series pitot pubes for flow
measurement.
0.25 (Fits 3/8'' O.D.
(0.64) Poly Tubing,
Model T-110)
Static Pressure
Connection
Total Pressure
0.125 dia hole
(0.32) (face into air flow)
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
160
Stainless steel pitot tube
LENGTH
XX
Length (inches) - 8, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48
160
18
Example: 160-18 Pitot tube with 18" insertion length
A-158
M30/40, T30/40
M264
XLdp
RELATED PRODUCTS
Optional mounting kit (order separately)
Modus differential pressure transmitter
Setra differential pressure transmitter
Ashcroft differential pressure transmitter
203
FLOW
AMPLIFLOW AIR VELOCITY SENSOR
AMP SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The AMP Series Ampliflow Air Velocity Sensor is
designed to measure high or low velocity air flow in duct
systems. The design of the AMP Series allows it to
amplify the velocity pressure by a factor of three, which
allows very low air flow velocities to be accurately measured. Sensing holes along the length of the tube yield
an average velocity pressure reading for greater accuracy. The simple design of the AMP Series allows quick,
easy installation in new or existing ductwork.
FEATURES
Multipoint readings for average velocity pressure
Simple installation
Rugged, extruded aluminum construction
Double taps allow field check connections
Three-to-one ratio pressure signals
Adaptable to round, square, or oval ducts
1/4" nipples for 3/8" OD tubing
PERFORMANCE CHART
AMPLIFLOW SENSOR CALIBRATION CURVE
5000
4000
3000
2000
INSTALLATION
Mount the AMP Series at least three duct diameters
downstream of coils, dampers, elbows, etc., and
through the width of the duct for best results. Cut a
hole 0.75"H x 0.88"W (1.9 x 2.3 cm) in the duct. Drill
holes in the opposite side of the duct to allow the field
pressure taps to protrude through the duct. Remove
the rubber caps from the field pressure taps and insert
the AMP Series into the duct so that the field pressure
taps protrude. Attach the AMP Series to the duct with
sheet metal screws and replace the rubber caps on the
field pressure taps.
Air Velocity (fpm)
FLOW
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
AMPLIFLOW
VELOCITY PRESSURE
1000
900
800
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
.01
.02
.03
.04 .05 .06.07.08 .1
MODEL DESCRIPTION
AMP
Ampliflow air velocity sensor
WIDTH
XX Duct width (up to 30")*
Note: The Ampliflow will be constructed so that the field pressure taps
in the end of the sensing tube protrude through the duct
*Lengths 30'' to 96'' available by special order.
Provide field-constructed support for sensors >30''.
Nailor Ind. U.S. Patent No. 4,735,100
204
.3
.4
.5 .6 .7 .8 .9 1.0
Velocity (fpm) = 2213 ∆P
Velocity (mps) = 11.242 ∆P
ORDERING INFORMATION
M30/40, T30/T40
M264
XLdp
.2
∆P Pressure Drop ("W.C.)
RELATED PRODUCTS
Modus differential pressure transmitter
Setra differential pressure transmitter
Ashcroft differential pressure transmitter
1.5 2.0
FLOW
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FLOW SENSORS
SSS-1000 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The SSS-1000 Series of economical air flow sensors
sense differential (velocity) pressure of VAV units and
other locations in main or branch ducts. Four different
lengths allow selection of the sensor to yield accurate
readings on terminal box inlet diameters from 4" to 20"
(10.16 to 51.80 cm).
SPECIFICATIONS
Weight
Ambient limits
Operating
Shipping
Integral flange with gasket
1/4" (6.4 mm) nipples for 3/8"
(9.5 mm) OD polyethylene tubing
1.0 oz (31g) without packaging
40° to 120°F (4° to 49°C)
-40° to 140°F (-40° to 60°C)
DIMENSIONS
INSTALLATION
The SSS-1000 Series sensor requires a 7/8" (2.22 cm)
diameter cutout for the insertion portion and two pilot
holes for sheet metal screws or rivets to hold the flange
against ductwork.
Sensors should be installed as level as possible to
ensure accurate velocity pressure readings.
3.5
(8.89)
in
(cm)
H
1.25
(3.18)
Flow
0.1875 (0.477) dia
Mounting Holes (2)
2.75
(6.99)
Foam Gasket
0.25 thick
(0.635)
When connecting 3/8" (9.5 mm) OD polyethylene tubing, care should be taken to assure that sharp bends
are not made at the sensor connection. This can cause
leakage as tubing ages and stretches.
PERFORMANCE
Push-On
Connections
for 3/8'' O.D. Poly
Tubing Model T-110
MODEL
SSS-1002
SSS-1003
SSS-1004
SSS-1005
∆P Inches "W.C.
L
DIMENSION A
3.16 (8.01)
5.41 (13.73)
7.66 (19.44)
9.91 (25.16)
A
(below)
SENSING POINTS
1 SET
2 SETS
3 SETS
4 SETS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
SSS-1002
SSS-1003
SSS-1004
SSS-1005
1000
2000
Velocity (fpm)
SSS-1002
SSS-1003
SSS-1004
SSS-1005
DESCRIPTION
Flow sensor, 3.16" insertion
Flow sensor, 5.41" insertion
Flow sensor, 7.66" insertion
Flow sensor, 9.91" insertion
Velocity = 3450
Velocity = 3300
Velocity = 3200
Velocity = 3200
RELATED PRODUCTS
∆P
∆P
∆P
∆P
M30/40, T30/40
M264
XLdp
Modus differential pressure transmitter
Setra differential pressure transmitter
Ashcroft differential pressure transmitter
205
FLOW
Mounting
Connections
FLOW
AIR VELOCITY TRANSMITTER
MODEL AVS-200
DESCRIPTION
The Model AVS-200 is an electronic air velocity transmitter for
use in HVAC systems, laboratories, and industrial applications.
It features three DIP switch-selectable velocity ranges and two
analog outputs. The Model AVS-200 also has a selectable
time constant (the time it takes to register 63.2% of a velocity
change) of three or ten seconds. The sensing probe has an
adjustable insertion length of up to 8" (20.3 cm) and a 4.5'
(1.37m) cable. The Model AVS-200 is powered by 24 VAC.
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
Three DIP switch-selectable velocity ranges
Two analog outputs
Selectable time constant
24 VAC power
Dust- and splash-proof (IP44) enclosure
FLOW
SPECIFICATIONS
Repeatability
Accuracy
Power supply
24 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz
Power consumption
5 VA
Velocity ranges (selectable
with DIP switches)
0-1000 fpm (0-5.08 m/s)
0-2000 fpm (0-10.16 m/s)
0-3000 fpm (0-15.24 m/s)
Outputs
0-10 VDC (min 10001)
0-20 mA (max 6001)
4-20 mA (max 6001)
Deviation by temp
Max 0.1%/°C
Time constant (selectable)
= 63.2% for 3 or 10 sec
Ambient temp
Sensor
Electronics
Enclosure
Material of enclosure
Cable length
Sensing probe length
Weight
WIRING
-4° to 140°F (-20° to 60°C)
32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Dust and splash proof (IP44)
Polycarbonate plastic
4.5' (1.37m)
1" to 8" (25 to 20.3 cm)
adjustable
1.8 lb (0.8 kg)
INSTALLATION
AVS-200
1
2
-
+
24 VAC
The sensing probe must be installed through a 5/8" (16
mm) hole in the duct with the arrow on the mounting flange
pointing in the direction of the air flow. The tab on the
mounting flange should be aligned with the line on the
probe to ensure proper airflow measurement. The insertion
length is adjustable. Loosen the set screw, and move the
probe to the selected position. The scale on the probe
shows the insertion length.
Internal Connection
3
4
5
0-20 mA
or
4-20 mA
0-10 VDC
Always install the sensing probe downstream of filters and
coils. Avoid placement directly in the outside air stream.
Ground
Note: Any device sharing a transformer with the AVS-200
must have a common power “-” and signal “-” terminal, and polarity must be observed. Otherwise, a separate transformer must be used with the AVS-200.
For best accuracy, locate the sensing probe a minimum of
three duct diameters (or widths) upstream of any obstruction and a minimum of five duct diameters downstream.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
AVS-200
206
0.5% of measuring range
±5% of measured value + 0.5%
of measuring range
DESCRIPTION
Air velocity transmitter
FLOW
FLOW SENSORS
200 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
228B
250B
226B
220B
FLOW
200 Series Flow Sensors feature a six- bladed
design with a proprietary nonmagnetic sensing
mechanism. The forward-swept impeller shape
provides higher, more constant torque than fourbladed impeller designs and is less prone to be
fouled by water-borne debris. The forward curveshape coupled with the absence of magnetic drag
provides improved operation and repeatability at
lower flow rates. This is especially true where the
impeller is exposed to metallic or rust particles
found in steel or iron pipes. As the liquid flow turns
the impeller, a low impedance signal is transmitted
with a frequency proportional to the flow rate. This
signal can travel up to 2,000' (610m) between the
sensor and the transmitter without the need for
amplification. All sensors are supplied with 20'
(6.10m) of Belden type 9320 (two-conductor
shielded) cable. Standard construction of the 200
Series sensors consists of EPDM O-rings, tungsten carbide shaft, nylon impeller, and UHMWPE
bearings. A complete line of flow transmitters is
available for use with these flow sensors.
See following pages for details on each model in
the 200 Series.
225B
SELECTION CHART
MODEL
DESCRIPTION
PIPE SIZE in (cm)
220B
220SS
225B
226B
226SS
228C-2
228B-2
228SS-2
2-1/2 (6.35) and up
2-1/2 (6.35) and up
2-1/2 (6.35) and up
2-1/2 (6.35) and up
2-1/2 (6.35) and up
2 (5.08)
2 (5.08)
2 (5.08)
250B
Brass, insertion type
Stainless steel, insertion type
Brass, retractable with gate valve
Brass, retractable with ball valve
Stainless steel, retractable with ball valve
Brass sensor in a 2" (5.08 cm) cast iron tee
Brass sensor in a 2" (5.08 cm) brass tee
Stainless steel sensor in a 2" (5.08 cm)
stainless steel tee
Removable sensor in a cast bronze tee
228PV
4000 Series
Removable sensor in a PVC tee
PVC
1/2 (1.27) , 3/4 (1.91), 1 (2.54), 1-1/4 (3.18),
1-1/2 (3.81)
1-1/2 to 4 (3.81 to 10.16) PVC
1/2 (1.27), 3/4 (1.91), 1 (2.54) PVC
207
FLOW
BRASS AND STAINLESS STEEL FLOW SENSOR
MODELS 220B, 220SS
DESCRIPTION
FLOW
Models 220B Brass and 220SS Stainless Steel Flow
Sensors are used in most general flow measuring applications in metallic or large PVC pipes. The sensor
mounts in a 2" NPT pipe saddle or Thredolet® for installation in pipe sizes from 2-1/2" to over 40" (6.35 to
101.60 cm). Positioning nuts on the three threaded
retaining rods allow the sensor to be accurately positioned to a standard insertion depth of 1-1/2" (3.81 cm)
into the pipe. When this insertion depth is maintained,
and there are at least 10 upstream and 5 downstream
diameters of straight uninterrupted flow, an accuracy of
+1% of actual flow rate can be obtained between flow
velocities of 0.5 to 30 fps. The standard Model 200 is
rated for water temperatures to 221°F (105°C). For higher temperature applications, use the SDI Series sensor.
220B
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy
Linearity
Repeatability
Rangeability
Flow rate
Max pressure
+1% of full scale
+0.7%
+0.7%
60:1
0.5-30 fps
400 psig (2758 kPa) max @
100°F (37.8°C)
Max temp
221°F (105°C)
Wetted materials Standard unit
Impeller
Glass-reinforced nylon
Bearing
Pennlon® (UHMWPE)
Shaft
Housing
O-rings
Sleeve
220B
220SS
Tungsten carbide
Glass-reinforced PPS
Ethylene propylene (EPDM)
Admiralty brass UNS C44300
300 series stainless steel and hex
adapter
Dimensions
7.13" x 3" dia (18.1 x 7.6 cm)
Pipe connection 2" MNPT
Weight
4.1 lb (1.9 kg)
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
220B
220SS
230FRK
DESCRIPTION
Brass flow sensor
Stainless steel flow sensor
Repair kit for 220 Series flow sensors
(includes impeller, shaft, bearing, and O-ring)
ACCESSORIES
2X2.5-3THD
2" Thredolet® for 2-1/2" and 3" pipe
2X4-6THD
2" Thredolet® for 4" to 6" pipe
2X8-36THD
2" Thredolet® for 8" to 36" pipe
RELATED PRODUCTS
UFT-1A
Flow transmitter
310
Programmable flow transmitter
208
FLOW
HOT TAP FLOW SENSOR
MODELS 225B, 226B, 226SS
DESCRIPTION
These Hot Tap Flow Sensors feature an elongated
sensor, special mounting adapter, pipe nipple, and isolation valve to allow the nonmagnetic impeller sensor to
be installed into a pressurized pipe while the pipe is in
service. This is accomplished by first attaching a 2" saddle or Thredolet® onto the pipe and screwing the nipple
and isolation valve into the saddle or Thredolet fitting. A
hole is then drilled through the pipe using a commercial
tapping machine. When complete, the tapping apparatus is removed, the isolation valve is closed, and the
sensor is installed.
The Hot Tap Flow Sensor is also recommended for any
application where it would be difficult to shut down or
drain the pipeline to remove the sensor for service. The
overall length of the sensor tube is 18" (46 cm); however, a clearance height of 36" (91 cm) should be allowed
for the fully extended length of the insertion tool.
Model HTT
Model 225B
Model 226B
Accuracy
Linearity
Repeatability
Rangeability
Flow rate
Max pressure
226B
225B
Max temp
Weight
225B
226B
HTT
+1% of full scale
+0.7%
+0.7%
60:1
0.5-30 fps
400 psig (2758 kPa) @ 100°F (37.8°C)
300 psig (2069 kPa) @ 100°F (37.8°C)
221°F (105°C)
FLOW
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted materials
Impeller
Glass-reinforced nylon
Bearing
Pennlon ® (UHMWPE)
Shaft
Tungsten carbide
Housing
Glass-reinforced PPS
O-rings
Ethylene propylene (EPDM)
Sleeves
225B/226B Admiralty brass UNS C44300
226SS
300 series stainless steel and
hex adapter
17.5 lb (7.9 kg)
13.0 lb (5.9 kg)
12.0 lb (5.4 kg)
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
225B
226B
226SS
DESCRIPTION
Brass hot tap flow sensor with gate-type isolation valve
Brass hot tap flow sensor with ball-type isolation valve
Stainless steel hot tap flow sensor with ball-type isolation valve
ACCESSORIES
813144-1211
HTT
230FRK
8132030
71873
2X2.5-3THD
2X4-6THD
2X8-36THD
Replacement sensor for 225B, 226B
Insertion tool
Repair kit for 225, 226 Series (includes impeller, shaft, bearing, and O-ring)
Ball valve, 2"
Gate valve, 2"
2" Thredolet® for 2-1/2" and 3" pipe
2" Thredolet® for 4" to 6" pipe
2" Thredolet® for 8" to 36" pipe
RELATED PRODUCTS
UFT-1A
Flow transmitter
310
Programmable flow transmitter
209
FLOW
TEE-MOUNTED FLOW SENSORS
MODELS 228B, 228C, 228SS, 250B
250B
228
DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION
Model 228 Flow Sensors consist of either a 220B Brass or
220SS Stainless Steel Flow Sensor mounted in a 2" (5.08
cm) brass tee, cast iron tee, or a stainless steel tee.
Model 250B Flow Sensors consist of a removable flow sensor mounted in a cast bronze housing. They are available for
1/2" to 1-1/2" (1.27 to 3.8 cm) pipe sizes.
FLOW
SPECIFICATIONS
Model 228
Accuracy
+1% full scale
Linearity
+0.7%
Repeatability
+0.7%
Flow range
0.5-30 fps
Max pressure @ 100°F
228B
200 psig (1379 kPa)
228C
175 psig (1207 kPa)
228SS
400 psg (2758 kPa)
Max temp
Standard
221°F (105°C)
Wetted materials
Standard units
Impeller
Glass-reinforced nylon
Bearing
Pennlon ® (UHMWPE)
Shaft
Tungsten carbide
Housing
Ryton® glass-reinforced PPS
O-rings
Ethylene propylene (EPDM)
228C/228B sleeve Admiralty brass UNS C44300
Hex adapter
Bronze UNS C83600
228SS sleeve
300 Series stainless steel
Hex adapter
300 Series stainless steel
Model 250B
Accuracy
Linearity
Repeatability
Flow range
Max temp
Standard
Max pressure @ 100°F
Wetted materials
Impeller
Bearing
Shaft
Housing
O-rings
+1% full scale
+0.7% full scale
+0.7% full scale
0.5 to 15 fps
221°F (105°C)
400 psig (2758 kPa)
Standard units
Glass-reinforced nylon
Pennlon ® (UHMWPE)
Tungsten carbide
Glass-reinforced
polyphenylene sulfide (PPS)
Ethylene propylene (EPDM)
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
228B-2
228C-2
228SS-2
250B-0.5, -0.75, -1, -1.25, -1.5
230FRK
230PRK
DESCRIPTION
Brass flow sensor mounted in a 2" (5.08 cm) bronze tee (copper solder couplings included)
Brass flow sensor mounted in a 2" (5.08 cm) cast iron pipe tee
Stainless steel flow sensor mounted in a 2" (5.08 cm) stainless steel pipe tee
Brass flow sensor mounted in a 1/2" (1.27 cm), 3/4" (1.91 cm), 1" (2.54 cm), 1-1/4" (3.18 cm),
or 1-1/2" (3.81 cm) NPT bronze pipe tee
Repair kit for 228 Series (includes impeller, shaft, bearing and O-ring)
Repair kit for 250 Series (includes impeller, shaft, bearing and O-ring)
RELATED PRODUCTS
UFT-1A
Flow transmitters
310
Programmable flow transmitter
210
FLOW
PVC TEE AND IN-LINE FLOW SENSORS
MODEL 228PV, 4000 SERIES
228PV
DESCRIPTION
4000 Series
DESCRIPTION
Model 228PV Flow Sensors are designed to measure
water flow in PVC pipes. These sensors consist of a
removable, nonmagnetic sensor in a schedule 80 PVC
tee with solvent-weld socket end connections. They are
available in 1-1/2" to 4" (3.81 to 10.16 cm) sizes.
4000 Series Flow Sensors are designed to measure
flow in small PVC pipes. They consist of a nonmagnetic
flow sensor with schedule 80 PVC tail pieces (plain end
pipe). They are available in 1/2" (1.27 cm), 3/4" (1.91
cm), and 1" (2.54 cm) sizes. An optional integral 4-20
mA loop-powered transmitter is available.
Piping
Flow velocity range
228PV
40xx
41xx
Accuracy
Repeatability
228PV
40/41
Linearity
Max temp
Max pressure
Schedule 80 PVC
0.5-30 fps
0-30 fps (1.0-20 recommended)
0-10 fps (0.25-8 recommended)
±1.0% full scale in recommended range
±0.3% full scale in recommended range
±0.5% full scale in recommended range
±0.2% full scale in recommended range
140°F (60°C)
350 psig @ 73°F, 75 psig @ 140°F
Output pulse
frequency
Output pulse width
Pulse power
Pulse signal
Analog power
Cable
228PV
40/41
3.2-200 Hz
5 ms ±25%
9-20 VDC, 2 mA max
5V CMOS and LSTTL compatible
10-35 VDC, 2-wire 4-20 mA
(4xxx10 models only)
20' of 2-conductor 20 AWG shielded ULtype PTLC wire (standard electronics)
3' of 2-conductor 20 AWG for integral
4-20 mA, 20' 3-conductor for pulse
output
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
228PV1505-1211
228PV2005-1211
228PV3005-1211
228PV4005-1211
400200-0021
400210-0021
410200-0021
410210-0021
401200-0021
401210-0021
411200-0021
411210-0021
402200-0021
402210-0021
DESCRIPTION
Flow sensor in 1-1/2" PVC tee
Flow sensor in 2" PVC tee
Flow sensor in 3" PVC tee
Flow sensor in 4" PVC tee
In-line flow sensor with 1/2" PVC tail pieces
In-line flow sensor with 1/2" PVC tail pieces, integral 4-20 mA
In-line low flow sensor with 1/2" PVC tail pieces
In-line low flow sensor with 1/2" PVC tail pieces, integral 4-20 mA
In-line flow sensor with 3/4" PVC tail pieces
In-line flow sensor with 3/4" PVC tail pieces, integral 4-20 mA
In-line low flow sensor with 3/4" PVC tail pieces
In-line low flow sensor with 3/4" PVC tail pieces, integral 4-20 mA
In-line flow sensor with 1" PVC tail pieces
In-line flow sensor with 1" PVC tail pieces, integral 4-20 mA
RELATED PRODUCTS
UFT-1
Universal flow transmitter
A-4000
Programming kit
310 Series
Programmable flow transmitter
1500 Series
Flow monitor
211
FLOW
SPECIFICATIONS
FLOW
FLOW SENSOR WITH INTEGRAL FLOW TRANSMITTER
SDI SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The SDI Series Flow Sensor with Integral Flow
Transmitter is Data Industrial’s latest product in their
dependable line of flow meters for liquids. The direct insertion models are available in either brass or stainless steel
material and can be installed or removed in piping systems
that are not pressurized. The hot tap stainless steel models
include isolation valve and mounting hardware which
enables flowmeter installation and removal while the piping
system is pressurized; system shutdown is unnecessary. Hot
tap stainless steel models are also available for bidirectional
flow measurement.
The four-blade impeller is rugged and non-fouling and
requires no custom calibration. The SDI Series is available
with a frequency output, analog output, and scaled-pulse
output and the display is optional. Stainless steel models are
available with a PEEK (polyetheretherketone) tip for high (up
to 300°F) fluid temperatures.
FLOW
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Direct insertion or hot tap installation
Fits pipe sizes 1.5" to 36"+ (3.8 to 91+ cm)
Mounts in 1" NPT tap, weld-on or pipe saddle
1% accuracy
Low pressure drop
Optional 8 character 3/8" (0.95 cm) LCD
NEMA 4X enclosure standard
Bidirectional models available
Field programmable with optional software
SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Voltage
Accuracy
Max pressure
Stainless steel
Brass
Max fluid temp
8-35 VDC
±1% of flow rate
1000 psig (6895 kPa)
600 psig (4137 kPa)
300°F (149°C) (PEEK tip)
180°F (82°C) (PPS tip)
Ambient temp range 14° to150°F (20° to 65°C)
Design flow range
0.3 to 20 fps (.09 to 6.1 mps)
Display
One-line eight-character 3/8"
(0.95 cm) LCD
Pressure drop
0.5 psig (3.45 kPa) or less
Enclosure
NEMA 4X, polypropylene with
Viton-sealed dacrylic cover
Electrical connection Screw terminals with 1/2"
(1.27 cm) conduit connection
O-Ring
Viton (standard)
Shaft
Tungsten carbide (standard)
Impeller
Stainless steel (standard)
Bearing
Torlon (standard)
212
SDI Insertion
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
SDI
Flow sensor with integral transmitter
MATERIAL
0D1N SS insertion w/PPS tip for 1.5" to 10" pipes
0D2N SS insertion w/PPS tip for 12"" to 36" pipes
0D3N SS insertion w/PPS tip for 36"+ pipes
1D1N Brass insertion w/PPS tip for 1.5" to 10" pipes
1D2N Brass insertion w/PPS tip for 12" to 36" pipes
1D3N Brass insertion w/PPS tip for 36"+ pipes
2D1N SS insertion w/PEEK tip for 1.5" to 10" pipes
2D2N SS insertion w/PEEK tip for 12" to 36" pipes
2D3N SS insertion w/PEEK tip for 36"+ pipes
0H1N SS hot tap w/PPS tip for 1.5" to 10" pipes
0H2N SS hot tap w/PPS tip for 12" to 36" pipes
0H3N SS hot tap w/PPS tip for 36"+ pipes
2H1N SS hot tap w/PEEK tip for 1.5" to 10" pipes
2H2N SS hot tap w/PEEK tip for 12" to 36" pipes
2H3N SS hot tap w/PEEK tip for 36"+ pipes
OUTPUT
0 Standard frequency pulse
1 4-20 mA
2 Scaled pulse
5 Bidirectional, 4-20 mA + direction (hot tap, PPS tip only)
6 Bidirectional, scaled pulse (hot tap, PPS tip only)
DISPLAY
0 No display
1 LCD option (not available with output option 0)
CONSTRUCTION
0200 Viton O-ring, Carbide shaft, SS impeller,
Torlon bearing (std)
1200 EPDM O-ring, Carbide shaft, SS impeller,
Torlon bearing
SDI
2D1N
1
1
0200
Example: SDI2D1N11200 Flow sensor with
integral transmitter, SS insertion
with PEEK tip, 4-20 mA output,
display, standard construction
RELATED PRODUCTS
A-SDI Programming kit
A-1027 Hot tap adapter nipple
FLOW
PROGRAMMABLE ANALOG FLOW TRANSMITTER
MODEL 310
DESCRIPTION
The Model 310 Programmable Analog Flow
Transmitter is a loop-powered device that converts the
signal from a 200 or 4000 Series flow sensor into a linear
4-20 mA signal. An integral, adjustable electronic filter
dampens the analog output for smooth, stable operation.
The microprocessor-based Model 310 is configured from
a computer, allowing it to be ordered pre-configured, or it
can be field-configured. One Model A301-20 programming kit will configure all Model 310 transmitters.
FEATURES
310-00
4-20 mA loop powered
Compact size
Computer programmable
Electronic signal dampening
WIRING
24 VDC
Power
Supply
Power requirements
Loop input voltage
Max loop resistance
9-35 VDC
7501 @ 24 VDC
Accuracy
0.1% of full scale
Input frequency
0-1 kHz
Output response time
Varies with filter, typically
1 sec 10% to 90% step
response
Operating temp
32° to 158°F (0° to 70°C)
Dimensions
1.75"H x 3.65"W x 1.0"D
(4.4 x 9.3 x 2.5 cm)
+
Shield (if applicable)
(black)
(red)
_
200 Series
Flow Sensor
Power (4000 only)
Signal (+)
Signal (-)
Shield Ground
_
4-20 mA
Signal
4-20 mA loop (+)
FLOW
Sensor Inputs
+
Model 310
Calibration
Port
NOTE: Call Kele for
4000 Series wiring.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
310
310
DESCRIPTION
Programmable analog flow transmitter
MOUNTING
00
Transmitter only
01
Transmitter in NEMA 4X enclosure
02
Transmitter in metal enclosure
03
Transmitter in plastic enclosure
04
Transmitter with DIN rail mount
OPTIONS
XR Pre-configured option
00
XR Example: 310-00-XR Preconfigured programmable
analog flow transmitter for field mounting
For preconfigured flow sensors, specify pipe size, schedule,
and maximum flow rate at time of order.
A301-20
RELATED PRODUCTS
Programming kit (cable and software)
213
FLOW
SPECIFICATIONS
4-20 mA loop (-)
•
•
•
•
FLOW
FLOW MONITOR
1500 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The 1500 Series is an economical, full-featured digital flow
monitor. The two-line, eight-character alphanumeric display
can be user-configured to display flow rate and flow total separately or simultaneously. The 1500 Series is easily field-calibrated for use with any Data Industrial flow sensor. It may also
be calibrated for a pulse, sine wave, or optional 4-20 mA analog flow signal.
The 1500 Series provides two TTL pulse outputs: one for flow
rate alarm and one for flow total. The resolution of these pulse
outputs may be user programmed. An optional analog output
is also available for flow rate, and optional mechanical relay
outputs are available for flow rate alarm and totalization. The
front panel includes one LED for power status and one LED for
impeller status, totalizer status, or alarm status. All calibration
information, units of measure, and flow totals are stored in
nonvolatile memory that does not require battery back-up for
data retention.
FLOW
Programming is menu driven. All data is entered using the
password-protected LCD and keypad on the face of the unit.
1500 Series software contains eight engineering units for indicating flow rate and four for indicating flow total. The 1500
Series is available in either a NEMA 4X panel-mount or a
NEMA 4 wall-mount version.
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
Field calibrated
Menu-driven programming
Flow rate and flow total display
Password protected calibration data
Wall mount or panel mount
SPECIFICATIONS
Power
Consumption
Display
Operating temp
Dimensions
Panel mount
Wall mount
Pulse output
12-24 VDC
3W max
Eight characters by two lines,
alphanumeric, dot matrix
LCD display
-40° to 158°F (-40° to 85°C)
Options
Relays
3.78"W x 3.78"H x 3.23"D
(9.6 x 9.6 x 8.2 cm)
4.80W" x 4.72"H x 3.55"D
(12.2 x 12.0 x 9.0 cm)
•Two open-collector transistor pulse outputs, one for rate and one for total, userconfigured to any units
•Adjustable 100 ms to 5.0 sec pulse output width in 100 ms increments (totalizer
only)
•Max sinking current:
300 mA @ 24 VDC
Two optional relays: 1 operates from rate
and 1 from totalizer
SPST contacts, 3A @ 250 VAC or 30
VDC max resistive load
Rate
• High rate and low rate alarm functions
• Adjustable 0-120 sec delay (in 10-sec
increments) for activation of alarm
functions
• Latched feature
Totalizer
• User-configurable output to any units
Analog output
Min voltage
Max voltage
• Current sinking, isolated 4-20 mA
7 VDC
30 VDC
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
1500
1500
214
DESCRIPTION
Flow monitor with LCD display
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
0
No analog output
3
0-10 VDC input for flow meter with analog output
5
4-20 mA analog output
RELAY OUTPUTS
0
Standard - 2 TTL pulse outputs
1
Two mechanical relays (1 - flow rate alarm, 1 - totalizer)
MOUNTING
0 Panel mount, NEMA 4X front panel
1 Wall mount, NEMA 4
5
0
1
Example: 1500-5-0-1 Flow monitor with 4-20 mA
analog output, NEMA 4 wall-mount
Order Data Industrial
flow sensor separately
FLOW
BTU MONITOR
1550 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The 1550 Series BTU Monitor is an economical, fullfeatured, microprocessor-based unit designed for submetering applications. It accepts the inputs of one flow
sensor and two Precon Type 24 temperature sensors
and calculates the energy being produced or consumed.
The flow sensor input may be from any 200 or 4000
Series flow sensor or any other pulse or sine wave signal flow sensor.
The 1550 Series provides a display of energy rate, temperature, energy total, or flow rate on an alphanumeric
display with two lines of eight characters each. The
energy rate may be displayed in kBtu/hr or kW, the energy total in Btu or kWh, and flow rate in gpm or lpm. The
user programs the units from the four-button front panel
by following a simple menu. A password lockout feature
is included. A 100 ms pulse output for energy total is
standard. A variety of pulse and analog outputs are
optional.
1550-001 BTU monitor shown
with 220B flow sensor and
ST-U24B-XP temperature sensors
(order separately)
• Field calibrated with simple menu-driven
programming
• Energy rate, energy total, or flow rate display
FLOW
FEATURES
• Password protection
• NEMA 4X wall or panel mount
• A variety of flow sensor inputs accepted
SPECIFICATIONS
Power supply
15-24 VDC @ 60 mA
(basic unit)
Analog output option Add 30 mA
Relay output option Add 40 mA
Opto-isolated output Add 10 mA
Display
Eight characters by two lines,
alphanumeric
Operating temp
-4° to 158°F (-20° to 70°C)
Flow sensor
Any 200, 4000 Series or SDI
flow sensor [Call Trane for
application with other pulse or
sine wave type flow sensors]
Temp sensor
Precon Type 24 thermistor,
two required (XP option recommended) (matched ±0.1°F)
Totalizer range
0.000001 to 9,999,999
Pulse output
(energy total)
Open collector transistor
pulse, user configurable to any
units 100 ms pulse width
Max sinking current 150 mA @ 24 VDC
Units of measure
Energy total
User selectable as kBtu or kWh
with one pulse set to 0.000001
to 9,999,999 (rolls over to zero)
Energy rate
User selectable as Btu/Hr or kW
Flow rate
User selectable as GPM or LPM
Temp
User selectable as °F or °C
Options
Relay
Analog
Weight
Panel mount
Wall mount
SPST 3.0A @ 250 VAC
4-20 mA; loop powered, 24
VDC nominal, 8501 max
impedance, 0-10 VDC; nonisolated
0.5 lb (0.23 kg)
1.2 lb (0.54 kg)
215
FLOW
BTU MONITOR
1550 SERIES
DIMENSIONS
WIRING
in
(cm)
3.57 - 3.60
(9.06 - 9.14)
3.49
(8.86)
1550 Series
Panel
Cutout
Top
3.57 - 3.60
(9.06 - 9.14)
POWER
COM
1
SIGNAL
2
TEMP1
3
COM
4
15-24 VDC
SENSOR POWER
TEMP
OUTPUTS
TEMP2
2.21
(5.8)
-
+
3.23
(8.20)
3.78
(9.60)
1
3.78
(9.60)
Side
3.49
(8.86)
24 VDC
Power
Supply
ST-U24B-XP
Temp
Sensors
4-20 mA
Signal
Panel Mount
24 VDC
Power
Supply
Bare
Black
Red
Front
2
See Note 1
200 Series
Flow Sensor
1/4 AMP Fast
Acting Fuse
3.62
(9.19)
24V Max
Counter
FLOW
4.80
(12.19)
1
The same power supply may power the 1550 and
the outputs.
2
Wiring shown is for open collector transistor pulse
output (standard). An optional SPST relay pulse
output is also available.
4.72
(11.99)
Wall Mount
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
1550
1550
DESCRIPTION
BTU monitor with display
ANALOG OUTPUTS
0
No analog output
1
Isolated 4-20 mA loop
2
Nonisolated 0-10 VDC
RELAY OUTPUTS
0
Standard open collector pulse
1
SPST relay pulse
MOUNTING
0
Panel mount, NEMA 4X front panel
1
Wall mount, NEMA 4X
1
1
0
Order flow sensor
and temperature
sensors separately.
Example: 1550-1-1-0 BTU Monitor with 4-20 mA output for BTU/Hr rate, SPST relay
pulse output for BTU, and panel-mount housing with NEMA 4X front
RELATED PRODUCTS
200/4000 Series
ST-U24B-XP
ST-U24S-XP
216
Flow sensors
Temperature sensors, matched ±0.1°F, brass wells
Temperature sensors, matched ±0.1°F, stainless wells
FLOW
BTU TRANSMITTER
340 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Data Industrial 340 Series is an inexpensive and
easy-to-apply BTU transmitter. It is software-driven and
field-configurable, measuring energy usage based on
liquid flow rate and two 10 k1 thermistor inputs. The
onboard microcontroller and digital circuitry provide precise measurements and produce accurate drift-free outputs. Configuration is accomplished with a windowsbased software programming kit. The 340 Series is
available with a standard pulse output or with on-board
communication technology for LonWorks networks or
the Johnson Controls N2 Metasys system.
FEATURES
AC or DC powered
Field programmable
Available in various mounting platforms
Microprocessor based
Small footprint
Uses two 10 k1 thermistors
Used with Data Industrial flow sensors
340-00
FLOW
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
SPECIFICATIONS
Power
Current draw
Operating temp
Storage temp
Flow sensor input
All sensors
Pulse-type sensors
Signal amplitude
Signal limits
Frequency
Pull-up
Sine wave sensors
Signal amplitude
Signal limits
Frequency
Temp sensor input
(two required)
12-24 VAC ±5%
12-24 VDC ±10%
60 mA @ 24 VDC
-20° to 158°F (-29° to 70°C)
-40° to 185°F (-40° to 85°C)
Excitation voltage three-wire
sensors, 7.9-11.4 VDC 2701
source impedance
2.5 VDC threshold
Vin <35V (DC or AC peak)
0-10 kHz
8.5 VDC @ 2 k1 source
impedance
10 mV p-p threshold
V in<35V (DC or AC peak)
0-10 kHz
Pulse output
Operating voltage range
0 to ±60V (DC or AC peak)
Closed (on) state
Load current
700 mA max over operating
temp range
On-resistance
700 m1 max over operating
temp range
Open (off) state
Leakage @ 150°F (70°C)
< 1µA @ 60V (DC or AC
peak)
N2 output (secondary) RS-485 output compliant with
EIA/TIA-485 standards
Units of measure
English and SI
(Model 340LW SI units only)
Dimensions
3.6" x 2.9" (9.3 x 7.5 cm)
Weight
0.3 lb (0.14 kg)
Programming
Requires PC or laptop and
Data Industrial A301-20 or
A302-20 programming kit
10 k1 @ 25°C two-wire,
Type II
217
FLOW
BTU TRANSMITTER
340 SERIES
WIRING
DIMENSIONS
Pulse Input
Device
(–) (+)
AC/DC
Power +
Supply –
AC L or DC+
AC C or DC–
Flow
Sensor
(red)
(black)
in
(cm)
1.6
(4.1)
Pulse –
Output +
3.65
(9.3)
Power Out
Signal (+)
Signal (–)
Shield
0.88
(2.2)
Shield
(if applicable)
2.95
(7.5)
Temp 1
0.6
(1.5)
Temperature
Sensors
Temp 2
FLOW
* Network communications terminals
vary slightly per model
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
340
BTU meter
OUTPUT
Transmitter with standard pulse output
LW
Transmitter for use with LonWorks networks
N2
Transmitter for use with Johnson Metasys networks
ENCLOSURE
00 Transmitter only
02 Transmitter with metal enclosure
03 Transmitter with plastic enclosure
04 Transmitter with DIN rail mounting clips
340
_ – _ 02 Example: 340 Series BTU meter with standard pulse output
and metal enclosure
A301-20
A302-20
200/4000 Series
ST-U24B-XP
ST-U24S-XP
RELATED PRODUCTS
Programming kit for the Model 340 and 340-LW
Programming kit for the Model 340-N2
Flow sensors
Temperature sensor, matched, brass well
Temperature sensor, matched, stainless steel well
See the “Temperature” section in the Trane catalog for applicable temperature sensors.
See the “Flow” section in the Trane catalog for applicable flow sensors
218
FLOW
UNIVERSAL FLOW TRANSMITTER
MODEL UFT-1
DESCRIPTION
The Model UFT-1 Universal Flow Transmitter is a
solid-state, digital signal converter designed to operate
with Data Industrial 200 Series flow sensors. Both analog (4-20 mA) and pulse outputs are available. The
Model UFT-1 may be mounted in an optional NEMA 4X
enclosure or with digital display of gpm or totalized flow
(in a non-watertight enclosure).
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
UFT-1
Analog and pulse outputs
Optional watertight (NEMA 4X) enclosure
Optional displays for flow rate and totalization
Low cost
Excitation voltage for flow sensors
LED indication of pulse activity
UFT-1E-1
APPLICATION
DIMENSIONS
FLOW
Analog Output (rate)
The Model UFT-1 analog transmitter converts a Data
Industrial digital flow signal into a precalibrated 4-20 mA
signal. It must be calibrated for each Data Industrial flow
sensor installation. The pipe type, size, and maximum
flow rate must be specified at the time of order if 4-20
mA output is to be used.
in
(cm)
Pulse
Out +
Pulse Output (totalization)
The Model UFT-1 pulse output divides the Data
Industrial digital flow signal by a jumper-selectable 10 or
100 position to provide a more usable digital pulse. The
pulse output is normally used where flow totalization is
required. A simple conversion formula, using the flow
factors for Data Industrial flow sensors on the next page,
can convert the digital pulses to totalized gallons.
Pulse
Out –
mA Signal
Out
XDCR
Signal In
2.19
(5.56)
24 VDC
Power
Common
The pulse output is an optoisolated transistor switch that
can be wired to source or sink pulses to totalizer equipment.
3.25
(8.25)
Note: This unit is not intended for field setup or
field calibration.
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply voltage
Operating temp
Operating humidity
Output
Input
24 VDC @ 60 mA
32° to 140°F (0° to 60°C)
5% to 95% noncondensing
4-20 mA and solid-state switch
15-150 Hz full scale
(dry or electronic contact)
Max loop resistance
Output switch rating
Accuracy
Step response
4-20 mA output 7501 @
24 VDC
40 VDC @ 200 mA
±0.5%
5 sec from 10% to 90%
219
FLOW
UNIVERSAL FLOW TRANSMITTER
MODEL UFT-1
WIRING
Output Pulse Divider
Selection Jumper
Pulse
(10 or 100) 100
Out
10
Pulse
Out +
Totalize
Pulse
Out –
– Power
mA Signal
Out
(red) +
XDCR
Signal In
PWR Common
Transducer Power Option Jumper
(Leave on for Data Industrial flow sensors.
Remove for devices with their own power supply.)
Typical
Totalizer
Hookup
+ 4-20 mA
– Output
+
–
24 VDC
Power Supply
INSTALLATION AND CALIBRATION
TABLE 1. FLOW FACTORS FOR DATA INDUSTRIAL
FLOW SENSORS
The UFT-1 transmitter can be mounted in any position. The
optional watertight enclosure provides a watertight seal
against contaminants. While field calibration is not required
with the UFT-1, flow conversion must be accomplished at the
monitoring computer. The information below is provided for
making the conversion calculations.
FLOW
Flow
Sensor
(black) –
24 VDC
Power
XDCR
Sig In
+
FLOW RATE
= (mA measured - 4 mA) x Maximum gpm
16
Maximum gpm is the flow rate at 20 mA output on the transmitter and must be specified at the time the UFT-1 is ordered
for proper calibration.
Flow (gpm)
TOTALIZED FLOW
Totalized Gallons = (Flow Factor) x (Output Divider) x (Total
Pulses)
For totalized m3, multiply the above by 0.00379.
Output Divider = 10 or 100 depending on jumper-selection.
Flow factors per pulse are shown in the table at the right.
MODEL
228PV-1.5
228PV-2
228B-2
228C-2
250B-0.5
250B-0.75
250B-1
250B-1.25
250B-1.5
220B-2.5
220B
220B
220B
220B
220B
220B
220B
220B
220B
220B
PIPE SIZE
in (cm)
FLOW
FACTOR
1-1/2 (3.81)
2 (5.08)
2 (5.08)
2 (5.08)
1/2 (1.27)
3/4 (1.91)
1 (2.54)
1-1/4 (3.18)
1-1/2 (3.81)
2-1/2 (6.35)
3 (7.62)
4 (10.16)
5 (12.7)
6 (15.24)
8 (20.32)
10 (25.40)
12 (30.48)
14 (35.56)
16 (40.64)
18 (45.72)
0.03118
0.04611
0.04579
0.04731
0.005646
0.007514
0.007015
0.01280
0.01780
0.03800
0.07280
0.1396
0.2457
0.3611
0.6710
1.080
1.630
1.944
2.502
3.158
GALLONS/PULSE
JUMPER IN
JUMPER IN
10 POSITION 100 POSITION
0.3118
0.4611
0.4579
0.4731
0.05646
0.07514
0.07015
0.1280
0.1780
0.3800
0.7280
1.396
2.457
3.611
6.710
10.80
16.30
19.44
25.02
31.58
3.118
4.611
4.579
4.731
0.5646
0.7514
0.7015
1.280
1.780
3.800
7.280
13.96
24.57
36.11
67.10
108.0
163.0
194.4
250.2
315.8
Notes
1. Flow factors for a Model 225 and 226 are the same as Model 220.
*2. Flow factor for Model 228S is the same as 228C.
3. PV Series is sized for SCH 80 PVC pipe.
All other series are sized for SCH 40 black iron pipe.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
UFT-1
UFT-1A
UFT-1E
UFT-1AE
UFT-1
220
DESCRIPTION
Universal flow transmitter pulse output only
Universal flow transmitter with pulse and calibrated 4-20 mA output*
Universal flow transmitter pulse output in NEMA 4X enclosure
Universal flow transmitter with pulse and calibrated 4-20 mA output* in NEMA 4X enclosure
DISPLAY OPTION (enclosed models only)
1
Flow totalization only
2
Flow rate only
3
Flow totalization and flow rate **
1
Example: UFT-1A-E-2 Basic transmitter with calibrated 4-20 mA flow rate
output (4 mA = no flow 20 mA = max flow), enclosed with LCD
flow rate indication
* Pipe size and schedule and
maximum flow rate must be
specified at time of order.
** When a UFT-1AE3 is ordered
the UFT-1A will be in one enclosure
and the Totalizer and Rate Display
will be in a separate enclosure.
FLOW
ULTRASONIC FLOWMETER
DTFXL SERIES
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Transit-time technology
Immune to suspended solids and gas pockets
Bi-directional flow range
Multiple totalizers for forward, reverse, net
Models with or without display
Selectable standard or metric engineering units
Integral or remote transducers for < 2" pipes
Remote transducers for pipes up to 100"
Non-invasive, no system down time to install
4-20 mA output plus choice of pulse outputs
Optional armored cable
High temperature transducers available
APPLICATIONS
The DTFXL Series is available in 3 basic transmitter/transducer arrangements for installation and application flexibility. The transmitters are available with or
without display.
Models with integral transducers are available for pipe
sizes 1/2" to 2"; the transmitter is attached to the transducers which clamp on to the pipe, for a local mount
arrangement.
Models with remote small-pipe (1/2" to 2") clamp-on
transducers allow the transmitter to be wall or panel
mounted away from the pipe.
Models with remote large-pipe (2 1/2" to 100") strap-on
transducers require the transmitter to be wall or panel
mounted away from the pipe.
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply voltage
Liquid types
Liquid velocity range
Outputs
4-20 mA
Turbine or TTL
Display
Accuracy
Response time
Pipe size range
11-30 VDC @ 0.25 A
Most clean liquids or liquids with
some suspended solids or aeration (up to 40%)
0.1 to 40 FPS (0.03 to 12.4
MPS) bidirectional
900 ohms max, source power
can share common with power
supply
0-1,000 Hz, switch selectable;
Turbine = non-ground ref AC,
100 mV pp min.; TTL = 5 VDC
pp ground ref square wave
2 line x 8 character LCD
±1.0% of reading above 1 FPS
(0.3 MPS) velocity, ±0.01% of
reading below 1 FPS
0.3 to 30 seconds, adjustable
1/2" to 100" (1.2 cm to 254 cm)
Pipe materials
Temperature range
Transmitter
Transducer (integral)
Transducer (std. remote)
Transducer (high temp.)
Transmitter enclosure
Conduit connection
Approvals
Transducer cable lengths
Warranty
Carbon steel, stainless steel,
copper, plastic
-40° to 185°F (-40° to 85°C)
-40° to 185°F (-40° to 85°C)
-40° to 250°F (-40° to 121°C)
-40° to 400°F (-40° to 200°C)
NEMA 4X, if a liquid-tight
conduit connection is used
1/2" conduit knockout (7/8",
2.2 cm)
Gen. Req. ANSI/ISA 582.01;
Haz. Loc. ANSI/ISA 12.12.01
Class 1 Div 2, Groups C & D;
CSA C22.2 No. 213, E79-1595
20' (6.1 m), 50' (15 m), or
100' (30 m)
1 year from date of shipment
221
FLOW
The DTFXL Series Ultrasonic Flowmeter measures
water flow in a wide variety of pipe sizes and pipe materials, using clamp-on sensors that attach to the outside
of the pipe. This non-invasive, non-contact flowmeter
provides instantaneous flow rate and accumulated flow
and provides a 4-20 mA output as well as pulse outputs.
The DTFXL Series Flowmeter is easy to install, has a
large bi-directional flow range, and comes with or without a display. Configuration, monitoring, and calibration
of the DTXFL is accomplished with an easy to use software package via a cable connection from a PC to the
flowmeter.
FLOW
ULTRASONIC FLOWMETER
DTFXL SERIES
DIMENSIONS - INTEGRAL MODEL
6.66
(169.2)
in (mm)
2.57
(65.3)
TRANSIT TIME FLOWMETER
3.17
(80.5)
.875 (22.2) DIA
CONDUIT HOLE
B
NOTE: Dimensions A, B, C, and D vary by pipe size.
See Dynasonics literature for details.
D
A
C
FLOW
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
DTFXL1
DTFXL2
DTFXL3
DTFXL4
Remote Transducers For Small Pipes (with “X” Pipe Size)
MODEL DESCRIPTION
DTTS
Remote transducers for 1/2" to 2" pipes
PIPE SIZE
D 1/2"
F 3/4"
G 1"
H 1 1/4"
J 1 1/2"
L 2"
PIPE TYPE
P ANSI carbon steel
C Copper
T Tubing
CABLE LENGTH
020 20 feet (6.1 m)
050 50 feet (15 m)
100 100 feet (30 m)
CABLE ARMOR OPTION
N No armor
A Flexible armor
CABLE ARMOR LENGTH
000 No armor
020 20 feet (6.1 m)
050 50 feet (15 m)
100 100 feet (30 m)
DESCRIPTION
Transmitter without display
Transmitter with display
Transmitter without display, UL enclosure
Transmitter with display, UL enclosure
PIPE SIZE
A
1/2" ANSI carbon steel
B
3/4" ANSI carbon steel
C
1" ANSI carbon steel
D
1 1/4" ANSI carbon steel
E
1 1/2" ANSI carbon steel
F
2" ANSI carbon steel
G
1/2" copper
H
3/4" copper
I
1" copper
J
1 1/4" copper
K
1 1/2" copper
L
2" copper
M
1/2" tubing (plastic)
N
3/4" tubing (plastic)
P
1" tubing (plastic)
Q
1 1/4" tubing (plastic)
R
1 1/2" tubing (plastic)
S
2" tubing
X
Remote transducers (see right)
CONNECTOR OPTIONS
N 1/2" conduit knockout
OUTPUT SIGNALS
1-NN 4-20 mA and pulse
WIRING
NOTE: Add "-C"suffix to transmitter model number for
factory-configured transmitter and fill out the
Application Data Sheet. The UltraLink software
is required to reset the DTFXL totalizer and to
field configure, monitor and diagnose the
DTFXL. The PC cable is required to connect a
PC to the DTFXL and the software is available
on CD or free from www.dynasonics.com.
RELATED PRODUCTS
PC cable
connection
Note: Power ground and
4-20 mA common are
connected internally.
+
Turbine or TTL output
MODEL
D010-0204-001
D005-083-104
D010-2102-010
–
4-20 mA
+
4-20 mA output –
Turbine or TTL Pulse
D002-2007-001
Power –
Transducer
Connections
+
+
–
24 VDC
Power
Supply
Note: Integral model transmitters have conduit knock out connection on the right
side of the enclosure. Remote models have two conduit holes on the bottom
side of the enclosure.
222
Remote Transducers for Large Pipes (with “X” Pipe Size)
MODEL DESCRIPTION
DTTN
Standard temperature remote transducers for 2 1/2" to 100" pipes
DTTH
High temperature remote transducers for 2 1/2" to 100" pipes
CABLE LENGTH
020 20 feet (6.1 m)
050 50 feet (15 m)
100 100 feet (30 m)
CABLE ARMOR OPTION
N No armor
A Flexible armor
CABLE ARMOR LENGTH
000 No armor
020 20 feet (6.1 m)
050 50 feet (15 m)
100 100 feet (30 m)
OPTIONS
N
Normal area rating
DCP-1.5-W
DCP-1.2
DESCRIPTION
PC to transmitter cable
UltraLink software CD
Mounting track assembly (for
DTTN/H transducers) for 2 1/2" to
10" pipes only.
Additional 36" stainless hoseclamps for DTTN/H transducers
(two pairs included standard with
remote transducers)
24 VAC / 24 VDC power supply
120 VAC / 24 VDC power supply
FLOW
FIXED AND RETRACTABLE INSERTION VORTEX FLOW METER
2200, 3100 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The 2200 Series Fixed Insertion, and 3100 Series
Retractable Vortex Flowmeters are used to measure
the flow rate of water, water/glycol mixtures, and condensate in 2" to 20" pipes. Each flowmeter is factory calibrated and scaled to provide precise output signals. No
complex field adjustments or confusing measurement
routines are required to install the flowmeters. Simple
design, easy installation, reliable performance, and low
cost make these flowmeters an excellent choice for
commercial HVAC applications.
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
No moving parts
Easy to install
Reliable and robust design
Wide flow range – 15:1 turndown ratio
Microprocessor based piezo resistive sensor
technology
• Optional integral display
• Two year warranty
2200 Series
with Optional
Display
OPERATION
As flow passes a bluff body in the flow stream, vortices are alternately formed on either side of the bluff body (Figure 1).
According to well proven physical laws, the frequency at which
vortices are alternately formed is directly proportional to the
average flow velocity. The vortices create low and high pressure
zones behind the bluff body. A vortex flowmeter has a sensing
element that detects these low and high pressure zones and the
frequency at which they are created to measure flow.
WIRING
The fluttering of a flag (Figure 2) is one example of how vortices
are created. The flag pole acts as a bluff body to the blowing
wind as the flag waves from the force of the vortices alternately
created.
FIGURE 1. VORTICES CREATED BY
A BLUFF BODY
Vs
(10 to 32 VDC)
FIGURE 2. EXAMPLES OF
VORTEX EFFECT
*Rload
Bluff
Body
4-20 mA wiring
* Rload maximum = 50 (Vs - 10)
Bluff
Body
FLOW RANGES
Pipe Size in (mm)
Minimum Flow
2200 gpm (m3/h)
Series Maximum Flow
gpm (m3/h)
Minimum Flow
3100 gpm (m3/h)
Series Maximum Flow
gpm (m3/h)
2” (50)
3” (80)
4” (100)
6” (150)
8” (200)
10” (250)
12” (300)
14” (350)
16” (400)
18” (450)
20” (500)
10.6 (2.4)
23.4 (5.4)
40 (9.2)
100 (23)
167 (38)
267 (61)
368 (83)
418 (95)
568 (129)
734 (167)
934 (212)
160 (36.3) 350 (79.5)
600 (136)
1500 (341)
2500 (557)
4000 (909)
5500 (1249)
6250 (1420)
8500 (1931)
11000 (2498)
14000 (3180)
na
26.6 (6.0)
40 (9.0)
100 (23)
167 (38)
267 (61)
366 (83)
417 (95)
567 (129)
733 (167)
933 (212)
na
400 (90.8)
600 (136)
1500 (341)
2500 (557)
4000 (909)
5500 (1249)
6250 (1420)
8500 (1931)
11000 (2498)
14000 (3180)
223
FLOW
FIXED AND RETRACTABLE INSERTION VORTEX FLOW METER
2200, 3100 SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
Pipe sizes
Model 2200
Model 3100
Pipe connection
Model 2200
Model 3100
Pressure rating
Threadolet mount
Saddle mount
Tee mount
Flow range
2" to 20" (50 mm to 500 mm)
3" to 20" (75 mm to 500 mm)
1-1/2" NPT male
2" NPT male
400 psig (2759 kPa)
300 psig (2069 kPa)
150 psig (1035 kPa)
1.0 fps (0.3 mps) min,
15.0 fps (4.5 mps) max
32° to 160°F (0° to 71°C)
Max load
Display (optional)
Ultem® (plastic)
316 stainless steel
Ambient temp range
FLOW
Fluid temp range
Wetted parts
Vortex sensor
Shedder bar
Stem
O-rings
Compression
Fitting
Power
Output
Accuracy
Enclosure
Stainless steel
EPDM
Brass
10-32 VDC
Pulse or 4-20 mA loop
powered
Rload = 50 (Vs-10)
LCD alternates between four
digit rate and eight digit total
±1.0% of full scale (combined
linearity and repeatability)
Reinforced polycarbonate
NEMA 6
-20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C)
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
2200
3100
DESCRIPTION
Fixed insertion vortex flow meter
Retractable insertion vortex flow meter
PIPE SIZE DESCRIPTION
02
2" Pipe (fixed insertion only)
03
3" Pipe
04
4" Pipe
06
6" Pipe
08
8" Pipe
10
10" Pipe
12
12" Pipe
14
14" Pipe
16
16" Pipe
18
18" Pipe
20
20" Pipe
MOUNTING DESCRIPTION
1
Threadolet
4
Tee (2" size only)
OUTPUT, DISPLAY OPTIONS DESCRIPTION
2-1-1
4-20 mA output, no display
2-2-1
4-20 mA output, display, English units
2200
06
1
2-1-1
Example: 2200-06-1-2-1-1 Fixed insertion flow meter,
6" pipe, Threadolet mount, 4-20 mA, no display
Notes: Other options and configurations available. Separately ordered configuration software
also available for field configuration. Consult Trane.
224
FLOW
INSERTION VORTEX FLOW METER
MODEL V-BAR 700
DESCRIPTION
The Model V-Bar 700 Insertion Vortex Flow Meter can
be used to measure the flow rates of most liquids,
gases, and steam. The same Model V-Bar 700 will fit in
lines from 3" to 80" (7.62 to 203.2 cm). This unit features no moving parts and an accuracy of ±1.5% for
steam and gases (liquids are ±1.0%). Each unit comes
with an easily programmable integral local flow rate indicator and totalizer. Each Model V-Bar 700 carries the
CE mark.
FEATURES
Measures flow rates of liquids, gases, or steam
2000 psig (13,790 kPa) pressure rating
500°F temperature rating
No moving parts
Integral transmitter with local display
4-20 mA output
One meter for applications from 3" to 80"
(7.62 to 203.2 cm)
• Stainless steel construction
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy
Repeatability
Enclosure
Ambient temp
Power requirements
Output
Min flow
Wetted parts
Mounting
Pressure tap
±1.5% of flow rate for gas or
steam
±1.0% of flow rate for liquids
±0.15% of flow rate
NEMA 4X
-20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C)
Isolated 18-40 VDC, 35 mA max
4-20 mA, two-wire system/pulse
1.5 fps
316L Stainless steel or the cast
equivalent
2" NPT
1/4" NPT pipe nipple
OPERATION
Vortex flow meters are devices that measure the frequency
of vortices created in the flow stream. Vortices are like tiny
eddies produced by an obstruction (called a bluff body) in the
flow and are actually areas of low pressure. These vortices
travel with the flow downstream until they run out of energy.
Inserting a bluff body (Figure 1) into the stream creates
these vortices that alternate from side to side. The frequency
of these vortices or pressure pulses can be measured and
are directly proportional to the average flow rate. A flag waving in the wind is an example of this vortex effect (Figure 2).
The flagpole is the bluff body, and the high and low pressure
areas are seen as high and low ridges in the flag. These
ridges alternate as they travel across the flag and cause the
flag to appear to be waving.
FIGURE 1. VORTICES CREATED BY
A BLUFF BODY
FIGURE 2. EXAMPLES OF
VORTEX EFFECT
Bluff
Body
Bluff
Body
ORDERING INFORMATION
Please call Trane for specific application and prices.
The following information is required:
1. Pipe size and schedule
2. Type of gas or liquid
3. Operating pressure
4. Maximum flow rate (btu/h, lb/hr, scfm)
5. Temperature
6. Constant or varying pressure
225
FLOW
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
FLOW
TARGET FLOW METERS
MODELS KVS (Steam), KV (Other Gases & Liquids)
FLOW
DESCRIPTION
Model KVS and KV Target Flow Meters are highly
durable and reliable flow meters for steam, liquids, and
gases. With no moving parts, they measure flow with a
strain gauge bridge circuit (outside the fluid) on a shaft
attached to a stainless steel target in the pipe. The signal from the strain gauge circuit is converted to an analog signal by a transmitter mounted in an integral explosionproof housing. The transmitter, which provides an
analog signal linear to flow, is standard. Instrumentation
is also available to provide local or remote indication of
flow rate, totalization, or pressure/temperature compensated mass flow.
FEATURES
• 0.5% accuracy through 8" (20.32 cm), 1-2%
above 8"
• No moving parts
• Long life with two-year warranty
• Integral linear analog transmitter
• Bidirectional (optional)
• Explosionproof housing standard
• Mass flow computer (optional)
• -65°F to 425°F (218°C) standard temperature
rating
• Stainless steel construction standard
• Flow measurement of the following:
Steam
Acids
Water
Gases
Chemicals Air
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
KV
Insertion target flowmeter, integral transmitter, for water
KVS
Insertion target flowmeter, integral transmitter, for steam
LINE SIZE (inches) DESCRIPTION
4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, etc. Select pipe size (larger insertion and smaller in-line models also available)
MOUNTING DESCRIPTION
M
2" RF Flange
P
4" RF Flange
FLANGE RATING DESCRIPTION
1
150 # RF ANSI
2
300 # RF ANSI
BODY, ELEMENT DESCRIPTION
S1K
303/304 SS Body, 1,000 psi, 425 DF rating
KV
6
M
1
S1K
Example: KV-6-M-1-S1K Insertion target flowmeter
for water, 6" pipe size, 2" RF 150 # mounting
flange, 303/304 SS body, 1,000 psi, 425 DF
rating
NOTES: The following information is required. Each flowmeter is factory-configured for a specific application.
1) Type of fluid or gas
2) Operation pressure and temperature
3) Maximum flow rate (gpm, lb/hr, scfm, etc.)
4) Transmitter output required (4-20 mA, pulse, mass flow, batch relay control, etc.)
Smaller pipe size in-line target flowmeters (1/2" - 3") also available. Remote transmitters, retractable type flowmeters,
and many other options also available. Consult Trane.
226
FLOW
CALEFFI FLOW SWITCH
MODEL 626600A
DESCRIPTION
Model 626600A Flow Switch from Caleffi is used to
prove liquid flow in 1" to 8" pipes containing water, glycol
solutions, or other liquids that are compatible with stainless steel, brass, and EPDM. It is designed for use in
HVAC systems, heat exchangers, pumping systems,
water treatment, and process systems in general.
The high quality of Model 626600A makes it ideal for
controlling pumps, burners, compressors, refrigerators,
motorized valves, or for activation of signaling units or
warning devices.
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
and long life
NEMA 4 (IP54) environmental rating for use in
humid or dusty environments
Six stainless steel blades to fit 1" through
8" pipes
Insulated cover over microswitch contacts
for safety
Large, easily-accessible calibration screw with
locking nut to maintain setpoint
Model 626600A
WIRING
1
COMMON
FLOW
• AISI 316L stainless steel bellows for durability
3
NO
2
NC
Shown in no-flow, normal position
SPECIFICATIONS
Pipe connection
1" MNPT
Pipe sizes
1" to 8" (25 mm to 200 mm)
Maximum liquid
pressure
150 psi (10 bar)
Maximum liquid
temperature
250°F (120°C)
Minimum liquid
temperature
-20°F (-30°C)
Maximum ambient
temperature
130°F (55°C)
Wetted parts construction
Body
P-Cu Zn40 Pb2 brass
Bellows
AISI 316L stainless steel
O-ring
EPDM
Housing cover
Contact rating
Resistive/Inductive
Lamp load
(N.C. contact)
Lamp load
(N.O. contact)
Motor load
(N.C. contact)
Motor load
(N.O. contact)
Approvals
Class V-O self-extinguishing
polycarbonate
15A at 240 VAC max
3A at 125 VAC
1.5A at 125 VAC
5A, 1/4 HP at 125 VAC
2.5A, 1/8 HP at 125 VAC
CE
227
FLOW
CALEFFI FLOW SWITCH
MODEL 626600A
INSTALLATION/DIMENSIONS
3.4
(112)
in
(mm)
1/2" FNPT
conduit
connection
3"-DN 80
1"
$
5.5
(140)
3.1
(80)
4"-DN100
5"-DN125
1.25"
1.5"
2"
6"-DN150
2.5"
8"-DN200
DN 175
FLOW
Select the blade marked with the diameter of the pipe in which the switch will be installed. For pipe sizes 1"-2.5", remove all extra pre-fitted
blades. For pipes 3" and above, leave all pre-fitted blades installed and add the long blade, trimming as shown for pipe size. Install the switch
in the pipe, observing the flow direction arrows shown on the body casting and housing cover. The distance between the top of the pipe and
the upper surface of the brass housing should be 3.1" (80mm).
The switch can be installed in a horizontal or vertical pipe, but avoid installing the switch below horizontal; dirt and deposits may collect in the
switching mechanism and affect operation.
CALIBRATION
B
A
C
If the required operating flow rate differs from that given in the table below, the necessary correction
should be carried out as follows: turn the calibration screw (A) in a clockwise direction for the contacts
to close at higher flow rate values or in a counterclockwise direction for lower flow rate values. When the
adjustment has been made, lock the screw (A) with the locking ring nut (B). Avoid all contact with the
presetting screw (C). An incorrect setting would seriously impair the operation of the switch.
OPERATION
Operating flow rates:
gpm
(lpm)
1"
1.25"
1.5"
2"
2.5"
3"
4"
5"
6"
8"
Minimum calibration
Operating flow rate with
increasing flow
5.7
(21.7)
7.5
(28.4)
11.4
(43.4)
13.2
(50.1)
22.0
(83.5)
29.9
(113)
44.0
(167)
61.1
(232)
72.6
(275)
162
(618)
Minimum calibration
Operating flow rate with
decreasing flow
4.0
(15.0)
5.5
(20.9)
8.4
(31.7)
9.7
(36.7)
22.9
16.3
(61.8) (86, 8)
37.4
(142)
51.5
(197)
63.8
(242)
145
(551)
Maximum calibration
Operating flow rate with
increasing flow
12.3
(46.8)
16.7
(63.5)
26.0
(98.5)
29.5
(112)
51.5
(195)
69.5
(264)
94.6
(359)
136
(518)
189
334
(718) (1269)
Maximum calibration
Operating flow rate with
decreasing flow
11.9
(45.1)
16.3
(61.8)
25.5
(96.9)
29.0
(110)
50.6
(192)
68.6
(260)
92.4
(351)
127
(484)
158
308
(601) (1169)
Diameter of Pipe
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
626600A
228
DESCRIPTION
Paddle flow switch, 1" to 8" pipes, NEMA 4
FLOW
FLOW SWITCH
MODEL FS1-6
DESCRIPTION
The Model FS1-6 Flow Switch is designed to prove
liquid flow in a wide variety of HVAC and industrial
applications. The corrosion-resistant flow switch is
mounted in a weather-resistant box for simple wiring
connections. The polyphenylene sulfide plastic vane is
field trimmable for 1" (2.54 cm) and larger pipes, and it
is magnetically coupled to the SPDT switch to prevent
liquid from entering the switch housing.
FEATURES
Weather-resistant construction
Simple installation
Leak-proof magnetic switch operation
Field adjustable for 1" (2.54 cm) and larger pipes
SPDT snap-acting switch
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
Piping connection
1" NPT
Operating pressures
150 psig (1034 kPa)
Operating temp
212°F (100°C) max
Wetted materials
Polyphenylene sulfide,
ceramic 8 magnet,
316 SS spring and pin
Vane
Field trimmable for
pipes 1" (2.54 cm) and larger
Electrical rating
SPDT snap-acting switch
5A, 125/250 VAC
Electrical connection
18-AWG leads,
18" (46 cm) long
Weight
1 lb (0.45 kg)
in
(cm)
2.75
(6.99)
2.25
(5.72)
4.50
(11.43)
1" NPT
Pipe Connection
5.00*
(12.70)
13.25*
(33.66)
1.00
(2.54)
WIRING
Black
Red
Blue
Common
Normally open (no flow)
Normally closed (no flow)
*Dimension with vane full length for 6" and larger pipe installation
229
FLOW
•
•
•
•
•
FLOW
FLOW SWITCH
MODEL FS1-6
FLOW
INSTALLATION
1.
Carefully unpack switch, making sure to remove any packing from the lower housing. Adjust the actuation or
deactuation point by trimming the vane to the length desired. If using a pipe with weld-o-let, cond-o-let, or plastic
PVC fittings, use graduations indicated on the vane. If using standard 125 or 250 lb (57 or 113 kg) bronze, iron,
or steel fittings, trim the vane 0.125" (0.32 cm) above the marking provided. Because of the great variation in
fittings and process connections, it is recommended the unit be checked when installed to ensure proper operation and that there is no interference between the vane and the fittings. For pipes larger than 6" (15.24 cm),
leave the vane full length.
2.
This flow switch is intended to be used in clean process media where particles, scale, and debris are not
present. Buildup of such materials may cause inaccurate signals.
3.
The switch must be indexed during installation in the line with the flow arrow on the side of the switch pointing in
the direction of the flow. Pipe sealant is required at the 1" NPT thread connection. It is important to not get the
sealant in the vane assembly as it may prevent proper operation and cause misleading signals. When installing
the unit, be certain not to over-torque the housing. Damage may occur if excessive force is used.
4.
Connect the switch wires in accordance with local electrical codes. The FS1-6 is not intended to be a loadcarrying conduit connection. Loads may damage the switch and stop operation.
PERFORMANCE
PIPE
SIZE
1
1.25
1.5
2
3
4
6
8
10
12
ACTUATION
gpm (lpm)
10.7 (40.5)
9.5 (36.0)
8.1 (30.7)
9.8 (37.1)
12.4 (46.9)
20.2 (76.5)
43.0 (163)
74.2 (281)
116.7 (442)
167.1 (632)
DEACTUATION
gpm (lpm)
9.3 (35.2)
7.7 (29.1)
6.3 (23.9)
8.5 (32.2)
8.9 (33.7)
12.7 (48.1)
32.8 (124)
56.6 (214)
89.0 (337)
127.4 (482)
When the flow increases to the actuation gpm (lpm),
the switch makes.
When the flow decreases to the deactuation gpm (lpm),
the switch breaks.
Flow rates are approximate and are based on 60°F
water.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
FS1-6
230
DESCRIPTION
Weather-resistant flow switch
FLOW
GENERAL-PURPOSE FLOW SWITCH
F61 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The F61 Series General-Purpose Flow Switches are
used to prove flow on liquid lines using water, ethylene
glycol solutions, or other liquids compatible with brass
and phosphor bronze parts. The SPDT contact switch is
activated by liquid flow through the pipe. The set point is
adjustable.
The F61KD (NEMA 1 enclosure) and F61MD (NEMA
3R enclosure) are available for 1/2" NPT and 3/4" NPT
pipe. The F61KB-11 (NEMA 1 enclosure) and F61MB-1
(NEMA 3R enclosure) are for 1" (2.54 cm) and larger
pipes. They are furnished with a stainless steel paddle
in three segments for pipes 1" to 3" in diameter (2.54 to
7.62 cm). Paddle segments may be removed or trimmed
as needed. A 6" (15.24 cm) paddle is also furnished for
4" (10.16 cm) diameter pipes and larger.
F61KB-11
FLOW
F61KD-3
SPECIFICATIONS
Pipe connections
F61KB-11, F61MB-1
F61KD-3, F61MD-1
F61KD-4, F61MD-2
Max liquid pressure
Max liquid temp
Min liquid temp
F61KB-11, F61KD-3, F61KD-4
F61MB-1, F61MD-1, F61MD-2
Enclosure
F61KB-11, F61KD-3, F61KD-4
F61MB-1, F61MD-1, F61MD-2
1" NPT
1/2" x 1/2" NPT
3/4" x 3/4" NPT
150 psig (1034 kPa)
250°F (121°C)
Dimensions
F61KB-11
F61MB-1
F61KD-3
F61KD-4
32°F (0°C)
-20°F (-29°C)
F61MD-1
NEMA 1
NEMA 3R
F61MD-2
8.37"H (3" paddle) x 4"W x 2.81"D
(21.27 x 10.16 x 7.14 cm)
8.69"H (3" paddle) x 4.80"W x 2.81"D
(22.06 x 12.18 x 7.14 cm)
5.03"H x 4"W x 2.81"D
(12.77 x 10.16 x 7.14 cm)
5.03" H x 4" W x 2.81" D
(12.77 x 10.16 x 7.14 cm)
5.03"H x 4"W x 2.81"D
(12.77 x 10.16 x 7.14 cm)
5.03"H x 4"W x 2.81"D
(12.77 x 10.16 x 7.14 cm)
WIRING
ELECTRICAL RATINGS
MOTOR RATINGS
Horsepower
AC Full Load Amps
AC Locked Rotor Amps
120V 208V
1
1
16
8.8
96
52.8
240V 277V
1
–
8
–
48
–
Noninductive or
Resistance Load Amps
16
16
16
Pilot Duty – 125 VA 24/277 VAC
16
Action on Increase
of Flow
B
Y
R
.$ 5AHEAI
231
FLOW
GENERAL PURPOSE FLOW SWITCH
F61 SERIES
ADJUSTMENTS: TYPICAL FLOW RATES — gpm (m3/hr)
LINE PIPE SIZE (in)
MODEL
F61KB-11
F61MB-1
Min
adj
FLOW
Max
adj
Flow
Increases
R to Y
Closes
Flow
Decreases
R to B
Closes
Flow
Increases
R to Y
Closes
Flow
Decreases
R to B
Closes
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
2-1/2
3
4.2
(1.0)
5.8
(1.3)
7.5
(1.7)
13.7
(3.1)
18.0
(4.1)
27.5
(6.2)
2.50
(0.6)
3.70
(0.8)
5.00
(1.1)
9.50
(2.2)
12.50
(2.8)
19.00
(4.3)
8.80
(2.0)
13.30
(3.0)
19.20
(4.4)
29.00
(6.6)
34.50
(7.8)
53.00
(12.0)
8.50
(1.9)
12.50
(2.8)
18.00
(4.1)
27.00
(6.1)
32.00
(7.3)
50.00
(11.4)
4*
5*
6*
8*
65.0
(14.8)
37.0†
(8.4)
50.0
(11.4)
27.0†
(6.1)
128.0
(29.1)
81.0†
(13.4)
122.0
(27.7)
76.0†
(17.3)
125.0
(28.4)
57.0†
(12.9)
101.0
(22.9)
41.0†
(9.3)
245.0
(55.6)
118.0†
(26.8)
235.0
(53.4)
111.0†
(25.2)
190.0
(43.1)
74.0†
(16.8)
158.0
(35.9)
54.0†
(12.3)
375.0
(85.2)
144.0†
(32.7)
360.0
(81.8)
135.0†
(30.7)
375.0
(85.2)
205.0†
(46.6)
320.0
(72.7)
170.0†
(38.6)
760.0
(172.6)
415.0†
(94.2)
730.0
(165.8)
400.0†
(90.8)
*Flow rates for these sizes are calculated.
† These gpm figures are for switch with 6" paddle. For 4" and 5" line pipe the paddle is trimmed.
MODEL
F61KD-3
F61KD-4
F61MD-1
F61MD-2
INLET/OUTLET
SIZE
(Female NPT)
NEMA
Enclosure
1/2" x 1/2"
3/4" x 3/4"
1/2" x 1/2"
3/4" x 3/4"
1
1
3R
3R
ADJUSTMENT RANGE – gpm (m3/hr)
R to Y Closes
Flow Increase
R to Y Opens
Flow Decrease
Min 0.6 (0.14)
Max 1.1 (0.25)
Min 0.3 (0.07)
Max 0.9 (0.2)
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
F61KD-3
F61MD-1
F61KD-4
F61MD-2
F61KB-11
F61MB-1
232
DESCRIPTION
Flow switch 1/2" x 1/2" NPT, NEMA 1
Flow switch 1/2" x 1/2" NPT, NEMA 3R
Flow switch 3/4" x 3/4" NPT, NEMA 1
Flow switch 3/4" x 3/4" NPT, NEMA 3R
Flow switch for pipe 1" diameter and larger, NEMA 1
Flow switch for pipe 1" diameter and larger, NEMA 3R
SPECIALTY SENSORS
SPECIALTY SENSORS
MODEL/SERIES
PAGE
CALIBRATION
UCK— Universal Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
CARBON MONOXIDE
KCO Series — Carbon Monoxide Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
TP1-M — Carbon Monoxide Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
WCO-1B — Carbon Monoxide Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Model 711271 Airox
IAQ Sensors on
CO2 / IAQ
4GS — Carbon Dioxide Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
711271 — Airox IAQ Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
8001, 8002, 8003 Series — Carbon Dioxide Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
C7232 — Carbon Dioxide Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
CD-A — Carbon Dioxide Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
GM Series — Carbon Dioxide Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
page 239!
DAMPER POSITION
PRODUCTS
Check out the NEW
LS45M — Whisker Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
PQ-1001 — Damper Position Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
TS-470 — Damper Position Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
GASES
CD-420 Series — Toxic Gas Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
GMT Series — Gas Monitor/Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
OS-1 — Oxygen Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
VA-301 — Gas Monitoring System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257,259
VA301M — Stand Alone Dual Gas Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
VASQN8X — Multipoint Sample Draw Gas Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
SERVICES
Tell us what you need to
sense, and we will help
you select the best product
for your On-Off
or
Analog Reading.
LIQUID LEVEL
F7 — Float Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
JMP — Float Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
L8 — Float Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
NG2DW1500B — Float Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
LU Series — Ultrasonic Level Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
PH / CONDUCTIVITY
8205 — PH Transmitter/Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
8225 — Conductivity Transmitter/Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
REFRIGERANTS
HGM-LON,N2 — HGM 300 Communications Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
HGM-SZ — Multigas Refrigerant Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
HGM300 — Refrigerant Gas Monitoring System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
RDM800 — Remote Display Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
RLD-134A — Refrigerant Leak Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
RLD-5 — Refrigerant Leak Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
VIBRATION
140T — Vibration Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
550 — Vibration Transmitter/Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
SOLUTIONS
Whether you need to
WATER DETECTION
AQS — Water Sensor/Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
LD1-24 — Water Sensor/Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
WD-1B — Water Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
WD-2-T — Water Detector (Tape Style) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Sense, Detect, Monitor,
or Control, we can meet
WEATHER
A70 Series — Weather Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
DS-2B — Rain/Snow Sensor Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
your requirements.
Indicates New Products
SPECIALTY SENSORS
CARBON MONOXIDE SENSORS
KCO SERIES
DESCRIPTION
KCO Series Carbon Monoxide Sensors are available
in analog or relay versions. The sensors are provided in
heavy-duty steel enclosures, and the sensors use lowtemperature components that are ideal for open parking
garages in cold climates.
FEATURES
KCO-A-H
Two-stage alarming (KCO-R)
0-200 ppm 4-20 mA output (KCO-A)
Microprocessor controlled recalibration (KCO-A)
Heavy-duty enclosures
Operating temperature down to -4°F (-20°C)
Low-temperature option available -20°F (-29°C)
Temperature and humidity compensated
KCO-R-S
Note: Front covers are blank
SPECIFICATIONS
KCO-R
Power
Power with LT option
Indicators
Amber
Red
Flashing green/red
24 VAC/VDC ±20%, 125 mA
1.125A
Warning
Alarm
Power on, microprocessor
operating
Warning stage delay 30 sec
Range
0-250 ppm
Response time
Under 30 sec
Relay contacts
120 VAC, 2A resistive
Set points
Warning 50 ppm, alarm 100 ppm
adjustable (reset 5-10ppm
change) (25/50 ppm optional)
KCO-A
Output signal
Scale
Power
Power with LT Option
Analog resolution
KCO-R, KCO-A
Operating temp
Sensor type
4-20 mA into 500 ohms max
0-200 ppm carbon monoxide
24 VAC ±20%, 10 VA
34 VA
12 bit
-4° to 185°F (-20° to 85°C)
Solid-state metal oxide semiconductor
5% to 95% noncondensing
Humidity
Enclosure dimensions
S (screw cover)
4.81"L x 4.81"H x 2.25"D
(12.2 x 12.2 x 5.7 cm)
H (hinged cover)
6.125"L x 6.25"H x 3"D
(15.6 x 15.9 x 7.6 cm)
Accuracy
±5%
Sensor drift
±10% 2 years
Sensor life
10 years
INSTALLATION
KCO-R
The KCO-R is a two-stage carbon monoxide sensor with a relay output for each stage. If the CO level rises above
the warning stage setpoint for over 30 seconds, the warning relay, amber warning LED, and a three-minute minimum "on" timer will activate. Once below the setpoint, the relay and LED will reset. If the concentration continues to
rise and exceeds the alarm stage setpoint for ten minutes, the alarm stage relay and red LED will activate.
KCO-A
The KCO-A is a microprocessor-controlled sensor with a 4-20 mA analog output based on a 0-200 ppm sensing
range. The microprocessor controls the heating of the sensor and subsequent reading of the CO level. The microprocessor compensates for any drift in the sensor over time. The microprocessor system includes self-diagnostic,
self-restarting, and remote failure reporting. The output signal will drop below 4 mA if a fault is discovered. If power
problems cause the unit to malfunction, the unit will self-check and restart. Calibration of the unit requires the application of a hydrated test gas, and the push of a button performs the recalibration.
233
SPECIALTY SENSORS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
SPECIALTY SENSORS
CARBON MONOXIDE SENSORS
KCO SERIES
INSTALLATION
The KCO Series senses levels of CO for up to 5000 ft2 (465m2) of coverage if there is normal air circulation within
the area. Mount on a wall or column approximately 5' (1.52m) above the floor. They should not be mounted in
corners where air flow could be restricted.
WIRING
N.O. Alarm Factory setting
100 ppm
N.C. Relay
(50 optional)
SPECIALTY SENSORS
T2
L1
L2
24 VAC
Relay
R2
–
+
4-20 mA SIG OUT
Relay
R1
T1
N.O. Warning Factory setting
N.C. Relay
50 ppm
(25 optional)
T3
L1 (+)
L2 (–)
24 VAC/DC
KCO-A
KCO-R
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
KCO
KCO
234
DESCRIPTION
R Relay output carbon monoxide sensor
A Analog output carbon monoxide sensor
S Screw-cover enclosure (KCO-R only)
H Hinged-cover enclosure
LT Low-temperature option (-RH, -AH only) -20F (-29C)
25 ppm 25/50 ppm relay settings (KCO-R only)
R
S
Example: KCO-RS Carbon monoxide sensor with
relay output and screw cover enclosure.
SPECIALTY SENSORS
CARBON MONOXIDE SENSOR
MODEL TP1-M
DESCRIPTION
The Model TP1-M Carbon Monoxide Sensor features
a two-wire, 4-20 mA output signal and two alarm outputs. It is the first available zero-maintenance CO gas
monitor with an electrochemical sensor. The Model
TP1-M has a low initial cost and installs quickly and easily into a standard single-gang electrical box. It has a
three-year operational life and never needs calibration.
LOCATION
OPERATION
The sensor measures 0-500 ppm of CO and outputs a
linear 4-20 mA in a two-wire, loop-powered wiring installation. Two alarm outputs (one low and one high alarm)
rated at 250 mA at 24 VDC drive relays, strobes, etc. The
alarm setpoints are factory set at 25 and 200 ppm. Both
alarm setpoints activate if the sensor experiences a fault.
Once installed, the sensor never needs calibration or
maintenance, and it lasts approximately three years. The
LED is continuously on when the sensor is functioning
normally. If a self-diagnosis failure occurs, it will flash fast
(one flash every 0.5 seconds). One month before the
sensor needs to be replaced, the LED will begin to flash
slowly (one flash every 2.0 seconds). If the sensor is
powered and the LED is off, the sensor is expired and
must be replaced.
TP1-M
FEATURES
• 0-500 ppm CO range (non-adjustable)
• High accuracy (0.5% of range) electrochemical
industrial sensor
• Two alarm levels (25 and 200 ppm)
• Two-wire, loop-powered 4-20 mA analog output
• LED status/diagnostic indicator
• Low power consumption, only 50 mA
• Fits standard single-gang outlet box
• Automatic, full-function self-test performed daily
• Unobtrusive design with rugged stainless steel
screen
• Three-year operational life
SPECIFICATIONS
Power supply
Power consumption
Loop resistance
Measurement range
Output signal
Terminals/Wire size
Output signal fail modes
Self-test fail
Sensor expired
Overrange gas alarm
Alarm outputs
LED indicator
Power on
No power
10-28 VDC, 50 mA
Max 24 mA, nominal 4 mA @
24 VDC
6501 max
0-500 ppm CO
Two-wire, 4-20 mA
18-22 AWG
2 mA
2 mA
24 mA
250 mA @ 24 VDC max
(transistor switch)
On
Off
Self-test fail
Life ending
Life ended
Life expectancy
Operating temp
Operating humidity
Weight
Approvals/Ratings
Warranty
Fast flash (1 per 0.5 sec)
Slow flash (1 per 2.0 sec)
provides one-month warning
Off
Three years (plus one-year
shelf life)
-4° to 104°F (-20° to 40°C)
15% to 90% noncondensing
1.34 oz (38g)
CSA
IEC No. 1010
ANSI/ISA S82.01
CSEC C22.2 No. 1010
EMC Directive 89/336/EEC
Two years
235
SPECIALTY SENSORS
The Model TP1-M senses levels of CO for up to 5000 ft2
(465 m2) of coverage, if there is normal air circulation within the area. The sensor mounts on a wall or column 3' to 5'
(0.91 to 1.52m) above the floor. It should not be mounted
in corners where air flow could be restricted.
SPECIALTY SENSORS
CARBON MONOXIDE SENSOR
MODEL TP1-M
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
TWO-WIRE INSTALLATION
3.0
(7.62)
2.80
(7.11)
24 VDC
Power Supply
24 VDC
20 mA
M: TP-M
S: XXXXX
O/P1
4-20 mA
Signal
• •
24 VDC
TOXY POINT
4.60
(11.68)
4-20 mA
O/P2
3.25
(8.26)
TP1-M
ALARM OUTPUTS INSTALLATION
Transistor switches
close on alarm
M: TP-M
S: XXXXX
24 VDC
20 mA
4-20 mA
Signal
• •
Alarm Outputs: 24 VDC output,
250 mA max
4-20 mA
O/P2
O/P2
Note: If only relay output is used,
4-20 mA terminal must be
connected to the power
supply (–).
24 VDC
Relay
24 VDC Alarm
24 VDC
Power Supply
O/P1
O/P1
24 VDC
TOXY POINT
SPECIALTY SENSORS
Single-Gang
Electrical Box
(field-supplied)
AC Fan
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
TP1-M
TP1-M-C
DESCRIPTION
Carbon monoxide sensor
Carbon monoxide sensor with special high alarm setpoint
(0-225 ppm range; low alarm cannot be changed)
RELATED PRODUCTS
Consult Trane for a wide array of devices that can be activated by the TP1-M alarm outputs,
such as RIB Series relays and AIS alarm indication stations.
236
SPECIALTY SENSORS
CARBON MONOXIDE SENSOR
MODEL WCO-1B
The Model WCO-1B Carbon Monoxide Sensor is comprised of a carbon monoxide meter and a 4-20 mA transmitter. It is an all-electronic system that utilizes a microprocessor to measure carbon monoxide (CO), calculate
various calibration factors, and provide a digital display and
analog output. A Model UCS-121 may be used with the
Model WCO-1B to provide a digital output for remote
alarm. A three-digit LED display on the Model WCO-1B
shows the current level of CO between 0-200 ppm. It averages samples over a time period and updates the display
and output every 2-1/2 minutes. It is intended to be used in
enclosed parking garages, where it provides CO data to
building automation computers or controllers. A UL knockout box houses the Model WCO-1B and provides an easyto-mount, sturdy housing for the system. If duct mounting is
required, refer to the GMT line of gas sensors.
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
Digital display of the CO level from 0-200 ppm
Analog output of 4-20 mA
Low voltage operation of 24 VAC/VDC
Test switch to provide mode for system self-test
Automatic calibration with optional Model CM-FCK
Overrange indication
• Start-up mode to step display and output through
test ranges
• Operating range within OSHA range for CO
exposure
• Solid-state sensor with life expectancy of 7-10
years
• Only one power supply needed to power multiple
sensors
WIRING
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
WCO-1B
Power
Transformer
or Power Supply
(6 VA or larger)
6.25
(15.88)
Note: The WCO-1B
sources 4-20 mA to the
controller or computer.
Output
D C B A
– +
24 VAC/VDC
(+)
120 VAC
(–)
4-20 mA
Output Signal
No polarity preference
6.125
(15.56)
3.0
(7.62)
EXPOSURE
SPECIFICATIONS
Power
Color
Measurement range
Sensor maintenance
Electrical class
Sensor life
Warranty
Operating temp
Shipping weight
WCO-1B Wiring
24 VAC/VDC @ 220 mA
Gray
0-200 ppm of CO
(4-20 mA, 10001 max)
Not required
General-purpose,
nonhazardous
7-10 years typical
One year
0° to 125°F (-18° to 52°C)
3 lbs (1.4 kg)
TIME OF EXPOSURE
PPM CO
UL 2034
400
15 min
200
35 min
100
90 min
50
No STD
35
No STD
OSHA
No spec
15 min
No spec
8 hr TWA
8 hr TWA
237
SPECIALTY SENSORS
DESCRIPTION
SPECIALTY SENSORS
CARBON MONOXIDE SENSOR
MODEL WCO-1B
OPERATION
Detector Location
A WCO-1B can cover up to 5000 square feet if there is
normal air circulation within the facility. Locations should
be specified by a qualified engineer. Extra detectors
may be needed near occupied work areas. Mount the
detectors on walls or columns about 5' (12.7m) above
the floor, where people breathe. Do not mount in corners where air flow could be restricted.
At the count of 150, the WCO-1B finishes the test cycle,
takes the first sample of air, displays this reading, and
sets the 4-20 mA output to the appropriate current. It is
not unusual for the display to read near zero or zero.
This and future readings will hold for 2-1/2 minutes. This
reading will not change during each 2-1/2 minute accumulation cycle.
The WCO-1B continuously monitors various internal
parameters. If a problem is discovered, the internal display will indicate E1 to E6, and the output will switch to
0 mA. Interrupt the power to reset the WCO-1B. It will
restart by stepping through the warm-up cycle. If a second E error occurs, consult Trane. The internal pushbutton switch is used to set the unit for calibration with the
optional Model CM-FCK field calibration kit.
Error Codes
E1 = Microcontroller failure
E2 – E4 = High or low current to sensor
E6 = Low temperature
PERFORMANCE
GENERAL INSTALLATION
• Place at least one sensor for every 5000 square feet
with adequate air movement.
• Sensors mount on walls or columns about 5' (12.7m)
above the floor.
• Space sensors evenly. Do not put in corners or directly
in front of air inlets (i.e., doors, windows, open ramps,
dampers, etc.).
• Each sensor must have a cable directly to the control
panel.
• One system of sensors, panel, and fan per floor is
preferred.
• Refer to installation instructions for more complete
data.
20
Analog Output (mA)
SPECIALTY SENSORS
WCO-1B Power-Up
When power is first applied to the WCO-1B, it will go
through a 2-1/2 minute start-up cycle. The internal ppm
meter will step through a 0-150 reading at a rate of one
count per second. The output will move through a range
of 4-16 mA as the meter counts from 0 to 150.
WCO-1B Operation
Normally, the cover of the case is closed so there is no
visible external indication of operation. Only the 4-20
mA output indicates proper operation. The BAS computer can be set to alarm at any point in the 4-20 mA out
(0-200 ppm).
16
12
8
4
0
50
100
150
200
Carbon Monoxide (ppm)
WARNING: Not for diesel fume applications.
Not to be used as a life safety device.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
WCO-1B
CM-FCK
UCS-121
GMT-CO-S1-DT
238
DESCRIPTION
Carbon monoxide sensor with 4-20 mA output
Field calibration kit (includes 50 ppm test gas)
RELATED PRODUCTS
Alarm relay module
CO sensor for duct applications
SPECIALTY SENSORS
MSA AIROX IAQ MONITOR
MODEL 711271
DESCRIPTION
The MSA Airox Model 711271 indoor air quality (IAQ)
monitor continually monitors the levels of carbon dioxide
(CO2) and volatile organic compounds (VOCs) for an
overall indication of IAQ. The monitor can be used to
monitor only the CO2 level, or a VOC component can be
added to the CO2 level for an IAQ output. The combined
output is the result of a patented, advanced algorithm
designed to indicate information about the quality of the
air.
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
Patented photoacoustic infrared technology
No calibration required
Outputs CO2 or IAQ (CO2 + VOC)
Patented IAQ advanced algorithm
SPECIFICATIONS
Duct mount
Dimensions
Weight
OUTPUT
20
10
9
C
s
8
VO
16
VO
im
um
ith
M
6
C
ax
s
im
um
7
tw
5
in
M
ith
pu
tw
4
12 4-20 mA
3
ut
The Model 711271 uses patented photoacoustic
infrared technology to measure the ambient CO2 (usually 400-1100 ppm, unoccupied to occupied). A separate sensor is used to monitor VOCs from such things
as vehicle exhaust, cigarette smoke, cologne, paint,
carpet glue, adhesives, copier machines, and any
other substance that has an odor. This collective VOC
measurement is added to the output based on a maximum of 400 ppm CO2 equivalent via a patented algorithm. As this output is used to increase the free air
intake, building occupants are more comfortable.
Mounting
O
OPERATION
25' radius
24 VAC 50/60 Hz 10VA
4-20mA or 0-10 VDC,CO 2 or
IAQ, jumper selectable
2" x 4" (5.1 x 10.2 cm) junction
box
Min air velocity 600 fpm (3 m/s)
4.5"H x 2.25"W x 1"D
(11.5 x 7 x 2.6 cm)
12.0 oz (0.012 kg)
ut
pu
±2% FS
±3% FS
±5% lifetime (7-10 years)
59° to 95°F (15° to 35°C)
1% to 95% noncondensing
30 min.
Sensing distance
Power
Output
O
0-2000 ppm
0-2000 IAQ (CO2 +VOC)
VDC
Range
CO2
IAQ
Accuracy
Repeatability
Linearity
Drift
Temp
Humidity
Warm-up
8
2
1
0
4
0
400
800
1000 1600
2000
IAQ (CO2 + VDC) UNITS
239
SPECIALTY SENSORS
Model 711271
SPECIALTY SENSORS
MSA AIROX IAQ MONITOR
MODEL 711271
INSTALLATION
Proper location of the Model 711271 monitor is important to ensure accurate measurement of representative air
samples. Generally, the monitor should be placed in an area of the room where there is a free circulation of air. It
should be mounted on a flat interior surface approximately 54"(1.4m) from the floor. Avoid areas with vibration, heat
sources, diffuser air, outside walls, or dead spots with minimal air circulation.
USER CONFIGURATION OPTIONS
WIRING INFORMATION
Signal Power
SPECIALTY SENSORS
Current Mode
JUMPER CONFIGURATIONS
Voltage Mode
P1
P3
P4
P5
IN
5
4-20, CO2 or IAQ
IAQ
OUT 2-3
IN
4
Not Used
CO2
OUT 2-3
IN
3
GND
GND
2
24 VAC GND
24 VAC GND
1
24 VAC
24 VAC
OUT
Output
ANALOG 0-10V
Normal
OUT ALARM 800 ppm 0V
10V at Alarm
Normal
2-3 OUT OUT ALARM 1000 ppm 0V
10V at Alarm
OUT 2-3 OUT
IN
1-2
IN
1-2 OUT
Notes:
1. A VOC-only output is not available.
2. Pin 1 of P3 is located nearest the terminal block.
3. 4-20 mA current sourcing
4. Do not change jumpers with power on.
IN
IN
0V Normal
ALARM 1200 ppm 10V at Alarm
OUT 4-20mA CO2
IN
4-20mA IAQ
P1
VOC
Sensor
P2 (not used)
P3
3 2 1
TB1
Wiring
Opening
P4
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
711271
DESCRIPTION
Airox IAQ monitor
RELATED PRODUCTS
1508-IAQ
Duct aspiration kit
240
P5
IR
Sensor
SPECIALTY SENSORS
CARBON DIOXIDE SENSOR
MODEL CD-A
DESCRIPTION
The Kele Model CD-A represents a new level of economy in reliable, non-dispersive infrared carbon dioxide
sensors. It measures environmental carbon dioxide levels for use in demand-controlled ventilation, air-quality
monitoring, and other HVAC applications in accordance
with ASHRAE standards.
Fully floating analog outputs and a convenient center
wiring terminal make installation both simple and trouble-free. The analog output is jumper-selectable, 4-20
mA or 0-10 VDC, over the industry standard 0-2000
ppm CO 2 range. Models are also available with an
optional LCD display and/or control relay with adjustable
setpoint.
CD-AW-LCD
FEATURES
• 24 VAC/VDC power
• 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA analog output,
jumper selectable
• 0-2000 ppm CO2 range
• Wall-mount and duct-sampling versions
• Isolation of output and power
• Compact, attractive enclosure
CD-AD
Duct Probe Assembly
(included)
•
•
•
•
Optional control relay with adjustable setpoint
Simple single-point calibration
Optional LCD display
Factory calibrated
SPECIFICATIONS
Power requirements
Power consumption
Operating principle
Measuring range
Max drift (per year)
Accuracy
Repeatability
Recommended
calibration interval
Response time
Operating temp
Operating humidity
Storage temp
Calibration adjustments
20-30 VAC, 18-30 VDC
Less than 2.5W @ 24 VAC
Non-dispersive infrared (NDIR)
0-2000 ppm CO2
±75 ppm
±5% of reading or ±75 ppm,
whichever is greater
±20 ppm
Calibration verification
procedure time
10 min. typical
Three years
Less than 1 min.
32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
0% to 90% RH noncondensing
-22° to 140°F (-30° to 60°C)
Span only (automatic electronic
zero adjustment)
High limit alarm relay (optional)
Factory setpoint
1000 ppm (field adjustable
700-1300 ppm)
Deadband
50 ppm
Contact polarity
N.O. (N.C. field selectable)
Contact rating
2A @ 24 VAC
Analog output
0-10 VDC (factory setting)
4-20 mA (field selectable), 5001 max
Warm-up time
3 min.
Weight
12 oz (0.35 kg)
Optional digital display 0.35" LCD (0.88 cm), 4 digit
Operating life
expectancy
Duct sampling option
10 years typical
Includes duct inlet and outlet ports,
filter, tubing, and hardware
241
SPECIALTY SENSORS
CD-AD-LCD
SPECIALTY SENSORS
CARBON DIOXIDE SENSOR
MODEL CD-A
DIMENSIONS
INSTALLATION
in
(cm)
The wall-mounted CD-AW must be placed in an area
that is representative of the entire conditioned space.
Recommended mounting height is 4' to 6' (1.21 to
1.83m) above the floor. Avoid drafts for locations
where occupants may routinely breathe toward the
sensor.
5.25
(13.34)
The duct-sampling style CD-AD requires a minimum
air velocity of 400 fpm (3 m/s). Complete installation
and configuration instructions are included with each
unit shipped.
1.38
(3.08)
SPECIALTY SENSORS
3.5
(8.89)
WIRING
Analog
Selector
Optional LCD
Display
JP5
**Signal
4-20 mA
or 0-10 VDC
24 VAC/VDC
No Polarity
*Optional Control Relay
Contacts [email protected]
24 VAC/VDC
* Relay contacts are field-selectable N.O. or N.C. JP5 open - NC
closed - NO (factory setting)
** Output signal is field-selectable 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA,
fully isolated.
Voltage - outboard and middle pin jumpered
Current - inboard and middle pin jumpered
Sensing Cell
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
CD-A
CO2 sensor with analog output
MOUNTING
W Wall mount
D
Sampling version for duct applications
RELAY OPTION
R Optional control relay
DISPLAY OPTION
LCD Optional LCD display
CD-A
D
R
LCD
Example: CD-AD-R-LCD Duct-sampling CO2 transmitter with a
output, control relay, and LCD display
RELATED PRODUCTS
UCK-1
Universal calibration kit
GAS-CO2-1000
Calibration gas (1000 ppm CO2), 17L bottle
242
SPECIALTY SENSORS
CARBON DIOXIDE SENSOR
MODEL C7232
DESCRIPTION
Used with HVAC control systems to control building
ventilation, the Honeywell Model C7232 Carbon
Dioxide Sensor measures CO2 concentration in a ventilated space or duct. These easy-to-install sensors provide long term CO2 monitoring at a low cost, and they
are compact in size with selectable ranges. They have
an analog and a relay output, use non-dispersive
infrared (NDIR) technology, and feature a unique corrosion-free sensing chamber for accurate, stable CO 2
sensing. Models are available for wall- and duct-mount
applications, with or without an LCD display, and with or
without the Honeywell logo.
C7232A
C7232B
SPECIALTY SENSORS
FEATURES
• Available with LCD to provide sensor readings
and status information
• NDIR technology to measure carbon dioxide gas
• Gold-plated sensor for long-term calibration stability
• Analog and relay outputs based on CO2 levels
• Automatic Background Calibration (ABC)
algorithm based on long-term evaluation to
reduce required maintenance
SPECIFICATIONS
Power
Range
Response time
Annual drift
Calibration interval
CO2 pressure
dependence
Relay output
Contact rating
Min load
24 VAC ±20%, 50/60 Hz (Class 2)
3W max power consumption
600 mA peak current (at 20 ms)
0-2000 ppm ±5% and ±50 ppm
2 min.
20 ppm (nominal)
Five years
1.4% change in reading
per 0.15 psig (1.0 kPa) deviation
from 14.5 psig (1000 kPa)
Shipped N.O., close at 800 ppm
(selectable)
1A @ 50 VAC/24 VDC
1mA @ 5 VDC
Analog output
Connections
C7232A
C7232B
Operating temp
Storage temp
Operating humidity
Approvals
C7232A
C7232B
0-10 or 2-10 VDC, (jumper
selectable), resistive load
>50001; 0-20 or 4-20 mA,
(jumper selectable), resistive
load <5001
20 AWG, 8" cable
20 AWG, 6" cable
32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
-4° to 158°F (-20° to 70°C)
0% to 95% RH noncondensing
UL component recognition
UL94-5V, File # E191465
CE
NEMA 1
NEMA 3
243
SPECIALTY SENSORS
CARBON DIOXIDE SENSORS
MODEL C7232
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
1.0
(2.52)
Knockouts
for European
Applications
Standard Utility
2.38 Conduit Box
(6.05)
(2 x 4)
Mounting
Holes
5.06
(12.85)
1.81
(4.60)
3.31
(8.41)
2.38
(6.05)
5.63
(14.30)
1.63
(4.14)
3.16
(8.03)
C7232A
8.0
(20.32)
C7232B
SPECIALTY SENSORS
WIRING
(red)
24V
L1
(HOT)
(black)
L2
Analog
Out
+
_
(yellow)
(brown)
(orange)
WIRE COLOR DESIGNATION
Note: Provide disconnect means
and overload protection to
power supply as required.
Order transformer separately.
FUNCTION
Red
G+
24 VAC Hot
Black
G0
24 VAC Common
Yellow
OUT1
Analog Output Signal
Brown
M
Analog Output Common
Orange
NO
Relay Output Normally Open
Green
COM
Relay Output Common
(green)
C7232
INSTALLATION
The wall-mount C7232A must be installed in a ventilated place where it will not be affected directly by air from ducts, drafts, or in
dead spots behind doors or in corners.
The duct-mount C7232B mounts to the outside of the air duct, and its sampling tube installs through a 1" (2.54 cm) hole.
Leakage into the duct or the sensor box cover will skew the sensor readings, so the box cover and duct must be completely
sealed.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
C7232A1016
C7232A1008
C7232A1032
C7232B1014
C7232B1006
C7232B1030
244
DESCRIPTION
Wall-mount CO2 sensor, analog and relay output
Wall-mount CO2 sensor, analog and relay output, LCD display
Wall-mount CO2 sensor, analog and relay output, no logo
Duct-mount CO2 sensor, analog and relay output
Duct-mount CO2 sensor, analog and relay output, LCD display
Duct-mount CO2 sensor, analog and relay output, no logo
SPECIALTY SENSORS
CARBON DIOXIDE SENSORS
GMW21, GMD20, GMT200 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Vaisala GMW21 and GMD20 Series Carbon
Dioxide Sensors are specially designed for demandcontrolled ventilation. The transmitters use the siliconbased CARBOCAP sensor. The simple structure and
reference measurement capabilities make these singlebeam, dual-wavelength NDIR sensors extremely stable
and reliable. The temperature and flow dependence is
negligible. Models are available with a temperature output and/or a Lonworks module. GMT200 Series harsh
environment models are available for industrial applications measuring low or high concentrations.
GMW21
FEATURES
Silicon-based NDIR sensor
Excellent long-term stability
Negligible temperature dependence
Easy installation
Five-year recommended calibration interval
Duct sensor measurement in the duct
GMT220
SPECIFICATIONS
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
2.52
(6.4)
min 3.15 (8.0)
max 5.51 (14.0)
0.59
(1.5)
1.65
(4.2)
0.87
(2.2)
1.65
(4.2)
3.15
(8.0)
GMD20, GMD20D
2.36
(6.0)
4.27
(10.8)
3.26
(8.3)
2.36
(6.0)
2.62
(6.67)
GMW21, GMW21D
3.26
(8.3)
Range
Accuracy @77°F (25°C)
Linearity
Stability
Response time
Output signal
External load
Current
Voltage
Power supply
Power consumption
Warm-up time
Operating temp
Operating humidity
Airflow range (GMD20)
Weight
GMD20
GMD20D
GMW21
GMW21D
GMT220
Dimensions
0-2000 ppm CO2
2% of reading ±30 ppm
±1% FS
<5% FS for 5 years
1 min.
0-20 mA or 4-20 mA, and
0-10 VDC
5001 max
1 k1 min
Nominal 24 VAC/VDC
2.5W
15 min.
23° to 113°F (-5° to 45°C)
0% to 85% noncondensing
0-2000 fpm (0-10 ms)
4.93 oz (140g)
5.98 oz (170g)
3.52 oz (100g)
4.58 oz (130g)
10.58 oz (300g)
GMT220 transmitter body
4.69" x 4.69" x 1.25"
(11.9 x 11.9 x 3.2 cm)
Temp output (GMA20T) 0-10 VDC, 32° to 113°F
(0° to 50°C), ±0.9°F (0.5°C)
Relay output
1000 ppm (adjustable with
calibration software
245
SPECIALTY SENSORS
•
•
•
•
•
•
GMD20
SPECIALTY SENSORS
CARBON DIOXIDE SENSORS
GMW21, GMD20, GMT200 SERIES
INSTALLATION
The wall-mount GMW21 Series must be placed in an area representative of the entire conditioned space.
Recommended mounting height is 5' (1.5m), and the unit may be mounted onto a wall box or surface mounted.
The duct-mount GMD20 Series mounts directly to the duct. The duct probe insertion depth is adjustable using the
mounting plate. Since the CO2 level is sensed in the duct, there are no minimum airflow requirements.
CALIBRATION
The GM Series is factory calibrated. A recalibration is recommended every five years. A field check can be done
with a calibration gas and multimeter. A calibration adjustment requires the Model 19222 GM calibration software.
SPECIALTY SENSORS
WIRING
Serial Com
0/mA
Analog Outputs
mA V 0
Power Supply
24V Power
Common
0-10 VDC
4-20 mA
4-20 mA Standard
(remove jumper for 0-20 mA)
V7 V10
Steady Red
for Fault
Blinks Green
Normally
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
GMW21
GMW21D
GMD20
GMD20D
DESCRIPTION
Wall-mount CO2 transmitter
Wall-mount CO2 transmitter with relay and display
Duct-mount CO2 transmitter
Duct-mount CO2 transmitter with relay and display
OPTIONS/ACCESSORIES
GMA20T
Analog temperature option (GMW21 only)
GMR20
Relay option (GMW21 or GMD20 only)
GML20
LonWorks module with CO2 signal (not for GMD20D)
GML20T
LonWorks module with CO2 and temperature signals (GMW21 only)
19222GM
Calibration software kit (includes disk and serial adapter)
HARSH ENVIRONMENT
*GMT221 Series Harsh environment CO2 transmitter for high concentrations (up to 20% in air)
*GMT222 Series Harsh environment CO2 transmitter for low concentrations
(0-2000/10,000 ppm)
*GML220
LonWorks module with CO2 signal for GMT221/222
* Contact Trane for multiple ranges, probes, and options.
246
SPECIALTY SENSORS
CARBON DIOXIDE SENSORS
8001, 8002, 8003 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The 8001, 8002, and 8003 Series Carbon Dioxide
Sensors are designed to monitor carbon dioxide levels
for use in demand-controlled ventilation according to
ASHRAE Standard 62. They come factory-configured for
a linear analog output over a range of 0-2000 ppm of CO2.
Depending on the model, other ranges, and adjustments,
calibration may be accomplished with on-board push buttons and a built-in LCD display or through a serial interface and PC software. LCD display versions include a
blank cover for use in areas where a display is not
desired. For duct applications, pitot style sampling tube
versions are available, as well as aspiration box versions.
8002-KA
8002-K
(cover included)
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
Analog output of 0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA available
Programmable control relay available
Push-button output configuration available
LCD display with both blank and see-through
covers available
• Wiring terminations on separable mounting base
sensor to snap in place after the wires are terminated
• Locking screw to prevent tampering
SPECIALTY SENSORS
1551
(outdoor)
• ABC Logic™ automatic calibration firmware to
compensate for sensor drift
• Non-dispersive infrared technology
DIMENSIONS
4.31
(10.95)
in
(cm)
0.7
(1.88)
3.54
(8.99)
1.77
(4.50)
3.5
(8.90)
5.0
(12.7)
5.63
(14.30)
7.1
(18.03)
3.25
(8.26)
1.13
(2.87)
3.5
(8.90)
1.2
(3.05)
0.25
(0.6)
8002 / 8001-K
5.56
(14.12)
3.5
(8.90)
7.75
(19.69)
1.19
(3.02)
4 Mounting Holes
0.25 (0.64) dia
8001-KA
SPECIFICATIONS
Power
18-36 VAC, 50/60 Hz
18-42 VDC
70 mA average, 100 mA peak
Range
0-2000 ppm (factory setting), useradjustable from 0-10,000 ppm
Accuracy
±40 ppm or ±3% of reading,
whichever is higher
Annual drift
±10 ppm with ABC Logic enabled
±20 ppm with ABC Logic disabled
Calibration interval None,if unit goes out of calibration,
it will be recalibrated for life of
sensor
Analog output
4-20 mA (500Ω max load)
0-10 VDC (100Ω output
impedance) outputs available
simultaneously
Control relay
Form C (SPDT), 2A @ 24 VAC/VDC
factory set 1000 ppm, 50 ppm
hysteresis, user adjustable
0-9999 ppm
Operating temp
60° to 90°F (15.5° to 20°C), with
1551 -40° to 158°F (-40° to 70°C)
Operating humidity 0% to 95% RH noncondensing
Weight
8002, 8001-K
0.65 lb (0.3 kg)
8007, 8008
0.8 lb (0.4 kg)
8003
0.6 lb (0.2 kg)
Certification
FCC Part 15, Class B
247
SPECIALTY SENSORS
CARBON DIOXIDE SENSORS
8001, 8002, 8003 SERIES
WIRING
INSTALLATION
+ 0-10 VDC
- SIG COM
+ 4-20 mA
NC
Alarm
COM Relay
NO
Contacts
H G 24 VAC
or
+ - 24 VDC
2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
The wall-mount 8001-K, 8002-K, and 8003 must be
placed in an area that is representative of the entire
conditioned space. Recommended mounting height is
4' to 6' (1.23 to 1.83m) above the floor. Avoid drafts or
locations where occupants may routinely breathe
toward the sensor.
The duct-mount 8001-KA and 8002-KA require a minimum air velocity of 600 fpm (3 m/s). All openings into
the enclosure must be sealed, including the interior of
the conduit if duct pressure is at or below ambient.
SPECIALTY SENSORS
The 8007, 8008, and 8009 pitot-style duct-sampling
versions require a minimum of 400 fpm (2 m/s) air
velocity.
8001-K, 8002, 8001
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
Wall-mount sensors
8001-K
8002-K
8003
Duct sensors
8001-KA
8001B
8002-KA
8002B
8007
8008
8009
1508
1551
UIP-8000
UCK-1
GAS-N2
GAS-CO2-1000
248
DESCRIPTION
Wall-mount sensor without display
Wall-mount sensor with display
Low-cost wall-mount sensor, 0-10V only
8001-K in duct aspiration box
Black in-duct sensor without display
8002-K in duct aspiration box
Black in-duct sensor with display
Pitot duct sensor without display
Pitot duct sensor with display
Low-cost pitot duct sensor, 0-10 VDC only
ACCESSORIES
Duct aspiration box for 8001-K, 8002-K (separate)
Outside air enclosure for 8001-K, 8002-K, includes controlled
heater as low as -40°F (-40°C) (sensor not included)
User interface program for PC
Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases
(order gas separately)
Calibration gas (Nitrogen), 17L bottle
Calibration gas (1000 ppm CO2), 17L bottle
SPECIALTY SENSORS
CARBON DIOXIDE SENSORS
MODEL 4GS
DESCRIPTION
The Texas Instruments Model 4GS Carbon Dioxide
Sensors are dependable, economical devices designed
to be used as inputs to Building Automation Systems for
efficient control of ventilation. Using ambient CO2 levels
to adjust ventilation based on demand is recognized by
ASHRAE as one of the few ways to comply with both
the ventilation and energy standards. The Model 4GS
provides an analog output of CO2 concentration from a
small, attractive wall-mount package. An optional relay
output is available for direct control of equipment, and
an optional LCD display may be used for local indication.
4GS-22CD-06
For duct applications, the Model 4GS may be combined
with an optional aspiration box. If the duct pressure is
positive or neutral and air velocity exceeds 200 fpm (1.0
m/s), a less expensive impact sampling tube may be
used.
FEATURES
• Analog output of 4-20 mA, standard
• Field-selectable 0-10 VDC or 0-5 VDC output
• 24 VAC/VDC power
• Three-year calibration interval
• Optional relay (programmable setpoint)
• Optional LCD display
• No initial calibration required
• Small, attractive wall-mount enclosure
• Optional duct-aspiration box or sampling tube kit
SPECIFICATIONS
Analog output
4-20 mA into 5001 max
load (standard), field convertible
to 0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC with
10001 output impedance min
Optional relay
Normally open, 10-500 mA
@ 24 VAC or 30 VDC;
field-adjustable setpoint
300-5000 ppm,100 ppm
hysteresis below setpoint
Storage condition
-4° to 158°F (-20° to 70°C)
5% to 95% RH noncondensing
±8 ppm
Case
ABS plastic, UL 94V-0
3 years recommended
Weight
13 oz (0.37 kg)
Agency approval
FCC Part 15, Class A, CE
Power
18-28 VAC 50/60 Hz or
18-40 VDC, less than 3 VA
Sensing method
Nondispersive infrared (NDIR)
Measuring range
0-2000 ppm standard, field
adjustable from 0-300 ppm
to 0-5000 ppm
Accuracy
±75 ppm from 0-1500 ppm
±5% above 1500 ppm
Pressure effect
0.19% of reading per mm Hg
Repeatability
Calibration interval
Operating condition 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
5% to 95% RH noncondensing
249
SPECIALTY SENSORS
4GS-22C-06
with 4GS-DM-KIT
SPECIALTY SENSORS
CARBON DIOXIDE SENSORS
MODEL 4GS
DIMENSIONS
WIRING
in
(cm)
(R)
(M)
Run or Menu
Mode Select
Jumper
(I)
Current
(V)
Voltage
Output Select
Jumper
3.84
(9.75)
V
I
R
Display Models Only
M
Enter
SPECIALTY SENSORS
Select
1.25
(3.17)
2.5
(6.35)
5.12
(13.01)
Analog
Output
8
(20.32)
5.12
(13.01)
24 VAC/DC IN
1.12
(0.62)
24 VAC/DC COMMON
+
0.62
(1.58)
RELAY
-
RELAY
4GS Sensor
CO2 OUT
1.1
(2.79)
CO2 COMMON
3.84
(9.75)
18-30 VAC or
18-40 VDC (no polarity)
Control Relay (optional)
Contacts make on rise in CO2
1.75
(4.44)
3.0
(7.62)
Note: CO2 Common and 24 VAC/DC Common
are connected internally.
Duct Aspiration Box (optional)
MOUNTING
The 4GS should be mounted in an area that is representative of the conditioned space to be monitored. Avoid drafty
windows and doorways that might tend to dilute the atmosphere being controlled. Mounting height of 4-1/2' to 5' (1.2
to 1.5m) is recommended but is not critical since carbon dioxide diffuses rapidly in air.
The 4GS comes factory-configured for 4-20 mA analog output. If voltage output is required, moving the jumper on the
back of the unit from I to V will change the output to 0-10 VDC. The voltage output may, in turn, be changed to 0-5
VDC, the sensing range adjusted, and the (optional) relay setpoint changed by use of the programming keys on the
back of the 4GS and its optional LCD display. Units with no display will require the CAL-B-KEY calibration keypad for
adjustment. Refer to the programming manual supplied with the 4GS for configuration and calibration instructions.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
4GS-22C-06
4GS-22CD-06
4GS-22CR-06
4GS-22CDR-06
4GS-DM-KIT
4GS-PT-KIT
CAL-B-KEY
DESCRIPTION
Sensor with analog output only
Sensor with analog output and display
Sensor with analog output and relay
Sensor with analog output, display, and relay
ACCESSORIES
Duct-mount kit for 4GS sensor (order sensor separately)
Impact sampling tube kit for 4GS sensor (order sensor
separately)
Calibration keypad with cable and connector for 4GS sensor
UCK-1
GAS-CO2-800
250
RELATED PRODUCTS
Universal calibration kit
Calibration gas (800 ppm) 17L bottle
SPECIALTY SENSORS
OXYGEN SENSOR
MODEL OS-1
DESCRIPTION
The Model OS-1 is a dependable, economical oxygen
sensor designed to monitor oxygen levels in ambient air.
It has a jumper-selectable analog output for interfacing
with a BAS controller and an SPDT relay output to activate an alarm in the event of oxygen depletion due to a
refrigerant leak. The units are powered by 24 VAC/VDC
and are housed in a rugged polystyrene enclosure for
dust and moisture protection.
• 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC, or 0-10 VDC output, jumper
selectable
• SPDT alarm relay
• 24 VAC/VDC power
• 0% to 25% range
• Rugged polystyrene enclosure
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
in
(cm)
Power
Analog output
(jumper selectable)
2.95
(7.5)
5.11
(13.0)
Response time
Element type
Element life
5.11
(13.0)
1.13
(2.9)
1.6
(4.1)
Relay output
OS-1
Accuracy
Operating temp
Operating humidity
Storage temp
Weight
24 VAC/VDC @ 0.25A
4-20 mA (3001 max)
0-5 VDC (20 k1 min)
0-10 VDC (20 k1 min)
0% to 25% oxygen
SPDT 24 VAC/VDC @ 0.5A,
factory set @ 19.5%
Approx 12 sec
Galvanic cell
Approx five years @ 20°C
in ambient air
±1%
40° to 104°F (5° to 40°C)
10% to 95% noncondensing
-4° to 140°F (-20° to 60°C)
1 lb (0.45 kg)
251
SPECIALTY SENSORS
FEATURES
SPECIALTY SENSORS
OXYGEN SENSOR
MODEL OS-1
WIRING
OFF
OPR
Setpoint
Adjust
Setpoint Adjust Pot
R8
R6
Analog
Output
Select
Jumper
J2
DC
PWR-
OUT-
OUT+
SENS-
SENS+
(factory
wired)
Power
Select
Jumper
Power
Fuse
F1
NC
Alarm
J1
4-20 MA
0-5 VDC
0-10 VDC
Analog Out
F2
COM
NO
SPECIALTY SENSORS
Alarm
Fuse
Span
Note: AC power must be floating
and may not be grounded.
If AC power is grounded a
separate transformer is
required for each OS-1.
PWR+
Offset
AC
R29
Analog
INSTALLATION
The OS-1 is suitable for indoor use only. Mount the unit as close to the source of potential refrigerant leaks as possible. Some recommended considerations are as follows:
1. Mount the unit with the sensor pointing down.
2. Mount the unit in a location with low vibration. Strong vibration may cause a change in the condition of the
internal membrane.
3. The sensor should be mounted 3' to 5' (0.9 to 1.5m) from the floor in equipment rooms or 1' (0.3m) above
the floor in refrigeration pits.
4. The OS-1 should cover about 1000-1500 square feet with adequate air movement.
5. Mount at least 5' (1.5m) from the exhaust fan.
6. Verify operation yearly.
Note: Make all connections in accordance with national and local codes.
CAUTION: Not to be used as a life safety device.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
OS-1
LPI-1C
LPI-1CR
252
DESCRIPTION
Oxygen sensor, 0% to 25% range
RELATED PRODUCTS
Black LCD display
Red digital display
SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS MONITOR / TRANSMITTER
GMT SERIES
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
Attractive, compact case design
10-step LED indication
4-20 mA and DPDT relay output
Wide variety of gases detected
Two types of sensing technology
Optional network controller for applications
with multiple monitors
• Optional duct-aspiration housing
GMT
Optional Explosionproof
GMT
(see “Hazardous
Locations” section)
SPECIALTY SENSORS
The GMT Series Gas Monitor/Transmitter is a microprocessor-based system for continuous, effective monitoring of toxic and combustible gases. The GMT Series
provides a 4-20 mA output in proportion to the level of
gas present and a factory-calibrated DPDT alarm relay.
A 10-step LED display in the attractive case gives a
visual indication of the gas level in the atmosphere.
Two types of sensing elements are available for most
gases monitored. The highly accurate and very stable
S1 sensors include catalytic gas sensors for many
flammable gases and vapor concentrations, electrochemical cells for toxic gases, and diffusion fuel cells
for oxygen sensing. The S2 solid-state sensors provide
highly effective solutions for a wide range of applications.
• Gases detected
Carbon monoxide
Nitrogen dioxide (diesel exhaust)
Hydrogen
Chlorine
• Combustibles
Hydrogen sulfide
Oxygen
Sulfur dioxide
SPECIFICATIONS
Power requirements
Diffusion fuel cell/
electrochemical sensor
Solid-state/catalytic
combustion sensors
Analog output
Alarm contacts
Audible alarm
Concentration display
Visual indicators
Sensing technology
S1
17-27 VAC, 2.5W;
24-38 VDC, 100 mA
17-27 VAC, 5W;
24-38 VDC, 200 mA
4-20 mA, 10001 max,
loop powered, or
6001 max self-powered
DPDT pilot duty,
150 VA max inductive,
5A @ 30 VDC, 250 VAC
65 dBA @ 3' (1m)
10-step progressive LED
Normal operation
green LED
S2
Dimensions
Weight
Operating temp
Calibration interval
Average sensor life
O2
NO2, CL2, SO2
Others
Detection range
CO, NO2
Others
Electrochemical for
toxic gases
Catalytic combustion for
combustible gases
Diffusion fuel cell for
oxygen
Solid-state
8.4''H x 5.3''W x 2.25''D
(21.3 x 13.2 x 5.7 cm)
0.86 lb (0.35 kg)
32° to 104°F (0° to 40°C)
6 months
2 years
2-3 years
3-6 years
50', 10,000 ft2
20', 1,600 ft2
253
SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS MONITOR / TRANSMITTER
GMT SERIES
WIRING
4-20 mA
Signal
-
+
24 VAC / VDC
No Polarity
S3
J1
1
2
NC C
3
4
5
NO NC C
Alarm Relay
6
NO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
J2
– +
4-20 MA
J3
1
2
VAC
A
B
S
COMM
GMT Gas Monitor / Transmitter
Notes:
1. A dedicated power source is required for each GMT.
2. Communication terminals (A and B) are only used in networked applications using a VA-301C controller. See Model
VA-301C catalog page for applications with multiple networked
GMT gas monitors.
3. Use separate power sources on the two SPDT alarm relay outputs.
4. The GMT requires power but the 4-20 mA analog output can
be configured as loop-powered or current sourcing. For
loop-powered operation (factory setting), set jumpers on S3 on
2-3, 4-5, 6-7; for current sourcing, set jumpers on S3 on 1-2,
3-4, 5-6.
SPECIALTY SENSORS
DETECTION AND SET POINT LEVELS
ORDER
CODE
CO
NO2
H2
CL2
COMB**
H2S
O2
SO2
GAS
DETECTED
DETECTION RANGE
S1 Sensor
S2 Sensor
Carbon monoxide 0-250 ppm
0-250 ppm
Nitrogen dioxide
0-10 ppm
Hydrogen
0% to 2.5%
0-2.5%
Chlorine
0-15 ppm
Combustibles
0% to 100% LEL 0% to 100% LEL
Hydrogen sulfide
0-50 ppm
Oxygen
0% to 25%
Sulfur dioxide
0-10 ppm
-
ACCURACY
ALARM RELAY*
S1 Sensor S2 Sensor
SET POINT
3%
3%
3%
3%
3%
3%
3%
3%
5%
5%
5%
-
25 ppm
1 ppm
1%
1 ppm
25% LEL
10 ppm
19.5%
2 ppm
MOUNTING
HEIGHT ft (m)
3-5 (1-1.5) from floor
1-3 (0.3 to 1) from ceiling
1 (0.3) from ceiling
1 (0.3) from floor
Check gas density
1 (0.3) from floor
3-5 (1-1.5) from floor
1 (0.3) from floor
* These are factory-standard relay settings. For other set point levels, please specify at time of order.
** Specify combustible gas to be monitored. Standard gases include methane, propane, butane, gasoline,
alcohols, acetylene, and ethylene. Please call Kele for other applications. (LEL = Lower Explosive Limit)
CAUTION: Not to be used as a life safety device.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
* S1 oxygen sensor is diffusion
GMT
Gas monitor/transmitter, 4-20 mA output and DPDT relay
fuel cell; S1 combustible sensor
is catalytic combustion type.
XXX ORDER CODE (for gas detected from chart above)
SENSOR
** DT option not available with S2
sensors.
S1 Electrochemical sensor*
S2 Solid state sensor**
Optional explosionproof housing
is available with GMT monitors,
OPTIONS
which include an electrochemical
A
Audible alarm
sensor. See Hazardous Location
section.
DT Duct-aspiration box**
NET Network option (for use with VA301C)
Call Kele for applications with
multiple networked GMT gas
CL2
S1 Example: GMT-CL2-S1 Gas monitor/transmitter
GMT
monitors.
with 4-20 mA output and DPDT alarm relay
for 0-15 ppm chlorine
RELATED PRODUCTS
UCK Universal connection kit
GAS-xx-xx Test gas
254
SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS DETECTOR / TRANSMITTER
CD-420 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The CD-420 Series Gas Detector/Transmitter is a two-wire,
4-20 mA transmitter with two alarm contacts (high/low) that
provides continuous monitoring for toxic and oxygen gas hazards in ambient air. It is manufactured using industrial-grade
components and technology, and it is virtually maintenance
free. The Model CD-420 is fully tested and calibrated at the
factory and shipped ready for installation.
FEATURES
Reduced operating, maintenance, and installation costs
Accurate, reliable performance without false alarms
Modular plug-in components
Two-wire, loop-powered, linear 4-20 mA analog output
Electrochemical sensor
Low-power consumption, only 20 mA in operation
CD-420-CO-100
SPECIFICATIONS
Power supply
Power consumption
Max loop resistance
Analog output
Signal transmission
range
Electrochemical
sensor
Drift
Zero
Span
Alarm outputs
Operating temp
Ammonia
Hydrogen sulfide
Oxygen/Toxics
Operating humidity
Enclosure
12-35 VDC, 50 mA
Nominal 20 mA @ 24 VDC
6001
Two-wire, 4-20 mA
3.5 mA if in fault mode
31,300' (9,600m), 18 AWG wire
Plug-in, industrial, gas specific
Nominal
<10% of reading per year
250 [email protected] 24 VDC max transistor
switch
-13° to 86°F (-25° to 30°C)
-40° to 122°F (-40° to 50°C)
-13° to 122°F (-25° to 50°C)
5% to 95% noncondensing
NEMA 4, RFI/EMI shielded enclosure
with two cable ports
Dimensions
4.7"H x 5"W x 2.3"D
(11.9 x 12.7 x 5.8 cm)
Weight
1.65 lbs (750 g)
Ratings/Certifications CSA for both USA and Canadian
standards, general-purpose
Warranty
Two years
WIRING
ORDERING INFORMATION
Transistor switches close
on alarm
12-35 VDC
Power Supply
MODEL
DESCRIPTION
CD-420
Gas detector/transmitter
GAS
CO
Carbon monoxide
H2S
Hydrogen sulfide
CL2
Chlorine
O/P1
CD-420
–
+
O/P2
+
24 VDC
Relay
+
4-20 mA
Signal
NH3
SO2
NO2
HCN
O2
Note: If only relay output is
used, 4-20 mA terminal
must be connected to
the power supply (–).
–
20
25
50
100
200
–
24 VDC Alarm
Ammonia
Sulfur dioxide
Nitrogen dioxide
Hydrogen cyanide
Oxygen
SENSOR RANGE (GAS)
10
0-10 ppm (NO2, SO2)
AC Fan
500
1000
Alarm Outputs: 24 VDC output, 250 mA max
CD-420
CO
100
0-20 ppm (CL2, NO2, SO2, HCN)
0-25% (O2)
0-50 ppm (H2S, SO2, HCN)
0-100 ppm (CO, H2S, CL2, NH3, HCN)
0-200 ppm (CO)
0-500 ppm (CO, H2S, NH3)
0-1000 ppm (CO)
Example: CD-420-CO-100 Carbon monoxide
detector/ transmitter, 0-100 ppm range
CAUTION: Not to be used as a life safety device.
255
SPECIALTY SENSORS
•
•
•
•
•
•
SPECIALTY SENSORS
MULTIPOINT SAMPLE DRAW GAS MONITOR
VASQN8X
DESCRIPTION
The VASQN8X is a sample draw gas monitor. The standard unit has two sampling points and a three-relay output
for different stages of alarm. The unit is ideal for MRI
rooms as the sampling point tubing can be up to 1000’ from
the monitor. The optional two-gas model will pick up both
gases at each sampling point.
SPECIFICATIONS
Relay output rating
SPECIALTY SENSORS
Audible alarm
Number of sample
points
Outputs
Humidity
Temperature
Maximum sampling
distance
Size
Weight
Power
Filter
5A, 30 VDC or 250 VAC
resistive
110 dBA at 3' (1 m)
Two, 100' (30.43m) 1/8" polymer
tubing inlcuded
Three DPDT relays (three alarms)
0-95% RH, non-condensing
32° to 104°F (0° to 40°C)
1000' (335 m)
19"H x 11.75"W x 4.5"D
(48.3 x 30 x 11.4 cm)
22.4 lbs. (10.17 Kg)
120 VAC, 2A
VASQN8X
ORDERING INFORMATION
VASQN82 Multipoint gas monitor with two sampling points
G1* First target gas
G2* Second target gas (optional)
8XTL3 100' sampling distance (contact Kele for other lengths)
VASQN82 CO NO2 8XTL3
Example: Two-zone sample draw monitor for CO and
NO2 with two 100' sample tubes
* Gases available: O2, R11, R12, R22, R123, R125, R134A, CO, NO2, combustibles
STAND ALONE DUAL GAS MONITOR
VA301M
DESCRIPTION
The VA301M monitors CO plus one other gas. The second gas monitor is mounted remotely up to 100' away.
There are high and low alarm level relays for each zone.
SPECIFICATIONS
Relay output rating
Alarm levels
Audible alarm
Outputs
Humidity
Temperature
Size
Weight
Power
Display
256
5A, 30 VDC or 250 VAC
resistive
High and low
65 dBA at 3' (1 m)
Two SPDT relays per zone
0-95% RH, non-condensing
32° to 110°F (0° to 45°C)
8.4"H x 5.3"W x 2.25"D
(21.3 x 13.4 x 5.7 cm)
0.86 lbs. (.35 Kg)
17-27 VAC, 24-38 VDC, 550
mA at 24 VDC
Two-line (gas, value) scrolls
between sensors every
three seconds
VA301M
Remote Sensor
ORDERING INFORMATION
VA301MQ2CO
CO monitor
VA301MQ2CO-DIS CO monitor with LCD display
X Remote packages
NO2, C3H8 (propane)
VA301MQ2CO
NO2
Example: CO sensor with
remote sensor for
NO2
SPECIALTY SENSORS
EXPANSION MODULE
MODEL VA301EM
DESCRIPTION
The VA301EM expansion module allows the monitoring
of toxic and combustible gases and refrigerants. Up to
four sensors can be placed 500' away for toxic and combustible gases, and 200' away for refrigerant gas monitoring. The transmitter is equipped with a backlight LCD
display and keypad that can be placed in a safe area,
remote from the sensors. Alarm relays and Modbus
communication are standard. The unit is compatible with
the VA301C controller.
FEATURES
• Sense one to four zones
• Sensors available for toxic and combustible
gases and refrigerants
• RS-485 Modbus communication
• Contact input for manual break-glass switches
• Three 24 VDC outputs to activate horns
and strobes
• 4-20 mA output for each sensor
• Four relay outputs
• Easy-to-read LCD display
• Explosionproof sensors for combustible
and toxic gases
VA301IRFS
S301D2
CAUTION: Not to be used as a life safety device.
SPECIFICATIONS
Transmitter VA301EM
Standard outputs
Audible alarm
Visual LED indicators
Relay rating
Power
Operating temp
Humidity
Enclosure
Dimensions
Weight
Recommended calibration
Sensor VA301IRFS
Refrigerants detected
Sensing Technology
Four DPDT relays, three 24
VDC, four 4-20 mA, RS-485
Modbus
65 dBA @ 3 ft (1m)
G - Normal, R - Alarm
ABC, Y - Fault, A - Tx
5A, 30 VDC or 250 VAC
20-27 VAC 50/60 Hz,
29-38 VDC 2.0A max
32° to 100°F (0° to 40°C)
0% to 95% RH
(non-condensing)
ABS Polycarbonate
7.99"H x 11.02"W x
2.76"D (20.3 x 28 x 7 cm)
2.26 lbs (1.02 kg)
Every six months
R-11, R-12, R-22, R-123,
R-125, R-134a
(other mixes available)
Dual infrared sensor
Measurement range
Resolution
Response time
Cold to start
Distance controller to sensor
Operating temp
Humidity
Enclosure
Dimensions
Weight
0-1000 ppm
1 ppm
60 seconds
10 minutes
200 ft max (60m)
32° to 100°F (0° to 40°C)
0% to 95% (non-condensing)
ABS - Polycarbonate
4.2"H x 11.20"W x 2.48"D
(10.2 x 28 x 6.3 cm)
2.33 lbs (0.603 kg)
Sensor S301D2
Sensing technology
Electrochemical (toxic),
catalytic combustion
(combustible), diffusion fuel
cell (oxygen)
Distance controller to sensor 500 ft max (160m)
Operating temp
Toxic -40° to 100°F (-40° to
40°C), Combustible -40° to
112°F (-40° to 50°C)
Humidity
0% to 95% (non-condensing)
Enclosure
Class I, Div 1, Groups B,C,D
257
SPECIALTY SENSORS
VA301EM
SPECIALTY SENSORS
EXPANSION MODULE
MODEL VA301EM
WIRING
NC
RELAY 3
NO
NC
SPECIALTY SENSORS
NETWORK
END OF LINE JUMPER
J8
RELAY 4
J9
J17
RELAY 1
J10
NO
RELAY 2
+
+24
VDC
J18
( )
A B A B
GDN
NO
SENSOR
POWER
POWER
COMMUNICATION
SHIELD
SENSOR
NETWORK
24 VDC
OUTPUT
J16
BREAK
GLASS
SWITCH
INPUT
NC
NO
NC
4-20 mA
OUTPUT
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
VA301EM
VA301EM
DESCRIPTION
Expansion module, three 24 VDC outputs, four relays, four 4-20 mA, Modbus
OPTIONS
RFSA Horn and red strobe light
RFS
Red strobe light
SENSORS (order separately)
VA301IRFS (R123, R22, R11, R12, R125, R134a)
Refrigerant gas sensor
S301D2 (CO, NO2, NO, CL2, COMB, H2S, O2, SO2, HCN, HCL, F2, O3, HF) Explosionproof gas sensor
RFS
VA301IRFSR123 Example: VA301EM-RFS with VA301IRFSR123 Expansion Module for four
4-20 mA outputs with relays, 24 VDC outputs, red strobe, and one R123
sensor
RELATED PRODUCTS
UCK
Universal calibration kit
GAS-XX-XX
Test gas
ST120SN1
Break glass switches
258
SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS DETECTION CONTROLLER
MODEL VA301C
DESCRIPTION
The VA301C Gas Detection Controller provides continuous monitoring of up to 96 inputs/outputs, on three
channels, at distances up to 2000'. Modbus communication channels are included, and a BACnet communication module is available. The VA301C is preprogrammed at the factory, but menu-driven changes can
be made in the field. The VA301C allows monitoring of
an entire network and will initiate an alarm or ventilation
activation upon detection of a gas. One model is available with datalogging.
FEATURES
• Full array of visual indicators and audible alarm
• Multiple fully programmable alarm levels
• Programmable time delays
• Failure indicator
• Up to 96 transmitters and relay modules
• Up to 768 events
• Up to 128 zoning groups
• Graphic 122 x 32 Dot Matrix display
• Datalogging available
• BACnet module available
SPECIALTY SENSORS
VA301C
VA-201R
CAUTION: Not to be used as a life safety device.
SPECIFICATIONS
Power requirement
17-27 VAC, 24-38 VDC,
500 mA
User interface
Dot Matrix display and
keypad
Communications channels Three 32 Modbus zones
Visual indicators
Blinking Green LED
Normal operation
Red LED
Alarm Level 1, 2, and 3
Blinking Amber LED
Signal Tx
Blinking Green LED
Signal Rx
Yellow LED
Failure
Audible alarm
65 dBA @ 3' (1m)
Network capacity
Up to 96 transmitters and 96
relay modules
Outputs
4 DPDT relays (alarms/fault),
buzzer
Relay output rating
5A, 30 VDC or 250 VAC
(resistive)
Alarm levels
Multiple with high and low
setpoints
Time delay
0, 30 sec, 45 sec, 1-99 min.
before and after alarm
Temp range
Humidity range
Distance to transmitters
Dimensions
Weight
Enclosure
VA201R Relay Module
Power requirement
Number of outputs
Relay output rating
Max distance to controller
Humidity range
Dimensions
Weight
-4° to 122°F (-20° to 50°C)
0% to 95% RH noncondensing
2000' (600m) max, 65 ft
(20m) T-Tap, 130 ft (40m)
total T-Tap
7.99" H x 11.02" W x 2.76" D
(20.3 x 28 x 7 cm)
2.4 lb (1.1 kg)
NEMA 4X Polycarbonate - ABS
17-27 VAC, 24-38 VDC,
250 mA
2, 4, or 8 DPDT relays
5A, resistive 30 VDC or
250 VAC
2000' (600m) max
0% to 95% RH non-condensing
8.4" H x 8.6" W x 2.5" D
(21.3 x 21.8 x 6.35 cm)
3.5 lb (1.58 kg)
259
SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS DETECTION CONTROLLER
MODEL VA301C
WIRING
VA301C CONTROLLER
VA301IRFS
SENSOR
SPECIALTY SENSORS
VA301IRFS
SENSOR
S301D2
SENSOR
J24
J23
24 AWG
BELDEN 9841
MAX 2000 (60 cm)
32 SENSORS +
32 RELAY MODULES
PER CHANNEL
VA301IRFS
SENSOR
B3
A3
CH 3
B2
A2
CH 2
VA301EM
EXPANSION MODULE
B1
A1
CH 1
Alarm
Fan
GMT-XXX-XX-NET
SENSOR
VA-201R
RELAY MODULE
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
*VA301C
*VA301C-DLC
VA-201R-2
VA-201R-4
VA-201R-8
VAC301BDCM
DESCRIPTION
Gas detection controller
Gas detection controller with datalogging
Two relay module
Four relay module
Eight relay module
BACnet communication module
*Provide system layout for factory programming
RELATED PRODUCTS
RELATED PRODUCTS
GMT-XXX-XX-NET Gas Transmitter with networking option (See GMT catalog page)
VA301EM
Expansion module
260
SPECIALTY SENSORS
REFRIGERANT GAS MONITORING SYSTEM
MODEL HGM300
DESCRIPTION
The Model HGM300 is a multiple refrigerant gas and
multiple area monitoring system for low level continuous
monitoring of CFC, HCFC, and HFC refrigerant gases
used in most commercial refrigeration systems. System
design supports compliance to the refrigerant monitoring
requirements of ANSI/BSR ASHRAE 15-1994/2001.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
24 different refrigerants monitored with one unit
4 point standard, expandable to 16 points
Infrared, nondispersive detection
3 SPDT alarm contacts
System fault alarm
120 VAC power
RS232C communications
RS485 Modbus RTU protocol
Optional dual 4-20 mA outputs
Up to 500' (152m) from measuring point to monitor
Optional remote display module
Audible alarm
SPECIFICATIONS
Power
Coverage
Detector type
System gas library
Sensitivity
Measuring range
Accuracy
120 VAC, 50/60 Hz @ 6A
240 VAC, 50 Hz
4 point standard,
expandable to 16
Infrared nondispersive
R11, R12, R113, R114,
R502, R404a, R407c,
R134a, R410a, R507,
R508b, R22, R123, R124,
R500, R503, R401a, R402a,
R402b, R409a, R402a, 1301
1 ppm
0-1000 ppm
±10 ppm (0-100 ppm)
±10% reading (100-1000 ppm)
Contact ratings
Output signal
5A, 120 VAC
Dual 4-20 mA 5001 max
(optional)
Warm-up time
15 min.
Response time
5-120 sec
Monitoring distance Up to 500' (152m)
Operating temp
32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Humidity
5% to 90% (noncondensing)
Dimensions
17"H x 12"D x 5.5"W
(43 x 30 x 14 cm)
Weight
15 lb (6.8 kg)
Certification
UL listed, File #3101-1;
CE approved, File # EN613262
and #EN61010-1
Warranty
Two years from date of shipment
INSTALLATION
The Model HGM300 should be centrally located in the mechanical room and be readily accessible for easy visual
monitoring and servicing. Air sample tubing may be run in lengths up to 500' (152m). The fresh air purge line should
draw from an area that does not contain any refrigerant gas and cannot exceed 300' (91m) in length. The exhaust
line should run to an outside location if possible. The length of the exhaust line cannot exceed 100' (30m). Ideally,
two to three pickup points spaced around each chiller will provide sufficient coverage. It may be necessary to perform a smoke test of the mechanical room to determine the best locations for sample tubing. The smoke test would
provide the pattern of air currents present in the mechanical room.
261
SPECIALTY SENSORS
FEATURES
SPECIALTY SENSORS
REFRIGERANT GAS MONITORING SYSTEM
MODEL HGM300
WIRING
Tubing
Purge
1
2
3
4
Internally Connected
Dual
4-20 mA
Sourcing
Outputs
(optional board)
Leak
Ground Loop 2
Ground Loop 1
Loop 1 = ZONE
Loop 2 = ppm
Exhaust
SPECIALTY SENSORS
Node
Address
Switch
Note: Jumpers are installed across
Loop 1 and Loop 2. Leave
Loop 1 jumpered if only one
zone is monitored. Remove
both jumpers if multiple zones
are monitored.
RS-485
Alarm Relays
Spill
Evac
On/Off
Power
Switch
Fault
C NO NC C NO NC C NO NC C NO NC
Water
Trap
L N
L N
Aux
Main
120 VAC 120 VAC
B A Ground
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
HGM300
HGM300
DESCRIPTION
Refrigerant gas monitoring system
ZONES
11
Four zones with metal tube fittings
12
Eight zones with metal tube fittings
13
12 zones with metal tube fittings
14
16 zones with metal tube fittings
VOLTAGE
1
120 VAC, 50/60 Hz
2
240 VAC, 50 Hz
11
1 Example: HGM300-11-1 Refrigerant gas
monitoring system, four zones with
metal tube fittings, 120 VAC, 60 Hz
M1110BQ
M1110PQ
RDM800
HGM-LON
HGM-N2
M1100LT
M1100LU
M1100LV
M1100AA
T-101
89, 868, 869
262
RELATED PRODUCTS
Annual maintenance kit (one inline filter, one charcoal filter)
Dual 4-20 mA output module
Remote display module
Lonworks communication adapter
N2 communication adapter
Visual alarm 120 VAC
Audio alarm 120 VAC
Audio/visual alarm 120 VAC
Air sample tubing (250' roll)
1/4" air sample tubing (250' roll)
Strobes and horns
SPECIALTY SENSORS
MULTIGAS REFRIGERANT MONITOR
MODEL HGM-SZ
DESCRIPTION
The Model HGM-SZ is a single refrigerant gas monitor
for low-level continuous monitoring of CFC, HCFC, and
HFC refrigerant gases used in most commercial refrigeration systems. The design supports compliance to the
refrigerant monitoring requirements of ANSI/BSR
ASHRAE 15-1994/2001.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
24 different refrigerants monitored with one unit
Infrared, nondispersive detection
Three adjustable SPDT alarm contacts
System fault alarm
120/240 VAC power
4-20 mA output signal
50-foot sampling tube and end filter included
Audible alarm
Backlit LED display with navigation keys
Local alarm-silence button
Water trap included
SPECIFICATIONS
Power
Detector type
System gas library
Output
Sensitivity
Measuring range
Accuracy
Warm-up time
Response time
Monitoring distance
Operating temp
Humidity
Dimensions
Weight
Calibration
Certification
Warranty
INSTALLATION
100/120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Single pass, infrared non-dispersive
R11, R12, R113, R114, R502,
R404a, R407a, R407c, R134a,
R410a, R507, R508b, R22, R123,
R124, R500, R503, R401a, R402a,
R408a, R409a, R23, 1301
3 alarm relays, 1 fault relay
240 VAC, 5A, and 4-20 mA 5001
(non-isolated)
1 ppm
0-10,000 ppm
±10 ppm (0-100 ppm)
±10% reading (100-1000 ppm)
15 min.
12.2-22.5 sec
Up to 50' (15.2m) (sample tube and
end filter included)
32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
5% to 90% noncondensing
12.37"H x 15"W x 3.5"D
(19.3 x 38.1 x 8.9 cm), includes
water trap and mounting flange
7 lb (3.2 kg)
Unit re-zeroes every 6 min., adjustment in software if needed
UL listed, CE approved
Two years
The Model HGM-SZ should be centrally located in the
mechanical room and readily accessible for easy visual monitoring and servicing. The air sample tube may
be run up to 50' (15.2m) from the monitor.
WIRING
Alarm Relays
4-20 mA
Output
Leak
Spill
Evac
Fault
C NO NC C NO NC C NO NC C NO NC
– +
(MUST BE
UNGROUNDED)
L N
120/240 VAC
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
HGM-SZ
125-SS-2
M1104KF
DESCRIPTION
Multigas refrigerant monitor
Replacement charcoal filter
Line end filter
263
SPECIALTY SENSORS
FEATURES
SPECIALTY SENSORS
REMOTE DISPLAY MODULE
MODEL RDM800
DESCRIPTION
The Model RDM800 Remote Display Module provides
remote programming, interrogation, and display functionality to support the Model HGM300 refrigerant monitor.
System design supports compliance to the refrigerant monitoring requirements of ANSI/BSR ASHRAE 15-1994/2001.
FEATURES
SPECIALTY SENSORS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Communicates with up to four HGM300 monitors
Back lit LCD
Graphical display of ppm trend
Data logging
Automatic or manual sampling
Mountable up to 4000' (1219m) from the monitor
RS-485 and RS-232C communication
Two SPDT alarm relays
Programmable alarms for alarm, fault, or
ready condition
• Audible alarm
SPECIFICATIONS
Power
Inputs
Display
Trend mode
Data logging
Alarm indications
Input fault indication
Power safety feature
Sampling mode
120 VAC, 230 VAC 50/60 Hz
Accepts 1-16 inputs from up to
four HGM300 monitors
Back lit LCD, display mode
displays measured point in ppm
Selectable graphical display
of ppm trend for any point
100 data entries per point
Flashing channel display,
flashing red light; alarm signal sent via RS-485
LCD display indicates any
input fault, yellow light flashes
On power failure, module will
record the time of the system
fault and restart; no loss of
programming or stored data
Automatic or manual
Max distance from
monitor
Communications
Alarms
Operating temp
Dimensions
Weight
Certification
Warranty
ORDERING INFORMATION
WIRING
MODEL
RDM800
HGM300
RS-485
BAS
RS-485
Alarm Relays
C NO NC C NO NC
RDM800
B A
4000' (1219m)
Two-way communication
through RS-485 to all monitors
on the system; a second
RS-485 output for communication to BAS system;
RS-232C port standard
Two SPDT 120 VAC alarm
relays
32° to 120°F (0° to 50°C)
11"W x 10"H x 3"D
(28 x 25 x 8 cm)
5 lb (2.3 kg)
UL listed, File #3101-1;
CE approved, File #EN513262
and #EN61010-1
Two years
G
B A
G
L
N
120 VAC
264
DESCRIPTION
Remote display module
VOLTAGE
1
120 VAC/60 Hz
2
240 VAC/50 Hz
3
100 VAC/50 Hz
1
Example: RDM800-1 Remote
display module,
120 VAC/60 Hz
SPECIALTY SENSORS
REFRIGERANT LEAK DETECTOR
MODEL RLD-5
DESCRIPTION
The Model RLD-5 is a solid-state CFC refrigerant leak
detector capable of detecting the presence of escaping
refrigerants. It is field adjustable for five different CFC
refrigerant types: R-11, R-12, R-22, R-113, and R-502.
An analog output is provided to allow interfacing to computer-monitoring equipment. An alarm relay is also provided with adjustable setpoint and jumper-selectable
time delay function to prevent nuisance alarms. Four
LEDs provide status indication for warm-up, ready,
warning, and alarm.
•
•
•
•
•
•
R-11, R-12, R-22, R-113, and R-502 detection
Selectable analog output
LED status indication
Alarm relay output
Field-replaceable sensor
Refrigerant leak detection as described in
ASHRAE 15-1994
• Minimum time delay 15 minutes
SPECIFICATIONS
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
0.5
(1.27)
Removable Mounting Brackets
(included)
0.5
(1.27)
2
(5.08)
REFRIGERANT LEAK DETECTOR
RLD-5
8
(20.32)
WARM-UP
READY WARNING
ALARM
RESET
CAL.
4.5
(11.43)
ALARM
Supply voltage
Power consumption
AC
DC
Operating temp
Operating humidity
Measuring range
Analog output
(jumper selectable)
Loop resistance
Current
Voltage
Alarm relay output
(jumper selectable)
Alarm relay time delay
(jumper selectable)
Alarm relay setpoint
Adjustable
Factory set
Accuracy
Long term drift
24 VAC/VDC ±10%
325 mA
250 mA
32° to 158°F (0° to 70°C)
10% to 95% noncondensing
0-1000 ppm
4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC,
0-10 VDC, 1-6 VDC
3001 max
5 k1 min
SPDT 0.5A 24 VAC/VDC
Manual reset (latched)
Auto reset (unlatched)
15 min, 30 min, 1 hr, 2 hr
0-1000 ppm
500 ppm
±5%
8%
265
SPECIALTY SENSORS
FEATURES
SPECIALTY SENSORS
REFRIGERANT LEAK DETECTOR
MODEL RLD-5
WIRING
J4
15 min
30 min
1 hr
2 hrs
Setpoint X 100
R-22
10
0
2
Time Delay Selector for Alarm
Relay Output
8
6
4
Alarm Relay Setpoint Dial
(factory set at 500 ppm)
Setpoint
ADJ
GND
S1
R-502
R-133
R-11
Refrig
Type
Alarm
Relay
Fuse
R-22
Refrigerant Selector Dial
R-12
J6
F2
GMA 1 AMP
K1
4-20 mA
0-5 VDC
0-10 VDC
1-6 VDC
Analog Output/Signal Selector
SPECIALTY SENSORS
J5
Unlatched
Latched
Alarm Relay Output Selector
J2
AC pwr
AC/DC Selector
DC pwr
TB3
TB2
NO COM NC
Alarm
TB1
GND
Analog
Output
Power Fuse
Power
GMA 1 AMP
F1
24 VAC/VDC
Analog
Output
INSTALLATION / OPERATION
Installation
The RLD-5 is suitable for indoor use only. Mount the unit as close to the source of potential refrigerant leaks as
possible. Some recommended considerations are as follows:
1. Mount approximately 3' (0.9m) from floor (refrigerants are heavier than air and will settle on the floor).
2. Mount at least 5' (1.5m) from exhaust fans (direct airflow across sensing element will affect accuracy).
3. If used in refrigeration pits, mount 1' (0.3m) above floor.
Operation
To test operation, place a small amount of alcohol below the sensing element. The analog output signal should
increase.
Note: Make all connections in accordance with national and local codes.
CAUTION: Not to be used as a life safety device.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
RLD-5
170-0830
266
DESCRIPTION
Refrigerant leak detector
Replacement sensing element
SPECIALTY SENSORS
REFRIGERANT LEAK DETECTOR
MODEL RLD-134A
DESCRIPTION
The Model RLD-134A is a solid-state HFC refrigerant
leak detector capable of detecting the presence of
escaping refrigerant R-134a.
An analog output is provided to allow interfacing to computer-monitoring equipment. An alarm relay is also provided with adjustable setpoint and jumper-selectable
time delay function to prevent nuisance alarms. Four
LEDs provide status indication for warm-up, ready,
warning, and alarm.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
R-134a detection
Selectable analog output
LED status indication
Alarm relay output
Field-replaceable sensor
Wall-mounting kit
Refrigerant leak detection as described in
ASHRAE 15-1994
• Minimum time delay 15 minutes
SPECIFICATIONS
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
0.5
(1.27)
Removable Mounting Brackets
(included)
0.5
(1.27)
2
(5.08)
REFRIGERANT LEAK DETECTOR
Supply voltage
Power consumption
AC
DC
Operating temp
Operating humidity
Measuring range
Analog output
(jumper selectable)
RLD-134A
8
(20.32)
WARM-UP
READY WARNING
ALARM
RESET
CAL.
4.5
(11.43)
ALARM
Loop resistance
Current
Voltage
Alarm relay output
(jumper selectable)
Alarm relay time delay
(jumper selectable)
Alarm relay setpoint
Adjustable
Factory set
Accuracy
Long term drift
24 VAC/VDC ±10%
325 mA
250 mA
32° to 158°F (0° to 70°C)
10% to 95% noncondensing
0-1000 ppm
4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC,
0-10 VDC, 1-6 VDC
3001 max
5 k1 min
SPDT 0.5A 24 VAC/VDC
Manual reset (latched)
Auto reset (unlatched)
15 min, 30 min, 1 hr, 2 hr
0-1000 ppm
500 ppm
±5%
8%
267
SPECIALTY SENSORS
FEATURES
SPECIALTY SENSORS
REFRIGERANT LEAK DETECTOR
MODEL RLD-134A
WIRING
J4
15 min
30 min
1 hr
2 hrs
Setpoint X 100
0
10
8
2
4
Alarm
Relay
Fuse
F2
Alarm Relay Setpoint Dial
(factory set at 500 ppm)
6
GMA 1 AMP
4-20 mA
0-5 VDC
0-10 VDC
1-6 VDC
K1
SPECIALTY SENSORS
Time Delay Selector for Alarm
Relay Output
Analog Output/Signal Selector
Unlatched
Latched
Alarm Relay Output Selector
AC pwr
AC/DC Selector
DC pwr
TB3
NO COM NC
Alarm
TB1
TB2
GND
Analog
Output
-
+
Power Fuse
Power
GMA 1 AMP
F1
- +
24 VAC/VDC
– Analog
+ Output
INSTALLATION / OPERATION
Installation
The RLD-134A is suitable for indoor use only. Mount the unit as close to the source of potential refrigerant leaks as
possible. Some recommended considerations are as follows:
1. Mount approximately 3' (0.9m) from floor (refrigerants are heavier than air and will settle on the floor).
2. Mount at least 5' (1.5m) from exhaust fans (direct airflow across sensing element will affect accuracy).
3. If used in refrigeration pits, mount 1' (0.3m) above floor.
Operation
To test operation, place a small amount of alcohol below the sensing element. The analog output signal should
increase.
Note: Make all connections in accordance with national and local codes.
CAUTION: Not to be used as a life safety device.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
RLD-134A
170-0832
268
DESCRIPTION
Refrigerant leak detector
Replacement sensing element
SPECIALTY SENSORS
DAMPER POSITION SWITCHES
TS-470 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The TS-470 Series Damper Position Switches consist
of an encapsulated mercury switch mounted on a 1/2"
(1.27 cm) damper crank arm. They can be mounted on
a damper control shaft to give an indication of opened
or closed damper position. The TS-470 Series switch
contacts are normal when the cable end of the switch is
horizontal or above. The switches make when the cable
end drops more than 15 degrees below horizontal. The
TS-470-2 has two SPDT switches, and the TS-470-P
has plenum-rated cable and stainless steel housing.
TS-470
FEATURES
Easy to install
Maintenance free
Easily adjustable
3' (0.91m) 18/3 cable
SPECIFICATIONS
Switch type
Switch rating
TS-470, TS-470-2
TS-470-P
Switch angle
Operating temp
Wiring
TS-470, TS-470-2
TS-470-P
Mercury content
WIRING / DIMENSIONS
Encapsulated mercury
switch SPDT
in
(cm)
2A @ 120 VAC
1A @ 240 VAC
1A @ 120 VAC, 24 VAC/VDC
15 degrees below horizontal
the switch makes
1/2" (1.27 cm) damper
crank arm
-30° to 130°F (-34° to 54°C)
0.5 dia
(1.27)
Green - common
Black - normally closed
White - normally open
Black - common
Blue - normally closed
Red - normally open
0.03 cc
4.375
(11.11)
TS-470
Mounting
SPECIALTY SENSORS
•
•
•
•
Cord 3'
(91.4)
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
TS-470
TS-470-2
TS-470-P
CA-1
DESCRIPTION
Damper position switch with SPDT switch
Damper position switch with two SPDT switches
Damper position switch with SPDT switch, stainless
steel housing, and plenum-rated cable
RELATED PRODUCT
1" Crank arm for TS-470 mounting
269
SPECIALTY SENSORS
WHISKER SWITCH
LS45M91B11
DESCRIPTION
The LS45M91B11 “Whisker” Switch is a multidirectional metal limit switch. This spring-rod “whisker” version
allows flexibility when applying to damper, valve, and
other HVAC applications that need position sensing.
LS45M91B11
DIMENSIONS
in
(mm)
.063
(16)
0.05
(Ø 13)
.275
(Ø 7.0)
SPECIFICATIONS
5.12
(130)
Contacts
Switch rating
SPECIALTY SENSORS
7.87
(200)
Enclosure
Certifications
One N.O. and one N.C.
10A @ 24 VAC
5A @ 120 VAC
2.8A @ 24 VDC
NEMA 4X
UL Listed, CE, CSA
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
DESCRIPTION
LS45M91B11 Whisker-style metal limit switch
270
SPECIALTY SENSORS
DAMPER POSITION INDICATOR
MODEL PQ-1001
DESCRIPTION
The Model PQ-1001 Damper Position Indicator consists of a potentiometer (5 k1, 2W) mounted in a standard handibox and supplied with mounting hardware
and linkage assembly. The indicator can be mounted on
the inside or outside of a duct. The 5 k1 potentiometer
can be used as a voltage divider for voltage signals, or it
can be coupled to a Model VTI-1 voltage to current converter for 4-20 mA current output.
Push
Rod
PQ-1001-4 Installed
Swivels
FEATURES
• Resistance or 4-20 mA feedback signal
• True mechanical position feedback
• Inside or outside duct mounting
Potentiometer
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
0.18
(0.46)
4
(10.16) 3.81
(9.68)
0.18
(0.46)
3.5
(8.89)
3.12
(7.92)
4.56
(11.58)
1.75
(4.45)
#12-24 x 1/2" Large Panhead Screws
2.12
(5.38)
3.87
(9.83)
SPECIFICATIONS
Potentiometer
Power
4-20 mA version only
Operating temp
5 k1, 2W
24 VDC @ 50 mA
30° to 160°F
(-1° to 71°C)
Mounting
PQ-1001-3
PQ-1001-4
Enclosure
Outside of duct
Inside of duct
NEMA 1
271
SPECIALTY SENSORS
PQ-1001-3
Crank Arms
SPECIALTY SENSORS
DAMPER POSITION INDICATOR
MODEL PQ-1001
MOUNTING
The PQ-1001-3 mounts outside of a duct, and the PQ-1001-4 mounts on the damper frame inside a duct. When
mounted on the outside of a duct, a crank arm (furnished) is attached to a damper blade pin extension. When
mounted on the inside of a duct, a leaf connection (furnished) is attached to the damper blade using two 12-24 x
1/2'' self-tapping screws (also furnished). Two additional 12-24 x 1/2'' screws are supplied with inside mounting
models for securing the mounting bracket and handibox to the damper frame. Attach the connecting rod and other
linkage according to the Adjusting Instructions below.
WIRING
The PQ-1001 is supplied with 6" (15.24 cm) pigtail leads of color-coded wire. Use wire nuts or other approved
connectors to wire the damper position indicator into a system. All wiring must be in accordance with applicable
electrical code requirements.
24 VDC
Supply
(blue)
SPECIALTY SENSORS
Damper
Damper
PQ-1001
PQ-1001
(purple)
(blue)
(white/green)
(purple)
(white/green)
V Sig IN
UAD-R1
+24 PWR
COM
(blue)
(white/green)
(purple)
REF V OUT
MA OUT
Standard
Voltage/Resistive
Configuration
VTI-1
LOAD
PQ-1001
4-20 mA
Configuration
with VTI-1 Option
PQ-1001-VTI
ADJUSTING INSTRUCTIONS
1. The PQ-1001 bracket should be mounted to the damper frame using the mounting screws provided. DO NOT
ATTACH THE LINKAGE.
2. Turn the shaft on the PQ-1001 fully clockwise (while facing the PQ-1001 shaft and pot).
3. The resistance between the blue and purple wires should be approximately zero. The 4-20 mA output should be 4 mA.
4. Close the damper blades. Depending upon whether the PQ-1001 is mounted inside or outside the duct,
attach the linkage between the leaf connection, or damper blade pin extension, and the PQ-1001.
5. Position and adjust the linkage to provide more than 90 angular degrees of rotation at the PQ-1001 shaft.
6. Open the damper blades to the fully open position.
7. The resistance read between the blue and purple wires represents the fully open damper. For 4-20 mA applications,
adjust the span potentiometer to indicate 20 mA.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
PQ-1001-3
PQ-1001-4
PQ-1001-3-VTI-1
PQ-1001-4-VTI-1
272
DESCRIPTION
Resistance/Voltage divider unit, mounts outside of duct
Resistance/Voltage divider unit, mounts inside of duct
4-20 mA output unit, mounts outside of duct
4-20 mA output unit, mounts inside of duct
SPECIALTY SENSORS
PH TRANSMITTER / CONTROLLER
MODEL 8205
DESCRIPTION
This intelligent pH monitoring system consists of a looppowered transmitter with LCD display, programming
keypad, and pH electrode in a single compact package.
The system provides a 4-20 mA output and digital display of the pH of aqueous solutions. Temperature compensation is accomplished with a platinum RTD built
into the electrode for exceptional accuracy.
FEATURES
• Compact all-in-one construction
• Transmitter or transmitter/controller
• Loop-powered (two-wire) 4-20 mA transmitter
• Optional dual relay outputs (24 VDC power
required) for setpoint control
• 0.2% accuracy with temperature compensation
• Eight-character LCD display
• Menu-driven configuration and calibration
APPLICATION
Applications include water treatment, cooling tower
water, swimming pools, chemical feed control, and
many others.
8205-T-K
OPERATION
Each unit is delivered with complete installation/operation instructions.
Note: Routine maintenance is required to maintain
accuracy and response time of any pH electrode.
Life expectancy of the electrode is 6 months to 1
year, at which time electrode replacement is
required.
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply voltage
Power
Range
Output
Optional relays
Relay contacts
Ambient temp
Ambient humidity
Fluid temp
18-30 VDC
0.2 VA transmitter
2.0 VA transmitter/controller
0-14 pH
4-20 mA, 6001 max @ 24 VDC
2-SPST, menu-selectable N.O.
or N.C., selectable trip and time
delay
3A @ 230 VAC max
32° to 140°F (0° to 60°C)
99% noncondensing
32° to 194°F (0° to 90°C)
Fluid pressure limit
Probe
Enclosure
Tee
Weight
Transmitter
Transmitter/
Controller
Adapter tee
Buffer solution
87 psig max (600 kPa)
Glass-encased zircon dioxide
diaphragm with gel electrolyte
reference
NEMA 4X (IP65)
Schedule 80 PVC, 1" NPT
1.4 lb (0.63 kg)
1.6 lb (0.72 kg)
0.3 lb (0.14 kg)
0.8 lb (0.36 kg)
273
SPECIALTY SENSORS
While the compact all-in-one transmitter version of the
Model 8205 is the most economical choice for pH monitoring and control with a BAS, a controller version is
also available (24 VDC power required) that includes
dual relays for alarming or direct control of valves or
equipment. Both versions mount conveniently with the
handy 1" NPT adapter tee.
SPECIALTY SENSORS
PH TRANSMITTER / CONTROLLER
MODEL 8205
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
1.88
(4.8)
3.44
(8.7)
1.5
(3.8)
1.63
(4.1)
3.44
(8.7)
1.13
(2.9)
1.25
(3.2)
1.44
(3.7)
SPECIALTY SENSORS
CHECKOUT / CALIBRATION
An initial field calibration is required, as well as periodic cleaning and recalibration. Instructions are included with
each shipment, and calibration buffer solutions are included in the complete installation kit (8205-T-K or 8205-C-K).
WIRING
18-30 VDC
18-30 VDC
4-20 mA
Signal
4-20 mA
Signal
Not Used
1234
8205-C Notes:
pH Electrode Connector
RTD Connector
8205-T
B
A
1234
1. Remove jumper from terminals 1 and 3,
if using the 4-20 mA output on an 8205-C.
2. A separate power supply (isolated) is
strongly recommended for the 8205-C.
If power supply is shared with another
device (BAS, PLC, etc.), the 8205-C must
be configured as current sourcing (switch1
position A) or sinking (position B) for proper
operation of the 4-20 mA output as shown
in the instruction manual.
Switch 1
pH Electrode Connector
RTD Connector
56
78
Relay2
N.O.
Contacts
Relay1
N.O. Contacts
8205-C
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
8205-T-K
8205-C-K
8205-T
8205-C
DESCRIPTION
Compact pH transmitter with electrode, 1" NPT PVC adapter tee, and buffer solutions
Compact pH transmitter/controller with electrode, 1" NPT PVC adapter tee, and
buffer solutions
Compact pH transmitter with electrode only
Compact pH transmitter/controller with electrode only
8205-E
8200-M1
8205-B
428720C
428744G
ACCESSORIES
Replacement electrode for 8205-T or 8205-C
1" NPT PVC mounting adapter tee
Set of buffer solutions pH 4, 7, and 10, 8.45 oz (250 mL)
1" NPT brass adapter tee
1" NPT stainless steel adapter tee
274
SPECIALTY SENSORS
CONDUCTIVITY TRANSMITTER / CONTROLLER
MODEL 8225
DESCRIPTION
This intelligent conductivity monitoring system consists
of a loop-powered transmitter with LCD display, programming keypad, and conductivity electrode in a single
compact package. The system provides a 4-20 mA output and digital display of the conductivity of aqueous
solutions. Temperature compensation is accomplished
with a platinum RTD built into the electrode for exceptional accuracy.
FEATURES
SPECIALTY SENSORS
While the compact all-in-one transmitter version of the
Model 8225 is the most economical choice for conductivity monitoring and control with a BAS, a controller version is also available (24 VDC power required) that
includes dual relays for alarming or direct control of
valves or equipment. Both versions mount conveniently
with the handy 1" NPT adapter tee.
8225-C-K
•
•
•
•
Compact all-in-one construction
Transmitter or transmitter/controller
Loop powered (two-wire) 4-20 mA transmitter
Optional dual relay outputs (24 VDC power
required) for setpoint control
• 3% typical accuracy with temperature compensation
• Eight-character LCD display
• Menu-driven configuration and calibration
APPLICATION
OPERATION
Applications include water treatment, cleaning water
monitoring, cooling tower water monitoring, and a host
of others in which aqueous conductivity must be monitored or controlled.
Each unit is delivered with complete installation/operation instructions. Properly applied, the conductivity
probe does not require maintenance. The unit must be
mounted vertically.
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply voltage
Power
Range
Output
Optional relays
Relay contacts
Ambient temp
18-30 VDC
0.2 VA transmitter
4.0 VA transmitter/controller
5 µS/cm to 10 mS/cm with
standard (K=1.0) electrode
(others available)
4-20 mA, 4001 max @ 24 VDC
2-SPST, menu-selectable N.O.
or N.C., selectable trip and
0-3 min. time delay
3A @ 230 VAC max
32° to 140°F (0° to 60° C)
Ambient humidity
Fluid temp
99% noncondensing
32° to 212°F (0° to 100°C)
248°F (120°C) with metal tee
145 psig max (1000 kPa)
Graphite, K=1.0 standard
NEMA 4X (IP65)
Sch. 80 PVC, 1" NPT
Fluid pressure limit
Probe
Enclosure
Tee
Weight
Transmitter
1.4 lb (0.63 kg)
Transmitter/Controller 1.6 lb (0.72 kg)
Adapter tee
0.3 lb (0.14 kg)
275
SPECIALTY SENSORS
CONDUCTIVITY TRANSMITTER / CONTROLLER
MODEL 8225
DIMENSIONS
1.88
(4.78)
in
(cm)
1.5
(3.81)
3.44
(8.74)
1.44
(3.66)
SPECIALTY SENSORS
3.44
(8.74)
1.25
(3.18)
2.75
(6.99)
1.13
(2.87)
WIRING
18-30 VDC
18-30 VDC
4-20 mA
Signal
4-20 mA
Signal
Not Used
A
1234
B
1234
8225-C Notes:
Switch 1
Conductivity
Electrode Connector
RTD Connector
1. Remove jumper from terminals 1 and 3,
if using the 4-20 mA output on an 8225-C.
2. A separate power supply (isolated) is
strongly recommended for the 8225-C.
If power supply is shared with another
device (BAS, PLC, etc.), the 8225-C must
be configured as current sourcing (switch1
position A) or sinking (position B) for proper
operation of the 4-20 mA output as shown
in the instruction manual.
8225-T
Conductivity
Electrode Connector
RTD Connector
56
78
Relay2
N.O.
Contacts
Relay1
N.O.
Contacts
8225-C
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
8225-T-K
8225-C-K
276
8225-T
8225-C
DESCRIPTION
Compact conductivity transmitter with electrode and 1" NPT PVC adapter tee
Compact conductivity transmitter/controller with electrode and 1" NPT PVC
adapter tee
Compact conductivity transmitter with electrode only
Compact conductivity transmitter/controller with electrode only
8225-E
8200-M1
428720C
428744G
ACCESSORIES
Replacement electrode for 8225-T or 8225-C (K=1.0)
1" NPT PVC mounting adapter tee
1" NPT brass adapter tee
1" NPT stainless steel adapter tee
SPECIALTY SENSORS
VIBRATION TRANSMITTER / SWITCH
MODEL 550
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
DIMENSIONS
3.44 (8.7)
in
(cm)
0.38
(1.0)
1.0
(2.5)
2 Mounting Holes
5/16" dia
1.0
(2.5)
0.38 (1.0)
6.75
(17.1)
5.25
(13.3)
6.0
(15.2)
Reliable performance
Dual SPDT relay and 4-20 mA output
Easy to install
Two-year warranty
4.06
(10.3)
1.75
(4.4)
4.19
(12.2)
550-X
550
3 Mounting Holes
5/16" dia
SPECIFICATIONS
Input power
115 VAC 50/60 Hz
Limits
Limit #2
(shutdown)
Set at a velocity level in inches/sec
Limit #1 (alarm) Set as a percent of Limit #2
(shutdown)
Velocity range
0.1-2.75 in/sec (2.5-70 mm/sec)
Frequency range 2-1000 Hz (120-60,000 rpm)
Time delay
1-30 sec
Limit output
SPDT relay
5A @ 125 VAC; 5A @ 28 VDC
Analog output
4-20 mA DC 5001 max load
resistance
Setting accuracy ±5%
Vibration-sensitive
axis
Perpendicular to the base,
omnidirectional mounting
Remote reset
Enclosure
Weight
Mounting
Terminals
Temp limits
Dimensions
550
550-X
Circuit closure between latch and
common will reset both outputs
Rugged, water- and dust-tight
cast aluminum NEMA 3, 4, and 12;
optional explosionproof
enclosures available
3.75 lb (1.7 kg)
1/4" hardware, 3 mounting holes
Accept #12 AWG wire
-30° to 165°F (-34° to 74°C)
3 .44"W x 5.937"H x 3.88"D
(8.73 x 15.09 x 9.84 cm)
4.81"W x 7.13"H x 4.5"D
(12.2 x 18.1 x 11.4 cm)
277
SPECIALTY SENSORS
The Model 550 Vibration Transmitter/Switch provides
low cost, reliable vibration protection for rotating
machinery operating within the range of 120-60,000
rpm. The switch's vibration sensor, mounted perpendicular to the unit’s base, responds to the velocity (in/sec)
signal and effects automatic shutdown or alarm when
preset limits are exceeded. The unit may be mounted
with the sensitive axis in any plane (horizontal, vertical
or axial), even in an inverted position. Two limit setpoints are provided. One is set for the maximum allowable vibration (in/sec), while the other is set for a percentage of that setting, which trips the alarm relay when
that percentage is reached. A built-in, adjustable time
delay prevents triggering due to transient vibrations. The
switch can be wired for automatic reset when vibration
falls below setpoint, or it can be wired for latch and
remote reset. The unit has a 4-20 mA output that may
be used with a panel meter or data logger, permitting
analysis of vibration trends. Once the switch has been
installed and the limits set, it requires no attention. The
Model 550 is enclosed in heavy, water-tight, cast-aluminum housing. Explosionproof housings are available.
SPECIALTY SENSORS
VIBRATION TRANSMITTER / SWITCH
MODEL 550
WIRING
SPECIALTY SENSORS
The wiring access is through the 3/4" NPT conduit hole
on the side of the switch enclosure. Wiring subject to
physical damage should be adequately protected.
When installing electrical conduit, a short length (12")
of flexible conduit must be used between the vibration
switch and an associated junction box. This construction will provide some vibration isolation in the conduit
line. Conduit and fittings should conform to the environment of the vibration switch location. In hazardous
locations, the proper explosionproof fittings should be
used. Weather-resistant or rain-tight fittings should be
used to protect the switch wiring from a humid or corrosive atmosphere.
4-20 mA
Signal
4-20mA
Mute
Reset (N.O.)
Latch
Common
Jumper for
Non-Latching
Operation
C
Limit #1
Alarm
N/C
Form C Contacts
to Alarm and
Shutdown Circuits
N/O
C
Limit #2
Shutdown
N/C
N/O
L2
115 VAC 50/60 Hz
L1
Note: Make all connections in accordance with national
and local codes.
OPERATION
TYPICAL INSTALLATIONS
The 550 is a self-contained, vibration protection limit
switch. It guards against destructive levels of vibration
by tripping a relay that has a user-adjustable limit setpoint in terms of vibration velocity (in/sec). This relay
output is connected to an alarm or control system to
provide a warning or shutdown. It mounts at the monitoring point and is enclosed in a watertight, heavy castaluminum housing. Terminals are provided for remote
or manual reset. A 4-20 mA output for recording or
metering can connect to a remote readout panel meter
or BAS controller.
VS
VS
VS
VS
Reciprocating
Compressor
Centrifugal Compressor
VS
VS
Y-Type Compressor
CAUTION: You must ensure that the switch is
rigidly attached to the monitoring point for the
proper "sensing" of the vibration.
VS
VS
Vertical Pump
VS
VS
Engine Gear Compressor
VS
Cooling Tower Fan
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
RANGE
NUMBER
OF LIMITS
ENCLOSURE
550
0.1 to 2.75 in/sec
2
NEMA 3, 4, 12 Aluminum
550-X
0.1 to 2.75 in/sec
2
NEMA 7CD, 9EFG
278
SPECIALTY SENSORS
VIBRATION TRANSMITTER
MODEL 140T
DESCRIPTION
A low cost, highly accurate and rugged vibration transmitter, the Model 140T is ideal for use with all
machines, even those that previously may have been
considered uneconomical to monitor.
The Model 140T easily mounts by use of a standard
1/4-20 stud. It is a two-wire, loop-powered transmitter
that can feed the vibration level of operating machinery
to a data logger, milliamp monitor, or process control
computer. Solid-state accelerometer and circuit design
provide a 4-20 mA signal proportional to vibration velocity. Intrinsically safe, it can safely be used in hazardous
environments when coupled with a Model MTL7206
intrinsic safety barrier.
• Reliable performance
• Easy to install
• 4-20 mA signal compatible with most BAS
controllers
• Intrinsically safe Class I, Division 1, Groups
A, B, C; Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G
• Two-year warranty
SPECIALTY SENSORS
FEATURES
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
1" NPT
0.38 (0.95)
1.75
(4.44)
APPLICATION
Vibration monitoring can provide help in alerting for the
destructive effects of vibration on mechanical system
equipment, such as the following:
•
•
•
•
1.13
(2.86)
Air handler fans
Cooling tower fans
Pumps
Compressors
1.31 dia
(3.33)
Mounting Connection
1/4-20 0.38D (0.95)
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply voltage (Vs)
Output
Range
Model 140T-1
Model 140T-2
Frequency range
Accuracy
12-50 VDC, black=negative,
red=positive, with reverse
voltage protection
4-20 mA, proportional to
vibration level
0-1 in/sec vibration
0-2 in/sec vibration
7-1300 Hz ±3% (420-78,000 rpm)
5% to 10% of scale
Isolation
Conduit connection
Max load
resistance
Temp range
Environment rating
Case
Mounting
Weight
500V, circuit-to-case
1" MNPT
RL = 50 (Vs-12) ohms
6001 @ 24 VDC
-4° to 185°F (-20° to 85°C)
NEMA 4, weatherproof
Cadmium-plated steel
1/4''-20 stud
1.4 lb (0.64 kg)
279
SPECIALTY SENSORS
VIBRATION TRANSMITTER
MODEL 140T
INSTALLATION
The mounting orientation can be in any position. This position should be in an area for the best vibration signal definition or where there is a good transfer of the machine's (fan’s, pump’s, etc.) vibrations. The best location will vary
from machine to machine. The location of the transmitter should be selected carefully. When selecting the site for
the mounting location, it is helpful to survey the site with the aid of a vibration meter.
140T
4-20 mA
Signal
+
12-50 VDC
Power
Standard Wiring
Safe
Area
Note: Make all connections in accordance with
national and local codes.
20-35 VDC
Power
MTL7206
IS Barrier
2
5
3
6
140T
-
1
4
4-20 mA
+
Maximum Cable
C=0.08 µF
L= 4.0 mH
-
Hazardous
Area
+
Wiring subject to physical damage should be
adequately protected. When installing electrical
conduit, it is recommended that a short length
(12") of flexible conduit be used between the
transmitter and an associated junction box. This
construction will provide some vibration isolation
in the conduit line. Conduit and fittings should
conform to the environment of the transmitter
location. Weather-resistant or rain-tight fittings
should be used to protect the transmitter wiring
from a humid or corrosive atmosphere.
+
SPECIALTY SENSORS
WIRING
4-20 mA
Signal
Ground Here Only
Intrinsically Safe Wiring
CAUTION: Ensure that the transmitter is rigidly attached to the monitoring point for the proper sensing of
the vibration.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
140T-1
140T-2
RANGE
0-1 in/sec
0-2 in/sec
Note:Each application should be evaluated on an individual basis. Consult equipment
manufacturers for specific details concerning safe vibration levels.
280
SPECIALTY SENSORS
WEATHER INSTRUMENTS
A70 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The A70 Series Weather Instruments with signal conditioning, provide a 4-20 mA output proportional to wind
speed (A70-SL), wind direction (A70-DL), barometric
pressure (A70-PL), or rainfall (A70-RL). The A70
Series provides the user with weather information that
can be used for monitoring purposes or as an input to
control systems.
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
Rugged construction
Reliable operation
Industry standard 4-20 mA output
Track-mounted transmitter
A70-SL
A70-DL
A70-RL
Wind Speed (A70-SL)
The wind speed is measured with a three-cup
anemometer, and a 4-20 mA output signal proportional to 0-100 mph is generated. Accuracy from 3-9
mph is ±1 mph; above 10 mph, accuracy is ±5% of
reading. The A70-SL is supplied with 60' (18.28m) of
cable and a 10" (25.40 cm) stub mast for mounting
the anemometer.
A96
Lightning Arrestor
ASSEMBLY
Wind Direction (A70-DL)
Wind direction is measured with a precision potentiometric wind vane that produces a signal proportional
to the azimuth of the wind. This signal is converted to
a 4-20 mA output over 0° to 360°. The vane has a 4°
deadband on either side of north. The A70-DL is provided with 60' (18.28m) of cable and an S mast for
mounting.
Barometric Pressure (A70-PL)
The A70-PL senses barometric pressure by an integrated silicon, absolute pressure sensor with integral
temperature compensation. It outputs a 4-20 mA signal over 27'' to 31'' Hg. Accuracy is ±0.05'' Hg. The
sensor is mounted to the transmitter board, and
3/16'' (0.48 cm) tube may be attached to the sensor
to provide remote pressure sensing.
Rainfall (A70-RL)
The A70-RL utilizes tipping bucket technology to
measure rainfall and outputs a 4-20 mA signal over a
range of 0" to 1'' (0 to 2.5 cm). When the output
reaches 20 mA (1''), it resets to 4 mA, and the cycle
begins over again. Accuracy is ±4%. The sensor
includes 50' (15.24m) of cable.
SPECIALTY SENSORS
APPLICATION
A76-SD
A76-T10
Tripod Mounting
281
SPECIALTY SENSORS
WEATHER INSTRUMENTS
A70 SERIES
COMMON SPECIFICATIONS
Operating power
Output
Max loop resistance
12-24 VDC, 30 mA max
4-20 mA
(operating voltage -10) x 501
7001 @ 24 VDC
±1%
Signal conditioner accuracy
WIRING
Wind Speed
Anemometer
Red
Dot
X3
1 2 3 4
24 VDC
Power
Supply
Center
Wind Direction
Terminal
Vane
+
-
+
A70-SL
SPECIALTY SENSORS
-
X2
1 2 3 4 5
24 VDC
Power
Supply
A70-DL
4-20 mA
Signal
4-20 mA
Signal
Wind Speed
Wind Direction
Rain
Gauge
No
Polarity
+
24 VDC
Power
Supply
1
X1
X4
2
24 VDC
Power
Supply
A70-PL
2
1
1
X1 +
2
A70-RL
4-20 mA
Signal
Barometric Pressure
4-20 mA
Signal
Rainfall
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
A70-SL
A70-DL
A70-PL
A70-SDL
A70-SDPL
A70-RL
DESCRIPTION
Wind speed transmitter
Wind direction transmitter
Barometric pressure transmitter
Wind speed/direction transmitters
Wind speed/direction and barometric pressure transmitters
Rainfall transmitter
A76-T10
A76-SD
A96-100P
A96-200P
ACCESSORIES
Tripod tower with mast (10'/3m high total) for wind speed and direction sensors
Mounting bracket for wind speed and direction transmitters
Lighting arrestor for wind speed sensor (includes pipe-mounting clamp)
Lighting arrestor for wind direction sensor (includes pipe-mounting clamp)
282
SPECIALTY SENSORS
RAIN / SNOW SENSOR CONTROLLER
MODEL DS-2B
DESCRIPTION
The Model DS-2B Rain/Snow Sensor Controller provides reliable rain and snow detection and control for
commercial or residential applications. It detects rain to
control motorized windows, roof vents, window wipers,
etc., and detects snow to control snow melt and deicing
systems for wheelchair ramps, stairways, driveways,
loading docks, roofs, etc. The Model DS-2B is a low
cost, easy-to-install, energy-saving alternative to thermostats, manual switches, or timer controls. It can be
used stand-alone or in combination with building
automation systems.
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
Low cost
Full 30A @ 240 VAC N.O. load contact rating
UL listed and CE approved
Field strap for 100-120 or 200-240 VAC power
Replaceable precipitation sensor element
Override switch for manual-on, auto,
standby/reset
Remote operation up to 1000' (305m)
Adjustable temperature trigger point
Adjustable delay-off time
Activate or disable low temperature cutout
Smart manual-on operates for one delay-off cycle
SPECIALTY SENSORS
•
•
•
•
•
•
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply power
Peak power consumption
Contact ratings
Load
Monitor
Relay life expectancy
Enclosure
Mounting
Dimensions
100-120/200-240 VAC,
field selectable
15W
30A @ 240 VAC
24 VAC/VDC, 400 mA,
10W total
Min 100,000 cycles
Two-gang PVC
NEMA 3R
3/4" rigid conduit or
Four mounting tabs
7.0"H x 4.75"W x 2.75"D
(17.78 x 12.07 x 6.99 cm)
Weight
Wiring
Power
Load
Remote control
Operating temp
Trigger temp
Delay-off
Sensor
Controller
2 lb (0.91 kg)
18" (45.72 cm) leads
#14 AWG
#10 AWG
#22 AWG, five-wire cable
-40° to 185°F (-40° to 85°C)
34°, 39°, or 44°F (1.1°, 3.9°,
or 6.6°C), field selectable
2 min.
30-90 min., field selectable
283
SPECIALTY SENSORS
RAIN / SNOW SENSOR CONTROLLER
MODEL DS-2B
OPERATION
The DS-2B senses precipitation and outdoor air temperature. It also provides on/off control for direct operation of
rain or snow control loads and on/off status indication to a building automation system or other light load. It installs
out in the open. Rain and snow will fall directly on the top of the enclosure where the sensing element is located.
When precipitation is present, in the form of rain or snow, the load and monitor relay contacts close based on the
adjustable settings for the trigger (setpoint). When precipitation stops, the contacts remain closed until the adjustable
delay-off timer expires.
Factory settings are 39°F (3.9°C) trigger point, and the delay-off timer is enabled and set for one hour. Also the low
temperature cutout is disabled, so the trigger will switch even below 15°F (-9.4°C).
SPECIALTY SENSORS
A three-position toggle switch on the housing allows manual override. The manual-on position turns on the control
(closes the relay outputs). The automatic position allows automatic control based on the adjustable settings. If
switched to manual-on then back to automatic within two seconds, the control will execute one delay-off cycle. The
toggle switch also has a standby/reset position, which turns off the control and resets the off timer. These manual
override functions may also be accomplished remotely by wiring dry contacts to the remote control/monitoring cable
(see Wiring below).
WIRING
Input L1
Power L2
GND
(black)
(white)
(green)
Monitor
Contact
400 mA max
@ 24 VAC/DC
(red)
(orange)
Load
Contact
N.O.
30A
@
240V
(black)
Remote
ManualOn
N.O.
(green)
Load
Output
Remote
Standby/
Reset
(white)
(red)
(red)
(orange)
DS-2B
(red)
Monitor
Contact
Output
Pilot Duty
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
DS-2B
MG-1
284
DESCRIPTION
Rain/Snow sensor controller with remote control/monitor cable
Precipitation grid replacement kit
SPECIALTY SENSORS
ULTRASONIC LEVEL TRANSMITTER
LU SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The LU Series Ultrasonic Level Transmitter provides non-contact measurement of fluid levels. Models
are available in five distance ranges from 4' to 32' (1.2
to 10m) and come in cable only or conduit connection
models. The unit is easily calibrated in seconds using
the calibration wire, a DC power supply, and a flat
reflective target such as a wall.The cable-connected
unit is rated NEMA 6X, and the conduit-connected unit
is rated NEMA 4X.
LU11/LU13/LU14
(cable
connection)
FEATURES
LU05/LU12
(conduit
connection)
SPECIALTY SENSORS
• 4', 10', 16', 25', or 32' (1.2, 3, 5, 8, or 10m) ranges
available
• Digital infinity surface mapping for extreme accuracy and reliability
• PC/ABS enclosure rated NEMA 4X or 6X
• Minimal deadband optimizes the filling capacity
of tanks and sumps
• Fail-safe intelligence with diagnostic feedback for
easy troubleshooting
• 3" (7.6 cm) beam diameter for applications with
restricted space
APPLICATIONS
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cooling tower sumps
Tanks
Wells
Ice storage
Water sumps
Process vessels
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply voltage
14-28 VDC
Loop resistance
5001 @ 24VDC
Signal output
4-20 mA, two-wire
Range
LU05
2" to 4' (5 cm to 1.2m)
LU11
4" to 16.4' (10 cm to 5m)
LU12
4" to 9.8' (10 cm to 3m)
LU13
8" to 26.2' (20 cm to 8m)
LU14
12" to 32.8' (30 cm to 10m)
Accuracy
±0.15% of span in air
Resolution
0.039"(1 mm)
Beam width
LU05/12
2" (5.1 cm) dia.
LU11/13/14
3" (7.6 cm) dia.
Deadband (from sensor)
LU05/11/12
4" (5 cm)
LU13
8" (10 cm)
LU14
12" (20 cm)
LED indication
Power, calibration, and
diagnostics
Memory
Non-volatile
Calibration
Target, calibration wire
Fail safety
Electronics temp
Temp compensation
Pressure
Reverts to 22 mA
-40° to 160°F (-40° to 71°C)
Automatic
30 psig (206.9 kPa) @ 25°C,
derated @ 1.667 psig
(11.5 kPa) per °C above 25°C
Enclosure rating
Cable connected type
NEMA 6X (IP67); conduit
type NEMA 4X (IP65)
Enclosure material
PC/ABS FR
Transmitter material PVDF Kynar
Cable jacket material Polypropylene
Cable type
Three-conductor shielded
LU05 two-conductor shielded
Cable length
10' (3m)
Process mount
LU05/12
1" NPT
LU11/13/14
2" NPT
Approvals
CE compliance,
EN 61326 EMC
285
SPECIALTY SENSORS
ULTRASONIC LEVEL TRANSMITTER
LU SERIES
CALIBRATION
DIMENSIONS
4.1" (105mm)
(red)
(black)
(white)
Shield
2.9" (74mm)
2" NPT
2.4" (61mm)
1.7" (44mm)
10' (3.0m) Cable
LU11/LU13/LU14
4.1" (105mm)
1" NPT
2.4" (61mm)
0.7"
(17mm)
1.4" (37mm)
SPECIALTY SENSORS
10' (3.0m) Cable
(red)
(black)
(white)
Shield
LU05/LU12
0.5" (13mm)
LU12 only
4 mA Calibration (Empty Tank LU05/11/12/13)
1. Power down the transmitter
2. Position the transmitter from the target the exact distance for a 4 mA reading.
3. Connect the white wire to the black wire.
LU05-Reverse red and black wire.
4. Add power to the transmitter.
5. Wait until you see a flashing LED on the transmitter.
6. Power down the transmitter.
7. Disconnect the white wire. LU05-Return red and
black wire to original polarity.
8. Return power to the transmitter.
20 mA Calibration (Full Tank LU05/11/12/13)
1. Power down the transmitter.
2. Position the transmitter from the target the
exact distance for a 20 mA reading.
3. Connect the white wire to the red wire.
4. Add power to the transmitter.
5. Wait until you see a flashing LED on the
transmitter.
6. Power down the transmitter.
7. Disconnect the white wire.
8. Return power to the transmitter.
Note: LU05 20 mA fixed at deadband of 2".
WIRING
The LU Series requires 14-28 VDC power and a load that receives a 4-20 mA current input. Connect the red wire of
the transmitter to the positive VDC terminal on the power supply. Connect the black wire on the transmitter to the (+)
terminal on the load. Connect the (–) of the load to the (–) of the power supply.
Shield
(white - calibration wire)
(black)
+ 4-20 mA
(red)
Signal
LU Series
24 VDC
Power
Supply
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
LU
LU
DESCRIPTION
Ultrasonic level probe
SENSOR RANGE
05
4' (1.2m) range
12
10' (3m) range
16' (5m) range
11
13
25' (8m) range
32' (10m) range
14
OPTIONAL BRACKET
5001 Cable type
5101 Conduit connection
– No bracket
B With mounting bracket
12
5001
Example: LU12-5001 Ultrasonic level probe
with 10' range, cable type connection
RELATED PRODUCTS
LM50-1001-1
1" Bracket for LU05/12
LM50-1001
2" Bracket for LU11/13/14
286
SPECIALTY SENSORS
WATER DETECTOR
MODEL WD-1B
DESCRIPTION
The Model WD-1B Water Detector features gold-plated
probes and microchip technology for dependable detection of
conductive liquids. The Model WD-1B can be operated from
11-27 VAC/VDC. For application flexibility, SPDT contacts are
provided to connect to a monitoring system. A heightadjustable, cast-aluminum, weatherproof enclosure is standard.
A green LED visible outside the box indicates power. A red
LED indicates water detected. The Model WD-1B is also available with an external tape style sensor, the Model WD-2-T.
FEATURES
Weatherproof enclosure
Easy to install
SPDT alarm contacts
11-27 VAC/VDC (50/60 Hz)
Reliable operation
LEDs for power and alarm indication (green, red)
Adjustable detection level
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
0.12
(0.32)
OPERATION
The Model WD-1B can be used with any contact-closure monitoring panel. The SPDT contacts may be wired normally open
or normally closed, allowing wiring flexibility to handle most
installations.
2.75
(6.99)
LED
Window
Gasketed
SS Cover
4.5
(11.43)
1/2" FNPT
Conduit
Connection
2.0
(5.08)
0.31 (0.79)
MOUNTING
Secure by applying a silicone adhesive to the mounting feet
and placing the sensor in the area to be protected. For more
permanent installations, fasten the sensor using the 0.19"
(0.48 cm) holes provided in the mounting feet with #6 or #8
screws. The legs are adjustable 1.5" (3.81 cm) for precise
water level signaling.
SPECIFICATIONS
Power requirements
Power consumption
DC
AC
Operating temp
Enclosure
Alarm output
Weight
11-27 VAC/VDC (50/60 Hz)
10 mA typical, 30 mA max
30 mA typical, 70 mA max
32° to 158°F (0° to 70°C)
Cast aluminum, weatherproof
with adjustable legs
SPDT contacts rated,
1A @ 24 VAC/VDC,
1/2A @ 120 VAC
0.98 lb (6.44 kg)
max
1.8
(4.57)
min
0.20
(0.51)
3.75
(9.53 )
1.75
(4.45)
Mounting Holes 0.187" dia (0.47)
Probe height adjustable 0'' to 1.5" (0 to 3.8 cm)
WIRING
The WD-1B is provided with a 1/2" FNPT conduit connection in
the end of the enclosure. Terminations are made to the color-coded
wires with field-supplied connectors. All interconnect wiring should
be 18 AWG or larger.
Input
Voltage
11-27
VAC/DC
(red)
(yellow)
(orange)
(white)
SPDT
Alarm
Contacts
(blue)
If grounded AC power is used, the grounded power supply
lead must be connected to the white lead on the WD-1B,
or the unit may fail to operate.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
WD-1B
WD-1B-C
WD-2-T
DESCRIPTION
Water detector
Water detector with normally energized relay (alarms when
power is lost or water is detected)
RELATED PRODUCTS
Water detector (tape style sensor)
287
SPECIALTY SENSORS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
SPECIALTY SENSORS
TAPE STYLE WATER DETECTOR
MODEL WD-2-T
DESCRIPTION
The Model WD-2-T Tape Style Water Detector uses a selfadhesive sensor tape with copper fiber electrodes and a durable
netted cover for dependable detection of conductive liquids anywhere along the length of tape. The Model WD-2-T includes a
tape integrity self-check feature, which activates a trouble output if the tape is unplugged, broken, or cut. Alarm relays may be
independently jumpered to energize or de-energize upon water
or trouble detection.
SPECIALTY SENSORS
FEATURES
• Weatherproof enclosure
• Designed to minimize external noise pickup
• SPDT alarm and trouble relay contacts
• Relay action jumper selectable
• Continuous tape integrity self check
• Power/Alarm/Trouble status LED (green, red, green/red)
• Sensor tape lengths of 10' (3.1m), 25' (7.6m),
50' (15.2m), 100' (30.5m)
• Floor or under-pipe mounting
• Able to convert to two alarm relays
OPERATION
The Model WD-2-T can be used with any contact-closure monitoring device, wiring to either the normally open or normally
closed contacts for flexibility.
Sensor tape
Sensor electrodes
Weight
0.12
(0.32)
2.75
(6.99)
4.5
(11.43)
11-27 VAC/VDC
0.31 (0.79)
15 mA typical, 60 mA max
35 mA typical, 120 mA max
32° to 158°F (0° to 70°C)
32° to 180°F (0° to 82°C)
Cast aluminum, weatherproof
SPDT, 1A @ 24 VAC/VDC,
1/2A @ 120 VAC
0.1"H x 1.5"W (0.25 x 3.81 cm)
3 mil copper fiber, 1/4" gap
(0.08 mm, 0.64 cm gap)
10'(1.8 lb/0.8 kg), 25' (2.2 lb/1.0 kg),
50' (3.0 lb/1.4 kg),100' (4.6 lb/2.1 kg)
Floor Mounting
Mount the Model WD-2-T box adjacent to the area to be protected. Unroll the sensor tape, remove vinyl release layer
from the back, and hand press onto a surface that is dry and
free of all debris and dust. Note 1: Once the sensor is activated (wet), the contacts will remain in alarm until the netted
cover is completely dry. Note 2: To convert the tape integrity
check relay to a second alarm relay, remove the jumper in
the lower right corner of the circuit board. If the sensing tape
is not used, install the jumper labeled “NO TBL CHK”.
ORDERING INFORMATION
288
Gasketed
SS Cover
0.5 (1.27)
FNPT
Conduit
Connection
1.8
(4.57)
0.75
(1.91)
3.75
(9.53 )
DESCRIPTION
Water detector without sensor tape
Water detector with 10' (3.1m) sensor tape
Water detector with 25' (7.6m) sensor tape
Water detector with 50' (15.2m) sensor tape
Water detector with 100' (30.5m) sensor tape
Pack of 5 mounting clips (space 18"/45.7 cm for
under-pipe installation)
1.75
(4.45)
0.125
(.32)
Mounting Holes 0.187 (0.47) dia
WIRING
The Model WD-2-T is provided with a 1/2" FNPT conduit connection in the end of the enclosure. Terminations are made to
the color-coded wires with field-supplied connectors. All interconnect wiring should be 18 AWG or larger.
(gray)
(brown)
INSTALLATION
MODEL
WD-2
WD-2-T-10
WD-2-T-25
WD-2-T-50
WD-2-T-100
WD-CLIP-5
LED
Window
in (cm)
2.0
(5.08)
SPECIFICATIONS
Power requirements
Power consumption
DC
AC
Operating temp
Tape temp
Enclosure
Alarm and trouble
outputs
DIMENSIONS
(violet)
Input
Voltage
11-27
VAC/DC
SPDT
Trouble
Contacts
(red)
(yellow)
(white)
(orange)
(blue)
SPDT
Alarm
Contacts
The Model WD-2-T tape includes a supervisory resistor mounted
onthe far end for the tape integrity self-check. A self-check disable
jumper is provided inside for use with older or cut-down tapes that
do not have the supervisory resistor.
STATUS INDICATOR
• Green blink
• Red blink
• Red/green alternating
Normal
Water detected
Tape sensor problem
JUMPER POSITIONS
• NO TBL CHK
Install jumper to disable tape trouble check
• OPT
Remove jumper to convert trouble
contacts to second set of alarm contacts
• ALM
(position D) De-energize relay on alarm
(position E) Energize relay on alarm
• TBL
(position D) De-energize relay on trouble
(position E) Energize relay on trouble
SPECIALTY SENSORS
WATER SENSOR / SWITCH
MODEL LD1-24, AQS00660, AQS00661
DESCRIPTION
The Model LD1-24 and the AQS models are small,
electronic control relays for detecting a rising water
level. Inside a waterproof enclosure, each model features a medium-power relay that is operated by water
reaching the trip level and can be used to control alarms
or other equipment.
LD1-24
AQS
WIRING
(red)
(blue)
FEATURES
• Small enough to be used in restricted spaces
• Water detection with accurate switching level
• All components safely encapsulated against
moisture ingress
• Switching capability 5A at 240 VAC
(black)
Control
Circuit
Supply Neutral
Isolated Switch Output
Common
(yellow)
(white)
AQS
Break on Water Rise
Make on Water Rise
Note: Relay is energized to make black and yellow
when powered-up and dry.
SPECIFICATIONS
Power supply
LD1-24
AQS00660
AQS00661
Input power
Switch-off height
Switch-on (reset) level
Output relay rating
3A max Fuse
Supply Voltage
24 VAC, 50/60 Hz
95-254V 50/60 Hz
24 VAC/VDC 50/60 Hz
Approx. 1W
0.43'' (1.1 cm) nominal
0.31'' (0.8 cm) nominal
240V, 50/60 Hz, 5A
24 VDC, 2.5A
AQS00660, AQS00661
95-254V 50/60 Hz
(24V 50/60 Hz or DC)
(red)
(mauve)
N/O
N/C
COM
(pink)
(red)
(grey)
Supply
24 VAC 50/60 Hz
Isolated
Switch
Output
Note: Relay contacts shown in alarm (or power-off) condition.
INSTALLATION / MOUNTING
A piece of double-sided tape is fitted to the base of
each model and can be used to fix it to the surface
being protected. Clean the mounting surface thoroughly to ensure good adhesion. Pull off the protective
paper covering and press the models down into position. The AQS models also have slots for mounting
with #4 self-tapping screws.
LD1-24
WARNING: Although the LD1-24 is totally encapsulated and resistant to water ingress when used
as intended (to detect rising water levels), it
should not be installed where the encapsulated
surface is permanently under water.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
LD1-24
AQS00661
AQS00660
DESCRIPTION
24 VAC water sensor/switch
24 VAC/VDC water sensor/switch
95-254 VAC water sensor/switch
289
SPECIALTY SENSORS
The relay is normally energized when the power supply
is switched on and no water is present. When water
rises up the side of the box to reach the switching level,
the relay drops out. This sequence is failsafe, allowing
each model to be used as a water spillage alarm switch
or to turn off a valve or stop an air conditioning unit
before the water overflows its containment.
SPECIALTY SENSORS
MECHANICAL FLOAT SWITCH
MODEL NG2DW1500B
DESCRIPTION
The Model NG2DW1500B is an economical mechanical float
switch. The switch can be installed by tie-wrapping to a support structure or by adding an external weight to the cable.
The unit is ultrasonically welded and potted for a complete
seal. SPDT contacts are included so the unit can be used to
empty or fill a tank or sump.
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
SPDT mechanical switch
10A contacts rated for 1/4 hp
Float suitable for sewage and high temperature
CPE-jacketed 15' (4.6m) cord
External cord weight available
SPECIFICATIONS
Float material
Temp
Color
Contact rating
Contact operation
Operation angle
Dimensions
Cable
Approvals
SPECIALTY SENSORS
TYPICAL INSTALLATION
25°
PM-590
External
Weight
Pumping
Range
Horizontal
Wiring
Tank full
Tank empty
10°
ABS plastic
221°F (105°C)
Green
10A 120/240 VAC, 1/4 hp 120/240 VAC
SPDT
25° above, 10° below horizontal
4.6"H x 2.6" dia. (11.75 x 6.67 cm)
16/3 CPE jacketed, length 15' (4.6m)
UL recognized component, File #E-93774
CSA certified, File #LR41198
Black-red closed
Black-white closed
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
NG2DW1500B
PM-590
DESCRIPTION
Mechanical float switch
External weight 1.27 lb (0.58 kg)
GENERAL-PURPOSE FLOAT SWITCH
MODEL L8
DESCRIPTION
The Model L8 is an excellent, low-cost, general-purpose float
switch. It is magnetically actuated for long life and decreased
maintenance with a high resistance to chemicals.
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
UL recognized component, CE approved
Polyphenylene sulfide float
Magnetically actuated
Good for specific gravities 0.6 and up
1" NPT mounting
SPECIFICATIONS
Temp limits
Operating pressure
Electrical rating
Installation
Dimensions
Weight
Approvals
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
L8
290
DESCRIPTION
General-purpose float switch
212°F (100°C)
150 psig (1000 kPa)
[email protected]/250 VAC
Horizontal
8.31"L (21.1cm), 1" NPT
6.4 lb (181g)
UL recognized component, CE
SPECIALTY SENSORS
FLOAT SWITCH
F7 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The F7-BT and F7-SS are economical solutions to smaller
vertical-mount float switch applications. The F7-BT includes a
BUNA-N float, and the F7-SS includes a stainless steel float.
They are shipped with normally open switch contacts that
close on a liquid level rise but can be switched easily to normally closed in the field.
FEATURES
Low cost
Simple installation
Vertical 1/8" NPT mount
18" leads 22 AWG
•
•
•
•
Dependable
Magnetically actuated
Hermetically sealed
SPST switch operation
TYPICAL INSTALLATION
SPECIFICATIONS
Temp limits
Operating pressure
Electrical rating
AC
DC
Installation
Dimensions
Weight
Approvals
F7-SS
F7-BT
F7-BT
220°F (105°C)
150 psig (1000 kPa)
F7-SS
300°F (149°C)
450 psig (3100 kPa)
25 VA, 1A, 200V
0.28A/24V
Vertical
2.18"H x 1.18 dia. (5.54 x 30 cm)
1.6 oz (45g)
UL recognized component
30W, 0.14A, 220V
10W, 1A, 200V
Vertical
2.06"H x 1" dia. (5.23 x 25.4 cm)
3.2 oz (91g)
UL recognized component
Elbow
Pipe
SPECIALTY SENSORS
•
•
•
•
Float
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
F7-BT
F7-SS
DESCRIPTION
Float switch with BUNA-N float
Float switch with stainless steel float
FLOAT SWITCH
JMP SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The JMP Series Float Switches provide the ultimate in costeffective solutions for applications such as condensate drip
pan monitoring. The JMP-100-4CC features a spring clip and
the JMP-100-4CC11 an L bracket for mounting.
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
Simple installation
Low cost
UL recognized, CSA certified
SPDT contacts
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
JMP-100-4CC
JMP-100-4CC11
DESCRIPTION
Float switch with spring
clip mount
Float switch with L bracket
mount
SPECIFICATIONS
Temp limits
Electrical rating
Installation
Dimensions
Wiring
Approvals
150°F (70°C)
5A @ 125 VAC
3A @ 250 VAC
Horizontal
3.5" (8.9 cm) clip to float
6" leads #18 AWG
UL recognized component,
CSA certified
291
SPECIALTY SENSORS
UNIVERSAL CALIBRATION KIT
MODEL UCK
DESCRIPTION
The Model UCK Universal Calibration Kit contains everything needed to flow calibration gas through any gas-sensing
device in the Trane Catalog. Adapters are included for the following: WCO, KCO Series carbon monoxide sensors; CD-1,
CD-A, GM, 711271, 2001V, 8000, and 4GS carbon dioxide
sensors; OS-1 oxygen depletion sensors; RLD-5, RLD-134a,
and 301IRF, HGM refrigerant sensors; and GMT Series toxic
and combustible gas sensors. The supplied adapters and tubing will also fit the majority of other gas detectors on the market
today. With the Model UCK’s pressure gauge and restrictor
assortment, any gas flow rate from 50 mL/min to 1000 mL/min
may be achieved without the need for an expensive flow meter.
Flow tables and instructions are included.
SPECIALTY SENSORS
FEATURES
• Six assorted sizes of color-coded polyurethane
tubing
• Assorted barbed couplings and reducing couplings
• Regulator (1.0 L/min) for 17L (non-corrosive), 58L
(corrosive) gas cylinders, or both
• Restrictors, 0.005"and 0.007"
• Cup adapter for solid-state sensors
(OS-1, WCO, RLD-5, RLD-134a, others)
• Plug adapter for electrochemical sensors (GMT, others)
• Tubing sized for insertion or barbed connectors
(RLD-IR, 4GS, CD-1, others)
• Rugged, high-density poly toolbox with accessory shelf
and room for two gas cylinders of either size
DIMENSIONS / WEIGHT
Dimensions
16.4"W x 8.6"D x 7.5"H
(41.6 x 21.9 x 19.0 cm)
Weight
UCK-1, UCK-2
UCK-3
Gas cylinders
4.3 lb (1.95 kg)
5.0 lb (2.27 kg)
1.6 lb (0.82 kg) each
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
UCK-1
UCK-2
UCK-3
GAS-N2
GAS-CO2-2000
GAS-CO2-1000
GAS-CO2-800
GAS-CO-200
GAS-CO-100
GAS-CO-50
DESCRIPTION
Kit with Regulator for Noncorrosive
Gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and
refrigerants)
Kit with Regulator for Corrosive
Gases (NO2, H2S, SO2, NH3)
Kit with Both Regulators
Nitrogen (N2), 17L
2000 ppm Carbon Dioxide (CO2)
in Nitrogen (N2), 17L
1000 ppm Carbon Dioxide (CO2)
in Nitrogen (N2), 17L
800 ppm Carbon Dioxide (CO2)
in Nitrogen (N2), 17L
200 ppm Carbon Monoxide (CO)
in Air, 17L
100 ppm Carbon Monoxide (CO)
in Air, 17L
50 ppm Carbon Monoxide (CO)
in Air, 17L
CAL-B-KEY
CD-CAL
292
MODEL
GAS-NO2-5
GAS-CH4-2.5
GAS-H2-2
GAS-H2S-25
GAS-SO2-5
GAS-O2-18
GAS-NH3-50
GAS-R123-100
GAS-R11-500
GAS-R12-500
GAS-R134A-500
GAS-R22-500
DESCRIPTION
5 ppm Nitrogen Dioxide (NO2)
in Air, 58L
2.5% Methane (CH4) in Air, 17L
2.0% Hydrogen (H2) in Air, 17L
25 ppm Hydrogen Sulfide
(H2S) in Air, 58L
5 ppm Sulfur Dioxide (SO2) in Air, 58L
18% Oxygen (O2) in Nitrogen
(N2), 17L
50 ppm Ammonia (NH3) in
Nitrogen (N2), 58L
100 ppm R-123 in Air, 17L
500 ppm R-11 in Air, 17L
500 ppm R-12 in Air, 17L
500 ppm R-134a in Air, 17L
500 ppm R-22 in Air, 17L
RELATED PRODUCTS
Calibration keypad for 4GS carbon dioxide sensors without display
Calibration kit for CD-1W and CD-1D without display
TEST EQUIPMENT/INDICATION
TEST EQUIPMENT/INDICATION
MODEL/SERIES
PRODUCTS
Check out the NEW
475
Handheld Digital
Manometer on
page 300!
PAGE
475-FM Series — Handheld Digital Manometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
490 Series — Wet/Wet Handheld Digital Manometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
7001 — Handheld Digital CO2/Temperature Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
AIS — Stand-Alone Alarm Indication Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
ALD-1 — Pulse or Run-Time Accumulator Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
ASG — Handheld Portable Analog Signal Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
CLC-100 — Current/Voltage Signal Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
H08 Series HOBO — Data Logger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
HM34 — Relative Humidity/Temperature Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
HYGROMASTER — Handheld Digital Hygrometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
LPI-1C — 3-1/2 Digit LCD Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
LPI-1C-A, G, R — 3-1/2 Digit LCD Amber/Green/Red Panel Display . . . . . . . . .304
LPI-3C, LPI-3C-A, G, R — 4-1/2 Digit Black, Amber, Green, Red Panel
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
LPI-4, LPI-4R, -4G, -4A — 3-1/2 Digit Large Black, Red, Green, Amber Panel
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
LPI-5 — 3-1/2 Digit Small Black, Red Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
M9000-200 — Commissioning Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
RAD-1 — Remote Alarm Indication Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
ST20 — Infrared Thermometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
TM99A — Digital Probe Thermometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
VPI Series — 3-1/2 Digit LCD Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
SERVICES
Our Tech Reps will help
you troubleshoot in the
field. Just call!
SOLUTIONS
At Trane, you’ll find
products to help Test,
Measure, and Calibrate
- all from one place!
Indicates New Products
TEST EQUIPMENT/INDICATION
HANDHELD PORTABLE ANALOG SIGNAL GENERATOR
MODEL ASG
DESCRIPTION
The Model ASG is a handheld, battery- or plug-in power supply
powered, pocket-size analog signal generator. It generates a 010 VDC signal in increments of 1V or a 0-20 mA signal in increments of 2 mA. The LED bar graph visually indicates analog signal
level. The Model ASG can also continuously ramp to userdefined minimum or maximum values with user- defined ramptime settings.
FEATURES
Powered by 9V battery or plug-in power supply
Pocket size
Bar graph LED for signal display
0-20 mA (2 mA increments)
0-10 VDC (1 VDC increments)
Ramp function to minimum and maximum values
Variable ramp function timing
Low battery indication
User-defined auto shutoff times for battery conservation
Separate milliamp and voltage output jacks
6' (1.83m) leads with alligator clips
Up to 30 hours continuous use on a single battery
Perfect for loop-powered circuits and externally powered
circuits
SPECIFICATIONS
Power
Top view
ASG with
Carrying Case
APPLICATIONS
• Troubleshooting transmitters, transducers, and actuators
• Calibrating transducers, digital displays, and other analog signal devices
9V battery or 120 VAC plug-in
power supply
Impedance
Voltage
Current
Resolution
Current
Voltage
Accuracy (72°F)
Current
Voltage
Operating temp
Weight
Dimensions
DIMENSIONS
10001 min
3001 max
2.4
(6.1)
2 mA
1 VDC
0.85
(2.2)
in
(cm)
±0.5% FS or ±0.1 mA
±0.5% FS or ±0.05 VDC
32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
14 oz (0.4 kg) with accessories
4.7"H x 2.40"W x 0.83"D
(11.9 x 6.1 x 2.2 cm)
Output
0-20 mA (2 mA increments)
0-10 VDC (1 VDC increments)
Ramping time intervals 2-20 sec (2-sec increments)
Auto shutoff times
2-20 min. (2-min. increments)
Accessories included
9V battery, 120 VAC plug-in power
supply, 6' (1.83m) wire leads, carrying case
ASG
Programming
Buttons
External
Power
mA Source
Output
Voltage
Output
mA Two-Wire
Transmitter
Output
4.7
(11.9)
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
ASG
DESCRIPTION
mA/VDC handheld portable analog signal generator with accessories
293
TEST EQUIPMENT/INDICATION
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
TEST EQUIPMENT/INDICATION
CURRENT / VOLTAGE SIGNAL ANALYZER
MODEL CLC-100
DESCRIPTION
The Model CLC-100 is a portable, multifunction instrument that provides the signal and measurement capabilities most often needed for calibrating, troubleshooting,
and checking out electronic transducers and control
devices.
All wiring connections are made via a combination of
banana jacks and binding posts.
The Model CLC-100 may be ordered with an optional
pulse generator (CLC-100-PW1) for testing pulse-width
modulation devices.
CLC-100-PW1
TEST EQUIPMENT/INDICATION
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Powered by 120 VAC or batteries (included)
24 VDC, 400 mA regulated power supply
4-20 mA current generator
0-20 VDC voltage generator
Digital meter for reading current or voltage
Sturdy carrying case
Optional pulse generator
0.1-second pulse resolution
LCD display of time count and contact status
DIMENSIONS
1.88
(4.76)
in
(cm)
s
1.88
(4.76)
SPECIFICATIONS
Input range
4-50 mA/0-50 VDC
Output range
4-20 mA/0-20 VDC
Output power supply
24 VDC @ 400 mA
24 VDC power supply fuse 1A fast blow
Digital meter fuse
1/4A fast blow
Battery operation
Four 9V alkaline batteries
Battery life
5.5 [email protected] 20 mA output
Accuracy
±1%
Resolution
0.6%
Impedance
Voltage output
15001 min
Current output
7501 max
Current input
3001 nominal
Operating temp
32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Weight
5 lb (2.3 kg)
Pulse option (PW1)
Output pulse
0.1-999 single shot
(sec, min., or hours)
Contact rating
5A @ 250 VAC
5A @ 125 VDC
Repeat accuracy
±0.1%
Reset time
50 ms
Operating temp
14° to 140°F
(-10° to 60°C)
Humidity
80% noncondensing
294
PW1 Option
12.25
(31.11)
*
CLC-100
PULSE GENERATOR
PW1
PULSE
TIMER
MODULE
(optional)
POWER
ON
PULSE
OUT
OFF
10
(25.40)
CLC-100
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
CLC-100
CLC-100-PW1*
DESCRIPTION
Current/Voltage signal analyzer
Analyzer with pulse option
*The Pulse option must be specified at time of
ordering. It cannot be field installed.
TEST EQUIPMENT/INDICATION
COMMISSIONING TOOL
MODEL M9000-200
DESCRIPTION
The Model M9000-200 Commissioning Tool provides
four control signals to drive resistive, proportional, and
on/off outputs for checkout of actuators and electric
valves. LEDs display feedback voltages and contact closure and indicate mode selection. The Model M9000200 combines accurate and reliable technology in a userfriendly and economical package. It is small and lightweight so that making adjustments from ladders is easy.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Small and lightweight
Multiple output types
Multiple input types
Plug-in terminations
Digital display
Carrying case
M9000-200
SPECIFICATIONS
Power requirements
Commissioning tool 24 VAC nominal (20 to 30 VAC)
@ 50/60 Hz, 3 VA, Class 2
Plug-in transformer 120 VAC @ 60 Hz
Input DC feedback
0 to 30 VDC
Electrical connections Screw terminals for 24 to 12 AWG
Transformer plug
0.08" (2.11 mm) dia pin,
0.25" (6.35 mm) dia plug
Input impedance
Voltmeter
1 M1 (nominal)
Output signal
AC power
24 VAC nominal (20 to 30 VAC),
25VA max (Terminals 1 and 2)
Output AC voltage is equivalent to
the input AC voltage and frequency.
Resistive
0 to 1351 ±7%, 2W or 0 to 1k1
±5%, 2W (Terminals 3, 4, and 5)
Proportional, voltage 0 to 10 VDC (5001 min); 0 to 20 VDC
(6.8k1 min) (Terminals 2 and 3)
Proportional, current 0 to 20 mA (6801 max) (Terminals 2
and 3)
Incremental
24 VAC nominal (20 to 30 VAC)
25 VA max (Terminals 2, 3, and 4)
Output AC voltage is equivalent to
the input AC voltage and frequency.
Bias
5 VDC with 3301 series resistor
(Terminal 6)
Accuracy
Resolution
Auxiliary switch
testing
±2% FS @ 77°F (25°C)
0.1 VDC, 0.1 mA
Provides 24 VAC at 4 mA to
auxiliary switch contacts (dry
contacts only)
Response time
Proportional, voltage 0 to 20 VDC in 20 sec
Proportional, current 0 to 20 mA in 20 sec
Ambient conditions
Operating
-4° to 122°F (-20° to 50°C),
10% to 90% RH, noncondensing
Storage
-40° to 158°F (-40° to 70°C),
5% to 95% RH, noncondensing
Dimensions
Commissioning tool 7.7"H x 4.5"W x 2.2"D
(196 x 113 x 55 mm)
Transformer
4.2"H x 3.0"W x 2.4"D
(107 x 76 x 61 mm)
Carrying case
10.4"H x 12.7"W x 4.2"D
(263 x 322 x 107 mm)
Weight
Commissioning tool 0.9 lb (0.4 kg)
Transformer
1.7 lb (0.8 kg)
Carrying case
2.0 lb (0.9 kg)
Total shipping
weight
5.4 lb (2.5 kg)
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
M9000-200
DESCRIPTION
Multiple function commissioning tool
295
TEST EQUIPMENT/INDICATION
M9000-200
Carrying Case
FEATURES
TEST EQUIPMENT/INDICATION
DATA LOGGER
HOBO H08 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Onset's H08-006-04 Data Logger monitors four different 4-20
mA or 0-2.5 VDC signals simultaneously. This four-input logger
reads and stores up to 32,520 samples divided among the
number of inputs being recorded. The H08-002-02 has an internal temperature sensor as well as a single-point external input
that will accept a 4-20 mA or a 0-2.5 VDC input. The H08-00302 has both an internal temperature and humidity sensor. Each
external input requires a CABLE-4-20MA, a CABLE-2.5STEREO, or a TMC6-HA temperature probe. A BOXCAR or
BOXCARPRO software kit is required to operate the H08 loggers.
H08
TEST EQUIPMENT/INDICATION
FEATURES
• Mounting kit included with hook, magnet, and tape
• User-selectable sampling intervals from 0.5 seconds
to 9 hours
• Drop proof to 5' (1.5m)
• Nonvolatile EEPROM to retain memory
• Blinking LED for operation verification
• Programmable start time/date
BOXCARPRO
BOXCAR
APPLICATIONS
• Temperature monitoring
• Pressure monitoring
• Humidity monitoring
• Flow monitoring
• Gas concentration monitoring
• Troubleshooting of unusual applications
SPECIFICATIONS
H08
Sampling intervals
Capacity
Time accuracy
Memory modes
Dimensions
Weight
0.5 sec to 9 hours
7943 measurements;
H08-006-04: 32,520 measurements
±1 min. per week @ 68°F (20°C)
Stop when full, wrap around when full
2.4"H x 1.9"W x 0.8"D (6.1 x 4.8 x 2 cm)
1 oz (29g)
Internal Temp Sensor (if equipped)
Range
-4° to 158°F (-20° to 70°C)
Accuracy
±1.27° @ 70°F (±0.7° @ 21°C)
Resolution
0.7° @ 70°F (0.4° @ 21°C)
Response time
15 min. to 90% in still air
Replaceable RH Sensor (if equipped)
Range
25% to 95% RH @ 80°F for intervals of
*10 sec, noncondensing
Accuracy
±5%
Response time
10 min. in still air
Operating temp
41° to 122°F (5° to 50°C)
TMC6-HA Temp Sensor
Range
Accuracy
Resolution
Response time
Dimensions
-40° to 212°F (-40° to 100°C) in air
±0.9° @ 68°F (±0.5° @ 20°C)
0.7° @ 68°F (0.41° @ 20°C)
2.5 min. in air moving 3.2 fps
0.2" (0.5 cm) dia sensor,
6' (1.8m) cable
CABLE-4-20MA
Range
Accuracy
Resolution
Dimensions
0-20.1 mA
±0.1 mA, ±2.5% of reading
0.4% of full scale
18" (46 cm) cable
CABLE-2.5-STEREO
Range
Accuracy
Resolution
Dimensions
0-2.5 VDC
±10 mV, ±3% of reading
10 mV
6' (1.8m) cable
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
H08-002-02
H08-006-04
H08-003-02
CABLE-4-20 MA
CABLE-2.5-STEREO
TMC6-HA
BOXCAR
BOXCARPRO
296
DESCRIPTION
Data logger with one internal temperature and one analog signal port
Data logger with four external analog signal ports
Data logger with internal temperature and internal humidity sensing
4-20 mA input cable (needed for mA signals)
0-2.5 VDC input cable
Onset temperature sensor with 6' (1.8m) cable
Basic software interface kit (software, cable, and manual)
Professional software interface kit (software, cable, and manual)
TEST EQUIPMENT/INDICATION
DIGITAL PROBE AND INFRARED THERMOMETER
MODELS TM99A, ST20
DESCRIPTION
This economical, all-purpose solid-state thermometer is perfect
for field/factory use in a variety of applications in which a fast
response is required.
APPLICATIONS
• HVAC for ambient air and duct temperatures,
thermostat calibration
• Laboratory for liquid, air, and semi-solid
temperatures
• Food service preparation, storage, and shipping
• Electrical/electronic equipment servicing
TM99A
SPECIFICATIONS
Range
Resolution
Accuracy
Ambient range
Display
Probe
Power
-40° to 300°F (-40° to 150°C)
0.1°F or °C
±0.2°F or °C or ±0.2% of reading
0° to 150°F max (-18° to 66°C), 0% to 90% RH
Backlit 0.4" LCD
10K thermistor, detachable (#1075)
9V alkaline battery, provided
Size
Display segments
Display warnings
Weight
9.5"H x 6.5"W x 2.5"D closed case
(24.13 x 16.51 x 6.35 cm)
Four digits, one decimal point, °F or °C
LO: temp below -40°F (-40°C)
HI: temp above 300°F (150°C)
LO-P: battery discharged
1.5 lb (0.7 kg)
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
TM99A
DESCRIPTION
Digital probe thermometer
DESCRIPTION
The Model ST20 Infrared Thermometer makes non-contact
measurements of surface temperatures that are difficult or dangerous to reach. It features Class 2 laser sighting, has an accuracy of 1%, and is powered by a 9V battery.
FEATURES
• Single-point laser sighting
• Maximum temperature display
• Backlit graphic display
• Carrying case
ST20 with Carrying Case
SPECIFICATIONS
Temp range
Distance to spot ratio
Repeatability
Response time
-25° to 750°F (-32 to 400°C)
12:1
±2°F (±1°C) or ±0.5% of reading,
whichever is greater
500 ms
Accuracy @ 77°F (25°C) ambient
Above 73°F (23°C) @ target
±1% of reading or ±2°F (±1°C),
whichever is greater
0° to 73°F (-18° to 23°C) @ target ±3°F (±2°C)
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ST20
1% accurate laser-sighted handheld infrared thermometer
297
TEST EQUIPMENT/INDICATION
FEATURES
• °F/°C switch selectable
• Large, illuminated LCD display
• Detachable thermistor probe included
• No calibration required
• Membrane keypad operation
• One-year limited warranty
• 9V alkaline battery included
TEST EQUIPMENT/INDICATION
RH / TEMPERATURE METER AND HANDHELD DIGITAL HYGROMETER
MODELS HM34, HYGROMASTER
DESCRIPTION
The handheld, pocket-sized Model HM34 RH/Temperature
Meter provides a fast and convenient way to accurately spotcheck relative humidity and temperature.
FEATURES
• Temperature compensated
• Auto-off and hold
• Measurement of humidity and temperature
• 9V battery
• 0.2 µm protective membrane filter
• Carrying case
• Retractable sensor probe
HM34
SPECIFICATIONS
TEST EQUIPMENT/INDICATION
Relative Humidity
Range
Accuracy
Resolution
Sensor type
Response time (90%)
Replacement sensor
0% to 100% RH
±2% (0% to 90% RH)
±3% (90% to 100% RH)
0.1% RH
HUMICAP® H-Sensor,
thin-film capacitive sensor
15 sec with membrane filter
16663 HM sensor
Temperature
Range
Accuracy
Resolution
Temp dependence
Sensor
General
Display
Weight
Size
-4° to 140°F (-20° to 60°C)
±0.5°F (±0.3°C)
0.1°F (0.1°C)
±0.02°C /°C
Pt 100 1/3 DIN 43760B
3-1/2 digit LCD
0.6 lb (0.3 kg)
6.3"L x 2.2"W x 1.1"D
(16.0 x 5.6 x 2.8 cm)
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
HM34C
HM34F
DESCRIPTION
RH/Temperature meter with °C reading
RH/Temperature meter with °F reading
DESCRIPTION
The HYGROMASTER is an inexpensive, accurate handheld
digital hygrometer that displays %RH, drybulb, and dew point
temperatures (in °F and °C). The large three-digit display aids
the easy-to-use two-button operation. The HYGROMASTER
can be ordered with an NIST certificate. It also comes with a
convenient carrying case and operates using two AA batteries.
SPECIFICATIONS
Power
Accuracy
Temp operating range
Humidity range
Dimensions
Two AA batteries
1.5% @ 50% RH and 68°F (20°C)
32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
20% to 99%
7.09"H x 1.93"W x 1.10"D
(12.01 x 4.90 x 2.79 cm)
HYGROMASTER with Carrying Case
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
HYGROMASTER
HYGROMASTER-NIST
H-CABLE
298
DESCRIPTION
Handheld digital hygrometer and temperature meter with case
Handheld digital hygrometer and temperature meter with case and NIST certificate
24" (60.96m) sensor extension cable
TEST EQUIPMENT/INDICATION
DESCRIPTION
MODEL 475-FM Series
DESCRIPTION
The Dwyer 475-FM Series Mark III handheld digital manometer is
ideal for field-calibrating, monitoring, or troubleshooting HVAC systems, clean rooms, and a wide range of other low-pressure applications. This handy instrument measures positive, negative, or differential pressures of air and natural gases. The 475-FM Series is
approved and intrinsically safe for hazardous locations, Class 1,
Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D, and T4.
Service
Accuracy
Temp limits
Display
Pressure range/limit
475-000-FM
475-00-FM
Air and some combustible gases
±0.5% FS, 60° to 78°F (15.6° to
25.6°C); ±1.5% FS from 32° to 60°F
(0° to 15.6°C) and 78° to 104°F
(25.6° to 40°C)
32° to 104°F (0° to 40°C)
0.5" liquid crystal, 3-1/2 digits
0-1.000" W.C. (0-0.249 kPa)/
10" W.C. (2.5 kPa) max
0-4.00" W.C. (0-0.995 kPa)/5 psig
(35 kPa) max
MODEL
475-000-FM
475-00-FM
475-0-FM
475-1-FM
475-0-FM
475-1-FM
Power requirements
Connections
Agency approvals
Weight
0-10.00" W.C. (0-2.49 kPa)/5 psig
(35 kPa) max
0-19.99" W.C. (0-4.97 kPa)/20 psig
(138 kPa) max
9V alkaline battery included
2 barbed connections for use with
1/8" (3.18 mm) or 3/16" (4.76 mm)
I.D. tubing
FM, CE
10.8 oz (0.31 kg)
ORDERING INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION
Handheld digital manometer, 0-1.000" W.C.
Handheld digital manometer, 0-4.00" W.C.
Handheld digital manometer, 0-10.00" W.C.
Handheld digital manometer, 0-19.99" W.C.
WET/WET HANDHELD DIGITAL MANOMETER
490 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Dwyer 490 Series wet/wet digital manometers are versatile,
handheld, and battery operated. Units are highly accurate
(±0.5% FS) for positive or positive differential pressure measurement, and they can tolerate most liquid media compatible
with 316L stainless steel. There are seven common English and
metric pressure units (psi, "H2O, "Hg, mm Hg, kPa, Bar, or
mBar), so conversions are not necessary.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service
Wetted materials
Accuracy
Temp limits
Pressure range/limit
490-1
Compatible, non-combustible gases
and liquids
Type 316L stainless steel
±0.5% FS, 60° to 78°F (15.6° to
25.6°C); ±1.5% FS from 32° to 60°F
(0° to 15.6°C) and 78° to 104°F (25.6°
to 40°C)
32° to 104°F (0° to 40°C)
490-2
490-3
Display
Power requirements
Connections
Agency approvals
Weight
0-30.00 psid (0-200 kPa)/60 psig
(400 kPa) max
0-50.00 psid (0-350 kPa)/120 psig
(800 kPa) max
0.42" (10.6 mm), 4-1/2 digit LCD
9V alkaline battery included
Two 1/8" (3.18 mm) female NPT
CE
14.1 oz (0.4 kg)
0-15.000 psid (0-100 kPa)/30 psig
max (200 kPa)
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
490-1
490-2
490-3
DESCRIPTION
Wet/Wet digital manometer, 0-15 psid
Wet/Wet digital manometer, 0-30 psid
Wet/Wet digital manometer, 0-50 psid
299
TEST EQUIPMENT/INDICATION
SPECIFICATIONS
TEST EQUIPMENT/INDICATION
TEST EQUIPMENT/INDICATION
HANDHELD DIGITAL CO2 / TEMPERATURE METER
MODEL 7001
DESCRIPTION
The Model 7001 Handheld Digital CO2/Temperature Meter
features two analog voltage outputs for easy connection to a
data logger like the HOBO H08 Series. The Model 7001 uses
dual-beam infrared technology for accuracy and stability.
Battery operation offers mobility, while the AC adapter (included) offers long-term data logging capability. Temperature is
displayed in °F or °C.
7001 with AC Adapter
SPECIFICATIONS
Display range
CO2
Temperature
Display
Ambient
Accuracy
CO2
Temperature
Annual drift
Response time
Power
From 0-10,000 ppm
°F or °C, 32° to 99°F (0° to 37°C)
Four-digit 1/2" LCD, CO2, and temperature
32° to 122°F, 0% to 95% RH
±50 ppm or 5% of reading
±2°F (±1°C)
±20 ppm
<60 sec CO2
120V/6V adapter included
Four AA alkaline battery for 48 hours (not included)
0-4VDC = 0-4000 ppm
0-4VDC = 32° to 104°F (0° to 40°C)
Outputs (2)
Pressure
dependence
0.13% per mm Hg
User input for elevation correction
Once per year
6.5"H x 3.0"W x 1.5"D (16.5 x 7.6 x 3.8 cm)
1.4 lb (0.64 kg)
FCC Class 15, Part B
Calibration
Dimensions
Weight
Agency
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
7001
DESCRIPTION
Handheld digital CO2/Temperature meter
RELATED PRODUCTS
Gas-CO2-1000
UCK
H08-002-02
CABLE-CO2
Calibration gas CO2 (1000 ppm)
Universal calibration kit
HOBO data logger with one internal temperature and one analog signal port
Cable to connect 7001 to HOBO H08
PULSE OR RUN-TIME ACCUMULATOR DISPLAY
MODEL ALD-1
DESCRIPTION
The Model ALD-1 is a 5-1/2 digit LCD resettable accumulator
or run-time counter. The lithium battery provides years of trouble-free service. Two wires are all that are necessary to totalize
consumption, flow data, or run-time data. No external power
supply is necessary.
ALD-1C
SPECIFICATIONS
Display
Digit size
Count speed
Input
Reset
Operating temp
5-1/2 digit
0.2" (0.51 cm) high
Accumulator 100 counts per sec
Timer counts in one-hour
or 0.1-hour increments
Contact or solid-state switch
Push button or remote contact
32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Battery life
Range
Dimensions
Bezel
Panel cutout
Weight
10 years nominal
0-199999
1.1"H x 2.09"W x 1.72"D
(2.79 x 5.3 x 4.37 cm)
1.0"H x 2.0"W
(2.54 x 5.08 cm)
2.1 oz (59.5 g)
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
ALD-1
ALD-1R
ALD-10C
ALD-1C
300
DESCRIPTION
LCD push-putton resettable accumulator counter
LCD remote reset accumulator counter
LCD run-time remote reset clock, one-hour increments
LCD run-time remote reset clock, 0.1-hour increments
ALD-1
TEST EQUIPMENT/INDICATION
REMOTE ALARM INDICATION STATION
MODEL RAD-1
DESCRIPTION
The RAD-1 is a wall-mounted remote alarm indication station mounted on a stainless steel 2x4 plate. Any contact
closure alarm initiating device that can switch 24 VAC or
DC can be used with the RAD-1.
During an alarm (24V applied to the RAD-1), the horn may
be silenced by momentarily pressing the silence switch.
The alarm LED will remain lighted, and the alarm status
relay will remain energized when the horn is silenced until
the alarm condition is cleared (24V removed). If an alarm
repeat after silence time has been set, the horn will resound at the end of the repeat time. If the relay follows horn
jumper is installed the alarm status relay will de-energize
when the horn is silenced and re-energize when the horn
sounds at the end of the repeat after silence time.
If a pulsed (instead of continuous tone) horn is desired, the
horn-pulsed jumper may be installed. If both the hornpulsed jumper and the relay-follow horn jumper are
installed, the alarm status relay will energize and de-energize with the pulsed horn.
FEATURES
• Red alarm LED
• Alarm horn, continuous-tone or pulsed
• Alarm horn silence switch
• Adjustable alarm delay time
• Adjustable alarm repeat time
• Alarm status SPDT relay
• Relay operates with the alarm horn option
WIRING
HORN PULSED
REPEAT TIME x10
DLY TIME x10
ON
Alarm Repeat after
Silence Time*
SW6–SW8 OFF = No delay
SW6 ON = 1 minute
SW7 ON = 2 minutes
SW8 ON = 4 minutes
Initial Alarm Delay Time*
SW1–SW5 OFF = No delay
SW1 ON = 1 sec
SW2 ON = 2 sec
SW3 ON = 4 sec
SW4 ON = 8 sec
SW5 ON = 16 sec
OFF
Repeat
Time in
Minutes
1 (Add)
8
4
7
2
6
5
16
4
8
3
4
2
1
Relay
Follows
Horn
Jumper Installed
• Continuous Horn
Alarm Repeat
• after Silence
Time x1
• Inital Alarm
Delay Time x1
• Pulsed Horn
Alarm Repeat
• after Silence
Time x10
• Inital Alarm
Delay Time x10
Alarm Initiating
Device
24 +
VAC/
VDC
–
NO
Repeat
Time in
Seconds Relay COM
2
(Add)
1
No Jumper
NC
+
–
NO
COM
Alarm
Relay
NC
RAD-1
*Times are additive; for example, with SW3 and SW5 both ON, 4 sec + 16 sec = 20 sec delay
(or 200 sec if DLY TIME x10 jumper is installed)
SPECIFICATIONS
Power
Alarm status relay
Alarm horn
Alarm delay time
24 VAC @ 100mA or 24 VDC @ 35mA
SPDT, 0.5A @ 24 VAC, 1.0A @ 30 VDC
Continuous tone or pulsed, 70 db min
None, or 1 to 31 seconds in 1-second
increments, or 10 to 310 seconds in
10-second increments
Alarm repeat time None, or 1 to 7 minutes in 1-minute
increments, or 10 to 70 minutes in
10-minute increments
RAD-1
Connections
Mounting
Dimensions
Weight
Screw terminals, 22-14 AWG wires
Brushed stainless steel plate mounts to
standard single junction box, 2 screws
provided
2.75"W x 4.5"H x 1.0"D
(7.0 x 11.4 x 2.5 cm)
3 oz (74 g)
ORDERING INFORMATION
Remote alarm indication station
301
TEST EQUIPMENT/INDICATION
When 24 VAC or DC is applied to the RAD-1 through an
alarm-initiating device, the red alarm LED will light, the horn
will sound, and the alarm status relay will energize. If an initial alarm delay has been set, when 24 VAC or DC is
applied, the red alarm LED will blink until the delay period
has expired when it will light continuously, the horn will
sound continuously, and the relay will energize.
TEST EQUIPMENT/INDICATION
STAND-ALONE ALARM INDICATION STATION
MODEL AIS
DESCRIPTION
The Model AIS Stand-Alone Alarm Indication Station
features an indication light, alarm horn, and an alarm
horn silence switch. Upon an alarm contact closure, the
LED indicator will light and the horn will sound. The horn
can be silenced through the alarm silence switch, while
the visual indication will continue to be lit until the alarm
condition has been corrected.
TEST EQUIPMENT/INDICATION
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
Long lasting, red LED indication
Clear, distinct audible tone
Horn silence switch
Compact and attractive design
Available in 24 VDC, 24 VAC, or 110 VAC
Bright yellow panel face
APPLICATIONS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Refrigerant leak alarm indication
Water level alarm indication
Pressure alarm indication
High/Low temperature limits
Gas leak indication
Humidity limit alarm indication
Vibration limit
Voltage/Current level limit
Any contact closure alarm application
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
Power
24 VAC/VDC, 120 VAC, 100 mA (max)
Controlling device contact rating
AIS-24D
24 VDC, 70 mA min
AIS-24A
24 VAC, 90 mA min
AIS-120A
120 VAC, 50 mA min
Case
Polystyrene, impact resistant, knock-outs
Horn
80 db
Mounting
Four screws through back
Dimensions
7.09"H x 4.33"W x 3.54"D
(18.0 x 11.0 x 9.0 cm)
Controlling
Device
(Alarm initiated by
contact closure)
4 3 2 1
(–) (+) (+) (–)
L
Alarm horn, 80 db
Alarm Horn
Silence Switch
H
S
AIS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
AIS
Alarm indication station
24D
24 VDC powered
24A
24 VAC powered
120A 120 VAC powered
AIS
302
24A
Power Supply*
Red LED Light
Example: AIS-24A 24 VAC powered alarm
indication station
* Power must be
supplied to the AIS
TEST EQUIPMENT/INDICATION
3-1/2 DIGIT LCD PANEL DISPLAY
MODEL LPI-1C
DESCRIPTION
The Model LPI-1C is a loop-powered indicator featuring
a large 3-1/2 digit LCD display with black digits. The
Model LPI-1C displays engineering units of °F, °C, PSI, %,
or no engineering units if desired. It is directly powered by
the 4-20 mA signal and scaled to specifications.
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
LPI-1C
(typical panel mount)
LPI-1C-WMB
Indication of 4-20 mA signal in desired scale
3-1/2 digit LCD display
Snap-in panel mounting
Easy-to-read digits
Enclosure options available
Precalibrated for desired range
Negative-to-positive indication
Jumper-selectable engineering unit display
APPLICATION
LPI-1C-E-DBL
LPI-1C-E
• Differential or static pressure
• Kilowatt demand
• Gallons per minute
• Temperature
• Humidity
• Pressure
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
Input
Impedance
Accuracy
Digit size
Decimal point
Range
Operating temp
Humidity
Cutout required
Panel clearance
Enclosure options
E (NEMA 1)
WMB
Weight (display only)
• Voltage
• Current
• Many other 4-20 mA applications
4-20 mA loop-powered
3001 nominal @ 24 VDC
0.1% of scale
0.5" (1.27 cm)
Three positions or none (1.0.0.0)
-1999 to +1999
32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
95% noncondensing
1.00"H x 2.40"W
(2.54 x 6.10 cm)
1.97" (5.00 cm)
Power
Supply
+
Sensor/
Transmitter
Connect the LPI-1C
indicator in series with
the 4-20 mA current
loop to be measured.
4.75"H x 4.75"W x 3.0"D
(12.07 x 12.07 x 7.62 cm)
2.12''H x 3.12''W x 1.75''D
(5.4 x 7.94 x 4.45 cm)
2.3 oz (56.7g)
-
+
-
-
4-20 mA
+
S
P
A
N
BAS Input
or Other
+ 4-20 mA Load
-
SIG
Z
E
R
O
Factory Calibrated
(no field calibration
needed)
°F
°C
PSI
%
Engineering Unit Jumpers
Unit selected displays to
the right of display reading.
Board Unit
Connector Pins
Back of Display Unit
ORDERING INFORMATION
* Displays are custom calibrated at no charge before
shipping.
MODEL
LPI-1C
DESCRIPTION
3-1/2 digit LCD panel display with black digits*
–
No enclosure
E
3-1/2 digit LCD panel display with enclosure
WMB
3-1/2 digit LCD panel display with small enclosure
E-DBL Two 3-1/2 digit LCD panel displays in one enclosure
LPI-1C
E-DBL Example: LPI-1C-E-DBL Two LPI-1C displays mounted
in a single enclosure
Specify signal input scale, range, engineering units,
and decimal location when ordering.
Aluminum engineering units plate will be provided
upon request at no charge. (2.00" x 0.75")
Available plates are % RH, AMPS, DEG C., DEG F.,
GPM, x10 GPM, KW, KWH, PSIG, and "W.C.
GP3420
GP3430
RELATED PRODUCTS
LPI-1C, LPI-3C, VPI-1C mounting plate, 3.40" x 2.00" (8.6 x 5.1 cm)
LPI-1C, LPI-3C, VPI-1C mounting plate, 3.40" x 3.00" (8.6 x 7.6 cm)
303
TEST EQUIPMENT/INDICATION
3-1/2 DIGIT LCD AMBER / GREEN / RED PANEL DISPLAY
MODELS LPI-1C-A, -G, -R
DESCRIPTION
Models LPI-1C-A, G, and R are loop-powered 4-20 mA, 24 VDCpowered, brightly-lit 3-1/2 digit color LCD displays. Model LPI1C is available with amber, green, or red digits. Models LPI1C-A, G, and R also feature jumper-selectable, built-in engineering units of °F, °C, PSI, %, or no units. The same 24 VDC
power supply can be used to provide power to the 4-20 mA loop
and the display.
LPI-1C-G
(typical panel mount)
LPI-1C-G-WMB
TEST EQUIPMENT/INDICATION
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Indication of 4-20 mA signal in desired scale
Bright 3-1/2 digit LCD display
Available in amber, green, and red
Snap-in panel mounting
Easy-to-read digits
Enclosure options available
Precalibrated for desired range
Negative-to-positive indication
Jumper selectable engineering unit display
• Temperature
• Humidity
• Pressure
• Differential or static pressure
• Kilowatt demand
• Gallons per minute
Panel clearance
Enclosure option
E (NEMA 1)
WMB
Weight (display only)
• Voltage
• Current
• Many other 4-20 mA applications
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
Power (backlight)
Input
Impedance
Accuracy
Digit size
Decimal point
Range
Operating temp
Humidity
Cutout required
LPI-1C-A-E-DBL
LPI-1C-R-E
APPLICATION
24 VDC @ 35 mA
4-20 mA loop powered
3001 nominal @ 24 VDC
0.1% of scale
0.5" (1.27 cm)
Three positions or none (1.0.0.0)
-1999 to +1999
32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
95% noncondensing
1.00"H x 2.40"W
(2.54 x 6.10 cm)
1.97" (5.00 cm)
Power
Supply
24 VDC
+ Sensor/
Transmitter
Connect the LPI-1C
indicator in series with
the 4-20 mA current
loop to be measured.
+
- BAS Input or
4-20 mA
+
-
+
-+
SIG
Other 4-20 mA
Load
B/L
Z
E
R
O
S
P
A
N
Factory Calibrated
(no field calibration needed)
Board Unit
4.75"H x 4.75"W x 3.0"D
(12.07 x 12.07 x 7.62 cm)
2.12''H x 3.12''W x 1.75''D
(5.4 x 7.94 x 4.45 cm)
2.3 oz (56.7g)
Connector Pins
°F
°C
PSI
%
Engineering Unit Jumpers
Unit selected displays
to the right of display
reading.
Back of Display Unit
ORDERING INFORMATION
* Displays are custom calibrated at no charge before
shipping.
Specify signal input scale, range, engineering units, and
decimal location when ordering.
MODEL
LPI-1C-A
LPI-1C-G
LPI-1C-R
Aluminum engineering units plate will be provided upon
request at no charge. (2.00" x 0.75")
Available plates are % RH, AMPS, DEG C., DEG F.,
GPM, x10 GPM, KW, KWH, PSIG, and "W.C.
GP3420
GP3430
304
LPI-1C-A
DESCRIPTION
3-1/2 digit LCD with amber digits*
3-1/2 digit LCD with green digits*
3-1/2 digit LCD with red digits*
–
No enclosure
E
3-1/2 digit LCD panel display with enclosure
WMB
3-1/2 digit LCD panel display with small enclosure
E-DBL Two 3-1/2 digit LCD panel displays in one enclosure
E-DBL Example: LPI-1C-A-E-DBL Two amber 3-1/2 digit
LCD displays mounted in single enclosure
RELATED PRODUCTS
LPI-1C, LPI-3C, VPI-1C mounting plate, 3.40" x 2.00" (8.6 x 5.1 cm)
LPI-1C, LPI-3C, VPI-1C mounting plate, 3.40" x 3.00" (8.6 x 7.6 cm)
TEST EQUIPMENT/INDICATION
4-1/2 DIGIT BLACK / AMBER / GREEN / RED PANEL DISPLAY
MODELS LPI-3C, LPI-3C-A, -G, -R
DESCRIPTION
The Model LPI-3C is a 4-20 mA, brightly-lit 4-1/2 digit display.
Along with the standard black digits, colors of amber, green,
and red, powered by 24 VDC, are also available. The Model
LPI-3C also features jumper-selectable, built-in engineering
units of °F, °C, PSI, %, or no units. For those units with colored
digits, the same 24 VDC power supply can be used to provide
power to the 4-20 mA loop and the display.
LPI-3C
(typical panel mount)
LPI-3C-A-WMB
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Indication of 4-20 mA signal in desired scale
Optional, bright 4-1/2 digit LCD colored display
Available in black, amber, green, or red digits
Snap-in panel mounting
Easy-to-read digits
Enclosure options available
Precalibrated for desired range
Negative-to-positive indication
Jumper-selectable engineering unit display
LPI-3C-G-E
APPLICATION
•
•
•
Temperature
Humidity
Pressure
•
•
•
Differential or static pressure
Kilowatt demand
Gallons per minute
WMB
Weight (display only)
Voltage
Current
Many other 4-20 mA applications
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
Power (backlight)
Input signal
Impedance
Accuracy
Digit size
Decimal point
Range
Operating temp
Humidity
Cutout required
Panel clearance
Enclosure option
E (NEMA 1)
•
•
•
LPI-3C-R-E-DBL
Power Supply
24 VDC
24 VDC @ 35 mA for colored digits
Loop-powered 4-20 mA signal
3001 nominal @ 24 VDC
0.1% FS
0.5" (1.27 cm) LCD
Four positions or none (1.0.0.0.0)
-19999 to +19999
32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
95% noncondensing
1.00"H x 2.40"W (2.54 x 6.10 cm)
1.97" (5.00 cm)
BAS Input
or Other
4-20 mA Load
Power connection only required
for amber, green, or red display.
Sensor/
Transmitter
4-20
mA
Connect the LPI-3C
indicator in series
with the 4-20 mA
current loop to be
measured.
+ - + SPAN
SIG B/L
ZERO
Board Unit
4.75"H x 4.75"W x 3.0"D
(12.07 x 12.07 x 7.62 cm)
2.12''H x 3.12''W x 1.75''D
(5.4 x 7.94 x 4.45 cm)
2.3 oz (56.7g)
Factory Calibrated
(no field calibration
required)
Connector Pins
°F
°C
PSI
%
Engineering Unit Jumpers
Unit selected displays to the
right of display reading.
Display Unit
ORDERING INFORMATION
* Displays are custom calibrated at no
charge before shipping.
MODEL
LPI-3C
Specify signal input scale, range,
engineering units, and decimal
location when ordering.
Aluminum engineering units plate
will be provided upon request at no
charge. (2.00" x 0.75")
Available plates are % RH, AMPS,
DEG C., DEG F., GPM, x10 GPM,
KW, KWH, PSIG, and "W.C.
GP3420
GP3430
LPI-3C
DESCRIPTION
4-1/2 digit LCD panel display*
4-1/2 digit display with black digits
A
4-1/2 digit display with amber digits
G
4-1/2 digit display with green digits
R
4-1/2 digit display with red digits
–
No enclosure
E
4-1/2 digit LCD panel display with enclosure
WMB
4-1/2 digit LCD panel display with small enclosure
E-DBL Two 4-1/2 digit LCD panel displays in a single enclosure
A
E-DBL
Example: LPI-3C-A-E-DBL Two amber 4-1/2 digit LCD
displays mounted in a single enclosure.
RELATED PRODUCTS
LPI-1C, LPI-3C, VPI-1C mounting plate, 3.40" x 2.00" (8.6 x 5.1 cm)
LPI-1C, LPI-3C, VPI-1C mounting plate, 3.40" x 3.00" (8.6 x 7.6 cm)
305
TEST EQUIPMENT/INDICATION
FEATURES
TEST EQUIPMENT/INDICATION
3-1/2 DIGIT LARGE BLACK / RED / GREEN / AMBER PANEL DISPLAY
MODELS LPI-4, LPI-4R, LPI-4G, LPI-4A
DESCRIPTION
The Model LPI-4 loop-powered indicator features a large 1"
(2.54 cm) 3-1/2 digit display. It is designed to display any 4-20
mA signal in desired scale. The Model LPI-4 is powered directly from the 4-20 mA signal loop, so the black LCD display does
not require a separate power supply. It is also available in a 24
VDC-powered version with red, green, or amber digits.
LPI-4
TEST EQUIPMENT/INDICATION
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
LPI-4G
Indication of 4-20 mA signal in desired scale
3-1/2 digit LCD display
Large, easy-to-read digits
Available in either black, red, green, or amber digits
Precalibrated for desired range
Snap-in panel mount with retainer
Negative range indicator
Includes weather-resistant seal
Optional jumper-selectable display units °F, °C, %, PSI
LPI-4R
APPLICATIONS
•
•
•
Temperature
Humidity
Pressure
LPI-4A
•
•
•
Kilowatt demand
Gallons per minute
Voltage/current
SPECIFICATIONS
Signal
Power
Black
Red/Green/Amber
Impedance
Digit count
Digit size
Decimal point
Range
Accuracy
Ambient
Cutout required
Dimensions
Weight
WIRING
4-20 mA
Loop powered
24 VDC, 35 mA max
3001
3-1/2 digits (1999 max)
1" (2.54 cm)
Three positions or none (1.0.0.0)
-1999 to +1999
±0.05% of scale plus one digit
32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
95% noncondensing
1.77" x 3.62" (4.5 x 9.2 cm)
1.89"H 3.78"W x 1.8"D
(4.8 x 9.6 x 4.6 cm)
4 oz (113g)
Power Supply
24 VDC
Power Supply
24 VDC
+ Sensor/ +
Transmitter
+ +
-
BAS Input
or Other
4-20 mA Load
+ -
Sensor/
Transmitter
+
-
-
+ 4-20 mA Load
BAS Input
or Other
+ - + -
SIG
SIG
SPAN
B/L
ZERO
SPAN
LPI-4
ZERO
LPI-4R, G, A
ORDERING INFORMATION
LPI-4
LPI-4R
LPI-4G
LPI-4A
3-1/2 digit black panel display
3-1/2 digit red panel display
3-1/2 digit green panel display
3-1/2 digit amber panel display
Displays are custom calibrated at no charge before shipping. Specify scale, range, and decimal location when ordering.
Aluminum engineering units plate will be provided upon request at no charge (2.00" x 0.75" tag with 0.125" letters).
Available plates are % RH, AMPS, DEG C., DEG F., GPM, x10 GPM, KW, KWH, PSIG, and "W.C.
GP5132
306
RELATED PRODUCTS
LPI-4 mounting plate, 5.13" x 3.25" (13.0 x 8.3 cm)
TEST EQUIPMENT/INDICATION
3-1/2 DIGIT SMALL BLACK / RED PANEL DISPLAY
MODELS LPI-5, LPI-5R
DESCRIPTION
The Model LPI-5 loop-powered indicator features a small 0.37"
(0.94 cm), 3-1/2 digit, black LCD or red LED display. The meter
displays any 4-20 mA signal in desired scale. The Model LPI-5
is powered directly from the 4-20 mA signal loop, so the black
LCD display and red LED display do not require a separate
power supply.
FEATURES
LPI-5
Indication of 4-20 mA signal in desired scale
Loop powered
3-1/2 digit display
Snap-in panel mounting
Small, easy-to-read display
Precalibrated for desired range
Selectable decimal point location
Positive-to-negative indication (black LCD display)
APPLICATION
• Temperature
• Humidity
• Pressure
• Kilowatt demand
• GPM
• Voltage/current
LPI-5R
SPECIFICATIONS
Signal
Impedance
Black
Red
Digit count
Digit size
Decimal
Range
Red
Black
Accuracy
Engineering units
4-20 mA
Ambient temp
3001
3801
3-1/2 digits max
0.37" (0.94 cm)
Three positions or none
Dimensions
Red
Black
0 to 1999
-1999 to 1999, min span 100 digit counts
±0.1% of scale plus one digit
Black LCD only
M1, k1, °C, m, V, °F, A, µ
Cutout
Red
Black
Weight
32° to 130°F (0° to 54°C)
95% RH noncondensing
1.28"H x 1.82"W x 1.6"D
(3.25 x 4.64 x 4.0 cm)
0.95"H x 1.73"W x 1.1"D
(2.4 x 4.4 x 2.8 cm)
0.8"H x 1.3"W (2.0 x 3.3 cm)
0.86"H x 1.57"W ( 2.2 x 4.0 cm)
2 oz (57g)
WIRING
24 VDC Power Supply
+ - BAS Input
or Other
+ 4-20 mA Load
+
Sensor/
Transmitter - 4-20 mA
Factory Calibrated
(No field calibration needed)
SIG
LPI-5
or
LPI-5R
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
LPI-5
LPI-5R
DESCRIPTION
3-1/2 digit small black LCD panel display
3-1/2 digit small red LED panel display
Displays are custom calibrated at no charge before shipping. Specify scale, range, and decimal location when ordering.
Aluminum engineering units plate will be provided upon request at no charge. (2" x 0.75")
Available plates are % RH, AMPS, DEG C., DEG F., GPM, x10 GPM, KW, KWH, PSIG, and "W.C.
307
TEST EQUIPMENT/INDICATION
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
TEST EQUIPMENT/INDICATION
3-1/2 DIGIT LCD PANEL DISPLAY
VPI SERIES
DESCRIPTION
TEST EQUIPMENT/INDICATION
The VPI Series is a voltage-input, 24 VDC-powered, 3-1/2 digit
display. Along with the standard black digits, colors of amber,
green, and red, powered by 24 VDC, are also available. The
VPI Series uses a voltage signal of 0-5 or 0-10 VDC that can
be scaled to a span of 2000 digits within a range of -1999 to
1999. This display also features jumper-selectable, built-in
engineering units of °F, °C, PSI, %, or no units. The VPI-4
offers large, easy-to-read 1" (2.54 cm) digits.
VPI-1C-G
(typical panel mount)
VPI-1C-WMB
FEATURES
• 0-5 or 0-10 VDC signal input
• 3-1/2 digit, easy-to-read LCD display
• Voltage-input signal
• Available in black, amber, green, and red digits
• Snap-in panel mounting
• Enclosure options available
• Precalibrated before shipping
• Positive-to-negative indication
• Jumper-selectable engineering unit display of °F, °C, PSI, %
APPLICATION
• Temperature
• Humidity
• Pressure
• Differential or static pressure
• Kilowatt demand
• Gallons per minute
VPI-1C-R-E
VPI-1C-A-E-DBL
• Voltage
• Many other voltage signal
applications
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
Power
Colored digits
24 VDC @ 35 mA
Black digits
24 VDC @ 10 mA
Input signal
0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC
Impedance
400 k1
Accuracy
0.1% of scale plus one digit
Digit size
VPI-1C
0.5" (1.27 cm)
VPI-4
1.0" (2.54 cm)
Decimal point
Three positions or none
Zero range
-1999 to 1999
Digit span
2000 digits
Operating temp
32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Humidity
95% noncondensing
Cutout required
VPI-1C
1.00"H x 2.40"W (2.54 x 6.10 cm)
VPI-4
1.77"H x 3.62"W (4.5 x 9.2 cm)
Panel clearance
1.0" (5.08 cm)
Enclosure option (VPI-1C only)
E (NEMA 1)
4.75"H x 4.75"W x 3"D
(12.07 x 12.07 x 7.6 cm)
WMB
2.12''H x 3.12''W x 1.75''D
(5.4 x 7.94 x 4.45 cm)
Weight
2.3 oz (56.7g)
Power Supply
24 VDC
Power connection only
required for amber, green,
or red display.
Voltage
Input
+ PWR
+ SIG
+
BL
5V
10V
OFFSET
* PWR- and SIGmust be externally
connected together
5V Span Pot
10V Span Pot
Offset (ZERO) Pot
VPI
ORDERING INFORMATION
* Displays are custom calibrated at no charge before
shipping.
Specify signal input (0-5V or 0-10V) scale, range,
engineering units, and decimal location when ordering.
Aluminum engineering units plate will be provided
upon request at no charge. (2.00" x 0.75")
Available plates are % RH, AMPS, DEG C., DEG F.,
GPM, x10 GPM, KW, KWH, PSIG, and "W.C.
GP3420
GP3430
308
MODEL DESCRIPTION
VPI-4
3-1/2 digit panel display*, 1'' (2.54 cm) digits
VPI-1C 3-1/2 digit panel display*, 0.5'' (1.27 cm) digits
–
3-1/2 digit display with black digits
A
3-1/2 digit display with amber digits (VPI-1C only)
G
3-1/2 digit display with green digits (VPI-1C only)
R
3-1/2 digit display with red digits (VPI-1C only)
–
No enclosure
E
3-1/2 digit LCD panel display with enclosure (VPI-1C only)
WMB
3-1/2 digit LCD panel display with small enclosure (VPI-1C only)
E-DBL Two 3-1/2 digit LCD panel displays in one enclosure (VPI-1C only)
VPI-1C
A
E-DBL
Example: VPI-1C-A-E-DBL Two amber 3-1/2 digit
displays mounted in a single enclosure
RELATED PRODUCTS
LPI-1C, LPI-3C, VPI-1C mounting plate, 3.40" x 2.00" (8.6 x 5.1 cm)
LPI-1C, LPI-3C, VPI-1C mounting plate, 3.40" x 3.00" (8.6 x 7.6 cm)
TR A N
S TO
ERS
SDUC
MILLIA
MP
SD U C
TATE
TRI-S TING)
(FLOA
E
VOLTAG
S
RS
DUCE
22
UCP-4
42
UCP-2
ATIC
NEUM
ARD
TAND Y
CIT
CAPA
MATIC
PNEU H
HIG
CITY
CAPA
MATIC
PNEU
TRIAL
INDUS
CITY
CAPA
ANCE
22-V
UCP-4
22
UCP-5
22
UCP-6
0
T-100
-16
22/07
LE
ER SE
C TI O
EPULS
H
WIDT
N
RESIS
EMATIC
PULSWITH
PNEU
H
WIDTIPLEXING
MULTINPUT
IES
BILIT
CAPA
-44
22-R
P-422
UCP-3 -44T UC
22
UCP-4
22
UCP-5
22
UCP-6
22
UCP-3 T
22
UCP-5 T
22
UCP-6
22
UCP-5
22
UCP-6
0
T-100
22
UCP-5
22
UCP-6
RES-1
RES-1
RES-1
RES-1
WA-1T
A
PWA-1
A
PWA-2
A
PWA-1
A
PWA-2
PVI-1
PVI-2
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
MODEL/SERIES
PAGE
Transducer Selection Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
PRODUCTS
The DT-13
Isolated DCto-DC Transmitter elimi-
nates ground loop wiring
problems.
MULTIPLEXERS
UCS-121 — Sequencer Control Module - 1 Stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
UCS-221 — Sequencer Control Module - 2 Stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
UCS-421 — Sequencer Control Module - 4 Stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
UCS-621 — Sequencer Control Module - 6 Stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
UMX — Multi-function Input/Output Expander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
SERVICES
Tell us the signal you need.
Our Tech Reps will find
the right product for you.
TR A N
S TO
ERS
SDUC
MP
MILLIA
SD U C
TATE
TRI-S TING)
(FLOA
E
VOLTAG
S
DUCE
RS
22
UCP-4
42
UCP-2
ATIC
NEUM
ARD
TAND Y
CIT
CAPA
MATIC
PNEU H
HIG
CITY
CAPA
MATIC
PNEU
TRIAL
INDUS
CITY
CAPA
UCP-4
22
UCP-5
22
UCP-6
0
T-100
-16
22/07
LE
ER SE
22-V
C TI O
EPULS
H
WIDT
N
RESIS
EMATIC
PULSWITH
PNEU
H
WIDTIPLEXING
MULTINPUT
IES
BILIT
CAPA
-44
22-R
P-422
UCP-3 -44T UC
22
UCP-4
22
UCP-5
22
UCP-6
22
UCP-3 T
22
UCP-5 T
22
UCP-6
22
UCP-5
22
UCP-6
0
T-100
22
UCP-5
22
UCP-6
RES-1
RES-1
RES-1
RES-1
ANCE
WA-1T
A
PWA-1
A
PWA-2
A
PWA-1
A
PWA-2
PVI-1
PVI-2
SOLUTIONS
Match your inputs and outputs using the Transducer
Selection Chart
on page 309!
ELECTRONIC TRANSDUCERS
DT13 — Isolated DC-to-DC Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
PWA — Pulse/Tri-state-to-Analog Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
PXZ4 — Setpoint Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
RES-1 — Universal Resistance Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
UAT-1, UAT-2 — Universal Analog Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
UCM-420A — Setpoint Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
UMM-1, UMM-2 — Universal Math Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
VTI — Voltage and Current Converter/Rescaler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCERS
22/07-16 — Current/Pneumatic Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
T-1000 — Current/Pneumatic Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
UCP-242 — Current/Pneumatic Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
UCP-322 — Tri-state/Pneumatic Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
UCP-422 — Electronic/Pneumatic Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
UCP-422 Options — Options for UCP-422 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317-319
UCP-522 — Universal Electronic/Pneumatic Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
UCP-622 — Universal Electronic/Pneumatic Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
TRANSDUCER SELECTION CHART
TRANSDUCER SELECTION
INPUTS TO
TRANSDUCERS
VOLTAGE
PNEUMATIC
STANDARD
CAPACITY
UCP-422
UCP-242
UCP-422-V
PNEUMATIC
HIGH
CAPACITY
UCP-522
UCP-622
UCP-522
UCP-622
PNEUMATIC
INDUSTRIAL
CAPACITY
T-1000
22/07-16
T-1000
RESISTANCE
RES-1
RES-1
ANALOG
(MILLIAMP OR
VOLTAGE)
VTI-1 VTI-2 VTI-1
UAT UMM UAT
VTI-2
UMM
TRI-STATE
(FLOATING)
PULSEWIDTH
UCP-322-R
UCP-422-44T UCP-422-44
UCP-322
UCP-522T
UCP-622T
PWA-1T
PWA-2T
UCP-522
UCP-622
UCP-522
UCP-622
RES-1
RES-1
PWA-1A
PWA-2A
PWA-1A
PWA-2A
ISOLATED ANALOG
(MILLIAMP OR
VOLTAGE)
DT-13
DT-13
DIGITAL
ONE-STAGE
UCS-121
UCS-121
UMX-4
DIGITAL
TWO-STAGE
UMX-4
UCS-221
UMX-4
UCS-221
UMX-4
DIGITAL
FOUR-STAGE
UMX-4
UCS-421
DIGITAL
SIX-STAGE
UMX-8
UCS-621
UMX-8
UCS-621
UMX-8
DIGITAL
EIGHT-STAGE
UMX-8
UMX-8
UMX-8
TRI-STATE
(FLOATING)
UCS-221
UCS-421
UCS-621
SETPOINT CONTROL
PXZ4
(MILLIAMP
UCM-420A
OR VOLTAGE)
UMX-4
UCS-421
PVI-1
PVI-2
VTI-1-XR1
VTI-2-XR1
UAT
UMX-4
UCS-221
UCS-421
UCS-621
PXZ4
UCM-420A
UCM-420A
UCM-420A
UCM-420A
309
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
MILLIAMP
OUTPUTS
FROM
TRANSDUCERS
PULSEWIDTH WITH
MULTIPLEXING PNEUMATIC RESISTANCE
INPUT
CAPABILITIES
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
MULTIPLEXED PWM OPERATION
FOR MODELS UCP-522, UCP-622, UCM-420A, PWA-1A, PWA-2A, AND RES-1
DESCRIPTION
The multiplexed pulse-width modulation (PWM) mode of control is a unique feature of some of the output transducers in this catalog. This mode of control allows a single pulse-width modulated output from a BAS controller to individually address and control
up to eight transducers. Transducer Models RES-1, UCP-522, UCP-622, UCM-420A, PWA-1A, and PWA-2A are furnished standard with this feature, which can be enabled by DIP switches on the transducer. Refer to individual catalog pages for more details
on configuring these transducers for this mode of control.
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
OPERATION
FIGURE 1. EXAMPLE OF MULTIPLEX OPERATION
After enabling the multiplexed PWM control mode, each transducer is assigned an address (1-8) by DIP switches so that it
may be independently controlled to produce the desired output (see Table 1). To change the output of a transducer, the
controller must send three types of pulses (see Figure 1).
Attention Pulse
This is the first pulse in the sequence that initializes the transducers, putting them in the attention mode on stand-by to
receive additional pulses. The attention pulse is one second
longer than the maximum pulse for the PWM time base
selected. (For example, the attention pulse for the 5.2-second
time base would be 6.2 seconds.)
Select Pulse
This is one of eight possible pulses that chooses the transducer address to be updated (see Table 2 for the various time
bases). The transducer receiving a select pulse that matches
its address is put on stand-by to receive a control pulse. The
transducers that have not been selected will not respond to
the control pulse.
Control Pulse
This pulse controls the selected transducer. The selected
transducer will adjust its output in proportion to the control
pulse input.
Important! To send a new control pulse, the controller must
send the attention and select pulses again.
BAS Controller
PWM Contact
+
–
Address #1
Transducer
Time Base: 5.2 sec
Attention Pulse: 6.2 sec
30% Output
Address #2
Transducer
30% Output
Address #3
Transducer
30% Output
Note: All addresses receive an attention pulse of 6.2 sec.
Attention Pulse
BAS Controller
PWM Contact
+
–
Address #1
Transducer
Select Pulse: 1.0 sec
Control Pulse: 5.2 sec
30% Output
Address #2
Transducer
100% Output
Address #3
Transducer
30% Output
Address #1 and #3 have received the 1.0 sec select pulse that does not
match their address. Therefore, they continue their previous output,
ignoring any control pulse that follows.
Address #2 has received the 1.0 sec select pulse matching its address
and has responded to the 5.2 sec control pulse, increasing its output
to 100%.
Select and Control Pulses
TABLE 1. MULTIPLEX ADDRESS SETTINGS*
MULTIPLEX
ADDRESS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
6
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
On
DIP SWITCH
7
Off
Off
On
On
Off
Off
On
On
TABLE 2. SELECT PULSE TIMES*
8
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
2.65 sec**
0.2
0.6
0.9
1.2
1.5
1.9
2.2
2.5
TIME BASE
5.2 sec
12.85 sec
0.4
0.9
1.0
2.5
1.7
4.1
2.3
5.7
3.0
7.3
3.6
8.9
4.3
10.5
4.9
12.1
*The values in Tables 1 and 2 apply to all transducers with the multiplex PWM control mode.
** The 2.65-second time base is not recommended for multiplexed operation unless the BAS
controller guarantees an accuracy of 0.05 seconds or better for its PWM output.
310
25.6 sec
1.6
4.8
8.0
11.2
14.4
17.6
20.9
24.0
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
CURRENT / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCER
MODEL UCP-242
DESCRIPTION
The Model UCP-242 Current/Pneumatic Transducer
provides low cost pneumatic control of valves, dampers,
or other pneumatic devices. The Model UCP-242
comes with snap-track for easy mounting. Quick-disconnect terminals provide easy wiring removal for servicing.
Barbed fittings for 1/4" plastic tubing and an inline filter
are provided.
The Model UCP-242 accepts a 4-20 mA signal and outputs 3-15 psig. The unit is loop-powered, requiring no
power supply for controlling pneumatic devices. Upon a
loss of signal, the Model UCP-242 will eventually bleed
the pressure in the branch line. This transducer is wellsuited for the control of small to medium volume loads,
such as small to medium pneumatic actuators. Large
volume loads, such as large pneumatic actuators, or
long tubing runs may also be controlled but will exhibit a
slower response time.
DIMENSIONS / WIRING / PIPING
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Low cost
Inline filter provided
Snap-track mounting
1/4" (0.64 cm) barbed tube connectors
Quick-disconnect terminals
Loop-powered control
Excellent linearity
Low hysteresis
No calibration required
in
(cm)
Air Connections
Main (Supply): black
Branch (Output): white or clear
3.25
(8.3)
4-20 mA
Signal
–
+
COM
SIG +
4.63
(11.75)
Depth: 2 (5.1)
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply voltage
Input impedance
Max pressure
Air consumption
Air capacity
Temp
Humidity
None, loop-powered
5001 nominal
25 psig (172.4 kPa)
0.008 scfm @ 20 psig
(3.8 cm3/sec @ 137.9 kPa)
515 scim @ 20 psig
(135 cm3/sec @ 137.9 kPa)
32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
5% to 95% RH noncondensing
Output
Input
Linearity
Hysteresis
Dimensions
Weight
3-15 psig
(20.7-103.4 kPa)
4-20 mA
2% of span
1% of span
3.25"H x 4.625"W x 2.0"D
(8.3 x 11.75 x 5.08 cm)
0.6 lb (0.27 kg)
311
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
OPERATION
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
CURRENT / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCER
MODEL UCP-242
INSTALLATION / WIRING / CHECKOUT
Installation
Mount the UCP-242 inside a NEMA 1 control panel in a clean, dry environment. Barbed fittings are provided for terminating 1/4" (0.64 cm) plastic tubing. The UCP-242 must be mounted in an upright position (refer to arrows on
unit). For best results, the transducer should be mounted within five degrees of upright position. Wire terminations
are marked for 4-20 mA operation.
Wiring
Make all electrical connections in accordance with job wiring diagrams and in compliance with local and national
electrical codes. Wiring terminations are made on screw terminals labeled SIG + and COM.
Checkout
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
Verify with a meter that a 4-20 mA DC signal is present and that polarity is correct. Verify that 20 psig (137.9 kPa)
main air is present. Be sure the UCP-242 is mounted in an upright position.
To check transducer operation:
1. Adjust the input signal to 20 mA. Branch pressure should be 15 psig (103.4 kPa).
2. Adjust the input signal to 4 mA. Branch pressure should be 3 psig (20.7 kPa).
Note: This is a rough functional check only. The UCP-242 is a highly accurate device and laboratory
quality meters and gauges are required to properly check calibration.
CAUTION: The Model UCP-242 utilizes parts that can be damaged by supply air containing synthetic
compressor oil vapor, acid fumes, or other corrosive vapors. Synthetic compressor oils must not be
used. Standard control air filtering practices should be observed:
• Supply air must be dried, oil-separated, and filtered using a refrigerated air dryer, a particulate filter,
and a coalescing type filter.
• The system must be properly maintained such that all particles larger than 0.03 microns are filtered
out and that less than 0.1 ppm oil vapor exists.
• At the compressor, using an absorbent pre-filter followed by a coalescing oil removal filter, such
as the K-337 or K-339, is recommended.
• Using a Model A-4000-120 oil-indicating device prior to installing any UCP-242 is also recommended.
This oil-indicating device will provide an indication of the amount of oil being discharged from the air
compressor.
• At the UCP-242, installing the inline filter (Model FILN05 provided with the UCP-242) in the main
air line is recommended.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
UCP-242
DESCRIPTION
Current/Pneumatic transducer, 4-20 mA/3-15 psig (20.7-103.4 kPa)
PG-05
B-373-1
312
RELATED PRODUCTS
Pressure gauge, 0-30 psig (10-200 kPa)
Gauge tee with mounting tabs
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
TRI-STATE / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCER
MODEL UCP-322
DESCRIPTION
The Model UCP-322 Tri-state/Pneumatic Transducer
is designed for direct digital control of pneumatic valves
and dampers. Its low cost makes it ideal for applications
on variable air volume terminal boxes. The transducer
features low current, high cycle-rated, electro/pneumatic
valves mounted in a sturdy plastic enclosure. For manual
control of the output pressure, increase and decrease
switches are furnished. LED visual status is provided to
verify the correct air valve selection. Visual pressure indication is available using an optional top-mounted gauge.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Low cost
Slim-line mounting to save panel space
Universal mounting tabs
No-bleed air consumption
Totally enclosed with 1/4" (0.64 cm) barbed tubing
connectors
Momentary manual override for quick checkout
Valve status LEDs
AC/DC operation, low power draw
Quick-disconnect terminals for easy field service
Not position sensitive
OPTIONS
Restricted Output (R) - 0.007 restrictor for installation
in the branch line; recommended for the control of
small pneumatic volumes
Feedback (F) - Allows remote electronic readout
of the output pressure; standard calibration is for 4-20 mA
3-15 psig (20.7-103.4 kPa)
Pressure Gauge Indication (43) - Allows for local
pressure indication without giving up valuable panel
space
DIN Rail Mounting Adapter (47) - Allows the UCP-322
to be mounted with other devices on the same track
Shown with Optional Pressure Gauge
APPLICATION
The Model UCP-322 is controlled from two discrete contact
closures or one tri-state output from a controlling computer.
The increase or decrease air valves may be pulsed to vary
the branch pressure. The Model UCP-322 does not contain
internal control circuitry to maintain branch pressure after the
control signal is removed. For this feature, Trane recommends the Model UCP-522-T. When controlling small volume
loads, such as small pneumatic actuators, the restricted output option R is recommended to provide better control resolution. On a loss of power or with both computer contacts open,
the increase and decrease air valves remain closed.
The branch pressure can be manually controlled during
checkout by pressing the increase or decrease momentary
override push buttons located on the UCP-322. Note that
the jumpers must be in manual position and power applied
before the push buttons will work. For checkout situations
where the pneumatic connections are complete but no control power is available, a portable battery pack may be used
to provide power for manual valve positioning.
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply voltage
Power rating
Output
Output capacity
Restricted
Unrestricted
Max pressure
Input
24 VAC/VDC @ ±10%
1.5W
0 to main air pressure
46 scim @ 20 psig
(12.6 cm3/sec @ 137.8 kPa)
1030 scim @ 20 psig
(281.3 cm3 /sec @ 137.8 kPa)
30 psig (206.8 kPa)
Tri-state (floating)
Dimensions
Weight
Temp
Humidity
Optional feedback
3.4"H* x 2"W x 4.8"D
(8.6 x 5.08 x 12.2 cm)
1.27 lb (0.58 kg)
32° to 110°F (0° to 43°C)
5% to 95% RH noncondensing
4-20 mA/3-15 psig (20.7-103.4 kPa),
6501 max load
0-20 psig (0-137.9 kPa) adjustable
*Add 1.2'' (3.0 cm) for mounting tabs; add 2.3'' (5.8 cm)
for optional gauge assembly.
313
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
FEATURES
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
TRI-STATE / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCER
MODEL UCP-322
INSTALLATION / WIRING / DIMENSIONS
Mount the UCP-322 in a clean, dry environment, such as a NEMA 1 control panel. Barbed fittings are provided for
terminating 1/4" OD (0.64 cm) plastic tubing. The transducer is not position sensitive. Restrictor: If restricted air
volume is desired, a 0.007 restrictor (R option) must be ordered to be field-installed in series with the branch output.
in
(cm)
Removable
Mounting Tabs
0.7
(1.78)
Optional
Gauge Assembly
(rotate 90 degrees for
two-position display)
6.3
(16.00)
Feedback Zero Pot
Feedback Span Pot
I
N
C
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
Jumper (shown in
manual position)
PWR Connection
(required for manual
operation and
feedback output only)
D
E
C
A
A
Optional 4-20 mA
Feedback Output
M
M
INC
DEC
UCP-322
A/M
FBK
INC
PWR
INC
24 VAC/VDC
Supply
DEC
COM
BAS Computer
Controlled
Tri-State Contacts
3.4
(8.64)
B
Branch
M
Main
Optional
DIN Rail
Adapter
4.0
(10.16)
4.6
(11.68)
DEC
4.8
(12.19)
Removable
Mounting Tabs
For BAS computer operation, the jumpers must be in the automatic A position. The transducer is 24
VAC/VDC powered. Manual operation and feedback output are only possible if 24V is wired to the PWR
terminal. The jumpers must be in the manual M position before the push buttons will work.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
UCP-322
UCP-322
314
DESCRIPTION
Tri-state/Pneumatic transducer, 24 VAC/VDC
OPTIONS
F
Feedback – allows remote 4-20 mA electronic readout of the
output pressure (factory-installed option only)
R
Restricted output – includes 0.007 restrictor for installation in the branch line,
field-installed. Recommended for the control of small pneumatic volumes.
R
43
UCO-43 pressure gauge indication (0-30 psig/0-200 kPa) – allows for local pressure
indication without sacrificing valuable panel space (factory-installed option only)
47
UCO-47 DIN rail mounting adapter – allows the UCP-322 to be mounted along
with other devices on the same rail (factory-installed option only)
43
47
Example: UCP-322-R-43-47 Tri-state/Pneumatic transducer with restricted
output, pressure indication, and DIN rail mounting
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
ELECTRONIC / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCER
MODEL UCP-422
DESCRIPTION
The Model UCP-422 Electronic/Pneumatic
Transducer provides low-cost pneumatic control of
valves, dampers, or other pneumatic devices. The Model
UCP-422 consists of a totally enclosed transducer with
provisions for optional DIN rail or surface mounting in
either of two planes. Externally-mounted pneumatic filters are not required. Quick-disconnect terminals provide easy wiring removal for servicing. When DIN rail
mounting is used, this compact controller requires only
a 4"H x 2"W (10.2 x 5.1 cm) mounting area, providing
efficient use of panel space.
The Model UCP-422 accepts a 4-20 mA signal and
outputs 3-15 psig (20.7-103.4 kPa). Used in its base
configuration, it requires no power supply for controlling
pneumatic devices. Upon a loss of signal or power, the
Model UCP-422 will eventually bleed the pressure in the
branch line. This transducer is well suited for the control
of small to medium volume loads, such as small to medium pneumatic actuators. Large volume loads, such as
large pneumatic actuators, or long tubing runs may also
be controlled but will exhibit slower response time.
FEATURES
• Low cost
• Slim-line mounting to
save panel space
• Universal mounting
tabs
• Totally enclosed
• 1/4" (0.64 cm) barbed
tube connectors
• Quick-disconnect
terminals
• Loop-powered control
(base model)
• No external filter required
• Excellent linearity
• Low hysteresis
• No calibration required
Shown with Optional Pressure Gauge
DIMENSIONS / WIRING / PIPING
in
(cm)
Removable
Mounting Tabs
UCP-422
3.4
(8.6)
Optional
DIN Rail
Adapter
4-20 mA
Signal
–
+
COM
SIG IN +
B
M
• Feedback and limited
span adjustment
• Failsafe
• Manual output
adjustment
6.3
(16)
4.0
(10.1)
4.6
(11.7)
Branch
Main
4.8
(12.2)
OPTIONS
• DIN rail mounting
• Pressure gauge
• PWM input
• Tri-state input
Optional Gauge
Assembly (rotate 90°
for two-position display)
0.7
(1.8)
Removable
Mounting Tabs
2.0
(5.0)
2.75
(6.9)
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply voltage
UCP-422 without options
None, loop-powered
UCP-422 with internal options 24 VAC/VDC ±10%
@ 180 mA max
Input impedance
UCP-422 without options
5001 nominal
Max pressure
25 psig (172.4 kPa)
Air consumption
0.008 scfm @ 20 psig
(3.8 cm3/sec @ 137.9 kPa)
Air capacity
Temp
Humidity
Output
Input
Linearity
Hysteresis
Weight
515 scim @ 20 psig
(141 cm3/sec @ 137.9 kPa)
32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
5% to 95% RH noncondensing
3-15 psig (20.7-103.4 kPa)
4-20 mA
2% of span
1% of span
1.4 lb max (0.64 kg)
315
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
OPERATION
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
ELECTRONIC / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCER
MODEL UCP-422
INSTALLATION / WIRING / CHECKOUT
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
Installation
Mount the UCP-422 inside a NEMA 1 control panel in a clean, dry environment. Barbed fittings are provided for terminating 1/4"
(0.64 cm) plastic tubing. The UCP-422 must be mounted in an upright position (refer to arrow on unit). For best results, the transducer should be mounted within five degrees of the upright position.
Wiring
Make all electrical connections in accordance with job wiring diagrams and in compliance with national and local electrical codes.
Wiring terminations are made on screw terminals labeled SIG IN + and COM. Other terminals are provided where options are specified (See options for UCP-422 on the following pages).
Checkout
Verify with a meter that a 4-20 mA DC signal is present and that polarity is correct. Verify that 20 psig (137.9 kPa) main air is present. Be sure the UCP-422 is mounted in the upright position. Note: This is a rough functional check only. The UCP-422 is a highly
accurate device, and laboratory quality meters and gauges are required to properly check calibration.
To check transducer operation:
1. Adjust the input signal to 20 mA (or appropriate max DC voltage input). Branch pressure should be 15 psig (103.4 kPa).
2. Adjust the input signal to 4 mA (or appropriate min DC voltage input). Branch pressure should be 3 psig (20.7 kPa).
CAUTION: The Model UCP-422 uses parts that can be damaged by supply air containing synthetic compressor oil
vapor, acid fumes, or other corrosive vapors. Synthetic compressor oils must not be used. Standard control air
filtering practices should be observed:
• Supply air must be dried, oil-separated, and filtered using a refrigerated air dryer, a particulate filter and a coalescing type filter.
• The system must be properly maintained such that all particles larger than 0.03 microns are filtered out and
that less than 0.1 ppm oil vapor exists.
• At the compressor, using an absorbent pre-filter followed by a coalescing oil removal filter, such as the K-337
or K-339, is recommended.
• Prior to the installation of any UCP-422, using a Model A-4000-120 oil-indicating device to determine the
amount of oil being discharged from the air compressor is recommended.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
UCP-422
DESCRIPTION
Electronic/Pneumatic transducer, 4-20 mA / 3-15 psig (20.7-103.4 kPa)
OPTIONS
F
M
Loop-powered manual adjust
M2
24V-powered manual adjust
V#
Voltage input V1: 1-5V, V2: 2-10V, V3: 3-15V (factory-installed option only)
EP3
316
M
Manual output adjust allows easy checkout and manual selection
of the output pressure (factory-installed option only)
43
UCO-43 Pressure gauge indication (0-30 psig/0-200 kPa) - allows for local pressure indication
without giving up valuable panel space (factory-installed option only)
44
UCO-44 Pulse-width modulation - features selectable pulse-width time bases of 0.1-2.65,
5.2, 12.85, 25.6, or 0.59-2.93 sec (factory-installed option only)
44T
UCO-44T Tri-state input - allows variable pneumatic output control based on a selectable
tri-state input time base (factory-installed option only)
47
UCP-422
(for more information on each option, see the following catalog pages)
Feedback loop control allows remote electronic readout of the output pressure. Units equipped with
feedback loop control may be calibrated between 3 and 15 psig. Special input/output calibrations should
be specified at time of order entry (i.e., 4-20 mA/8-13 psig). (factory-installed option only)
43
UCO-47 DIN rail mounting adapter - allows the UCP-422 to be mounted along with other devices
on the same rail (factory-installed option only)
47
Example: UCP-422-M-43-47 Electronic/Pneumatic transducer, 4-20 mA to
3-15 psig, manual output adjust, pressure gauge, DIN rail
RELATED PRODUCTS
Air valve (to allow a back-up device to assume control upon a system failure)
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
OPTIONS FOR MODEL UCP-422
M OPTION
DESCRIPTION
The M Option Manual Output Adjust allows local adjustment of the Model UCP-422 output. This feature simplifies
checkout and troubleshooting and is available in both loop-powered and 24V-powered configurations. The 24V-powered configuration is provided standard when the M Option is ordered with the Feedback (F), Voltage (V), Pulse
Width (44), or Tri-state (44T) options for the Model UCP-422.
UCP-422-M LOOP-POWERED MANUAL ADJUST
EN
DIS
For normal operation, place jumper plug
over two posts next to DIS (disable).
Jumper (shown in
normal position)
M
A
N
U
A
L
Manual Adjust
Pot
EN
DIS
For manual override, place jumper plug
over two posts next to EN (enable).
Turn manual pot to adjust output
pressure.
EN
COM
SIG IN +
Input
Signal
Important! The UCP-422 is loop-powered.
For manual override operation, the input signal must be at 20 mA, or 24 VDC may be
applied to the input terminals.
B Branch
M Main
4-20 mA Loop-Powered UCP-422 only
No 24V-Powered Options
UCP-422-M2 24V-POWERED MANUAL ADJUST
EN
DIS
For normal operation, place jumper plug
over two posts next to DIS (disable).
EN
DIS
For manual override, place jumper plug
over two posts next to EN (enable).
Turn manual pot to adjust output pressure.
Important! For manual override operation,
24V power must be applied to the +24 VDC
and COM terminals. 24V power is not
required for normal transducer operation,
unless options F, V, 44, or 44T are ordered.
Jumper (shown in
normal position)
DIS
Manual Adjust
Pot
24 VAC/VDC
Power Supply
Input
Signal
EN
M
A
N
U
A
L
AUX
24 VDC
FBK OUT
SIG IN COM
SIG IN +
B Branch
M Main
UCP-422-M2 with or without
24V-Powered Options (F, V, 44, 44T)
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
UCP-422-M
UCP-422-M2
DESCRIPTION
Electronic/Pneumatic transducer with loop-powered manual output adjust option
Electronic/Pneumatic transducer with 24V-powered manual output adjust option
317
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
DIS
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
OPTIONS FOR MODEL UCP-422
F, V OPTIONS
DESCRIPTION
The Feedback Loop Control F Option outputs a current sourcing 4-20 mA signal representative
of the branch output pressure. The standard range is 4-20 mA to 3-15 psig (20.7-103.4 kPa).
F Option also allows for custom ranging the output (i.e., 4-20 mA to 8-13 psig). Any range from
3-15 psig (with a minimum 5 psig span) can be field-calibrated. This option requires 24 VAC/VDC.
WIRING
CAL
Normal
jumper position
RECALIBRATION
CAL
CAL
Make all connections according to the wiring diagram, or as shown on the job diagrams, in
Calibrate
jumper position
compliance with national and local codes. Make all connections with power removed.
Failure to do so could result in circuit board damage.
AUX
24 VAC or +
2. Connect the highest quality gauge available to the branch line of the transducer.
24 VDC
24 VDC
FBK OUT
3. Move the jumper to the CAL position (see Wiring).
Power Supply –
SIG IN 4. Vary the input signal to the transducer until the gauge indicates the minimum branch
COM
Feedback +
pressure desired to output. If the transducer is equipped with the manual output adjust
SIG IN +
Load
–
option, set the minimum branch pressure by putting the manual output adjust jumper in
Input –
the ENABLE position and turning the manual pot.
UCP-422-F
Signal +
5. Adjust ZERO pot for 4 mA output from the transducer feedback terminals.
6. Repeat step 4 to set the maximum branch pressure. If maximum pressure cannot be
Power Requirements: 24 VAC @ 180 mA
reached, adjust GAIN pot.
24 VDC @ 90 mA
7. Adjust the SPAN pot for 20 mA output from the transducer feedback terminals.
Feedback Output: 4-20 mA, 800Ω max
8. Since SPAN and ZERO pots are interactive, repeat steps 4, 5, 6, and 7 until results are
accurate.
9. Move CAL jumper back to the normal position and move the manual output adjust jumper back to the disable position.
10. Input the maximum input signal and adjust the GAIN pot until the desired maximum pressure is indicated on the gauge.
11. The transducer is now recalibrated to the new output span.
1.
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
GAIN
ZERO
SPAN
DESCRIPTION
WIRING
The Voltage Input V Option allows the Model UCP-422 to be controlled by any voltage signal with a 5:1 ratio span. For example, the
voltage signal span could be 1-5V, 2-10V, or 3-15V. This option
requires 24 VAC/VDC power.
RECALIBRATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Make all connections according to the wiring diagram, or as shown
on the job diagram, in compliance with national and local codes.
Make all connections with power removed. Failure to do so could
result in circuit board damage.
Connect the highest quality gauge available to the branch line of
the transducer.
Apply the new input voltage desired for maximum pressure (limited
to a range of 5-15 VDC).
Adjust the GAIN pot until the pressure gauge shows a slight
change in pressure.
Now, adjust the GAIN pot until maximum pressure shows on the
gauge.
The transducer is now recalibrated to the new voltage input span
(max to min 5:1 ratio).
Field-Adjustable
Voltage
+
24 VAC/VDC
Power Supply
–
GAIN
AUX
24 VDC
FBK OUT
SIG IN COM
SIG IN +
Voltage Signal –
Input
+
UCP-422
318
Signal LED
UCP-422-V
Voltage Signal Input
Power Requirements
Impedance: 160 kΩ
Voltage Option Only: 24 VAC @ 75 mA
24 VDC @ 35 mA
Voltage and Feedback Options:
24 VAC @180 mA
24 VDC @ 90 mA
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
UCP-422
Power LED
DESCRIPTION
Electronic/Pneumatic transducer
OPTIONS
Feedback loop control (4-20 mA/3-15 psig standard)*
F
Voltage input V1:1-5V, V2: 2-10V, V3: 3-15V
V#
*Special ranges must be specified at time of order entry.
Important! Options cannot be field-installed.
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
OPTIONS FOR MODEL UCP-422
UCO-44, UCO-44T OPTIONS
DESCRIPTION
The UCO-44 and UCO-44T Options are designed to
be used with the Kele Model UCP-422 electronic/pneumatic transducer. The UCO-44 Option allows the
Model UCP-422 to be controlled by a pulse-width modulated (PWM) signal. The UCO-44T Option allows the
Model UCP-422 to be controlled by a tri-state input signal. These options are mounted in an expander ring
attached to the Model UCP-422.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Selectable PWM time base 0.1-2.65, 5.2, 12.85, 25.6, or
0.59-2.93 sec
Selectable tri-state time base 2.55, 5.1, 12.75, 25.5, 59.9,
90.5, or 119.9 sec
255-step resolution
Positive or negative input reference
AC/DC voltage
LED indication
OPERATION
Shown with Optional Pressure Gauge
DIMENSIONS
UCO-44 Option
The UCO-44 Option accepts a pulse-width modulated input
and produces an internal 4-20 mA current signal that controls
the Model UCP-422. The standard time base is 25.6 seconds
but is switch-selectable for any of the other four ranges. The
UCO-44 Option responds to the elapsed time when the controlling computer closes the contacts wired in series with the
signal SIG IN + or SIG IN - terminals. Each pulse received will
produce a corresponding pressure output. The transducer will
hold this signal until given a pulse with a different value.
in
(cm)
UCP-422 Enclosure
Side View
3.0
(7.6)
UCO-44/UCO-44T
Option
Expander Ring
4.8
(12.2)
UCO-44T Option
The UCO-44T Option is controlled from two discrete contact
closures or one tri-state output from a controlling computer.
Each signal given the transducer will ramp an internal 4-20 mA
signal up or down to control the Model UCP-422. A contact closure wired in series with the SIG IN + terminal will increase the
output in proportion to the length of the signal given. A contact
closure wired in series with the SIG IN - terminal will decrease
the output in proportion to the length of the signal given.
UCP-422
Enclosure
4.0
(10.1)
AUX
24
VDC
FBK
OUT
SIG
–
COM
Power LED
Signal LED
SIG
+
LED INDICATION
PWR LED - On when 24V is present
SIG LED - On only when an input signal is present
4.8
(12.2)
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply voltage
PWM time base
Output resolution
24 VAC ±10% @ 100 mA
24 VDC ±10% @ 50 mA
0.1-2.65, 5.2, 12.85, factory-set 25.6,
or 0.59-2.93 sec (internally DIP switch
selectable)
255 steps
Tri-state time base
Accuracy
Operating temp
Humidity limit
2.55, 5.1, 12.75, 59.9, 90.5, 119.9,
or factory-set 25.5 sec (internally DIP
switch selectable)
±0.5% of span
32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
5% to 95% noncondensing
319
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
FEATURES
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
OPTIONS FOR MODEL UCP-422
UCO-44, UCO-44T OPTIONS
WIRING
Tri-State board is located in UCO-44T
expander ring housing attached to the
UCP-422 enclosure.
PWM board is located
in UCO-44 expander ring
housing attached to the
UCP-422 enclosure.
U
P
U
P
U
P
UCP-422
ENCLOSURE
+
24 VAC/VDC
Power
–
–
E
AUX
+24
VDC
+
FBK
OUT
SIG IN
-
24 VAC/VDC
Power
COM
SIG IN
+
–
24 VAC/VDC
Power
for
+
Signal
+24
VDC
FBK
OUT
SIG IN
-
AUX
24 VAC or +
24 VDC
Power Supply
+24
VDC
FBK
OUT
SIG IN
–
–
COM
SIG IN
+
COM
SIG IN
+
decrease
*
BAS Controller
PWM Contacts
*
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
AUX
BAS controller
Tri-State contacts
* Signal input is optoisolated and polarity insensitive.
PWM computer contact can switch either PWM wire lead.
BAS Controller
PWM Contacts
increase
Tri-state Wiring
PWM Wiring
Common 24V Supply for
Power and Signal
PWM Wiring
Separate 24V Supplies
for Power and Signal
CALIBRATION
Important! To change the time base, the transducer must be disassembled. A time base other than the factory setting may be
specified at the time of order entry.
TABLE 1. TIME BASE SELECTION
Time Base Selection
SWITCH
PWM TIME
TRI-STATE
1. Remove two screws from the bottom
BASE (sec)
TIME BASE (sec)
5
3
4
plate of the enclosure.
0.1-2.65
2.55
Off
Off
Off
2. Carefully remove the PWM/Tri-state
0.1-5.2
5.1
On
Off
Off
board and locate time base select
0.1-12.85
12.75
Off
Off
On
switches.
0.1-25.6
25.5
On
Off
On
(factory setting) (factory setting)
3. Set switches 3, 4, and 5 to desired time
0.59-2.93
59.9
Off
On
Off
base as shown in table. Switches 1, 2, 6,
90.5
On
On
Off
7, and 8 are not used and should be in
119.9
Off
On
On
the off position.
4. Carefully reassemble the transducer, ensuring that socket and pins are properly aligned.
5. No other adjustment or calibration is required.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
UCP-422
UCP-422
320
DESCRIPTION
Electronic/Pneumatic transducer
UCO-44 Pulse-width modulation option
44
UCO-44T Tri-state option
44T
Example: UCP-422-44 Electronic/Pneumatic
transducer with pulse-width option
Note: These options must be factory-installed on the UCP-422.
44
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
UNIVERSAL ELECTRONIC / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCERS
MODELS UCP-522, UCP-622
DESCRIPTION
The Models UCP-522 and UCP-622 Universal
Electronic/Pneumatic Transducers provide precision
pneumatic control of valves, dampers, and other pneumatic devices. These transducers are well suited for the
control of small and large volume loads, such as small
and large pneumatic actuators. The Model UCP-522 is
furnished in a unique slim-line design housing that
saves panel space, and it can be ordered with an
optional DIN rail mounting adapter. The Model UCP622 is a snap-track mounted version of the universal
electronic/pneumatic transducer. Its operation is identical to the Model UCP-522.
OPERATION
Models UCP-522 and UCP-622 convert a jumper-selectable analog, pulse-width modulated (PWM), or optional
tri-state input to a 0-20 psig (0-137.9 kPa) adjustable
output. The transducers are powered with 24 VAC/VDC.
Upon a loss of power, the UCP air valves will remain
closed. A Model EP3 air valve may be used to exhaust
branch pressure on a power loss. Models UCP-522 and
UCP-622 may be operated in a multiplexed PWM mode
so that one BAS output may control up to eight transducers individually. These units are not suitable for pilot
positioning.
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
Adjustable zero and span
Voltage, current, PWM universal inputs standard
Optional tri-state control
1/4" (0.64 cm) barbed tube connectors
UCP-622
Shown with Optional Pressure Gauge
•
•
•
•
•
Feedback
No position sensitivity
No air consumption
Manual control of output
Multiplex mode
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply voltage
Output
Input
PWM time base
Tri-state time base
(option)
Input impedance
Feedback signal
24 VAC ±10% @ 225 mA max
24 VDC ±10% @ 112 mA max
Adjustable 0-20 psig (0-137.9 kPa)
0-20 mA, 4-20 mA, 0-5V, 1-5V,
0-10V, 2-10V, 0-15V, 3-15 VDC,
or PWM, jumper selectable or
optional tri-state
0.1-2.65, 5.2, 12.85, 25.6, or
0.59-2.93 sec, DIP switch
selectable
2.55, 5.1, 12.75, 25.5 sec,
DIP switch selectable
2501 (current),
49.9 k1 min (voltage)
4-20 mA/0-20 psig (0-137.9 kPa)
nonadjustable, 6501 max load
Max main air pressure 30 psig (206.8 kPa)
Air capacity
1100 scim @ 20 psig
(300 cm3/sec @ 137.9 kPa)
Air consumption
None in steady state
Linearity
1% of span @ 77°F (25°C)
Hysteresis
1% of span @ 77°F (25°C)
Humidity
5% to 95% noncondensing
Operating temp
32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Dimensions
UCP-522
3.4"H* x 2"W x 4.8"D
(8.6 x 5.1 x 12.4 cm)
UCP-622
3.25"H x 6"W x 1.75"D**
(8.3 x 15.2 x 4.4 cm)
Weight
1.32 lb (0.6 kg)
*Add 1.2" (3.0 cm) for mounting tabs; add 2.3" (5.8 cm) for
optional gauge assembly.
**Add 1.25" (3.2 cm) to depth for optional gauge assembly.
321
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
UCP-522
Shown with Optional Pressure Gauge
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
UNIVERSAL ELECTRONIC / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCERS
MODELS UCP-522, UCP-622
MANUAL CONTROL (ALL MODELS)
For manual control of the output, the 24V power supply must be connected and the N/O jumper moved to the override O position. The manual adjustment potentiometer can then be used to vary the output.
CURRENT OR VOLTAGE ANALOG CONTROL (ALL MODELS)
JUMPER SETTINGS
For current or voltage analog control, set jumpers for required input signal as shown below.
Desired Input Signal
Jumpers shown
for 4-20 mA input
0-20 mA 4-20 mA 0-5V
Set Jumpers On
1-5V
0-10V
2-10V
0-15V
3-15V
N,A,F,I N,A,R,I N,A,F,5 N,A,R,5 N,A,F,10 N,A,R,10 N,A,F,15 N,A,R,15
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
SWITCH
Current Voltage
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
ANALOG CONTROL WIRING
P
A
15
10
24 VAC/VDC +
Power Supply –
Feedback
4-20 mA
(If used)
Span Pot
F
R
1. If the input is voltage, multiple UCP-522/UCP-622s
may be powered from the same power supply or
transformer.
2. If the input signal is current from a current sourcing
controller, multiple units may be powered from the
same power supply or transformer.
3. If the input is current from a current sinking controller, each UCP-522/UCP-622 must have a separate power supply or transformer.
UCP-522/622
Manual Override
Potentiometer
24 V PWR
FBK OUT
PWM T-UP
PWM T-DN
COM
+
–
Input Signal Notes:
Zero Pot
MUX
ADDR
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
N
O
MODE TIME
BASE
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
OPERATING MODE
I-V SIG
STAT
PWM
TS
PRES
EXH
Current or –
Voltage Signal* +
PWM AND MULTIPLEXED PWM CONTROL (UCP-522/UCP-622 ONLY)
For single unit PWM or multiplexed PWM control, set jumpers for N, P, F. All other jumpers are
unused and ignored.
JUMPER SETTINGS
N P F
O A R
Jumpers shown
for PWM input
Desired Input Signal
PWM
MUX PWM
Set Jumpers On
N, P, F
N, P, F
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
OPERATING
MODE
Single Unit
PWM Control
Multiplexed
PWM Control
322
SWITCH
1
2
Off
Off
Off
On
PWM TIME BASE
(sec)
0.1-2.65
0.1-5.2
0.1-12.85
0.1-25.6
0.59-2.93
3
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
SWITCH
4
Off
Off
On
On
Off
5
Off
On
Off
On
Off
OPERATING
MODE
Single Unit
PWM Control
Multiplexed
PWM Control
6
Off
SWITCH
7
Off
8
Off
Refer to the “Multiplex PWM
Operation” page at the beginning
of the Output Transducers section.
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
UNIVERSAL ELECTRONIC / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCERS
MODELS UCP-522, UCP-622
PWM CONTROL WIRING
MUX
ADDR
F
R
N
O
UCP-522/622
Manual Override
Potentiometer
STAT
PWM
TS
Manual Override
Potentiometer
24 VAC/VDC +
Power Supply –
PRES
I-V SIG
EXH
Feedback
4-20 mA
(if used)
24 V PWR
FBK OUT
PWM T-UP
PWM T-DN
COM
+
–
Separate 24V Supplies
for Power and Signal
STAT
PWM
TS
PRES
EXH
I-V SIG
Signal
+
24 VAC/VDC
Power Supply –
BAS Controller
PWM Contacts*
UCP-522/622
15
10
24 V PWR
FBK OUT
PWM T-UP
PWM T-DN
COM
+
–
F
R
Common 24V Supply
for Power and Signal
*PWM signal input terminals are
optoisolated and polarity insensitive. PWM computer contact can
switch either PWM wire lead.
TRI-STATE CONTROL (UCP-522T / UCP-622T ONLY)
JUMPER SETTINGS
N
O
P
A
F
R
+
T
-
*
For tri-state control, set jumpers for N, P, F.
* Select T+ or T-, depending on the signal wiring connection, to the power
supply. The other jumpers are unused and ignored. Note: Current and voltage
inputs are also operational with the UCP-522T/UCP-622T.
TRI-STATE
TIME BASE (sec)
2.55
5.1
12.75
25.5
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
OPERATING MODE
Tri-State (UCP-522T/
UCP-622T only)
SWITCH
1
2
Off
Off
3
Off
Off
Off
Off
SWITCH
4
Off
Off
On
On
5
Off
On
Off
On
6
SWITCH
7
8
Off
Off
Off
TRI-STATE CONTROL WIRING
Feedback
4-20 mA
(if used)
BAS
Controller
Tri-state
Contacts*
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
24 VAC/VDC +
Power Supply –
N
O
P
A
+
T
–
15
10
MODE TIME MUX
BASE ADDR
This connection can also be to
the negative side of the power
supply by moving jumper T to the
"–" position.
F
R
Zero Pot
Span Pot
UCP-522T/
UCP-622T
Manual Override
Potentiometer
24 V PWR
FBK OUT
PWM T-UP
PWM T-DN
COM
+
–
I-V SIG
Increase
(T-UP)
Decrease
(T-DN)
STAT
PWM
TS
PRES
EXH
Note: If triac outputs are used, resistors
may be needed to shunt the leakage current.
If the jumper is placed in T+, place 500Ω 1/2W
resistors from T-UP to common and T-DN to
common. If the jumper is placed in T-, place the
resistor from T-UP to 24 V PWR and T-DN to
24 V PWR.
The UCP-522T/UCP-622T provides a 0-20 psig (0-137.9
kPa) output proportional to the length of time an increase
or decrease signal is held. A contact closure wired in
series with the T-UP terminal will increase the output signal (psig) proportional to the length of the signal given. A
contact closure wired in series with the T-DN terminal
will decrease the output signal (psig) proportional to the
length of the signal given.
Tri-state example: Using a standard UCP-522T/UCP622T with a 25.5-sec time base and a 0-20 psig (0-137.9
kPa) span with output currently at 0 psig, pulsing would
operate as follows:
1. A 5.1-sec increase pulse issued; output
increases 20% to 4 psig (27.6 kPa).
2. Another 5.1-sec increase pulse issued;
output increases another 20% to 8 psig (55.2 kPa).
3. A 5.1-sec decrease pulse issued; output
decreases 20% to 4 psig (27.6 kPa).
323
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
Feedback
4-20 mA
(if used)
Span Pot
BAS Controller
PWM Contacts*
15
10
24 VAC/VDC +
Power Supply –
P
A
Zero Pot
MUX
ADDR
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Span Pot
MODE TIME
BASE
MODE TIME
BASE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
P
A
N
O
Zero Pot
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
UNIVERSAL ELECTRONIC / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCERS
MODELS UCP-522, UCP-622
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
CHECKOUT / RECALIBRATION
Tools required: multimeter, Model CLC-100-PW1 signal analyzer, pressure gauge
Each UCP-522/UCP-622 is factory-calibrated for an output span of 0-20 psig (0-137.9 kPa). For a tighter span,
adjust the zero and span potentiometers. The feedback signal will not change if the calibration is changed. The
feedback signal is always 4-20 mA over 0-20 psig (0-137.9 kPa).
1. Verify that 24 VAC/VDC is present at the 24V PWR and COM terminals. The green status LED will be on
continuously (see Table 1 below).
2. Verify that the input signal is present and that the input signal jumpers and DIP switches are set for the
input signal being used.
3. Verify that 20-30 psig (137.9-206.8 kPa) main air is present. Main air should be at least 3 psig (20.7 kPa)
higher than the maximum required output.
4. Apply minimum input signal. For tri-state models, apply a contact closure equal to the selected time base
(such as 25.5 sec) to the T-DN terminal. Branch pressure should go to approximately 0 psig.
Feedback signal should be approximately 4 mA.
5. If another low pressure is needed, adjust the zero potentiometer until the desired output pressure is
reached.
6. Apply maximum input signal. For tri-state models, apply a contact closure equal to the selected time base
(such as 25.5 sec) to the T-UP terminal. Branch pressure should go to approximately 20 psig (137.9 kPa).
Feedback signal should be approximately 20 mA.
7. If another high pressure is needed, adjust the span potentiometer until the desired output pressure is reached.
8. Repeat as necessary to achieve accurate results.
Note: This is a rough functional check. The UCP-522/622 is a highly accurate device, and laboratory-quality
meters and gauges are required to properly check calibration.
TABLE 1. LED INDICATION
STAT (GREEN)
PWM/TRI-STATE (YELLOW)
Steady Green
Power on
Steady Yellow
PWM or tri-state
signal present
Slow Green Blink
Attention mode
(Multiplex mode)
PRESSURE (RED)
Steady Red
Increasing
pressure in
branch line
EXHAUST (RED)
Steady Red
Exhausting
pressure in
branch line
Rapid Green Blink
Select mode
(Multiplex mode)
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
UCP-522
UCP-622
UCP-522
EP3
22-170
324
DESCRIPTION
Universal electronic/pneumatic enclosed transducer
Universal electronic/pneumatic snap-track mounted transducer
OPTIONS
T
Tri-state input (current and voltage inputs also operational)
43 Pressure gauge indication, 0-30 psig/0-200 kPa
47 DIN rail mounting adapter (UCP-522, 522T only)
C UCP-622 Factory calibration (specify input and pressure range)
43
47
Example: UCP-522-43-47 Universal electronic/pneumatic transducer with
pressure gauge indication and DIN rail mounting
RELATED PRODUCTS
Air valve (to provide control from a back-up controller on loss of computer control or other failure)
Volume tank (to increase branch line volume)
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
CURRENT / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCER
MODEL T-1000
DESCRIPTION
The Model T-1000 industrial-grade current/pneumatic transducer reduces a supply pressure to a regulated output pressure that is directly proportional to a 4-20 mA input signal. The
Model T-1000 can accept a supply pressure between 18-100
psig (125-700 kPa). An integral pneumatic volume booster is
included in the design to provide high-flow capacity up to
20,736 scim (20 m3/hr).
FEATURES
High air flow capacity
Wide supply pressure range
Direct or reverse acting
Convenient external zero and span adjustments
Bracket included for panel or wall mounting
WIRING / PIPING
APPLICATION
The Model T-1000 is calibrated at the factory for direct-acting
operation but may be used in the reverse-acting mode by
reversing the polarity of the signal leads and recalibrating.
When calibrated for reverse-acting applications, the Model
T-1000 provides a minimum of its full-rated output pressure
(i.e., 15 psig/103.4 kPa) upon input signal failure.
in
(cm)
4-20 mA
Signal
The 4-20 mA input to 3-15 psig (20.7-103.4 kPa) output can
be recalibrated using zero and span adjustments to provide
3-9 psig (20.7-62.1 kPa) or 9-15 psig (62.1-103.4 kPa) output
for split ranging applications.
(black)
(white)
Zero
Span
Alternate Output/
Gauge Port
plugged
Output
Air
1/4'' FNPT
Supply
Air
1/4'' FNPT
SPECIFICATIONS
Power supply
Input
Input impedance
Output
Supply pressure
sensitivity
Supply pressure range
Min
Max
None, loop-powered
4-20 mA
1801 nominal
3-15 psig (20.7-103.4 kPa)
Linearity
Repeatability
Hysteresis
Port sizes
<±0.1% of span per psig
Dimensions
18 psig (125 kPa)
100 psig (700 kPa)
oil, water, and dust free
Min flow rate @ midrange 7776 scim (7.6 m3/hr ANR)
@ 25 psig (175 kPa) supply;
20,736 scim (20.0 m3/hr ANR)
@ 100 psig (700 kPa) supply
Max air consumption
0.1 scfm (0.2 m3/hr) @ midrange
Weight
Zero/Span adjustment
Ambient temp
Wiring
<±1.0% of span
<0.5% of span
<1.0% of span
Pneumatic: 1/4" NPT
Electric: 1/2" NPT
2.18"H x 4.24"W x 2.26"D
(5.5 x 10.77 x 5.74 cm)
2.1 lb (0.94 kg)
3-15 psig (20.7-103.4 kPa)
range, adjustable to 3-9 psig
(20.7-62 kPa) or 9-15 psig
(62-103.4 kPa)
-20° to 160°F (-30° to 70°C)
18'' (45.7 cm) color-coded wire leads
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
T-1000
T-1000-1
DESCRIPTION
Current/Pneumatic transducer, 4-20 mA input, 3-15 psig (20.7-103.4 kPa) output
Current/Pneumatic transducer, 1-9 VDC input, 3-15 psig (20.7-103.4 kPa) output
Explosionproof and intrinsically safe models available by special order.
010115-000
M-111
PG-05
RELATED PRODUCTS
DIN rail adapter for T-1000
1/4" MPT x 1/8 FPT bushing
0-30/0-200 kPa psig gauge
325
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
•
•
•
•
•
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
CURRENT / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCER
MODEL 22/07-16
DESCRIPTION
The Model 22/07-16 Current/Pneumatic Transducer
is a compact, high performance instrument providing
many of the same characteristics that are found on
industrial-grade transducers. This I/P transducer is
designed for high air capacity HVAC applications where
mounting space is limited and an industrial appearance
is important.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Loop-powered control
Small size
Mounting in any position
High air capacity
High repeatability
DIN rail mounting
DIMENSIONS / WIRING / PIPING
OPERATION
1.42
(3.61)
1.26
(3.2)
1.42
(3.61)
4-20 mA +
Signal _
4.17
(10.59)
Main Air
20 psig
M
NPT 1/8"
The Model 22/07-16 converts a 4-20 mA signal to a
3-15 psig (20.7-103.4 kPa) pressure signal using a
unique converting system with a stationary coil and lowmass moving magnet that gives this unit high repeatability and reliability. The unit is not sensitive to vibrations
and shock and can be mounted in any position without
recalibration. The Model 22/07-16 is supplied with
screw-type terminals for electric connection and 1/8"
FNPT ports for pneumatic connections. A clip-on base is
provided for DIN rail mounting.
in
(cm)
S/Zul
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
FEATURES
B
Output Air
Signal
3-15 psig
1/8" FNPT
Pressure
Connections
SPECIFICATIONS
Power supply
Input
Input resistance
Output
Output characteristic
Air
Supply
Capacity
Consumption
None, loop-powered
4-20 mA
2001 nominal
3-15 psig (20.7-103.4 kPa)
Linear to input, direct acting
20 psig (40 psig max)
137.9 kPa (275.8 kPa)
oil, water, and dust free
2764 scim (755 cm3/sec)
0.08 scfm (37.8 cm3/sec)
Linearity
Hysteresis
Dimensions
Weight
Mounting
Connections
Air
Electric
Ambient temp
+3%
0.3%
1.26"H x 1.42"W x 4.17"D
(3.20 x 3.61 x 10.59 cm)
0.55 lb (0.25 kg)
DIN rail
1/8" FNPT
Screw-type terminals
-40° to 180°F (-40° to 82°C)
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
22/07-16
DESCRIPTION
Current/Pneumatic transducer, 4-20 mA input, 3-15 psig (20.7-103.4 kPa) output
RELATED PRODUCTS
DIN-3F, BAM-1000
DIN rail
B-132
1/4'' Barb x 1/8'' MPT fitting
PG-05
0-30 psi/0-200 kPa Pressure gauge
B-373-1
1/4'' Barb gauge tee with mounting tabs
326
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
UNIVERSAL RESISTANCE TRANSDUCER
MODEL RES-1
DESCRIPTION
The Model RES-1 Universal Resistance Transducer
provides a precision resistance output for DDC control
of electric actuators or other electronic devices that
operate from a variable resistive circuit. Various jumperselectable analog and pulse-width modulated (PWM)
inputs are available, and the transducer may be powered from 24 VAC/VDC. The Model RES-1 is furnished
with snap-track for easy mounting and may be operated
in a multiplexed PWM mode so that one BAS output
may address up to eight Model RES-1s.
• Ideal for controlling electric actuators
• Replaces potentiometer or temperature sensor in
boiler/chiller reset circuits
• 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA, 0-5V, 1-5V, 0-10V, 2-10V, 0-15V,
3-15 VDC, or PWM input signals, jumper-selectable
• AC/DC powered
• Replaces motorized slide-wire potentiometer
controller
• 0-135Ω, 0-270Ω, 0-500Ω, and 0-1000Ω standard,
custom ranges available
• Snap-track mounting
• Failsafe mode and signal loss feature
• LED indication
OPERATION
The Model RES-1 simulates a three-wire potentiometer
output proportional to an analog or PWM input signal.
The resistance between output terminals B and R
increases (W and R decreases) as the input signal
increases. The resistance between output terminals B
and R decreases (W and R increases) as the input signal decreases.
When 24V power is interrupted at the Model RES-1
power terminals, the failsafe mode internally connects
the output terminals to the fallback pot terminals, allowing an alternate back-up controller or potentiometer to
be used for control.
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply voltage
Input signal
PWM time base
Input impedance
Current
Voltage
Output ranges
24 VAC ±10% @ 220 mA (5.3 VA)
24 VDC ±10% @ 100 mA
0-20 mA, 4-20 mA, 0-5V, 1-5V,
0-10V, 2-10V, 0-15V, 3-15 VDC
or PWM, jumper selectable
0.1-2.65, 5.2, 12.85, 25.6, or
0.59-2.93 sec
DIP switch selectable
2501
49.9 kΩ min
0-135Ω, 0-270Ω, 0-500Ω,
0-1000Ω, custom ranges
available; min span 30Ω,
max span 1 MΩ
Output resistors
Output resolution
Accuracy/
Repeatability
Linearity
Temp range
LT Option
Humidity
Dimensions
Weight
1W
255 steps
±1% of span
±1% of span
32° to 158°F (0° to 70°C)
-40° to 158°F (-40° to 70°C)
5% to 95% noncondensing
3.25"H x 6.5"L x 1.25"D
(8.3 x 16.5 x 3.2 cm)
0.7 lb (0.32 kg)
327
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
FEATURES
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
UNIVERSAL RESISTANCE TRANSDUCER
MODEL RES-1
CURRENT OR VOLTAGE ANALOG CONTROL
JUMPER SETTINGS For current or voltage analog control, set jumpers for required input signal as shown below.
NO
MEM
PWM
OZ
10V
MA
MEM
I-V
TZ
15V
5V
Example: Jumpers shown at left are set for 4-20 mA input with memory feature* disabled.
Desired Input Signal
0-20 mA
Set Jumpers On
I-V,TZ,MA
4-20 mA
0-5V
1-5V
0-10V
2-10V
0-15V
3-15V
I-V,OZ,MA I-V,TZ,5V I-V,OZ,5V I-V,TZ,10V I-V,OZ,10V I-V,TZ,15V I-V,OZ,15V
* Memory Feature
If the MEM/NOMEM jumper is in the NOMEM position at power-up, the resistance between B and R goes to
minimum until the first analog input is received. In the MEM position at power-up, the resistance returns to its last
value when power was interrupted and remains there until a new input signal is received. The last resistance output
value will be stored in memory for up to six hours after power loss.
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
OPERATING
MODE
Analog Input,
No Sig Loss Hold**
Analog Input with
Sig Loss Hold**
SWITCH
1
SWITCH
3
4
5
6
7
8
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
2
Off
Off
Off
On
Any Analog
Input
* * Signal Loss Feature
In the event of a loss of the input signal, the RES-1 can remember the last signal and continue to provide an output
based on the last commanded signal. DIP switch 2 must be on to enable the Sig Loss Hold feature. The Sig Loss
Hold feature cannot be used with any analog input signal range that starts at 0V or 0 mA and should be disabled by
setting DIP switch 2 off.
ANALOG CONTROL WIRING
Optional Connection
to back up thermostat
or potentiometer
Resistance Output
to controlled device
(See Table 1 - LED Indication)
L3
L2
L1
Mode Time Base MUX Addr
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Status
B R W
B R W
Res Output Fallback Pot
PWM signal
Sig Loss Hold
B-R Resistance increases
with signal increase
W-R Resistance decreases
with signal increase
NO
MEM
Power "-" and
signal "COM" are
internally connected.
PWM OZ
PWM
signal Power
MEM
24 VAC/VDC Power +
Notes:
1. If the RES-1 input signal is voltage, multiple RES-1s may be –
powered from the same power supply or transformer.
2. If the RES-1 input signal is current from a current sourcing
controller, multiple units may be powered from the same
power supply or transformer.
3. If input signal is current from a current sinking controller,
each RES-1 must have a separate power supply or transformer.
328
+ –
10V mA
I-V
COM Sig
I-V
TZ
15V 5V
+ Analog Current or
– Voltage Input Signal
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
UNIVERSAL RESISTANCE TRANSDUCER
MODEL RES-1
PWM / MULTIPLEXED PWM CONTROL
JUMPER SETTINGS For single-unit PWM or multiplexed PWM control, set jumpers to PWM and TZ.
All other input jumpers are unused and ingnored.
NO
PWM
OZ
MEM
MEM
I-V
Example: Jumpers shown for PWM input with memory feature* disabled.
TZ
* Memory Feature
If the MEM/NOMEM jumper is in the NOMEM position at power-up, the resistance between B and R goes to
minimum until the first analog input is received. In the MEM position at power-up, the resistance returns to its last
value when power was interrupted and remains there until a new input signal is received. The last resistance output
value will be stored in memory for up to six hours after power loss.
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
PWM TIME
BASE (sec)
0.1-2.65
0.1-5.2
0.1-12.85
0.1-25.6
0.59-2.93
SWITCH
1
2
On
Off
On
On
3
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
SWITCH
4
Off
Off
On
On
Off
OPERATING
MODE
Single RES-1
PWM Control
Multiplexed
PWM Control
5
Off
On
Off
On
Off
SWITCH
7
Off
6
Off
8
Off
Refer to the “Multiplex PWM
Operation” page at the beginning
of the Output Transducers section.
Signal Loss Feature: The signal loss hold feature is not available when the RES-1 is configured for PWM input.
PWM CONTROL WIRING
Optional Connection
to back up thermostat
or potentiometer
Resistance Output
to controlled device
(See Table 1 - LED Indication)
L3
L2
L1
(See Figure 1 - LED Indication)
Mode Time Base MUX Addr
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Status
B R W
B R W
Res Output Fallback Pot
B-R Resistance increases
with signal increase
PWM signal
Sig Loss Hold
L3
L2
L1
B R W
B R W
Res Output Fallback Pot
B-R Resistance increases
with signal increase
PWM signal
Sig Loss Hold
MEM
24 VAC/VDC
Power for PWM
Signal
BAS Controller
PWM Contacts**
W-R Resistance decreases
with signal increase
Power "-" and
signal "COM" are
internally connected.
PWM OZ
PWM
signal Power
+ –
NO
MEM
10V mA
I-V
COM Sig
Power "-" and
signal "COM" are
internally connected.
PWM
signal Power
I-V
Mode Time Base MUX Addr
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Status
W-R Resistance decreases
with signal increase
NO
MEM
Optional Connection
to back up thermostat
or potentiometer
Resistance Output
to controlled device
TZ
MEM
15V 5V
+
–
PWM OZ
10V mA
I-V
COM Sig
+ –
I-V
TZ
15V 5V
BAS Controller
PWM Contacts**
+ –
+ –
24 VAC/VDC Power
24 VAC/VDC Power
Separate 24V Supplies for Power and Signal
Common 24V Supply for Power and Signal
**PWM signal input terminals are optoisolated and polarity insensitive.
PWM computer contacts can switch either PWM wire lead.
329
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
OPERATING
MODE
PWM Input, Single
RES-1 (No MUX)
PWM Input
Multiplex Mode
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
UNIVERSAL RESISTANCE TRANSDUCER
MODEL RES-1
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Make all connections with power removed.
Failure to do so could result in circuit board damage.
Mount the device inside an enclosure near the controlled
equipment, avoiding areas of temperature extremes,
corrosive vapors, or electro-magnetic interference. Use
track slots for screw attachment. Note: Protect circuit
board from metal filings created during panel construction.
TABLE 1. LED INDICATION
CHECK-OUT PROCEDURE
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
Make all connections according to wiring diagram or as
shown in the job diagram and in compliance with national and local codes. Use shielded #18 gauge cable for
connections from the transducer to the controller. The
unit comes precalibrated for easy application.
Tools required: Volt ohmmeter, Model CLC-100-PW1
signal analyzer or other signal source.
L3 STATUS
(green)
L2 PWM SIGNAL L1 SIGNAL LOSS
(yellow)
HOLD (red)
1. Verify that the input selector jumpers and switches
are in the correct position for the input signal to be used.
2. Verify that either 24 VAC or VDC is present at the
power terminals.
3. With the controlled device disconnected, connect an
ohmmeter to the B and R terminals on the RES-1
output. With no signal input, the resistance between
B and R should be at minimum, and the resistance
between W and R should be at maximum resistance.
4. Apply the minimum input signal for the range selected to the input terminals. The RES-1 should output
less than 2% of full range, the minimum resistance of
the RES-1. Zero and full scale pots are factory set
and should not be adjusted.
5. Slowly increase the input signal. The resistance
reading will increase linearly toward full range. If the
resistance does not vary with the input signal, check
the polarity of the input wiring.
Steady Green
Power on
Steady Yellow
PWM signal
present
Slow Green Blink
Attention mode
(Multiplex mode)
Rapid Green
Blink
Select mode
(Multiplex mode)
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
RES-1
DESCRIPTION
Universal resistance transducer, 135Ω output
OUTPUT (leave blank for standard 135Ω output)
500
500Ω
270
270Ω
1000
1000Ω
S
Special range* (specify when ordering)
Low temperature option
LT
*Contact Trane for special ranges
RES-1
330
Example: RES-1 Universal resistance
transducer, 135Ω output
Steady Red
Output held
due to loss
of signal
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
PULSE / TRI-STATE-TO-ANALOG TRANSDUCERS
PWA SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Model PWA-1A Pulse-to-Analog Transducer converts a DIP switch selectable pulse-width modulation
(PWM) input to 0-18V and 0-20 mA outputs (factory set
for 1-5V and 4-20 mA). Using the multiplex mode, up to
eight units can be controlled from one BAS controller
output. The Model PWA-1A is furnished in a unique
slim-line design housing, which saves panel space, and
can be ordered with an optional DIN rail mounting
adapter. The Model PWA-2A is a snap-track mounted
version of the pulse-to-analog transducer, and its operation is identical to the Model PWA-1A.
On all models, the outputs are zero and span adjustable
for a wide variety of ranges (factory set for 4-20 mA
and 1-5V). Current and voltage outputs are active simultaneously. After a power failure, a memory feature
on all models allows their outputs to return to their last
values before power was interrupted and remain there
until a new signal is received. (Memory feature may be
disabled by user if desired.)
PWA-2A
(PWA-2T)
FEATURES
• 255-step resolution in any range
• Adjustable zero and span
• Six-hour memory
• Positive or negative input reference
• 0-20 mA and 0-18 VDC outputs (field adjustable)
• 4-20 mA and 1-5 VDC factory-set outputs
• User-selectable time base
• Jumper-selectable manual output
• Multiplex mode
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply voltage
Input time base
PWA-1A, -2A
PWA-1T, -2T
Output*
Output resolution
Output burden*
24 VAC ±10% @ 120 mA or
24 VDC ±10% @ 50 mA
0.1-2.65, 5.2, 12.85, 25.6, or
0.59-2.93 sec,
DIP switch selectable
2.55, 5.1, 12.75, 25.5, 59.9, 90.5,
119.9 sec
DIP switch selectable
4-20 mA factory set, adjustable
0-20 mA zero and span;
1-5 VDC factory set, adjustable;
0-18 VDC, max voltage adjustable
(min voltage determined by ratio of
mA max to mA min - refer to calibration section for details)
255 steps
650Ω max (4-20 mA)
Accuracy
Humidity
Operating temp
Dimensions
PWA-1A,-1T
PWA-2A, -2T
Weight
±1% of span
5% to 95% noncondensing
32° to 158°F (0° to 70°C)
3.4"H** X 2"W X 4.8"D
(8.6 x 5.1 x 12.4 cm)
3.25"H x 4.6"W x 1.5"D
(8.3 x 11.8 x 3.8 cm)
0.8 lb max (0.36 kg)
*Voltage and current outputs are active simultaneously.
Maximum current available from combined voltage and current outputs is 25 mA.
**Add 1.2" (3.0 cm) for mounting tabs.
331
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
The Model PWA-1T Tri-State-to-Analog Transducer
converts two contact closure inputs (tri-state/floating
control) to 0-18V and 0-20 mA outputs (factory set for
1-5V and 4-20 mA). It is mounted in a unique slim-line
design housing, which saves panel space, and can be
ordered with an optional DIN rail mounting adapter. The
Model PWA-2T is the snap-track mounted version of
the tri-state-to-analog transducer, and its operation is
identical to the Model PWA-1T.
PWA-1A
(PWA-1T)
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
PULSE / TRI-STATE-TO-ANALOG TRANSDUCERS
PWA SERIES
PWA-1A / PWA-2A PWM AND MULTIPLEXED PWM-TO-ANALOG CONTROL
Manual Output Control
The 24V power supply must be connected and the override jumper moved to the MAN OVR
MAN position covering the center and inner jumper pins. The manual adjustment potentiometer
MAN
OVR
OVR
can then be used to vary the output.
Automatic Manual
Automatic Output Control
Control
Control
Move the override jumper to cover the center and the outer jumper pins.
JUMPER SETTINGS
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
No Memory
Off
Memory
On
Switch PWM Time
Base (sec)
2
Operating
Mode
Single Unit PWM Control
Multiplexed PWM Control
0.1-2.65
0.1-5.2
0.1-12.85
0.1-25.6
0.59-2.93
Off
On
3
Switch
4
5
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
Off
Off
On
On
Off
Off
On
Off
On
Off
Operating
Mode
Single Unit
PWM Control
Multiplexed
PWM Control
6
Switch
7
8
Off
Off
Off
Refer to the “Multiplex PWM
Operation” page at the beginning
of the Output Transducers section.
*Memory Feature
With DIP switch 1 on, after a power interruption the memory feature will allow the outputs to return to their last
values when power was lost and remain there until a new input signal is received. The last output value will be
stored in memory up to six hours after a power loss. With DIP switch 1 off, the outputs will go to their minimum
values when power is first applied and remain there until a new input signal is received.
PWA-1A / PWA-2A WIRING
24 VAC/DC
Power Supply
–
+
24 VAC/DC
for Signal
+
–
MAN
OVR
(enclosed)
MA ZERO
PWA-2A
(track mounted)
MA SPAN
Manual Override Jumper
(shown in manual position)
Manual Override
Potentiometer
VOLTS OUT
MA OUT
COM
24V PWR
SIG IN +
SIG IN –
1-5V and 4-20 mA outputs
are simultaneously active
+
1-5V
Output
–
4-20 mA
Output
24 VAC/DC
Power Supply
STAT
L2
SIG
L1
See Table 1.
LED Indication
+
–
+
–
BAS Controller
PWM Contacts*
MUX
BASE ADDR
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4-20 mA
Output
+
–
+
–
1-5V
Output
PWA-1A
VOLTS ADJ
MUX
BASE ADDR
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1-5V and 4-20 mA outputs
are simultaneously active
MODE TIME
MODE TIME
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
Memory Switch
Mode*
1
MAN
OVR
VOLTS ADJ
PWA-1A
MA ZERO
PWA-2A
(enclosed)
MA SPAN
(track mounted)
Manual Override Jumper
(shown in manual position)
Manual Override
Potentiometer
VOLTS OUT
MA OUT
COM
24V PWR
SIG IN +
SIG IN –
STAT
L2
SIG
L1
See Figure 1
LED Indication
BAS Controller
PWM Contacts*
Separate 24V Supplies for Power and Signal
Common 24V Supply for Power and Signal
* PWM signal input terminals are optoisolated and polarity insensitive. PWM computer
contacts can switch either positive or negative PWM wire lead.
332
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
PULSE / TRI-STATE-TO-ANALOG TRANSDUCERS
PWA SERIES
PWA-1T / PWA-2T TRI-STATE-TO-ANALOG CONTROL
Manual Output Control
The 24V power supply must be connected and the override jumper moved to the “MAN OVR”
MAN position covering the center and inner jumper pins. The manual adjustment potentiometer can
MAN
OVR
OVR
then be used to vary the output.
Automatic Manual
Automatic Output Control
Control
Control
Move the override jumper to cover the center and the outer jumper pins.
JUMPER SETTINGS
Memory Switch
1
Mode*
No Memory
Memory
Off
On
Operating
Mode
Tri-state control
Switch
2
Tri-state
Time Base
3
Switch
4
5
Off
2.55 sec
5.1 sec
12.75 sec
25.5 sec
59.9 sec
90.5 sec
119.9 sec
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
Off
Off
On
On
Off
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
Operating
Mode
6
Switch
7
8
Tri-state Control
Off
Off
Off
*Memory Feature
With DIP switch 1 on, after a power interruption, the memory feature will allow the outputs to return to their last
values when power was lost and remain there until a new input signal is received. The last output value will be stored
in memory up to six hours after a power loss. With DIP switch 1 off, the outputs will go to their minimum values
when power is first applied and remain there until a new input signal is received.
PWA-1T / PWA-2T WIRING
VOLTS ADJ
MA ZERO
MA SPAN
1-5V and 4-20 mA outputs
are simultaneously active
1-5V
Output
4-20 mA
Output
MAN
OVR
+
–
+
–
– +
BAS
Controller
Tri-state
Contacts
Manual Override Jumper
(shown in manual position)
Manual Override Potentiometer
TS POL
VOLTS
OUT
MA
OUT
COM
24 V
PWR
SIG IN
+
SIG IN
–
24 VAC/VDC –
Power Supply +
Increase
PWA-1T (enclosed)
PWA-2T (track mounted)
STAT
L2
See Table 1.
SIG LED Indication
L1
This connection can also be to
the negative side of the power
supply by moving jumper TS POL
to the "–" position.
The PWA-1T and PWA-2T provide a 4-20 mA current source and 1-5 VDC
output proportional to the length of time an increase or decrease signal is
held. A contact closure wired in series with the SIG IN + terminal will
increase the output signal in proportion to the length of the signal given.
A contact closure wired in series with the SIG IN – terminal will decrease
the output signal in proportion to the length of the signal given.
Tri-state example: Using a standard PWA-1T or PWA-2T with a 25.5second time base and a 4-20 mA and 1-5V span with output currently at
4 mA and 1V, pulsing would operate as follows:
1. 5.1-sec increase pulse issued
2. Another 5.1-sec increase pulse issued
3. 5.1-sec decrease pulse issued
Output increases 20% to 7.2 mA, 1.8V
Output increases another 20% to 10.4 mA, 2.6V
Output decreases 20% to 7.2 mA, 1.8V
Decrease
TABLE 1. LED INDICATION
L2- STAT (green)
Steady Green
Power On
Slow Green Blink
Attention mode
Multiplex mode
Rapid Green Blink
Select mode
Multiplex mode
L1- SIG (red)
Steady Red
PWM or tri-state
signal present
333
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
PULSE / TRI-STATE-TO-ANALOG TRANSDUCERS
PWA SERIES
CALIBRATION
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
Tools required: a multimeter and a signal generator such as the Model CLC-100-PW1 signal analyzer
The PWA-1A, PWA-2A, PWA-1T, and PWA-2T outputs are factory set at 4-20 mA and 1-5V. To change the calibration, see the instructions below. After calibration, alternate between minimum and maximum input pulses and fine
tune the mA and voltage potentiometers for desired mA or volt outputs (typically just one more pass is necessary).
FOR APPLICATIONS REQUIRING CURRENT (mA)
ONLY OR CURRENT (mA) AND VOLTAGE OUTPUT
FOR APPLICATIONS REQUIRING VOLTAGE
OUTPUT ONLY
1. Using a signal generator:
PWA-1A, -2A: Apply a minimum input pulse signal.
PWA-1T, -2T: Apply a contact closure equal to the
selected time base, such as 25.5 sec, to the SIG - terminal.
2. With a multimeter connected to mA output, set MA ZERO
potentiometer at desired minimum mA output.
3. Using a signal generator:
PWA-1A, -2A: Apply a maximum input pulse signal.
PWA-1T, -2T: Apply a contact closure equal to the selected
time base to the SIG + terminal.
4. Set MA SPAN potentiometer at desired maximum mA output.
5. Calibration of mA output is complete. If voltage output is also
required, proceed to step 6.
6. With multimeter connected to voltage output, set maximum
voltage output desired with the VOLT ADJ potentiometer.
7. Determine the ratio of maximum mA output to minimum mA
output.
(i.e., 20 mA maximum output: 4 mA minimum output = 5:1)
8. The minimum voltage is automatically set according to the ratio
of maximum-to-minimum mA output. Using the example from
step 7 above for the mA range and using a 10V maximum
voltage output, the ratio remains the same.
(i.e., 20 mA maximum: 4 mA minimum = 5:1 = 10V:2V)
The minimum voltage output would be automatically set at 2V.
Note: To change voltage output, repeat Steps 3, 6, 7, and 8.
1. Determine the minimum and maximum voltage output
required (0-18V total range).
2. Using the following formula, determine the minimum mA output:
minimum mA output = 20 mA x desired minimum volts
desired maximum volts
3. Using a signal generator:
PWA-1A, -2A: Apply a minimum input pulse signal.
PWA-1T, -2T: Apply a contact closure equal to the
selected time base, such as 25.5 sec, to the SIG - terminal.
4. With a multimeter connected to mA output, set MA ZERO
potentiometer at calculated minimum mA output
(from formula in step 2).
5. Using a signal generator:
PWA-1A, -2A: Apply a maximum input pulse signal.
PWA-1T, -2T: Apply a contact closure equal to the
selected time base to the SIG + terminal.
6. Set MA SPAN potentiometer at 20 mA.
7. With multimeter connected to voltage output, set the
VOLT ADJ potentiometer to desired maximum voltage.
The minimum voltage is automatically set according to the
ratio of maximum-to-minimum mA output.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
PWA-1A
PWA-2A
PWA-1T
PWA-2T
DESCRIPTION
Pulse-to-analog enclosed transducer
Pulse-to-analog snap-track mount transducer
Tri-state-to-analog enclosed transducer
Tri-state-to-analog snap-track mount transducer
OPTIONS
47
DIN rail mounting adapter (For PWA-1A and PWA-1T only)
C
Factory calibrate for special output range (specify range when ordering)
PWA-1A
47
334
Example: PWA-1A-47 Enclosed pulse-to-analog transducer with DIN rail mounting
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
UNIVERSAL ANALOG TRANSDUCERS
MODELS UAT-1, UAT-2
DESCRIPTION
Model UAT-1 and UAT-2 Universal Analog
Transducers are used for analog signal conversion or
signal scaling. They will accept a DC voltage, current, or
resistive input signal and output a nonisolated voltage or
current output. These transducers can be direct or
reverse acting and are easily field calibrated to meet a
wide variety of applications.
The Model UAT-1 is furnished in a unique slim-line
design housing that saves panel space, and it can be
ordered with an optional DIN rail mounting adapter. The
Model UAT-2 is a snap-track mounted version, and its
operation is identical to the Model UAT-1.
FEATURES
• DC voltage, current, or resistive input
• Inputs from 0-20 VDC, 0-40 mA, or 0-10 k1
• Input and output jumper selectable and easily
field calibrated
• Outputs from 0-18 VDC or 0-20 mA
• Direct or reverse acting, jumper selectable
• Reference voltage and current available to
power an input device or sensor
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
UAT-1
UAT-2
SPECIFICATIONS
Power
Signal inputs
(jumper selectable,
adjustable)
Low range
Normal range
Three-wire
potentiometer
Two-wire variable
resistance
Input impedance
Signal outputs
(jumper selectable,
adjustable)
Action
(jumper selectable)
24 VDC ±10% @ 50 mA max
24 VAC ±10% @100 mA max
0-1.09 VDC, 55 mV min span*
0-2 VDC, 100 mV min span*
0-4 mA, 0.22 mA min span*
0-10.9 VDC, 550 mV min span*
0-20 VDC, 1V min span*
0-40 mA, 2.2 mA min span*
0-1001 min to 0-10 k1
0-1001 min to 0-5 k1
0-4 mA, 0-40 mA: 2501
0-1.09V, 0-10.9V: 156 k1
0-2V, 0-20V: 293 k1
0-18 VDC @ 20 mA max load
0-20 mA @ 6501 max load
Direct or reverse acting
Reference output for
sensor excitation
(jumper selectable)
Voltage source
Current source
Output zero/span
Indication
Linearity
Operating temp
Humidity
Dimensions
UAT-1
UAT-2
Weight
1.2 VDC @ 12 mA max (1001 min),
5 VDC @ 12 mA max (4171 min),
10 VDC @ 12 mA max (8341 min)
1.2 mA @ 5 k1 max,
5 mA @ 1.5 k1 max,
10 mA @ 7501 max
Adjustable from 0 to full scale
Power LED
<0.1% of span
32° to 158°F (0° to 70°C)
5% to 95% noncondensing
3.4"H** X 2"W X 4.8"D
(8.6 x 5.1 x 12.4 cm)
3.25"H x 4.6"W x 1"D
(8.3 x 11.8 x 2.54 cm)
0.8 lb max (0.36 kg)
*Minimum span for full output swing (0-18V, 0-20 mA)
**Add 1.2" (3.0 cm) for mounting tabs
335
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
UNIVERSAL ANALOG TRANSDUCERS
MODELS UAT-1, UAT-2
WIRING
INPUT JUMPERS
SIGNAL RANGE
HI LO
SPN
ZERO 1
HI LO
Z2
D R
ACT
0-18 VDC or
0-20 mA Output
Jumper-Selectable,
Adjustable
INPUT
NRM NRM
Z1
ZERO 2
1.2 5 10
REF
SPAN
MA V
X1 ÷ 10
INPUT
OUT
MA V
Power LED
SIG OUT
24V PWR
COM
REF OUT
÷ 10
10V
0-2V, 100 mV min span
÷ 10
20V
0-10.9V, 550 mV min span
x1
10V
0-20V, 1V min span
x1
20V
0-4 mA, 0.22 mA min span
÷ 10
mA
If REF output is
required for
external sensor
excitation, jumper
for appropriate
voltage or current
source.If not used,
set jumpers to:
0-40 mA, 2.2 mA min span
x1
mA
V
10
Three-Wire Potentiometer
x1
(None)
V
10
x1
(None)
V
5
x1
(None)
V
1.2
mA
10
mA
5
mA
1.2
10V ref (834Ω min)
Three-Wire Potentiometer
SIG IN
5V ref (417Ω min)
UAT-1
UAT-2
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
COM SIG REF
IN
OUT
COM
SIG IN
COM
REF OUT
SIG IN (VOLTS)
COM
Three-Wire Potentiometer
1.2V ref (100Ω min)
SIG IN
Two-Wire Variable Resistance If (ref mA) x (max Ω)
≥1.09V
10 mA ref (750Ω max)
x
1
(None)
Two-Wire Variable Resistance
If (ref mA) x (max Ω)
5 mA ref (1.5 kΩ max)
≤1.09V
Two-Wire Variable Resistance
÷ 10 (None)
1.2 mA ref (5 kΩ max)
REF OUT
(MA)
0-20 VDC or
0-40 mA Input
Jumper-Selectable,
Adjustable
(no connection required
to REF OUT terminal)
Three-Wire Potentiometer
100Ω min to 10 kΩ max
element
REF
JUMPERS
0-1.09V, 55 mV min span
MA 10V 20V
24 VAC/VDC
Power Supply
INPUT
JUMPER POSITIONS
Two-Wire Variable Resistance
100Ω min to 5 kΩ max
element
CALIBRATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Set output OUT jumper to V or MA as desired.
Set INPUT jumpers for type and range of input signal present. See “Input Jumpers” table above.
If using the reference output for sensor excitation, set the
two REF jumpers for the proper output type and value.
Choices are 1.2V, 5V, 10V, 1.2 mA, 5 mA, 10 mA.
If not using the reference output, jumper as a voltage output.
Set action ACT jumper to direct D or reverse R as desired.
Set span jumper SPN to LO. Turn SPAN pot clockwise 25
turns.
Remove both Z1 jumpers. Trim ZERO 1 pot for minimum
desired output value. Presence/absence of input signal
has no effect on this adjustment.
Reinstall both Z1 jumpers. Set Z2 jumper to LO position.
8.
Apply an input signal value that is to produce minimum
output. Trim ZERO 2 pot for minimum output value (same
value set in step 6). If desired value cannot be achieved,
remove Z2 jumper and trim ZERO 2 pot again. If desired
value is still not achieved, place Z2 jumper in HI position
and trim ZERO 2 pot again.
9. Apply input signal value that is to produce maximum
output. Trim SPAN pot for maximum output value. If SPAN
pot does not go high enough, move the SPN jumper from
LO position to HI position.
10. Repeat steps 8 and 9 until both minimum and maximum
output values are correct. Typically, just one more pass is
sufficient.
11. Apply a midpoint input signal. Verify that output goes to
center of output range.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
UAT-1
Universal analog enclosed/field-calibrated transducer
UAT-2
Universal analog snap-track mounted/field-calibrated transducer
OPTIONS
C
Factory calibration (specify input and output when ordering)
47 DIN rail mounting adapter (UAT-1 only)
UAT-1
C
RELATED PRODUCT
336
Example: UAT-1C Universal analog transducer with factory calibration
UCM-SPA
0-10 k1 Three-wire pot with stainless steel plate
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
VOLTAGE AND CURRENT CONVERTER / RESCALER
MODEL VTI
DESCRIPTION
The Model VTI Voltage and Current Converter/
Rescaler will convert voltage signals in the range of
1-19V or current signals in the range of 1.33-76 mA
into a 4-20 mA non-isolated signal. This current-source
signal can be direct or reverse acting and can be used
to drive grounded 4-20 mA loads utilizing a single power
supply. The Model VTI also accepts an input from a
resistive potentiometer. The Model VTI-1 is a singleinput, single-output device, and the Model VTI-2
accepts a single input and provides dual outputs.
FEATURES
APPLICATION
• Converts voltage, current, or potentiometer signal
into 4-20 mA signal
• Direct or reverse acting
• 6 or 10 VDC output reference voltage
available to power input device
• Loss of input signal results in 0 mA output
• LED indication of valid input signal (VTI-1)
• Dual output model
• Independently configurable outputs
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
VTI-1
Voltage to current conversion
Current to current scaling
Setpoint adjustment using potentiometer
Signal duplication (one input/two outputs)
Resistance to current conversion
Averaging of 4-20 mA loops
Signal reversal
Signal sequencing
SPECIFICATIONS
Power supply
Input ranges
VTI-1
VTI-2
22-27 VDC @ 50 mA (VTI-2:100 mA)
(10V reference voltage output)
15-27 VDC @ 50 mA (VTI-2:100 mA)
(6V reference voltage output)
1-19 VDC, 1V min span,
301 k1 input impedance
150 k1 input impedance
4-76 mA, 4 mA min span,
2501 input impedance
2-38 mA, 2 mA min span,
5001 input impedance
1.33-25 mA, 1.33 mA min span,
7501 input impedance
Input signal loss
threshold
0.7 VDC
Output range
4-20 mA
Output load
8501 max @ 24 VDC
Rmax = Vsupply - 7
Linearity
Operating temp
20 mA
<1.0% of span
32° to 158°F (0° to 70°C)
Humidity limit
Reference voltage
output
Mounting
Terminations
Dimensions
Snap-track
Enclosed
Weight
VTI-1
VTI-2
5% to 95% noncondensing
10 VDC @ 15 mA max
(1-19 VDC input)
6 VDC @ 10 mA max
(1-11 VDC input)
Snap-track (VTI-1 only)
1/2'' hub, panel, or DIN rail
mount enclosures
VTI-1 snap-track mount:
screw terminals
Hub, panel, DIN rail mount:
12'' (30.5 cm) lead wires
1.75'' H x 2.25'' W x 0.8''D
(4.45 x 5.72 x 2.22 cm)
4.0'' H x 2.25'' W x 1.75''D
(10.16 x 5.72 x 4.45 cm)
2 oz (69 g)
6 oz (207 g)
337
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
VTI-2-H
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
VOLTAGE AND CURRENT CONVERTER / RESCALER
MODEL VTI
TYPICAL APPLICATIONS
24 VDC
Power Supply
24 VDC
Power Supply
Locate VTI close
to potentiometer
to minimize noise
pickup.
VTI with XR1
VTI
(blue)
Voltage or
Current Signal
(white)
(black)
(purple)
(no connection)
(yellow)
Increase
(blue)
V SIG IN
V SIG IN
+ 24V PWR
(white)
COM
(black)
UCM-SPA or Potentiometer Sensor - any
end-to-end value from
100Ω to 10 kΩ. Specify
pot range when
ordering.
REF V OUT
MA SIG OUT
4-20 mA
+ 24V PWR
COM
(purple)
(red) UAD-R1 (black)
REF V OUT
(yellow)
MA SIG OUT
4-20 mA
4-20 mA
Output
4-20 mA Output
For signal reversal (20-4 mA OUT), specify reverse acting when ordering.
Using a Potentiometer to Vary a
4-20 mA Signal
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
Voltage to Current,
Current to Current, and Signal Reversal
24 VDC
Power
Supply
24 VDC
Power
Supply
VTI-2
VTI-2
(blue)
Voltage
or
Current
Signal
(white)
(black)
(purple)
(no connection)
(yellow)
(brown)
(blue)
Voltage
or
Current
Signal
V SIG IN
+ 24V PWR
(white)
(black)
(purple)
(no connection)
COM
REF V OUT
(yellow)
(brown)
MA SIG OUT #1
V SIG IN
+ 24V PWR
COM
REF V OUT
MA SIG OUT #1
MA SIG OUT #2
MA SIG OUT #2
4-20 mA
Output #1
4-20 mA
Output #1
4-20 mA
Output #2
4-20 mA
Output #2
Example: One 4-20 mA input becomes two identical 4-20 mA outputs.
Example: Output #1 is 4-20 mA over a 4-12 mA (1-3V) input.
Output #2 is 4-20 mA over a 12-20 mA (3-5V) input.
Signal Sequencing
Signal Duplication
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
VTI-1
VTI-2
DESCRIPTION
Voltage and current converter/rescaler, single output
Voltage and current converter/rescaler, dual output
ENCLOSURE
Leave blank for snap-track mounting (VTI-1 only)
H
1/2'' Threaded hub mount
P
Panel mount
D
DIN rail mount
OPTIONS
-XR1 Potentiometer to current converter
(includes UAD-R1, potentiometer not included)
Important! The VTI is
not intended for field
calibration and must be
factory-calibrated.
Please supply the
fol-lowing information at
time of order: input,
output, and direct or
reverse acting.
Example: VTI-1-XR1 Potentiometer to current converter, snap-track mounted
UCM-SPA
338
RELATED PRODUCTS
0-10 kΩ Three-wire pot with stainless steel plate
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
ISOLATED DC-TO-DC TRANSMITTER
MODEL DT13
DESCRIPTION
The Model DT13 is a signal isolator that accepts a current or voltage input and provides a linearly transferred
current or voltage output. The input and output are electrically isolated, making the Model DT13 useful for
ground loop elimination, common-mode signal rejection,
and noise pickup reduction. The Model DT13 is
designed to function effectively in electrically noisy environments. The Model DT13 is compatible and can interface with recorders, data loggers, personal computers,
programmable controllers, HVAC controllers, building
automation controllers, variable speed drives, and other
process monitoring and control systems. The Model
DT13 is furnished with snap-track for easy mounting.
•
•
•
•
•
Eliminates ground loop wiring problems
Multiple input/output ranges are jumper selectable
24 and 120 VAC powered models
Snap-track mounting for easy installation
Low cost
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
Depth: 1.25'' (3.2)
OPERATION
The Model DT13 input-conditioning circuitry scales and
filters the DC input and drives a precision isolator, which
carries the signal across the isolation barrier. The output
side of the isolator drives a circuit that reconverts the
signal into a replica of the input, which is again scaled (if
necessary) to meet the user’s requirement.
20 MA
5
10
15
ISO
PWR
ISO
2.25
(5.7)
V MA
10V 5V 15V
5
(12.7)
SPECIFICATIONS
Input/Output
Input impedance
Voltage
Current
Output capability
Voltage
Current
Output zero/span
0-20 mA, 4-20 mA, 0-5V, 1-5V,
0-10V, 2-10V, 0-15V, or
3-15 VDC jumper selectable
5 VDC: 49.9 k1; 10 VDC: 99.8 k1;
15 VDC: 74.8 k1
20 mA: 2501 max
15 VDC, 6 mA max
current loading
20 mA DC, 10001 max load
Up to 20% offset to the
0-20 mA, 0-5V, 0-10V, and
0-15V ranges
Isolation
Linearity
Response time
Ambient operating
temp
Humidity
Power
DT13-24
DT13-120
Dimensions
Weight
1000V (DC or AC peak) max
Better than 0.1% of span
70 ms typical
14° to 140°F (-10° to 60°C)
5% to 95% noncondensing
24 VAC ±10% 50/60 Hz, 12 VA
120 VAC ±10% 50/60 Hz, 6 VA
2.25" H x 5" W x 1.25"D
(5.7 x 12.7 x 3.2 cm)
0.65 lb (0.3 kg)
339
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
FEATURES
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
ISOLATED DC-TO-DC TRANSMITTER
MODEL DT13
SETUP AND CALIBRATION
Table 1 below shows the input and output configurations available with the DT13. Determine the signal requirements for the
application, and set the input and output jumpers according to
the table. The input jumpers are located on the DT13 near the
SIG IN terminals. The output jumpers are located near the SIG
OUT terminals. If CAL appears in the table for desired signals,
the DT13 will also require field calibration of the zero and span
pots.
To field calibrate the DT13, apply the appropriate supply voltage to the AC power terminals. The red PWR LED will be on
continuously. Apply the minimum input signal to the SIG IN terminals. Adjust the zero pot until desired minimum output is
reached. Now apply the maximum input signal, and adjust the
span pot until the desired maximum output is reached. Repeat
this process as necessary until accurate results are achieved.
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
TABLE 1. INPUT AND OUTPUT CONFIGURATIONS
INPUT
SIGNAL JUMPERS 0-20 mA
20 MA
0-20 mA INPUT
OUTPUT
MA, MA
20 MA
4-20 mA INPUT
OUTPUT MA, MA, CAL
INPUT
5V
0-5V
OUTPUT
MA, MA
INPUT
5V
1-5V
OUTPUT MA, MA, CAL
INPUT
10V
0-10V
OUTPUT
MA, MA
INPUT
10V
2-10V
OUTPUT MA, MA, CAL
INPUT
15V
0-15V
OUTPUT
MA, MA
INPUT
15V
3-15V
OUTPUT MA, MA, CAL
4-20 mA
20 MA
MA, MA, CAL
20 MA
MA, MA
5V
MA, MA, CAL
5V
MA, MA
10V
MA, MA, CAL
10V
MA, MA
15V
MA, MA, CAL
15V
MA, MA
0-5V
20 MA
V, V, 5V
20 MA
V, V, 5V, CAL
5V
V, V, 5V
5V
V, V, 5V, CAL
10V
V, V, 5V
10V
V, V, 5V, CAL
15V
V, V, 5V
15V
V, V, 5V, CAL
OUTPUT SIGNAL
1-5V
0-10V
2-10V
20 MA
20 MA
20 MA
V, V, 5V, CAL
V, V, 10V
V, V, 10V, CAL
20 MA
20 MA
20 MA
V, V, 5V
V, V, 10V, CAL
V, V, 10V
5V
5V
5V
V, V, 5V, CAL
V, V, 10V
V, V, 10V, CAL
5V
5V
5V
V, V, 5V
V, V, 10V, CAL
V, V, 10V
10V
10V
10V
V, V, 5V, CAL
V, V, 10V
V, V, 10V, CAL
10V
10V
10V
V, V, 5V
V, V, 10V, CAL
V, V, 10V
15V
15V
15V
V, V, 5V, CAL
V, V, 10V
V, V, 10V, CAL
15V
15V
15V
V, V, 5V
V, V, 10V, CAL
V, V, 10V
0-15V
20 MA
V, V, 15V
20 MA
V, V, 15V, CAL
5V
V, V, 15V
5V
V, V, 15V, CAL
10V
V, V, 15V
10V
V, V, 15V, CAL
15V
V, V, 15V
15V
V, V, 15V, CAL
3-15V
20 MA
V, V, 15V, CAL
20 MA
V, V, 15V
5V
V, V, 15V, CAL
5V
V, V, 15V
10V
V, V, 15V, CAL
10V
V, V, 15V
15V
V, V, 15V, CAL
15V
V, V, 15V
WIRING
Input
Signal
mA or V
+
–
Span Pot
Zero Pot
PWR LED lights when AC power is applied to the DT13
SIG IN
5V
15V
20 mA
10V
Input Jumpers
PWR
ISO
V
Output Jumpers
10V 5V 15V
SIG OUT
Sourcing
Output
Signal
mA or V
ISO
mA
VOLTS
OUT
RANGE
AC Power
VAC IN
AC Power
+
–
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
DT13-24
DT13-120
–C
340
DESCRIPTION
Isolated DC-to-DC transmitter 24 VAC
Isolated DC-to-DC transmitter, 120 VAC
Option: Factory set to specific input/output (specify when ordering)
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
UNIVERSAL MATH MODULE
MODELS UMM-1, UMM-2
DESCRIPTION
The Universal Math Module is a unique multifunction microcomputer-based interface that can be utilized to solve a variety
of signal selection and manipulation applications. The Model
UMM-1 is furnished in a unique slim-line design housing,
which saves panel space, and can be ordered with an optional
DIN rail mounting adapter. The Model UMM-2 is a snap-track
mounted version, and its operation is identical to the Model
UMM-1. The UMM models accept up to four analog inputs,
providing a single analog output according to the operating
mode selected. This versatile product allows the user to select
from many operating modes.
USER-SELECTABLE OPERATING MODES
Highest or lowest signal selection
Minimum or peak signal hold selection
Multiple signal averaging
High and low limit control
Action reversal
Square root extraction (SQ model)
UMM-1
UMM-1-SQ
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
•
•
•
•
•
•
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
DIP switch-selectable operating modes
Voltage or milliamp input signals
LED status indication
User-selectable direct or reverse acting
24 VAC/VDC power
Slim-line design housing or snap-track
mounted models
• Furnished with detailed setup instructions
UMM-2
UMM-2-SQ
SPECIFICATIONS
Power
24 VDC ±10% @ 50 mA
24 VAC ±10% @ 120 mA
Accuracy
Square root
Inputs
±1% of full scale (except square root)
1% FS @ 25% to 100% of range
1.5% FS @ 10% to 25% of range
2% FS @ 5% to 10% of range
5% FS @ 0% to 5% of range
4 analog: 0-5 VDC, 1-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC,
2-10 VDC, 0-20 mA, or 4-20 mA
Input impedance
mA
2501
V
70 kΩ
Operating
temp
32° to 158°F (0 to 70°C)
Output
Humidity
5% to 95% noncondensing
1 analog: 0-5 VDC, 1-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC,
2-10 VDC, 0-20 mA, or 4-20 mA
Output loading range
5 VDC
500Ω min
10 VDC
1000Ω min
20 mA
650Ω max
Action
Direct or reverse acting;
DIP switch selectable
Dimensions
UMM-1
3.4"H* x 2"W x 4.8"D
(8.6 x 5.1 x 12.4 cm)
UMM-2
3.25"H x 4.6"W x 1"D
(8.3 x 11.8 x 2.54 cm)
Weight
0.44 lb (0.2 kg)
*Add 1.2" (3.0 cm) for mounting tabs
341
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
UNIVERSAL MATH MODULE
MODELS UMM-1, UMM-2
USER-SELECTABLE OPERATING MODES
WIRING (TYPICAL)
High and Low Signal Selection
The UMM configured for this mode will accept two, three, or four analog input signals and output the signal that is either the highest or lowest of the input signals. To increase the number of input signals,
UMM’s may be cascaded by wiring the output of one UMM to the
input of another UMM. Two UMMs wired in this fashion would allow
up to 7 input signals. No calibration is required; however, high and low
limits can be set on the output.
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
Minimum and Peak Hold Signal Selection
In the peak hold operating mode, up to three analog inputs are monitored. The highest (peak) input signal is remembered, passed to the
output, and held until a higher input signal level occurs. In the minimum hold mode, up to three inputs are monitored. The lowest input
signal is remembered, passed to the output, and held until a lower
input signal level occurs. A contact closure will reset the output signal.
Multiple Signal Averaging
The UMM configured for this operating mode will accept two, three, or
four analog input signals and output a signal that is the average of the
input signals. To average up to seven inputs, the primary UMM
accepts four inputs, and its output is wired to the first input of the secondary UMM. The output of the secondary UMM is the average of up
to seven inputs. The sum can be derived by multiplying the signal
average by the number of inputs.
High/Low Limit Control and Signal Reversal
The UMM may be used as a single input limit control, allowing the output to be limited to an adjustable upper and/or lower limit. When the
input signal reaches the upper or lower limit setting, the output will
remain at that particular limit setting. The high/low limit function can
also be combined with other operating modes such as high/low signal
selection, peak/minimum hold selection, or signal averaging. The output of the UMM can be selected to increase as the input increases
(direct action), or the output can be reversed to decrease as the input
increases (reverse action).
Square Root Extraction
When the UMM is ordered with the optional square root function (SQ
option), it may be used as a single input square root extractor, providing an output proportional to the square root of the input signal. The
square root function can also be combined with other operating
modes such as high/low signal selection, peak/minimum hold selection, or signal averaging.
Signal Out
–
+
Mode
DIP
Switches
M
O
D
E
LO
LIM
IN4
Input
Jumpers
IN3
IN2
IN1
DIS MA V
24 VAC
or VDC
+
–
mA or V
Signal
+
–
mA or V
Signal
+
–
mA or V
Signal
+
–
SIG IN3
mA or V
Signal
+
–
SIG IN1
OUT
Output Jumper
SIG OUT
24V PWR
COM
SIG IN4
SIG IN2
UMM
* In the minimum and peak hold operating modes, a
normally open momentary switch is wired to SIG IN4
and 24V PWR to allow reset of the output.
APPLICATION NOTES
• All input signals wired to the SIG IN terminals
must be of the same type and range.
• The output signal from the SIG OUT terminal must
be of the same type and range as the input signals.
• Always disable (jumper to DIS position) any input
that is not to be used.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
UMM-1
UMM-2
DESCRIPTION
Universal math module enclosed in slim-line housing
Universal math module snap-track mounted
OPTIONS (factory installed only)
Square root extractor
SQ
DIN rail mounting adapter (UMM-1 and UMM-1-SQ only)
47
Example: UMM-1-SQ-47 Universal math module with square root option and DIN rail
mounting adapter
342
HI
LIM
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
SETPOINT CONTROLLER
MODEL PXZ4
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES
• For use in almost any type single-loop control
application
• PID control or fuzzy logic control
• Manual or autotuning
• Programmable control action, reverse or direct
• Four-digit, LED indication of the process variable
and setpoint
• Output status indication
• Fault indication of input sensor
• Selectable indication resolution
• Digital filtering to suppress electrical noise
• Two-level, menu-driven format for easy
programming
• Nonvolatile memory, no battery required
• Input: 4-20 mA, 1-5 VDC; Output: 4-20 mA
• 1/16 DIN package
• Attractive black plastic housing
• NEMA 4X faceplate
• 85-264 VAC power supply
SPECIFICATIONS
Input
Current
Voltage
Scaling range
Sampling cycle
Filter
Output
Current
Control type
Proportional band
Integral time
Derivative time
Action
Indication
PV/SV display
Status display
Span of display
4-20 mA DC, impedance: 2501 with
external resistor
1-5 VDC, impedance: 450 k1 min.
-1999 to 9999
0.5 sec
0-900.0 sec, in 0.1 sec steps
Indication accuracy
Setting
Setting accuracy
Power supply
Power consumption
Memory
Diagnostics
Noise reduction
4-20 mA DC, 6001 max
PID control or fuzzy logic control,
manual or autotuning
0% to 999.9% in 0.1% steps
0 to 3200 sec in 1 sec steps
0% to 999.9 sec in 1 sec steps
Direct or reverse, programmable
Enclosure
Process/setpoint variable, changeable
(red LED display, four digits)
Control output
-1999 to 9999 (programmable)
Mounting
Termination
Ambient temp
Storage temp
Ambient humidity
Weight
Approvals
±0.5% full scale ±1 digit @ 73°F
Eight push buttons on front panel
0.1% full scale
85-264 VAC, 50/60 Hz
10 VA @ 120 VAC
Nonvolatile, no battery required
Monitored by watchdog timer
Normal mode (50/60 Hz):
50 dB or more
Common mode (50/60 Hz):
140 dB or more
ABS plastic, black, 1/16 DIN
Front panel: NEMA 4X
Flush panel or surface mount
8-pin socket
14° to 122°F (-10° to 50°C)
-4° to 140°F (-20° to 60°C)
90% or less RH noncondensing
0.5 lb (0.23 kg)
UL-recognized component,
File #E131280; CE certified
343
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
The Model PXZ4 Setpoint Controller is one of the most technically advanced instruments in the industrial and commercial
markets today. It is also one of the least expensive controllers
of its kind. Through the use of a specially designed Fuji microprocessor, the Model PXZ4 incorporates the latest technology
for controlling applications. With simple, finger-tip programming from the front panel, the operator can tailor the operation
of the controller quickly and easily. By automatically setting
proportional band, integral (reset) time, and derivative (rate)
time by means of the autotuning function, control parameter
guesswork is eliminated. In addition, this controller employs
Fuji's patented fuzzy logic algorithms. The Model PXZ4 can
learn processes, using the PID parameters as a starting point.
This intelligence allows the process to reach its setpoint in the
shortest time possible while virtually eliminating overshoot.
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
SETPOINT CONTROLLER
MODEL PXZ4
APPLICATIONS
ENGINEERING LABELS INCLUDED
4-20 mA output allows control
of the following:
• Valve actuators
• Damper actuators
• Variable speed drives
• Resistance transducers
• I/P transducers
• Step controllers
Scalable 4-20 mA/1-5 VDC input
allows monitoring of the following:
• Temperature
• Humidity
• Pressure
• Air flow
• Water flow
• Any 4-20 mA/1-5 VDC transmitter
within a range of -1999 to 9999
°F
°C
%RH
g/min
psig
in H2O
feet
ppm
rpm
CFM
ft2
cm2
mA
Hz
ohms
mbar
gal
scfm
VAC
pH
VDC
g/h
kg/h
m/s
m3
bar
and others
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
INSTALLATION
The controller should be installed as far away as possible from any device generating high frequency noise. Input signal and power
cables connected to the instrument should be wired away from power line and load line to minimize inductive noise. The instrument
power cable should be twisted to avoid noise.
The following guidelines for location should also be observed:
1. Do not install in a location with corrosive gases (sulfuric gas, ammonia, etc.).
2. Do not install in a location subject to vibration, impact, water, or high temperatures.
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
3.66
(9.30)
1.89
(4.80)
C
H
2.8
(7.15)
0.28
(0.71)
Panel Cutout Dimensions
1.77" square (4.50)
Note: Bracket for flush
panel mounting is
included with
PXZ4. Order
ATXINS socket
separately.
%
L
PV
1.76
(4.48)
SV
1.89
(4.80)
PV/SV SEL
DATA
ENT
PXZ-4
PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS
WIRING
4-20 mA
Control Output
+
24 VDC
Power
Supply
+
4-20 mA
Transmitter
–
4
+
3
2
+
–
–
5
–
–
+
1
250 Resistor (included)
Install for 4-20 mA transmitter;
remove for 1-5 VDC transmitter.
6
Terminals 2 and 5
are internally
common
7
Primary (Setpoint) Menu
Secondary (System) Menu
SV - Main setpoint
P-n1 - Action, direct or reverse
P - Proportional band
P-df - Input digital filter
I - Integral (reset) time
P-SL - Lower value of input range
d - Derivative (rate) time
P-SU - Upper value of input range
AT - Autotuning command
P-dP - Decimal point position
LoC - Parameter security lockout
PVOF - Input value offset
8
FUZY - Fuzzy logic control switch
Power Supply
85-264 VAC
50/60 HZ
dSP1-7 - Parameter mask
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
PXZ4
SR2P-06
ATXINS
344
DESCRIPTION
Setpoint controller
Eight-pin socket, DIN rail/surface mount
Hooded solder type socket for flush panel mounting
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
SETPOINT CONTROLLER
MODEL UCM-420A
DESCRIPTION
The Model UCM-420A is a low-cost microprocessor-based
Proportional plus Integral (PI) controller that may be used for a
wide variety of control applications. All setup and programming
is done by DIP switches and bottle plug jumpers on the Model
UCM-420A. Setpoints may be local and/or remote. The output
may be direct or reverse acting.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
PI control
DIP switch/jumper programming
Selectable throttling range
Selectable integral reset rate
Direct or reverse acting
Setpoint potentiometer on unit
Six-hour memory on loss of power
Optional DIN rail mounting
Optional setpoint potentiometer with
stainless steel wall plate (UCM-SPA)
UCM-420A
UCM-SPA
MODES OF OPERATION
Setpoint Controller
The UCM-420A input monitors the process being controlled.
This input may be a 4-20 mA or 1-5 VDC signal from a pressure sensor, flow transmitter, temperature sensor, etc., or
an input from a Precon Type III temperature thermistor.
Then, the UCM-420A provides a 4-20 mA PI output signal
to control a valve, VFD, damper, etc., based on a setpoint
as described below.
1. Local setpoint controller – The potentiometer mounted on the unit may be used to control the setpoint. The
local setpoint may also be a UCM-SPA setpoint potentiometer, the setpoint option of a Precon Model ST-S3EXA temperature sensor - a 4-20 mA signal or a 1-5 VDC
signal.
2. Remote setpoint controller – In this mode, the setpoint signal may be a 4-20 mA, 1-5 VDC, or time-based
pulse-width signal from a BAS controller.
3. Remote setpoint controller with local adjustment –
The UCM-420A accepts a remote setpoint signal as
described above in #2. Then, a local setpoint signal, as
described in #1, may be used to adjust the setpoint. The
local setpoint will have authority to adjust the setpoint
±12.5% of the input range. If the local setpoint is from a
Precon ST-S3E-XA, it will have authority to adjust the
setpoint ±9.4% of the input range.
4. Output expander – The UCM-420A may be operated in
a multiplexed pulse-width modulation mode (PWM) so
that one BAS output may control up to eight groups of
UCM-420As, with each group able to have a different
setpoint. Each UCM-420A may also have local setpoint
adjustment as described in #3.
Sample and Hold
The UCM-420A may be used to monitor a 4-20 mA or 1-5V
control signal. If the signal being monitored is lost, the
UCM-420A will hold the last valid value for the signal until
the signal returns. On a power loss, the value of the signal
is remembered up to six hours.
Pulse Width to 4-20 mA Converter (single or multiplexed)
The UCM-420A may be used to convert a time-based
pulse-width AC or DC signal to a 4-20 mA output. By using
the multiplexed mode, multiple UCM-420As may be controlled by one BAS output.
4-20 mA Signal Generator
If the device to be controlled by the UCM-420A needs to be
calibrated before the system is started up, the UCM-420A
may be used to generate a 4-20 mA output in one mA
increments.
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply voltage
Remote setpoint input
Local setpoint input
PWM time base
Output
Output resolution
Output burden
24 VAC ±10% @ 130 mA max
24 VDC +15%, -10% @ 65 mA max
4-20 mA, 1-5 VDC, PWM or
multiplexed PWM
4-20 mA, 1-5 VDC, three-wire
potentiometer or Precon two-wire
potentiometer (ST-S3E-XA)
0.1-2.65, 5.2, 12.85, 25.6, or
0.59-2.93 sec
4-20 mA sourcing
255 steps
650Ω max
Input
Input impedance
Accuracy
Operating temp
Humidity limit
Remote setpoint pot
Weight
UCM-420A
UCM-SPA
4-20 mA, 1-5 VDC or
Precon Type III thermistor
(Thermistor range 50° to 90°F)
250Ω (mA), 10,000Ω (voltage)
±1%
32° to 158°F (0° to 70°C)
5% to 95% noncondensing
UCM-SPA 0-10 k1
1.3 lb (0.61 kg)
0.75 lb (0.34 kg)
345
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
FEATURES
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
SETPOINT CONTROLLER
MODEL UCM-420A
WIRING
UCM-420A DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
TIME
B6 B7 B8 BASE
0 0 0 2.65
0
0 0
1
0
0 1
2
0 0 1
0
1 0
3
0
1 1
1
0 0
1
0 1
6
1
1 0
7
1
1 1
8
0
0 0
10%
0
0 1
20%
0
1 0
35%
4
0 1 0 12.85
0 1 1 25.6
0
1 1
50%
5
1 X X .59-2.93
1
0 0
65%
1
0 1
80%
1
1 0
90%
1
1 1 100%
5.2
RESET
A4 A5 PER MIN
"1" MEANS
TURNSWITCH ON
0 0
OFF
0 1
0.5
1 0
1
1 1
2
"0" MEANS
TURNSWITCH OFF
SWITCH ON
SWITCH OFF
A3
REVERSEACTING
DIRECT ACTING
A2 BOTHOFF>>REMOTESETPT LOCAL SETPT ENABLE
A1 SAMPLEANDHOLDMODE REMOTE SETPT ENABLE
B1 BOTHOFF>>ANALOG
PWM REM SETPT SGLE UNIT
B2
REMOTESETPOINT
PWM REM SETPT MUX MODE
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A
PROP
A6 A7 A8 T.R.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B
BAS Controller
PWM Contacts
STATUS
LED
REMOTE
FEEDBACK LOCAL
SETPOINT SETPOINT
MUX
B3 B4 B5 ADDR
PWM
INPUT
PWM
INPUT
REM SPT
INPUT
LOC SPT
POT +
LOC SPT
INPUT
LOC SPT
POT –
FEEDBK
INPUT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
24 PWR
11
12
COMMON
MA SIG
OUTPUT
LOCAL SETPOINT WIRING OPTIONS
Local SPT Pot
Local SPT Input
Local SPT Pot
+
(black)
(green)
–
(red)
Local SPT Pot
+
Local SPT Input
Local SPT Pot
–
SEE
LOCAL
SETPOINT
WIRING
BELOW
+
–
+
–
+
–
–
+
+
–
24 VAC/VDC PWM Signal from BAS
(only if remote setpoint is PWM)
4-20 mA or 1-5V Remote Setpoint Signal
(only if remote setpoint is analog signal)
4-20 mA, 1-5V or Thermistor Input Signal
4-20 mA Sourcing Output Signal to
Controlled Device
24 VAC/VDC Power
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
Increase
Setpoint
0.7
(1.78)
Three-Wire Potentiometer
(5K to 50K MAX) Local Setpoint
(10K Factory Installed)
+
–
Local SPT Pot
3.4
(8.64)
Optional
DIN Rail
Adapter
4.0
(10.16)
Local Setpoint
4-20 MA or 1-5V
4.6
(11.68)
Common
Local SPT Input
Local SPT Pot
Remote
Setpoint
(if used)
4.8
(12.19)
+
Set Point Knob
Two-Wire Potentiometer Local
Setpoint
(XA Option on Precon ST-S3E-XA
Thermistor)
–
Increase
Setpoint
2.0
(5.08)
Side View
Common
2.75
(6.99)
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
UCM-420A
UCM-420A
UCM-SPA
PCM
346
DESCRIPTION
Setpoint controller with local setpoint potentiometer
OPTIONS
DIN rail mount (must be factory installed)
47
47
Example: UCM-420A-47 Setpoint controller with DIN rail mounting
RELATED PRODUCTS
Setpoint potentiometer, 0-10 kΩ, three-wire pot on S.S. plate for remote mounting
Air pressure controller
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
SEQUENCER CONTROL MODULE - SINGLE STAGE
MODEL UCS-121
DESCRIPTION
The Model UCS-121 is a solid-state device used to control
on/off type loads in HVAC and lighting systems from an
analog current or voltage signal. The Model UCS-121 can
be used to convert an analog current or voltage signal from
a BAS controller or sensor/transmitter into a SPDT digital
output. The Model UCS-121 is provided with a mounting
track or in a hub-mount enclosure for easy installation.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
One stage of relay control, SPDT
Voltage or current input
24 VAC/VDC power
LED indication of relay status
Adjustable relay setpoint
Adjustable relay differential
Snap-track or hub enclosure
Jumper-enabled time constant
UCS-121 Hub Enclosure
UCS-121
WIRING
OPERATION
The Model UCS-121 accepts a 0.5-20 mA or 0.75-15V input
signal to produce a single-stage relay output. The relay has a
single-turn potentiometer adjustment to set the trip point. The
relay differential is factory set to 0.5 mA or 0.375V but can be
easily adjusted in the field using the single-turn differential
adjustment potentiometer on the Model UCS-121. With the
action jumper in the Direct DIR position, the relay will energize
when the input signal increases to the setting of the setpoint
pot SPT and will de-energize when the input signal decreases
below the setting of the differential pot DIF. With the action
jumper in the Reverse REV position, the relay will de-energize
when the input signal increases to the setting of the SPT and
will energize when the input signal decreases below the setting of the DIF. To enable a 30-second time constant, place
the T.C. jumper in the DLY position. The NODLY position
removes the time constant.
S
P
T
D
I
F
Action Jumper
DIR REV
T.C. Jumper
DLY NODLY
Input Jumper
mA V
Relay N.O.
To
Controlled
Load
+
_
24 VAC/VDC
Signal
mA or V
+
_
Relay
Common
Relay N.C.
RLY
NO
RLY
COM
RLY
NC
24 V
PWR
COM
SIG
IN
Relay ON
LED
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply voltage
Input signal
Output
Relay rating
Accuracy/
Repeatability
Setpoint
adjustment
Time constant
Input impedance
24 VAC ± 10% @ 50 mA
24 VDC ± 10% @ 25 mA
0.5-20 mA or 0.75-15 VDC
jumper selectable
One SPDT relay
5A @ 120 VAC
Operating
temp
Humidity
Dimensions
Track mount
Hub enclosure
±1%
Single-turn potentiometer
30 seconds, jumper enabled
2501 (mA input)
10 k1 (V input)
Weight
Relay differential
32° to 158°F (0 to 70°C)
5% to 95% RH noncondensing
3.25''H x 1.5''W x 1.25''D
(8.24 x 3.8 x 3.2 cm)
4''H x 2.25''W x 1.75''D
(10.2 x 5.7 x 4.4 cm)
0.4 lb (0.18 kg)
0.5 mA or 0.375V, factory settings, adjustable by differential
potentiometer, 0.2-2V or 0.25-3 mA
347
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
FEATURES
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
SEQUENCER CONTROL MODULE - SINGLE STAGE
MODEL UCS-121
CALIBRATION
Setup and Calibration
The UCS-121 can be ordered preset to the application to save time during installation. Specify the -C option for
factory setup and calibration. The UCS-121 can also be set up and calibrated in the field.
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
Input Jumpers
Set the input jumper for the type of input signal, mA or V, to be used. Set the action jumper for either direct DIR or
reverse REV action. See Operation for a description of direct and reverse action.
Setpoint Adjustment
1. When making adjustments, the load being controlled should be disconnected from the UCS-121 and the T.C.
jumper placed in the NODLY position.
2. Connect a meter in series with the SIG IN terminal and the 0.5-20 mA signal to read a current signal.
To read a voltage input, 0.75-15 VDC, connect the meter across the COM and SIG IN terminals.
3. Turn the setpoint pot SPT fully counterclockwise to its minimum position.
4. Adjust the input signal to the desired relay trip-point.
5. Turn the setpoint pot clockwise until the RELAY ON LED turns off (or turns on if the action jumper is in the
REV reverse position).
6. Adjust the relay trip point by slowly turning the setpoint pot SPT counterclockwise until the RELAY ON LED
turns on (or turns off if the action jumper is in the REV reverse position).
7. The relay trip-point is now set. Verify setting by varying the input signal up and down and observing the
RELAY ON LED.
8. Set the jumper to the DLY position to add a 30-second time constant or to the NODLY position for no time constant.
Differential Adjustment
The relay differential is factory set for 0.5 mA or 0.375V, which should be suitable for most applications without
requiring any adjustment. If the relay differential must be adjusted, follow these steps:
1. When making adjustments, the load being controlled should be disconnected from the UCS-121 and the T.C.
jumper placed in the NODLY position.
2. The relay setpoint should be set prior to adjusting the relay differential. See instructions above.
3. Connect a meter in series with the SIG IN terminal and the 0.5-20 mA signal to read a current signal. To read a
voltage input, 0.75-15 VDC, connect the meter across the COM and SIG IN terminals.
4. Adjust the input signal to any value greater than the relay trip-point setting so that the RELAY ON LED turns
on (or turns off if the action jumper is in the REV reverse position).
5. Turn the differential pot DIF fully clockwise to its maximum position.
6. Adjust the input signal to the desired relay differential value. The relay differential value should be equal to the
setpoint value minus the required relay differential. For example, if the relay setpoint is adjusted for 10V and a
1V differential is required, the input signal should be adjusted for a differential value of 9V (10V - 1V = 9V).
7. Turn the differential pot very slowly counterclockwise until the RELAY ON LED turns off (or turns on if the
action jumper is in the REV reverse position).
8. The relay differential is now set. Verify settings by varying the input signal up and down and observing the
RELAY ON LED.
9. Set the jumper to the DLY position to add a 30-second time constant or to the NODLY position for no time constant.
MODEL
UCS-121
UCS-121-H
-C
ORDERING INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION
Sequencer control module, single stage
Sequencer control module, single stage, hub enclosure
Factory-set custom relay settings (specify trip point, differential, time constant,
and direct or reverse acting when ordering)
Example:
UCS-121-H-C Single-stage sequencer, hub enclosure, factory-set relay
348
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
SEQUENCER CONTROL MODULE - TWO STAGE
MODEL UCS-221
DESCRIPTION
The Model UCS-221 is a solid-state multistage device
used for floating/tri-state control of motors, or multistage
control in HVAC systems from a single analog signal. It
can be used to obtain a digital output from a voltage or
current-producing sensor. In its base configuration, the
Model UCS-221 has two relay outputs. Units may be
daisy chained to provide additional stages of control,
and a mounting track is supplied for easy installation.
Two stages of relay control
Voltage or current input
24 VAC/VDC power
LED indication of relay status
Adjustable relay setpoints
Adjustable relay differentials
Snap-track mounted
DIMENSIONS
The Model UCS-221 accepts a 1-20 mA or 0.75-15V
input signal to produce a two-stage relay output. Each
relay has a multiturn potentiometer adjustment to set the
pull-in point. Relay A can be jumper selected to pull in
on either a rise or fall in signal. Relay B always pulls in
on a signal rise. The Model UCS-221 considers an input
signal below 1 mA or 0.75V to be a loss of signal and
both relays will de-energize. Multiple Model UCS-221s
can be daisy chained to operate additional stages from
one input signal, and any combination of UCS-221s and
UCS-421s (maximum of eight slave units) can be daisy
chained. The chain output on slave units produces a DC
voltage output that can be used for control of electronic
actuators.
in
(cm)
Depth: 1.375
(3.49)
B
A
MODE
FLT SEQ
J1
A
INPUT
TYPE
J2
CH
B
SET A
A
B
SET B
J3
V
J4
MA
3.25
(8.25)
COMMON
SIGNAL
INPUT
CHAIN
OUTPUT
OPERATION
24 V
POWER
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
3.5
(8.89)
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply voltage
Input signal
Output
Relay rating
Accuracy/Repeatability
Setpoint adjustment
Input impedance
24 VAC ±10% @ 100 mA
24 VDC ±10% @ 50 mA
1-20 mA or 0.75-15 VDC
jumper selectable
2 SPDT relays
5A @ 120 VAC
±1%
25-turn potentiometers
2501 (mA input),
10 k1 (V input)
Operating temp
Humidity limit
Dimensions
Weight
Optional enclosure
Relay differential
32° to 158°F (0° to 70°C)
5% to 95% RH noncondensing
3.25"H x 3.5"W x 1.375"D
(8.25 x 8.89 x 3.49 cm)
0.4 lb (0.18 kg)
B5 or B7
0.5 mA or 0.375V
(adjustable by plug-in
differential resistors - see
“Wiring” on next page)
349
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
FEATURES
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
SEQUENCER CONTROL MODULE - TWO STAGE
MODEL UCS-221
WIRING
Make all connections according to the diagram below or as shown on the job diagrams and in compliance with national
and local codes. Make all connections with power removed. Failure to do so could result in circuit board damage. Use
shielded #18-gauge cable for connections from the UCS-221 to the controller, shield grounded at the controller.
TABLE 1. OTHER DIFFERENTIALS
INPUT
TYPE
J2
CH
J3
B
A
MODE
FLT SEQ
A
J1
B
V
MA
CHAIN
OUTPUT
SIGNAL
INPUT
COMMON
B
24V
POWER
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
J4
A
J3
V
J4
MA
A
B
+
24 VAC/VDC
–
Signal
(mA or V)
Factory Relay Settings
Relay A: 16 mA, 12V
Relay B: 12 mA, 9V
–
+
B
SET A SET B
CHAIN
OUTPUT
SET A SET B
A
INPUT
TYPE
J2
CH
SIGNAL
INPUT
MODE
FLT SEQ
A
J1
B
24V
POWER
B
A
Jumper J2 should be
in chain (CH) position
when using UCS-221
as a slave unit.
Plug-in Differential Resistors (1/4W, 1%)
18.2 kΩ = 0.5 mA or 0.375V (factory supplied)
See Table 1 for other differentials.
COMMON
Other Differential Resistors can be used
(customer supplied)
9.1 kΩ = 0.25 mA or 0.1875V
36.5 kΩ = 1.0 mA or 0.75V
54.9 kΩ = 1.5 mA or 1.125V
73.2 kΩ = 2.0 mA or 1.5V
CW CCW
COM
Relay Contact Wiring for
Floating/Tri-state Control
(set mode Jumper J1 in FLT position)
Note: Chain out is used to connect the
master unit to the first slave.
Additional slaves are connected
from signal input to signal input.
24V Power
Terminal
Common
Terminal
Signal Input
Terminal
Connections to
UCS-221 or
Slave Units
(Max eight units)
SETUP / CALIBRATION
1. Set jumpers to desired position as follows:
Mode jumper (J1) - In FLT position, relay A energizes on a decrease in signal. In the SEQ position, relay A energizes on an
increase in signal. Relay B always energizes on an increase in signal.
Input jumpers (J2, J3, J4) - Select J4 mA position for a 1-20 mA input, or J3 V position for a 0.75-15 VDC input.
If the UCS-221 is used as a slave control, place the bottle plug jumper in the J2 chain position.
2. Connect a meter in series with the SIGNAL INPUT terminal and the 1-20 mA (+) signal to read a current signal. To read a
voltage input, connect across the COMMON (-) and SIGNAL INPUT (+) terminals.
3. Adjust the input signal to the desired pull-in current or voltage for relay A.
4. If relay A’s LED is on, turn setpoint adjustment (SET A) clockwise (counterclockwise if Relay A has mode jumper J1 in FLT
position) until it de-energizes; otherwise, proceed to step 5.
5. Adjust relay A pull-in point by turning the setpoint adjustment (SET A) counterclockwise (clockwise if relay A has mode
jumper J1 in FLT position) until the relay energizes. (Setscrews A and B are 25-turn potentiometers.)
6. Repeat steps 3, 4, and 5 for relay B using setpoint adjustment (SET B).
7. When using a 1-20 mA input, the CHAIN OUTPUT produces a 0.7 to 12 VDC signal, which is proportional to the input signal.
This can be used to control electronic actuators with an impedance of 2 k1 or larger. Connections should be made between
CHAIN OUTPUT and COMMON(-). If a voltage input is used, the CHAIN OUTPUT is directly proportional to the input.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
UCS-221
UCS-221-C
DESCRIPTION
Sequencer control module, two relay outputs, field calibrated
Sequencer control module, factory-set custom relay settings
(Specify settings when ordering.)
350
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
SEQUENCER CONTROL MODULE - FOUR STAGE
MODEL UCS-421
DESCRIPTION
The Model UCS-421 is a solid-state multistage device
used for floating/tri-state control of VAV boxes or multistage control in HVAC systems from a single analog signal. The Model UCS-421 can be used to obtain a digital
output from a voltage- or current-producing sensor. Four
relay outputs are in its base configuration. Units may be
daisy chained to provide additional stages of control and
are supplied with mounting track for easy installation.
Depth:
1.375
(3.49)
MODE
FLT SEQ
MODE
FLT SEQ
INPUT
TYPE
H3
A
C
B
A
B
D
D
C
CH
H4
V
H5
MA
3.25
(8.25)
CHAIN
OUTPUT
The Model UCS-421 accepts a 1-20 mA or 0.75-15V
input signal to produce four stages of relay output. Each
relay has a multiturn potentiometer adjustment to set the
pull-in point. Relays A and D can be jumper selected to
pull in on either a rise or fall in signal. Relays B and C
always pull in on a signal rise. The Model UCS-421 considers an input signal below 1 mA or 0.75V to be a loss
of signal and all relays will de-energize. Multiple Model
UCS-421s and can be daisy chained to operate additional stages from one input signal, and any combination of
units (maximum of eight slave units) can be daisy
chained. The chain output on slave units produces a DC
voltage output that can be used for control of electronic
actuators.
in
(cm)
SIGNAL
INPUT
OPERATION
DIMENSIONS
24V
POWER
Four stages of relay control
Voltage or current input
24 VAC/VDC power
LED indication of relay status
Adjustable relay setpoints
Adjustable relay differentials
Snap-track mounted
COMMON
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5.5
(13.97)
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply voltage
Input signal
Output
Relay rating
Accuracy/Repeatability
Setpoint adjustment
Input impedance
24 VAC ±10% @ 200 mA
24 VDC ±10% @ 100 mA
1-20 mA or 0.75-15 VDC
jumper selectable
4 SPDT relays
5A @ 120 VAC
±1%
25-turn potentiometers
2501 (mA input),
10 k1 (V input)
Operating temp
Humidity limit
Dimensions
Weight
Optional enclosure
Relay differential
32° to 158°F (0° to 70°C)
5% to 95% RH noncondensing
3.25"H x 5.5"W x 1.375"D
(8.25 x 13.97 x 3.49 cm)
0.55 lb (0.25 kg)
B7
0.5 mA or 0.375V
(adjustable by plug-in
differential resistors - see
"Wiring" on next page)
351
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
FEATURES
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
SEQUENCER CONTROL MODULE - FOUR STAGE
MODEL UCS-421
WIRING
Make all connections according to the diagram below or as shown on the job diagrams and in compliance with
national and local codes. Make all connections with power removed. Failure to do so could result in circuit
board damage. Use shielded #18-gauge cable for connections from the UCS-421 to the controller, shield
grounded at the controller.
TABLE 1. OTHER DIFFERENTIALS
Other Differential Resistors can be used
(customer-supplied):
9.1 kΩ = 0.25 mA or 0.1875V
36.5 kΩ = 1.0 mA or 0.75V
54.9 kΩ = 1.5 mA or 1.125V
73.2 kΩ = 2.0 mA or 1.5V
MODE
FLT SEQ
BA
H1
CD
B
A
C
SIG
LOSS
D
B(C)
A
B
C
INPUT
TYPE
H2
D
H3
CH
H4
V
H5
mA
SIGNAL
INPUT
CHAIN
OUTPUT
MODE
FLT SEQ
COMMON
A(D)
LED will illuminate upon
signal loss.
24V
POWER
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
Factory Relay Settings
Relay A: 4 mA, 3V
Relay B: 6.6 mA, 5V
Relay C: 9.3 mA, 7V
Relay D: 12 mA, 9V
Plug-in Differential Resistors (1/4W, 1%)
18.2 kΩ = 0.5 mA or 0.375V (factory supplied)
See Table 1 for other differentials.
Jumper H3 should be in chain
position (CH) when using UCS-421
as a slave unit.
Chain Output is used to connect the master
unit to the first slave. Additional slaves are
connected from signal input to signal input.
CW CCW COM
Relay Contact Wiring
for Floating/Tri-state
Control (set mode
Jumper H1 or H2 in FLT
position)
24 VAC/VDC
Signal
mA or V
+
–
–
+
24V Power Terminal
Common Terminal
Signal Input Terminal
Connections to UCS-221
or UCS-421 slave units
(max eight units)
SETUP / CALIBRATION
1. Set jumpers to desired position as follows:
Mode jumpers (H1, H2) - In FLT position, relays A and D energize on a decrease in signal. In the SEQ position, relays A and
D energize on an increase in signal. relays B and C always energize on an increase in signal.
Input jumpers (H3, H4, H5) - Select H5 mA position for a 1-20 mA input or H4 V position for a 0.75-15 VDC input. If the
UCS-421 is used as a slave unit, place the bottle plug jumper in the H3 chain position.
2. Connect a meter in series with the SIGNAL INPUT terminal and the 1-20 mA (+) signal to read a current signal. To read a
voltage input, connect across the COMMON (-) and SIGNAL INPUT(+) terminals.
3. Adjust the input signal to the desired pull-in current or voltage for relay A.
4. If relay A’s LED is on, turn its setpoint adjustment clockwise (counterclockwise if relay A or D has mode jumper in FLT position) until it de-energizes; otherwise, proceed to step 5.
5. Adjust relay A pull-in point by turning its setpoint adjustment counterclockwise (clockwise if Relay A or D has mode jumper in
FLT position) until the relay energizes. (Setscrews A, B, C, and D are 25-turn potentiometers.)
6. Repeat steps 3, 4, and 5 for relays B, C, and D using corresponding setpoint adjustments.
7. When using a 1-20 mA input, the CHAIN OUTPUT produces a 0.7-12 VDC signal, which is proportional to the input signal.
This can be used to control electronic actuators with an impedance of 2 kΩ or larger. Connections should be made between
CHAIN OUTPUT(+) and COMMON(-). If a voltage input is used, the CHAIN OUTPUT is directly proportional to the input.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
UCS-421
UCS-421-C
352
DESCRIPTION
Sequencer control module - four relay outputs, field calibrated
Sequencer control module - factory set custom relay settings
(Specify settings when ordering.)
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
SEQUENCER CONTROL MODULE - SIX STAGE
MODEL UCS-621
DESCRIPTION
The Model UCS-621 is a solid-state device used for
multi-stage control in HVAC systems, sequencing boilers or chillers, or floating/tri-state control of VAV boxes
from a single analog signal. The Model UCS-621 can
be used to obtain a digital output from a voltage or current producing sensor, and it is supplied with mounting
track for easy installation.
FEATURES
Six stages of relay control
Voltage or current input
24 VAC/VDC power
LED indication of relay status
Adjustable relay setpoints
Adjustable relay differentials
Snap-track mounted
OPERATION
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
DIMENSIONS
The Model UCS-621 accepts a 0.5-20 mA or 0.375-15
VDC signal to produce up to six stages of relay output.
Each relay has a multiturn potentiometer adjustment to
set the pull-in point. Each of the six relays is jumper
selectable to pull in on either a rise or fall in signal.
Individual relay differential is easily adjusted by using
different value plug-in differential resistors.
in
(cm)
1
Depth: 1.375
(3.49)
2
5
4
3
6
3.25
(8.25)
1
2
3
4
5
6
SIG
1
2
3
4
5
6
V
MA
6.0
(15.24)
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply voltage
Input signal
Output
Relay rating
Accuracy/Repeatability
Setpoint adjustment
Input impedance
24 VAC ±10% @ 300 mA
24 VDC ±10% @ 150 mA
0.5-20 mA or 0.375-15 VDC
jumper selectable
Six SPDT relays
5A @ 120 VAC
±1%
25-turn potentiometers
250Ω (mA input),
30 kΩ (V input)
Operating temp range
Humidity limit
Dimensions
Weight
Relay differential
32° to 158°F (0° to 70°C)
5% to 95% RH noncondensing
3.25"H x 6.0"W x 1.375"D
(8.25 x 15.24 x 3.49 cm)
0.7 lb (0.32 kg)
0.5 mA or 0.375V
(adjustable by plug-in
differential resistors - see
“Wiring” on next page)
353
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
SEQUENCER CONTROL MODULE - SIX STAGE
MODEL UCS-621
WIRING
Make all connections according to the diagram below or as shown on the job diagrams and in compliance with national and
local codes. Make all connections with power removed. Failure to do so could result in circuit board damage. Use shielded
#18-gauge cable for connections from the UCS-621 to the controller, shield grounded at the controller.
To Controlled Devices
1
3
3
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
4
5
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
SIG
Set jumpers for relay to energize
on a decrease or increase in signal
6
6
Relay LED - On when
relay is energized - one
LED per relay
V
mA
SIG IN (+)
COM (-)
24V
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
1
2
Signal LED - on
when signal is
present
25-Turn Adjustment
Pot - one for each relay
factory set to 20 mA
(all relays)
Plug-in Differential Resistors (1/4W, 1%)
9.1 kΩ = 0.5 mA or 0.375V (factory supplied)
= Increase in Signal
See Table 1 for other differentials
= Decrease in Signal
Table 1. OTHER DIFFERENTIALS
Example:
Other differential resistors
1-3 Set to energize
on increase in signal; can be used (customer supplied)
18.2
kΩ = 1.0 mA or 0.75V
Signal
4-6 Set to energize
mA or V
on decrease in signal 27.4 kΩ = 1.5 mA or 1.125V
36.5 kΩ = 2.0 mA or 1.5V
mA or V
Input Jumper
+ 24 VAC/VDC
–
+
–
Power
SETUP / CALIBRATION
Set jumpers to desired position as follows:
1. SIG jumpers (1-6) - In the position, each relay energizes on a decrease in signal. In the position, each relay
energizes on an increase in signal.
Input jumpers (V, mA) - Select mA position for a 0.5-20 mA input or V position for a 0.375-15 VDC input.
2. Connect a meter in series with the SIG IN (+) terminal and the 0.5-20 mA (+) signal to read a current input. To
read a voltage input, connect across the COM (-) and SIG IN (+) terminals. The SIG LED will illuminate when a
signal is present.
3. Adjust the input signal to the desired pull-in current or voltage for relay 1.
4. If relay 1 LED is on, turn its setpoint adjustment clockwise (counterclockwise if SIG jumper is set to “decrease in
signal”) until it de-energizes. If Relay 1 LED is off, proceed to step 5.
5. Adjust relay 1 pull-in point by turning its setpoint adjustment counterclockwise (clockwise if relay SIG jumper is
set to “decrease in signal”) until the relay energizes. (Setscrews 1-6 are 25-turn potentiometers.)
6. Repeat steps 3, 4, and 5 for relays 2-6 using corresponding setpoint adjustments.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
UCS-621
UCS-621-C
354
DESCRIPTION
Sequencer control module - six relay outputs, field calibrated
Sequencer control module - factory set custom relay settings
(Specify settings when ordering.)
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
MULTIFUNCTION INPUT / OUTPUT EXPANDER
MODELS UMX-4, UMX-8
DESCRIPTION
The Model UMX-8 is a unique microcomputer-based
multifunction interface that expands the input or output
capability of building automation controllers. It has eight
SPDT output relays that provide on/off control from a
jumper-selectable PWM current or voltage input signal.
The sequence of operation can be easily selected by
DIP switches. A dual mode allows two Model UMX-8s
to be controlled in sequence from a single input signal.
HOA switches allow for manual override of each relay
output. Feedback and LEDs provide status indication of
the Model UMX-8.
The Model UMX-4 provides four SPDT output relays. All
jumper positions and DIP switch settings are identical to
the Model UMX-8. The operation of the Model UMX-4
is identical to relays 1-4 on the Model UMX-8.
Feedback and LEDs provide status indication.
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
UMX-4
STANDARD CONTROL SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS
Multiplexed Relay Output Expander - Provides up to
16 relay outputs expansion from one BAS output
Multiplexed Input Expander - Provides up to 16 inputs
expansion from one BAS output and one BAS input
RTU or AHU Controller - Provides multistage heating
and cooling sequences with economizer
Sequencer - Up to 16 stages of sequential control
Custom Sequences - Consult Trane for details
APPLICATION
The Model UMX is recommended for use only with BAS
controllers programmable to issue discrete PWM, current, or voltage signal commands. For sequential relay
control from a varying analog current or voltage signal,
use a UCS sequencer module.
UMX-8
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Four or eight SPDT relay outputs
HOA switches
LED status indication
Field-selectable functions
Output status feedback
Override indication
Field-selectable PWM current or voltage
inputs
• Pull-apart terminal blocks
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply voltage
UMX-4
UMX-8
Input signal
Input impedance
Current
Voltage
Output relays
UMX-4
UMX-8
24 VAC ±10% @ 210 mA max
24 VDC ±10% @ 90 mA max
24 VAC ±10% @ 350 mA max
24 VDC ±10% @ 150 mA max
PWM, 0-20 mA, 0-5V, 0-10V,
0-15V, jumper selectable
2501
46.4 k1 min
4 SPDT, 5A @ 24 VAC/VDC
8 SPDT, 5A @ 24 VAC/VDC
Override output
status
Status feedback
UMX-4
UMX-8
Feedback load
current
Operating temp
Humidity
Dimensions
(UMX-4 & UMX-8)
Weight
Transistor switch,
30 VDC @ 100 mA max
One output, 1-5V for relays 1-4
Two outputs, 1-5V for relays
1-4 and 1-5V for relays 5-8
3 mA max per output
32° to 158°F (0° to 70°C)
5% to 95% noncondensing
3.25"H x 7"W x 1.56"D
(8.25 x 17.78 x 3.96 cm)
1.1 lb max (0.5 kg)
355
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
MULTIFUNCTION INPUT / OUTPUT EXPANDER
MODELS UMX-4, UMX-8
OPERATION
Single and Dual UMX Control
The UMX can be operated in both a single and dual operating mode. In the single mode, one UMX is controlled from a single current/voltage or PWM signal. In the dual mode, two UMXs are controlled in sequence, providing up to 16 relay outputs from a single current/voltage or PWM input. This dual UMX control is not available with all control sequences. Refer to the control
sequences in Tables 2 and 3 for availability. If single UMX control is used, refer to Table 2 for DIP switch settings. For dual UMX
control, refer to Table 3.
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
Pulse Width Modulation (PWM)
To control the UMX from a PWM signal, put the input selection jumper on the UMX in the PW position. Set the operating mode DIP
switches (Tables 2 or 3) as required. Refer to the control sequence Tables 4-7 for time base and control sequence information.
Current/Voltage Input (ANA)
The UMX can be controlled from a current or voltage input. To
operate in this mode, set the input selection jumpers on the UMX
as shown in Table 1.
Set the operating mode DIP switches (See Tables 2 or 3) as
required. Refer to the Control Sequence Tables 4-7 for time base
and control sequence information.
TABLE 1. CURRENT/VOLTAGE INPUT JUMPERS
Current/Voltage input 0-20 mA 0-5V 0-10V 0-15V
AN
MA
5V
10V
15V
OPERATING MODE (DIP SWITCHES 1, 2, 3, & 4)
TABLE 2. SINGLE UNIT UMX CONTROL
DIP SWITCHES
PWM ANA L1 L2 HSL CSL SVT LVT 1 2 3
4
X
0 0 0
1
X
X
X
0 1 0
0
X
X
X
0 1 0
1
X
X
X
0 1 1
0
X
X
X
0 1 1
1
PWM
ANA
L1
L2
HSL
CSL
SVT
LVT
Pulse Width Modulated Input Signal
Current/Voltage Input Signal
Level 1 UMX (Dual UMX Mode)
Level 2 UMX (Dual UMX Mode)
Hold Outputs on Signal Loss (Current/Voltage)
Clear Outputs on Signal Loss (Current/Voltage)
Short Signal Validation Time (Current/Voltage)
Long Signal Validation Time ((Current/Voltage)
TABLE 3. DUAL UMX CONTROL
PWM ANA L1 L2 HSL CSL SVT LVT
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
DIP SWITCHES
1 2 3
4
0 0 1
0
0 0 1 1
1 0 0
0
1 0 0
1
1 0 1
0
1 0 1
1
1 1 0
0
1 1 0
1
1 1 1
0
1 1 1
1
DIP Switches
0 Off
1 On
L1, L2 - UMX Levels - Dual UMX Mode Only
In the Dual UMX mode, two UMXs respond in sequence to a single input signal. Using the DIP switch settings shown in Table 3,
assign the first UMX to Level 1 (L1) and the second UMX to Level 2 (L2). Dual UMX control is available in most current/voltage
and PWM modes. PWM time base doubles in Dual UMX mode.
HSL, CSL - Signal Loss Hold - Current/Voltage Input Mode Only
When using a current/voltage input, the UMX can be programmed to either hold all relays in their current state (HSL) or turn all
relays off (CSL) upon a loss of the input signal. Use DIP switch settings shown in Table 2 or Table 3 to program this feature.
SVT, LVT - Signal Validation Time - Current/Voltage Input Mode Only
When varying a current/voltage input signal to the UMX, it is necessary for the input signal to remain at the desired value for a
set length of time. This prevents other relays on the UMX from energizing while the input signal is changing values. This set
length of time, or validation time, can be selected for either 1 second (SVT) or 3 seconds (LVT). Use the DIP switch settings in
Table 2 or 3 to select the validation time.
356
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
MULTIFUNCTION INPUT / OUTPUT EXPANDER
MODELS UMX-4, UMX-8
CONTROL SEQUENCES (DIP SWITCHES 5, 6, 7, AND 8)
TABLE 4.
OUTPUT
EXPANDER
(each relay
indepen-dently
controllable)
For current/voltage
signal, DIP switches
5, 6, 7, and 8 are
OFF, OFF, ON, OFF.
For PWM signal, use
OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF.
DISCRETE CURRENT AND VOLTAGE COMMANDS
mA
5V
10V
15V
Note: Each input command may vary to approximately
50% of the change to the next highest or lowest
command and still be considered valid.
3.5
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
10.0
11.0
12.0
13.0
14.0
15.0
16.0
17.0
18.0
19.0
20.0
0.75
1.00
1.25
1.50
1.75
2.00
2.25
2.50
2.75
3.00
3.25
3.50
3.75
4.00
4.25
4.50
4.75
5.00
1.50
2.00
2.50
3.00
3.50
4.00
4.50
5.00
5.50
6.00
6.50
7.00
7.50
8.00
8.50
9.00
9.50
10.00
2.25
3.00
3.75
4.50
5.25
6.00
6.75
7.50
8.25
9.00
9.75
10.50
11.25
12.00
12.75
13.50
14.25
15.00
PWM (SEC)
200 mSec Minimum
Delay Between
Pulses
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
5.5
6.0
6.5
7.0
7.5
8.0
8.5
9.0
SINGLE* UMX RELAYS
U M X - 8
UMX-4
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
0
1
0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
0
X
X
1
0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
0
X
X
X
X
1
0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
0
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
0
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
0
X
X
X
X
1
0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
0
X
X
1
0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
0
1
0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
*Dual UMX control available in PWM mode only. PWM time base doubles in “Dual UMX” mode.
TABLE 5.
4 or 8 INPUT
EXPANDER
For current/voltage
signal, DIP switches
5, 6, 7, and 8 are
OFF, ON, OFF, ON .
For PWM signal, use
OFF, OFF, ON, ON.
TABLE 6.
4 or 8 STAGE
SEQUENCER
For current/voltage
signal, DIP switches
5, 6, 7, and 8 are
OFF, ON, OFF, OFF.
For PWM signal, use
OFF, OFF, ON, OFF.
TABLE 7.
RTU
CONTROLLER
3 HEAT, 3 COOL,
FAN, ECONOMIZER
For current/voltage
signal, DIP switches
5, 6, 7, and 8 are
OFF, ON, ON, OFF
For PWM signal, use
OFF, ON, OFF, OFF.
4.0
6.0
8.0
10.0
12.0
14.0
16.0
18.0
20.0
1.00
1.50
2.00
2.50
3.00
3.50
4.00
4.50
5.00
2.00
3.00
4.00
5.00
6.00
7.00
8.00
9.00
10.00
3.00
4.50
6.00
7.50
9.00
10.50
12.00
13.50
15.00
-1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
*Dual UMX control available in both current/voltage and PWM modes. PWM time base doubles in “Dual UMX” mode.
4.0
6.0
8.0
10.0
12.0
14.0
16.0
18.0
20.0
1.00
1.50
2.00
2.50
3.00
3.50
4.00
4.50
5.00
2.00
3.00
4.00
5.00
6.00
7.00
8.00
9.00
10.00
3.00
4.50
6.00
7.50
9.00
10.50
12.00
13.50
15.00
0.5
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
*Dual UMX control available in both current/voltage and PWM modes. PWM time base doubles in “Dual UMX” mode.
4.0
6.0
8.0
10.0
12.0
14.0
16.0
18.0
20.0
1.00
1.50
2.00
2.50
3.00
3.50
4.00
4.50
5.00
2.00
3.00
4.00
5.00
6.00
7.00
8.00
9.00
10.00
3.00
4.50
6.00
7.50
9.00
10.50
12.00
13.50
15.00
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
*Dual UMX control available in both current/voltage and PWM modes. PWM time base doubles in “Dual UMX” mode.
Contact Trane for other available control sequences.
357
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
Relay status
0 = Command OFF
1 = Command ON
X = No change of state
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
MULTIFUNCTION INPUT / OUTPUT EXPANDER
MODELS UMX-4, UMX-8
WIRING
8
8
8
6
5
5
4
4
6
7
6
4
3
1
1
2
Feedback Status (1-5 VDC) for Relays 5-8
1
UMX-8
AUTO
OFF
HAND
PW AN 15V
10V
5V
MA
POWER
PWM
OVERRIDE
OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS
5
Any outputs driving an external relay or an inductive load
should have a varistor installed at the relay as shown.
2
2
Input jumpers shown
jumpered for 0-10V input
LED Indication:
Power (green):
PWM (yellow):
Override (red):
V39ZA1 Varistor
Note:
3
3
LED Indication:
Relay LEDs (red):
on when relay is
energized in Auto
or Hand position
R
7
7
Override Switches: Apply 24V to the
UMX for the override switches to
function in the HAND position.
24V
FBK2
FBK1
24V PWR
COM
PWM
PWM
ANA
OVERRIDE
Feedback Status (1-5 VDC) for Relays 1-4
24 VAC/VDC Power Supply
PWM BAS Controller Contacts (if PWM is used)
PWM terminals are optoisolated and polarity insensitive.
Contacts may be wired in series to either PWM terminal.
Any 24V source can be used to power the PWM signal.
Current or Voltage Signal (if used)
On when power is present
On when PWM signal is present
On when any override switch is
out of the Auto position
Override Output, Transistor Switch 30 VDC @ 100 mA max
switch closes to common when any override switch is
out of the Auto position.
Note:
If driving a DC relay, a reverse connection diode is
recommended across the relay coil (such as 1N4004).
FEEDBACK
The UMX-8 has two feedback voltage output circuits labeled FBK1 (relay outputs 1-4) and FBK2 (relay outputs 5-8). The UMX-4
has one feedback voltage output circuit labeled FBK1 (relay outputs 1-4). When a relay output is energized, the following voltage
is added to the feedback output:
FBK2 - Feedback Circuit #2
FBK1 - Feedback Circuit #1
Relays 5,6,7,8
Off
1.0V
Relays 1,2,3,4
Off
1.0V
Relay 5
On
Add 0.27V
Relay 1
On
Add 0.27V
Relay 6
On
Add 0.53V
Relay 2
On
Add 0.53V
Relay 7
On
Add 1.07V
Relay 3
On
Add 1.07V
Relay 8
On
Add 2.13V
Relay 4
On
Add 2.13V
Example: If outputs 1 and 3 are energized and 2 and 4 are de-energized, the voltage output on FBK1 will be 2.34V
(1V + 0.27V +1.07V = 2.34V). The same would be true for FBK2 if relay outputs 5 and 7 were energized,
and 6 and 8 were de-energized.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
UMX-4
UMX-8
358
DESCRIPTION
Four-stage multifunction expander with HOA switches
Eight-stage multifunction expander with HOA switches
LIGHTING CONTROLS
LIGHTING CONTROLS
MODEL/SERIES
PRODUCTS
Check out our NEW Photo
Controls on page 375!
SERVICES
Create custom panels to
your specs for your lighting
controls.
PAGE
LIGHT SENSOR
CW — Photo Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
EM — Photo Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
MK7-B — Ambient Light Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
PN — Photo Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
PSR-1/PSR-1-T — Photo Sensitive Resistor Light Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
TB — Photo Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
TL — Photo Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
LIGHTING CONTACTORS
RR-7/RR-9 — Lighting Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
SH17 — Lighting Contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
TR Series — Retrofit Lighting Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
LIGHTING PANELS
BLV – User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
L28 — Mini-Lighting Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
L3500 — Lighting Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
L-KIT — Lighting Panel Upgrade Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
E-LINK — Communication Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
LP-PK — Programmers Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
PIL-1 — Pulse Initiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
RCB-8 — Relay Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
TI4500 Series — Telephone Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
OCCUPANCY SENSORS
B120-E-P — Power Pack, 120 VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
B230-E-P — Power Pack, 230 VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
B277-E-P — Power Pack, 277 VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
B347-D-P — Power Pack, 347 VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
CX-100/CI-200 — Occupancy Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
CI-24 — Occupancy Sensor, Ceiling Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
S-120/277/347-E — Slave Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
WS Series — Occupancy Sensor, Wall Switch Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
SWITCHES
SS Series — Sentry Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
DDN Series — Addressable Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
LPSW-K — Key Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
SOLUTIONS
Use our selection to
Expand Your Product
Offering and Lower
Your own lighting Costs!
TIME SWITCH
93000 Series/TS-200 series — Manual Time Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
Indicates New Products
LIGHTING CONTROLS
TRIATEK LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL
L3500 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The L3500 Series Lighting Control Panel provides the
capability to control high voltage lighting circuits, as well
as occupancy sensors, light level sensors, momentary
override switches, and other input devices via a two-wire
RS-485 network. The UL-listed L3500 Series integrates
with most building automation systems and is easy to
install, configure, and commission.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Microprocessor-based controller
Up to 120 switch inputs per panel
Up to 60 relay outputs per panel
Up to 255 panels per network
LEDs for group, relay, and system status
Direct manual-override switch on each relay
Easy, intuitive installation with removable relays
Integrated with most BAS networks and open
protocol networks or used as stand-alone lighting
control panel
Windows®-based software for easy setup and
commissioning
Programmable inputs, output priorities, flash
warning, relay energize time, output sequencing,
and software grouping
EPROM and EEPROM diagnostics
Flush- or surface-mounted enclosure
Removable terminal blocks and electronics panel
APPLICATION
The L3500 Series provides for a flexible, easy to install and
configure, powerful lighting control system. Panels may
stand alone, for control of up to 60 lighting circuits, or up to
255 panels may be networked together for added capacity.
The L3500 Series panels may also be fully integrated into
most Building Automation Systems, including direct connect
integration (no interface device needed) into Johnson
Controls Metasys BAS systems. The Model E-LINK network
interface device is required for integration into the following
systems and protocols: Alerton Technologies, Andover
Controls, Automated Logic, BACnet, Modbus, Delta
Controls, Honeywell, Siemens Building Technologies,
Teletrol Systems, and Trane Company.
The Model LP-PK lighting control panel setup software is
used to address the panel, build the lighting zones, and configure the inputs and outputs. The BLV BASnet® LightView™
user interface tool can be used for scheduling, monitoring,
and controlling the L3500 Series.
SPECIFICATIONS
Panel power supply
Communications
Switch inputs
Output relays
Relay life
Output terminals
Operating temp
Operating humidity
115/277 VAC ±10%, 60 Hz, 30 VA
Network ready, two-wire RS-485
24 standard, expandable to 120
dry contact or up to 24 VDC
momentary or maintained
16, expandable to 60
SPST mechanically latched
20A, 120 VAC tungsten
20A, 277 VAC ballast
2 million+ on/off cycles @ no load
300,000 on/off cycles @ full load
#14-8 AWG solid or stranded wire
32° to 125°F (0° to 52°C)
20% to 95% RH noncondensing
System certification
Warranty
Enclosure dimensions
16-relay
32-relay
48-relay
60-relay
Complete system UL-916, CSA,
CEC, ISO 9001, and New York City
approved #37908
Two years
16"H x 14"W x 4"D*
(40.6 x 35.6 x 10.2 cm)
25"H x 14"W x 4"D*
(63.5 x 35.6 x 10.2 cm)
34"H x 14"W x 4"D*
(86.4 x 35.6 x 10.2 cm)
42"H x 14"W x 4"D*
(106 x 35.6 x 10.2 cm)
*Add 1.5" to the H and W dimensions for flush-mount installation.
359
LIGHTING CONTROLS
FEATURES
LIGHTING CONTROLS
LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL
L3500 SERIES
WIRING
Network Wiring (if used)
Connect network wiring to the communications
terminal block according to the "+" and "-"
indications. When a shield wire is used, it may
be connected to the S terminal.
High Voltage Branch Circuits
Connect branch circuits to the relay terminal blocks according to the wiring layout.
Do not exceed 20A per circuit. In cases where dual high voltages are required,
they may be isolated using the left and right high voltage compartments.
Off On
To Circuit
Breaker
277V
20A max
On Off
1
2
3
4
5
RS-485
2 #18
Shielded
6
RS485
7
(-)(+)(G)
RS-485
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
G 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Switch
Inputs
LIGHTING CONTROLS
Ground
Transformer
30 VA
Fuse
(white) COM
(black) 120 VAC
(brown) 277 VAC
G
1 2 3
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1415 16 G
N
Momentary
On/Off
Switch
H
Power Supply and Test
The unit can be powered by either 120 or 277 VAC. It is factory-wired for 120 VAC.
To power from 277V, disconnect the 120V transformer primary lead (black) from
the fuseholder and connect the 277V transformer primary lead (brown) in its place.
Keep the unused lead (120V or 277V) insulated from all other leads and the enclosure.
When power is applied, the power-on LED should light after a few moments and remain
lit. The over button may be used to toggle the relays on/off. The auto button will restore the relays to their pre-override state.
Relay and Power Wiring
To On Input
To Common
Low Voltage Inputs
Connect one lead from each input to any one of the
G terminals. Connect the other lead to an input
(1-24) according to the wiring layout. Three-wire
switches require two input terminals. Do not apply
AC voltage to any of these terminals.
Network and Switches Wiring
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
L3516
L3532
L3548
L3560
LTR
LP-PK
DESCRIPTION
Assembled lighting control panel, 16 relay max (LTR relays not included), 120/277 VAC
Assembled lighting control panel, 32 relay max (LTR relays not included), 120/277 VAC
Assembled lighting control panel, 48 relay max (LTR relays not included), 120/277 VAC
Assembled lighting control panel, 60 relay max (LTR relays not included), 120/277 VAC
Relay for L3500 Series
Windows-based programmers kit – setup software
PANEL COMPONENTS
L3516-E
Enclosure only for L3516
L3516-I
Interior only for L3516
L3532-E
Enclosure only for L3532
L3532-I
Interior only for L3532
L3548-E
Enclosure only for L3548
L3548-I
Interior only for L3548
L3560-E
Enclosure only for L3560
L3560-I
Interior only for L3560
OPTIONAL COMPONENTS
LDIV35
High voltage compartment divider for 120/277 VAC (one relay space required)
LEXP1-L35 32 switch input expansion (factory installed)
LEXP2-L35 64 switch input expansion (factory installed)
LEXP3-L35 96 switch input expansion (factory installed)
L28-DRC
Distributed room controller (includes four LTR relays)
360
LIGHTING CONTROLS
TRIATEK MINI-LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL
L28
DESCRIPTION
The L28 Mini-Lighting Control Panel is a cost-effective lighting control solution for any size building. It is
available with up to eight relay outputs and 16 switch
inputs. The L28 controls high-voltage lighting circuits via
a two-wire RS-485 network, maintained or momentary
contacts from override switches, motion sensors, or a
touch-tone telephone.
FEATURES
WIRING
To Lighting
Circuit Breaker or
Lighting Load
RS485
2 #18
Shielded
BAS
Network
Wiring
(optional)
SPECIFICATIONS
Panel power supply
Communications
Programmable
switch inputs
Output relays
Lamp
Resistive
Operating temp
Operating humidity
System certification
Up to
Eight Relays
RS-485
L28
G 1 2 etc.
120 or 277 VAC
Line Voltage
Typical
Switch
Input
115/277 VAC + 10%, 60 Hz, 30 VA
Network ready, two-wire RS-485
Up to 16 dry or 24 VDC,
momentary or maintained
Up to eight relays SPST maintained
20A ballast, 277 VAC; 20A
tungsten, 277 VAC
20A, 277 VAC
32° to 125°F (0° to 50°C)
10% to 95% RH noncondensing
Complete system UL-916
CSA, New York City approved
#37908, CEC-Title 24, ISO 9001
Dimensions
Enclosure
12.75"H x 13.5"W x 4"D
(32.39 x 34.29 x 10.16 cm)
Door
13.75"H x 14.5"W x 0.13"D
(34.93 x 36.83 x 0.33 cm)
Weight (with eight relays) 17 lb (7.71 kg)
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
L28
LR-3
LR-3F
LP-PK
AI-6
DESCRIPTION
Mini-lighting control panel (relays not included)
L28 latching relay, 20A, 277V
L28 latching relay, 20A, 277V with auxiliary contact
for pilot light
Programmers kit
Optional light sensor input module (six inputs)
361
LIGHTING CONTROLS
• Up to 16 programmable switch inputs per panel
• Up to eight relay outputs per panel
• Programmable flash warning, on-time, and
grouping
• Integrate with most BAS networks and open
protocol networks or stand alone
• Windows®-based software for easy setup and
commissioning
• EPROM and EEPROM diagnostics
LIGHTING CONTROLS
BACNET/MODBUS LIGHTING PANEL CONTROL MODULE
MODEL E-LINK
DESCRIPTION
The E-LINK Control Module is a full-featured controller and
translator that is designed to integrate Triatek lighting control
systems into a BACnet or Modbus building automation system. A diverse set of ports enable communication with
BACnet over IP, Ethernet, ARCNET 156K, MS/TP, PTP, or
Modbus RTU or ASCII.
The E-LINK is easy to install. The rugged aluminum cover
protects the electronics from damage. The unit is pre-programmed at Triatek, so integration to the network is seamless.
LIGHTING CONTROLS
FEATURES
E-LINK
• Rugged aluminum cover for protection and noise
immunity
• 10/100 Base-T Fast Ethernet provides high-speed
communications to the controller
• Protocol translator package serves as a gateway
between BACnet or Modbus and the Triatek lighting
network
• SDRAM stores application programs and trends when
power is lost
SPECIFICATIONS
BACnet support
Communication
WIRING APPLICATIONS
BACnet over Ethernet
or BACnet IP on Port E1
24 VAC
BACnet over
ARCNET156K on
CMnet
Microprocessor
BACnet over
MS/TP or Modbus
on Port S1
Memory
TRIATEK Lighting
Network on Port S2
Real-time clock
Status indicators
L28
Lighting Panel
RCS1000 Programmable
Circuit Breaker Panel
L3500
Lighting Panel
(Example Lighting Panels)
Module addressing
Protection
Listing
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
E-LINK
DESCRIPTION
BACnet/Modbus lighting panel
control module
Note: E-LINK is programmed at the factory.
Power requirements
Operating temperature
Dimensions
Weight
362
Conforms to the BACnet Controller
(B-BC) Standard Device as defined in
BACnet 135-2001 Annex L
Ports available
10/100 Base-T Ethernet RJ-45 port
for BACnet /IP network or BACnet
over Ethernet
CMnet port for ARCNET 156
EIA-232/EIA-485 configurable port for
MS/TP or Modbus (EIA-485 is two- or
four-wire selectable)
EIA-232/EIA-485 port for Triatek
Lighting or PTP
32-bit Motorola PowerPC microprocessor with cache memory, Fast
Ethernet controller, high performance
32-bit communication co-processor,
ARCNET communication co-processor and I/O expansion CAN coprocessor
16 MB non-volatile battery-backed
SDRAM, 8 MB Flash memory,
32-bit memory bus
Battery backed real-time clock
LED status indicators for EIA-232/485
communication, Ethernet port communication, and low battery status
Seven segment status display for running, error, and power status
Rotary dip switches for intuitive network addressing of modules
Built-in surge and transient protection
circuitry for power and communications
UL916, CE, FCC Part 15-Subpart B Class A
24 VAC ±10%, 50 to 60 Hz, 24 VA or
24 VDC ±10%, 10W
-20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C) 10% to
90% RH, non-condensing
7.5"H x 11.38"W x 1.87"D
(19 x 28.7 x 3.5 cm)
1.4 lb. (45.5 kg)
LIGHTING CONTROLS
TRIATEK ACCESSORIES
MODEL L-KIT
DESCRIPTION
The Model L-KIT Lighting Panel Upgrade Kit replaces
old lighting controllers while reusing the existing switches, panel relays, and high voltage wiring.
FEATURES
• Contains all the features of a programmable panel
• Provides a low-cost solution for upgrading
existing lighting panels
• Interfaces to existing GE RR7/RR9, Douglas
WR6221/WR6321, Touch Plate, and Reliant
2R7/2R9 relays
• Reuses high-voltage wiring, low-voltage switch
wiring, enclosure, and 24 VAC transformer
L-KIT
ORDERING INFORMATION
L-KIT
Power
24 VAC + 10%, 50H2, 30 VA
Communications Network ready, two-wire RS-485
Switch Inputs
Up to 16 dry or up to 24 VDC,
momentary or maintained
Outputs
Relay outputs
Temp
32° to 125°F (0° to 50°C)
Humidity
10% to 95% RH noncondensing
MODEL
L
L
DESCRIPTION
Lighting panel upgrade kit
SYSTEM
25
GE RR7 (32 relays)
26
GE RR9 (32 relays)
27
Douglas WR6221/6231 (32 relays)
29
Touch Plate 3000 (30 relays)
25
# relays
LIGHTING CONTROLS
SPECIFICATIONS
K
Example: L-2532-K Lighting panel upgrade kit
for GE RR7 lighting panel for 32 relays
TRIATEK TELEPHONE OVERRIDE
TI4500 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The TI4500 Series Telephone Override allows remote override of lighting controls. This override can be accomplished through land lines or cell
phones. Password protection is standard.
FEATURES
• Uses existing telephone infrastructure
• Password protection
• Integrates into the building automation system
• Handles up to 8891 users and passwords
• UL listed
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
TI4500
TI4580
TI4500NET
020021
DESCRIPTION
Tone control, voice prompt, binary-coded output, optically
isolated outputs, includes TI-PK
Tone control, voice prompt, 80 dedicated outputs, optically
isolated outputs, includes TI-PK
Tone control, voice prompt, binary version with L controller
for connection to Triatek® network or can be read by multiple
BAS systems, includes TI-PK
Battery pack 5C AA 6 VDC
363
LIGHTING CONTROLS
TRIATEK SOFTWARE
MODELS LP-PK, BLV
DESCRIPTION
The Model LP-PK Programmers Kit is the setup software used to address and program Models LP-2800, LP3500, and LP-KIT control panels. The Model BLV
BASnet® LightView™ is a network communication module user’s tool that communicates with Microsoft Internet
Explorer for scheduling, monitoring, and controlling
Triatek lighting panels.
FEATURES
LIGHTING CONTROLS
LP-PK
• Easy-to-use, Windows-based programmers tool
• Diskette and PC serial port cable provided
• Direct connect PC to lighting panel
• Used to assign panel address and configure
inputs/outputs
• Reads, writes, and stores lighting controller program
LP-PK
BLV
• Uses Microsoft Internet Explorer to monitor/control
Triatek panels
• PC LAN card, LAN connect, or Internet connect
• Panel database upload, download, editing, backup
• Controls up to 255 lighting control panels
• 100 lighting areas, 1000 lighting groups
• 100 scheduled events, 32 holiday events
• User login and password
• Transaction and control logs
BLV
SPECIFICATIONS
LP-PK
IBM compatible 386sx or newer
1 MB or more of RAM
Mouse and unused serial port
500K free hard drive space
3.5 floppy drive
DOS 5.0, Win 3.x or higher,
95 or NT
BLV Module
Ethernet connection RJ45 female
RS232 port
On-board isolated, DTR pin
required, DB9 female for setting
initial IP address and password
RS-485 port
Power
Battery backup
Operating temp
Operating humidity
Dimensions
Enclosure
Weight
Terminal block for 18 AWG
twisted pair network to lighting
panels
115 VAC/12 VDC, power
adapter provided
Two years data retention
-40° to 158°F (-40° to 70°C)
20% to 95% RH noncondensing
11.5"H x 11.5"W x 3.5"D
(29.2 x 29.2 x 8.9 cm)
NEMA 1
1 lb (3.6 kg)
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
LP-PK
BLV
364
DESCRIPTION
Programmers kit
BASnet LightView module
(Must specify number of lighting
panels, additional costs associated
with each additional panel.)
LIGHTING CONTROLS
ADDRESSABLE LIGHTING CONTROL SWITCHES
DDN SERIES
FEATURES
• Addressable digital switch eliminates low voltage
home runs
• Switches reside on a single network
• Bicolor LEDs indicate status
• Up to 60 addressable digital switches per lighting
panel
• Control board factory-installed in the lighting
panel
DDN-SW1
Digi-Touch™ two-button digital
switch shown with wall plate
DDN-L
Digi-Touch™ Control Board
LIGHTING CONTROLS
DESCRIPTION
The DDN Series Digi-Touch™ Switches allow the creation of a switch network. This eliminates the need for a
home run from the switch back to the lighting controller.
Just connect to a four-conductor cable for communication from the switch to the controller.
DDN-SW1
Digi-Touch™ one-button digital
switch shown with wall plate
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
DDN-L
DDN-L35
DDN-SW
DDN-SW1
DESCRIPTION
Digi-Touch™ control board for L28 Series
Digi-Touch™ control board for L35 Series
Digi-Touch™ switch two-button
Digi-Touch™ switch one-button
KEY SWITCH
LPSW-K
DESCRIPTION
The LPSW-K Key Switch allows key operation
of lighting controls.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
LPSW-K
DESCRIPTION
One key switch, removable key,
stainless steel, maintained contact
LPSW-K
Key Switch shown with tamper-resistant
face plate, screw chuck, and keys
365
LIGHTING CONTROLS
OCCUPANCY SENSOR
MODEL CI-24
DESCRIPTION
The Model CI-24 is a ceiling-mount passive infrared
(PIR) occupancy sensor specifically designed to
interface with building automation systems through an
internal isolated relay. A user-adjustable time delay (30
seconds to 30 minutes) on deactivation may be programmed through DIP switches to prevent unnecessary
cycling. The Model CI-24 includes a built-in override
switch, and two levels of sensitivity are selectable
through DIP switches. The four-level patented Fresnel
lens allows the Model CI-24 to cover up to 1200 ft2
(111.48m2).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Advanced PIR technology
Adjustable time delay
Adjustable sensitivity
Isolated relay for use with BAS and other control
systems
Patented Fresnel lens
360° coverage up to 1200 ft2 (111.48m2)
Red LED to indicate occupancy detection
Five-year warranty
Manual override switch
SPECIFICATIONS
Power supply
Power consumption
Time-delay adjust
24 VAC/VDC
37 mA
Digital (DIP switch setting) for
30 sec, 10 min.,
20 min., or 30 min.
Coverage
360° up to 1200 ft2 (111.48m2)
Color
White
Isolated contact rating 1A @ 24 VDC, 24 VAC
1/2A @ 120 VAC
Approvals
UL and ULC listed
Operating temp
32° to 98°F (0°to 36°C)
Mounting
2.75" to 3" hole in ceiling
Dimensions
3.3" dia x 2.2" deep
(8.5 x 5.6 cm), extends approx.
0.36" (0.91 cm) from ceiling
Weight
1.0 lb (0.46 kg)
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
CI-24
DESCRIPTION
24 VAC/VDC ceiling-mount
occupancy sensor with
SPDT isolated contact
OPERATION
Powered by 24 VAC/VDC, the Model CI-24 uses
advanced PIR technology to detect occupancy.
Detection occurs when the unit senses the difference
between infrared emissions from a human body and the
background space. When occupancy is detected, the
Model CI-24 transfers an SPDT contact set. The contacts return to their normal state after a user-selectable
time delay once the space is unoccupied.
WIRING
Isolated Relay
Contacts
LIGHTING CONTROLS
FEATURES
24 VAC/VDC Supply
Normally Closed Contact
2-(green)
Common
3-(orange)
Normally Open Contact
4-(yellow)
24 VAC/VDC Return
5-(black)
DIP Switch Control for Time
Delay, Sensitivity, and Override
ON 1 2 3 4
DIP SWITCH #
1
2
TIME DELAYS
30 sec
10 min.
20 min.
30 min.
X
X
O
O
X
O
X
O
SENSITIVITY
Minimum
Maximum
3
4
O
X
OVERRIDE
Normal
Override
O
X
X=on
366
LED
Cable
Wires
1-(red)
O=off
LIGHTING CONTROLS
OCCUPANCY SENSORS
MODELS CX-100, CI-200
DESCRIPTION
The Model CX-100 wall-/corner-mount and Model
CI-200 ceiling-mount devices are full-featured passive
infrared (PIR) occupancy sensors that control lighting
and HVAC equipment. Both units can control equipment
directly through a power pack or through a BAS with the
SPDT isolated relay built into the sensors. Both models
have adjustable sensitivity and time delays.
CI-200
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Advanced PIR technology
Adjustable time delay
Adjustable unit sensitivity
Contains isolated relay for use with BAS and other
control systems
Fresnel lens with choice of three coverage
patterns (CX-100)
360° coverage (CI-200)
LED indicator
Five-year warranty
CX-100
OPERATION
Models CX-100 and CI-200 use advanced PIR technology to detect occupancy. Detection occurs when the units sense the difference between infrared emissions from a human body and the background space. They are powered by 24 VDC either from a
power pack or separate 24 VDC power supply. Both units operate by sending a low voltage signal to the power pack and energizing the SPDT relay when a person enters the controlled area. Both units have an adjustable time delay for turning the lights
off when no occupancy is detected and both have an adjustable sensitivity setting.
Each unit contains an adjustable light level sensor for controlling lighting based on ambient light level. This feature is wired differently than the occupancy-only output. The feature does not work with the SPDT-isolated relay.
SPECIFICATIONS
Power supply
Power consumption
CX-100
CI-200
Time-delay adjust
Ambient light
level adjust
Coverage
Number of sensors
per power pack
24 VDC
Isolated contact rating
20 mA
26 mA
Digital (DIP switch setting) from
30 sec to 30 min.
Approvals
Operating temp
Dimensions
CX-100
From 2.5 to 430 footcandles
See patterns on next page
Three
CI-200
Weight
1A @ 24 VDC, 1/2A @
120 VAC, SPDT
UL and ULC listed
32° to 98°F (0°to 36°C)
3.38"L x 3.35"W x 2.05"D
(8.6 x 8.5 x 5.2 cm)
3.3" dia x 2.2" deep
(8.5 x 5.6 cm), extends approximately 0.36" from ceiling
1.0 lb (0.46 kg)
367
LIGHTING CONTROLS
FEATURES
LIGHTING CONTROLS
OCCUPANCY SENSORS
MODELS CX-100, CI-200
COVERAGE PATTERNS
Coverage shown is maximum and represents coverage for half-step walking motion. Under ideal
conditions, with no barriers or obstacles, coverage can reach up to 1200 ft2 for half-step walking
motion and up to 500 ft2 for hand motion (typical desktop level of activity).
8
(2.44)
44
(13.4)
22
3
22
13
13
7
(6.71) (3.96)(2.13) (0.91) (3.96) (6.71)
3
7
(0.91) (2.13)
0
(0.31)
CI-200
ft
(m)
18
(5.49)
ft
(m)
5
(1.52)
0
(0.31)
16
(4.88)
Aisle Way
CX-100-3
LIGHTING CONTROLS
30
(9.14)
15
(4.57)
10
(3.05)
14
5
16
50
(1.52)(4.27)(4.88) (15.24)
5
14
28
48
(1.52) (4.27) (8.53) (14.63)
Dense Wide Angle (Standard)
67
(20.42)
80
90
(24.38) (27.43)
Long Range (CX-100-1)
67
21
0
21
38
38
(11.58) (6.40) (0.31) (6.40)
(11.58) (20.42)
10
10
33.5
33.5
(10.21) (3.05) (3.05)
(10.21)
Coverages shown are maximum and represent coverage for half-step walking motion. For building spaces with lower levels of
activity or with obstacles and barriers, coverage size may vary.
CX-100
WIRING
Building
Automation
System
DCP 1.5W
Power Supply
Cable
Wires
+-
24 VAC IN
Not
Used
To Other Sensors
(up to 50 sensors
per P/S)
N.C. Contact
Common
N.O. Contact
Control Output 24 VDC
Control Return
Light Level Output 24 VDC
+24 VDC
Common
1-(brown)
2-(red)
3-(orange)
4-(yellow)
5-(green)
6-(blue)
7-(purple)
8-(gray)
Note: See power pack in this section for switching lighting loads or other line voltage loads
For Digital Input to BAS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
CX-100
CX-100-1*
CX-100-3*
CI-200
Model
B120E-P
B277E-P
B230E-P
B347D-P
S-120/277/347E-P
DCP-1.5W
368
DESCRIPTION
Dense wide-angle sensor with mounting bracket
Long-range sensor with mounting bracket
Aisle-way sensor with mounting bracket
Ceiling-mount sensor
* Special order
RELATED PRODUCTS
Description
Power pack
Power pack
Power pack
Power pack
Slave pack
Power supply
Voltage
120 VAC
277 VAC
220-240 VAC
347 VAC
120/277/347 VAC
24 VAC/24 VDC
CX-100
or
CI-200
LIGHTING CONTROLS
OCCUPANCY SENSOR
WS SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The WS Series Occupancy Sensor is a decorator style
automatic wall switch with an attractive, low profile
design. It replaces a standard wall switch to turn lighting
on when a room is occupied and off when the room is
vacant. The WS Series has advanced passive infrared
(PIR) technology and a two-level lens to sense when a
room is occupied. It also contains an adjustable lightlevel sensor to keep lights off when ambient light is adequate.
FEATURES
Advanced PIR technology
Adjustable time delay
Integrated light-level sensor
Adjustable unit sensitivity
No minimum load requirement
No leakage to load in off mode
Voltage drop protection
Compatible with all ballasts and
incandescent lighting
• Five-year warranty
• Includes single-gang cover plate
LIGHTING CONTROLS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
OPERATION
The WS Series uses advanced PIR technology to detect occupancy. Detection occurs when the unit senses the
difference between infrared emissions from a human body and the background space. The WS Series utilizes a
custom-made Fresnel lens to achieve 180° detection coverage (up to 900 ft2/83.61m2) and automatically turns
lights on each time the controlled area is entered. The WS Series features a built-in light-level sensor, adjustable
from 2 to 200 footcandles, that holds lights off in the auto mode when natural light levels are above the preset
light level. The WS Series has an adjustable time delay for turning the lights off when no occupancy is detected,
and it also has an adjustable sensitivity setting.
SPECIFICATIONS
Electrical input
Electrical loads
Time-delay adjust
Ambient light
level adjust
120/277 VAC
Up to 800W incandescent @
120 VAC
0-800W ballast @ 120 VAC
0-1200W ballast @ 277 VAC
Digital time delay from
30 sec to 30 min.
Coverage
Switch positions
Approvals
Operating temp
180°, max 900 ft2 (83.61m2)
Auto/Off (on/off during override)
UL and ULC listed
32° to 98°F (0°to 36°C)
Dimensions
1.9"H x 1.7"W x 2.6"L
(4.8 x 4.3 x 6.6 cm)
0.35 lb (0.16 kg)
Weight
From 2 to 200 fc
369
LIGHTING CONTROLS
OCCUPANCY SENSOR
WS SERIES
INSTALLATION
Turn off the power at the circuit breaker before installing the sensor to prevent electrical shock or equipment damage. All wiring
must comply with local codes and ordinances.
1. Place the auto/off switch in the off position.
2. Connect the existing wire leads to the appropriate WS Series with UL listed wire connectors. Red connects to the load,
black to the line, and green to the ground. Do not allow bare wire to show below the connector. The ground wire must be
tightly secured to ground for the unit to operate properly.
3. Attach the sensor to the wall box with the two mounting screws provided, and install the cover.
4. Set the auto/off switch to auto, and turn the circuit breaker on. After a 10-30 second delay, the lights will turn on. This delay
is due to the initial power-up of the sensor and only occurs during installation.
5. Make all time delay, ambient light, and sensitivity adjustments after a two-minute warm-up.
Override Function: In the event it is necessary to leave the lights on or there is a unit failure, remove the blue Override pin. This
will turn the auto/off switch to a standard on/off switch (functions like a standard toggle switch).
LIGHTING CONTROLS
WIRING
Auto-Off
Switch
Neutral
Override
Sensitivity
Light Level
(red)
Load
Time Delay
Hot (black)
Load
LED
Ground (green)
Fresnel Lens
Manual Bi-level Lighting
Controls
ft
(m)
Neutral
Load
Load
35
(10.7)
Line
Ground
15
(4.6)
Single-Level Lighting
Coverage Pattern
ORDERING INFORMATION
* Gray and black are special orders.
Call Trane for 240 VAC or 347 VAC.
370
MODEL
WS-200
DESCRIPTION
120/277 VAC 0-800W ballast occupancy sensor
COLOR
I Ivory
W White
G Gray*
B Black*
WS-200
W
Example: WS-200-W White occupancy sensor
LIGHTING CONTROLS
POWER / SLAVE PACKS
MODELS B120E-P, B277E-P, B230E-P, B347D-P, S-120/277/347E-P
DESCRIPTION
The Power Pack provides 24 VDC operating voltage for
Models CX-100 and CI-200 occupancy sensors and is
capable of switching up to 20A electrical load. The
Slave Pack is similar to the Power Pack but has no
transformer power supply, only an isolated relay. Power
and Slave Packs can be combined to switch almost any
lighting or HVAC load controlled by the CX-100 or CI200. They can also be used for low voltage switching.
S-120/277/347E-P
B120E-P
• Power Pack includes fully self-contained transformer and isolated relay; Slave Pack includes
isolated relay only
• Available in several AC voltage inputs
• Attaches easily to standard 1/2" knockouts
• Housed in ABS, UL-listed 94V-0 plastic enclosure
• Can be used to switch low voltage control wiring
• UL and ULC listed
• Five-year warranty
OPERATION
The Power Pack consists of a transformer and high-current relay combined in one small, powerful package. The
transformer has a primary high voltage input and a secondary 24 VDC, 100 mA output. The secondary voltage provides operating power for Models CX-100 and CI-200. The Slave Pack contains a high current relay only and is
controlled by Model CX-100 or CI-200. When occupancy is detected by the sensor (and inadequate ambient light is
detected if this feature is used), the sensor electrically closes an internal circuit that sends 24 VDC back to the
Power and/or Slave Packs, which switch the line voltage to control lighting or other equipment.
SPECIFICATIONS
Primary Voltage/Load Rating
LOAD RATINGS
Model
B120E-P
B277E-P
B230E-P
B347D-P
S-120/277/347E-P
Secondary voltage
Enclosure
Number of sensors
per power pack
Approvals
Type
Power pack
Power pack
Power pack
Power pack
Slave pack
Voltage (VAC)
120
277
220-240
347
120-277
347
Ballast (A)
20
20
20
15
20
15
Incan. (A)
13
–
13
–
–
24 VDC, 100 mA
UL-rated 94V-0 plastic enclosure
Operating temp
Dimensions
Three for CX-100, CI-200
UL and ULC Listed
Weight
Motor (hp)
1
–
1
–
–
24 VDC Output (mA)
100
100
100
100
–
32° to 98°F (0° to 36°C)
1.6"H x 2.75"W x 1.6"D
(4.1 x 7.0 x 4.1cm) with 1/2"
snap-in nipple
0.48 lb (0.22 kg)
371
LIGHTING CONTROLS
FEATURES
LIGHTING CONTROLS
POWER / SLAVE PACKS
MODELS B120E-P, B277E-P, B230E-P, B347D-P, S-120/277/347E-P
INSTALLATION
Note: All power packs should be installed in accordance with state, local, and national electrical codes and requirements.
Power Packs are designed to attach to existing or new electrical enclosures with 1/2" knockouts. In plenum ceilings, install
Power Packs in approved electrical enclosures.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Disconnect power at the circuit breaker prior to doing any work.
Connect the white wire to neutral and the black wire to the appropriate hot leg.
Connect one red wire to the line side of the voltage to be controlled and the other red wire to the load to be controlled.
Make all low voltage connections to the occupancy sensor (see Wiring below).
Verify all connections are correct, and reset the circuit breaker.
WIRING
(red)
Load
(red) Load
(red)
(black)
Slave
Pack
N.C. Contact
Common
N.O. Contact
Control Output 24VDC
Control Return
Light Level Output 24 VDC
+24 VDC
Common
(blue)
(black)
(red)
Cable
Wires
1-(brown)
2-(red)
3-(orange)
4-(yellow)
5-(green)
6-(blue)
7-(purple)
8-(gray)
CX-100
or
CI-200
Power Pack and Slave Pack with Light Level Control on Slave Pack
Hot
(white)
(black)
Power Pack
Cable
Wires
(red) Line
(red) Load
(black)
(blue)
N
(red)
LIGHTING CONTROLS
Hot
Switch
(red) Line
Power Pack
(white)
(black)
(blue)
N
Switch
Load
N.C. Contact
Common
N.O. Contact
Control Output 24 VDC
Control Return
Light Level Output 24 VDC
+24 VDC
Common
1-(brown)
2-(red)
3-(orange)
4-(yellow)
5-(green)
6-(blue)
7-(purple)
8-(gray)
Power Pack Only with Light Level Control
(white) Neutral
(red) +24 VDC
(black) Hot
(black) COM
(red)
(red)
(blue) +SW
High Voltage
Low Voltage
High Voltage
Connection Made
Inside J-Box
Power Pack
Wiring Connections for Power Pack
Power Pack Installation
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
B120E-P
B277E-P
B230E-P
B347D-P
S-120/277/347E-P
372
TYPE
Power Pack
Power Pack
Power Pack
Power Pack
Slave Pack
VOLTAGE (VAC)
120
277
220-240
347
120/277/347
CX-100
or
CI-200
LIGHTING CONTROLS
CELESTIAL SELF-CONTAINED AMBIENT LIGHT SENSOR
MK7-B SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The MK7-B Series Celestial Self-Contained Ambient
Light Sensors develop a variable output voltage that corresponds to the amount of present ambient light. These
precise ambient light level measurement units detect and
transmit, via an analog signal, the amount of light present
at their location to the remote analog input point of most
building automation controllers. The sensors contain a precision photodiode-type cell that provides an exact, proportional output over a wide range of light levels, allowing for
accurate lighting control.
MK7-B-CCF
Indoor
MK7-B-CR
Outdoor
MK7-B-CS
Skylight
APPLICATION
FEATURES
Factory calibrated
Analog voltage models
Wide range of light level monitoring
Compatible with most BAS controllers
Extremely accurate and reliable
Three basic models for monitoring:
Indoor light levels (ceiling mount)
Outdoor light levels (roof mount)
Skylight light levels (skylight mount)
• Two-year warranty
OPERATION
The sensor heads contain patented solid-state circuitry
designed to be extremely accurate, adjustable, and flexible over a wide range of input and output voltages. The
standard three-wire sensors operate from any input voltage between 12-24 VDC and give a return output signal
of 0-5, 1-5, 0-10, 1-10 VDC, or 4-20 mA using a Model
VTI-1 (see Output Transducer section of this catalog).
The sensors come factory calibrated. The sensor is
equipped with a variable range potentiometer, but calibration equipment, such as a foot-candle meter,
would be required to change the range of the unit.
Note: There is a charge for recalibration of the unit by
the manufacturer.
Sensors allow most building automation controllers to
become sophisticated lighting control computers to control
any type of lighting at any light level based on the amount
of ambient light available. There are three basic types of
sensors:
Indoor
Designed to monitor the ambient light levels in offices,
schools, etc., the sensor mounts in a 3/8" (0.95 cm) hole
bored in a ceiling tile central to the electrical lighting being
controlled. It features an adjustable maximum range from
50-750 fc at the sensor face and a 60-degree field of view
with special flat Fresnel lens configuration.
Outdoor
Designed to mount horizontally in a 1/2" conduit fitting to
monitor the outside ambient light levels for parking
garages, security lighting, sign lighting, etc., the sensor
generally is mounted on the rooftop, facing the northern
sky. It features an adjustable maximum range from 50750 fc at the sensor face and is completely weathertight
and temperature stable. At very low ambient temperatures (below 13°F), the sensor will still function but will
lose some accuracy and light level sensitivity.
Skylight
Designed to mount vertically in a 1/2" conduit fitting to
monitor the ambient light levels from inside a skylight well
in warehouses, shopping malls, etc., the sensor features
an adjustable maximum range from 1000-7500 fc at the
sensor face.
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy
Room temp
100°F temp
Sensor type
Power supply
Power consumption
Output
Wiring (standard)
±1%
±2.5%
Blue-enhanced photo-diode
12-24 VDC
20 mA max
(does not include VTI-1)
0-5 VDC, 1-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC,
1-10 VDC, 4-20 mA
Three-wire, 18-gauge, stranded
Monitoring ranges
Indoor sensor
Factory calibration
Outdoor sensor
Factory calibration
Skylight sensor
Factory calibration
Operating temp
0 fc min, 50-750 fc adj max
0-100 fc
0 fc min, 50-750 fc adj max
0-250 fc
10 fc min, 1000-7500 fc
adj max
10-2000 fc
13° to 140°F (-10° to 60°C)
373
LIGHTING CONTROLS
•
•
•
•
•
•
LIGHTING CONTROLS
CELESTIAL AMBIENT LIGHT SENSORS
MK7-B SERIES
WIRING / CALIBRATION
The sensors come factory calibrated. Each sensor is equipped with a variable range potentiometer, but calibration
equipment, such as a foot-candle meter, would be required to change the range of the unit. Note: there is a charge
for recalibration of the unit by the manufacturer. Rotating the potentiometer one way or the other causes the upper
limit voltage that the sensor produces to correspond to lower or higher foot-candle readings. For example, with a 5V
model at the minimum gain setting, the sensor will deliver 5 VDC at 750 fc; at the maximum setting, the sensor will
deliver 5 VDC at 50 fc. The zero light level setting is fixed and will not change. The adjustment procedure allows for
precise light level monitoring and can compensate for the physical light sensing location of the unit, which may differ
from the actual light level present at the task level. Once the calibration procedure is completed, it will remain constant with no further adjustments. Complete installation instructions are provided with the unit. The lower end output
(zero light level) and the upper end light level outputs can be custom-ordered for specific voltages. A range of the
standard output voltages supplied are listed in Specifications.
24 VDC
LIGHTING CONTROLS
24 VDC
V Sig In
POWER
MK7-B
COM
SIGNAL
Power
(red)
(black)
MK7-B
Voltage
Output
Signal
(yellow)
(red)
Com
Signal
24V Power
(black)
(yellow)
Com
VTI-1
Ref V Out
mA Sig Out
Wiring the MK7-B
Wiring the MK7-B to VTI-1
4-20 mA Signal
CAUTION: To prevent electrical shock and possible equipment damage, disconnect power coming from
the controller prior to hookup. Wiring from the sensor to the controller should be with 18- or 22-gauge
stranded wire. Do not run the low voltage wire with or near power wiring. For long wire runs or where there
is excessive electrical noise, shielded cable or cable in conduit is required. Cable length should not
exceed 500' (152m). Wire the sensor to the appropriate analog port of the controller according to the controller manufacturer’s instructions and the specific details of the particular sensor listed on this page.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
MK7-B
MK7-B
DESCRIPTION
Celestial ambient light sensor
SENSOR LOCATION
Indoor
CCF
Outdoor
CR
Skylight
CS
OUTPUT SIGNAL
4-20 mA
VTI
0-5 VDC
0/5
1-5 VDC
1/5
0-10 VDC
0/10
1-10 VDC
1/10
CCF
RI-4
374
1/5
Example: MK7-B-CCF-1/5 Light sensor, indoor
housing, 1-5 VDC output signal
RELATED PRODUCTS
RF universal input transmitter
LIGHTING CONTROLS
PHOTO-SENSITIVE RESISTORS
MODELS PSR-1, PSR-1-T
DESCRIPTION
The Model PSR-1 Photo-Sensitive Resistor may be
used as an input to indicate the presence or absence
of light at the sensor location. The Model PSR1-T is a
PSR-1 coupled with a 4-20 mA transmitter. The sensor
is designed to be mounted in the end of a weatherproof
conduit box.
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
Economical dark/light sensing
4-20 mA output models
1/2" NPT design
Track-mounted PSR-1-T transmitter
APPLICATION
Models PSR-1 and PSR1-T indicate the presence or
absence of light. They should not be used for foot-candle control of occupied spaces. The Model PSR-1-T is
calibrated for 4 mA in bright light (>100 footcandles) and
20 mA in darkness (< 0.1 footcandles).
POWER DERATING CURVE
120
PSR-1
Output
Temp
PSR-1-T
Power
Max current draw
Output
100
Power Dissapation (mW)
SPECIFICATIONS
80
Temp
60
>1 MΩ in dark
<1.5 kΩ in bright light
-13° to 167°F
(-25° to 75°C)
12-35 VDC
22 mA
4-20 mA (current
limited to 22 mA)
-13° to 167°F
(-25° to 75°C)
40
TABLE 1. LIGHTING EXAMPLES
20
0
25°C
50°C
75°C
77°F
122°F
167°F
Ambient Temperature
Note: PSR-1 maximum power dissipation is
50 mW @ 77°F (25°C).
Lighting
Bright sun
Partly cloudy sky
Overcast sky
Classroom
Office
Warehouse
Parking lot
Freeway
Midnight
Footcandles
10,000
5,000
2,000
100
50
20
3
1
0
375
LIGHTING CONTROLS
PSR-1-T
The Model PSR-1 has a resistance in darkness in excess
of 1 MΩ and a resistance in bright light of less than 1.5 kΩ.
LIGHTING CONTROLS
PHOTO-SENSITIVE RESISTORS
MODELS PSR-1, PSR-1-T
WIRING
in
(cm)
(red)
(black)
4-20 mA
Signal
PSR-1
1/2" NPT
Controller Input Terminals
(Non-polarized resistance)
24 VDC Power Supply
5 4 3 2 1
PSR-1
4-20 MA
Transmitter
Board
2.25
(5.72)
4 mA
ADJ
P2
P1
B420-P
Typical Application Using ST-O(X)
Outdoor Air Sensor with PSR-1
1.75
(4.45)
PSR-1-T
Model AD-2 3/4" x 1/2" Adapter Required
RESISTANCE CURVE
1M
100k
Resistance
(ohms)
LIGHTING CONTROLS
20 mA
ADJ
10k
1k
100
10
0
0.1
0.5
1.0
5.0
10
50 100
Illumination (fc)
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
PSR-1
PSR-1-T
PSR-1-E
PSR-1-T-E
AD-2
376
DESCRIPTION
Photo-sensitive resistor
Photo-sensitive resistor with 4-20 mA output
Photo-sensitive resistor with waterproof enclosure
Photo-sensitive resistor with waterproof enclosure and 4-20 mA output
3/4" x 1/2" adapter
LIGHTING CONTROLS
PHOTO CONTROLS
MODELS CW, EM, PN, TL, TB
DESCRIPTION
TL
PN
CW201
TB
CW201S
EM
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
On at dusk, off at dawn operation
Weatherproof enclosure
Simple installation and wiring
Heavy-duty switch to control loads directly
• Contacts remain closed in case of cell failure
• Ideal for outdoor lighting, billboard lighting,
security lighting
• UL listed, CSA approved (except EM)
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
CW201-00
CW201S-00*
CW201-71
PN201-00*
TL201-00
TL201-71
TB201-99
Tungsten
Amps Watts
16.5
2000
16.5
2000
7.2
2000
10.0
1200
8.3
1000
3.6
1000
Ballast
Amps
15.8
15.8
6.8
9.1
15.0
6.5
Volts
Light (fc)
Weight
VA
1900
1900
1900
1100
1800
1800
VAC 50/60 Hz
120
120
208-277
120
120
208-277
120-277
On
1.5
1.5
1.5
3.0
1.5
1.5
Off
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
4.5
4.5
oz
8.0
8.0
8.0
1.5
3.0
3.0
9.5
kg
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.04
0.09
0.09
0.27
1 amp 30 VAC/VDC relay contact
24 VAC power
1.0
15.0
3.1
0.09
(base only)
* Features swivel for
directional aiming
EM-24A2
Connections
CW, PN, TB
(base only)
EM
Lead lengths
TB, PN
CW
EM
Pigtail leads, #14 AWG (CW, TB) and
#18 AWG (PN) for line (black), load
(red), and neutral (white)
Pigtail leads, #20 AWG, black for
24 VAC, red for relay output
Approvals
CW, PN, TL
TB
UL listed, CSA approved
UL recognized
Enclosures
NEMA 3R, weatherproof
6" (15.24 cm)
4" (10.16 cm)
8" (20.32 cm)
377
LIGHTING CONTROLS
Models CW, EM, PN, and TL Photo Controls are universally employed to control lighting loads in response
to available natural light. Each will turn on at dusk and
off at dawn, and each may be connected to directly
switch loads up to its continuous rating or to switch larger loads through relays or contactors. Model EM
requires 24 VAC power and switches a 1-amp relay
contact. Models CW and EM come with a 1/2" pipe nipple and locknut for mounting to a weatherproof box or
conduit body. It also has a manual slide to adjust the
switching point by shading more or less of the sensor.
Model PN mounts in the same manner, but it has a
swivel for directional aiming. Model TL is a twist-lock
type that fits the Model TB socket as well as standard
sockets supplied by nearly all lighting fixture manufacturers.
LIGHTING CONTROLS
PHOTO CONTROLS
MODELS CW, EM, PN, TL, TB
DIMENSIONS
1.38
(3.5)
1.89
(4.8)
2.94(7.46)
dia
(8 3.5
.9
0)
25 )
5. .35
3
(1
3.0
(7.62)
5
2. 35)
.
(6
5
2. 35)
.
(6
1/2" NPT
3
(8. .5
89
)
1.57
(3.99)
2.64
(6.71)
2.0
(5.08)
1.88
(4.76)
in
(cm)
1/2'' NPT
CW
TL
TB
EM
PN
WIRING
RED
BLK
RED
Model EM
N/O Relay Contacts
1A @ 30 VAC/VDC
(closes below dark
setpoint)
(black)
(white)
24 VAC
BLK
(black)
(red)
(white)
(black)
Lamp
Load
(black)
Models CW, PN
Sliding Window
Aperture
1/2" Thread Fitting
(white)
120, 208, 240, or 277V
Light Sensing
Window
(red or
white)
Lamp
Load
Twist Lock
Receptacle
(black)
(red)
(red or
white)
LIGHTING CONTROLS
(black)
(yellow)
CW or PN
Photo Control
120, 208, 240, or 277V
Model TL
Line Line
or
Neutral
Line Line
or
Neutral
INSTALLATION / MOUNTING / APPLICATION
When exposed to weather, mount Models CW, EM, PN, and TB
to a weatherproof hub or conduit body via 1/2" threaded nipple.
They may be mounted to a 1/2" knockout in a handibox in locations protected from weather, such as parking garages or
beneath substantial overhangs. The TL plugs into a standard
mating twist-lock socket supplied by lighting fixture manufacturers or the TB twist-lock base.
Mount in a location facing north for normal outdoor light control
application, and wire to switch the load directly or through a
lighting contactor. Switching level may be adjusted on CW and
EM models by moving the slide to block more or less of the photocell window. Covering more of the window will cause lights to
come on earlier in the evening (at a higher ambient light level).
The PN model is more directional and may be aimed at darker
areas to adjust the level at which lights come on, or it may be
aimed toward another light source to provide coordination
between multiple light groups. Aiming of the TL series is set by
the position of the socket base.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
DESCRIPTION
(See Specifications for complete model numbers)
CW
EM
PN
TL
Photo control with 1/2" pipe nipple and locknut for
mounting to weatherproof box or conduit body
24 VAC photo control with 1/2" pipe nipple and locknut for
mounting to weatherproof box or conduit body
Photo control with swivel for directional aiming
Photo control with twist-lock type, fits Model TB base
RELATED PRODUCTS
RIB Series
Relays
RH/RR Series
Relays
20307 Series
Relays
378
LIGHTING CONTROLS
SENTRY SWITCH
SS SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The SS Series Sentry Switch is a unique UL-listed
replacement device for a 120V or 277V, standard or
three-way wall switch. It provides the capability of centrally sweeping off overhead lighting automatically, then
allowing local override at every switch location.
The installed switches are centrally swept off by
momentarily interrupting the supply voltage at the lighting circuit breaker panel to the controlled lighting
circuits.
When in the off position, the switch toggles illuminate,
allowing them to be easily identified for after-hours override of lights. This feature allows unnecessary lighting to
be turned off after hours and behind janitorial and maintenance crews.
Different schedules can be programmed for weekend
occupancy. When used in place of conventional wall
switches, the SS Series allows the building operator to
control after-hours lighting automatically.
SS 20277
SS 23277
Tenant comfort and acceptance is assured by having
override available at any time, from any switch, for only
that particular area. Substantial power savings will be
realized, not only from containing after-hours use, but
also because lighting will not be turned on the following
morning until that particular office or area is physically
occupied.
OPERATION
Although controlling the SS Series is very simple, the
variations of implementation can be quite diverse.
A contactor or low-voltage relay panel will be installed
adjacent to the lighting circuit breaker panel to provide
the five-second interruption to the lighting circuits. This
panel will be interfaced to the BAS system to provide the
automatic lighting control sweeps. A short off-sweep
(less than three seconds) allows advance warning that
the lights will be turned off.
Normally closed contactors are recommended for these
panels because they provide a mechanical failsafe to
the on position.
The SS 20277 replaces a standard 120V or 277V toggle
wall switch with a minimum 1.5A and maximum 20A
load. The low-current version, SS 05277, must be used
on loads less than 1.5A, but it has a maximum capacity
of 5A.
The SS 23277 is a three-way emulation model. Although
functionally equivalent to a three-way switch, there is an
operational compromise. The lights cannot be off with
both light switches in the up position. When switch #1 is
in the up position, manually moving switch #2 to the up
position will result in the lights coming back on within
five seconds. The operator must then move switch #2
back down to turn the lights off.
379
LIGHTING CONTROLS
The SS Series, installed in place of the standard wall
switch, senses this momentary interruption (five seconds) of the power source and then physically unlatches, dropping to the off position.
LIGHTING CONTROLS
SENTRY SWITCH
SS SERIES
INSTALLATION / WIRING / CHECKOUT
Installation
The SS Series is a direct mechanical replacement for standard wall toggle switches and utilizes standard single- and multi-ganged
wall boxes, plaster rings, and switch plates. SS Series switches are spring-loaded to the off position. They are mechanically held in
the on position. Be sure the mounting flange marked “top” is up and that the switch springs to the down position. On three-way
switches, be sure the red and yellow wires are crossed red to yellow and yellow to red in conventional traveller manner.
Line
20A Circuit
Lighting
Contractor
Light
Line
LIGHTING CONTROLS
(black)
(red)
(yellow)
Standard
Wall Plate
Sentry
Switch
Load
(black)
(red)
(yellow)
Wall Box
SS 20277, SS 05277
Two-Wire Switches
SS 23277
Three-Wire
for Two-Switch Control
Wiring
The two-wire switches, SS 20277 and SS 05277, have conventional SPST switching contacts and are not polarity sensitive.
The three-wire SS 23277 is a standard SPDT contact arrangement. Black connects to line or load, and red and yellow are connected as cross-over travellers in the conventional manner red to yellow - yellow to red.
Checkout
All SS Series switches are mechanically held on. When they release, the mechanism trips. Any time the power to any properly
loaded SS Series switch is interrupted for more than five seconds, the switch will trip. To check a switch, observe the switch in
the off position. The lever should be illuminated. Turn the switch on and make sure the appropriate lights turn on. Turn off the
power to the circuit feeding the switch. After five seconds the mechanism trips, and the switch will move to the off position. If the
SS Series fails to trip off, check the light circuit to make sure at least a 1.5A load is connected. If the load is less than 1.5A,
replace the standard switch with a low current model. If the load is correct, replace the SS Series switch. For three-way switch
applications, the minimum load allowed will be 1.5A. The individual three-way switches are checked as above.
Note:
Unlike conventional three-way switches, it is impossible to have the lights off with both three-way SS Series switches in
the up position. If the lights are on and an attempt is made to turn them off by moving a switch to the up position, the
lights will turn off. Within five seconds the switch that is not being operated will trip off, turning the lights back on. This is
normal. It is then necessary to turn the switch that is not being operated back down to the off position. The normal off
position for both three-way switches is down. If the lights are off and either three-way SS Series switch is in the up position, the switch is wired wrong and must be rewired.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
SS 20277
SS 05277
SS 23277
380
DESCRIPTION
Sentry switch for 1.5A-20A load, 120V or 277V
Sentry switch for 1.5A loads or less (rated for up to 5A), 120V or
277V (DO NOT EXCEED the maximum 5A current rating)
Sentry switch for three-way switches, 120V or 277V
LIGHTING CONTROLS
LIGHTING CONTACTORS
SH17 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The SH17 Series Lighting Contactors are electrically held
and come in four-pole (normally closed or normally open)
and eight-pole (normally open) styles. The 30A contacts are
fully rated for general-purpose and ballast lighting loads.
Compact size and two mounting methods make installation
easy, and the use of the normally-closed style may eliminate
the need for a more expensive latching contactor to keep
lights on should the control circuit fail.
FEATURES
• DIN rail or surface mounting
• Easy parts replacement
• Normally closed (N.C.) or normally open
(N.O.) four-pole style
• Normally open (N.O.) eight-pole style
SH17-40-A
Contacts
Wiring
Mounting
Coil voltage
Four-pole
Eight-pole
Approvals
Frequency
Coil burden
Weight
Four-pole
Eight-pole
Four (N.O. or N.C.) or
eight (N.O. only)
30A ballast
30A general-purpose
20A tungsten
600 VAC
#16-10 AWG 75°C copper only
Surface or DIN rail
24 VAC or 120 VAC
120 VAC
(other voltages upon special
request)
UL listed, File #EQ642B
CSA approved,CE
50/60 Hz
55 VA inrush, 10 VA sealed
SH17-80-A
LIGHTING CONTROLS
SPECIFICATIONS
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
2.90
(7.37)
3.88
(9.85)
3.07
(7.80)
0.71 lb (0.33 kg)
0.84 lb (0.39 kg)
1.77
(4.50)
CAUTION: As with all electrically held contactors and
starters, the SH17 Series can emit a humming noise
when the coil is energized. While this is not an issue in
typical mechanical or utility rooms, sound baffling and
vibration isolation should be considered if mounting
near occupied spaces is required.
3.07
(7.80)
1.77
(4.50)
SH17-04-A/G
SH17-40-A
SH17-80-A
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
SH17-04-A
SH17-04-G
SH17-40-A
SH17-80-A
DESCRIPTION
Four-pole N.C. 30A contactor, 120 VAC coil
Four-pole N.C. 30A contactor, 24 VAC coil
Four-pole N.O. 30A contactor, 120 VAC coil
Eight-pole N.O. 30A contactor, 120 VAC coil
381
LIGHTING CONTROLS
MANUAL TIME SWITCHES
93000, TS-200 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Marktime 93000 Series Wall-Box Manual Time Switch
is a spring-wound, manually-set time switch for the control of
electrical current. Interchangeable with standard toggle switches to turn circuits either off or on at the end of a preset time
period, the 93000 Series is ideally suited for new installations
and retrofit projects.
FEATURES
• White and ivory plates and knobs included with each
time switch
• Time ranges from minutes to 12 hours, all with ±5%
accuracy
• Easy-to-install two-wire design fits into standard
single-gang wall box
• Heavy motor loads without the need of contactors
• Rotary knob operation
• Available to turn circuits off or on, with or
without manual hold override feature
• UL listed, CUL
LIGHTING CONTROLS
ORDERING INFORMATION
93000 SERIES
ELECTRICAL RATING
20A
125 VAC 1 hp
10A
277 VAC
7A
125 VAC tungsten
MODEL
No Hold
93501C
93502C
93503C
93504C
93505C
93506C
93507C
MODEL
With Hold Previous
0-15 min. N.O./N.C. 93511C (90012/90543)
0-30 min. N.O./N.C. 93512C (90011/90037)
0-60 min. N.O./N.C. 93513C (90010/90038)
0-120 min. N.O./N.C.
0-6 hour N.O./N.C.
0-12 hour N.O./N.C. 93516C (90015/90014)
0-4 hour N.O./N.C.
DESCRIPTION
Previous
(90005/90539)
(90006/90032)
(90008/90024)
(90281/90540)
(90007/90017)
(90001/90015)
(90240/90547)
DESCRIPTION
0-15 min. N.O./N.C. (w/hold)
0-30 min. N.O./N.C. (w/hold)
0-60 min. N.O./N.C. (w/hold)
0-12 hour N.O./N.C. (w/hold)
Weight: 0.4 lb (182g)
DESCRIPTION
The Watt Stopper® InteliSwitch® TS-200 Series is a digital
time switch that automatically turns the load off after a preset
amount of time. The load can be turned off anytime during the
timer’s countdown by pushing the on/off button. The TS-200
Series has four user-adjustable features:
Time-out delay
The timer can be adjusted to hold the load from five minutes
to 12 hours. This is adjusted by setting the DIP switch located on the left side of the unit.
Time scrolling
In situations where the load needs to be held on for a different amount of time than the preset time-out period, time
scrolling allows the user to manually and temporarily override the time-out period without adjusting the DIP switch.
Flash option
If this option is on, the load will flash once, one minute
before the time-out period expires. Set this option on the
DIP switch.
Beeper option
If this option is on, the timer will beep every five seconds
during the last minute of the time-out period. Set this option
on the DIP switch.
TS-200
120/277 VAC/60 Hz
800W tungsten
or ballast @ 120 VAC
1200W ballast @ 277 VAC
TS-200-24
24 VDC, 24 VAC/60 Hz
Isolated relay
SPDT, 1A @ 30V
Time adjust
(both models) 5, 15, 30 min.; 1, 3, 6, 9, 12 hr
382
Neutral
Ground
Ground (capped)
(black) Hot
Load
(red)
+24 VDC or
24 VAC 60Hz
Return
(red)
(black)
Isolated Relay
(green) Normally Closed
(orange) Common
(yellow) Normally Open
Important!
120 VAC Ground - Green
277 VAC Ground - Green/Yellow
TS-200
SPECIFICATIONS
Voltage
Load rating
WIRING
TS-200-24
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
TS-400-W
TS-400-24-W
DESCRIPTION
Digital time switch, 120/277 VAC
Digital time switch, 24 VAC/VDC
LIGHTING CONTROLS
GE LIGHTING RELAYS
MODELS RR-7, RR-9
DESCRIPTION
GE Models RR-7 and RR-9 Lighting Relays are
mechanical latching-type units requiring only momentary
24 VAC switch circuit pulses to open or close line voltage circuits. All GE low voltage relays may be used to
full-rated capacity for tungsten filament, ballast, or resistive loads. The Model RR-9 includes an auxiliary contact on the low voltage side for status indication.
CAUTION: The coil is designed to resist burnout
if continuous voltage is applied, but coil life may
be shortened with prolonged, continuous voltage.
Optional Bracket
for RR-7/RR-9
RR-7
General information UL listed, CSA certified; mounts
in standard 1/2" K.O. – 0.865" to
0.875" (nominal 22 mm) dia – in
14- or 16-gauge material; operates in any position
Operating voltage 24-29 VAC (±10%) half or full
wave rectified or pure, 3038 VDC (±10%) filtered
Min activating
50 ms
pulse
Coil impedance
75-85Ω @60 Hz unrectified
55-60Ω DC resistance
Coil inrush current 325 mA @ 24 VAC
Contacts
SPST maintained (mechanical
latching)
Dimensions
2.375"H x 1.375"W x 1.6875"L
(6.03 x 3.5 x 4.29 cm)
Weight
RR-7, RR-9
RR-BRACKET-4
Terminals
Lamp load
Resistive load
Motor load
Pilot contact
Temp
Relative humidity
Endurance
Lead length
0.3 lb (0.12 kg)
0.5 lb (0.21 kg)
Two terminals, two back wiring
holes per terminal for use with
#14-10 AWG solid or stranded
wire (copper wire only)
20A tungsten filament 125 VAC
20A ballast 277 VAC
30A 277 VAC
1/2 hp @ 110-125 VAC
1/2 hp @ 220-277 VAC
1A, 24 VAC isolated (RR-9 only)
32° to 140°F (0° to 60°C)
10% to 95% RH noncondensing
50,000 cycles, full load
100,000 cycles, no load
6" (15 cm)
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
6.13
(15.57)
0.75
(1.91)
1.54
(3.91)
CL
1.25
(3.18)
2.50
(6.35)
0.75
(1.91)
1.54
(3.91)
CL
1.54
(3.91)
CL
CL
CL
0.72
(1.83)
2.50
(6.35)
0.60
(1.52)
RR-BRACKET-4
383
LIGHTING CONTROLS
SPECIFICATIONS
LIGHTING CONTROLS
GE LIGHTING RELAYS
MODELS RR-7, RR-9
The relay employs a split low-voltage coil to move the line voltage contact armature to the on or off latched position.
The on coil moves the armature to the on position when a 24 VAC control signal is impressed across its leads. This
is analogous to a magnet attracting the handle of a standard single-pole switch to the on position when energized.
The armature (handle) latches in the on position and will remain there until the off coil is energized, drawing the
armature into the off position.
This control operation provides several key control features:
Positive action
The relay always goes to the state commanded. For example, multiple off commands will simply keep the
contacts in the off position.
Stable operation
Since the relay latches in the on or off position, power outages do not result in a change of state.
Minimal power consumption
Control power is only required when the relay changes state.
Additive control functions
Pulse control signals coupled with latching allow any number of switches or electronic control devices to
operate the same relay. The relay position is always dictated by the last signal.
WIRING
(black)
(yellow)
(red)
(blue)
On (red)
24 VAC
(blue)
Off (black)
LIGHTING CONTROLS
OPERATION
Internal Wiring
Pilot
Contacts
(maintained
contact)
On Coil
(blue)
Important Considerations and Restrictions
1. Relays connected
in parallel - Two or
more relays connected
in parallel will operate
together.
2. Do not use these relays
to switch DC loads. Doing
so will damage the power
contacts.
3. For longer life, use half-wave
rectified AC voltage for relay
control.
Off Coil
Power
Contacts
(maintained
contact)
20A, 277 VAC
(line contacts)
Armature
Line
Load
RR-7
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
RR-7
RR-9
RR-7-B
RR-BRACKET-4
384
DESCRIPTION
Three-wire low voltage leads
Five-wire low voltage leads with
isolated pilot auxiliary contact
RR-7 with banana plug connectors
Mounting bracket for RR-7 or RR-9 relays
RR-9
LIGHTING CONTROLS
RELAY CONTROL BOARD
MODEL RCB-8
DESCRIPTION
The Model RCB-8 is a low-voltage lighting control relay interface board. It contains eight 120/277 VAC, 20A relays and
eight digital on/off inputs. It is designed to interface with building automation systems or other controllers. Each digital input
can control any of the eight lighting relays on the board. Inputs
from one Model RCB-8 can be jumpered to other Model RCB-8s
to control an unlimited number of relays.
FEATURES
LIGHTING CONTROLS
Eight SPST 120/277 VAC, 20A relays per board
Each output has MOV protection
Each output has on/off/auto switch
Red LED status indication per relay
Screw type #12 AWG output terminals
Eight maintained digital input contacts
Supplied with four stand-offs for mounting
DIMENSIONS
Inputs to one Model RCB-8 may be jumpered together with
other Model RCB-8s to control an unlimited number of
relays from the eight outputs of the automation system.
The Model RCB-8 offers exceptional lighting control scheduling flexibility. This flexibility is a result of the ability to connect digital inputs to multiple controllers, combined with the
ability to assign relays to one or more of the digital inputs.
in
(cm)
10.0
(25.4)
INPUTS
(EACH INPUT-COM/HTD)
INPUT 1
For all
switches,
"on" position
assigns relay
to input as:
2 3 456 78
INPUT 2
O1
N
C
2
C
3
INPUT 3
2 3 456 78
O1
N
2 3 456 78
C
4
C
5
C
INPUT 4
O1
N
2 3 456 78
6
C
7
C
INPUT 5
O1
N
PWR 24 VAC POWER
8
C / HI
R. E. TECHNOLOGIES
INPUT 6
2 3 456 78
O1
N
2 3 456 78
INPUT 7
O1
N
2 3 456 78
OFF
ADD RELAY 1
ADD RELAY 2
ADD RELAY 3
ADD RELAY 4
ADD RELAY 5
ADD RELAY 6
ADD RELAY 7
ADD RELAY 8
INPUT 8
O1
N
2 3 456 78
RCB-8
AUTO
AUTO
OFF
AUTO
AUTO
ON
OFF
ON
AUTO
OFF
ON
AUTO
OFF
ON
RELAY 8
OFF
ON
RELAY 6
OFF
ON
RELAY 5
OFF
ON
RELAY 4
ON
RELAY 7
ON
O1
N
C
1
RELAY 3
Eight outputs from a BAS are used as inputs to the Model
RCB-8. Each of these outputs represents a time schedule
with its own on and off times. Each digital input can control
any combination of relays. Each digital input is assigned to
one or more relays via an eight-position DIP switch (DSW 18). Setting any of the eight switches on the DIP switch to the
on position allows the corresponding digital output to energize
when that digital input is closed. Each relay is energized
either by the override switch or a corresponding digital input
closure. The corresponding relay LED will light whenever the
relay is energized.
RELAY 2
OPERATION
RELAY 1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
OFF
AUTO
AUTO
RELAY 1
RELAY 2
RELAY 3
RELAY 4
RELAY 5
RELAY 6
RELAY 7
RELAY 8
RELAY 1
RELAY 2
RELAY 3
RELAY 4
RELAY 5
RELAY 6
RELAY 7
RELAY 8
7.6
(19.3)
SPECIFICATIONS
Input voltage
Current draw
Inputs
Input terminals
Max input wire
distance
Outputs
24 VAC
30 VA per RCB-8
Eight digital maintained dry contact
Screw type #14 AWG
Output terminals
Relay response time
Status light
Relay override
3500' (1067m) 18/2 twisted
Eight SPST 120/277 VAC
20A ballast 277 VAC
30A ballast 120 VAC
10A tungsten
Operating temp
Operating humidity
Weight
Screw type #12 AWG
15 ms max
One red LED per relay
One three-position
on/off/auto switch per relay
-20° to 120°F (-29° to 49°C)
0% to 95% noncondensing
1.3 lb (0.56 kg)
385
LIGHTING CONTROLS
RELAY CONTROL BOARD
MODEL RCB-8
INSTALLATION / WIRING / CHECKOUT
4. Connect each lighting load to the appropriate output terminals. Fusing of each output is recommended.
5. Set each digital input DIP switch (DSW 1-8) to the desired
array of digital outputs (see Figure 1 below for examples).
6. Verify that all override switches are in the auto mode.
7. Apply 24 VAC control power only to the RCB-8. Close
each digital input to verify proper operation of the relays
by checking the red LED status light of each relay.
8. Apply lighting power to the relay contacts.
CAUTION:
Disconnect all power prior to installation.
1. Mount the RCB-8 in an enclosure.
2. Connect the 24 VAC transformer (30 VA required per RCB8) to the power terminals of the 18-pole terminal block
located at the top of the board.
3. Connect each digital output from the automation system or
other controller to input terminals 1 through 8. Note that
terminals labeled C (common) are connected internally.
FIGURE 1. DIP SWITCH ASSIGNMENT EXAMPLES
DIP Switch 3
DIP Switch1
NO
NO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
6
NO
6
5
4
3
2
8
7
8
1
2
3
4
INPUT
(EACH INPUT-COM/HTD)
For all
INPUT 1
switches,
"on" position
assigns relay
to input as: O
ON N1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
INPUT 2
O1
N
23 456 78
C
1
6
7
8
24 VAC
C
2
INPUT 3
O1
N
5
EX #4: If Digital Input 3 is closed,
Relay 2 will energize.
From Maintained Dry
Digital Output of Controller IN 2 INPUT
From Maintained Dry IN 1 INPUT
Digital Output of Controller
Up to Eight Inputs to RCB-8
2 3 456 78
C
3
C
4
C
5
INPUT 4
O1
N
2 3 456 78
C
6
C
7
C
INPUT 5
O1
N
PWR 24 VAC POWER
8
C / HI
INPUT 6
2 3 456 78
O1
N
2 3 456 78
INPUT 7
O1
N
23 456 78
OFF
ADD RELAY 1
ADD RELAY 2
ADD RELAY 3
ADD RELAY 4
ADD RELAY 5
ADD RELAY 6
ADD RELAY 7
ADD RELAY 8
INPUT 8
O1
N
2 3 456 78
RCB-8
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
ON
OFF
ON
AUTO
OFF
AUTO
ON
OFF
AUTO
ON
RELAY 7
OFF
RELAY 6
ON
RELAY 5
OFF
RELAY 4
OFF
RELAY 3
ON
RELAY 2
ON
OFF
RELAY 2
RELAY 3
RELAY 4
RELAY 5
RELAY 6
RELAY 7
RELAY 1
RELAY 2
RELAY 3
RELAY 4
RELAY 5
RELAY 6
RELAY 7
FUSE
Phase
Neutral
Load #6*
FUSE
ON
AUTO
RELAY 1
Load #2
7
NO
1
EX #2: If Digital Input 1 is closed,
all eight Relays will energize.
RELAY 1
5
EX #3: If Digital Input 3 is closed,
Relays 1, 3, and 6 will energize.
RELAY 8
LIGHTING CONTROLS
EX #1: If Digital Input 1 is closed,
Relays 1 and 4 will energize.
Phase
Neutral
OFF
AUTO
RELAY 8
RELAY 8
*Up to Eight Loads
per RCB-8
RCB-8
MODEL
RCB-8
SC12104P
B-12-P
386
ORDERING INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION
Eight-relay control board
RELATED PRODUCTS
NEMA 1 screw cover enclosure with perf panel
Two-piece enclosure with perf panel
LIGHTING CONTROLS
PULSE INITIATOR
MODEL PIL-1
DESCRIPTION
The Model PIL-1 Pulse Initiator is designed to provide
pulses to latch and unlatch mechanically-held or magnetically-held lighting contactors (such as the Model RR-7,
RR-9, or TR Series) from maintained contact outputs.
FEATURES
OPERATION
DIMENSIONS
The Model PIL-1 is controlled by a single SPST N.C.
or N.O. switch or relay. Closing the input contact
causes the latch output to close momentarily for 100
ms. Opening the input contact causes the unlatch
output to close momentarily for 100 ms. A power-up
feature allows the operator to select either an immediate pulse out (PUP position), depending on the present command of the controller, or a pulse out only
when the controller input changes state. LEDs indicate input state and output latch or unlatch pulses.
Typical control signals would be a digital output from
a BAS panel, a light or toggle switch, or a contact on
a timer.
in
(cm)
LIGHTING CONTROLS
• LED indicators:
Pulse out: unlatch/latch
Command in: off/on
• AC or DC operation
• Selectable power-up (PUP) state
• Snap-track mounted
3
(7.62)
PUP
PULSE OUT
PIL-1
CMD IN
OFF ON
2.38
(6.03)
PWR PWR CMD
IN
UL
L
SPECIFICATIONS
Power supply
Input required
Output
Output pulse time
24 VAC/VDC @ 50 mA
SPST switch or relay
Two N.O. pulsed contacts rated
120 VAC @ 5A
Dimensions
2.375"H x 3"W x 1.375"D
(6.03 x 7.62 x 3.5 cm)
Weight
0.25 lb (0.12 kg)
100 ms standard,
others available on request
(5 sec max)
387
LIGHTING CONTROLS
PULSE INITIATOR
MODEL PIL-1
WIRING
PUP
PULSE OUT
UL L
Multiple PIL-1s may be controlled by
the same command contact. Wiring
polarity must be observed.
CMD IN
OFF ON
PWR PWR CMD
IN
Latch
Power
Common
(blue)
+
-
L
Unlatch
(black)
Command
Contact
Command
LIGHTING CONTROLS
(red)
24 VAC/VDC
UL
To Lighting
Circuits
Typical Wiring for Driving
24V Lighting Contactors
PUP
RR-7 / RR-9
Lighting Contactor
(Up to 10 per PIL-1)
PULSE OUT
UL L
CMD IN
OFF ON
PWR PWR CMD
IN
UL
L
Latch
+
24 VAC/VDC
-
Power
Switch Leg
to Latch Circuits
Switch Leg
to Unlatch Circuits
Power
Unlatch
Command
Contact
Command
Typical Wiring for Driving
Loads other than 24V
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
PIL-1
PIL-1-C
DESCRIPTION
Pulse initiator
Pulse initiator with factory-calibrated pulse duration
(specify when ordering)
RELATED PRODUCTS
RR-7
Lighting contactor
RR-9
Lighting contactor
388
LIGHTING CONTROLS
RETROFIT LIGHTING RELAY
TR SERIES
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES
• 20A single-throw latching relay output
• Momentary contact inputs: one on, one off
• Low-voltage inputs (Class 2 for up to 40 per
phase)
• Existing line voltage switches used for override
and local on/off control
• Easy installation, transformer and relay in
one package
OPERATION
The TR Series provides the capability of centrally sweeping off
overhead lighting, then allowing local override at each relay
location via a maintained contact switch rated for the voltage
and current of the connected lighting circuit.
Whenever power is applied to the TR Series, the contacts latch
and the load is energized. A momentary contact closure
between the off (black) and common (yellow) low-voltage leads
toggles the contacts open, de-energizing the load. The load may
be re-energized by toggling the local light switch off and on
again or by using a momentary contact closure between the on
(red) and common (yellow) low-voltage leads. Thus, a digital
output from a building automation system (BAS) may be connected to sweep lights off by momentarily closing a set of contacts connected as the off input of a group of TR Series relays.
Individual zones may be overridden back on after this event, or
the entire group can be toggled back on by a second digital out-
put connected as the on input. Controllers that cannot supply
momentary contact closures may be interfaced with the Model
PIL-1 pulse initiator to control up to 25 TR Series relays per
phase.
To implement a warning blink prior to turning lights off with the
TR Series, simply program the SPDT momentary input controller to provide an off/on sweep sequence to produce a blink,
followed by an appropriate time delay (five minutes is customary), and then a final off sweep.
The TR Series may be connected in very large groups (up to 40
per phase with 8A rated momentary contact inputs) while
remaining within Class 2 wiring limits. In this fashion, a very
large building’s entire lighting system may be controlled from a
single set of BAS outputs, or it may be broken down into as
many zones as needed.
SPECIFICATIONS
Power supply
Contact inputs
Relay output
120 VAC or 277 VAC, 60 HZ,
3 VA max
SPDT momentary only (one on,
one off); 15 VAC open circuit,
200 mA max switched current
per relay
SPST, magnetically latching
(fails to on whenever power
is applied to line lead)
20A tungsten, 120 VAC, 60 HZ
20A ballast, 120-277 VAC, 60 HZ
1 hp, 120-277 VAC, 60 HZ
Connections
Approvals
Enclosure
Dimensions
Weight
6" #14 AWG leads for line (black)
and load (blue)
6" #18 AWG lead for neutral
(white or gray)
6" #20 AWG leads for on (red),
off (black), and common
(yellow)
UL and ULC Listed
Designed to be mounted within a
standard depth 4" square outlet
or junction box
2.5"H x 2.5"W x 1.0625"D
(6.4 x 6.4 x 2.7 cm)
4 in3 displacement (66 cm3)
0.3 lb (0.14 kg)
389
LIGHTING CONTROLS
The TR Series Retrofit Lighting Relays are magnetically latching type devices with a built-in transformer for
low-voltage control of lighting circuits. Designed to
mount in existing junction or pull boxes, these units can
be connected to provide master sweep-off and sweepon control of lighting while existing line voltage switches
and wiring remain in place for local on/off and override
functions. Low-voltage inputs require momentary contact closures (SPDT for on/off control, SPST for off control only) and may be combined up to 40 per phase within Class 2 wiring limits. Relay contacts are 20A normally
open and can switch up to a 1 hp motor load. This
unique technology, which allows a single coil to serve as
both a transformer secondary and a relay operator,
results in a compact and economical package for both
retrofit and new installations.
LIGHTING CONTROLS
RETROFIT LIGHTING RELAY
TR SERIES
WIRING
(yellow) Common
(red) On
To Other
TR-XXXR
(Up to 40 per phase
for Class 2)
(black) Off
LIGHTING CONTROLS
SPDT Momentary
Contact BAS
Output or Switch
Notes: 1. For sweep-off control only,
red (on) low voltage
connection may be omitted.
2. All TR units on a momentary
contact must be on the same
phase. For more than one
phase, use multiple contacts
or call Kele for information on
IFM modules.
Local
Light Switch
120 or 277 VAC
Line (black)
(blue) Load
L
To Lights
N
(white or gray)
Neutral
TR-120R
TR-277R
INSTALLATION / MOUNTING
The TR Series is designed to be mounted in a standard depth 4" (10.2 cm) square outlet or junction box. The short
nipple on the low voltage side of the relay snaps into a standard 1/2" (1.3 cm) knockout, leaving the line, load, and
neutral connection inside the outlet or junction box and the low-voltage Class 2 wiring outside. A second junction box
may be secured to the low voltage side if an unusual occupancy requires Class 2 wiring to be in raceway also.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
TR-120R
TR-277R
PIL-1
390
DESCRIPTION
120 VAC retrofit lighting relay
277 VAC retrofit lighting relay
RELATED PRODUCTS
Pulse initiator module for interface with maintained contact devices
MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS
MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS
MODEL/SERIES
PRODUCTS
Try the NEW DRS
Series
DIN Rail Data Line
Surge Protector on
page 405!
SERVICES
If you don’t see the product
you’re looking for, Call
Us! We’ll find it for you.
PAGE
OVERRIDE CONTROL DEVICES
93000 Series — Manual Time Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
DIGI-42 — Electronic Time Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
KEL71/120, KEL72/120 — Electronic Time Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
MOB-4, MOB-8 — Manual Override Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
MR-604/T, MR-608/T — Manual Override Board with Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
TS-400 Series — Digital Time Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
SAFETY DEVICES
A11 Series — Low-Temperature Limit Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
A70 Series — Low and High Temperature Limit Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
AT-1100 — Thermostat Guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
DH100 Series — Innovair Duct Smoke Detectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
DH100 Series Remote Accessories — Duct Smoke Detector Accessories . . .394
MS Series — Smoke Detector Accessories for SM-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
SM-501 Series — Duct Smoke Detectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
TC-105, TC-100 — Duct High-Temperature Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
TF142 — Low-Temperature Limit Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
TG500 — Thermostat Guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
TSA — Low-Temperature Limit Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
SURGE PROTECTION
Surge Protection Selection Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
1.5KE56CA — Transzorb Point Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
392-SVSR2 — Lightning Arrester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
DRS Series — DIN Rail Data Line Surge Protector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
DTK-2LVLPX, DTK-2LVLPLV — Data Line Surge Protector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
DTK-120HW — Power Line Surge Protector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
DTK-RJ11 — Phone Line Surge Protector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
FAS-TEL — Data Line Surge Protector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
HSP-121BT1RU — Power Line Surge Protector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
PC642C — Data Line Surge Protector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
SS64-036-2 — Remote-Mount Data Line Protector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
V39ZA1 — MOV Point Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
V47ZA1 — MOV Point Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
V130LA1 — MOV Point Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
Indicates New Products
MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS
DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS
SM-501 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The SM-501 Series Duct Smoke Detectors provide
early detection of smoke and combustion products present in air moving through HVAC ducts. Air sampling is
accomplished by intake sampling tubes, which are
ordered separately. A standard length exhaust tube is
provided with each detector. The SM-501 Series is
designed to operate in duct widths from 12.0" to 10.0'
(30.5 cm to 3.05m) with an air velocity from 500-4000
fpm (2.5-20.3 mps.) Complete systems may be shut
down in the event of smoke detection.
The SM-501 Series will operate on any one of four input
voltages: 24 VAC, 24 VDC, 115 VAC, or 230 VAC. It
uses either photoelectric or ionization smoke detectors.
Each detector contains two alarm contacts, which transfer in the event of smoke, and one trouble contact,
which supervises the presence of input power and
removal of the detector head. A manual test/reset switch
and visual indicators of pilot and alarm are provided on
the front of the detector. Up to 30 SM-501 Series units
may be wired to use a common test/reset function and
to alarm simultaneously when a single unit alarms. If
signal devices such as horns or strobes are used, up to
15 detectors may be interconnected to operate with a
single alarm.
SM-501
CSFM Listed
FEATURES
• Universal voltage: 24 VAC, 24 VDC, 115 VAC, or
230 VAC
• Remote reset, alarm, and indication available
• Two alarm contacts and one trouble contact
• Interchangeable "plug-in" photoelectric or
ionization heads
• Compatible with building automation and fire
alarm systems
• Dust filtering included in detector head
• Interconnect up to 30 detectors for common
functions
SPECIFICATIONS
Power requirements
50/60 Hz (without
accessories)
Relay contact rating
Alarm (2)
Trouble (1)
Radioactive element
Air velocity
24 VAC @ 35 mA standby,
74 mA alarm
24 VDC @ 15 mA standby,
56 mA alarm
115 VAC @ 25 mA standby,
32 mA alarm
230 VAC @ 12 mA standby,
16 mA alarm
SPDT, 10A, 115 VAC, resistive
SPDT, 10A, 115 VAC, resistive
For SM-501-N only
Americium 241, 0.9 µCi
500-4000 fpm (2.5-20.3 mps)
Approvals
UL
CSFM
MEA
Ambient temp
SM-501-N
SM-501-P
Humidity
Material
Finish
Weight
Mounting
Dimensions
268A; UROX.S2829
3240-1004:108
73-92-EX, Vol. 20
32° to 155°F (0° to 68°C)
32° to 100°F (0° to 38°C)
10% to 85% RH noncondensing
18-gauge steel back box,
clear plastic cover
Gray paint with clear cover
4.0 lb (1.8 kg)
7" (17.8 cm) exhaust tube, sampling
tube end cap, template and mounting hardware supplied
9.13"H x 7.25"W x 2.25"D
(23.19 x 18.42 x 5.72 cm)
391
MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS
OPERATION
MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS
DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS
SM-501 SERIES
MOUNTING
FIGURE 1. TYPICAL DUCT INSTALLATION
Mount the detector in an air duct using the provided template and
four sheet metal screws. Detector must be mounted at least six
duct widths from the fan or other sources of turbulence with airflow from 500-4000 fpm (2.5-20.3 mps). The intake sampling
tube has holes drilled the entire length of the tube and should
extend the entire width of the duct. The holes must be facing
into the air flow (see Figure 1 to the right). The exhaust tube is a
piece of steel piping approximately 7"Long (17.8 cm).
Stopper
Air Flow
Entire Width
of Duct
MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS
Intake Sampling Tube Lengths
Model
Duct Width
STS-2.5
1.0' to 2.5' (0.3 to 0.7m)
STS-5.0
2.5' to 5.0' (0.7 to 1.5m)
STS-10.0
5.0' to 10.0' (1.5 to 3m)
Installation
1. Cut the intake sampling tube to the desired length.
2. Firmly insert the stopper (provided with the detector)
in the end of the intake sampling tube.
3. Follow instruction sheet provided with each detector.
Exhaust
Tube
(provided)
Intake
Tube
(order
separately)
Top of Detector
Note: Sampling tubes over 3' (0.9m) must be supported on the opposite side
of the duct from the detector.
WIRING
INTERCONNECTING WIRING
Alarm
Contacts
10A
Power
Connections
(see below)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Alarm
Contacts
10A
10
11
See
"Remote
Accessories"
(next page)
Trouble
Contacts*
10A
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Unit #1
Unit #2
Unit #3
Unit #1
Unit #2
Unit #3
16
16
16
20
20
20
17
17
17
21
21
21
18
21
18
N.O.
Reset
Switch
18
All Relays Operating
with Single Alarm
(30 detectors max)
CAUTION: For terminals 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, and 12, do not use looped
wire under terminals. Break wire run to provide supervision of
connections.
24 VAC 50/60 Hz
0.2A max
24 VDC
0.1A max
_
+
115 VAC 50/60 Hz
0.1A max
G
N
H
*Trouble contacts are shown
in non-energized condition.
Under normal operation
contacts will be reversed.
230 VAC 50/60 Hz
0.1A max
G
H1
H2
Unit #1
Unit #2
Unit #3
Unit #1
Unit #2
Unit #3
16
16
16
16
16
16
17
17
+Red
18
19
6
5
6
1
2
Power Connections
3
1
2
4
17
18
-Black
+Red
17
+Red
H
5
Common Test/Reset
(30 detectors max)
18
H
19
-Black
18
H
19
17
+Red
-Black
All Relays Operating
with Single Alarm;
All Horns/Strobes Operating
with Single Alarm
(15 detectors max)
18
H
19
17
-Black
+Red
+Red
18
H
19
-Black
H
19
-Black
All Relays Operating
with Single Alarm;
Individual Horns/Strobes
Operating on Alarmed Detector Only
(30 detectors max)
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
SM-501-N
SM-501-P
STS-2.5
STS-5.0
STS-10.0
WP-1
55000-250APO
55000-350APO
392
DESCRIPTION
Ionization duct smoke detector for 24 VAC, 24 VDC, 115 VAC, 230 VAC
Photoelectric duct smoke detector for 24 VAC, 24 VDC, 115 VAC, 230 VAC
Sampling tube for 1.0' to 2.5' (0.3 to 0.7m) duct widths
Sampling tube for 2.5' to 5.0' (0.7 to 1.5m) duct widths
Sampling tube for 5.0' to 10.0' (1.5 to 3m) duct widths
NEMA type 3R enclosure 12.0" x 12.0" x 4.0" (30.48 x 30.48 x 10.16 cm)
Replacement ionization smoke detector head only
Replacement photoelectric smoke detector head only
MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS
REMOTE ACCESSORIES FOR SM-501
MS SERIES
DESCRIPTION
PILOT
PILOT
MS-RA
All devices have a brushed stainless steel face plate. All
devices are also designed to be mounted on a single- or
double-gang back box.
FEATURES
TEST/RESET
MS-RA/P
MS-RA/R
TEST/RESET
MS-RA/P/R
ALARM
PILOT
PILOT
ALARM
ALARM
TEST/RESET
• Remote indication for SM-501 smoke
detectors
• Available with alarm and pilot LEDs and alarm
horn
• Available with push button or key-operated
test/reset switch
• Mounts to standard single- or double-gang box
ALARM
ALARM
ALARM
ALARM
MS-KA/R
TEST/RESET
MS-KA/P/R
MS-RH
MS-RH/P/A
ALARM
PILOT
TEST/RESET
MS-RH/KA/P/R
CSFM Listed
SPECIFICATIONS
WIRING
15 mA @ 24 VDC
15 mA @ 24 VDC
20 mA @ 24 VDC
(black)
(red)
78 db @ 10' (3.0m)
6" (15.2cm)/24 AWG pigtails
6" (15.2cm)/22 AWG pigtails
Horn
(red)
Power requirements
Alarm LED
Pilot LED
Horn
Sound pressure
Horn
Wiring
LEDs/Horn
Switches
Dimensions
Single-gang
Double-gang
Reset switch
Weight
Approvals
UL
CSFM
MEA
2.75"W x 4.5"H (6.9 x 11.4 cm)
4.5"W x 4.5"H (11.4 x 11.4 cm)
N.O.
0.6 lb (0.3 kg) max
(black)
SM-501 Terminal #19
Red
Alarm LED
SM-501 Terminal #17
SM-501 Terminal #19
(black)
(red)
SM-501 Terminal #21
Green
Pilot LED
Test/Reset
Switch
SM-501 Terminal #20
URRQ.S7425
7300-1004:107
73-92-E, Vol. 25
Remote Accessory Wiring
for SM-501 Duct Smoke Detector
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
MS-RA
MS-RA/P
MS-RA/R
MS-RA/P/R
MS-KA/R
MS-KA/P/R
MS-RH
MS-RH/KA/P/R
MS-RH/P/A
DESCRIPTION
Remote red alarm LED
Remote red alarm LED and green pilot LED
Remote red alarm LED and push button test/reset switch
Remote red alarm LED, green pilot LED, and push button test/reset switch
Remote red alarm LED and key-operated test/reset switch
Remote red alarm LED, green pilot LED, and key-operated test/reset switch
Remote alarm horn
Remote alarm horn, red alarm LED, green pilot LED, and key-operated
test/reset switch
Remote alarm horn, red alarm LED, and green pilot LED
393
MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS
The MS Series remote accessories are used with the
SM-501 Series duct smoke detectors to provide audible
and visual indication as well as remote test/reset functions.
MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS
DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS
DH100 SERIES REMOTE ACCESSORIES
DESCRIPTION
ALARM
ALARM
System Sensor provides flexibility with a variety of accessories, including three remote test stations, and several
different means of visible and audible system annunciation. All System Sensor accessories are UL listed.
POWER
RESET
APA451
Piezo Annunciator
(UL S4011)
SPECIFICATIONS
MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS
Accessory Current Loads @ 24 VDC
Model
APA451
PA400R
PA400R w/ PS24LO
RA400Z
RTS451/RTS451KEY
SSK451
Standby
12.5 mA max
0 mA
0 mA
0 mA
12 mA max
5 mA
Trouble
9 mA
Alarm
30 mA max
15 mA max
40 mA max
10 mA max
7.5 mA max
30 mA max
S
M
O
K
E
ON
TEST
RTS451KEY
Remote Testing Station
with Key
(UL S2522)
ALARM
RA400Z
Remote Annunciator
(UL S2522)
RESET
PA400R and PS24LO
Add-On Strobe
(PS12/24SLENSW
smoke lens option
available)
(UL S3593)
RTS451
Remote Testing Station
(UL S2522)
When a unit is powered at the 120 VAC or 220/240 VAC input, any combination
of accessories may be used such that the given accessory loads are as follows:
60 mA or less in the standby state
110 mA or less in the alarm state
SSK451
Multi-Signaling Accessory
(double-gang box)
(UL Listed)
WIRING
RTS451/RTS451KEY
(Red LED) Alarm
DH100ACDC
Alarm Signal 15
1
Aux. Power + 19
6
(Green LED) Power
(RTS451KEY only)
14
2
Sup. N. O.
14
Sup. COM
3
3
Sup. COM
3
Reset
2
Test 11
Interconnect + 12
Interconnect – 1
4
5
2 Alarm
Aux. Power + 19
Sup. N. O.
Aux. Power – 20
APA451
DH100ACDC
Alarm Signal 15
DH100ACDC
Alarm Signal + 15
Aux. Power – 20
RED
3 Power
RA400Z
Remote (LED)
Annuciator
1 Common
Aux. Power – 20
DH100ACDC to APA451
DH100ACDC to RA400Z
Field-installed jumper
for temporal pattern
DH100ACDC
Alarm Signal
Supervisory
Contact. N. O.
DH100ACDC 12
1
To Additional DH100ACDC
Detectors (10 max)
DH100ACDC to RTS451/RTS451KEY and
Interconnect Feature
Interconnect Notes:
1. All interconnected units must be powered with the same
independent power supply.
2. Polarity must be maintained throughout the interconnect wiring.
3. When using a remote reset accessory with interconnected
detectors, each detector must have its own reset accessory.
SSK451
15
3
1
14
Reset
Test
Aux. Power –
Aux. Power +
3
2
2
11
20
19
4
7
8
6
5
Common
Temporal Select
Alarm Signal
Supervisory Signal
Reset
Test
Power (-)
Power (+)
DH100ACDC
Alarm Signal + 15
Aux. Power – 20
PA400R
Audible Alert
Field installed jumper
DH100ACDC to SSK451
DH100ACDC to PA400R
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
RA400Z
APA451
RTS451
RTS451KEY
SSK451
PA400R
PS24LO
PS12/24SLENSW
394
DESCRIPTION
Remote annunciator, red alarm LED
Piezo annunciator with green power and red alarm LEDs
Magnetic remote test station, red alarm LED
Key-activated remote test/reset station with bi-color (green/red) power/alarm LED
Key-activated remote test/reset station with sounder and power, trouble, and alarm LEDs
Mini-alert sounder, red
Mini-alert add-on strobe, red
“Smoke” lens for mini-alert add-on strobe (wall mount)
MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS
INNOVAIR™ DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS
DH100 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
As required by many building codes for commercial, industrial,
and institutional air handling systems, the Innovair DH100
Series Duct Smoke Detectors sample the air moving through
a building's HVAC duct work, shutdown fans, blowers, and
dampers to prevent the spread of dangerous smoke throughout the protected area.
OPERATION
Air in the duct work is sampled by the use of either the plastic
sampling tube, provided with each unit for use in small duct
applications from 12" to 18"W (30.5 to 45.7 cm), or a metal
sampling tube, which is ordered separately.
The DH100 Series provides a built-in interconnect, which
allows up to 10 four-wire units to be daisy-chained together to
control multiple fans, blowers, and dampers. In the event
smoke is detected, the DH100 Series will signal to the other
interconnected detectors to initiate their alarm relays. Its
patented cover-missing signal provides 7 minutes for testing
and maintenance before sending a trouble signal, if the cover
is still missing.
The DH100 Series is compatible with a full line of UL listed
accessories, including remote test stations and audible and
visible annunciators. All are covered by a three-year limited
warranty.
DH100
ST-1.5
FM
FEATURES
• Built-in interconnect to
allow up to 10 four-wire
units to be easily networked for multiple fan
shutdown on alarm
• Patented plastic
sampling tube provided
for 12" to 18" (30.5 to
45.7 cm) duct width
applications
• Patented cover-missing
trouble signal to ensure
system integrity
• Three-year limited
warranty
• Continuous electronic
monitoring to ensure
sensor board is present,
receiving power, and
operating above its minimum sensitivity setting
• High/Low voltage barrier
for meeting NEC requirements
• Convenient reset button
on front cover
• For mounting on round
or rectangular ducts from
1' to 12' (0.3 to 3.6m)
without adapter bracket
• Compatible with System
Sensor's full line of UL
listed accessories
SPECIFICATIONS
Power requirements
Voltage
Current
(using no accessories) 220/240 VAC @15 mA RMS*
max standby
50/60 Hz
25 mA RMS*
max alarm
120 VAC
@25 mA RMS*
max standby
50/60 Hz
35 mA RMS*
max alarm
24 VAC
@35 mA RMS
max standby
50/60 Hz
125 mA RMS
max alarm
24 VDC
@15 mA
max standby
70 mA max alarm
Relay contact rating
Alarm initiation
contacts
SPST
2.0A @ 30 VAC/DC
(resistive)
Alarm auxiliary
contacts
DPDT
10A @ 30 VDC
10A @ 250 VAC
Note: Alarm auxiliary contacts must switch 100 mA minimum
@ 5 VDC.
Trouble contacts
Air velocity
Ionization
Photoelectric
Operating temp
Ionization
Photoelectric
Operating humidity
Housing cover
Mounting
Weight
Dimensions
Approvals
Radioactive elements
SPDT
2.0A @ 30 VDC
(resistive)
500-4000 fpm (2.5-20 m/s)
100-4000 fpm (0.5-20 m/s)
32° to 120°F (0° to 49°C)
32° to 131°F (0° to 55°C)
10% to 93% RH
NEMA1, LWP Model NEMA4
Template and hardware provided
3.75 lb (1.7 kg)
14.38"L x 5.5"W x 2.75"D
(37 x 14 x 7 cm)
UL 268A, CSFM, MEA, FM, MSFM,
City of LA
For DH100ACDCI; Americium 241,
0.5 microcuries
* When unit is powered at the 120 VAC or 220/240 VAC input,
any combination of accessories may be used such that the
given accessory loads are 60 mA or less in the standby state
and 110 mA or less in the alarm state.
395
MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS
The DH100 Series features the DH100ACDCLP photoelectric
and DH100ACDCI ionization models. These four-wire duct
smoke detectors can be powered at a voltage of 24 VAC, 24
VDC, 120 VAC, or 240 VAC and are compatible with a wide
range of air system velocities. These models feature two Form
C contacts (DPDT) for fan/damper control and one Form C
supervisory trouble contact (SPDT). A reset button and highly
visible power and alarm LEDs are conveniently located on the
front cover.
MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS
INNOVAIR™ DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS
DH100 SERIES
MOUNTING
Use the mounting template and screws provided with the unit to
mount the DH100 Series to the outside of the ductwork. Per NFPA
guidelines, the DH100 Series should be mounted at least six duct
widths from bends, obstructions, return air inlets, fans, or dampers
located in the ductwork.
End Cap
MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS
With the DH100 Series’ bidirectional sampling tube ports, the sampling tube should be installed in the port that first meets the air flow.
The air sampling holes in the sampling tube must point into the
direction of airflow as shown. Follow all instructions provided with
the smoke detector.
Air Flow
Sampling
Tube
(order
separately)
Exhaust
Tube
(provided)
For small duct applications from 12" to 18" (30.5 to 45.7 cm), the
plastic sampling tube provided with each unit can be used. Simply
slide in the telescoping tube and set to the appropriate length with a
screw. For duct widths greater than 18" (45.7 cm), please refer to
Ordering Information below to order the correct metal sampling
tube.
Detector
WIRING
9
10
24V
AC/DC
A
B
C
120
VAC
220/240
VAC
Power Input
16
N.C.
6
17
C. N.O.
7
18
8
N.O. C.
14
N.C.
Alarm Auxiliary Contacts
for Fan Shutdown, etc.
3
N.O. C.
13
5
4
1
N.C.
Supervisory
Trouble Contacts
Alarm Initiation
Contacts
Trouble contacts transfer as
Alarm auxiliary contacts shown in
Contacts shown open
indicated by the arrow in alarm
standby. Contacts transfer during
in standby. Contacts
and standby. Contacts are as
alarm as indicated by the arrows.
close in alarm.
shown while detector head or power
2
11 15 19 20
is removed or when tamper feature
times out. Open contacts signal
Remote Accessory Terminals
trouble condition to panel.
See Remote Accessories page for wiring details
Interconnect
Terminals
Connect up to 10
DH100 detectors
Do not loop wire under terminals. Break wire runs to provide system supervision of connections.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
DH100ACDCLP
DH100ACDCI
DH100ACDCLWP
ST-1.5
ST-3
ST-5
ST-10
A5069
A5052
A5064
F36-09-11
396
12
DESCRIPTION
Four-wire photoelectric duct smoke detector
Four-wire ionization duct smoke detector
Four-wire photoelectric detector, NEMA4
Sampling tube for duct widths from 1' to 2' (0.3 to 0.6m)
Sampling tube for duct widths from 2' to 4' (0.6 to 1.2m)
Sampling tube for duct widths from 4' to 8' (1.2 to 2.5m)
Sampling tube for duct widths from 8' to 12' (2.5 to 3.7m)
Replacement photoelectric sensor board for DH100ACDCLP
Replacement ionization sensor board for DH100ACDCI
Replacement four-wire power board for DH100ACDCLP or DH100ACDCI
Replacement air filters
MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS
DUCT HIGH-TEMPERATURE LIMIT
MODELS TC-105, TC-100
DESCRIPTION
Models TC-105 and TC-100 feature a helix bimetal element that senses rapid increases in duct temperature,
such as in a fire, and operate an SPST switch that
opens on a rise in temperature. A manual reset button
will reactivate the models after the high-temperature
condition has cleared.
SPECIFICATIONS
Contacts
Electrical capacity
WIRING
TC-105-1A-3C
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
Low-cost duct, high-temperature limit control
Adjustable setpoint
Manual reset
UL listed
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
0.23 (0.58)
Mounting
Hole
25
0
Factory Set
@ 125°F
1.9 (4.83)
0.95 (2.42)
4.0
(10.16)
200
150
0.75 (1.91)
Duct Cut-Out
Hole
10
0
3.16
(8.03)
2.19
(5.56)
0.42
(1.07)
N.C. Contact
Screw Terminals
(opens on
temp rise)
0.5 (1.27)
0.5 (1.27)
Knockout
Knockout
2.75 (6.99)
Bottom View
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
DESCRIPTION
TC-100-1A-3C Duct high-temperature limit with 11" (27.9 cm) element and adjustable setpoint
TC-105-1A-3C Duct high-temperature limit with 5" (12.7 cm) element and sdjustable setpoint
397
MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS
SPST N.C. mechanical latching
9.8 full load amps @ 115 VAC
4.9 full load amps @ 230 VAC
Element length
5" (12.7 cm) or 11" (27.9 cm)
Manual reset button External access
Setpoint range
100° to 250°F (38° to 122°C)
field adjustable, factory set @
125°F (51.6°C)
Differential
25°F (13.8°C) fixed
Approvals
UL listed, File #MH7076
Weight
TC100
1 lb (0.48 kg)
TC105
0.75 lb (0.36 kg)
MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS
LOW-TEMPERATURE LIMIT CONTROL
A11 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The A11 Series Low-Temperature Limit Controls
incorporate a 20' (6m) vapor-charged sensing element.
The A11 Series reacts to the coldest 18" (47.5 cm) section of the control's sensing element. It is suitable for
monitoring the trailing face of a coil for freeze protection.
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
Snap-acting contacts
External temperature scale
Easy setpoint adjustment
Safe freeze adjustment (35°F/19.4°C minimum)
MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS
APPLICATION
• Low-temperature limit for coils and/or liquid
sensing pipes
A11A
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensing element
Capillary
Switch
Action
Switch rating
Pilot duty
Range
Setpoint adjust
20' (6 m) of 1/8 copper tube
4' (1.2 m)
SPST, N.C.
N.C. opens on decrease in temp
16A @ 120 VAC, 9.2A @ 208 VAC,
8A @ 240 VAC,
125 VA @ 24-277 VAC
35° to 45°F (2° to 7°C)
Slot screwdriver
WIRING
Differential
A11A
A11B
Sensor
Max temp
Element
Ambient
Dimensions
Weight
Manual reset
8°F fixed
R-134 vapor filled
250°F (121°C)
0° to 140°F (-18° to 60°C)
3"H x 5.4"W x 2.4"D (7.6 x 13.7 x 6 cm)
1.75 lb (0.79 kg)
INSTALLATION
Top of Duct
2
SPST - Normally closed
opens on decrease
in temperature
A11
Series
1
A11 Series
Mount sensor horizontally for proper measurement.
Typically mounted down stream of a coil with capillary
exposed to all areas likely to encounter low temperatures
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
A11A-1
A11B-1
DESCRIPTION
Manual reset low-temperature limit control
Auto reset low-temperature limit control
M-648
ES-1051
398
RELATED PRODUCTS
Capillary mounting clip
Freeze spray
MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS
LOW-LIMIT TEMPERATURE CONTROL
MODELS TSA, TF142
DESCRIPTION
Models TSA and TF142 provide low-limit temperature
control in operating dampers, valves, compressors, or
fan motors in HVAC systems. Manual and automatic
reset models are available with SPDT or DPDT switching action.
FEATURES
• SPDT and DPDT models
• Manual and automatic reset
models
• Easy setpoint adjustment
• 20' (6.10m) capillary
element
• Manual test lever
Models TSA and TF142 respond to the lowest temperature sensed along any 1' (0.3m) section of a 20' (6m)
capillary element. The setpoint is visible through the
front cover and is easily adjustable. There is a test lever
for manual operation during checkout. Manual reset
models cannot be reset until the sensed temperature is
approximately 5°F (3°C) above setpoint. Automatic reset
models automatically reset when the sensed temperature rises approximately 5°F (3°C) above set point.
TSA
MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS
OPERATION
TF142
SPECIFICATIONS
MODEL
Reset action
Setpoint range
Differential
Switch action
Electrical ratings
Inductive
Pilot duty
Sensing element
Temp limits
Operating
Sensing element
Approvals
Accessories
Weight
TSA-DOP
TSA-COP
Manual
Automatic
35° to 68°F (2° to 20°C)
4.5°F (2.5°C) fixed
SPDT, snap acting
TF142-SODP20
TF142-SOAP20
Manual
Automatic
34° to 70°F (1° to 21°C)
4.5°F (2.5°C) fixed
DPDT, snap acting
24 FLA, 144 LRA @ 120-240 VAC
2 hp @ 120 VAC; 3 hp @ 240 VAC
720 VA max @ 120-600 VAC
144 VA max @ 24 VAC
Vapor-filled copper capillary, tin-plated
5/64'' (0.2 cm) x 20' (609.6 cm)
14 FLA, 84 LRA @ 120 VAC; 12 FLA, 72 LRA @ 240 VAC
3/4 hp @ 120 VAC; 2 hp @ 240 VAC
720 VA max @ 120-600 VAC
144 VA max @ 24 VAC
Vapor-filled copper capillary, tin-plated
3/32'' (0.24 cm) x 20' (609.6 cm)
-60° to 160°F (-51° to 71°C)
300°F (149°C) max
UL and ULC listed, CE
M-648 capillary mounting clip
(order separately)
1 lb (0.45 kg)
-60° to 160°F (-51° to 71°C)
300°F (149°C) max
UL and ULC listed, CE
M-648 capillary mounting clip
(5 mounting clips supplied with each control)
2.8 lb (1.3 kg)
399
MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS
LOW-LIMIT TEMPERATURE CONTROL
MODELS TSA, TF142
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
External Set Point
Adjustment
1.56
(3.56)
2.63
(6.67)
Reset Button
(DOP models only)
3.34
(8.48)
Internal Set Point
Adjustment
2.94
(7.47)
20'L (6.10m)
0.08 (0.20) dia
3.63
(9.21)
20'L (6.10m) x 0.09
(0.24) dia
0.50 (1.27)
Conduit Opening
MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS
Reset Button
(SODP models only)
5.50
(13.97)
0.50 (1.27)
Conduit Opening
TSA
TF142
INSTALLATION / WIRING
1. Controller can be mounted in any position. Avoid locations subject
to excessive vibration.
2. On manual r